Serpe if oe fs t titenss att ANNUAL REPORT OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, SHOWING THE OPERATIONS, EXPENDITURES, AND CONDITION OF THE INSTITUTION THEH YHAR 1884. WASHINGTON: GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFIOR. 1885. [FORTY-EIGHTH CONGRESS, SECOND SESSION.] IN THE SENATE OF THE UNITED STATES, January 27, 1885. Resolved by the Senate (the House of Representatives concurring), That the annual re- port of the Smithsonian Institution and National Museum for the year 1884 be printed, and that there be printed 16,060 extra copies; of which 3,000 copies shall be for the use of the Senate, 6,060 for the House of Representatives, and 7,000 for the Smith- sonian Institution. Agreed to by the House of Representatives, February 4, 1885. Il LETTER FROM THE SECRETARY OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, ACCOMPANYING The annual report of the Board of Regents of that Institution for the year 1884. @ JANUARY 27, 1885.—Ordered to be printed. SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, Washington, D. C., January 25, 1885. Str: In accordance with section 5593 of the Revised Statutes of the United States, I have the honor in behalf of the Board of Regents to submit to Congress the annual report of the operations, expenditpres, and condition of the Smithsonian Institution for the year 1884. I have the honor to be, very respectfully, your obedient servant, SPENCER F. BAIRD, Secretary Smithsonian Institution. Hon. G. F. EDMUNDS, President of the Senate. Hon. JOHN G. CARLISLE, Speaker of the House of Representatives. ANNUAL REPORT OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION FOR THE YEAR 1884. SUBJECTS. 1. Proceedings of the Board of Regents for the session of January, 1885. ; 2. Report of the Executive Committee, exhibiting the financial affairs of the Institution, including a statement of the Smithson fund, and re- ceipts and expenditures for the year 1884, and the estimates for 1885. ' 3. Annual report of the Secretary, giving an account of the operations and condition of the Institution for the year 1884, with the statistics of collections, exchanges, &e. 2 4. General appendix, comprising a record of recent progress in the principal departments of science, and special memoirs, original and selected, of interest to collaborators and correspondents of the Insti- tution; teachers, and others engaged in the promotion of knowledge. The report of the Assistant Director and Curators of the National Museum for the year 1884 will be published in a separate volume. Iv CONTENTS. Resolution of Congress to print extra copies of the Report.-........-..----- Letter from the Secretary, submitting the Annual Report of the Regents to Conpressi aie sss ood oy See ee cigs Same pen, J ne. Oe SS A 2 Generallsubyects off the Annual Report: ses.--a-4 ace sae oe lee ee oo toc Contentsiof the, Reports: sesso. cc cae ote Geeta ae ee ore em Sees MS tt Of, A MURtRAbIONS§ 2/42 ape ete. or. oimine (aie yee ee eo eee et eae ere ree Regents of the Sab betes Institution - Aa aS See ste JOURNAL OF PROCEEDINGS OF THE BoaRD OF REGENTS ~ ees oie ae ae REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE for the year 1884..................- Condiuionio£& the-funds! January. Pleas a= 2= oe oe ele oe ete ee eee Rechipts torpbheyyOaPiee so secre e at conee cise Se eee peta fe See erm BEM GNTes TO LNG Yoana oetae samen. Kilcicisb, wee aie oe cee misar sete Mamsbos lor thesyenr, | S64 ee. eae EES Ses ce chic Jae ee ery National Museum appropriations by Congress ...-......---.------------ AP PTOPTIAbONS 100 OX CHRN LOR aa aaicocai Se - ar teeae oem eae es ec seas APpPrOpLriguiOns tor, PGONOLO GY: == sn. jee oi ee aoe wis ae oi aw syolserninietnice 5 REPORT OF THE ARCHITECTS ON RECONSTRUCTION OF EASTERN PORTION OF SMUPHSONTAN JB UMED ING sennttaclas eee reer ene seit atadhae oapemase si Plans and views of grounds and building ........-....--.-..--.-------- Memibersier.oficio of the Establishment. ---2 =~ 4-2-2. ss 2-- on teen es ee Regents and: officers of the Tustitution: :.252.....2--. <.-. eset ie wes Stes Soe REPORT OF THE SECRETARY. PAO MITHSONTAN PUN SLUTURION= S65. 525 set use totes feces Mens ck eewld aa bace MaTtbROdUCHORY oe ec ee ee Se ee ere ee eer at So Ore secs eeeeeee oe Eh Hedey Ghaties:--5-<' Meee Information relative told ames Smithson. 2... 2s .s-sesen oeews esse cee Rhesboardrorohepents... 22. eee lose u et oer He oes ee ee eos IRUITIATIC OS peretetmtat ace See aera re we, Sate Nee ae ee eae eet at eee ae Sead ares as ora Condition of the fund January, 1885... 7222 2s ee IDUIMGIN A Steerisa ee Med ee Sore Soo ctn Sena mace ree ama a exe care ets Bee PMU HSOUAN UN GING) =o io. 8e ste eee eee er aac ee ones soe se Nationale Muaseum. DOU Gin e255 seme mee te ne ioe ah iatee weveeinseis Brick] WOrkshop os: saa2 sce 2 ces cos Cuesta nas nee ee ocs ace ce ccarese ATIMNOLVY ADULGIN Goes aie aS 2 sac tee Mae ene toes Ga asthe wae SAAS Necessity for an additional Museum building. .......--.....-...---- Mesiings Of BCIOntihG: DOWICH sc. qer Ses eae ees BE ein op So eee a OC HULGH Gert tec re sa ea tian ss ot a eee ae Ne eee seein Se eke ee eee Routine work of the fastitation. BEES Soo SS a ae SRO SEES Sone WOMESPONGENCEl: S552 0 s0) Ss sce see eto aa oe celts dee esa oes EX PlOCAlOUS ss ce sates cee = yas ese ee eee Pea eo Nacee Nota ptae = =e See Greenlandieeosmoumss: st co cesmeececeeinn scatocccue vce ee = ewe cave HAD OLeseiament eee a aaisk oo ae eaten at ries e printer cid ciec als welaeiasa cores ATCtIG CORSE. 2.52. .ces cnceoean Eto eee Goede sede vances chaanese wees Vv Page. xvi Xvi XvVil XVii Xviil xix Xxili XXXixX XXXIX wore omoaonrtrvt aw w - = = SS es -_ © Oo © 12 See ee “IO ke Ww Ww VI CONTENTS. Be REPORT OF THE SECRETARY.—THE SMITHSONIAN ENSTITUTION—Continued. i aie, Dh. North Pacific: 2-5. Stone blades with hooked:edpes)-22 <2. 22 4a- =a see ese eee 89-129. Stone blades with encircling grooves ...--- 3b Seceeeeeeeee 130-172. Stone hammers, grinders, and polishers....-...---.------ L715; Perforated: stones: sc. sasnaas oes e nee oe. ene eee 186-200. Ornamental forms of stone implements.........-.--.---- 201, 202. Carved wooden stool from Turk’s Island.........-....--- Fig. 203. Human figure carved in wood 206,207. Spoon and cup, carved from guava ..-...-.-..----..----- -7eculpture from Pantaleon tes. neacoeo coe oe seeker eee ee ee ee ee ee ee a ey ter me wee wee tt ewe te ee ee we Beek wee eee wees te eee 209-214. Specimens of pottery -. 2.05.2. ceccenwnces cowadetesdaene Fig. 215. Shell blades Page. XXV XXvii Xxix XXxi XXxiii XXXili XXXKV XXXV XXXVil XXXVii 720 » 721 722 723 725 726 726 727 727 728 729 - 730 740-744 745-747 748-762 763-776 777-781 782-797 816-819 819-827 828, 829 830 CONTENTS. Ix Ancient Mounds in Clinton County, Michigan : ee Map showing locality of mounds in northwest part of Clinton County -- 840 Ancient Forts in Ogemaw County, Michigan: Pl ancOr Oru NOs dicctec orn. sate osteo epee erga = Soar enema aan 849 PIgINOGlROTUING aly n= cs Sato ce thst eee tena Seer har ewe Seese tans 850 Remains from Flint Ridge, Licking County, Ohio: Map showing locality of remains at Flint Ridge.-.---...---.-.----------- 854 Map showing locality of remains at Flint Ridge.-.--...---.------------ 855 Figs. 1-4. Outline of flint arrow-head forms. ----..--------------------- 869 Figs. 5-10. Restoration of arrow-head forms ..-.-. .-. fae ee ene 869 Mounds in Miami County, Ohio: Map showing locality of earth-works ..-.--.-..--.----------------+----- 874 REGENTS OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. By the organizing act approved August 10, 1846, Revised Statutes, title LXXI1, section 5580, ‘‘The business of the Institution shall be con- ducted at the city of Washington by a Board of Regents, named the Regents of the Smithsonian Institution, to be composed of the Vice- President, the Chief Justice of the United States [and the Governor of the District of Columbia], three members of the Senate, and three mem- bers of the House of Representatives, together with six other persons, other than members of Congress, two of whom shall be resident in the city of Washington, and the other four shall be inhabitants of some State, but no two of the same State.” REGENTS FOR THE YEAR 1884. Term expires. The Vice-President of the United States: GrorGE F. EpmunDs (elected President of Senate March 3, 1883)....- Mar. 3,1885 The Chief Justice of the United States: MORRISON R. WAITE. ~ United States Senators: NATHANIED ., Eur (from) May 19 1S80)2ass=2- oseeeee eee eee Mar. 3, 1885 SAMUEL B. Masaya (froma yal 9018) ie see ae ee eran Mar. 3, 1887 JUSTIN S. MORRILL (appointed February 21,1883) ................ Mar. 3,1885 Members of the House of Representatives : OTHO R. SINGLETON (appointed January 7, 1884)..........-.-.-.-- Dec. 23, 1885 Wo. L. WILSON (appointed%anuary 7, 1884) ...........-..2.----- Dec. 23, 1885 WM. W. PHELPS (appointed January 7,,1884) 222.2) eee ee Dec. 23, 1885 Citizens of Washington: PETER PaRKER (first appointed in 1868) ..............-.. Resigned Apr., 7, 1884 WILLIAM T. SHERMAN (first appointed in 1871) ..........-.....--. Mar. 25, 1885 JANES’ C!WELLING 2s )n dos Seat re ee Soe ee ee May 13, 1890 Citizens of a State: JOHN MACLEAN, of New Jersey (first appointed in 1868).......-... Dec. 19, 1885 ASA GRAY, of Massachusetts (first appointed in 1874).............. Dec. 19, 1885 HENRY Coppke, of Pennsylvania (first appointed in 1874) ........- Dec. 19, 1885 Noah Porter, of Connecticut (appointed in 1878)............-.-- Mar. 3, 1890 Morrison R. Waite, Chancellor of the Institution and President of the Board of Regents. >¢ JOURNAL OF PROCEEDINGS OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. WASHINGTON, D. C., January 21, 1885. The annual meeting of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution was held this day at half-past 10 o’clock, a. m. Present: Hon. G. F. EpMuNDs, Hon. J. S. MORRILL, Hon. S. B. Maxey, Hon. O. R. SINGLETON, Hon. W. L. Wixtson, Hon. W. W. PHELPS, Rev. Dr. JOHN MACLEAN, Rev. Dr. NOAH PORTER, Dr. HENRY CoPpPEE, Dr. JAMES C. WELLING, and the Secretary, Professor BAIRD. Excuses for non-attendance were read from Chief-Justice Waite, Prof. Asa Gray, and Hon. N. P. Hill. In the absence of the Chancellor, on motion of Mr. Phelps, Dr. Por- TER was called to the chair. The journal of the Board was read and approved. The Secretary stated that the Rev. Dr. NoAH PORTER had been re-elected a Regent for six years by the joint resolution of Congress, approved March 3, 1884. The Secretary, presented to the Board the following letter : Prof. SPENCER F. BAIRD, Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution: DEAR Sie: The state of my health renders it necessary to tender my resignation as a member of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution. In signifying my resignation it is with no ordinary feelings I recall the years I have been connected with the Board and the distinguished men with whom it has been my privilege and honor to be associated. Not only the present members whom | so highly respect and esteem, but a long list of honored names of former members now deceased, re- cur to me, the last of which is that of Professor JoSEPH HENRY, and while JAMES SMITHSON will be known to the world and remembered as the founder of the Institution, JosEPH HENRY will be regarded as having been raised up by a signal Providence, the true interpreter of his will, the able organizer of the Institution, and wise controller of its finances. May the Smithsonian Institution, so auspiciously established and ex- tensively known, continue, under your wise administration, an esfab- lishment distinct and specific, for the ‘ increase and diffusion of knowl- edge among men.” With great respect, your friend and servant, PETER PARKER. 2 LAFAYETTE SQUARE, Washington, D. 0., April 7, 1884. XII JOURNAL OF THE BOARD. _ The Secretary informed the Board that Congress had filled the va- cancy occasioned by the resignation of Dr. Parker by the election of Dr. JAMES C. WELLING, president of Columbian University of Wash- ington, D. C., for six years from May 13, 1884. On motion of Dr. Maclean it was— Resolved, That the Board of Regents has heard with regret of the resignation of Dr. Peter Parker, and hereby expresses the high appre- ciation of the valuable and efficient services he has rendered the Insti- tution for the past seventeen years as a Regent and as Chairman of its Executive Committee. The Secretary stated that in accordance with the rules of the Board during its recess, the remaining members of the Executive Committee had filled the vacancy occasioned by the resignation of Dr. Parker, by the appointment of Dr. Welling. On motion of Dr. Coppée it was— Resolved, That Dr. Welling be elected to fill the vacancy in the Ex- ecutive Committee. The Secretary reported that in accordance with the request of the Board at its last meeting, Senator Edmunds had prepared a Dill rela- tive to the provision for an Acting Secretary, which had passed Con- gress and become a law on the 13th of May, 1884, as follows: An act to provide for the appointment of an Acting Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution. [Public No. 31, Forty-eighth Congress, first session. ] Be it enacted by the Senate and House of Representatives of the United States of America in Congress assembled, That the Chancellor of the Smithsonian Institution may, by an instruinent in writing filed in the office of the Secretary thereof, designate and appoint a suitable person to act as Secretary of the Institution when there shall be a vacancy in said office, and whenever the Secretary shall be unable from illness, absence, or other cause to perform the duties of his office; and in such case the person so appointed may perform aJl the duties imposed on the Secretary by law until the vacancy shall be filled or such inability shall cease. The said Chancellor may change such designation and appoint- ment from time to time as the Institution may in his judgment require. Approved, May 13, 1884. Under the provisions of this act the Chancellor had taken the fol- lowing action: LYME, CoNnN., July 2, 1884. By virtue of the authority conferred on me by the act of May 13, 1884, ‘“‘to provide for the appointment of an Actinig Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution,” I hereby designate and appoint Mr. WILLIAM J. RHEES to act as Secretary of the Institution when there shall be a vacancy in that office, and whenever the Secretary shall be unable from illness, absence, or other cause to perform the duties of his office. M. R. WAITE, Chancellor of the Smithsonian Institution. JOURNAL OF THE BOARD, XIII Dr. Maclean presented the annual report of the Executive Commit- tee, which was read. On motion of Dr. Coppée it was— Resolved, That the report of the Executive Committee be accepted, and that the income for the year 1885, be appropriated for the service of the Institution upon the basis of the above report; to be expended by the Secretary with full discretion as to the items, subject to the approval of the Executive Committee. The Secretary presented the following communication he had received since the last meeting of the Board: JUNE 2, 1884. SPENCER F. BAIRD, Secretary Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D. C.: Sir: I intend to make a bequest for the advancement of science— that is, of physical science. For many reasons I would like to make the bequest in favor of the Smithsonian Institution; but there is one difficulty which must be cleared up before I can decide. If money were left by will to the Smithsonian Institution would it defend the will against the claims of any and all persons who should contest the will and take legal steps to set it aside? Has it authority by law; has it funds that it would be authorized to use for the purpose of defending a will in its favor? As I have no children the will would be less likely to be contested, but there are others who might attempt to set it aside. For this reason what I wish above all to be assured of is that any legacy that I leave for the purpose named will not be given up without making a fight of it if needful. Please explain this point. I wish you to send me a form of words, the very words themselves, in which a bequest should be made so that there could be no pretense of setting it aside for vagueness ; and that will carry out my intentions, which I will explain: The chief part I would desire to bequeath to the Institution would be for the “ increase and diffusion of knowledge among men,” and beside would wish to have the Institution invest say $300 (is that too insig- nificant for the purpose?) and use the income thereof for conferring a gold medal either annually or biennially (which would be the better ?) on the person who had made the most important discovery in physical science during the year, or two years ending, say a year before the date of conferring the medal. For example, the Regents would have to decide, say in the month of December, 1883, who made the most im- portant discovery in physical science during the year, or two years, ending December 31, 1882. If you have my meaning put it in language that will make it perfectly clear without multiplying words. The medal not for any patented invention, like the electric light, for example, but especially and only for such discoveries as Pasteur on in- fection, fermentation, &c., and G. Darwin’s on tidal action. Regents to be sole judges as to what is meant by physical science and most im- portant discoveries therein. The reason why I would like to have not only suggestions and ex- planations but the full “TI will and bequest to” its also because I don’t know whether to say the Regents shall do this or that, or whether to say a majority or quorum of them shall do it in order to make it both strictly legal and also practicable; also, whether or not it is necessary to say ‘how the Regents shall invest the money. I suppose a copy of that part XIV JOURNAL OF THE BOARD. of Hamilton’s or Huebus’ (Habel ?) will would answer for the part re- lating to the “increase and diffusion,” &c. As for the medal I believe no fund has been left to institutions for that purpose, and I should like to have your opinion on it. Please return this letter with your answer, which I would like you to let me have as soon as you can; taking, however, all the time you need to make it so full and explicit that no further correspondence will be necessary at this stage. I mean business if your answer is satisfactory. For the present I desire this affair to be treated as confidential, or if necessary to mention to other parties, withhold the name. There is one thing I had rather do than make a bequest in favor of the Institution, namely, pay over a certain sum, say $2,000 or $2,500, in trust to the Regents; provided I could receive the income during life, the Institution to have the sole use and possession of the same after my death. Would the Institution be authorized to accept a sum of money on such terms ? Respectfully, * * * * After full discussion of the subject it was, on motion of Mr. Edmunds— Resolved, That the communication be referred to the Executive Com- mittee with full power to act in relation to it. The Secretary, Professor Baird, presented his annual report of the operations of the institution for the year 1884, which was read in part. On motion of Dr. Maclean, the Secretary was instructed to transmit the report to Congress. On motion of Mr. Edmunds, it was— Resolved (1), That the fiscal year of the Institution shall hereafter ter- minate on the 30th day of June in each year. (2) That the Secretary shall hereafter prepare and cause to be printed and sent to each member of the Board on or before the first day of De- cember in each year, his annual report. (3) That the annual meeting of the Board of Regents shall hereafter be held on the second Wednesday in January in each year. : The Board then adjourned sine die. REPORT OF THE EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION FOR THE YEAR 1884. The Executive Committee of the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution respectfully submit the following report in relation to the funds of the Institution, the appropriations by Congress for the National Museum and other purposes, the receipts and expenditures for the In- stitution and the Museum, for 1884, and the estimates for the year 1885. Condition of the fund January 3, 1885. The amount of the bequest of James Smithson deposited in the Treasury of the United States (act of Congress PACS MC OTNSAG) Ph ete fc een. hte Wyte USS SOULS - $515, 169 00 Residuary feoaee of Smithson, acd to the fund, deposited in the Treasury of the Uisied States (act of Congress PE RLU ALO SLO) see ian on eek. e yt ee area sea toe Nee 26,210 63 Addition to the fund from savings, &e. (act OE Congress ET CMEBARY LO: LOU) ce mee Ack Ske ee a oe ee eos SGC 108, 620 37 Addition to the fund by bequest of James Hamilton, of PP OUNSYAV ANIA (1904) co sisie a ce aoe. he Rawk oaks Ca ee 1,000 00 Addition to the fund by bequest of Simeon Habel, of New Work (1550))3; - 6.2 caren et, er Nt RAI rons Cas nee 3 eM 500 00 Addition to the fund by proceeds of sale of eens bonds ee i ee Wee rene ep rent tor sini rats cys Sad ee ale Soe ws 51,500 00 Total permanent Smithson fund in the Treasury of the United States, name interest at 6 per cent. DCT MATERIA s esta eS arate te alot ess Bae Te le $703,000 00 Statement of the receipts and expenditures of the Smithsonian Institution For the year 1884. RECEIPTS. Interest on the Smithson fund... -......... . $42,180 00 Repayment of expenses of freight, &¢., on Henry statue, by act of Congress.......... 900 00 Balance cash on hand January 1, 1884....... 25,914 20 SUT US LMS 0ST a ae es, a $68, 994 20 XVI REPORT OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. EXPENDITURES. Building: Repairs and improvements .....-....-..----. $2,205 74 Furniture and fixtures... ....----- .----.2--- 2,423 90 ——_——— $4,629 64 General expenses ; Meetings of the Board..........- , ia eee 469 75 Postage and telegraph.......-.-... --- ee - 3837 44 UALIONEM Ys. sees cae 1 = ae eee beta 522 82 General printing, ileaiee 5G: 8 ee te eee 922 58 Incidentals, horse, carriage, gas, &c.-....--. 1, 250 00 Books, periodicals, and binding . ee ESE 2,528 25 Salaries, Secretary, clerks, ecsistents: oad haDOP 222 23 SOE ee OSes aion la eee 16,591 19 —— 22,622 03 Publications and researches: Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge.... 3, 100 93 Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections. --.-.- 4,939 59 Smithsonian Annual Report .............-.. 2, 834 53 Bxplorations’: je. 624-20 pes) k oa eee Meer Foo) al Li MoD PATAbUS > fasel Sha og Oe ne eee 94 77 Literary and scientific exchanges in oddinen : to appropriation by Congress ..........-.- 2,510 71 —— 16,361 69 Total, expenditures: .o*. 22 hs.0: 22s ee eee 43,613 36 Balance, January, 1880-0) sos: 222 ese eee ee — $25, 380 84 ESTIMATES FOR 1885. The following are the estimates of receipts by the Institution for the year 1885, and of the appropriations required for carrying on its opera- tions during the same period: . Receipts. Interest on the permanent fund receivable July 1, 1885, and January 1, 18862. 22.00 Says seers eee eee eee $42,180 00 Expenditures. Hor: building ‘and: tepairs.. 2.225.224. eee $1, 500 00 For general expenses, including salaries... .--. oa oem 23, 000 00 For Publications and researches..........----...---.--- 12,000 00 Bor Exchanges. 2.25 255 t oe Se eee eee : 3, 000 00 For Contingencies ............. Be Soe ane wee SS 2,680 00 Dotal scm ch eee bee cis pss od 3 sc eee eee eter $42,180 00 REPORT OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. XVII NATIONAL MUSEUM, AND OTHER OBJECTS COMMITTED BY CONGRESS TO THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. The following appropriations were made at the first session of the Forty-eighth Congress for the National Museum, and other objects com- mitted to the care of the Smithsonian Institution: For the preservation and exhibition and in- crease of the collections received from the surveying and exploring expeditions of the Government, and other sources, including salaries or compensation of all necessary BINT OS ye etre Sd Ge ca eas oe ante cms $91,000 00 For transfer and arrangement of the collec- tions of the American Institute of Mining Engineers, presented to the Government, including expenses already incurred....... 10, 000 00 For expense of heating, lighting, and telepho- nic and electrical service for the new Museum RRMAM RIN Ooo es eh wae A cree Sketae a aes Sec 6,000 00 $107, 000 00 For care of the Armory building and grounds and expense of watching, preservation, and storage of the duplicate collections of the Government, and of the property of the United States Fish Commission contained therein, including salaries or compensation of all necessary em- RONG cae ee ee eer cen iene Ge ee et een Roe 2,500 00 For cases, furniture, and fixtures required for the exhibi- tion of the collections of the United States National Mu- seum, and for salaries or compensation of all necessary GANS Heme ete ee NE ee hace wie emt e eels awe oil < 40,000 00 For the expenses of an international exchange of books, documents, and productions of the United States with foreign countries, in accordance with the Paris conven- tion of 1877, including salaries and compensation to all necessary employés, to be expended under the direction of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution ....... 10,000 00 For finishing, heating, gas-fitting, plumbing, and com- pletely furnishing the eastern portion of the Smithsonian Institution, and for finishing the fourth and fifth stories, including liabilities already incurred ......... ......- 15,000 00 For paving sidewalk on south and east fronts of National SVC TMEL OTEUVOL UES Peso eters ie. «wasn eee e See sos Vania oe 1, 000 00 For expense of freight on statue of Joseph Henry from Rome to Washington, and all expenses by the Smith- sonian Institution connected with the erection and cere- monies of unveiling said statue .......... ...-........ 900 00 8. Mis. 33——11 XVIII REPORT OF THE BOARD OF REGENTS. For the purpose of continuing ethnological researches among the American Indians, under the direction of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution, including sala- ries and compensation of all necessary employés.....-. $40, 000 00 Exhibit of condition of appropriations by Congress for National Museum, §c., January 1, 1885. age tiated) Total avail- Balance Balance or fiscal able from Expended | January 1, Object. January 1, lyear 1884-’85,, January1, | inthe year | 1885, avail- 1884. act July 7, | 1884, tod une 1884. able till June 1884. 30, 1885. 30, 1885. | Preservation of collections, | National Museum ....-....--. | $46,658 51 | $107,000 00 $153, 658 51; $100,259 24 $53, 399 27 Armory Building, National Winisenimie s2eicate esac lanl 1, 525 50 2,500 00 4,025 50 2,525 00 1, 500 50 Furniture and fixtures, Na- tiona] Museum .=--.--2.------ 36, 020 49 40, 000 00 76, 020 49 63, 384 13 12, 636 36 International Exchanges...... 3,500 00 10, 000 00 18, 500 00 7,705 50 5, 794 50 Reconstruction eastern por- tion Smithsonian building... 12, 677 14 15, 000 00 27, 677 14 26, 378 92 1, 298 22 Paving sidewalk, National IVATISOUMM fue Sect yao Se all eace eee ees 1,090 00 1,,000:.00)))-- 5.222 s ae 1,000 00 North American Ethnology... 19, 945 40 40, 000 00 59, 945 40 40,419 78 19, 525 62 The balance (January 1, 1884), $802.17, of the appropriation for pre- paring the scientific report of the Polaris expedition, has been expended during the year, according to the certificate of Major Hobbs, October 6, 1884, disbursing clerk of the Treasury Department. The appropriation by Congress of $900 to reimburse the Institution for its expenditures in connection with the Henry statue, was received from the Treasury Department in October, 1884, and is included in the statement of receipts for the year. The committee has examined the vouchers for payments made from the Smithson income during the year 1884, all of which bear the ap- proval of the Secretary of the Institution, and a certificate that the materials and services charged were applied. to the purposes of the Institution. The committee has also examined the accounts of the National Museum and find that the balances above given correspond with the certificates of the disbursing officers of the Interior and Treasury De- partments. The quarterly and annual accounts-current, the check-books and journals have been examined and found correct. Respectfully submitted. JOHN MACLEAN, W. T. SHERMAN, JAMES C. WELLING, Executive Committee. WASHINGTON, January, 1885. Dr. Maclean’s examination of the expenditures and vouchers was limited to those of the Smithsonian Institution proper. REPORT OF THE ARCHITECTS FOR THE RECONSTRUCTION OF THE EASTERN PORTION OF THE SMITHSONIAN IN- STITUTION. Prof. 8. F. BAIRD, Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution: Sir: We have the honor to submit a report of the operations pertain- ing to the fire-proof reconstruction of the east portion of the Smithson- ian building, which was commenced in the month of April, 1883, and completed during the last year. For a proper understanding of the conditions under which this work was executed it may be well to recall a few steps in the life of the whole building. On the 28th of January, 1847, the plans of James Renwick, esq., of New York, were adopted, bids for the completion of the whole building were invited, the work awarded on the 9th of March, and the corner- stone laid on the 1st of May following. Five years were stipulated for the completion of the work under the building contract. On the 26th of February, 1850, the interior framing and floors of part of the center building, intended to contain the museum of apparatus, fell down into the basement before completion, and on July 3, 1850, a committee of the Regents of the Institution reported “that the interior of the main building is defective in the kind of material originally adopted and to a considerable degree in the quality of the material em- ployed, which consists principally of wood. The money was mainly expended upon the cut-stone work of the fronts.” The committee rec- ommended “that the interior of the center building be removed and that a fire-proof structure be substituted for it.” In January, 1853, the plans of Capt. B. S. Alexander, U.S. A.., for fire- proofing and finishing the interior of the center building were adopted, and the author of the plans intrusted with the superintendence of this work, which was commenced in June, 1853, and completed in Decem- ber, 1854. It included a lecture room with unsurpassed optical and acoustic properties, accommodating 1,800 persons. Unfortunately for the building the term “fire-proofing” had in those days simply refer- ence to floors and walls, so that the fire-proofed center building still retained a combustible wooden roof, like all other public buildings erected about the same time. A fire occurred on the 24th of January, 1865, which destroyed this roof, and with it all the interior of the upper story of the main building and the adjacent towers. The executive committee of the Regents re- xXIx xx REPORT OF THE ARCHITECTS. ported that careful survey forced upon them the conviction that “the original construction of the building as a whole was very defective and unsuited as a receptacle of valuable records. The two wings and con- necting ranges, which were not injured by the fire, are defective in ma- terial and construction. The floors in some cases, though covered with flagging, rest upon wooden beams, which are decayed, and in a few years the interior of these parts will require removal.” The Regents decided that the restoration should in all parts be inde- structible by fire, and intrusted Adolf Cluss, architect, with the plans and superintendence of the work, which was carried on shortly after the close of the war, when material and labor had risen to the highest mark. The second story of the center building was fitted up as a hall for Government collections, and was covered with an iron and slate roof; five towers were fitted up with iron and brick floors, partitions, and roofs, and with iron stairs. This work was completed in the season of 1867. Fire-proof floors were substituted in 1871 for the decayed lower wooden floors of the west wing and of the northwest arcade, and in 1873 a steam- heating apparatus was put in the building. The east wing, then called the chemical wing, was originally arranged for one large lecture-room, provided with seats for 1,000 persons, and the adjoining range was fitted up for two apparatus-rooms in close prox- imity with the lecturers’ table. When the improved lecture-room in the main building was completed in 1854 there was no longer any use for the now antiquated room which absorbed the whole east wing. Hence, this wing was temporarily divided into two stories, with wooden floors, and studded, lathed, and plastered partitions. The lower floor was arranged in alarge room for handling all articles of exchange. &c. The second story was fitted up with a suit of rooms for the accommodation. of the Secretary of the Institution, in accordance with the original intentions of the Regents, and the high space above was left unfinished as a loft. The fenestration became, in the newly arranged two stories, most anomalous. The tall windowsof a lofty lecture-room being subdivided, the old frames came to be in the lower story very near to the ceiling, and almost on a level with the floor in the upper story. The connect- ing wing, as altered, accommodated simply two middle-sized offices, with the cloister along the exposed north front, through the open arches of which rain and snow drifted, and rotted the wooden floor-joists so much that they had to be temporarily supported from the cellar. Before long the open arches of the cloister had to be filled in with temporary wooden windows, which barely kept the weather out. Above the first story of the range there was a second story, of no practical value, since the external architecture limited the size of its windows to bull’s-eyes of 24 feet in diameter, &c. The museum was shut off from the eastern main entrance by direct obstructions and by floors on two different levels. REPORT OF THE ARCHITECTS. XXI This deplorable condition of the east wing, continued for a series of years, demanded in the end prompt action, and in March, 1883, an ap- propriation of $50,000 was made by Congress for the fire-proof recon- struction of the eastern part of the Smithsonian Institution, to which $15,000 were added in July, 1884, for completion and furniture. Under these appropriations the old “ chemical wing” was stripped of the combustible constructions; so much of the exterior walls as de- pended upon the wooden frame work was carefully taken down; all or- namental cut-stone work, consisting of copies from doors, windows, and cornices of divers monastic edifices in France and Germany, was laid aside and reset in the walls during the progress of the work. The dark and damp cellar, containing 4,500 square feet of floor space, was drained, and provided with a Portland cement floor upon a concrete foundation, and converted into dry working-rooms in best sanitary con- dition. Onthe ground floor cheerful offices were arranged on both sides of a broad and level corridor, by which the old museum is reached in a direct line from the east entrance. The formerly useless and anomalous second story was rearranged into two stories of ten feet clear height for offices, with adequate light and air, and covered with a metal roof, fastened in a fire-proof manner upon concreted brick arches. Above the ground floor of the east wing there were but six badly lighted and ventilated rooms in a second story. These were replaced by seven well lighted and aired spacious offices, and a similar space was gained in each of two upper stories for offices and document-rooms. This wing is crowned by a pitched medieval wrought-iron roof, covered with slate hung to iron pur-lines for the steep portions, and with metal upon hollow terra-cotta tiles for the flat portions. There are arranged above the basement, in all, 36 office rooms, con- taining 12,500 square feet floor space. ; In the progress of the work the exterior walls were strengthened, sub- stantial brick walls were built for the interior partitions, and supports of the fire-proof floors consisting of concreted brick arches sprung between rolled-iron beams. All the rooms are provided with extra large gas-pipes and flues end- ing above the roof, so that eventually either of them may be used by the scientists for experiments. There are tubes laid throughout for inter- communication by means of oral annunciators, and piping for clocks. Documents may be raised or lowered from the outside of the building to the basement by a hoist, and from there distributed to the archives in the different stories by means of an elevator of cheap construction. A compact low-pressure steam-heating apparatus warms the whole section promptly and comfortably at a moderate expense. The exterior architecture was simply modified by resetting all the architraves and cornices at such levels as to enable valuable space within the building to be made useful for laboratories, offices, work- . rooms, archives, and store-rooms, by enlarging some of the windows as XXII REPORT OF THE ARCHITECTS. necessary for the new conditions, by supplying a small quantity of plain cut stone, and by adding Norman dormers of cut-stone work for light- ing the space within the pitched roof of the west wing. A financial statement accompanies this report, which gives the cost of all branches of the work in detail and requires no comment. With the completion of the work, as above reported upon, the prin- cipal part of the Smithsonian building is now, from foundation to roof, beyond the reach of any serious fire. Still the reconstruction is not com- plete as long as the west wing and adjoining range above the ground floor are of combustible construction. During a conflagration in those com- bustible parts of the building, the main building in the center would probably be considerably damaged by water. In the center building some repairs are necessary, and the first story ought to be re-arranged, so that the available space can be made more useful for the purposes of the Institution. We have the honor to be, very respectfully, your most obed’t, CLUSS & SCHULZE, Architects. WASHINGTON, D. C., January 12, 1885. PLANS AND VIEWS OF THE GROUNDS AND BUILDING ~ . OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. . Plan of the Smithsonian Grounds, appropriated to the use of the Institution by act of Congress August 10, 1846. . View of the north front of the Smithsonian building (from the west), showing partly the original form of the eastern portion. . View of the south front of the Smithsonian building, showing the present reconstructed appearance of the eastern portion. . Elevations of the eastern portion as reconstructed, showing first the north aspect, and second, the south aspect. . Elevation of the east front of the.eastern portion as reconstructed, and also plan of the basement. . Plans of the first and second stories of the eastern portion as recon- structed. Plans of the third and fourth stories of the eastern portion as recon- structed. xxi XXV Plate 1. I2TH STREET WEST. 759 feet Dinches. fitH=ST- WEST... las \oy aplual measurement. Ss. guares 10861. Sins by actual nteasurcmen B. STREE], Le 1OTX ST. WES | | | | I | | | { ! | I 1 I { | | | | ] | | ] | | | 1 I 759 feet 9 inches. otre STREET WEST. 8TH STREET WEST. SOUTH. Surveyors Office, Nashinglon Gty, January UP 1847 Thereby certity thatThave surveyed and marked for the Srithsonian, mstitution that portion of theMall which ts between 9 and le Streets West,and catends trom the North side of South B Street No seven hundred and fifty nine fect and nine inches (F59.D&. which onthe accompanying plat is represented as bounded by the lines AB, BC, CD and DA. Bae (Stig?) Randolph Coyle, Surv" W.-C. AUGUST IO, PLAN OF THE SMITHSONIAN GROUNDS. (APPROPRIATED BY ACT OF CONGRESS, 1846.) *(aaIs LAAT AHL NO—NOMLYOd LSVA AHL AO WAOA TVNIOINO AHL ONIMOHS) NOILLALILSNI NVINOSHLINS AHL JO LNOW HLYON NY " iy XXVIT XXIX Plate 3. —— z = ; == = ee = == = | Wi HH SOUTH FRONT OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION (SHOWING THE RECONSTRUCTED FORM OF THE EAST PORTION—ON THE RIGHT SIDE). ~ ae ——— i. = Plate 4. XXXI EASTERN PORTION OF SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION—NORTH ELEVATION. 7 iT Oe SUD iummewumnas = AESOYAEEY au todd ian dl BS FAA E| ae . i da faa @ a a Ye —_ be iy He EASTERN PORTION OF SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION—SOUTH ELEVATION. XXXITI Plate 5. 50 EASTERN PORTION OF SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION—EAST ELEVATION, 66 = . | t— «I = re oS — a — a — Ss : 7b sla 586 S6a 65. S _L 59 57 56 /. < 62. 60 58 = 8 HTH al E : eRe J S$a eee Ee I 8 po 1 622 Ss Ss = a = = - 20 30 40 50 10 5 O /0 EASTERN PORTION OF SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION—PLAN OF BASEMENT. S. Mis. 33——111 Plate 6. XXXV 162.a 160.0 7 r MAIN BUILDING. = = ij [J 10 ; g 10 20 so. _40 50 EASTERN PORTION OF SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION-—PLAN OF FIRST STORY. 0 5 00 10 200-80 AO ae EASTERN PORTION OF SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION—PLAN OF SECOND STORY. Plate 7. XXXVITI EASTERN PORTION OF SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION—PLAN OF THIRD STORY. 5 | 10 20-30) -40 50 EASTERN PORTION OF SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION—PLAN OF FOURTH STORY, MAIN BUILDING. a t erage Geet? Ne THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. MEMBERS EX OFFICIO OF THE “ESTABLISHMENT.” (January 1, 1885.) CHESTER A. ARTHUR, President of the United States. G. F. EDMUNDS, President of the United States Senate. MORRISON R. WAITE, Chief Justice of the United States. FREDERICK T. FRELINGHUYSEN, Secretary of State. HUGH McCULLOCH, Secretary of the Treasury. ROBERT T. LINCOLN, Secretary of War. WILLIAM E. CHANDLER, Secretary of the Navy. FRANK HATTON, Postmaster-General. HENRY M. TELLER, Secretary of the Interior, BENJAMIN H. BREWSTER, Attorney-General. BENJAMIN BUTTERWORTH, Commissioner of Patents. REGENTS OF THE INSTITUTION. (January 1, 1885.) MORRISON R. WAITE, Chief Justice of the United States, President of the Board. G. F. EDMUNDS, President of the United States Senate. NATHANIEL P. HILL, member of the Senate of the United States. SAMUEL B. MAXEY, member of the Senate of the United States. J.S. MORRILL, member of the Senate of the United States. O. R. SINGLETON, member of the House of Representatives. WILLIAM L. WILSON, member of the House of Representatives, W. W. PHELPS, member of the House of Representatives. JOHN MACLEAN, citizen of New Jersey. ASA GRAY, citizen of Massachusetts. HENRY COPPEB, citizen of Pennsylvania. NOAH PORTER, citizen of Connecticut. WILLIAM T. SHERMAN, citizen of Washington, D. C. JAMES C. WELLING, citizen of Washington, D. C. Executive Committee of the Board of Regents. JOHN MACLEAN. WILLIAM T. SHERMAN. JAMES C. WELLING. SPENCER F. BAIRD, Secretary of the Institution and Director of the U. 8. National Museum. XXXIX ae fame Vanes REPORT OF PROFESSOR BAIRD, — SECRETARY OF THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION, FOR 1884. To the Board of Regents of the Smithsonian Institution : GENTLEMEN: I have the honor to present herewith the report of the operations and condition of the Smithsonian Institution for the year 1854. This, in accordance with the usual custom, will include an ac- count of the work performed by the Smithsonian Institution itself, as well as that of the branches of the public service placed by Congress under its charge, namely, the National Museum and the Bureau of Eth- nology. To this will be added a sketch of the work of the United States Fish Commission, which is also under my charge; and of that of the U. S. Geological Survey, kindly furnished by its Director. THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION. INTRODUCTORY. Outside of the regular routine work of the Institution, an account of which will be furnished in its proper place, are the details connected | with the participation, in 1884, by the Smithsonian Institution in the exhibitions at Cincinnati, Louisville, and the International Cotton Ex- position at New Orleans, with which your Board was charged by order of Congress. A full account of the history of these undertakings will be given hereafter. An increasing number of national organizations for the promotion of science has received accommodation in the lecture-room of the National Museum during the year, in accordance with thé authority of the Board. The repairs to the eastern portion of the Smithsonian building have been completed, with the exception of a few minor details, and the offices re-established. The general progress of the Institution during the year, and that of the public service under its control, has been satisfactory. The Smith- sonian funds are in good condition, the new year being entered upon free from any indebtedness and with a satisfactory balance on hand. The publications of the Institution have been continued, and numer- ous additions have been made to the library. The work of the Inter- national Exchange service continues to increase, and will, it is hoped, it 2 REPORT OF TILE SECRETARY. be placed upon a still more definite and satisfactory basis during the year 1885. The additions to the Museum have been unexampled in extent, con- sequent partly upon the acquisitions made in connection with the ex- hibitions just referred to, and partly upon the labors of the Geological Survey, of the Ethnological Bureau, of the United States Fish Commis- sion, and of numerous miscellaneous explorations, both public and pri- vate. THE HENRY STATUE. The appropriation of $15,000, made some years ago by Congress, for the erection of the Henry statue did not quite cover all the expenses, and the sum of $900 was advanced from the funds of the Institution. Believing, however, that it was the intent of Congress that this statue should be placed in position without cost to the Institution, application was made for the sum named, which was duly allowed. The money has been paid over and placed to the credit of the Institution. PROFESSOR HENRY’S SCIENTIFIC WRITINGS. At the meeting of the Board of Regents of January 17, 1883, a reso- lution was introduced by Dr. Maclean to provide for the republication of Professor Henry’s scientific writings. A committee appointed at the last meeting of the Board, January 16, 1884, consisting of Prof. Asa Gray, Hon. William L. Wilson, and your Secretary, has had the subject under consideration, and has decided that the resolution only covered such of Professor Henry’s articles as had actually been printed, and espe- _ cially the portion prior to his entrance upon his duties at Washington. The editing of this publication was intrusted to Mr. Wm. B. Taylor, who has been engaged in collecting the necessary material. The commence- ment of the work has gone to press, and a sample is submitted for the information and criticism of the Regents. JAMES SMI'THSON. In the Life of Smithson,* published by the Institution a few years ago, the author, Mr. Rhees, says: ‘It is an interesting subject of speculation to consider the motives which actuated Smithson in bequeathing his fortune to the United States of America, to found an institution in the city of Washington. He is not known to have had a single correspond- ent in America, and in none of his papers is found any reference to it or to its distinguished men. It has been alleged that he was more friendly to monarchical than to republican institutions, but there ap- pears to be no foundation for this opinion. * * * By selecting the United States as the depository of his trust he paid the highest compli- *< -s.2.so5-52 v2 scee succes pnreadet Hthnologry<. 2... s02 22s ---+< + Cincinnati Society of Natural History .-... City Library, Baltimore ...--. Commonwealth of Massachusetts.......--. Davenport Academy of Natural Science. -- Franklin Institute, Philadelphia.........- Harvard College, Cambridge ........-....- Health Department, Baltimore .........-- Johns Hopkins University..............-- a Museum of Comparative Zoology, Cambridge...-....... Michigan State Board of Agriculture... -.. National Academy of Science, Washington National Deaf Mute Institute..........-.. New York Academy of Science..........-.. Numismatic and Antiquarian Society...... Ohio Geological Survey .......--.......-- 1884. Number of | packages. | ————_| 101 Weight in pounds. ye 102 RECEIPTS—Continued. REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF EXCHANGES. For foreign transmission—Continued. 1884. Whence received. Number of | Weight in packages. pounds. c. From societies, etc.—Continued. Ohio|Statewuibranygenee seaport ister eerie 1 24 Pennsylvania Historical Society ..-.-. -......--......- 71 71 Philadelphia Academy of Natural Science -............ 63 347 Royal Society of Canad aan. eset alate eae ae 55 500 Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania ....-....--.- 63 676 Saint Louis Academy of Science ..-....-....-\--..----- 269 253 United States Publishing Company, Philadelphia -..-. 1 808 University of News VoOrkiiss sei soece ssaeieecem eee 18 133 Vermont State ibrary:s.2.es eat eee aie ela tolinle 1 7 Washburn Obsenvatoryencosceisde eee eee ase 267 615 Washington Anthropological Society .........---.---- 371 364 Washington Philosophical Society .....-....---..----- 139 125 Wisconsin Academy of Science .... ----<. -.-.<.....--- 2 5 Maigcellamneous SOCIOtIOS! 2 2c0 coma) cree climes yest sinsie 2, 562 869 TOGA Eo ook clea laa sce eniemia letcmisisists clave beretete eis 6, 960 10, 087 APRrom in diviGualasneccoseaaceseceseacleeem eine einicsia sets 328 884 Grand total aise foc) aces socio soeiset eeree ee 18, 866 78, 732 2. For domestic transmission. 1884. From— Boxes, |Packages.| Weight. Arventine © oniederation 2/2 522s. s) eceos cee ee 3 106 1, 040 SIMI Sosdae Sh csnodoraébSsb5 sb5 56k S86 cnon acdensacée 12 644 1,300 BRAG ies cmciter nine cee oa staeine aanlciee eroctaiscie me ee meintotes 2 45 320 British Md at casa 2. sss20 saccceecisteds ence eeee ieee 1 1 16 CentralvAmericats..coas- 0-2 se ncceesienen eee osnee een eee 2 7 430 Wonmarky cass Viet scien sce Nos oat bone me ee eee eae 3 88 293 IRAN COM ee sarees et cele ee one AE ee ete eee eee 18 1, 125 4,401 Greatibritaimn-andsirelandics snes eee eee meee 76 1, 891 i oles: Germany and Austria-Hungary. ........-.-..----.---- 35 2, 234 8, 881 Italy seo. Peas ae ae So Ree REE ey en eres 5 452 1, 896 BET GS 26 (0) See Ua ne re Ure CE id) Sa ao 31 31 3, 765 IMOXIGO 2 58 encore be cece MeO eee a eee eee eee 2 218 120 Netherlands:= 28 £2 2):6.- ch ee ee ee eee 5 417 1, 461 New south: Wales: = 2) 3 82 oie eee eee eee 3 27 229 NOT WAY Roi siis cise ob ee Lee heer Me eee eee eicee et 3 121 516 PROT ce cian ai= oi x's dene Weare Otis oe Gee eee eens ae 1 12 160 PURIST Stile cela akg bid roa c egete ee eee ee Ee eee ars 7 357 1,270 SomphyAustralia... 5.2 hes eee ac cee ee eneecoe ee 1 23 90 Sw/G0 i ee ae eS ee Akt oo SER SC EBE 4 a 678 Siwabzenlam dy... 22. Lee nee eee ee Ee ee ieee ae 1 154 Dailey Wnitedistates of Colombia 22... .s2-. sss aeeeeee ees <2 4 4 800 Wi CbOUIR Rees o2ic'e se.) 5 a cclalocee cos sles eee ener ee eines al 1 35 West Indiestcs a... 2 oo aaeecasctee oe eee eee eee 1 2 14 otaleee cer ci oe ceca cntatcets See 1 1 35 b. For foreign transmission from— DITO sEM IN VOL. Same asec secs cc ot edtne Leet eee oe meee - 38, 250 29, 050 NO eae ae cts wis or eis opepe os disye ais Se eye ea Pees 22 38, 337 32, 827 RECAPITULATION. 1884. 1883. For what and whence received. a = J iz |Packages.| Weight. |Packages.| Weight. 1. For foreign transmission from— Government Departments..-...--.-. 7,476 55, 776 7, 165 44, 637 Smithsonian Institution....-....--- 4,102 11, 985 6, 218 22, 566 Scientificisocieties -22..1-2->--s-)s--- 6, 961 10, 122 3, 900 11, 003 individuals: 222 css arses Caos Sass 327 849 780 441 18,866 | 78,732 18,063 78, 647 2. For domestic transmission-.........--.. 7, 967 42, 255 8, 263 49, 608 3. For Government exchanges ..-.....---- 38, 337 32, 827 37, 569 27, 395 MOtal eos Soft Socniycin sce kee clqecek 65, 17 1538, 814 33, 849 155, 650 _In the year 1881 special attention was invited to the large increase in the reception of exchange parcels, the number for that year, 1881, being 43,104; in 1882 this had increased to 58,047; in 1883 to 63,894; and in 1884 to 65,170. In the report for 1882 it was respectfully sug- gested that the receiving and distributing of all the incoming exchanges be made a separate division of the service, and placed in the hands of a tried competent assistant, since on the prompt and accurate per- formance of this duty depends the punctuality of shipments of foreign, domestic, and Government document exchanges. Taking the present status of incoming parcels, we now receive on an average over 200 parcels per day. These have to be assorted, arranged, compared with the invoice—if such has been furnished, otherwise au invoice has to be prepared—provided with the number corresponding to the respective address in the list of foreign correspondents and in the card catalogue, and distributed in the bins to await their turn of ship- ment. Thus far this work has been performed—mostly at the expense 104 REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF EXCHANGES. of other important duties—by the assistants of the respective depart- ments to whom such incoming parcels are referred, and it is from these considerations that the suggestion is now renewed and urged that this branch of the service be placed in charge of an assistant, while an additional clerk be employed to prepare, under his supervision, the then remaining only mechanical portion of the foreign exchanges, the shipping. TRANSMISSIONS. 1. Foreign transportations. An unusual number of boxes have been shipped during the year, the increase over last year being 120, while from 1882 to 1883 an in- crease of 70 boxes only was noticed. The following table furnishes a comparison with former years: Items. 1877. 1878. 1879. 1880. | 1881. 1882. 1883. 1884. Boxes .......-- 397 309 311 268 407 422 495 651 Bulk (cub. ft.).| 2,779 | 2,160 | 2,177 | 1,976) 2,800] 2,956] 3,288| 4,281 Weight, in lbs.| 99,250 | 69,220 | 69,975 | 60,300 100,750 |105, 500 122,265 | 159, 235 The distribution in 1884 was made as follows: ~ a 5 cs Hg | 63 Country. BH | Sh é PSone © fag et ° ids) | @ a =) | M AFRICA. JANE Yee DAB AREA a Wee E as DO SCES EE SeEo bon aud bona oeUn ab.cacboullecds ssca| 3 3 TSHAVDLS 40 Be Hanoc ond Bea oo acho Sus peobeoaroodualU man oogeae| cone cee 4 4 1) OPO Poh le pee Seto aed raped a Ss IP ee ee Oh eel leeeeeenc 7 « AMERICA. | North America: BritisheAmenrieaacciictssces soceee ee eet eee eae eee 6 8 14 I (eo: VoYa un Amen reel Cre enn gS Shek FE eee Oe bee oa Sia ala 3 8 11 West Indies: | 1 3 hf 1 eee ae pines Reerrenn ia ie se Ses Sane Sheers 3 PAMBICR 1. 32/52 ns cs cioce) st cieisis oe eee yeaeoise ote alee es eee 1 1 South America: | ATventine Contederatlony: acces cane eee eee eee | 6 4 10 STAZ Moc oie. treks orale eee eae ee ee TE rene | 3 5 8 BritishsG Uuiana «= sos eS ee ee eee ee [ie Sei 1 il S01) Ss ee een OME SPM lS a eee 3 2 5 Dri) ab CAS UE ge: mB ee OR eae ss eae Oe I eee (era Thc 1 il ALAC WAY, .c.2.2)tia'aiwes R25 Sea eee: ae ee ee OSE eee cise se nee ok ae tt 1 RCTS ae aos ese, Sin ja. ose lavtsice here ele ee a ety ews alle Sea 1 1 lUnitedisrates| Colombia... s2cc. couse eee ee ee oan 3 2 5 NW Uae te tse wle oie | 5 Segre errs ene oem ees lata 0 o'er eee 1 1 ViGNEZ WOMANS Sais) o.0 Ss oe aca See te Ee re nea ec Bi leet eae 3 TG UE ee Soi icicla 0.0 SO nee 30 37 67 REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF EXCHANGES. Distribution in 1884—Continued. 105 =| A g = = Ba Country. = y 3 ’ : po*| 5S 3 s) a = ASIA SUSIE ESI Petes hae a as a nine Sie eee cln cae eed bee Sa) Se Seed Cae | aneee 3 3 DTU, C552 Ste a ee eo ens ee eee rm eae es Ae a 3 6 9 JSTRI 3 e5ch6 2 senRdboadSaenine Goneaseie nse ts Sea eseaaae, aacnis B- 3 9 12 PROVE ea ee FS Eee Se ee RNS 5 a Ee 6 15 24 AUSTRALASIA. SWE SOUL LMNs GR ea a cae oo Se ye eet. Be ee iit ee 3 8 11 INAV PIE SEAT Gee ete nn Uncen es een ey meee 2S 3 6 9 RMOOURIAN Ces som ose canes t. Selo hons sue Ao alnaesjemicitck oe ober. ae 3 2 5 SUE GHPATISULAILAL Serie oe or mo cee oe ee eee eras hee ects 3 2 5 LUPO TITER - SES ct a ae aR Sy ere 3 2 5 REG LON ets sees eee ol Shai cc oe BS Wah aie ene 2c eels ae 3 5 8 PD Ota reese ete ora chee aw iniee = ae te ee a eco ati 18 25 43 EUROPE. uN Ls a Ee gs A ee oie a TE ye eee eee ore soe 3 25 28 Basa VekGI Meets eet ee ae tens ee ore See Dae aemteimaiee em mars aia cares oil Raxnees 3 TSM co Beshse Samo S EO ade COU SUEUR OO ATOR Ae ieee aes meee 3 42 45 IDET TY fe CS Se stent et Ae a deb em ea OCR tl AE Seat 3 8 11 EOLA TS PR RES AT ee sree ra eS saa aa ae vey i Age 3 85 88 HUD COM See oto ein te cites a erncmis wie ics Gaia eae Saag cee wee 3 82 85 AETBTIOUIR, Sosecd Sao IS SSeS NaC Ee ee tee aie a 3 61 64 BAW EEXOEIS Se se8 A SEAS A ER ay es a ore ee eS Oe pee 3 1 4 MeUliverctns Hare Sarate aces wkrela els ate cinisicwiecie Smicptinls nis Sewle Eectenyes 3 50 53 Netherlands Bee 3 15 18 BUEN Ce oa cece be an ona cel aa ta coe socn em eates seem ee eee 3 10 13 ROU UU ALM ses taccew a (ao mics ccc oes ae wialniad anal so oi (asinine steno 3 8 11 LEGG i = See eae ey ee, a cor Caen Pe a Pye Eee eee QOS 2 Pea eee Geen Sn | Pao ee 3 IRESTE SG 56 CASE EEE NE ee eee Oe ye ea eee ee ee 3 25 28 SHESOLN AA SE SS 5S oe ees eee eee Ae cere Re ee ee Bo eabee oer 3 ‘SHEETIARE S340 Bis Sc SiS s SA em me es PRS Ad ee ee ree ta ee ee 3 7 10 PW EG CIS eee re eons cies cnn era usd ee NN a ee 3 11 14 EASLIUVAGTE Ey a |) Se ee ais, PRR Mee mie ge Ft Dea 3 12 15 UG Ry BASS CLAS ae Gee ey arora emer te eee ee ee Woe Fed 3 rf 10 MMIBLOMDOL Py eae ois ojos — 5 Sx 2. op jase Seige cttote eae ee 2s ee 3 MOP oan tye ck a ooo s Nie SRE ont eee tee ee 60 449 509 POLYNESIA. HSS SRO SS a Oe a ee en ec PE PR APRRI con aie [lt oa re | Doe i| 1 RECAPITULATION. CUES 13 O25 So See ee ret ee tg. a ee / 7 EASTIRTTCD 3 UG Se Ee EA ee ee eres eye. it? eee 30 7 67 ANSTEY 2-4/5 ciclo es cee 3035) NOW eCrsey.- oe eis sea 64 District of Columbia .-...--..- 5, 7is ONews Ove! eescmcnr = erect 981 BIOTIGa sce ee soos eee cee ee sas 1s North Carolinaeees-se sees aes ai Retr tiaieece nase ence see ee Sil 'OMIO Cee. woos ieee eee i 126 NIN OIS ase sice ates ees 122))|| Pennsylvanian. -= a22e-5 eee 611 Indian arses h 1884. Jam = _-23. DAE June REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF EXCHANGES. Lz Hydrographic Notices, 1884—Continued. Nori3: No. 14. No. 15. No. 16. No. 17. No. 18. St. Mazaire—Change of light. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Java—Light at Cheribon. 8vo. Paper. 2p. Yangtse River entrance—A shoal. 8vo. Paper. 3 p. Austro-Hungary—Cittanuova. 8vo. Paper. 3p. England—Outer Dowsing Shoal. 8vo. Paper. 4 p. China Sea Directory—High Lomach Island. 8vo. Paper, 2p. No. 19. . Thames River entrance. 8vo. Paper. 2p. . Spain—Cadiz—Bury. 8vo. Paper. 2p. . Madagascar—Shoal. 8vo. Paper. 2p. . Borneo, northwest coast. 8vo. Paper. 3p. . Austro-Hungary—Light. 8vo. Paper. 2p. . Brazil—Santa Anna Island light. 8vo. Paper. 2p. . Leruka—Lights. 8vo. Paper. 3p. . Boston—Change of lights. 8yo. Paper. 1p. . China Sea—Gulf of Tong-King. 8vo. Paper. 2p. . Pilot regulations. 8vo. Paper. 3p. . France, southern coast—Light. 8vo. Paper. 3p. . Non-resistance of shoal. 8vo. Paper. 2p. . New Jersey—Sandy Hook. 8vo. Paper. 1p. . South Carolina—Charleston. 8vo. Paper. 1p. . New Jersey—Wreck. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 35. . Java Sea—Reef. 8vo. Paper. 1p. . Canary Islands—Santa Cruz de Teneriffe. 8vo. Paper. 2p. . Spencer Gulf—Port Augusta. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 39. Montreal—Light discontinued. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Florida Reefs—Hawk’s Channel. 8vo. Paper. 2p. Holyhead Bay—Rocks. 8yvo. Paper. 2p. No. 40. Greece—Hydra Island light. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 41. Bombay—Time-ball. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 42. Magellan Straits—Landmarks. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 43. Connecticut—Light-house. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 44. Algeria—Dellys—Light. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 45. Madagascar—Autonga—Shoal. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 46. Gillert Group—Hopper Island. 8vo. Paper. 4p. No. 47. Corsica—Vecchio. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 48. Belgium—Schelde River. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 49. China Sea—Shoal. 8vo. Paper. 3p. * No. 50. Ceylon—Columbo light. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 51. New Caledonia—Yengen to Pouébo, 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 52. Sicily —Port Augusta—Inflexible Shoal. 8vo. Paper. 3p. To. 53. Guadaloupe—Harbor dues. 8yo. Paper. 1 p. No. 55. Sierra Leone—Port dues. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 56. Rhode Island—-Bell-buoy off Block Island. 8vo. . Paper. isp: No. 57. Delaware—Buoys off Cape Henlopen. 8vo. Paper. 1 p. No. 58. Greece—Gulf of Vola—Shoals. 8yvo. Paper. 1p. No. 60. New Britain, northeast coast. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 61. Iceland—Magnetic observations. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 62. Cochin China—Pulo Condore. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 63. Tonquet. 8vo. Paper. 1 p. No. 64. East coast—Bet-el-Ras shoal—Beacon. 8vo. Paper. 3p. . Gulf of Burglaz—Light at Megalo—Nice. 8vo. Paper. 2p. 124 REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF EXCHANGES. 1884. Hydrographic Notices, 1884—Continued. June 27. No. 66. Scotland—Burghead light. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 67. Paumotou Islands. 8vo. Paper. 1 p. No. 68. Trinidad—Diamond Rock—Bell-buoy. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 69. France—Pallice. 8vo. Paper. 1p. ; No. 70. Austro- Hungary—Cape Promontore—Fog-signals. 8vo- Paper. 3p. No. 71. Brazil—Gaivotas Island light. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 72. Shelburne harbor—Fog-horn. 8vo. Paper. 1 p. No. 73. Canton River. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 74. South Foreland—Experimental lights. 8yvo. Paper. 2p. No. 75. Sardinia—Sant Antioco Island. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 76. Carimata Strait—Puld'‘Kumpal. 8vo. Paper. 7p. No. 77. Madagascar—Port Robih'son—Rock. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 78. Middle Island. 8vo:**Paper. 1p. . No. 79. Spain—Aguilas. 8v0:' Paper. 1p. No. 80. Humber River—Wretk budy. 8vo. 2p. No. 81. Grand Bassa—Simken rotk. 8vo. 1p. No. 82. Encounter Bay—Fort' Vietor light. 8vo. 3p. Fo. 83. France—Cayeux. 8vo:’" Paper. 1p. No. 84. Spain—Port Passages.’8Vvo. Paper. 3p. No. 85. Lough Foyle—Tims Bank buoy. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 86. Mediterranean—Cyprus+Kyrenia—Light. 8vo. Paper. No. 87. Kal-ah—Kebineh ShoalLBeacon. 8vo. Paper. 1 p. No. 88. Buccaneer Archipelago—Banks. 8wo. Paper. 12 p. No. 89. Piel Harbor. 8vo. ‘Paper. 3p. No. 90. Spain—Alicante—CHange in lights. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 91. Loango Bay—Indian ‘point—Wreck. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 92. Cuba, North coast—Bahia Honda. S8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 93. Gulf of Tong King—Kua, Kam River. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 94. Malta—Shoals off St. Elms point. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 95. Loch Ailort—Rock. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 96. Senegal—Gover Bay. 8vo. Paper. lp. No. 97. Great Sandy Strait—N. entrance—Beacon. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 98. Welsh Hook—Middle Hook buoy. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 99. Mozambique Channel, Goa Island. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 160. Torris Strait—Light ship. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 101. Casper Straits—Light. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 102. Helliss—Light temporarily extinguished. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 103. Hollant Light. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 104. Virginia—Gas—Buoy off Cape Charles. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 105. Greece—Parapola Island (Belo Porda). 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 106. Spain—Cadiz—Light. 8vo. Paper. Ip. Fo. 107. France—Villefranche—Buoys. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 108. Spain—Malaga—Beacon. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 109. Gulf of Guinea—Tofon point. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 110. Dutch Guinea—Nickerie River—Light. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 111. Denmark—Jutland buoy. 8vo. Paper.. 1p. No. 112. Carimata Strait—Scharroyd Islands. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 113. Canada—Lake Huron—Kineardine light. 8vo. Paper, 1p. 1884. June 27. REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF EXCHANGES. 125 Hydrographic Notices, 1884—Continued. No. No. 114 115. . 116. sally: Falter 5 ley . 120. Pale 3 L222. . 123. . 124. . 125. . 126. 2 LZ. 5 1izter 5 1s) . 130. . 131. . 132. . 133. . 134. . 135. . 136. . 137. 138. . 139. . 140. . 141. . 142. . 145. . 144. . 145. . 146, pe ile . 148. al 49: . 150. Los . 152. . 153. . 154, . 155. . 156. » LT. . 158. . 159. . 160. > LOL. . 162. . 163. . 164. . 165. Marshall Group—Namorich (Baring) Island. 8vo. Paper. Madagascar—Barlow Island. 8vo. Paper. 2p. England—Cromer—Wreck-buoy. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Donnarsd Approach—Rock near Siebra. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Bideford—Alteration of Lights. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Isle of Man—Port Erin. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Ballywakill Harbor—Buoys. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Jamaica—Alligator Reef—Beacons. Svo. Paper. 1p. Magellan Strait—Baxa Point beacon. 8vo. Paper. 2p. Ceylon—Colombo—Time-ball. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Java Sea—Sourabaya—Jansen Channel. 8yvo. Paper. 2p. Corea—Breton Islands. 8vo. Paper. 2p. British Guiana—Demerara. 8vo. Paper. 2p. Perim Island—Lights. 8vo. Paper. 3p. Greece—Tyra. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Yarmouth Road—Wreck-buoy. 8yvo. Paper. 2p. Cuba—Santiago light. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Italy—Leghorn. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Angra Pequena Cove—Depth of water. 8vo. Paper. 1 p. Java—Sunda Strait. 8vo. Paper. 2p. Sumatra—Bodjo Island—Light. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Ketang—Light not exhibited. 8vo. Paper. 2p. Wide Bay—Inskip point, 8vo. Paper. 2p. Massachusetts—Vineyard Sound. 8vo. Paper. 1p. New Jersey—Light-vessel repaired. 8vo. Paper. 1 p. Strait of Georgia—Fraser River—Light. 8vo. Paper. 3p. Min River—Buoy. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Chile—Shoal. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Spencer Gulf—Light. 8vo. Paper. 2p. Japan—Kobe. 8vo. Paper. 1p. France—Wreck. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Kalmar Sound—Grimskar Light. 8vo. Paper. 3p. Austro-Hungary—Pola Lights. 8vo. Paper. 2p. Copeland Islands—Lights. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Spain—Malaga—Lights. 8vo. Paper. 3 p. Cape Town—Time-ball. 8vo. Paper. 1p. New York Bay. 8vo. Paper. 1 p. New Jersey—New Inlet—Wreck. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Virginia—Chesapeake Bay — Bell Buoy. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Orchilla Harbor—Rock at entrance. 8vo. Paper. 2p. Kirpon Harbor—Beacons. 8vo. Paper. 2p. Cape de Verdes—Porto Praya. 8vo. Paper. 1p. France—Turbal—Light. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Fornaes—Wreck light withdrawn. 8vo. Paper. 1 p. Falkland Islands—Reef. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Orissa coast—Change in False Point Light. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Tunis—Bezerta—Light discontinued. 8vo. Paper. 2p. Spain—Vigo road. 8vo. Paper. 2p. Poverty Bay—Buoy. 8vo. Paper. 3p. Tunis—Tabarca—Light discontinued. S8vo. Paper. 1p. Canton—Shamien—Light. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Chile—Lata—Light. 8vo, Paper. 1p. 126 1884. June Jan. June June July 27. 10. 23. 27. 1. 10. 10. 10. 10. REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF EXCHANGES. Hydrographic Notices, 1884—Continued. No. 166. Austro-Hungary—Rovigno—Light. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 167. Danger Signals. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 168. Kertch Strait—Anchorage. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 169. Italy—Giglio Island—Light. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 170. Mediterranean—Mersinah—Light. 8vo. Paper. 1 p. No. 171. Guadaloupe—Point a Pitre—Beacons. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 172. Brazil—San Joao Island—Light. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 173. Venezuela— Orinoco River—Light-ship. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 174. Michigan—Copper Harbor—Light discontinued. © 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 175. Crane (Maria) Shoal. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 176. Non-existence of doubtful inlet. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 177. Swansea—Docks. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 178. Fortune Bay—Cape Grand Bank. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 179. New Jersey—Buoy on Brigantine Shoal. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 180. Massachusetts—Change of position of Shovelfal Shoal light-ship. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 181. South Carolina—Savannah River. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 182. Nubian coast—Le Mercier Shoal. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 183. Abbot Harbor—Light. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 184. Danish coast—Wreck. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 185. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 200. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 186. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 202. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 187. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 203. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 188. 8vo.. Paper. 2p. No. 204. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 1905)"8v.o:- ‘Paper. 1p. No. 206. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 191. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 207. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 192. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 209. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 193. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 210. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 194. 8vo. Puper. 1p. No. 211. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 195. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 215. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 196. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 216. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No: 197. 8vo. Paper. 1 p. No. 201. 8vo. Paper. 4p. No. 198. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 212. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 199. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 214. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 113. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 184. 8vo. Paper. 4p. No. 181. 8vo. Paper. 6p. No. 205. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 182. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 208. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 183. 8vo. Paper. 3p. Index to hydrographic notices, 1 to 93. 8vo. Paper. 23 p. Index to hydrographic notices, 1 to 216. Svo. Paper. 30p. Catalogue of charts, plans, and sailing directions, July, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 196 p. Same, North Atlantic Station. 8vo. Paper. 95 p. Notices to mariners, Nos. 189 to 213, inclusive. 8vo. Paper. Total num- ber pages 42. Notices to mariners, Nos. 216 to 227, inclusive. 8vo. Paper. Total num- ber pages 17. Notices to mariners, No. 229. 8vo. Paper. 2p. Publications of the United States Hydrographic Office during the quarter ending March 30, 1884. 8vo, Paper. 7p. 1884. July 10. Aug. Sept. =. Oct. Nov. Mar. Nov. Mar. 28 16 REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF EXCIIANGES. Der | Notice to mariners, Nos. 185 to 188, inclusive of 1884. 8vo. Paper. Total number pages 8. 28. No. 1, list of lights on the east and west coastsof North and South America, 30 including the West India and Pacific Islands, corrected to July 1, 1884. Svo., Paper. P. 267, XXIV.- 291 p. . No. 2, list of lights of south and east coasts of Asia and Africa and the East Indias, including Australia, Tasmania, and New Zealand, corrected to July 1, 1884. 8vo. Paper. P. 169 and XIV. 183 p. Statement of the Secretary of the Navy in reply to the resolutions of both 4 Houses of Congress for the appointment of committees on ordnance and naval construction, July 12, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 12p. 4. No. 3, list of lights of the west coast of Africa, and the Mediterranean Sea, including the Adriatic, the Black Sea, and the Sea of Azof, corrected to July 1, 1884, at the United States Hydrographic Office. 8vo. Paper P. 269, XXIT. 291 p. 4. No. 4, list of lights of the Atlantic coast of Europe and the southern shores of the English Channel and North Sea. 8yvo. Paper. P. 175, XXII. 197 p. 5. Notice to mariners, Nos. 228 to 284 (except No. 229). 8vo. Paper. Total pages 93. 8. No. 5, list of lights of the North Baltic and White Seas, corrected to July 1, 1884. 8vo. Paper. P. 157, XXII. 169p. 8. No. 6, list of lights of the British Islands, corrected to July 1, 1884. 8vo. Paper., -E: 149) X:._ 159 p. 14. Publications of the United States Hydrographic Office during the quarter ending June 30, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 9p. 3. Catalogue of charts, plans, and sailing directions issued to vessels on the European Station. 8vo. Paper. 120 p. 3. Notice to mariners, No. 206, of 1884. 8vo. Paper. 11 p. 5. Notice to mariners, No. 285, of 1884. S8vo. Paper. 2p. 5. Notice to mariners, Nos. 287 to 321, of 1884. 8vo. Paper. Total number pages 66. 22. Newfoundland and Labrador, No. 73; the coast and banks of Newfound- land and the coast of Labrador, &c., compiled by Lieut. W. W. Gill- patrick and Ensign John Gibson, United States Navy. 8vo. Paper. 615 p. 3. Notice to mariners, Nos. 322 to 363, inclusive, of 1884. 8vo. Paper. Total number pages 83, : 13. Publications of Hydrographic Office during the quarter ending September 30, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 8p. . Catalogue of charts, plans, and sailing directions issued to vessels on the South Atlantic Station. 8vo. Paper. 56 p. Nautical Almanac. . The American Ephemeris and Nautical Almanac for 1884. Second edition, tables. 4to. Paper. 496 p. . The American Ephemeris and Nautical Almanac for 1885. Second edition, 2plates. 4to. Paper. 522p. Bureau of Medicine and Surgery. 5. Hygienic and medical reports, by medical officers of the United States Navy. Prepared for publication under the direction of the Surgeon-General of the Navy, by Joseph B. Parker, A. M., M. D., Surgeon United States Navy, assisted by the Bureau of Medicine and Surgery. 8 yo, Sheep. 1070 p, 128 REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF EXCHANGES. 1884. Mar. 25. Sanitary and statistical report of the Surgeon-General of the Navy for the year 1879. 8vo. Sheep. 361 p. Same for the year 1880. 8vo. Sheep. 469 p. Same for the year 1881. 8vo. Sheep. 684 p. Bureau of Equipment and Recruiting. Aug. 23. Regulations for the enlistment, government and instruction of naval apprentices, as authorized by the circular of the Navy Department, dated January 1,1884. 8vo. Paper. 29 p. Bureau of Navigation. Jan. 23. List of lights of the East and West coasts of North and South America (except the United States), corrected to October 9, 1883. 8vo. Paper. 175 p. Professional papers, No. 13, magnetism; its original principles and special application to ships and compasses, 1883. 8vo. Paper. 280 p. Mar. 22. The American Practical Navigator, being an epitome of navigation and nau- tical astronomy, by Nathaniel Bowditch, LL. D. 4to. Paper. 647 p. June 27. Information from Abroad, report on the exhibits at the Crystal Palace Elec- trical Exhibition, 1882, by Ensign Frank J. Sprague, United States Navy. 8vo. Paper. 169 p. Sept. 4. General Information, series No. 111, Examples, Conclusions, and Maxims of Modern Naval Tactics. 26 plates. 8vo. Paper. 149 p. 15. Naval Professional Papers, No. 16; papers and discussions on engines, boilers and torpedo boats. 8vo. Paper. 219 p. Oct. 16. Astronomical and meteorological observations made during the year 1880 at the United States Naval Observatory. 4to. Cloth. 5 plates. P. Lxxix and 267 p. Dec. 20. The International Code of Signals for the use of all Nations. 4 plates. 8vo. Paper. 256 p. Bureau of Steam Engineering. Mar. 22. Annual report of the Chief of the Bureau of Steam Engineering for 1883. 8vo. Paper. 63 p. POST-OFFICE DEPARTMENT. Jan, 30. Street Directory of the principal cities of the United States. Second edition. 8vo. Paper. 43 p. Oct. 4. Letter carriers of the Saint Louis post-office—laws and regulations con- cerning letter-carriers and their duties. Saint Louis, October, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 16p. STATE DEPARTMENT. Mar. 28. Reports from the consuls of the United States on the commerce, manufac- tures, &c., of their consular districts, No. 36, December, 1883. 8vo. Paper. 397 p. Aug. 8 Commercial relations between United States and Central and South Amer- ica. S8vo. Paper. 3p. Oct. 17. Register of the Department of State corrected to October 1, 1884. 8vo.. Paper. 118 p. 1884. Jan, 23. June 30. Mar. 25. July 30. Nov. 6 ane co: Mar. 25 June 30 June 30 Aug. 25 Aug. 29 Sept. 3 Oct. 10 Oct. 17 Dec 6 Dec. 27. June 30. Dec. 19. REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF EXCHANGES. 129 SUPREME COURT, Rules of the Supreme Court of the United States, adopted January 7, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 24 p. Record of the Star Route trials. Second trial. 4 volumes. 8vo. Sheep. TREASURY DEPARTMENT. Annual report of the Treasurer of the United States to the Secretary of the Treasury for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1883. 8vo. Paper. 59p. Sixth annual report of the Treasurer of the United States on the sinking fund and funded debt of the District of Columbia. S8vo. Paper. 40p. Steamboat inspection service, steamboat inspector’s manual laws govern- ing the steamboat inspection service, Revised Statutes of the United States as amended at the first session of the Forty-seventh Congress, 1881-’82, to which are added the revised rules and regulations of the Board of Supervising Inspectors as amended January, 1882-’53, together with the various decisionsof the Treasury Department. Third edition revised, 1882~83-’84. 8vo. Paper. 222 p. . Instructions to custodians of public buildings under the control of the Treasury Department, October 10, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 20p. United States Coast and Geodetic Survey. . Atlantic Local Coast Pilot, sub-division 15, Delaware Bay and tributaries, 1st edition, appendix x11. 4vo. Paper. 139 p. . Summary Report of the progress of the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, for the fiscal year ending with June, 1883. 8vo. Paper. 21p. . Tide Tables, Pacific Coast, 1885. S8Svo. Paper. 66p. . Tide Tables, Atlantic Coast, 1885. 8vo. Paper. 136 p. . Pacific Coast Pilot Alaska. Partl. Svo. Paper. 333 p. . Methods and Results Field Catalogue of Time and Circumpolar Stars for 1885. Appendix No. 18. Report for 1883. 8vo. Paper. 91 p. . Methods and Results Field Catalogue of Time and Circumpolar Stars for 1885. Appendix No. 18. Report for 1883. 8vo. Paper. 91 p. . Methods and results, Report of a Conference on Gravity Determinations. Appendix No. 22. Report for 1882. 4vo. Paper. 13 p. . Catalogue of Charts 1884, J. E. Hilgard, Superintendent. 4vo. Paper. 68 p. . Summary Report of the progress of the United States Coast Survey for the fiscal year ending with June, 1883. 8vo. Paper. 20 p. Short descriptions of articles forming the Coast and Geodetic Survey ex- hibit at the Cotton Centennial Exposition, New Orleans, La., 1884-’85. 8vo. Paper. 25 p. Comptroller of the Currency. Instructions and suggestions of the Comptroller of the Currency in regard to the organization, extension and management of National Banks. 8vo. Paper. 39 p. Inspector-General of Steamboats. Annual Report of the Supervising Inspector-General of Steamboats to the Secretary of the Treasury, for the fiscal year ended June 30, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 23 p. S. Mis. 33——9 130 REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF EXCHANGES. Internal Revenue. 1884. Mar. 25. Series 7, No. 11, Revised United States Internal Revenue Gaugers Manual, embracing regulations and instructions, and tables prescribed by the Commissioner of Internal Revenue, by virtue of Sec. 3249, United States Revised Statutes. 1 plate. 8vo. Paper. 64 p. United States Life-Saving Service. 1884. Oct. 8. Annual Report of the operations of the United States Life-Saving Service for the fiscal year ending June 30, 1883. 8vo. Paper. 519 p. Light-House Board. June 30. List of lights in the waters and on the shores and banks of the Northern Lakes and Rivers of the United States, and also of the Canadian lights in these waters, corrected to January, 1884. 4to. Paper. 53 p. July 1. List of beacons, buoys, stakes, and other day-marks in the first light-house district, embracing the sea-coasts, bays, harbors, and rivers from the north- east boundary of the United States to Hampton Harbor, New Hampshire, corrected to May 1,1884. 4to. Paper. 42 p. Oct. 11. List of beacons, buoys, stakes, and other day-marks in the fourth light- house district, embraced in the sea-coasts, bays, harbors, and rivers from Squam Inlet, New Jersey, to Metomkin Inlet, Virginia, corrected to Sep- tember 1, 1884. 4to. Paper. 26p. . List of beacons, buoys, and stakes in the twelfth light-house district, em- bracing the sea-coast and bays of California, corrected to October 1, 1884. 4to. Paper. 14 p. - Oct. 16. List of beacons, buoys, and stakes in the second light-house district, cor- rected to August 1, 1884. 4to. Paper. 61 p. Oct. 25. List of beacons, buoys, and stakes in the fifth light-house district, corrected to August 1, 1884. 4to. Paper. 71 p. Dec. 4. List of beacons, buoys, and stakes in the third light-house district, embrac- ing the sea-coasts, harbors, and rivers from Gooseberry Point, Massachu- setts, southward along the coast as far as Squaw Inlet, New Jersey, and including Lake Champlain and Lake Memphremagog, corrected to Octo- ber 1, 1884. 4to. Paper. 77 p. Dec. 15. List of beacons, buoys, and stakes in the seventh light-house district, em- bracing the coast of Florida from Jupiter Inlet to Egmont Key, Tampa Bay, and Cedar Keys, inclusive; also Saint Mark’s, Saint Gecrge’s Sound, Apalachicola, Saint Andrew’s, and Pensacola Bays, corrected to October 1, 1884. 4to. Paper. 30p. Bureau of Statistics. June 30. The operations of the tariff act of March 2, 1883, for the six months ended December 31, 1883, April 21, 1884. Svo. Sheep. 70 p. Reciprocity of transportation facilities between the United States and the Dominion of Canada and the Canadian Pacific Railroad. 8vo. .Paper. Tsp: Jan. 10. Summary statement of imports and exports of the United States for the month ending— . ' October 31, 1883. 4to. Paper. 14 p. November 30, 1883. 4to. Paper. 14 p. December 31, 1883. 4to. Paper. 17 p. June 10. January 31, 1884. 4to. Paper. 18 p. February 29, 1884. 4to. Paper. 14 p. March 31, 1884. 4to. Paper. 14 p. 1884. June Jan. Mar. June July July Oct. Novy. Jan. Jan. 10. 10. 17. 30. 12. 10. REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF EXCHANGES, be Quarterly report relative to imports, exports, immigration, and navigation of the United States for the three months ended— September 30, 1883. 8vo. Paper. 133 p. June 30, 1883. S8vo. Paper. December 31, 1883. @vo. Paper. 1385p. . Document No. 588 (No. 10, April, 1883-’84). Summary statement of the im- ports and exports of the United States for the month ended April 30, 1884, and for the ten months ended the same, compared with the correspond- ing periods of 1833. 4to. Paper. 14 p. No. 3, 1883~84. Quarterly report of the Chief of the Bureau of Statistics, Treasury Department, relative to the imports, exports, immigration, and navigation of the United States for the three months ended March 31, 1884; also containing other statistics relative to the trade and industry of the country. 8vo. Paper. 396 p. Quarterly report of the Chief of the Bureau of Statistics, relative to the imports, exports, immigration, and navigation of the United States for the three months ending June 30, 1884; also containing other statistics relative to the trade and industry of the country. &vo. Paper. 573 p. . Index to quarterly reports of the Chief of the Bureau of Statistics, show- ing the imports and exports of the United States for the four quarters of the fiscal year ended June 30, 1884, and for the corresponding quarters of the year immediately preceding ; also embracing other statistical tables relative to the trade of this and foreign countries for various periods. 8vo. Paper. 12 p. WAR DEPARTMENT. . Official table of distances for the guidance of disbursing officers of the Army charged with the payment of money allowances for travel. 8vo. Paper. 189 pp. Official Army Register for January, 1884. svo. Paper. 390 p. . Report of board of officers to consider an expedition for the relief of Lieu- tenant Greely and party. S8vo. Paper. 192 p. Alphabetical list of additions made from June, 1882. 4to. Paper. 39 p. Army Paymaster’s Manual, for the information of the officers of the Pay Department of the United States Army. Revised to include June 30, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 78 p. Adjutant-General’s Office. General orders, 1883: No.83. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No.101. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 84. 8vo. Paper. 7p. No. 102. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No.8. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 05. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No.90. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 88. 8vo. Paper. 128p. No.91. 8vo. Paper. Ip. No.99. 8vo. Paper. 9p. No.94. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 103. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No.95. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No.104. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 86. 8vo. Paper. 1 p. No. 92. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No.93. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No.96. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No.97. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No.98. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No.100. 8vo. Paper. 18p. Circular No. 11,1883. 8vo. Paper. 3p. 132 1884. Jane woes: Mar. 22. & June 30. July 95. July 1. July 10. July 21. REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF EXCHANGES. General court-martial orders, 1883: No.53. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No.59. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No.54. 8vo. Paper. 6p. No.60. 8vo. Paper. 5p. No.55. 8vo. Paper. 7p. No.63. 8vo. Paper. 5p. No. 56. 8vo. Paper. 4p. No.52. 8vo. Paper. 8p. No.57. 8vo. Paper. 7p. No.61. 8vo. Paper. 4p. No.58: 8vo. Paper.: 1p. No. 62. 8vo. Paper. 9p. Circular No. 10,1883. 8vo. Paper. 2p. - Index of general court-martial orders, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 5p. General court-martial orders, 1883: No.1. 8vo. Paper. 9p. No.2. 8vo. Paper. 8p. No.3. 8vo. Paper.- 2p. No.4. 8vo. Paper. 2p. yy d Circular No. 12,1883. 8vo. Paper. 2p. General orders, 1884 : No.1. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No.3. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Nose SV0n eapers lap: No.4. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Circulars for 1884: : No.1, February 18,1884. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 2, March 14,1884. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 3, April 14,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 4, May 14,1884. 8vo. Paper. 3p. General orders, index to general orders for 183. General orders for 1884, Nos. 5-39, 41,43, 44, 46,47. 8vo. Paper. General court-martial orders, index for 1883, and No. 63, orders for 1884, Nos, 5-25. 8vo. Paper. Proceedings of a court of inquiry convened the 5th May, 1884, to examine into the accusations against Brig. Gen. David G.Swaim. 8vo. Paper. 308 p. General court-martial orders No. 27, January 4, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 6p. Circular, June 5,1884. 8vo. Paper. Ip. Circular No.5, June 10,1884. 8vo. Paper. 2p. General court-martial orders No.26. 8vo. Paper. 4p. General orders, 1884: No. 40. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 42. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 45. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Nos. 48 to 54, inclusive. 8vo. Paper. 10 p. No.64. 8vo. Paper. 12 p. General court-martial orders, 1884: No. 28, July 17, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 4p. No. 29, July 28, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 2p. . General orders, 1884: No.52. 8vo. Paper. ltable. 8p. No. 73, July 18,1884. 8vo. Paper. 8p. No. 60, June 30, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 63, July 7,1884. 8vo. Paper. 4 p. No. 66, July 10, 1884. S8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 67, July 11, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 68, July 12,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 79, July 26,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 92, August 11,1884. 8vo. Paper. 8 p.. | | REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF EXCHANGES. 1884. Aug. 14. No. 61, July 2,1884. 8vo.. Paper. 1p. No. 62, July 5,1884. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 71, July 16,1884. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 72, July 21,1884. 8Svo. Paper. 3p. Aug. 16. No. 57, June 24,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 58, June 26,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 69, July 14,1884. 8vo. Paper. 7p. No. 74, July 19,1884. 8vo. Paper. 5p. No. 78, July 25,1884. 8vo. Paper. 4p. Aug. 19. No. 65, July 9,1884. 8vo. Paper. 10 p. Aug. 20. Circular No. 6, July 8,1884. 8vo. Paper. 2p. 133 Aug. 21. Ordnance notes, No, 355. A peculiar phase of metallic behavior, by Capt. O.E. Michaelis. 2plates. 8vo. Paper. 5p. Aug. 23. The soldiers’ hand-book for the use of enlisted men of the Army, by N. Hershler. 8vo. Paper. 62 p. Sept. 3. General court-martial orders, 1884: No. 30, July 9,1884. 8vo. Paper. 4p. No. 31, July 25,1884. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 32, August 2,1884. 8vo. Paper. 7p. General orders, 1884: No. 80, July 28,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Sept. 4. No. 70, July 1551884. 8vo. Paper. 13 p. No. 81, July 29,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 82, July 30,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 83, July 31,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No: 86, August 4,1884. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 87, August 5,1884. 8vo. Paper. 4p. No. 88, August 6,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 89, August 7,1884. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 91, August 9,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Sept. 15. General court-martial orders, 1884: No. 33, August 4, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 4p. No. 35, August 18,1884. 8vo. Paper. 3p. General orders, 1884: No. 84, August 1,1884. 8vo. Paper. 4p. Sept. 18. Circular No.7, August 9,1884. 8vo. Paper. 2p. Oct. .24. An epitome of Tripler’s manual for the examination of recuits. 8vo. 51 p. Oct. 9. General orders, 1884: No. 85, August 2,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 93, August 12,1884. 8vo. Paper. 5p. No. 97, August 16,1884. 8yvo. Paper. 2p. No. 103, September 2, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Oct. 17. No. 100, August 25,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 105, September 6, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 109, September 19,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 95, August 14,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Qct. 9. General court-martial orders, 1884: No. 36, August 20,1884. 8vo. Paper. 6p. Oct. 28. No. 34, August 12,1824. 8vo. Paper. 4p. Nov. 13. No. 37, September 1,1884. 8vo. Paper. 4p. No. 43, October 4, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 4p. No. 40, September 23,1884. 8vo. Paper. 5p. Paper. 134 REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF EXCHANGES. 1884. General orders, 1884: Nov. 13. No. 94, August 13,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 98, August 20,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 99, August 22,1884. @vo. Paper. 1p. No. 102, September 1,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 104, September 3, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 106, September 8,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 107, September 12,1884. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 108, September 18,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 110, September 20,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 111, September 30.1884. 8vo. Paper. 1 p. No. 112, October 4,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 114, October 13,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 115, October 18,1884. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 116, October 20,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 117, October 21,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 118, October 22,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 119, October 23, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 120, October 24, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Nov. 15. No. 77, July 26,1884. 8vo. Paper. 32p. No. 90, August 7, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Nov. 17. General court-martial orders: No. 39, Sept. 22, 1884. 8Svo. Paper. 7p. No. 44, October 7,1884. 8vo. Paper. 8p. No. 45, October 16, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 41, September 25, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 42, September 26, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 46, October 17,1884. 8vo. Paper. 3p. Nov. 20. Circular: No 8, September 10,1884. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No. 9, October 10,1284. 8vo. Paper. 4 p. General orders: No. 113, October 6, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Dec. 10. No. 96, August 15, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 20p. Dec. 8. General court-martial orders: No. 49, November 3, 1884. 8 vo. Paper. 5 p. Dec. 13. No. 38, September 2,1884. 8vo. Paper. 2p. No. 47, October 20,1884. &vo. Paper. 4p. Dec. 9. General orders: No. 121, October 30,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. Dec. 30. No. 122, November 1,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. No. 123, November 5,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1l1lp. -, No. 126, November 22, 1884. 8vo. Paper. 3 p. No. 123, November 25,1884. 8vo. Paper. 3p. Circular: No. 10, November 10,1884. 8vo. Paper. 3p. General court-martial orders: No. 48, November 1, 1884. 8vo, Paper. 5p. No. 50, November 11,1884. 8vo. Paper. 3p. No.51, November 12,1884. 8vo. Paper. 5p. No. 52, November 13,1884. 8vo. Paper. 1p. July 1. Report on the International Exhibition of Electricity, held at Paris, August to November, 1881. 8vo. Paper. 287 p. REPORT ON THE OPERATIONS OF EXCHANGES. 135 1884. July 10. Professional notes. By Capt. Edward Maguire, Corps of Engineers, U. S. A. 2plates. 8vo. Paper. 28p. July 28. Studies on Coast Defense applied to the Gulf of Spezia. By Cesar Guarasce, Colonel of Engineers. 8vo. Paper. 111 plates. 20 p. Burlington, Iowa, during the month of October, 1879. Illustrated by one sketch and 41 plates. By Maj. Alexander Mackenzie. Svo. Paper. 38p. Sept. 10. Report on current-meter observations in the Mississippi River, near Ordnance Office. Ordnance notes: Jan. 10: No. 321, 1883. Experiments with small shot. 8vo. Paper. 17 p. No.317. The effects of the bombardment of the forts of Alexan- dria, July 11,1882. 3plates. 8vo. Paper. 48p. Mar. 22. No. 323. Machine guns. 3 plates. 4to. Paper. 23 p. No. 325, 1883. Account of the construction of bridges over the Kabul River, near Jalalabad, during the operations in Afghan- istan, 1880. 5plates. 4to. Paper. 9p. No. 326, 1883. Railways for military communications in the field. 3 plates. 4to. Paper. 23 p. No. 327, 1883. Provisional fortification. 10 plates. 4to. Paper. 8 p. No. 328, 1883. Krupp’s works. 4to. Paper. 16 p. No. 329, 1884. Trajectory of a projectile in vacuo. 4to. Paper. 5p. June 30. No. 324. Metallurgy of iron, by First Lieut. Constantine Chase, Third Artillery. 2 plates. 129 p. No. 330. Mano-la Tour and Gravelotte, by Lieut. John Bigelow, jr., Tenth Cavalry. 2plates. 69 p. No. 331. Fabrication of 8-inch Eureka projectiles. No. 332. Steel for gun hoops. 4to. Paper. 5p. No. 333. The 80-ton steam hammers of Creusot and Saint Chamond, 2 plates. 14 p. No. 335. Field artillery. 4to. Paper. 35 p. No. 336. Paints and lacquers for artillery material. 11 p. No. 337. Practical instructions in gunnery. 2 plates. 18 p. No. 338. ) 803. M. Moller discusses the suggestion thrown out by von Bezold to the effect that the winds in thunder-storms and Boden agree with the direction of the gradients, and do not correspond with the law of Buys- Ballot. This latter law, Moller states, affirms that, as a result of the acceleration due to the gradients, and under the influence of constant friction and by reason of the deflecting force of the earth’s rotation, there will for equal latitudes resuit also equal deviations of the wind from the direction of the gradients. It has many times been shown how this deflection must decrease if the air passes from strong to feeble gradients. On the other hand, the reverse has not been stated, namely, that a length of time to be counted by many hours is necessary to com- municate to a mass of air a motion deviating from the direction of the gradients, provided the air was originally at rest or did not possess such deviation. By a little computation Moller shows that for short distances and steep gradients, such as occur near a thunder-storm, the air—im- pelled by the difference of barometic pressure, and having both a for- ward velocity and a deviation due to the earth’s rotation—although it obeys them both, yet appears to obey only the first of these forces, be- ee METEOROLOGY. 351 cause that is over forty times larger than the second. (Z. 0. G. M., xix, p. 80.) ; 304. M. Moller, in his investigation on the temperature and move- ment of the air in a Béen, states that in 1880 he first recorded the sug- gestion that the shadows of the clouds caused strong winds, which, acting like gusts, are called Béen, and which accompany the streaks of rain from cumulus clouds. This explanation, however, seemed unsatis- factory, because such wind-gusts occur also at night time, when, of course, there are no shadows. The true explanation has, he thinks, been given by Képpen, namely, that the falling rain carries with it air from above, which on reaching the ground spreads out and increases _the strength of the prevailing wind. Combining his own and Koéppen’s ideas, he develops carefully the structure and growth of a thunder-storm, and succeeds in explaining very satisfactorily the mode of formation of hail and the low-lying scud in advance of the main cloud, and which the observer generally easily recognizes as rising up to feed the advanc- ing edge of the cloud. (D. M. Z., 1, p. 230.) 305. [Views similar, and in most respects identical with K6ppen’s and MOller’s, have during the last twenty years been frequently verbally communicated both by Prof. Joseph Henry and the present writer to fellow-Students of meteorology. They date at least as far back as 1838, when Espy was in the full tide of his studies of thunder-storms in Pennsylvania, a region where storms are developed to their fullest extent. Our hearty appreciation of the views of Képpen and Moller is en- hanced by their own kindly mention of that most genial of American enthusiasts. | 306. C. G. Finemann, of Upsala, in a study upon the “ trombe,” or tor- nado, of June 7, 1882, draws the foliowing conclusions: 1. The formation of a tornado is characterized by the simultaneous occurrence of great relative and absolute moisture, high temperature, almost perfect calm. 2. Tornadoes and thunder-storms originate under almost identical atmospheric conditions. 3, The two phenomena can occur together or separately. 4, Finiey’s work seems to suggest that either phenomenon may de- velop trom the other. 5. The tornado here studied certainly consisted in a strong ascend- ing current of air, revolving also in a direction opposed to that of the hands of a watch lying face upwards on the ground. 6. The ascending current formed an inverted cone out of the mate- rial carried up with it, which moved forwards towards the northeast. 7. The tornado was fed by moist air, which flowed over the earth’s surface with increasing velocity. 8. The moister the air by so much more did the interior velocity of the tornado increase. : 9. The air was precipitated into the tornado from below, like cold air 352 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. drawn into the fire of a burning forest; at some distance this draft was noticeable by the lowering of the lower portion of the clouds. 10. Subsidiary whirls formed under favorable circumstances. (Z. O. G.M., x¥X, p. 262.) 307. William M. Davis, of Cambridge, writing to Dr. K6ppen in refer- ence to the simoom [German, Samum], the latter replies by quoting the following as the characteristics of the simoom as experienced in the Indian deserts by Dr. Henry Cook : Its beginning is sudden; occasionally a cold current of air precedes it; it occurs ordinarily in the hot months, June and July; it occurs in the night as well as by day; its path is straight and definite; its pas- sage leaves a narrow trail behind; it burns and kills the animals and vegetables in its path; it is accompanied by a very noticeable smell of sulphur; it is described as like the current of air from a furnace, and certainly the temperature of the air within it is very high; it is not ~ accompanied by either dust or thunder and lightning. K6éppen shows that, assuming the rise of temperature in the simoom to be 16° C., then, if the air has been thus heated by the compression of a descending current, it must have descended about 4,000 meters ; but he thinks it not at all plain why the air should descend to the earth’s surface. There is not a perfect parallelism between the simoom and ordinary Béen, nor an antithesis between Béen and thunder- storms. (D. MM. Z., 1, p. 245.) 308. A. Klossowskij has discussed the observations of thunder-storms made in Russia by the observers of the Geographical Association since 1871. This series of reports was inaugurated at the instance of A. Woeikof, who also published the results for the first year (1871). The present volume gives a complete summary of the work since that time. 309. J. Ludevig presents the results of the observations of thunder- storms made during 1882-33, at the Government telegraph stations in Germany. The maximum number of storms occurred in May, 1882, but this was apparently abnormal; the normal maximum appears in July, 1882, and again in July, 1883. The maximum number of days on which thunder-storms occurred was 28 in June, 1832, and 30 in June, 1833, The storms came most frequently from the southwest and next fre- quently from the west; the hours during which most storms occur is from 3 to4 Pp. M., and the minimum frequency of storms from 12 to 3 Am. (2.0. Gs Mi, xIxs p.429.) 310. Dr. P. Andries, in a memoir on formation of thunder storms and hail, after a review of the older literature on the subject, adopts me- chanical theories very similar to those of Ferrel in his Meteorological Researches, part 2. With regard to the formation of a potential suf- ficient to produce lightning, he adopts the view that this is explained by the combination in one of numerous small diops of water; as to the origin of electricity on these small particles, he attributes that to friction METEOROLOGY. 553 and induction. (Annalen der Hydrographie und maritimen Meteorologie, 1884, p. 65.) 311. Prof. James Thomson, of the University of Glasgow, read before the Montreal meeting of the Brit. Assoc., a paper on whirlwinds and water- spouts, in which he adheres to the old view that the diminution of press- ure observed at the center of a hurricane is the cause of the movement of the wind, anid queries whether it may not be possible for the low pressure to be abated through the combined influence of rarefaction by heat and the whirling motion. He also thinks that in great whirlwinds the whirling motion may be propagated upwards to the top of the at- mosphere. He suggests that the dark clouds, and in tornadoes the pen- dent spout, may be due to the precipitation of moisture on account of abatement of pressure due to centrifugal force and ascension above the sea level. [Prof. James Thomson’s publications on this subject date from 1852, and especially 1857, but while his writings are always worthy of attention, it would seem that these particular points have already been clearly explained by other students of meteorology.] (Nature, XXX, p. 648.) 312. Prof. W. von Bezold, of Munich, has studied the question of the cold daysinMay. He finds that whenever high pressure prevails in the west and lower pressure in the east, and especially in southeastern Europe, a cold period occurs, and that this distribution of pressure is particularly liable to oceir in May. If this characteristic distribution fails, then the cold days also fail; the explanation of the coid days is therefore dependent upon the explanation of the occurrence of this distri- bution of pressure. After studying the isobars of Europe, he concludes that when in spring the warming ofthe northern hemisphere begins at the south and oceans and continents interchange their relations with reference to pressure and temperature, then the Balkan peninsula, to- gether with the land between the Adriatic and Black Sea, plays the part of a small continent. It is therefore warmed up with reference to the surrounding region, experiences a low barometric pressure, and es- pecially favors the development of storm-centers. These, therefore, cause the cool northerly winds and the cold days of Germany. (Z. 0. G. M. XVIII, p. 268.) 318. Dr. Képpen, in reference to the cold days in May, states that neither the explanations of Midler, Erman, Sainte Claire- Deville, Ass- mann, von Bezold, nor others seem to him to afford any satisfactory ex- planation of the question why the precise days from the 10th to the 13th should have such a decided tendency to be abnormally cold. (Z. 0. G. a. SEX, p. 133.) 314, KR. Billwiller states that he has been surprised that van Bebber, in his essay on the cold days in May, has so strongly stated that these always happened on definite dates, whereas Dove had so clearly proved that they are not simultaneous in different localities, nor do they hap- pen on a definite date at any one locality, whence Dove considers that 5. Mis, 83-——23 - 354 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1s84. any cosmic cause is out of the question. Now that this conclusion has been confirmed by von Bezold by his demonstration of their purely terres- trial cause, and that they occur pretty uniformly distributed through a long interval of time, it seems strange that KOppen should state that the inain point of the question has not yet been touched, and should again suggest cosmic explanations. Billwiller’s opinion is that there are no facts on record from which we can philosophically conclude that there are three definite cold days in May or that there is any problem here to be investigated. [In other words, this problem is to the German what the problem of the equinoctial storm is to the American. What- ever storm happens to occur within a week or two of the 21st of March or September is called the “equinoctial storm,” and we frequently find some one at work on the problem, “Why are storms especially apt to occur on the equinoctial day?”] (Z. O. G. M., xIx, p. 245.) 315. Dr: W. Képpen, in reply to Billwiller’s remarks, states decidedly. that he is not a believer in the three cold days of May, nor in their explanation by cosmic causes. The essence of the problem seems to him to lie in the following questions: 1. Is there really present that relative maximum tendency to cold days which, according. to many, especially the older observations and according to the investigations of von Bezold, apparently exists during © we asia pentade of May ? . If this is the case, how shall the fate be exactly determined ? te en if the first question should be denied, it would still remain of interest to show why the tendency to a south and a southeast gradient— that is, to a northeast wind—should be so decided in May, and should also not exist in June, where the excess of temperature of the continents above the sea remains the same while north and northeast gradients prevail. He shows that this may be due to the heating of distant lands, and remarks that also the studies of Dr. Krankenhagen on the baro- metric phenomena attending the cold period in June combine to show that in severely judging the belief in the definite character of special days we may lave gone too far. 316. Buys-Ballot writes expressing his entire agreement with Pro- fessor Billwiller. He states that every month has its cold days, and May least of all, and suggests a method of investigation which he is about carrying on. Ina parenthesis he exclaims, “ Shame, that in America climatology is so entirely lost sight of!” (Z. 0. G. M., x1x, p. 320.) 317. G. Hellmann, in a study of the annual change of temperature in Northern Germany, utilizes the averages by pentades for thirty-five years; he finds a decided retrogression or cold period about the middle of June for Breslau. The cold days of May vary so much as to their dates that they do not show in the averages of thirty-five years, while the cold days of June are well marked. Another retrogression, but in this case warm days, occur in the last week of September. (2. 0. G. M., XIX, p. 384.) bispesey | ee ee ee ee METEOROLOGY. 355 318. Dr. Krankenhagen, of Stettin, has investigated the distribution of temperature and pressure in Europe in June, and has shown that the pentade, June 1 to 14, is peculiarly liable to a slight fall of tem- perature, while on the other hand the isobars of June require such winds as must produce this temperature fall. In general the areas of low pressure that pass over Europe have a tendency to take a direction toward the northeast, east, or southeast, and are therefore followed by cold winds. (D. M. Z., 1, p. 11.) 319. Dr. Krankenhagen also contributes to the question of three cold days in May astudy based on the consideration that such may be caused by especially cold, clear nights; he therefore calculates how many days have been above the meai, and how many below; the mean negative departure we may call X, and positive departure Y; then the quotient X + Y shows how many more times the mean negative departure is greater than the positive. This ratio is 1.16 for the third pentade of May. CDM. Z., 1, p: 371.) 320. Dr. J. van Bebber, of the Hamburg Seewarte, publishes the re- sults of a study into typical weather phenomena in anticipation of a mare exhaustive publication by the Seewarte. This isa continuation of his studies upon the geographical! distribution, the paths and velocities of barometric minima; his object now being to ascertain in what man- ner these depressions influence the condition of the weather, especially in Germany, and whether it is not possible from any given condition of the weather to deduce practical rules for predicting the movement of the depressions and the fature weather. He first determines the prin- cipal paths followed by the majority of the storm centers, leaving to a future time the study of the erratic minima. The tabular view of the frequency with which storms traversed these principal paths shows a decided tendency of minima to follow in groups along any path once inaugurated by a leading storm. He aiso shows that the mean velocity of minima moving along the paths is always much greater than the general mean velocity of all minima indiscriminately. Therefore we conclude that along these principal paths the conditions are most favor- able for maintaining the intensity and rapid progress of minima. If we consider the distribution of pressure for each of these paths sepa- rately, we find characteristic relations ; thus, if a line be drawn from the minimum to the maximum pressure, or from the minimum normal to the closest isobars, we find the storm progress nearly perpendicular to this line; in other words, the progress of the minimum agrees closely with the direction of the strongest wind, thus agreeing entirely with the principle announced in 1872 by Rev. Clement Ley, namely, ‘extensive areas of very high pressure delay or turn aside the movement of a de- pression, in that each depression moves with the greatest ease in a direc- tion such that it shall have the highest pressure on the right-hand side of its path.” A relation is also apparent between the distribution of temperature 356 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1881. and the progress of depressions so that the direction of the movement forms an angle with the direction of the greatest rise of temperature, which angle varies between 45 and 90 degrees, being greater in summer than in winter, the highest temperature being on the right-hand side of the storm path. This principle is also indicated by Clement Ley in the following words: ‘The direction of progress of depressions in Western Europe varies in Europe between north-northeast and south-southeast, and is primarily dependent on the preceding general distribution of temperature, so that the movement is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees to the lower isotherms.” ‘These principles, announced 11 years ago in England, have, says van Bebber, not found the proper consideration in European weather predictions. After some explanatory words, he sums them both up in the following: The progress of depressions takes place approximately in the direction of the prevailing movement of the whole mass of air in the neighborhood of a depression. This statement would seem to support the assumption that the atmospheric whirl is carried along by the prevailing current of air. |We are now giving van Beb- ber’s statements nearly in his own words and reserve the privilege of stating that, although the connection between the phenomena is very nearly as he gives it, yet the rationale of the process is, we think, not at allas he seems to suggest.] By reducing pressures upwards and constructing isobars for an altitude of 2,500 meters and also for higher altitudes, he is led to the conclusion that the whirlwind move- ment is confined only to the lower strata of air, that the axis of the whirl is inclined to the left and slightly towards the front, and that the upper currents of air in the neighborhood of the whirl have nearly the same direction, so that those belong to a great ring progressing with the depression and in which the air that rises within the depression now sinks again. This agrees with the fact that the movement of the cirrus clouds agrees with that of the progress of the depression ; this also ex- plains why the upper clouds, which also move with the depression, are so prominent in advance, while on the left side of the path the cirrus clouds are so infrequent; this also explains why the principal storm paths marked out by van Bebber are especially followed in the colder season of the year and why the storm paths, numbered 1 and 4 by him, moving towards the northeast or east-northeast, occur most frequently in the warm season. Equally easy is it to explain why a number of suc- cessive storms have a tendency to follow the path pursued by some prom- inent leading one, for if atmospheric pressure and temperature are so distributed over a large part of the hemisphere as to be favorable to the production of a given storm path, then it is clear that succeeding depressions will follow the same path so long as the distribution of temperature and pressure does not change, and as these changes can only go on slowly it necessarily happens that storms and local weather changes some times show great similarity for days and weeks together. 821. [It is certainly to be regretted that the intense study under most METEOROLOGY. 3D favorable circumstances given continuously since 1870 to the tri-daily weather maps of the United States and Canada should not long ago have been supplemented by some general summary of the laws of storm progress and weather changes with which the officers of the Signal Service have become familiar. Guided by the writings of Redfield, Espy, Henry, and Ferrel, the deductive branch of meteorology was making rapid progress—greater than could possibly have been fol- lowed by those outside of the office. It was already in 1872 a matter of common note that storms and also areas of high pressure, &c., pur- sue successively the same or very similar paths, each one showing a progressive systematic difference from its predecessor, until by a sud- den change in distant surrounding circumstances the whole system was broken up and a new order of things inaugurated. These similarities between storm paths were frequently pointed out, both in the daily weather predictions and the Monthly Weather Review. An interest- ing illustration of this will be found in the daily predictions of the hurricanes of August 18 and 25, 1871, as made by the present writer for the official weather “Synopsis and probabilities” of the Army Signal Office.] Van Bebber continues by saying that only in the rarest cases are press- ure and temperature distributed around two storm-centers in the same manner, and to this circumstance principally is it to be attributed that the progress of and changes in the depressions show such extraordinary variety. If the distribution of pressure and temperature is reversed, then will the movement of the depression be hindered or entirely an- nulled, and at the same time it itself takes a long irregular form [the barometric trough of the Signal Service Bulletins], its longer axis per- pendicular to the pressure gradients, and from its ends frequent small minima break off that then follow the general current of air prevailing in their region; if, however, on either side pressure or temperature pre- vail, then the direction of the movement of the storm-center will be thereby determined. From this short explanation we see the great importance of these two principles in their application to weather predictions. If, however, we would form a correct prediction, we must extend our weather map to the greatest possible extent, especially toward the west, and study expressly the behavior of the great barometric maxima and minima that charac- terize certain regions of the earth. We see also the importance of the study of the cloud movements, especially the upper clouds. (Z. O. G. M., XVIu, p. 447.) 322. Teisserenc de Bort having studied the general weather condi- tions attending abnormal winters, further develops his generalizations relative to the “principal centers of action of the atmosphere,” and shows that the perturbations in the position and intensity of these at- mospheric centers correspond with important changes in the character of the weather. If, therefore. we y ould predict the weather for a long 358 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. time in advance we must determine the connection between the local weather and the general circulation over a large part of the earth’s sur- face as due to these centers. (Z. O. G. M., x1x, p. 105.) 323. [The centers of action, as he calls them, seem to be identical with the large areas of maximum and minimum pressure first marked out by the isobars of Buchan and generally known to meteorologists as conti- nental and oceanic maxima and minima. Teisserne de Bort gives in detail the types of weather peculiar to France for each location of the surrounding maxima and minima areas, but the assumption running through his essay to the effect that the changes of local weather are directly due to the changes in the pleiobars and meiobars, as they were called by Prestel, seems to us quite unwarranted. This matter is refer- red to in a circular of the Signal Office, published in June, 1871, ‘* How to use weather maps,” and was for several years carefully studied from Teisserenc de Bort’s present point of view, but the present writer was forced to the conclusion that some ulterior forces controlled both the local weather and the permanent or subpermanent highs and lows, so that although it is very convenient, for instance, to connect our Atlantic coast weather with the Atlantic area of high pressure between latitudes 20 and 30 degrees, yet it is not possible to say that the latter is cause and the other effect. | 324. H. H. Hildebrandsson has still further investigated the average distribution of meteorological elements, wind, clouds, temperature, rain, haze, or fog, with reference to the isobars ; he divides these latter into five zones, namely, the low ¢enter, three intermediate bands, and the high area. Each of these zones he divides into eight portions according as the gradient therein is directed toward the north, northwest, &c. The examination of six years of weather maps shows that for Upsala and for southern and central Sweden the following generalizations hold good: 1. The wind makes a greater angle with the gradient in summer than in winter and within a minimum than within a maximum; greater at sea than on land; greater for gradients directed towards the east and least for those towards the west. The strength of the wind is greatest for gradients directed towards the north and least for those towards the west and southwest. 2. The lower clouds move in directions deviating to the right from the direction of the wind at the earth’s surface; the lower clouds move nearly perpendicular to the gradients er parallel to the tangents of the isobars; for gradients towards the west the lower clouds are inclined more than 90°; that is to say, the air is moving away from the area of low pressure. 3. The cirrus clouds move from the minima out towards the maxima; this movement is feeblest near the center of depression and most rapid within the maximum zone; the movement is greater on the advancing side of a depression, or on the western side of a maximum; directly be- — es METEOROLOGY. Sh9 hind and above a low center the movement in the upper regions is for Sweden ordinarily from north or west, but there are cases in which the movement is from south or southeast, which latter is the ordinary case in England, according to Clement Ley. 4. The temperature in the maxima and minima areas is above the mean if the gradients incline towards the west, and below the mean if inclined towards the east; in winter the temperature is above its mean minimum and below in the maximum area; in summer this is reverseds The temperature differences between upper and lower stations are great- est when the gradient is directed towards the north or east, but least towards the south or west. 5. The quantity of clouds or rain are greatest for gradients towards the south or west and least towards the northeast. 6. The transparency of the air for distant objects is independent of barometric pressure; greatest fog occurs with gradients towards the west, but in the Kattegat the fog is most frequent for gradients towards the north. (Z. O. G. M., x1x, p. 469.) 325. Prof. P. Busin, of Rome, has endeavored to indicate the various positions that areas of high and low pressure must have relative to Italy in order to produce any given type of weather; he computes a new kind of wind rose for Rome, showing the probability of various types of weather for numerous relative positions of the isobars; the number of these types may amount to about 100. He concludes that the changes in the barometer for intervals of more than eight hours, and equally so the changes of temperature for twenty-four hours, are of little use for weather predictions; he suggests that it will be probably of more use to study the departures of the temperature and pressure for the normal values of the day and the hour for which the weather map is drawn. (Z. O. G. M., XIX, p. 235.) 326. [The actual pressures and temperatures and the departures have each their special significance—both are used by the Signal Office, but of the two the former has greater value in studying the mechanical laws of atmospheric motions, } 327. Dr. J. van Bebber, of Hamburg, reviews the works of Hoflmeyer aud Teisserenc de Bort, as well as Hildebrandsson, on types of weather, aad their connection with general distribution of temperature and press- ure. In conclusion he says: ‘If we glance back upon the progress made in these [and his own equally extensive] works we must come to the conclusion that the prevailing character of the weather on any day in Germany is determined by the more general distribution of weather conditions, and that we shall only understand the general weather changes when we take into consideration the seasonal interchanging of the general centers of action in the atmosphere. But within this region [Europe] rapidly progressing changes are completed that can indeed have no important influence on the prevailing weather of the larger areas but that are of fundamental importance for the weather of small bs 360 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1894. regions. Often barometric minima, formed on the edge of the greater centers of depression, glide in rapid succession along the edge of the great barometric maxima, exerting upon the wind and weather of the region through which they pass in broad circles an extraordinary influ- ence, and give the weather the character of variability. As a contribu- tion to this subject, see my investigation on Typical Phenomena, which I wrote at the beginning of the year 1883 for the introduction to the volume of Monthly Weather Reviews for 1882, and which will soon be published in greater fullness in the Archiv of the Deutsche Seewarte- In this investigation the effects of the depressions upon the weather are referred back to the well-established main tracks of storms, and these are brought into connection with the general atmospheric conditions. These and similar studies give the first foundation for weather predic- tion for a long period in advance. We are persuaded that the weather predictions for such periods are not among the impossibilities, but that hereafter they will at some time exceed in usefulness the daily predic- tion.” (D. M. Z., 1, pp. 22-70.) 328. [Predictions three and four days in advance based on similar considerations were made by the Signal Office in 1871 and 1872 on occasions of importance.] 6. rN X.—(a) ATMOSPHERIC ELECTRICITY; LIGHTNING; ()) TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM; (¢) GROUND CURRENTS; (d) AURORAS. 329. The subject of atmospheric electricity and terrestrial earth cur- rents was dealt with by the Electrical Congress held at Paris April, 1884, which recommended that the different countries should collect reports and forward them annually to the International Bureau of Tel- graph Administration at Berne, which bureau will digest and commn- nicate a summary in return. It also recommended that observations of earth currents be made in all countries. 330. The United States National Conference of Electricians, meeting at Philadelphia in 1884, renewed these recommendations, commending them most heartily to the action of our Government, and appointing a committee to confer with the Chief Signal Officer, who is commissioned to collect the data for the United States, and who has already for two years been conducting preliminary observations on atmospheric elec- tricity with a view to the addition of this item to the Signal Service daily report. 331. E. Hoppe publishes a history of electricity (Leipsic, 1884). This volume of 622 pages shows great industry on the part of the author, who has probably made his work quite as exhaustive as would be profit- able to the most patient reader. He divides the progress in this science into the following epochs: (1) Before Franklin; (2) Franklin and Cou- lomb; (3) from Volta to 1819; (4) electricity and magnetism; (5) from Ohm to Helmholtz; (6) more recent progress. (D. J. Z., 1, p. 419.) 332. Prof. P. G. Tait, of Glasgow, in a lecture before the Scottish METEOROLOGY. ; 361 Meteorological Soc¢i>ty, gives his views on the source of the elec- tricity of the air about as follows: The new kinetic theory of gases teaches that in a cubic inch of saturated aqueous vapor under atmos- pheric pressure there are contained some three hundred trillion of par- ticles. ‘This corresponds approximately to 755 of a cubic inch of water, or to one rain drop of ordinary size. When every particle of vapor be- comes electrified for any reason, and all are at the saine potential, then, after the union of all into one rain drop, the potential of the latter will be fifty billion times greater. From this it is evident that if from any reason every particle of vapor received so slight a potential that it is im- perceptible to our most delicate electrometers, yet the formation of drops of water from these particles would explain the most terrible strokes of lightning. Some years ago it occurred to me that the simple contact of rapor particles with those of the air by the process of diffusion going on between them must be sufficient to produce this extremely small poten- tial. Thus the source of atmospheric electricity is the coutact of two snbstances, as in Volta’s apparatus, where it is the contact of two dry metals. Experiments upon a small scale have not as yet confirmed this view, nor can it be thoroughly investigated without making them on so large a scale that private means are inadequate to cover the expense. oO. G.M., xr, p. 301.) 333. Prof. P. G. Tait communicates a critical summary of allsuggested theories as to the source of atmospheric electricity. His own contact theory is given above; the other theories may be briefly summarized as follows: (1) Aerial friction; (2) Pouillet, combustion and evaporation; (3) Saussure, vapor condensation ; (4) Peltier; and von Lamont, the per- manent negative electrical charge of the earth by conduction and in- duction clectrifies the air and vapor; (5) Sir William Thomson, air is electrified by contact with the ground, and remains so after ascending in the ordinary convection currents; (6) Becquerel, electified corpuscles travel from the sun to the earth’s atmosphere; (7) Miihry, a direct effect of solar radiation; (8) Liiddens, friction of vapor against the dry air; (9) The capillary surface tension of water drops; (10) The production of hail-storms; (11) Friction of air against the ground or against cur- rents of air. (Nature, x1x, p. 517). 334, Prof. Edlund, of Stockholm, has endeavored to determine numer- ically the amount of the unipolar induction due to the relative move- ments of the atmosphere and the earth considered as a magnet. The measures which he has made in Stockholm give for a layer 1 meter thick at the equator an electro-motive force of 0.0321 Daniell’s cell. Allowing that the moist air is a good conductor, and that the clouds have an average height of 1,000 meters, he reckons that between the earth and the clouds there must exist an electro-motive force of at least 23 Dani- ell’s, which abundantly explains the electric tension ordinarily observed in the air. The extraordinary electric tension necessary to produce a lightning flash originates according to him in the increase of tension 362 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. that takes place when the volume occupied by the aqueous vapor is so enormously diminished as in the formation of rain drops, a view that is apparently similar to that of Tait and other authorities. (Z. O. G. M/., XIX, p. 535). ; 835. Prof. H. Dufour communicates to the Swiss Scientific Association the results of his observations on the electricity of the air as made in the laboratory at Lausanne. From six months’ observations with a Mascart self-register, he finds approximately the maxima at 7 A. M. and 9 p.M.; the minima between 3 and 5 P.M. and3and4A.M. Negative electricity occurs frequently during very hard snow; occasionally two suecessive precipitations separated by clearing weather show opposite electricities. The conditions recorded by the electrometer are very complicated ; they depend upon the potential of the air at the water- dropper, and on the induction of electrical layers on the water dropping from the tube; in fact, the records of the electrometer are like those of a thermometer hung freely in the air whose temperature is that which results from conduction to the neighboring air and radiation to more distant objects. Dufour has attempted to separate the electric indue- tion and conduction from each other as follows: The discharge tube was made to end in the center of a metallic cage of 40 centimeters cube, each of whose six metallic sides could be removed without disturbing the others. If the cage is entirely closed the electrometer shows the poteutial of the mass of air streaming through it; if one or other side beremoved, the instrument comes under the additional influence of induc- tion through a definite region of space. Together with these observations, Dufour, by allowing drops of water to fall through unelectrified air, showed that electricity was more evi- dent in air filled with water-dust than in pure air. Clouds of smoke from burning wet straw, carried in currents of air past the apparatus, showed for each cloud the presence of electricity, similarly clouds of steam from a tube communicating with the earth. If the air of a great. hall was electrified and strong drafts produced within, the hall, the electrometer showed variations similar to those recorded by the Mas- cart during the prevalence of north winds. Attempts to produce elec- tricity in the air by the sudden condensation of vapor into fog gave negative results. (Z. O. G. M., xx, p. 129.) 336. Prof. L. Palmieri publishes a little memoir summing up all his works upon atmospheric electricity. According to him the electricity of the earth’s surface is induced by that of the air. The potential of the air is always positive in clear sky, and so, also, during a cloudy sky, pro- vided that no rain has fallen within 70 kilometers; but as soon as rain falls, positive and negative electricity rapidly alternate. Lightning ean only cecur during or in connection with rainfall. The origin of atmos- pheric electricity is, he thinks, to be found in the condensation of aqueous yapor. (Z. O. G. I., xvii, p. 80.) 337. Dr. S. Kalischer, of Berlin, has experimentally investigated the METEOROLOGY. 363 condensation of steam as a cause of electrification, and finds wholly neg- ative results. (Nature, XxIx, p. 227.) 338. G. Le Goarant de Tromelin publishes in the Comptes Rendus of Paris his theory that the principal cause of atmospheric electricity consists in the friction of moist masses of air on the surface of the earth orocean. The electrified molecules of water rise above and form clouds on whose surface the electricity is expanded, which then gives occasion to lightning; during the afternoon and evening the water, vapor, and clouds, coo] down, the electric tension on the individual particles of mist becomes greater, and the electric discharges known as heat-lightning oceur. (Paris, Comptes Rendus, 1884, p. 248.) 339. Dr. Linns, of Darmstadt, in reference to the origin of atmos- pheric electricity, suggests a laboratory experiment which he thinks is new and will go far to elucidate his view of the subject, according to which the electricity of the rain and thunder clouds can only affect the instruments, and give the phenomena of high tension, through the sepa- ration in space of the two principal parts of the cloud, namely, the air and the vapor. The three fundamental questions are the following: (1) whether electricity is first formed during the fall of the precipitation possibly through its friction on the air, or (2) whether it is produced by the process of condensation itself, or (3) whether before the precipitation, in the mixture of air and vapor, the molecules of these components are not laden with the opposite electricities. Linns considers the latter as the most plausible, in view of our present knowledge of electricity, that in fact the electricity of the clouds results from the well-known phenomena of contact electricity observed in the contact of heitero- genous bodies; the molecules of the components of a mixture of gases are, in consequence of the enormous number of impacts which, accord- ing to the latest theory, occurs in every second, oppositely electrified by contact; this electricity, however, can only produce an exterior effect through a rapid separation of the gases ; the original mixture itself must always appear non-electric on account of the intimate mixture of the oppositely electrified molecules, and since the sum of the positive and negative electricities must be equal to each other. His proposed experiment looks to the rapid separation of the vapor and gas by ab- sorption, and the experiment should succeed with other gases and vapors besides those of the atmosphere. 340. Dr. E. Hoppe, of Hamburg, having opposed this hypothesis from a theoretical point of view, Dr. Linns replies suggesting other experi- ments, and also states that he has now, since August, 1883, conducted observations on the loss or dissipation of electricity by conductors ex- posed to free atmosphere ; he finds the loss least in winter, greatest in summer, less in the morning and evening, greater in the day-time. He proposes that lines of equal electric loss be constructed on the daily weather charts, by the study of which our knowledge of atmospheric electricity will be much assisted. (D. M. Z., I, p. 464.) 364 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. 341. Lieutenant Lephay, with a Mascart self-register and a water- dropping collector 3 meters above the earth’s surface and 24 meters above the ocean, at the French international station at Cape Horn, de- duces the following results as to atmospherie electricity: 1. The normal tension is positive and between 50 and 70 volts; its maximum occurs in clear sky and frosty weather. 2. The daily maxima and minima ordinarily observed were only ap- parent at the cape in beautiful weather, with clear, blue skies free of clouds. 3. Whenever the sky is beclouded after a fine day the normal ten- sion immediately changes, and vice versa when the cloudiness clears away. 4, Clouds affect the electrometer in different ways, according to the form of the precipitated water, and even according to their direction from the observatory ; cumuli increase the positive tension; high cirro- cumuli increase it still further to plus 400 volts; cirro-stratus seem to have no influence; fog and fine rain produce a positive tension that is sometimes very high. 5. With hail there always comes an extraordinary strong, negative tension, so that even sparks dart from the upper part of the apparatus. 6. Snow gives always a positive tension, and by so much the greater as the snowflakes are larger. 7. Rain, with four exceptions, always gave a negative tension. 8. A fall of snow-dust and small ice-crystals on the 8th of May oc- curred with a decided positive tension. 9. Of three sleet storms, two occurred with foggy weather, fine rain, and positive tension, and one with heavy rain and negative tension. 10. For twelve or fifteen hours before the outbreak of heavy winds and gusts the positive tension increased. It is not possible to say what tension prevails during the storm itself, since the rapid-passing clouds obscure the influence of the winds by their own more powerful effect. The dry, warm, north-northwest or northeast winds diminish the posi- tive or increase the negative tension; the cold west, southwest, and south-southwest winds increase the positive tension. The strongest electric phenomena occurred with moist winds from the west-northwest aud west-southwest. (Z. O. G. M., xx, p. 471.) 342. Prof. E. Mach has more accurately investigated the amount of protection from alightning discharge, as actually experienced by an ob- ject inside of a metal box representing the wire-cage inclosure in Mel- sen’s system of protection from lightning. He finds that although the theoretical explanation of Melsen’s system must be slightly modified, still even when the wire of the cage is brought to a red heat by the lightning discharge the interior will be almost perfectly protected. (Z. OV GRIN SxIx, p.-264:.) 343, Prof. J. J. Spartsch, of Breslau, in an essay on the climatology of Greece, states that the statistics of the thunder-storms, or of days on a METEOROLOGY. 365 which thunder is heard, shows that the islind of Corfu belongs to a re- gion in which electric discharges are more frequent than in any other part of Europe. (Z. 0. G. M., XIx, p. 123.) 344. P. von Salis, telegraph inspector, has collected a mass of statis- tics relative to lightning on telegraph lines, and at other stations dur- ing the past thirty years in three cantons of Switzerland. He finds— 1. That in a remarkable way, with extraordinarily few exceptions, and even then only where we may safely infer the presence of a great quantity of water in the ground, all and every lightning discharge occurs upon telegraph lines in the immediate neighborhood of a small or large brook or river; further, these also occurred in the case of the telegraph poles established for conveying submarine lines on the shore of the lakes and never occurred elsewhere. 2, That the lightning for the past thirty years has occurred more fre- quently on lines in the lowlands and valleys inclosed between high mountains than on the highest Alpine passes. This latter conclusion is borne out by the following table: Altitude of the line. | Length of the line. li Senate | | M. Kilometers. Under 500 226 16 1, 000 263 4 1, 500 156 4 2, 000 196 6 2, 500 65 1 if (Z. O. G. M., XVI, p. 384.) 348. Prof. W. von Bezold has discussed the cases of destructive light- ning in Bavaria during the years 1833 to 1882; this work is a continu- ation of a lesser work undertaken some fifteen years ago. Among his results we note that the frequency of destructive lightning when re- duced to uniformity in the matter of buildings has almost steadily in- creased in forty years to more than three times its previous frequency, a remarkable phenomenon but apparently well established. As the prin- cipal object of his investigation, von Bezold presents on a chart the geographical distribution of lightning strokes for the year. (D. M. Z., I, p. 339.) 846. Dr. Kayser exhibited to the Berlin branch of the Meteorological Society photographs of flashes of lightning, one of which showed four parallel flashes from top to bottom, which must have occurred simulta- neously or in very close succession; his opinion was that a double dis- charge going and coming had occurred, the course of which (through air of least resistance) had of course been displaced by a strong wind. The amount of the displacement could be observed on the photographs whence be calculated the time between the first and second discharge. (Nature, XXX, p. 662.) 366 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884 347. K. Schering, of G6ttingen, describes a new instrument for de- termining the variations of the vertical component of terrestrial mag- netic force. This has been used at GO6ttingen in connection with the International Polar Observations; it has an advantage in that it is en- tirely free from the perturbing influences of friction ; is much less influ- enced by the torsion of the suspension thread and by the effect of tem- perature on the center of gravity of the needle, which consists of a magnetized steel tube 300 millimeters long and 10 millimeters interior diameter. (Z. O. G. M., x1x, p. 547.) 348. A. L. von Tillo has collected together all possible data relative to the geographical distribution and secular variation of the magnetic declination and dip in European Russia. (Z. O. G. M., x1x, p. 550.) 849. Dr. Guido Schenzl publishes in one volume the result of sixteen years’ labor on terrestrial magnetism in Hungary. The observations extend from 1865 to 1879. All data are reduced to the normal station at Munich, and the normal epoch, 1875.0. The charts show by isogonic and other lines the general distribution of declination, dip, and inten sity. (Z. 0. G. M., Xvu, p. 248.) 350. EK. E. Blavier, of Paris, having organized a very careful system of observations, publishes a study on earth currents, made in accordance with the suggestions of the Electrical Conference held at Paris in 1881. As director of the telegraphic administration of france, Blavier has had extensive opportunities and has used them skillfully. He finds the general direction of the line of maximum electro-motive force in France from northwest to southeast inclined 56° to the magnetic meridian. (Nature, Xxx, p. 106.) 351. Prof. H. Wild has contributed to the subject of earth currents an important study upon those observed in his buried telegraph cables in the neighborhood of the observatory of Pavlosk. The principal series of observations previously made were those by Lamont, 1859, with lines only 100 meters long; Airy, 1862, with lines 13 and 16 kilometers long; Galli, 1880, lines 4 and 6 meters long. {Lieutenant Ray, at Point Bar. row, 1852, used four lines, each of about 300 meters length.] Professor Wild used four lines, north, south, east, and west of the central mag- netic observing station, which is itself underground. ‘The lines of wire were each 1 kilometer in length, and crossed each other at the ob- servatory, where the galvanometer was established. He deduces the following results: 1. In this neighborhood in seasons of magnetic calm the earth current is so feeble that its difference of potential for one kilometer is less than the uncertainty of our measurements, or 0.001 of the electro-motive force of one Daniell’s cell. 2. The currents observed by Galli at Velletri, on bis short line, were wholly due to the ground plates; those observed by Lamont were partly ground-piate and partly terrestrial currents; and those observed by METEOROLOGY. oor Airy on his long line undoubtedly show the presence of terrestrial cur- rents, but there is no means of separating the one from the other. 3. In magnetic calms the difference of electric potential between ground plates 1 kilometer apart, so far as it is due to terrestrial cur- rents, is less than 0.001 volt, while so far as due to the plates themselves it can easily amount to 0.05 volt, or even more; at times of magnetic perturbations it is only rarely that the first difference increases to an equality with the second. 4. In such short lines it is therefore imperative that the observation be so arranged that we may distinguish between the terrestrial and the ground-plate current, and this is easily done by making ditferent com- binations of the four plates by means of the four connecting cables. 5. For plates 1 meter square and L kilometer apart the resistance of the earth may be estimated at from 30 to 60 ohms; if, therefore, the resistance of the cable and that of the galvanometer coil be each about 40 ohms, so that the total resistance of plate and wire be about 100 ohms, then a galvanometer must have a sensitiveness of 0.000002 ampere for one division of the scale in order that the deviations in times of great magnetic perturbations shall not frequently exceed the limits of the scale, supposing the latter to be 250 divisions long, cor- responding to 0.05 volt. 6. The ratio of the strength of the earth current in any conductor to the strength of the ground-plate current is independent of the resist- ance of the conductor and of the size of the earth plate, but increases with the distance between the latter; therefore an increase in the size of the ground plates, or the introduction of resistance in the conductor, do not tend to weaken the ground-plate current in comparison with the terrestrial current. 7. If we desire to observe the terrestrial current during magnetic calms, the distance between the plates must be at least 50 kilometers; for shorter lines, say from 1 to 5 kilometers, the terrestrial current can- not be satisfactorily observed unless the ground plates are much more nearly alike than ordinarily attained. (Z. O. @. M., XIX, p. 55.) 352. H. Wild, from a further study of observations made up to Sep- tember, 1883, draws the following conclusions: 1. The earth current appears not like a current of nearly uniform in- tensity, but as alternating stronger and weaker currents, which rapidly change their direction in space. 2. The east-to-west components are stronger than the north-and-south component, or the direction of the current is nearer the parallels than the meridians. 3. Only by taking the mean of the twenty-four term days during the year do we find traces of slight diurnal change whose amplitude corre- sponds nearly to 0.0008 volt.’ The diurnal change of the earth current is therefore not the cause of the diurnal change in the magnetic ele- ments, 368 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. 4, As soon as the earth currents in both lines become strong, the mag- netie instruments deviate from their ordinary positions, and these per- turbations increase with the strength of the earth currents, but not in any regular proportion. 5. The changes in the south-to-north line preceded by about five min- utes the changes in variation of declination, and similarly the current in the east-to-west line preceded the changes in the horizontal intensity, so that the earth current would appear as the primary cause. He con- cludes that the earth currents are the primary cause of many pertur- bations, but not the cause of the periodic variations in the magnetic elements. (Z. O. M. G@., XIx, p. 510.) 353. Prof. K. Schering, of Goéttingen, criticising Professor Wild’s re- sults, states that the method is not thoroughly reliable, and expresses his conviction that we cannot determine a difference of potential be- tween two points of the earth, nor even prove its existence, if we use ground plates which by contact with the earth become electrified in any unknown manner. He recommends the method introduced by W. Sie- mens in the programme of the German North Polar expedition for 1882- 83 as the only one to be used in determining the currents induced by the changes taking place in the magnetic force of the earth. (Z. O. G. MW... SIX, ps.552.) 354. The great magnetic storm and auroral display of November 17, 1882, is abundantly discussed, with numerous contributions of observa- tions, throughout vols. xxvui and xxvitt of Nature. 355. T. W. Backhouse, of Sunderland, collects together all accessible observations on the spectrum of the aurora, and-shows that the number of striking coincidences between it and the modified air spectrum make the suggestion that they are identical one worthy of consideration. (Nature, XXVIII, p. 209.) 356. O. Jesse discusses the auroral are observed October 2, 1882, and places it at an altitude of 122.2 kilometers, with a probable error of 4.5 kilometers. (Z. O. G. M., XVIII, p. 238.) 357. O. Jesse, in some remarks on the determination of the altitude and position of the aurora, states that the very rapid changes going on during a display make it important to have a method of determining its altitude by observations made at one place. He has, therefore, devel- oped such a method, which is published in full in the Astronomische Nachrichten, No. 2540. This method is based upon the assumption that the rays constituting the aurora lie on the surface of a cone whose apex jS in the interior of the earth, where the direction of any one ray and the osculating magnetic axis of the earth intersect each other. The appli- cation of this method requires that we should measure for as many rays as possible the angle under which the ray or its prolongation intersects the horizon; also, the azimuth of the point in which the ray cuts the horizon, together with an accurate determination of the time; further- more, for some of the rays the apparent position of their highest exten- METEOROLOGY. 369 sion is to be determined. Tor these observations he proposes a binoc. ular attached to a circle having a horizontal axis which revolves around a vertical axis, so that the binocular can have the plane of its axes brought into the plane of the auroral beams. Many observations show that the auroral rays arrange themselves pre-eminently along the mag- netic parallels in curves that cut the magnetic meridians at right angles; they also show that the auroral phenomena as arranged along the mag- netic parallels follow the curves of equal total magnetic intensity. (7. O. G. M., X1x, p. 405.) 358. Dr. H. Ekama, of Haarlem, gives a summary of the observations on the aurora made by the International Polar party sent by the gov- ernment of the Netherlands to the Sea of Kara. The aurora was in general very unsteady and variable, so that drawings could rarely be made. Ares frequently occurred, but soon changed to the form of bands; the dark band below the are was never distinctly seen. The aurora Was invariably visible when the heavens were clear and the moon not too bright; the finest appearances occurred at about 10.30 P. M., when the corona most frequently occurred; the bands were strongest about 9.30 p. mM. The anroras were generally on the north side of the heavens, and only reached to the south of the zenith after a very bright display; the highest point of the ares did not lie in the magnetic gra- dient, but in the astronomical meridian. Out of 86 observed ares and 66 bands the summits of 64 and 41, respectively, lay in the astronomical meridian. Ekama has computed the altitude of his auroras by the for- mula given by Nordenskiold in his account of the Vega’s wintering in Bebring’s Sound, 1878~79; the results of nine nights agree closely, and give for the distance of the are above the earth’s surface 0.035 of the earth’s radius; for the radius of the nearly horizontal are itself 0.934; and for the distance of the center of this circle below the earth’s surface 0.02 of the earth’s radius, which value agrees with that of Nordenskiold. The auroras were geuerally very faint; the arcs had nocolor. The wave length of the peculiar auroral line was determined by the spectroscope at 556.535 millionths of a millimeter; no other lines were visible; even a wholly red aurora gave only this yellow-green line. No connection was found between the polar bands of clouds and the auroral light. Out of 203 polar bauds the vanishing or converging points were distributed as follows: Trend of vanishing No. of Trend of vanishing No. of | points. Cases. points. Cases. The direction of the polar bands probably depends on the direction of the wind prevailing at the cloud level. (Z. 0. G. M., x1x, p. 482.) 8. Mis, 33——24 370 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. 359. A. Paulsen, of Copenhagen, gives in Nature, xxix, p. 337, the results of observation on the height of the aurora as made at Godthaab, of which the following notice appears in the Austrian Zeitschrift fiir Meteorologie: The results of observations at that station on the altitude of auroras were as follows: | Number of cases. | Altitude. || Number of cases. | Altitude. Kilometers. || Kilometers. ae eae a a 68.8 1 We ae eat gy Bile tS Fa. 20 to 30 ee aie eae ian Ie5OtONGOs iil lpaleeeeeen ee coe see 10 to 20 Dern eae ee eros 40 to 50 14). Gocimecaanessnent 0 to 10 Rate PS etd ee 30 to 40 Of the latter 14 cases the lowest were, respectively, 3.72, 3.69, 3.22, 238 14-1.99, 1.90, 1.30, 0:61 360. Prof. H. Fritz, of Zurich, states that as these observations were very carefully made, the distance between the two observers being 5.8 kilometers, they seem especially worthy of study, and undoubtedly confirm the observations of S. Fritz, made at Ivigtut, and those of Steenstrup, made in Iceland, and assure us that undoubtedly the auroral light may exist even at the ground. He has therefore at once collated all previous records of low-lying auroras, and makes some general remarks upon the present staté of our knowledge with regard to these and the character of the observations still needed to further elucidate the subject. (Z. O. G. ML, x1x, p. 290.) 361. Prof. H. Fritz, in a general review cf Tromholt’s Nordlysets Perioder and of Rubenson’s Catalogue of Swedish Auroras, finds that the 111-year period, first determined by him in 1862 and confirmed by Loomis for the American auroras, is also strongly confirmed by Ruben- son’s catalogue. He also finds that the influence of the bright light of the moon in introducing an apparent lunar period, as first shown by him in 1864, is fully confirmed by Tromhelt from the study of observations at Godthaab and Christiania. (Z. O. G. M., XVII, p. 321 ) 362. Prof. Sophus Tromholt, in his ‘Om Nordlysets Perioder,” pub- lished by the Institut Mét. Danois, deduces the following conclusions from the observations of the aurora made at Godthaab, in Greenland, during 1865 to 1880 by Professor Kleinschmidt: 1. Everything pertaining to the variable frequency of auroras in Godthaab proves that the phenomenon exists there under quite different conditions from those obtaining in lower latitudes. 2. The number of observed auroras is inversely proportional to the square root of the cloudiness. 3. After correcting for cloudiness there remains not only no parallel- ism between the .sun:spots and the auroras, but even an almost diamet- rical difference as to frequency. 4. The maximum of auroras is delayed two years behind the minimum aa METEOROLOGY. EY @| of sun-spots, but the next following auroral minimum coincides with the sun-spot maximum. 5. Some observations by Bloch, 1841 to 1846, show that the number of auroras is very large at the minimum of sun-spots, but decreases as the sun-spots increase. 6. By separating the evening and morning auroras he finds the former twice as numerous as the latter, and that itis probable that the evening auroras give us the best idea of the true condition of the atmosphere with reference to these phenomena. 7. The morning and evening auroras both show a maximum in the polar region at the time of the winter solstice. 8. Kleinschmidt distinguishes eight types of auroras, three stationary, and five of them movable. Of these the most interesting is his type number 7, namely, rays arranged in a band stretching from the north- east to the southwest and passing through the zenith. This phenomenon rises in the east like a column of fire from some point in the interior of Greenland. The column is narrowest and brightest over the land, while its southwestern extremity, namely, over the sea, is slightly broader and fainter, so that in general it does not seem to touch the southwest horizon. These arches almost always take the same position. [This form of arch, which is comparatively rare in Europe, is much more fre- quent in the United States and Canada. An attempt to locate several such arches and to explain their structure will be found in the report of the Chief Signal Officer for 1876. | 9. The aurora very rarely appears to the north of Godthaab, the cen- ter of the phenomenon is most frequently between the south and south- southeast, and this holds good for the whole of the west coast of Green- Jand. 10. The color of an aurora is almost invariably white, except only a little red or green during the most rapid movemeuts; not the slightest noise has ever been heard. 11. With reference to the oscillation north and south of the zone of greatest auroral frequency, Tromholt finds that the relative frequency of auroras which occur in the zenith or to the north of the observer has an annual period showing two minima at the equinoxes and a maximum at the winter solstice. 2. In every month he finds that the morning auroras are more fre- quent in the zenith and the north than in the south, and that the re- verse holds good for the evening auroras. 13. As regards the auroras in the daytime, his figures confirm Wey- precht’s conclusion that, in the neighborhood of the autumn equinox, the auroral zone stretches toward the south and then turns toward the north to reach its northernmost position at the winter solstice, if then returns southward and Lasits southernmost position at the spring equi- nox. 14, In the course of twenty-four hours the auroral zone moves north- 372 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. ward during the night and southward during the day. This explains at once the daily period which is especially marked in middle latitudes where the maximum frequency of auroras occurs some hours before midnight. 15. At the time of the aurora maximum the frequency at Godthaab exceeds not only the absolute but also the relative frequency for the zenith for this locality, or others more to the north of it; a similar statement is true for the time of minimum. Therefore, in the course of the eleven-year period, there is a periodic movement of the auroral zone which lies further north during the sun-spot minimum than during the maximum. 16. We see thus that a perfect harmony exists between the eleven- year period and the annual and diurnal periodicity, so that these three periods have one and the same cause, namely, the oscillation of the auroral zone. 17. Considering each of Kleinschmidt’s seven types separately, Trom- holt finds that during the auroral maximum not only the frequency, extent, and intensity, but also the variety of kinds surpasses those of the minimum. 18. Between the periodicity of the cirrus clouds and that of the aurora a connection exists, such that these phenomena have their max- ima and minima almost at the same time. Trombolt concludes that we are not able to establish a satisfactory theory as to the nature and cause of the aurora, but that it is not a cosmic phenomenon is shown by the want of agreement in the auroral periods tor the whole earth. For the present, therefore, observations are of the first importance. He has organized a network of observers for Scandinavia, Finland, Denmark, England, and Iceland, and has already shown that over so small a region as Norway no day passes without an aurora at one or more points. (Z. O. G. Jl., XVIII, p. 306.) 863. Prof. S. Lemstrém, of Helsingfors, gives the results of his own observations on artificial] auroras at Oratunturi and Sodankyla and Pie- tarintunturi, (Nature, XXvutl, p. 60.) 364. Prof. S. Tromholt communicates a general account of his latest researches, during 1882 and 1883, into the aurora and its phenomena in Northern Finmark, where the aurora is seen almost every night in nu- merous forms and frequently very low down, although his own estimate ot its height is 150 kilometers. (Nature, XXVU, p. 394.) 365. Aiter concluding his special observations in Kautokeino, Nor- way, Tromholt took up his residence in Redykjavik, Iceland, in October, 1883, and communicates to Nature some of the results of his work dur- ing the winter 1883~84. Helhas never as yet seen any auroral light de- scend to the low level of the mountain top of Esja, namely, about 2,500 feet. The weather, however, has been very unfavorable, and he has made but 40 observations on 83 thoroughly clear evenings ; appareutly I[ce- METEOROLOGY. oA land lies, at least for this year, south of the position of the maximum zone. (Nature, XXIX, pp. 226, 543, 409, and 537.) 366. On page 80, vol. xxx, of Nature, Tromholt states that a few lovely days have enabled him to set up his artificial-aurora apparatus on the summit of Esja, but without as yet any optical results. 367. In the autumn of 1584, Prof. Tromholt returned to Bergen where he will work on the great catalogue of auroras observed in Northern Europe, which with other works is being prosecuted at the expense of the Norwegian government. (Nature, Xxx, p. 592.) XI.—(a) REFRACTION AND MIRAGE: (b) SCINTILLATION; (c) SPEC- TROSCOPY AND PHOTOSPECTROSCOPY ; PHOSPHORESCENCE, ETC. (dq) HALOS; RAINBOWS; (e) PHOTOMETRY; COLOROMETRY ; TWI- LIGHT, ETC. 368. T. von Oppolzer, of Vienna, at a meeting of welcome in honor of the session of the International Polar Commission April 21, 1854, de- livered an address upon the connection between atmospheric refraction and the distribution of temperature throughout the air. After explain- ing his formula for refraction, based on the assumption that the change of temperature with altitude is proportioned to the change of density of the air, and having shown that this empirical assumption agrees with the observations at least for the lowest 10 kilometers, he says that it may now be asked whether the observed atmospheric refraction may not give some clue to the actual temperatures at great heights in the air where direct observations can never hope to reach. This, however, he answers in the negative, but, in regard to the lower strata, it is en- tirely possible for meteorology to derive assistance from astronomical observations, though the latter will undoubtedly receive much more assistance from the former. This essay is printed as an appendix to the Zeitschrift of the Austrian Association for May, 1884. (Z. 0. G. M., XIX, p..265.) 369. P. G. Tait gives a thorough elucidation of the atmospheric con- dition necessary to produce forms of mirage. This is in continuation of his former paper on mirage, and as an example of an application of Hamilton’s general method in optics, which is being published by the Royal Society of Edinburgh. (Nature, xxviu, p. 84.) 370. C. Montigny has for some time observed the colors of the stars by means of a scintillometer, and among other things has discovered that the blue color prevails remarkably when rain approaches, and this phenomenon can therefore be used for the prediction of rain. In June, 18835, having observed that the blue color had been absent for three months, and that the green was becoming more prominent, Montigny ven- tured the prediction that the quantity of water in the upper strata of air had become diminished, and that during the year 1883 fewer long rains would oceur. This prediction having been well fulfilled, Montigny, in April, 1884, made the same observations and renewed the same pre- 374 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1ss4. diction for this year; in fact, he had observed that the blue was even ‘Jess prominent than in 1883, that the green was more prominent, and that even violet occasionally occurred. Montigny suggests that the blue tint in the scintillation is due tothe water in the atmosphere, which is known to have a bluish tint when viewed by ordinary sunlight. (Z. O. G. M., XIX, p. 534.) 371. L. Thollon contributes to the Bulletin Astronomique an elabo- rate study into the structure and origin of the lines forming the group B of the solar spectrum, which paper is handsomely reproduced in Na- ture, XXX, p. 520. This region was carefully worked over by Piazzi Smyth, and Langley; but Thollon has now revised his own previous work, and the elegant map given by him shows at a glance, first, the metallic lines; second, those produced by atmospheric vapors—probably the aqueous vapors; third, those produced by atmospheric gases—oxy- gen, nitrogen, carbonic acid, and any others that do not materially vary in quantity, leaving finally non-telluric lines, twenty-five in all, or sev- enteen if we count double and triple lines as one. The lines due to at- mospheric gases constitute a system of twelve pairs, and the whole group is distinguished by its regular symmetry. Under such a seru- tiny as this there seems no doubt that certain lines are also a perfect in- dication of the hygrometric state of the air. In 1882 Professor Egoroff, of Warsaw, joined Thollon in his investigations at Paris, where they examined the spectrum of a beam of electric light 10 kilometers long, and which gave a perfect reproduction of the telluric rays ; afterwards, by condensing oxygen in a short tube, the gaseous rays were obtained foy the eroups A and B, and probably a greater quantity of oxygen would have given the feebler group Alpha; so that these three groups, A, B, and Alpha, originate in the absorption of atmospheric oxygen. That the spec- trum of absorption for cold oxygen should differ so much from the spec- trum of emission for incandescent oxygen is, he thinks, attributable to the influence of heat. Thollon is at present engaged in the further search for lines or groups due to the presence of nitrogen or carbonic oxide. Hitherto, apart from the oxygen, or A, B, and Alpha groups, he has discovered no lines that may be confidently attributed to the constant gaseous portions of the atmosphere. (Nature, XXX, p. 520.) 372. G. Pizzighelli publishes, through Dr. E. Hornig, a work on Acti- nometry, or the photometry of the chemically active radiations. The author is a most expert photographer, and has here compiled an almost exhaustive account of modern apparatus and methods for measuring the intensity of light by photographic and chemical methods. He gives a special chapter to the meteorological applications of actinometry, espe- cially the results of the studies of Pernter, published in 1882. (D. MI. Z., I, p. 420.) 373. Captain Abney, as the result of photographing the ultra-red portion of the solar spectrum in very various atmospheric conditions, found that in very dry weather the photographs show only absorption METEOROLOGY. aye lines, but in very moist weather they show strong absoption bands, which are more numerous and darker as the relative humidity of the air is greater. These demonstrate that this absorption is not due to the true aqueous vapor in the air, but to water in a fluid condition, namely, mi- nute fog or cloud particles. He also concludes that it is certainly water in this fluid condition that causes the deep blue of the sky, since no other ground can be imagined why the color should be a deeper biue in moister weather; this view is also confirmed by the fact that in as- cending high mountains the tint changes from a dark to a black blue. (Z. O. G. M., XVIII, p. 276.) 374. Captain Abney and Colonel Festing have presented a valuable paper on the influence of water in the atmosphere on the solar spee- trum. They both recognize the fact that the spectrum extends to the lower limit established by Langley; they then investigate the radiation from the positive pole of the electric are, and introduce absorbing layers of water. These so modify the original curve of distribution of heat in the spectrum that even the introduction of an absorbing layer of water 14 of inch thick reduces it to similarity with the curve given by sunlight, whence they conclude that the greater part of the absorption in the red and ultra-red portions of the solar spectrum is due to the presence of water. As opposed to Langley’s opinion that the maximum intensity of the solar spectrum outside of the earth’s atmosphere lies nearer the blue, their own observations give an extra-atmospheric¢ curve having a second maximum in the ultra-red. This they explain as due to the superposition of radiations belonging to a low temperature upon radiations from bodies with a high temperature, the former being the prevalent. By examples they show that the superposition of such curves from different sources of heat will give such aresult. Assuming with Dewar that the areas of these radiation curves are proportional to the temperatures of the radiating bodies, they find the temperature of the sun’s surface to be between 10,000 and 12,000 degrees. (Z. O. G. IL, x1x, 430, and Nature, XXVItl, p. 45.) 375. H. Becquerel has studied the same question by means of the phenomena of phosphorescence. He has investigated under different atmospheric conditions the ultra-red part of the spectrum, and, like Captain Abney, found that the absorption lines increase with the rela- tive humidity. He also found that the absorption bands of layers of fluid water agreed for various thicknesses of water with the above lines for corresponding relative humidities. (Z. O. G. M., xvii, p. 277.) 376. Cornu proposes to determine the absorption of the solar rays by observing the intensity of well determined atmospheric lines in the solar spectrum, which he accomplishes by comparing them with the constant lines that certainly owe their existence to the absorption in the solar atmosphere. This is an extension of the proposition to observe the rain band so earnestly advocated by Piazzi Smyth. Cornu chooses that portion of the spectrum between the wave length 587.40 and 602,90, 576 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 18984. and assigns to the various groups of atmospheric lines corresponding metallic lines for comparison. (Z. O. G. M., XVII, p. 239.) 377. Dr. H. Klein, in reference to the use of the spectroscope, or the observation of the so-called rain band, states that his own observations confirm those of Smyth, Capron, and others to the effect that a promi- nent rain band is regularly followed in a short time by precipitation. However, the frequent exceptions to this rule renders the spectroscope alone very unreliable; this is to be attributed to the fact that the spec- troscope makes no distinction between the moisture near by and that at a ereat distance. When from his observatory Klein examines the horizon at an altitude of 20°, he finds the vapor lines on the east, southeast, and noitheast notably darker and more prominent than in any other direc- tion; this he attributes to the fact that a few thousand feet distant on the east flows the broad Rhine; but he states that this increase of the vapor line does not always occur, and at certain times the influence of the Rhine is not to be noticed; he has as yet found no explanation for these exceptional cases. The application of the spectroscope to the prediction of rain is, he thinks, problematic, except in the case of heavy thunder storms for which it frequently gives good indications. Upton’s comparison showed that 69 per cent. of rain predictions were verified within twenty-four hours when based entirely upon the intensity of the _ rain band, but 84 per cent. were verified when other meteorological con- ditions were taken into account. The spectroscope has been used at the Wetterwarte of the Cologne Zeitung with satisfactory results in summer. (Z. O. G. M., XIX, p. 531.) 378. Mr. W. Ackroyd has read before the Physical Society of London a mathematical investigation of the rainbows produced by light before entering the rain drops. (Nature, XXvi, p. 133.) 379. The observation of coronas and fogbows, made at the summit of Ben Nevis, promises to give us valuable information in regard to the size and shape of the particles composing the clouds ; thus, October 4, 1884, strong double corona surrounded the moon; outer diameter of the red circle was for the outer corona 7° 46’, and for the inner corona 49 52’, When clouds came between the moon and observer three such rings were seen, the measurements of which gave for the inner ring 4° 6/, middle 6° 2/, outer 8° 10’, the probable error in each ring being about 8’. A colorless pair of fogbows visible on a distant fog bank gave diameters of 75° for the outer ring, 65° for the inner and fainter ring; the space between the ring appeared quite dark and no color could be distinguished. (Nature, Xxx, p. 613.) 380. Professor von Bezold, in the publications of the International Polar Commission, described the normal phenomena of twilight as fol- lows: 1. A bright segment appears on that side of the sky below whose horizon the sun is found; this is limited at the top by a special bright METEOROLOGY. att zone, above which the ordinary blue or purple sky is visible, while be- low we have yellow, then orange, and on the horizon brownish red. 2. Opposite to the above is a dark segment which is simply the ashy- tinted shadow of the earth, and which is sharply distinguished from the remaining portion of the beavens. 3. A circular region of considerable diameter of a rosy-red that is generally described as the purple light; this develops above the bright segment a long time before sunrise or after sunset, so that the lower part of this region seems to be hidden behind the bright segment. The center of this region sinks rapidly after sunset, while at the same time its radius increases so that finally the limit of the borders of the purple region unites with that of the bright segment, the impression being as if the purple light slipped in behind the bright segment. The purple light plays the part of a very much magnified, very much diluted, image of the sun; at the time of its greatest development the general brightness is increased so that objects on the earth’s surface that were invisible soon after sunset become again visible. The maximum of this second illumination occurs in the Alps when the sun is four or five de- grees below the horizon, at which time the center of the purple light is about 18° above the horizon, while its highest point reaches up to 40° or 50°. As soon as the purple light has completely disappeared behind the bright segment there appears a second dark segment on the opposite side of the sky. Soon there further develops a second bright segment above the slowly sinking first one, and only with difficulty distinguished therefrom; with very clear skies one can later occasionally also observe a second purple light, and therewith a temporary increase of bright- ness, so that a third illumination of objects favorably located can be ob- served. [It would seem that the occurrence of two separate periods of the red or rosy or purple tint, as was observed in the winter of 1883-84 at many places throughout the world, is therefore simply an unusual de- velopment of an ordinary phenomenon. The twilight phenomena of 1883~84 have been specially due to the remarkable development of the second purple light, which has frequently surpassed the first purple mebt.| (0... Z.,.1, p. 32.) 381. Dr. G. Hellmann contributes some observations on twilight made by himself in Spain, 1875 to 1877, and follows this by a comparison with previous authorities, from allof which he deduces the following results: 1. The depression of the sun under the horizon at the end of the as- tronomical twilight is not, as has been generally assumed, constant at about 18 degrees. 2. The depression shows a decided annual period, a maximum in win- ter and minimum in summer. 3. The depression 1s greater in the morning than in the evening. 4, It shows an intimate connection with the relative humidity of the 378 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. air, increasing and diminishing directly with it, so that the items 2 and 3 are probably explicable thereby. 5. It follows that this angle (whose annual mean value for the even- ing twilight is in Athens 15°.9, southern Spain 15°.6, South Atlantic Ocean 15°.6) must be greater in high latitudes than in low, and on the ocean than in dry continental regions, but this conclusion needs further confirmation by other observations. 6. Since the twilight depression of the sun is thus periodically vari- able it follows that the various solutions of the problem of the short- est twilight thus far offered are no longer sufficient. (Z. O. G. M., XIx, p. 57.) 382. Dr. G. Hellmann, in a second communication on the twilight phenomena, analyses numerous observations from all parts of the world and formulates the following conclusions relative to the difference be- tween this phenomenon in southern Spain and in Germany. 1. The phases of the phenomenon are better developed in Spain than in Germany, the chronological order is more determined, the strata of different colors are easier to distinguish from each other, the limit of the bright segment against the dark sky is very sharp. 2. In Germany the extension of the colors in time and space are greater than in Spain, except for the anti-twilight. 3. In reference to the colors, green was almost regularly observed in all its shades in Spain but rarely in Germany. 4, The red colors of the twilight in Spain had in Germany very fre- quently a decidedly flesh color and purple tint. 5. Violent colors in Germany were more decided than in Spain. 6. In Spain there was a greater contrast between the twilight phe- nomenon of the summer and winter (the dry and rainy periods) than in Germany. The above conclusions, and in fact this whole essay, were completed before the appearance of the remarkable sky colors of 188384, and in reference to these Hellman states in a note that, although he has fol- lowed it closely and collected numerous reports from others, yet he will not at present attempt any analysis or explanation. He however notes the great ignorance of observers generally as to what constitutes the ordinary and typical phenomena of the twilight, and at present his own feeling is that the real peculiarity of the phenomena of 1883~84 con- sisted in their universality, the length of duration, the intensity and variety of colors. (4. O. G. M., xIx, p. 162.) 383. Professor Kiessling, of Hamburg, has reproduced the experi- ments of Coulier, Mascart, and Aitken on the effect of dust in the atmos- phere. He says that if we understand the word dust to refer to the total of all foreign substances in the atmosphere, including coarse and fine particles of dust, microscopic or organic forms, the products of pu- trefaction and oxidation, even when they are entirely gaseous, as, for instance, the expirations of human beings and animals, there will be METEOROLOGY. 379 found a definite very small quantity of dust which is especially favora- ble for the development of color by the process of diffraction, and this can therefore be specified as the dust favorable to opticak phenomena. 2. The absolute maximum of color due to diffraction is in moist air conditional upon the simultaneous occurrence of this optical dust with the maximum relative humidity of the air stratum in which it is con- tained. 3. The twilight colors depend principally upon diffraction in moist air. (D. M. Z., I, p. 34.) 384, Professor Kiessling, of Hamburg, has collected together the ob. servations of others and compared them with his own obsexsvations on the influence of artificial fog on direct sunlight, and the consequent ex- planation of the twilight phenomena. He uses a glass vessel with sev- eral apertures in connection with a Sprengel or water air pump; within this vessel he forms fogs of varying degrees of intensity, and examines the diffraction phenomena when a beam of sunlight falls upon the fog from the heliostat. Besides the fog from aqueous vapor, he also utilizes the sulphate of ammonia, phospborie acid, gunpowder, and other sub- stances producing very dense smoke or fog; for instance, with sulphate of ammonia a very dense smoke is produced consisting of exceedingly small hard particles of this salt; after twenty or thirty minutes of set- tling a thick white dust covers the base and sides of the vessel. The sun, seen through the cloud, does not blind the eye, but shows a re- markable change of colors. At the first moment of its formation the sun appears of a brilliant dark copper color, but changes its color rapidly, first to a violet tint and then through dark carmine red into a brilliant azure blue. This change of colors occupies in dry air about two minutes, but in moist air scarcely twenty seconds; similar phenom- ena take place with other heavy vapors. If the light is allowed to fall upon a white screen it is seen to be at first of a copper-brown, which afterward becomes blue. If in place of these chemical dust-clouds we allow a stream of aqueous vapor to escape from a steam boiier, the cloud of fog shows an intense blue as soon as the above beam of blue solar light falls upon it; if the stream of vapor is, however, properly man- aged, it can be made to exhibit in itself all the changes from brownish red to blue, which, however, very rapidly disappear on account of the dissipation of the cloud. In order to accomplish this best the stream of steam must be horizontal and mixed with a feeble current of very cold air drawn overice. It has not yet been possible to Kiessling to experi- mentally reproduce the green colors of the sun. If the vessel within which the diffraction phenomena are produced is full of moist, perfectly filtered air, entirely free from dust, then a fog can . be produced by simply lowering the temperature, which is, however, only visible in direct sunlight. This fog consists of very small, seat- tered, rapidly moving particles of vapor, which, however, in transmitted light show not the slightest trace of colored diffraction rings, evidently 380 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. because there are too few of them. This fog renders it very doubtful if the law announced by Aitken in 1879 can be true, according to which aqueous vapor will not condense from the air without having a solid nucleus of dust particles on which to accumulate. If into the vessel full of filtered air a small stream of steam enters, then the first cloud formation of fine fog soon disappears, but after a few minutes large scattered rain drops strike on the surface of the inclosure, and form a rain without fog or cloud. But if we allow a very small quantity of dusty air to enter the vessel, then immediately fine fog is formed along side of the larger rain drops. If the beam of sunlight falls upon this mixture of rain and fog, then a yellow halo with reddish brown borders is formed of the same color and magnitude as with ordinary lunar halos. If now by lowering the pressure we produce a sudden fall in temperature, there is formed a system of larger fog particles and a cor- responding system of larger diffraction rings without changing those already formed. In order to realize a fine mist or fog or haze of particles having a very uniform size we must evidently have the maximum quan- tity of moisture in the vessel, or the most favorable mist and the most perfect saturation. This is best attained by introducing quite warm moist air and lowering the temperature rather slowly. In this way we obtain a very intense development of color, and the amplitude of the dif- fraction circle varies between 10° and 30° depending upon the size of the particles while the intensity of the color depends upon the uniformity of their size. By further diminution of pressure and consequent cooling and increase in the size of the particles remarkable changes in color take place; the variations in the colors depend in a very sensitive way upon the degree of saturation and the rapidity of cooling. In this way Kiess- ling has been able to re-produce so large a number of the appearances observed in nature that there can scarcely be any doubt but that the diffraction due to particles of aqueous vapor will be found to explain nearly all our sky colors. (D. M. Z., 1, p. 117.) 385. Dr. von Danckelman has published an extensive memoir col- lating the meteorological observations made on the coast of southwest Africa, and especially at Vivi on the Lower Congo. A summary of his results with regard to the cloudiness is given by him in D. M. Z., I, p. 301. Von Danckelman ealls attention to the fact that the great forest and prairie fires of the Congo in central Africa throw up into the atmos- phere such an enormous amount of fine dust, that we have here a source of production of fine particles that annually throws great quantities into our atmosphere—quite as much or vastly more than could have come from the Krakatoa eruption. (D. M. Z.,1, p. 311.) 386. [The corresponding prairie and forest fires in America, giving | rise to our Indian summer haze, have long been known to produce a copper-red tint in the sky and over the solar disk. This haze however has rarely been known to spread fa: eastward over the Atlantic, and METEOROLOGY. 381 certainly never around the world, and to all latitudes from 60 north to 40 south ; neither does it ever give rise to anything like the brilliant purple twilight. The great cload of smoke due to the forest fires of 1871 (not to the Chicago fire as erroneously assumed) was observed by navi- gators in the mid Atlantic. The haze is in fact composed of minute particles of carbon, each of which, as is well known, has the property of condensing upon itself a small atmosphere of other gases, including aqueous vapor. This quasi-chemical action seems to hold the vapor in an invisible state at a lower temperature than would have been the case were no particles there; it hinders condensation so that rain and cloud are lessened during the prevalence of this smoke. When however rain does form, it falls with unusual severity. It is, we think, likely that to this property of carbon or to the special radiating and cooling proper- ties of fine solid particles that we must attribute the phenomena dis- cussed by Aitken, as there can be no doubt that aqueous vapor will con- dense into fog particles and larger drops even in an atmosphere free from fog and solid particles. | 387. [The remarkable red sunsets and sunrises of October to Decem- ber, 1883, have formed the subject of innumerable contributions both from an observational and theoretical standpoint. Exhaustive investi- gations are promised by committees of societies, especially the Royal So- ciety, which have undertaken to collect all the data relative to these important phenomena. The hypothesis that these were due to the gradual spread over the northern hemisphere of dust ejected from the tremendous eruption of Krakatoa, started by Bishop, September 5, 1883, and Lockyer, October, 1883, was first modified into the assumption that moisture as well as, or even instead of, dust was more plausible; the possibility being granted that the vapor exists in the form of minutest spicule of ice or of minute spheres. Subsequently it became a query whether circumstances favorable to the dissemination of ice spicule or vapor in the higher regions might not have existed independent of the Krakatoa eruption ; this view was then strengthened by the discovery that similar twilight phenomena had been observed some time before the Krakatoa eruption, while on the other hand it was also shown that several volcanic eruptions in past years had been followed by similar sky colors. The renewal of the phenomena in 1884 made it highly probable that we have to seek the cause of these colors in some- thing outside of the earth’s atmosphere; during a whole year the sun had been surrounded by a large irregular cloud of haze, extending 20 to 40 degrees from its center in all directions. This haze was decidedly Streaky or striated, and occasionally showed a pinkish tint. At present the most plausible hypothesis seems to be that the earth in the autumn of 1883, and again of 1884, passed through a stream of gaseous or va- porous meteoric matter, which temporarily combined with the earth’s atmosphere, while the great mass passed on to the sun, and has accu- mulated as a nebulous cloud about that body. The color phenomena, 382 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. as Seen in our atmosphere, are most plausibly due to selective absorp- tion and reflection from minute solid particles, whose size is comparable with the dimensions of the wave length of light. That these should exercise also a selective influence upon the ultra-red rays, such as would be detected by Langley’s bolometer, seems highly probable. It is therefore possible that the general distribution of heat over the earth’s surface may have been slightly affected by the novel addition to our atmosphere, and especially may have had some influence upon the for- mation of rain and snow; but these influences must have been quite fee- ble, and have not yet been demonst: ted from observations. On several occasions during the past century the earth has passed near enough to comets or their tails to awaken inquiry as to the possible result of actual contact; in fact, in the summer of 1576, the carth may possibly have encountered the tail of the comet then visible, as several observers re- ported the appearance of pinkish and ashen tints in the sky. It would not be surprising if we should sometime be able to show that these sky and sunset phenomena, as well as the aurora, and possibly other mat- ters, such as Wilkes’s red fog, may be due to the encountér of cosmic meteoric matter by the earth in its annual orbit.] 388. Dr. Neumayer publishes a large collection of data relative to the twilight and other phenomena, in a series of papers extending through the first volume of the Journal of the German Meteorological Society. 389. Prof. H. Krone, of Dresden, communicated through Dr. Neu- mayer his observations and conclusions as to the nature of the twi- light phenomena. 1. A fine haze that cannot be called a fog and that does not diminish the brightness of the sunshine must be the origin, and has been pres- ent ever since the last of August. 2. The twilight colors were tested by the use of a number of colored glasses, which showed that the orange was absorbed by the blue, while the red was not; the red region agreed with the ring observed by Falb. This ring he considers due, not to diffraction, but that it is the red re- gion of the rays of less refrangibility, like the reddish, yellow and red caused by the ordinary refraction at sunrise or sunset, and due to the air and its vapor. 3. A variation appeared on the evening of January 2, shortly after the outburst of the orange, as an intense rosy red bundle of rays, which in a few minutes extended from the sun, then under the horizon, in all directions through the red region nearly up to the zenith, and sideways for 70° in the horizon either side of the sun. Similar phe- nomena were seen by Krone during his journey to India in 1875, and both appearances then and now indicated that the sun’s rays were passing between clouds in our atmosphere beyond the horizon and through a stratum of air containing more aqueous vapor, which com- municated to them a rosy red tint. METEOROLOGY. o 4. It is not to be denied that the phenomena in general are due to the refraction of the sun’s rays in the aqueous vapor of the atmosphere ; but in order to explain the superposition of color we must also con- sider the reflection of colored rays from exceedingly small bodies at an extraordinary heightin the atmosphere. This does not constitute inter- ference phenomena. [It has been called, very appropriately, selective reflection. | 5. The ordinary twilight is, to a certain extent, such a phenomenon of reflection; the astronomical twilight disappears at the horizon when the sun is about 18° below that plane from which we compute the alti- tude of the layer of haze producing it; but if the duration of twilight increases we must conclude that the layer of haze is proportionately higher. Krone’s observations, however, in December, 1583, and Janu- ary, 1884, seem to show that occasionally the twilight did not disappear through the whole night, but thata reddish tint was visible in the hori- zon and even half way to the zenith. That this reflecting material can possibly be the finest dust from the volcanic eruption at Krakatoa, is, he thinks, entirely improbable; neither can it be due to the presence of ice spicul, but it must be minute particles of water. Owing to the low temperature in the upper regions, this water can only be frozen. but we know nothing as yet as to the form of the particles of such very cold aqueous vapor. (D. M. Z., 1, p. 277.) 390: [The examination of certain thin hazy clouds that covered Paris during January, 1882, was made by Fonvielle, who rose up into them in his balloon, and found that they were formed of the minutest spheres of water frozen at a temperature many degrees below freezing; the forma- tion of the cloud was apparently due to radiation, as it stayed in the same locality for several weeks. The atoms of water were quiescent, but if setin motion among themselves crystallized into minute spicule. Dufour has shown that minute drops may be cooled to —20° C., so long as the surface tension is kept large without crystallizing or even solidifying; it is therefore plausible that the twilight phenomena of 1883-54 were due to selective reflection and diffraction by aqueous spherules of the finest size, such as must always exist to a greater or less extent in the upper atmosphere. If the particles, whether dust or vapor, were electrified before or while being carried up to the height of several miles, they would in the thin air of that region not only be carried along by its currents, but by their own mutual repulsion would tend to rise still higher, forming an appendage to the earth, and reminding one of the ascent of an envelope from the surface of the nucleus of a comet, where the particles are distinctly seen to ascend on the hot side toward the sun and then by mutual repulsion, as shown by G. P. Bond and other astronomers, flow away from the sun. ] 391. Among the principal items relating to the sunsets and Kra- katoa, we may mention the following : Lockyer’s theory of the volcanic dust. (Nature, XXx1x, pp. 148-174.) 384 SCIENTIFIC RECORI> FOR 1884. Clement Ley’s theory that the sunsets are due to ice spicule. (Na- ture, XXX, p. 175.) Mr. Bishop, of Honolulu, made the observations of the sunset colors on September 5, 1883, and immediately suggested that they were due to clouds of dust from Krakatoa which had come around westward three-fourths the circumference of the earth. (Nature, xx1x, p. 174.) A number of interesting items were published at the May meeting of the Mauritius Meteorological Society. (Nature, vol. xxx, p. 279.) An excellent map of the Krakatoa region is given in Nature, Xx1x, p. 228. The Royal Society has appointed a special committee, of which Mr. G. J. Symons, of London, is the chairman, to collect data. The report of the French mission sent to Krakatoa in June, 1884, is briefly summarized at Nature, vol. Xxx, p. 372; the report of Mons. R. D. M. Verbeek is translated in full in vol. xxx, p. 10. 392. Mr. S. E. Bishop, of Honolulu, from observations at Strong’s Island, latitude 5° N. and longitude 162° E., fixes September 7 at that place, or September 6 of London reckoning, as the date when the cop- pery sunset became visible, which, with some other data, gives him the conclusion that this stream of smoke was progressing westward at the rate of 64 miles per hour. J. Joly, of Dublin, from observations by Captain Thomson, of the Medea, computes 17 and 21 miles as the height of the column of dust seen to shoot up from Krakatoa on Au- gust 26. (Nature, Xxx, pp. 23 and 72.) 393. Rev. Samuel Haughton gives a computation of the depression of the sun and the height of the dust, and argues the incredibility of certain phenomena, especially Mr. Bishop’s results. (Nature, XX1Ix, p. 470.) - | 394. A. Ringwood read before the Canterbury Philosophical Insti- tute of New Zealand a paper on red sunsets, giving an interesting sum- mary of previous records. (Nature, XXX, p. 301.) _ 395. A previous eruption of Krakatoa had occurred in May, 1883; but from a letter from Robert Leslie it appears that the remarkable sunsets were observed still earlier by Mr. Neison at the Natal Observ- atory, where they increased in intensity from February to June, 1883. (Nature, Xxx, p. 463.) But the descriptions of the phenomena are not such as to assure us that the twilight phenomena at Natal were at all equivalent to those seen later in the year in northern latitudes. 396. Tissandier communicates to the Paris Academy a comparison between the atmospheric conditions of 1831 and 1883. The eruptions at Sicily in the former year were analogous to those of Krakatoa, and were followed by corresponding optical phenomena. (Nature, XXIx, p 376.) 397. M. Gay, on June 23, read a paper to the Paris Academy on per- sistent rain and its possible connection with recent volcanic eruptions. METEOROLOGY. 385 He gives a comparison with the eruptions of May, 1783, in Iceland; July, 1831, in Sicily ; Cotopaxi, in 1856; Vesuvius, 1862, and Kraka- toa, 1883. In all of these cases similar twilight colors have been fol- lowed by heavy rains. (Nature, Xxx, p. 229.) 398. Mr. J. Murray communicates to the Royal Society, Edinburgh, an extensive paper on volcanic ashes and cosmic dust, showing, among other things, that in proportion as ashes are collected at a greater dis- tance from a volcano, so are they less rich in minerals, while the pro- portion of vitreous matter more and more predominates. (Nature, XXIX, p. 585.) 399. [In 1884 the twilight phenomena of 1883 were renewed, beginning . in England about September 10, and Berlin, September 13, Vancouver’s Island, September 30, while the records in England for 1883 were about September 20. The maximum brightness in 1883 was about the 20th of December, in 1884 it was later, but in general was decidedly infe- rior and shorter than in 1883-84.] 400. M. Cornu maintains before the Paris Academy of Sciences that the white or reddish tinted cloud-like nebulous halo or corona that has permanently accompanied the sun during the whole of 1884, and of which he gives many observations, probably has some connec- tion with the Krakatoa eruption. That in fact a cloud of particles, with a nearly uniform average diameter, was projected by the volcano, and is held in suspension in the higher region of our atmosphere. (Nature, Xxx, p. 556.) 401. This cloud has been observed in Dublin since November, 1883. (Nature, Xxx, p. 663.) [It has also been observed in Washington since about that date, with a peculiar streaky appearance, visible before sunset, the lines being inclined to the west horizon, at an angle of about 30° slanting down toward the south. The pink or purple tint has been especially visible during the whole of any fair day. When the sun is behind a cloud, and the observer examines the tints by sky between the clouds, the purple is traceable for 30 to 40 degrees from the sun.] 402. According to A. Griitzmacher, in Das Wetter for April, 1884, and Koéppen, in the D. M. Z., this brownish red ring about the sun ap- pears to have first been observed in Europe at the end of November 1883, and not to have existed earlier. It is essentially different from ordinary solar halos, and the material from which it comes must exist beyond the highest cirrus clouds. Its explanation as a diffraction phenomenon is undoubtedly correctly given by Kiessling. (D. IM. Z., 1, p. 256.) 403. O. Jesse, of Steglitz, near Berlin, has endeavored to compute the altitude of the layer of dust or mist that has hypothetically caused the twilight phenomena of 188384. After fully explaining his theoretical formula he applies it to observations made by himself on eight days at Steglitz, from which he concludes an altitude of 17 kilometers. The S. Mis, 33——25 386 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. individual determinations range from 12 to18. These observations properly refer to the upper limit of what von Bezold calls the first pur- ple light, and which Jesse has observed as being the limit of the earth’s shadow. In an appendix Jesse adds to the preceding observations, which were taken between November 1883, and March 1884, a few taken in the latter part of March with better apparatus, and which give results varying between 7 and 12 kilometers, as though a decided dim- inution had taken place in the altitude of the dust, which was great- est in January, and least at the end of March. (D. WM. Z., I, p. 127.) 404. All the phenomena in connection with the green sun, as re- corded in India, have been collected by Prof. C. M. Smith, of Edin- burgh, from which he concludes that the green sun must be distin- guished from the remarkable sunsets of 1883~84. His own view is that there is some definite evidence to show that the phenomenon is due to aqueous vapor, for it is not so uncommon as is generally sup- posed. (Nature, xxx, p. 347.) 405. The Krakatoa eruption has also given rise to an interesting series of studies into a so-called wave of pressure that seems to be traceable from that region outward throughout the whole globe. Gen- eral Strachey (Nature, XX1x, p. 181) seems to have first called attention to the fact that a series of remarkable barometric fluctuations recorded by self-registers in various parts of Europe harmonized with the hy- pothesis that a wave of atmospheric compression, starting from Kra- katoa and moving outward in all directions, after concentrating at the antipodes returned to Krakatoa, making a complete circuit of the earth in from thirty-four to thirty-seven hours; after crossing at Krakatoa, this again made the circuit of the earth in a second period of thirty-six hours. Four such circumnavigations are claimed by some of those who have studied the subject; where self-recording registers are not availa- ble, attempts have been made to utilize the automatic registers of press- ure kept in connection with the city gas-works. 406. Rykatcheff, of St. Petersburg, from a study of all known data on the velocity of the Krakatoa atmospheric wave, fixes it at 327.9 meters per second, corresponding to the velocity of sound at the tem- perature of —10 C., which temperature is attained at an altitude of 4,000 meters in the atmosphere when the temperature at the earth’s surface is +12 C., so that we may conclude that these great waves of pressure . move with the velocity of sound. The amplitude of this wave for Euro- pean stations was 1.3 millimeters, but it was almost twice as great, namely 2.5, at the island of South Georgia. (Z. O. G. M., X1x, p. 431, and Nature, xxx, p. 135.) 407. General J. T. Walker, of the India Geological Survey, gives the results of observations of the earthquake ocean wave. (Nature, XXIx, p- 376.) \ . METEOROLOGY. 387 XII.—MISCELLANEOUS RELA‘ IONS. (a) PERIODICITY AND SUN-SPOTS; (b) HYPSOMETRY; (c) BroLoGcy; Borany; (d) GLACIERS, AND CLIMATES OF GEOLOGICAL EPOCHS. 408. A. Belikoff and M. Rykatscheff, from a study of the anemograph records at St. Petersburg, conclude that although one year’s record is searcely sufficient to demonstrate the ebb and flow of the atmospheric tide, yet there are indications of a north and south movement during the lunar day having one maximum and one minimum, and an east and west movement having two maxima and minima, and therefore similar to the ocean tide. (D. I. Z., 1, p. 373.) 409. EK. Leyst has investigated the possible influence of the moon upon the velocity of the wind as shown by the study of the St. Peters- burg records for 1878. He finds a slightly greater velocity for the lower culmination of the moon as compared with the upper culmination, and again a slightly greater velocity for the six hours after the upper cul- mination or the lower as compared with the six hours before; he finds the influence of the moon on the velocity more regular and sometimes greater than that of thesun. [Nothing is said as to the probable error of the mean values as used by him, and his results are certainly very anomalous.] (Z. O. G. IL., X1x, p. 142.) 410. Mr. B. Stewart and W. L. Carpenter communicate to the Royal Society a report on diurnal temperature ranges at Toronto and Kew, compared with apparent inequalities of short period in sun-spot areas. They find that periods of 24 and 26 days in the sun-spot and tempera- ture coincide; the solar maximum occurs eight or nine days after the Toronto maximum, and the Kew maximum seven days after the Toronto and one or two before the solar. [If the phenomena occur in the order Toronto-Kew-solar, then the causal connection seems very indefinite. ] (Wature, Xxx, p. 119.) 411. Charles Chambers, of Bombay, has investigated the relation be- tween sun-spots and variations of the daily range of atmospheric tem- perature; he finds the maxima of variation in daily amplitude agreeing with the minima of sun-spots. By the same method he finds also vari- ations parallel with the phases of the moon. He has also compared the daily variations of magnetie declination with the sun-spots and the moon’s phases, and finds an agreement be- tween them. He also finds a very large periodicity in declination coin- cident with the revolution of the planet Mereury about the Sun. In most cases the amplitude of the above parallel variations seems too small to be real, but in the case of Mercury the amplitude is quite large. (Z. O. G. M., xIx, p. 226.) 412. J. Lizuar states that while the variation of the declination of the magnetic needle with sun-spots has been recognized for some time, yet so far as he knows, the other magnetic elements have not been com- pared; he therefore compares the horizontal intensity, the vertical in- 388 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. tensity, total intensity, and dip at St. Petersburg with the sun-spots and shows that all have a parallelism. (Z. 0. @. M., x1x, p. 415.) 413. Prof. W. Foérster has investigated the periodical changes in the azimuth and level of the fundamental bed of masonry established in the Berlin Observatory for the support of the meridian instruments. He concludes from the study of 42 years of observations as follows : 1. Neither the permanent nor the periodical changes show any de- pendence on the water or moisture in the earth. 2. Those movements that are certainly separated from small move ments in the instrument itself and are plainly to be considered as movements of the whole pier, go through a distinct annual and an 11- year period, and both have a thermal character. 3. The thermal effect corresponds to a rise of temperature or solar radiation at the time of the sun-spot maxima. 4, These observations have a general interest, and not purely local. Professor Forster shows that they depend not on lo¢al temperatures of the air, but on the intensity of solar radiation of which the disturbance of the pier is a sort of summation. He has therefore lately sunk three thermometers into his pier in order to understand better its internal temperature. 414. [If we couple Forster’s investigation with that of Dr. B. A. Gould into similar motions throughout the world, we should conclude that these changes take place not in the pier but in the ground on which the observatory stands; but this seems impossible in the case of Berlin, where the observatory is surrounded by trees and buildings. The fact that greater solar heat is radiated at times of sun-spot maxi- mum was clearly shown by the present writer’s study of temperatures observed on the Hohenpeissenberg. (Amer. Jour. Sci., 1869.)] 415. A similar investigation on the movements of the pillars of the observatory at Neuchatel, 1859 to 1881, has been made by Hirsch and Faye, showing the same periodical and irregular variations as at Ber- lin. (Nature, XXvut, p. 216.) 416. Prof. Paul Reis has made an exhaustive study of the high and low waters of the Rhine in connection with the question of a possible sun-spot periodicity. With regard to the floods he finds maxima agree- ing with the principal maxima of sun-spots as given by Wolf’s relative numbers, and concludes that there is very nearly a period of 110 years, which is twice Fritz’s 55-year period, and ten times Wolf’s sun-spot period, and which, therefore, would be 111 years. This conclusion, based upon observations since 1705, is confirmed by the records of high waters running back as far as the year 14 B. C. He, of course, main- tains that the cause of the overflows is cosmic or extra-terrestrial. Dividing his high waters into four classes, he finds that the prediction of a high water of the first class can be made with greater certainty than a weather prediction. (Z. O. G. M., XVI, p. 261.) 417. Lieut. v.d. Groeben, of the Engineer Corps in Berlin, endeavors METEOROLOGY. 389 to elucidate the connection between the sun-spors and rainfall by a study of the hydraulics and physics of the Mississippi River, as given in the work of Humphreys and Abbot, together with more recent data, and offers the following conclusions: From the observed discharge of the Mississippi since 1819 there follows neither a confirmation nor a refutal of Meldrum’s law, according to which there should be heavier rainfall at the time of the sun-spot maxima and slight rainfall «at the time of the minima. On the other band, from the magnitude and ir- regularity of the variations in the discharge compared with the period- ical influence which in favorable cases should have been expected according to Meldrum’s law, we may safely conclude that in the Missis- sippi watershed influences of this regular form are completely obscured by the incomparably greater effect of apparentiy irregular variations of wind and weather. If, however, this is our result for the Mississippi in spite of the magnitude of the area represented by it and in spiteof the relative simplicity in the form of the North American continent, then it ‘follows that a compensation of the disturbing influences by the aceumu- lation of a larger number of observations from all parts of the earth is in general not probable and that it is therefore to be recommended that the further investigation of the subject be based not upon an empirical accumulation of observations but rather upon a more careful, intelligent seleetion. ‘In this selection the principal circumstances to be attended to are as follows: A constant direction of the wind through a whole year or at least during the greater part of the year; when possible, such a position of the area of observation that this wind shall be from the ocean; the greatest imaginable simplicity of topographic contour. If from the observations that have so far been discussed we separate those that correspond to this point of view, then from them almost without exception can be deduced a confirmation of Meldrum’s law. If we go still further and inquire into the possible reason of the paral- lelism between sun-spot frequency and precipitation, or, what is almost the same, between sun-spot activity and radiation of solar heat, it would then appear as if a comparison of sun-spot phenomena with the period- ical geyser eruptions would give not only a credible answer to this ques- tion, but also would be proper to give information on many other prob- lematic phenomena observed on the sun-spots. According to the results of these comparisons the sun spots are nothing else than the external evidences of the peculiar process of cooling on the sun, which goes on in such a way that hot masses periodically come from the interior to the surface, and in this way the loss of heat caused by radiation must from time to time be always renewed; and in this way these comparisons ac- quire still another special interest, for they appear to present a solution of the problem of the conservation of solar energy that leaves nothing to be desired in the way of simplicity, of course with the important res- ervation that this conservation of energy can only be a temporary state of transition. (ZO. G. M., x1x, p. 1.) 390 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. 418. Prof. William Ferrel has investigated the effect of uprising cur- rents upon the atmospheric pressure both in his original memoir of 1857 and in his later ewargement of the same published as Meteorological Researches by the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey. In the third part of these Researches he gives a hypsometric formula in which the terms depending on the movements of the atmosphere are introduced, but, as he himself shows, these can only be appreciable in most extreme eases. In other respects, however, his formula also represents our latest knowledge on the subject of the attraction of the earth and the effect of atmospheric moisture. (Z. O. G. M., X1x, p. 466.) 419. [The formula given by Upton in his method of reducing the ba- rometer to sea-level (Ann. Rep. Chief Signal Officer, 1882) introduces some new values of numerical coefficients which, if combined with the improvements made by Ferrel, give us a formula more painfully exact than that of Riihlmann, but the practical value of these in ordinary hyp- sometry is, of course, limited by the accuracy with which we can ascer- tain the true average temperature of the air.| 420. Paul Schreiber has published the second edition of his Hand- Book of Barometric Hypsometry. This work has been for some years by far the best general guide to those who wish to derive the best re- sults attainable by the use of the mercurial or aneroid barometer. The author neglects certain refinements relative to the effect of aqueous vapor, but for general use his work is highly to be recommended. Of course, those having a large number of stations at their disposal may prefer to work out special methods, as has been done by Mr. G. K. Gil- bert for the use of the United States Geological Survey, but it is not yet certain that’ they will obtain results of much greater accuracy. 421. R. Hult has discussed the mass of phenological observations accumulated for the last 10 years in Sweden. One hundred and fifty- seven stations have afforded about 150,000 observations. The previous labors of the French botanist, Adamson, had shown that the develop- ment of the buds is determined by the sum of the daily mean tempera- tures since the beginning of the year. Boussingault had, however, shown that the temperature during the period of rest from growth need not be taken into consideration, and that the length of the growing period is therefore inversely proportional to its mean temperature. Linsser concluded that the sums of the temperatures above zero which are necessary to effect development of a plant at any two localities are in direct ratio to the sums of all temperatures at both stations above zero. J. Sachs, the ablest botanical physiologist of the present time, has studied the subject from an entirely different side. He has by di- rect experiment with different plants determined the influence of tem- perature on the development and growth, and found that for each ar- rangement of external conditions about any plant there is a minimum, a best, and a maximum temperature. Thatis to say, a certain amount of heat is necessary, namely, the temperature minimum ; an increase of METEOROLOGY. 391 temperature accelerates the development up to acertain limit, which is the best temperature; every increase above this retards the develop- ment up to a certain limit, which is the maximum possible, beyond which the growth of the plant must cease. The results attained by Hult do not entirely agree with any of the preceding. He finds that the precipitation in Sweden is nowhere so slight that vegetation is regularly restricted, nowhere so great that the blossoming or leafing is disturbed, but the ripening of the fruit occurs at the season of greatest rainfall, and this stage of plant growth is affected by the rain. The blossoming of any plant throughout the whole of Sweden occurs at the same temperature, but when we pass to Lapland and Jempland, the very rapid progress of the spring tempera- ture cannot be followed by the plant, and the blossoming occurs subse- quent to the occurrence of the normal temperature. (Z. 0. G.M., x1x, p. 139.) 422, A. Spamer communicates the following conclusions as to the de. pendence of the growth of wood upcn meteorological factors : 1. Temperature and precipitation are the meteorological phenomens that affect the process of the formation of wood. 2. Of these two variable quantities during the principal period of growth, the rainfall diminishes the formation of wood while the heat increases it. 3. The principal period of wood growth is from July to October, at least for the plants which are very sensitive to frost. 4. The rainfall seems to influence growth more than the temperature. [Excess of rain diminishes growth more than excess of temperature in- creases it.| 5. The growth of different plants is not affected in the same degree by the rain; some are affected more by rain and others by the tem- perature. 6. In many periods only one of these factors appear to exert any in- fluence, the other being inactive. 7. Possibly this anomaly may be explained by observations of the duration of insolation. ; 8. The increase of carbonaceous compounds goes parallel with the in- crease in the inorganic constituents of the wood. 9. The aqueous component of the wood diminishes when the carbon- aceous increases. 10. The so-called ripe wood [the heartwood] differs from that which is less ripe by a greater amount of ashes and carbon. (Z. 0. G. IL, MIX, p: 93.) 423. M. Bergmans, of Flushing, has studied the difference between sea and continental climates as shown by the vegetation, especially by a Study of the plants ordinarily cultivated in the temperate zone. He finds that the difference in vegetation is due not to the difference in mean temperature but to the difference in the amount of sunshine; clear 392 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. skies and full sunshine means high midday temperature and low tem- peratures or frosts at night time ; high temperatures in the sammer and low temperatures in the winter. These extreme variations in tempera. ture decide whether any given plant can thrive or not. The actual de- velopment of the plant depends upon the action of sunlight. (Nature, XXX, p. 092.) 424. W. O. Atwater offers experiments to show that certain plants grown under natural conditions do directly assimilate the atmospheric nitrogen. 425. | Although the amount of this assimilation is not at present suffi- cient to be of any importance to meteorology, yet the establishment of this fact, which has been controverted by so many eminent chemists, would be of importance in studying the climates of past geological epochs, when other plants and other gases were present.|] (Nature, Xxx, p. 593.) . 426. C. Ferrari has published in the Agricultural Annals.for 1883-a comparison for Italy between the statistics of harvests and the meteor- ological phenomena. He deduces a number of practical rules, such as the more rain we have in summer the greater the harvest of corn; but for wheat, rye, and other grains great rain frequency is injurious, and the harvest is greater as the temperature is higher and the cloudiness less. 427. Prof. H. Hoffmann, communicating the result of the most recent observations on the thermal constant of vegetation, compares the fig- ures for a number of plants for Upsala and Giessen, and concludes that the results agree quite as closely as can be expected, showing that there is no change in the constant depending on latitude or climate. (D. M. Zi, 1.5, ANT.) | | 428. General Strachey has endeavored to establish a simple method of computing the quantity of heat received at any place and proper to use as a standard for comparison with the progress of vegetation. - Ree- ognizing the fact that it is not the absolute temperature that should be summed up from day to day for this purpose, but that it is the excess above a definite minimum and that below this minimum active vegeta- tive processes are not possible, General Strachey has endeavored to es- tablish the minimum limit and to devise convenient methods for sum- ming up the excess above it. Numerical tables are given to assist the computation. By assuming 42° F. a base temperature, it results that a very close approximation is given by simply subtracting. this figure from the true mean temperature on each pentade and summing the re- mainders. (Z. O. G. M., X1x, p. 425.) 429. {In studies looking to the prediction of hatching of locust” eggs (see Reports of the United States Entomological Commission) the present writer used 50° F, as a minimum limit for the development of the eggs. | 430. Dr. A. Frankel gives an account of experiments on the influence METEOROLOGY. 393 ‘ of rarefied atmosphere upon the animal system. He concludes that the rarefaction influences the metastasis by depriving the blood and the tissues of some of their necessary oxygen, and that this want of oxygen entails an excessive destruction of albumen, the constituents of which are in part deposited as fat. (Nature, xxvu, p. 191.) 431. S. A. Hill, of India, has investigated the connection between statistics of death and crime and the variations of the weather in that country. He finds that a mere rise of temperature has comparatively little effect and the effect of varying humidity is still less, while the va- riations of diurnal range in temperature are quite appreciable. The most prevalent fatal diseases are the malarial fevers, and these are doubtless increased by the rainfall, so that dry years are healthy and wet ones unhealthy. Crimes of violence in India may be said to be proportional in frequency to the tendency to prickly heat; that excru- ciating condition of the skin induced by a hightemperature combined with moisture. (Nature, XXIX, p. 338.) 432. N. Alcock discusses the effect of climate on the color of the hu- man skin, and maintains that the effect of great sunshine upon the pig- ment is to intensify the skin color and cause the intense blackness of the races that live in the tropical regions where the chemical power is intense for a vertical sun. (Nature, Xxx, p. 401.) 433. The glaciers of the Straits of Magellan are described by W. J. L. Wharton (Nature, xxx, p. 177), who has made measures upon their dimensions and movements. 434. Prof. F. Simony, in a study of the glacial formation of the Karls- Icefield, the largest glacier in the Austrian Alps, finds that during the’ last thirty years a steady diminution has taken place in the average quantity of ice, and at the present rate only twelve or fifteen years more will be required to bring it back to the minimum condition which local report said it had attained some three hundred years ago. It would seem, then, proper to assume that long prevailing secular changes in climate take place that are best shown by such phenomena as the glacier changes of corresponding long periods. (Z. O. G@. M., XIX, p. 127.) 435. W. R. Browne presented to the Royal Society in 1882 a very suggestive paper on the causes of glacial motion, which however seems not to have been printed until a year after, and which should be read in connection with the following. (Natwre, XXVUI, p. 235.) 436. A. Irving, in a paper on the mechanies of glaciers, states that there is as yet no explanation of the fact that the movement is greater by day than by night and greater in the summer than in the winter. This he attributes to the fact that the solar rays entering into the inte- rior of the glacier are there transformed into heat and melt the ice, whose variations have thus a daily and annual period. (Natwre, XXVII, p. 553.) 487. Dr. R. von Lendenfeld has made a survey and study of the gla- 394 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884, ciers of New Zealand, showing that the present glaciers are as large and extend to as low levels as those in Norway, while the mean temper- ature of New Zealand is 11° C., as compared with 3° in Norway. The cause of this glaciation is considered to be the greater humidity of air and more copious rain and snow of New Zealand, due to the greater expanse of water in the southern hemisphere. The author considers that the glacial period in New Zealand, during which the sounds in the southwest coast were scooped and not filled up with débris but since which time the present small rapidly increasing alluvial deposits have all accumulated, must therefore have been very recent. [A greater expanse of water in the northern hemisphere with a north polar conti- nent would similarly give us higher temperatures and heavier gla- ciers. (WVature, XXX, p. 651.) 438. E. Hill, of Cambridge, England, has given a mathematical in- vestigation of the effect of fluctuations of solar heat and terrestrial ra- diation upon terrestrial temperatures, and especially upon the glacial epoch. He shows that the temperatures of the continents are now lower under the present periodical change from day to night and from sum- mer to winter than they would be if precisely the same quantity of heat were communicated to them continuously and uniformly. The same is also shown for the ocean; periodical changes in the transmitted heat increase the evaporation but diminish the radiation. An increase in the amplitudes of these heat variations will exaggerate the increase or diminution of the mean values of evaporation, &c. An increase in the eccentricity of the earth’s orbit exaggerates these amplitudes, and there- fore lowers the mean annual temperature in the one hemisphere and in- creases it in the other, also increasing the evaporation in the one hemi- sphere and diminishing it in the other. Increased evaporation may increase the snowfall. This is, therefore, possibly appreciable in con- néction with the glacial epoch as discussed by Hill in the Geological Magazine, November, 1881. (Z. 0. G. M., XIX, p. 260.) 439. W. F. Stanley maintains the improbability of the theory that former glacial periods in the northern hemisphere were due to eccen- tricity of the earth’s orbit and to its winter perihelion. He quotes Fer- rel and Hann to show that the mean temperature of the southern hem- isphere is now equal to if not higher than the northern, although the northern is the most glaciated, so that, whatever may be the relative po- sition of the earth’s orbit and axis, it could have no more influence than now prevails. He explains glaciation as a local phenomenon, dependent upon the distribution of land and water and attending changes in aerial and oceanic currents. (Nature, Xxx, p. 526.) 440. A. Blytt, by the study of the distribution of the plants of Scan- dinavia at the present time and at the time of the formation of the peat- bogs, concludes that since the glacial epoch the climate has experienced periodical changes, in that dry continental periods have interchanged with moistinsular climates. These periodical climatic changes he traces METEOROLOGY. 395 back to periodic variations in the temperature of the sea. He concludes that when the winter agrees with the earth’s aphelion the currents will probably increase, and when the winter agrees with the perihelion the currents will slightly diminish ; therefore at present northwestern Eu- rope is enjoying relatively gentle rains and a large difference between the winter and summer temperatures, which conditions will be reversed in about 10,000 years with the change in position of the earth’s axis. In other regions than Europe the effect of this change may be different. Thus the eastern part of North America will, with wirter in the aphel- ion, have stronger northwest winds, and therefore a more severe climates the same for Eastern Asia, while the western coast of North America will be affected like Europe. But such changes must also affect other portions of the ocean and of the world, causing periodic changes in the climate over the whole earth’s surface. (Z. O. G. AL, x1x, p. 413.) 441. Dr. Penck, of Munich, in some remarks on the glacial epoch, says a numerical expression for the difference between the climate of the glacial epoch and that immediately before and after it is found by a comparison of the limit of perpetual snow for that and the present epoch. This limit was at that time decidedly lower than the present, namely, at 45° N. latitude 1,300 meters lower, and at 26° N. latitude, 1,000 lower. In the southern hemisphere the probable depression of the snow limit at 30° S. was 1,000 meters, and at 45° S. at least 800 meters lower than now. During the glacial epoch the region of perpetual snow in the northern hemisphere was lower than it is to-day in the southern, and in the southern it was much lower than now. An interchange of the climatic relations of the north and south hemispheres would not of itself produce a glacial epoch. The remarkable agreement between the intensity of the present glaciation and that of the glacial epoch justifies the assumption that the latter occurred under general external relations such as now prevail; in fact, it can be proven that the glacial epoch occurred during the present arrangement of land and water, and not with a lower but rather a higher elevation of the land. The mass of sea water that was at that time on the land in the shape of ice was approximately 56,000,000 cubic kilometers. A characteristic of the gla- cial epoch, the recurrence of the glaciation as recognized in northern Europe and America, and which repetitions, as the Alps show, were separated by epochs of mild climate whose durations were greater than the time that has now elapsed since the iast glaciation. The great ex- tent of the glaciation is explained by no other theories as to its cause except Croll’s theory of the alternate glaciation of both hemispheres, and the theory of the existence of a sensible cold period over the whole earth; but the periodicity of glaciation is explained only by Croll’s theory, so that this is the most probable, although great difficulties stand in its way. (D. M. Z., 1, p. 473.) 396 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF METEOROLOGY FOR 1884. By O. L. Fassia. I.—Works by individuals. IJ.—Publications of institutions. IlI.—Articles in periodicals. I.—WorkKS BY INDIVIDUALS. Abbe, Cleveland. An account of the progress in meteorology in the year 1883. Washington, 1884. 8yvo. 92 pp. ‘From Smithsonian report for 1883.) Almerico da Schio, sr. -Almanacco astronomico meteorologico per V anno 1884 Verona, Padua. 32mo. Andrée, S.A. Nagra anmirkningar om luftelektricitetens variationer vid barome- triska minima och maxima. Om sambandet mellan luftelektriciteten och jord- magnetismen. Om yrsnéni dearktiska trakterna. Stockholm, 1884. 8vo. 28 pp. 12 pl. Angstrém, Knut. Un nouveau géothermometre. Stockholm, 1884. 12mo. 10 pp. 1 pl. Assmann, R. Taschenbuch fiir Wetter-Beobachter. Fiir Stationen II. Ordnung. Magdeburg, 1884. I16vo. 190+31 pp. (Same for stations of lower order.) Magdeburg, 1884. 16mo. 118+16 pp. Bassler, 8S. S. The weather: A practical guide to its changes, showing Signal Service system, and how to foretell local weather. Cincinnati, 1883. 8vo. 54 pp. Il- lustrated. Bassnett, T. The true theory of the sun; showing the common origin of the solar spots and the corona, and of atmospheric storms and cyclones, with the necessary formule and tables for computing the maximum and minimum epochs of solar activity, and the passage in time, and the place of the chief disturbances of the weather, from the equator to the pole, in both hemispheres. New York, 1884. 8vo. 414263 pp. 1pl. Illustrated. Bezold, W. von. Ueber ziindende Blitze im Kénigreich Bayern wiahrend des Zeit- raumes 1833-1882. Miinchen, 1884. 4vo. 60 pp. (From Miinchen, Akad. Ab- handl., xv, 1884.) Bezold, W. von, und Lang, C. (See Miinchen.) Billwiller, R. Bericht iiber die Errichtung der meneesionaehed Station auf dem Sintis und ihre Thitigkeit vom 1. Sept. 1882 bis Ende Aug. 1884. Ziirich, Tté84. 8vo. 20 pp. Boguslawski, G. von. Handbuch der Ozeanographie. I. Bd. Riaumliche, physika- lische und chemische Beschaffenheit der Ozeane. Stuttgart, 1884. 8Svo. xvii+ 400 pp. Brioschi, Faustino. (See Naples.) Broszus, J. E. Die Theorie der Sonnenflecken. Nach den neuesten wissenschaft- lichen Forschungen dargestellt. Berlin, 1884. 8vo. 4 pp. Buys- Ballot, Ch. (See Houzean, J.-C.) Campbell, J. PF. Sun-spots and world’s weather. (London, 1884.) sm.8yvo. 14 pp. [ Capron, J. Rand.] Meteorological readings taken at Guildown, Guilford, ey 4, 1883, to January 3, 1884. (Guildown, 1884.) 8vo. 365 pp. Carlen H. Observations métécrologiques faites & Saint-Martin-de-Hinx, France. 19. année, 1883. Bayonne, 1884. 4to. Chase, P. K. Elements of meteorology for schools and households. In two parts. Part 1. Philadelphia, 1384. 12mo. 2 vols. Cory, F. W. How to foretell the weather with the pocket spectroscope. London, 1884. 8vo. 86 pp. Jeb eae’ METEC ROLOGY. 397 Danckelman, A. von. Association internationale du Congo. Mémoire sur les obserya- tions météorologiques faites & Vivi (Congo inférieur), et sur la climatologie de la céte sud-ouest @’ Afrique en général. Berlin, 1884. 4vo. vim 92 pp.,1 ch. Die Ergebnisse der meteorologischen Beobachtungen der Herren Herm. Soyaux und Kapt. R. Mahnke in Ssibange-Farm am Awandu, Gabun, Westafrika, wihrend der Jahre 1882 und 1883, sowie Bemerkungen zu den meteorologischen Beobachtungen aus Omaruro in Damaralande. Leipzig, 1884. 15 pp. (From Mitth. Verein fiir Erdkunde, 1883, 14 pp.) Davis, William Morris. Whirlwinds, cyclones, and tornadoes. Boston, 18:4, 16mo. 90 pp. Dechevrens, Mare. Les typhons de 1882, Premiére partie. Les typhons des mois de juillet et aofit. Yi-ka-wei, 1884. 4to. 54 pp. The typhoons of 1882. Part 1. Typhons in September and October. Yi-ka-wei, 1884. 4vo. 32 pp. Denison, C. Annual and seasonal climatic (wall) map of the United States, compiled from data of the Signal Service. Denza, F. Il] Commodore M. F. Maury e lacorrespondenza meteorologica delle Alpi e degli Apennini italiani. Torino, 1884. 8vo. Tstruzioni per le osseryazioni meteorologiche e per I’ altimetria barometrica. Par- tes I, 1. Torino, 1884. 8vo. 312,142 pp. Doering, Oscar. La variabilidad interdiurna de la temperatura en algunos puntos de la Republica Argentina y de America del Sur. Cérdoba, Bol. Acad. Cien., v1, 1884. 8vo. 156 pp. Duchaussoy, Ab. Etude climatologique du département du Cher. Bourges, 1884, B8vo. Duclarr, 8. La science populaire. Le ciel et atmosphere. Limoges, 1824. 8vo. 176 pp. Illustrated. Dupouy, Ed. Météorologiedu Soudan. La saison seche au fort de Rita. Paris, 18c4. 8vo. Ekholm, N. ~L’expédition suédoise au Spitzberg, 1582-1283. Upsala, 1864. 8vo. 32+115 pp. Eliot, John. Account of the southwest monsoon storms of 26th June to 4th July and 10th to 15th November, 1883. Calcutta, 1884. 8vo. 134 pp. 10 pl. Espima y Capo, A. Apuntes climatolégicos é hydrolégicos acerca de Panticosa. (Pi- rineos espanioles.) Zaragoza, 1883. 4to. 104 pp. Ferrai, Ciro. Relazioni tra alcuni elementi meteorici edi prodotti della campagna in Italia negli anni 1875-79 e 1880-1882. Roma, 1884. 8vo. 60 pp. 1 pl. (From Annali di Agricoltura, 1883.) Depressioni e anticicloni e relazione delle prime colle arie di pioggia. Riassunto di 17 memorie di meteorologia del Prof. E. Loomis. Roma, 1884. 8vo. 11 pl. Fischer, Adf. L. Die Sonneniflecken und die Wetter-Beobachtungen seit 1. Juli 1883. 4 pt. Erfurt, 1884. 8vo. 53 pp. 11 pl. Forel, F.-A. Essai sur la température des glaciers. Genéve, 1884. 8vo. 11 pp. (From Echo des Alpes, xx, 1884.) Giinther, Siegmund. Der Einfluss der Himmelskérper auf Witterungsverhiiltnisse. 2. Aufl. Niirnberg, 1884. 8vo. 69 pp. Guillemin, A. Le monde physique; tom. v: Lamétéorclogie. Puris, 1884. 8vo. II- lustrated. Guyot, Arnold. Tables, meteorological and physical. Edited by William Libbey, jr. 4ed. Washington, 1884. 8vo. xxv+838 pp. (Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collection No. 538.) Hall, M. Monthly weather report for the year 1884. Jamaica. 1884. 4to. Hamberg, Alex. Hydrografisk-Kemiska Iakttagelser under den Svenska Expedi- tionen till Groénland, 1883, Stockholm, 1884, 8yo, 65 pp. 7 pl, 398 SCIENTIFIC RECORL FOR 1884. Hann, J. Einige Resultate aus Major v. Mehows meteorologischen Beobachtungen im Innern von Angola. Wien, 1884. 8vo. 29 pp. Hann, Julius. Die Erde als Weltkérper, ihre Atmosphiire und Hydrosphiire. Prag und Leipzig, 1854. 8vo. 209pp. (See Jelinek.) Hartl, Heinrich. Praktische Anleitung zum Héhenmessen mit Quicksilber-Barome- tern und mit Aneroiden. 2. Aufl. Wien, 1884. 8vo. Hellmann, Georg. (See Berlin, Kén. Met. Inst.) Hepites, St. C. Serviciuli meteorologicti in Europa. Bucuresci, 1884. 4to. 164 pp. Herman, Klein und Thorne. God’s glorious creation, or the mighty marvels of earth, sea, and sky; the earth’s place in the universal plan; wonders of the water, wonders of the land, wonders of the atmosphere. Translated from the German by Winshull. London, 1884. 8vo. 390 pp. Illustrated. Hofimann, P. Zur Mechanik der Meeresstr6mungen an der Oberfliiche der Oceane. Berlin, 1884. 8vo. vi + 99 pp. Holdinghausen, Ed. Die Sonne und die kosmische Elektricitiit. Hilchenbach, 1884. 8vo. Vvi-+ 164 pp. Houzeau, J. C., et Buys-Ballot. Observations météorologiques faites aux stations internationales de la Belgique et des Pays-Bas. 4°. année, 1880. Bruxelles, 1884. 4to. 58 pp. Jelinek, Carl. Anleitung zur Ausfiihrung meteorologischer Beobachtungen, nebst einer Sammlung von Hiilfstafeln, neu herausgegeben und umgearbeitet von Dr. J. Hann. Wien, 1884. 8vo. 2pts., 80, 105 pp. Jousset, A. Traité de Vacclimatement et de l’acclimatation. Paris,1884. 8mo. 154 pp. 16 pl. Kiessling, J. Nebelgliih-Apparat. Hamburg, 1884. 4to. 8pp. (From Hamb.-Al- tona, Abh. naturw. Ver., vim, 1884.) Klein, H. J. Allgemeine Witterungskunde. Leipzig und Prag, 1884 12mo. 260 pp. Anleitung zur Vorausbestimmung des Wetters. Auf Grundlage der heutigen wissenschaftlichen Meteorologie und eigener Erfahrungen dargestellt. Leipzig, 1884. 8vo. 100 pp. Wochenschrift fiir Astronomie, Meteorologie und Geographie. Kdéln, 1834. 8vo. (See Herman.) Klossowskij, A. Zur Lehre von der elektrischen Energie in der Atmosphire. Die Gewitter in Russland. (Inthe Russian language.) Odessa, 1884. 8vo. 116 pp. 5 pl. Lancaster, A. La pluie en Belgique. Bruxelles, 1884. 12mo. 113 pp. (From Bru- xelles, Annuaire, 1884.) Libbey, William. (See Guyot, Arnold.) Marriott, W. The meteorological record. Monthly results of observations made at the stations of the Royal Meteorological Society (Quarterly). London, 8. A. 8vo. Mawley, Edward. The weather of 1883, as observed in the neighborhood of London, and compared in all respects with that of an average year. London [1#84]. 8vo. 78 pp. Meucci, I*. Rivista agraria meteorologica dell’ anno 1883. Firenze, 1884. 12mo. 14 pp. Meyer, L. Die Bewélkung in Wiirttemberg, mit Zugrundelegung der Beobachtungen von 1878~82, und mit besonderer Beriicksichtigung meteorologischer Gebiete. (Stuttgart, 1884.) Svo. 81 pp. Millot, C. Etude sur les orages dans le département de Meurthe-et-Moselle. Nancy, 1884. 20 pp. Mohn, H. Les phénoménes de ’atmosphére. Traité illustré de météorologie pratiqne traduit par Decaudin-Labesse, précédé d’une introduction par H. de Parville. Paris, 1884. 8vo. 472 pp. 24 ch. See Christiania, METEOROLOGY. 399 Montigny, Ch. De linfluence de l’état de ’atmosphére sur Vapparition de certains couleurs dans la scintillation des étoiles, au point de vue de la prévision.du temps. Bruxelles, 1884. 8vo. (From Bruxelles, Acad. Bull., v1, 1884, 304-311.) Mottez, A. Réflexions sur des points de météorologie. Paris, 1884. 8vo. (2 pam- phlets.) Neumayer, Geo. Bericht iiber die Verhandlungen des internationalen meteorologi- schen Comite’s. Versammlung in Kopenhagen, vom1. bis 4. Aug. 1882. Ham- burg, 1884. 8vo. 102 pp. Palmieri, L. Die atmosphiirische Elektricitiit. Deutsch von Discher. Wien, 1884. 8vo. 50 pp. Ramsey, Alexander. A bibliography, guide, and index to climate. London, 1884. 8vo. 449 pp. Illustrated. Ragona, D. Sui crepuscoli rossi dell’ autunno 1883 e dell’ inverno 1883~’84. Roma, 1884. 4to. 39 pp. Riggenbach, Albert. Witterungsiibersicht des Jahres 1853. Basel, 1884. 8vo. (From Naturf. Gesell. Verhandl., vir, 1884, 561-587. ) Roiti, Antonio, col Luigi Pasqualini. Osservazioni continue della elettricita& atmos- ferica istitute a Firenze. Firenze, 1884. 10 pp. 5 pl. (From Firenze, R. Ist. Studi, 1884.) Roper, W. Statistics of Lancaster rainfall and other loeal meteorological informa- tion, 1784 to 1883. (Lancaster, 1884.) 8vo. 17 pp. 3 pl. Rosser, W. H. Seamen’s guide to the law of storms. The circular theory of storms, and its modification, as due to the incurvature of the winds, together with a sum- mary of the results of recent investigation and the questions for masters and mates. London, 1384. 8vo. 28pp. WTlustrated. Russell, H. C. Results of rain and river observations made in New South Wales dur- ing 1883. [Sydney], 1884. 8vo. 27 pp. Russo, E. M. Meteorologia e geografia fisica del mare. Napoli, 1884. 8vo. 591 pp. 6 pl. Rykatchew. Note surles ondes atmosphériques produites par l’éruption de Krakatoa. St.-Pétersbourg, 1884. 8vo. (From Acad. Sci. Bull., 1884.) Schio. (See Almerico da Schio.) Schmidt, J. F. J. Description phénoméne physique. Météorologie et phénologie. Athénes, 1884. Ato. Schuster, Prof. Observations météorologiques faites & Metz en 1880. Metz, 1884. 8ve. 34 pp. Scott, Robert H. Elementiire Meteorologie. Aus dem Englischen iibersetzt von W von Freeden. Leipzig, 1884. 8vo. Snow, F. H. Monthly weather report, 1884. Observations taken at Lawrence, Kansas. 8vo. Single sheets. Strachey, R. Onthe computation of the quantity of heat in excess of any fixed base temperature received at any place during the course of the year, te supply a standard for comparison with the progress of vegetation. (London Quart. Weather Rept., 1878, Append. 11, 20 pp.) Symons, G. J. Distribution of rainfall over the British Isle during 1883. London, 1883. 8vo. 194 pp. Monthly meteorological magazine, vol. xrx, 1884. London, S. A. 8vo. Thorne. (See Herman.) Topfer, H. Untersuchungen iiber die Regenverhiiltnisse Deutschlands. Gérlitz, 1884. Svo. 153 pp. (From Gorlitz, Abhandl. Naturf. Gesell., 1884.) Trembley, J.B. Reports and statistics of the meteorology of the city of Oakland, Cal., for the year 1882~’83. Oakland, Cal., 1884. 12mo. Upton, Winsiow. Report of observations made on the expedition to Caroline Island to observe the total solar eclipse of May 6, 1883. (Met. obs.) Washington, 1884, 4to. 64pp. 7pl. (From National Acad. Sci., Mem. 11.) 400 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. Weihrauch, Karl. Meteorologische Beobachtungen, angestellt in Dorpat in den Jah- ren 1877, 1878,1880. Jahrg. xu, xuI xv. 3. Band, 2.-5. Hefte, 138 pp., 251 pp., 2vols. Dorpat, 1884. 8vo. Studien zur Mittelbildung bei der relativen Feuchtigkeit. Moscow, 1884. 8vo. 47 De Wojeikof Alexander. (The climates of the globe, particularly of Russia.) (St. Pe- tersburg, 1484. 8vo. 640 pp.) (Russian language.) Il.— Publications of institutions. Adelaide Observatory. Meteorological observations made at the Adelaide Observa- tory and other places in South Australia and the northern territory during the year 1881 under the direction of Charles Todd. Adelaide, 1884. 4to. Alabama Weather Service. Reports, Jan., Dec., 1884. Montgomery, 1884. 8vo. Alessandria. Specola del Seminario. Osservazioni meteorologiche fatte in Alessan- dria. Anno xxIx, 1882. Alessandria, 1884. 8vo. 33. pp. Algiers. [Service météorologique du Gouvernement Général.] Bulletin météorolo- gique. 1x®*-x¢, 1884, Jan. 1.-Dec. 31. sm. fol. sheets. Associazione Mcteorologica Italiana. Bollettino decadico, publicato per cura dell’ Os- servatorio Centra ledel collegio Carlo Alberto in Moncalieri. Anno x1, 1884. Torino, 1884. 1. 8vo. Bojlettino mensuale, publicato per cura dell’ Osservatorio centrale del real Collegio Carlo Alberto in Moncalieri. Anno 1883-84. Serie 11. Vol. tv. Moncealieri, 1884. sm. fol. Batavia. Observatorium. Regenwaarnemingen in Nederlandsch Indié, 1883. Door J. P. van der Stok. Batavia, 1884. 8vo. Xx11-+360 pp. Bengal Meteorological Office. Table of rainfall recorded at stations in Bengal. 1883. January—December, and annual tables. sm. fol. Berlin. Haupstation des forstlichen Versuchswesen in Preussen. Jahresbericht iiber die Beobachtungs-Ergebnisse der von den forstlichen Versuchsanstalten des Konig - reichs Preussen, des Kénigreichs Wiirttemberg, des Herzogthums Braunschweig, der thiiringischen Staaten, der Reichslande und dem Landesdirectorium der Pro- vinz Hannover eingerichteten forstlich-meteorologischen Stationen, 10. Jahrg. 1833. Hrsg. von A. Miittrich. Berlin, 1884. 8vo. Berlin. K6n. Meteorologisches Institut. Preussische Statistik. Lxxvin. Ergebnisse der meteorologischen Beobachtungen im Jahre 1853. Von Geo. Hellmann. Ber- lin, 1884. 4to. x1v-+158 pp. Ipl. Berlin. Kon. Statistisches Bureau. Witterung nach den Beobachtungen des kénig- lichen meteorologischen Instituts. 1883, Jan.—Dec. Statist. Correspondenz., Jahrg. IxX-x, 1883-’84. Brussels. Observatoire Royal: Bulletin météorologique. 1884, Jan. 1-Dec. 31. fol. sheets. Annuaire. Lit, 1885. Bruxelles, 1884. 32mo. 374 pp. Canada Meteorological Service. Report of the Meteorological Service of the Do- minion of Canada for the year ending December 31, 1882. Charles Carpmael, superintendent. Ottawa, 1884. x1x-+137 pp. Cape of Good Hope. Meteorological Commission. Report for the year 1883. Cape Town, 1884. 4to. 70 pp. Ceylon. (See Colombo.) Christiania. Norwegisches meteorologisches Institut. Jahrbuch, 1883. Hrsg. von H.Mohn. Christiania,1884. 4to. v. 93+411 pp. Coimbra. Observatorio Magnetico e Meteorologico. Observagoes meteorologicas, 1483. Coimbra, 1884. 4to. Ix-+136 pp. Colombo. Surveyor-General’s Office. Meteorology of Ceylon, 1883, [Columb,1884.] 8vo, METEOROLOGY. 401 Copenhagen. Dansk Meteorologisk Institut, Bulletin météorologique du nord, publié par les Instituts météorologiques de Nor- vége, de Danemark et de Suéde. Année 1884, Copenhague, s. a. obl. 8vo. Résumé des travaux de l’expédition polaire danoise internationale, suivi d’un som- maire des observations météorologiques faites pendant la dérive du ‘‘ Déjmphna” dans la mer de Kara. Copenhagen, 1884. 8vo. 41 pp. 2 maps. Deutsche Seewarte. Tiigliche synoptische Wetterkarten fiir den nordatlantischen Ozean und die anliegenden Theile der Kontinente. Erstes Quartal (Dez. 1880 bis Febr. 1881). Copenhagen und Hamburg, 1884. fol. 200 pp. Cordova. Oficina Meteorolégica. Anales de la Oficina meteorolégica Argentina por su director, Benjamin A. Gould. T., Iv. Buenos Aires, 1884. 4to. 598 pp. 1 map. Deutsche Seewarte. (See Hamburg. ) Geneva. Observatoire. Résumé météorologique de année 1583 pour Genéve et le Grand Saint-Bernard, par A. Kammermann. Genéve, 1884. 8vo. 44 pp. Greenwich Royal Observatory. Magnetic and meteorological observations, 1882. London, 1884. 4to. XLVIII--LXXXI pp. Guatemala. Instituto Nacional Central. Revista del Observatorio meteorolégico i 1883. [Guatemala, 1883.] 4to. 42 pp. Hamburg. Deutsche Seewarte. Tiglicher Wetterbericht. 1x. Jahrg., 1884. Hamburg. fol. Monatliche Uebersicht der Witterung, 1884. Jahrg.1x. Hamburg,1884. 8vo. Meteorologische Beobachtungen in Deutschland fiir 1882. Jahrg. v. Hamburg, 1884. 4to. 226 pp. Aus dem Archiv der deutschen Seewarte. Iv. Jahrg., 1881. Hamburg, 1884. 4to. Charts. Vierter Jahres-Bericht iiber die Thitigkeit der deutschen Seewarte fiir das Jahr 1881. No.1. 57-+-xxiI pp. Das Atmosphiirikon. Eine Vorrichtung zur Erliuterung der bei atmosphiirischen Erscheinungen yorkommenden Ausdriicke und Vorgiinge. No.3. 4 pp. 1 pl. (See Copenhagen. ) Havana. Colegio de Belen. Observaciones magnéticas y meteorolégicas. Habana, 1875. Benito Vifies, director. Habana, 1884. 4to. 58pp. 13 pl. Helsingfors. Société des Sciences de Finlande. Observations météorologiques. Ix. année, 1881. Helsingfors, 1884. 8vo. Illinois. Department of Agriculture. Monthly weather review, 1684. Springfield, 1884. 8vo. Calcutta. Meteorological Office : Report on the administration of the meteorological department of the Government of India in 188384. [Calcutta, 1884.] 4to. Report on the meteorology of India in 1882, by Henry F. Blanford, meteorological reporter. Calcutta, 1884. 4to. 154+298 pp. 8 pl. Registers of original observations, 1884 (monthly). 4to. Daily bulletin, 1884. Large sheets. Internationale Polar-Commission: Mittheilungen. v. Heft. Nos. 79-97. St. Petersburg, 1884. 1. 8vo. pp. 161-214. No. 88. Ekholm, N. L’expédition suédoise au Spitzberg, 1882-1883. pp. 171-190. No. 89. Paulsen, Adam. Sur la détermination des angles que font avec le méridien magnétique les aiguilles des instruments pour mesurer les variations dans l’inteu sité horizontale et verticale. p. 191. No. 94. Einige Programm-Fragen fiir die Conferenz in Wien and vorliiufige Bemer- kungen dazu. pp. 197-202. No. 97. Programm der Verhandlungen der vierten internationalen Polar-Conferenz in Wien, am 17. April 1884. pp. 203-214. VI. Heft, Nos. 98-110. St. Petersburg, 1884. 4to. pp. 215-334. 1 pl. S, Mis. 33——26 402 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 18984. Internationale Polar-Commission—Continued. No. 98. Protokolle der vierten internationalen Polar-Conferenz zu Wien, 17.-24. April 1884. pp. 215-266. Beilage A—D. pp. 266-279. Nos. 99-102. Bemerkungen zum Programm der internationalen Polar-Conferenz. pp. 279-286. No. 107. Niederliindische Polar-Expedition, 1882-1883. Tabellarische Uebersicht der meteorologischen Beobachtungen in dem Karischen Meere. Oct. 1882-Juni 1883. pp. 292-303. No. 109. Stok, J. Q. van der. Neue Methode zur Bestimmung der periodischen und aperiodischen Aenderungen der Elemente des Erdmagnetismus. pp. 305-321. No. 110. Lemstrém, Selim. Sur les travaux et les principaux résultats de ’expédi- tion polaire finlandaise 4 Sodankyli, 1883-84. pp. 321-334. 1 pl. Iowa Weather Service. Bulletin for January—December, 1884. By Dr. Gustavus Hinrichs, director. Iowa City, 1884. 12mo. Karlsruhe. Centralbureau fiir Meteorologie und Hydrographie. Jahresbericht, 1883. Karlesruhe, 1884. 4to. 77 pp. 6 pl. Beitriige zur Hydrographie des Grossherzogthums Baden. Karlsruhe, 1884. 4to, 104 pp. 17 pl. Kiel. Ministerial-Kommission zur Untersuchung der deutschen Meere. Ergebnisse der Beobachtungsstationen an den deutscheg Kiisten tiber die physikalischen Eigenschaften der Ostsee und Nordsee und die Fischerei. Jahrg. 1882. Heft 1-xiI. Berlin, 1884. obl. Kraka U. K. k. Sternwarte. Meteorologische Beobachtungen. 1883, January- December. 8vo sheets. : Lisbon. Observatorio do Infante D. Luiz. Annaes xx, 1882. Lisboa, 1884. 4to. 143 pp. Annaes. Observagoes dos postos meteorologicos regundo o plano adoptado no con- gresso de Vienna d’Austria, 1882. Lisboa, 1884. 4to. 131 pp. London. Meteorological Council: Official No. 33. The ‘quarterly weather report. Parts m1, Iv. July-September, October-December, 1876. London, 1884. 4to. 35 pp. 6 ch., 23 pl.; 38pp., 6 ch., 25 pl. No. 52. The quarterly weather report. Part 1. January-March, 1877 (with ap- pendices). London, 1884. 4io. 48pp. 6ch. 5pl. Append. 1.—Scott, R. H.— On the diurnal range of rainfall at the seven observatories in connection with the Meteorological Office. 1871-80. 22 pp. 5 pl. Append. 1.—Shaw, W. N.— Report on evaporimeters. 8 pp., 2 pl. No. 54. Hourly readings. Parts 1, ut. April-June, July-September, 1882. Lon- don, 1884. 4to. 127 pp. 126 pp. No. 55. The quarterly report, 1878. Appendices and plates. London, 1884. 4to. [32] pp. 73 pl. No. 58. Report to the Royal Society for the year ending 3lst of March, 1883. Lon- don, 1884. 8vo. 118 pp. 1 map. No. 59. Sea temperature charts for the Atlantic, Pacific, and Indian Oceans. London, 1884. fol. No. 61. A barometer manual for the use ofseamen. London, 1884. 8vo. 41 pp. 2pl. No. 62. The monthly weather reports of the Meteorological Office for the year 1884. London, 1884. 4to. London Meteorological Office. Daily weather report, 1884, January 1-December 31. 2vols. s.le.a. fol. Weekly weather report. Vol. vu, 1884. London. s.a. 1.8vo. London Meteorological Society. Memorandum on climatological observations and their relation to public health. [London, 1884.] 12mo. 8 pp. Quarterly Journal. (See Periodicals.) METEOROLOGY. 403 Louisiana State weather sérvice. Reports, January—December, 1884. New Orleans, 1884. 8vo. Lyons. Observatoire. Annales. Par Ch. André, director. Premiére série. Météo- rologie. I. 1878~79~80. Lyons, Paris, 1884. 4to. 126 pp., 5 pl. Madras Meteorological Office. Administration report of the meteorological reporter to the government of Madras, 1883-1884. Madras, 1884. 12mo. 19 pp. Madrid Observatorio. Restimen de las observaciones meteorolégicas efectuadas en la peninsula y algunas de sus islas adjacentes, durante los anos del mismo nombre 1876, 1877, 1879, 1880,-1882. Madrid, 1883-1884. 8vo. 2vols. V-+578 pp. Magdeburg. Verein fiir landwirthschaftliche Wetterkunde in Sachsen, Monatsschrift fiir praktische Witterungskunde. Hrsg. von Dr. R. Assmann. I. Jahrg. Mag- deburg, 1884. 12mo. Magdeburg. Wetterwarte der Magdeburgischen Zeitung. Jahrbuch der meteoro- logischen Beobachtungen. Station I, Ordnung. Jahrg. U, 1883. Hrsg. von R. Assmann. Magdeburg, 1884. 4to. 60 pp. 12 pl. Melbourne Observatory: Results of observations, by R. L. J. Ellery. 1884 (monthly). Melbourne, 1884. 8vo. Map showing rainfall over southeastern Australia and Tasmania for 1883. Mel- bourne, 1884. 1 sheet. Milan. R. Osservatorio astronomico di Brera. Osservazioni meteorologiche eseguite nell anno 1833 col riassunto composto sulle medesime da E. Pini. 8yvo. 61 pp. Milan. R. Osservatorio di Brera. Osservazioni meteorologiche orarie ottenute da strumenti registratori durante anno 1882. Rilevateecalcolateda C. Fornioni. Milano, 1884. sm. fol. Publ. No.xvu. Schiaparelli, Pini, und Frisiani. Gewitter in Oberitalien im Jahre 1878. Milano, 1884. 4to. 99 pp. 8 pl. Missouri Weather Service. Monthly weather review, 1884. St. Louis. 8vo. Montpellier. Commission Météorologique. Bulletin météorologique du département de ’Hérault, 1883. Montpellier, 1884. 4to. 61 pp., 14 pl. Montsouris. Observatoire. Annuaire pour l’an 1884. Météorologie, Agriculture, Hy giéne. Paris, s.a. 16mo. Munich. K. meteorologische Central-Station. Beobachtungen der meteorologischen Stationen im KG6nigreich Bayern unter Beriicksichtigung der Gewittererschei- nungen im Kénigreich Wiirtemberg. Hrsg. * * * durch W. von Bezold und C. Lang. v. Jahrg., 1883. Miinchen, 1884. 1. 4to. Lv. 207 pp., 4 pl. Nancy. Commission Météorologique. Observations météorologiques de la Commis- sion de Meurthe-et-Moselle, 1883. [Nancy, 1884.] 4to. 50 pp., 41 ch. Naples. R. Osservatorio di Capodimonte. Riassunti decadici e mensili delle osserva- zione meteorologiche nell’ anno 1883, per Faustino Brioschi. Naples, 1884. 4to. 8 pp. Nebraska Weather Service. Bulletin January—December, 1884. Crete, 1884. 8vo. New England Meteorological Society. Bulletin, Nos. 1,2, November-December, 1884. Providence, R.I. s.a. 8vo. New Jersey Monthly Weather Review, 1884. Newark, N.J., 1884. 8vo. Ohio Meteorological Bureau: Report for the month of January-[ December], 1884. Columbus, 1884. 8vo. Annual report for the year ending October 31, 1883. By T.C. Mendenhall, director. Columbus, 1884. 8vo. 125 pp. Oviedo. Estacion Meteorolégica. Restimen general de las observaciones hezhas durante el ano de 1883. Por Luis Gonzdlez Frades. Oviedo, 1884. 8vo. 10 pp. Palermo. R. Osservatorio. Bullettino metecrologico agrario mensile. v, 1884. [Palermo, 1884.] 12mo. 404 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. Paris. Bureau Central Météorologique de France. Annales publiées par E. Mascart Année 18827 Parties i, m1, Iv. Paris, 1884. 4to. I.—Etudes des orages en France et mémoires divers. xvi + 99 pp., 38 pl.—Con- TENTS : Températures du sol et de Vair observées au Muséum histoire naturelle pendant Vannée 1882, par E. et H. Beequerel. 6 pp. Etude sur la marche des phénoménes de la végétation en France pendant les années 1880 et 1881, par Alfred Angot. 5 pp., 14 pl. Observations sur les migrations des oiseaux, par Alfred Angot. 8 pp., 2 pl. III.—Sur le régime des pluies en France pendant l’année 1882, par Th. Moureaux. 300 pp., 5 pl. IV.—Météorologie générale. 134 pp., 20 pl.—CONTENTSs : Observations sur Ja température de la mer faites pendant le cours de la mis- sion de Laponie, par G. Pouchet. pp. 1-24. Observations météorologiques faites dans les postes consulaires frangais, par Léon Teisserenc de Bort * * * . pp. 25-123, 19 pl. Sur une pluie terreuse tombée aux iles Canaries le 21 février 1883. Par Léon Teisserenc de Bort * * * . pp. 125-134, 1 pl. Paris. Bureau Central Météorologique de France. Rapports du comité météorolo- gique international. Réunion de Copenhague, 1882. Paris, 1884. 8vo. 147 pp. Paris. Bureau des Longitudes. Annuaire pour l’an 1884. Paris, 32mo. 910 pp. Paris. Service Hydrométrique du Bassin de la Seine. Résumé des observations cen- tralisées, 1882. Paris, 1884. 8vo. Paris. Manuel hydrologique du Bassin de la Seine, par A. de Préandeau. Paris, 1884. ATOn eu ap Psu aps Perpignan. Département des Pyrénées-Orientales. Bulletin météorologique. X11, 1883. Perpignan, 1884. 4to. 86 pp. Polar-Commission. (See Internationale.) Prag. K.k. Sternwarte. Astronomische, magnetische und meteorologische Beobach- tungen im Jahre 1883. Hrsg. von L. Weinek. 44. Jahrg. Prag, xix--56 pp., 1 pl. Puebla. Colegio del Sagrado Corazon. Observaciones meteoroldégicas, 1883. [Pue- bla], 1884. obl. 4to. Radcliffe Observatory. Results, 1881. Oxford, 1884. 8vo. 100 pp. Rome. Ufficio Centrale di Meteorologia. Bollettino meteorologico. Anno v1, 1884. January 1-December 31. 1. 8vo. sheets. Revista Meteorico-agraria. Anno v, 1884. (Roma, 1884.) 1. 8vo. Annali. Serie II, Vol. IV, partes I, I, III, 1882. Roma, 1884. 4to.—CONTENTS: I Chistoni, Ciro. Modificazione dell’ igrometro ad appannamento e cenno sto- rico di questo apparecchio. pp. 19-82., 1 pl. Ferrari, Ciro. Relazioni tra aleuni elementi meteorici ed i prodotti della campagna in Italia negli anni 1875~79 e 1880-82. pp. 167-214, 1 pl. Gambara, G. Sul clima di Como. pp. 101-149, 1 pl. Lugli, Aurelio. Sulla variazione media della temperatura in Italia con la latitudine ed altezza. pp. 47-75. Lugh, Aurelio. *Primi risultati statistici sui presagi del tempo fatte nell’ Ufficio Centrale di Meteorologia in Roma. pp. 153-164. Marchi, Luigi de. Ricerche sulla teoria matematica dei venti. pp. 79-97, ipl Pini, E. Tracciamento ed illustrazione del percorso di aleuni temporali regis- trati nell’ anno 1878. pp. 221-228. (See, also, Schiaparelli, G. V.) *Also published separately. ’ METEOROLOGY. 405 Ragona, D. Pioggia a differenti altezze. pp. 35-44. Schiaparelli, C. V., ed Pini, E. Investigazioni teoriche sui temporali osser- vati nell’ Italia superiore durante il 1878, e sulla loro dipendenza dai movimenti dell’ atmosfera nell’ Europa occidentale. pp. 225-280, § pl. Semmola, Eugenio. Sulla variazione annuale di temperatura delle acque del gulfo di Napoli con un’ appendice sulle temperature estreme diurne nell’ ottobre 1879. pp. 217-219. Il. Osservazioni meteorologiche fatte in Italia nel 1883, ridotte ed ordinate dalla sezione dei compilatori diretta dal P. Busin. 589 + 148 pp. 1B Of Tacchini, P. Osservazioni solari dirette e spettroscopiche fatte nel 1882 nel R. Osservatorio del Collegio Romano. pp. 3-50, 2 pl. Tacchini, P. Sul clima di Roma. pp. 87-116, 2 pl. Tacchini, P., ed Millosevich, E. Osservazioni meteorologiche dell’ osserva- torio del Collegio Romano e reviste mensili dell’ anno 1882. pp. [1 ]-[123] St. Petersburg. Physikalisches Central-Observatorium. Meteorologisches Bulletin. 1884, Jan. 1—Dec.31. fol. sheets. (In the Russian language also.) San Fernando. Observatoriode Marina. Anales. Cecilio Pujazon, director. Seccion 28. Observaciones meteorolégicas, 1883. San Fernando, 1884. 4to. rv +134 pp. Santiago de Chile: Comision Central de Meteorologia. Anuario de la Oficina central meteorolégica de Chile. vu. 1875. Santiago de Chile, 1884. 1. 8vo. xiii+-377 pp. Observatorio Astronémico. Observaciones meteroléjicas. José Ignacio Vergara, director. 1873-1881. Santiago de Chile, 1884. 8vo., xev-+266 pp. 25 pl. Singapore. Straits Settlements. Meteorological returns. 1883. [Singapore, 1884. ] 8vo. Stockholm. Kongl. Vvenska Vetenskaps-Akademien. Meteorologiska Iakttagelser i Sverige utgifna af Kongl. Svenska Vetenskaps-Akademien, anstiilda och utar- _ betade under inseende af meteorologiska Central-Anstalten.. vim. 1880. Stock- holm, 1884. 1. 4to. Stockholm. Meteorologiska Central-Anstalt. Manadséfversigt af Viiderleken i Sverige till Landtbrukets tjenst utgifven under meteorologiska Central-Anstal- tens inseende af H. E. Hamberg. Tredje Argingen, 1883. Stockholm, 1884. fol. Stonyhurst College Observatory. Results of meteorological and magnetical obser- vations, 1883. By S. J. Perry. Roehampton, 1884. 12mo. Sydney Observatory. Results of rain and river observations in New South Wales iv 1883. By H.C. Russel. Sydney, 1884. 8vo. Tennessee. Bureau of Agriculture. Report of the Tennessee weather service. Janu- ary—December, 1884. Nashville, 1884. 8vo. Tokio: Imperial Meteorological Observatory. Tri-daily weather maps, 1884. Tokio, 1884. 4to. Sheets. [In the Japanese language also. ] Toronto Magnetical Observatory. General meteorological register for the year 1883. 8.l.e.a. S8vo. 6 pp. United States Hydrographic Office : Pilot charts of the North Atlantic Ocean, 1884. Nos. 2-13. Washington, 1884. ]. fol. sheets. United States Naval Observatory : Meteorological observations, 1880. Washington, 1884. 4to. 18 pp. Astronomical and meteorological observations made during the year 1880. Rear- Admiral Jobn Rodgers, U. S. N., Superintendent. Washington, 1884. 4to, lxxix +211+38 pp. 5pl. 406 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. United States Signal Service: War Department weather map (daily, 7 a. m.), 1884. 1. fol. sheets. Bulletin of international meteorological observations, taken simultaneously at 7 a. m., Washington time, 1883. (Daily, with monthly summary.) Washington, 1884. 1. Svo. Monthly weatner review, 1884. Washington, 1884. 1. 4to. charts. Annual report of the Chief Signal Officer, 1882-1883. Washington, 1884. 8vo. v-+1,164 pp. 68 charts. Professional papers of the Signal Service: No. vu.—Finley, John P. Report on the character of six hundred tornadoes. (Re- vised edition. ] Washington, 1884. 4to. 29 pp. 3 pl. No. xu.---Ferrell, William. Temperature of the atmosphere and earth’s surface. Washington, 1884. 4to. 69 pp. No. x1v.—-Finley, John P. Charts of relative storm frequency for a portion of the northern hemisphere. Washington, 1884. 4to. 9pp. 13 pl. No. xv.—-Langley, S.P. Researches on solar heat and its absorption by the earth’s atmosphere. Washington, 1884. 4to. 242 pp. 19 pl. Signal Service notes : No. xu1.—Finley, J. P. The special characteristics of tornadoes. Washington, 1884. 8vo. 19 pp. No. x1v.—Lamar, W. H., and Ellis, Frank W. Physical observations during the Lady Franklin Bay expedition, 1883. Washington, 1884. 8vo. 62 pp. 13 pl. Yo. xv.—Hazen, H. A. Danger lines and river floods of 1882. Washington, 1884. 8vo. 30 pp. No. xv1.—Curtis,-G. E. The effect of wind currents on rainfall. Washington, 1884. 8vo. ll pp. 2pl. No. xvu.—Morrill, Park. sanees 118 Bornstein, Professor : MUBHIGIECLOL. SOl-FOPIShOTING 2.22% 2-2 non> sods MERE Ee oes aside Sudeeues So 135 PR MNCE WMI AOD 5.5. o.) LS oot pase eee rane ec ome nap senda ce 143 Denali. PUDUOMOMOAL AWS .....5 .--cees> snqmecmedn'sncls tenewene ors o< 421 Brocken, apparatus at station on summit ...7 22.2.2. 200 one cen e ee cone wee 148 Broun, J. A., movement of barometric waves .... ......---- -ece ener eevee 267 S. Mis, 33 27 418 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. No. of paragraph. Browne, W. R:, causes of glacial motion: 22) 2-222 ee mane meets ce occ we ook 435 Bruns, Dr. H., effeet of friction on Ferrel’s law 25252. secs ce ents2- 2 === 3 256 Buchanan, J: Y., physics of the ocean: .-- 2. 2. ee. aceite ee eins aaa a 12 Buchan, A.: Temperature of British islands. ...-.-...--- SSS sece tee meee Sea soma 190 Wind. diurnal period ayty SC aac same ee ae tale ate eee tele ee 248 By S=Balllots col dud ays yma Mei yey ee ere ere eee eee er 316 Buzin, Prof. P:: Modified isobarss. 2220 seer wie eee eeieiee selene eee eee Eee eee 279 The'value of departures:t.: = soot 22 22 seme ste soc eee ees a eee eee eee 325 Distribution of weather, in reference to storm-centers---...---.........- 325 Carpenter, W. F., solar periods in daily temperature ........-...---.......- 410 Oentral America, Climate f eaaea aches mie see er ene scene eee ease eee 82 Chambers) fH), theawinds\of Kurracheeias. -.s2es.- eee ecc eco sa eee eee 10 Chambers, ©); sun-spotiand planetary periods -<-- ~~~ --- == 4 ---mise 4 eosee ae 411 Chinese meteoroloricaliservices==s2 5-22 --6)- sae eo alee eee ee ee seer 52 Chistoni, Protessor, barometer comparisons in Europe..-.-....-.------.----- 138 OhrysialyErotessor, new byorometer sae. eee ees eee ee a eerie ae 51 Cirrus; clouds, formation Of 2-2 cies cases eee aeeeee eee see arse eee ee 205 Clark:J.) W..,; DY STOscopic SULlACes <2. a> je sclee ss - =e cicheecieneiss) oasis eee 110 Clayton, H. H.: NYT) OI COCKE Saag Gn eenG Soe aceSiSno Sone saso. Scag code anode Shes tebe 3 Pinnder-nomallsiof dwlyio. 1 soseee snes esos ness eee eee 3 Climate: OfeJaneMaven:- 2 Ad os 52 Sac nye ccetees ao es eae Sas ates ciers Seeley wceinne 29 Of Ben Nevis ssccs socee ce soee re sects ee aoe Bote enon seuenien neces sere 51 Estrella oie s.eelaaral ome cease miaiaain) Seivitee melas oat owain ies eletweiniels sie eieaeiaiie ar 54 Proposed Mew: ZONeS Of so. sak Seeks eeietonee eee eee eee ee oe eee 184 During geological epochs tases sasseses ses a siee serene elena eas 425, 433, 441 Clouds: : Altiiude of byzphotograpbiy-co-- 5 ss -stoe os ee Salesian tosleneeee ee eee aoa oO Altitude of vertical parallax: =~ 5-5. 5- scjsos- see oo eee eee eee 151 Alintude of, neéw-forms\Of=-.s2s5oce che sacle ce Daca so weies eles een eee 207 Altitudelot ftormationyof 22282 oo. Soe celonas scieiae cisaia rete ceeion eee 201, 206, 2138, 214 Altitude of, observations of.......... Re aan ceosod chau cs sccuscseer Bases 204 Aipsorbisolar heat-22 32 oto. notes Ueleeonle cape eee ace eee ee eee ee 211 Hlotationi OF oc. < meee ee ba ics eae ace peeria scl ne case Sila ae aerate 210, 211 Photocraphy.of: 252 2ateso-eisee ee ence eatin Son eee ae rientee ae eee eee 149, 150 Hormed-of minute unitrozensdrops.-se2 sere eee eee is eee eee 390 Cloudy: days and mean:cloudinesss-<= - 22-42 2- sess ees oe eee eee eee zal, coe Camets and clondsioiscosmicidust=. see seer oor eee eee eae 390, 399, 401, 402 Composite portraiture applied to meteorclogy...... ..--..----.---..------: 154 Congo: Climate of. ese So se Se eee ceive o ore oe Soe e hese Demise eee aac saicieiclehanee 85 Observations in the region of thes-- =. sesso e aoa aes eas nieeenyeseeee 385 Congress: Hlectrical, Paris, 1884. 224.2255 2 = aw Sea eee eee ease ose e eee eae oe aes 329 WNationaliconterence, Philadelphia S84 ee naee sete see ae eee 330 Cornu: Intensity.of rainband 2c? set. 203522 he eee ee eres pee cen ee 376 Nebulous:cloud about the: sunit=+=--ssesee reenact eee oo eee eee eee 400 Corona, observed on Ben Nevis....--. Sis 2 SOCCER ore icisioue See ee ee eee 379 Craic Drs introduces sling psy chrometeresessescrssesce cee eee teeneeee 130 Crova, Professor, improved dew-point PY OPENS) Goce pseeee cdé ose cnoscecocgs 12h METEOROLOGY. 419 No. of paragraph. Cunningham, measurement of fog density ..-.--.------------- ----------+---- 153 Currents : Ascending, influence of vapor .......------ 2000 s--60+ ------ -2-- 22-2 == 201 Upper, suggestions a9 t0 ...- 2... 2.25 sens on ene nee cewmen en ns= ren coms == 265 Cycle, barometer and rainfall - -... .... 2... .200 cn ee cone oo nn ene wae e ene ne =e 3 Danian, J... cloud movement and rain ---..--. 222-22. -.2- s+ +--- --------==- 230 Danckelman, Dr. A. von: Meteorolocy of Congo region .-) ~~: =~. cs. soe oecmeeeaeee - aeons ie =p O01 Sco [Sapo RN SEDC) 1h ae ee RA et Be ae era eh oar Mae tence 216 Darwin, G. H., formation of ripple-marks and cirri....-...---...----------- 214 Davis, William M.: Wylitn devote Ub @wAG aM tl Canc a techn ste sas clon ete oie Oe nro erence eietete eee 3 Monn AC OesaMdaGyiGlONES soe sms sea. eee nee el Sino eae oo serra eel 3 WompPOsiveMOLsralGuUne\as. eres. ose ae ek ei cele ee ee 154 Elementaryeproor of Ferrel’ Sdaw, vosse se oae= see eam eee elec elie 254 Gharxccenishlesron Fhe BM OOM as sae eee ele ae re nepal ninth ein mioineetet 307 DS eee Jats Jes Gin eVeTA UNO RnR spe cuoias Sond sea nee hon eed sodooe Sdeceresd ce Baa envamemind al, COLG* 2 5c aye sae soe ee emt ee ee Reise eat = mclembe fae alate 313, 319 Decades: WSU CHE IUO USC ee Se Sh 6- Ske asin ee Ronse noe Ee oE pee acoanp nosesacace ae 26 Possiple..in the: Signal Service... 2 .----. -22'2 5... -b- cco eee len--e= sescns 27 Degheyvrens vw Mou ypHOONSIOL 1 SOaiee= a acess alee ee lo = ae = miele ee 289 Denza, F.: Observations micaptiveralloon sesee = ajo seats nel semen lalate eal 108 Barometric comparisons in Hurope--- -5-=-= --.26 on ~ oe eee a 138 Deutsche-Seewarte, method of verifying predictions.-.....------- So ae see oe 106 Dew-point apparatus: iN iG@YG TURE O RNG) OW Ros a ae ee eS Com monce aS aoce 123, 124, 125 ME VANIS TER OL USOLOL a2 mica. Sect ss Seo nil doa ene eee diene ea ea ee 156 honvaluerot sini predieulon Sia e secre is) == aga oee yen eh meee 160 Doberck, Dr. W., director at Hong-Kong...--.-..---. ------.----------- ----- 52, 53 Doering, O., temperature and variations in South America...--.-.---------- 195 Drainage, subterranean, into wells.... ..-.-..--------------- -------+---+--- 223 Pirourhis and Hoods: .-.. -.<\-jo -s-- 2-0 sce e sens wan soins sew nn eeneen.= === 5= == 220, 221 iia) 1eaveley Ast Sg Oe ee ee SEA eee teens erat HDD olde eee Coase 224 Dufour, Prof. H.: Self-registerir g barometer......---.------ ---- -----+ +++ e222 2+ eee eee eee 141 MPC rice ING SeRV ALONG. 2 aac sod: Sao oe Ge oie eee Se Foe ese 330 Minute unfrozen fog particles .........-----.----+-----+- ------+-+--= 390 Dunwoody, Lieut. H. H. C., popular weather sayings ..-.--.-.--------------- 97 Bish phenomens, explanation Of . -- << -.<.)<2.- 25-05 qc eases 208, 209, 210, 211, 213 WrroricnsSOUNnCTaAdiOMELOES 256 o-2-4-- oe - m= wee lacieine ete hae l= i= 152 [Paran(ilit- Ceuaia ne) al ease oe San ee ene ne Ro PRS eo OC om OSC Oe 350, 353 Eccentricity of the earth affecting climate ..-...---. ----------.------------ 433, 441 Edlund, Professor, theory of unipolar induction ..---.....---:----.---------- 334 mancation smeteorolopical -._..--- =. 02 --2250)e = ca Aen oren ne we seen esse 19, 90 Egoroff, Professor, atmospheric spectrum lines..--...----.------------------ 371 Ekama, Dr. H.: IAIROT a ODSBEVG Miah NALS sac5 ve conc mca e elem maimem ew eminle innin a awiajn = 56 )~ = 398 arora and polar- bands 2.-..<...--<- ~~ 2as aces ogee eeah = wom n-ne -s-- o see 358 Ekholm, N., climate of Spitzbergen.....-.--..----- ------ ------------------ 32 Electricity: SREP SAL Seo We td oe Belov win cca. meanest eee ee eee 298 Sketchfofshistabors)se20) ss see ease cece ese tein seas eet eee 206 Structureiof thunder-stormss ss. --eeeeeee eae eee ee eeat eee eae eae 305 BVaporatlons sos oe. ebcce Bac Reece ew eee cic tec ea eee eeeriseee oes Cee eer 199, 200 Eiverettiwerot.. Jeb), text-book Of phySicsiensmi=seel seme er eet eee eee 72 Haye sun-spot period un postion Of plier oso aqtemeclias) | ieee eee eee 415 Ferrari, C.: Tiolian;thunder-storms 5.5. sn-2\-2 20 = == eee see ee eee ene sean eee 291 Cause-of thunderstorms ese es eee else ores sate eee ee eae 301 Climaterandsharvestsumultaliycseo se seme aera cee eer eeneare eee 426 Ferrel, Prof. William: Author of a general treatise on meteorology ........---.---..-...------- 69 Theory of wet and dry. bulb thermometers ...- -...-.....---..----.-.--- 127 Poleward: tendency ot Stormsisees a. eee ee ese ease eee eee eee ees 286 Hy psometricttormullassceme cee ee eeeeeie oc eee eee seiseeeer oeeae Bee ae eae 418 Festing, Colonel, aqueous absorption bands.......--.--.-..---..----------- 74 HinemannsC..G,,. studies om tornadoes --4= +--+ =e ee eee eae ee eee eee 306 Finley, Lieut. J. P.: Rornado Predichions)ssee.s-wnse sssreeeel- ee ere anole eee eee ae 3 Chartstof storm frequency =. -.<+sceee = ose eta eminiiee seein ee eee att 283 HischerProf.cA.-.metallic thermometerss-e- -sas eee eee eee eee ee eoee coe eee 136 Minzgerald, Prof.G sh... flotation’ of silkktiberssece sca see- ee ee oe eee 212 BRoocymeasurement of density Of 22. sas. cesmieseiciow nce nee eee 153 Hogbow,qobserved-on Benu Nevis -nas2acccmssincce ones eee tee eee 379 Forster, Prof. William: Errors of thermometers. sate ioe nc csateseciccset scemtnceeteoeiasee Teens 114 Sun-spot period!in position ofpiereo-2-- cee eee ee eee eee 413 Frankal, Dr. A., animal growth in rarefied air...-..-.....-.2.---.----.----- 430 Priction, éffect.on barometric: gradients... - 2+. ase oe eee eaeaee oe ee see 280 nihz ert ithe-whisper waindloftheekhine a5 ee eee eee nee ee ee cree eee eee 240 ihownaltitude of auroras oss ocene- cc cee ce eee tee reas cae me ere eee 360 Periodicity of sauroracteie 2223s hose coe nee eee eee oe cee eee 361 Froélich, Dr. O.: Atmospheric absorption.2 -2s..202-.. aces e een sewcee doe Javea 180 Ep iyelOlCribicisMS assy see eeeeeience Tees PRE We a nies See: Mee ee 183 Frost-work, method of measuring... .-.....--. ae dae sae eee ee oe 148 Euess;#hesanemocra phic. ye ae ce ce eer aerate eee oleae ee ee 134 Gay, twilights and eruptions of previous years...-.....------------------.-- 397 Gelcich, E., Jouva’s rules for hurricane predictions -....-...---. -.---------- 99 METEOROLOGY. 421 General treatises: NVGLOOLO LOC Wee ELAN Mice s son soc oe crclccb a are ene et ata e ainainieinia sama ain tae 68 MERCOEMNGR Us SUGQUE 5 oo -inc- aoe ideas Raced eee ene per aettaw aed =n mines 69 MIP TEOLO LO ae OLLOl vce Cosh Geetcicen se 306 ONES ING eevee eee ie cicernis oileta ais) ciciciniicr sreteio Meee Se nee Soe are Ro 385 EAC N ireatl ONTO OUSGULE ie a. cis anne boa ao he Cala aioe ere ie oe oie ae ose COL Oe Hazen, Prof. H. A.: BEEN OMSL eTHOR DOS ULC so mieie,ctiein cre ser ot crane aera ete natal tote es tue aie ec ness 3 MOUMTAC OL ON CLAUION! = foe! 2 oe! ~ oon v's oe wpeainlain oe aelete Eee ee ee eee 3 RH BMOMmMOLeLSUCIGOIS. se ca. a ons Meee RE ela cmtias, Comes ebm me 132 MocaTeMperacuLe wv AallAuONS. . 2225 case acsmtesacewinedesoaesseecs senses ce 189 422 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1824. No. of paragraph. MeaiihweschnlntivOme at LONG OMe 22 72) lence arene eee eee ee eee Siete 13 PVG uit layer Cleon © GE OLO1 © Psy cm ae aie ee ee ee eget 13 Heat-lightning, distance of... 22 .-) 2a dieeeetane peeee)tatsiaia as area 294, 296 Hellmann, Dr. G.: Repertorium) of German Meteorology eee eae eae eee an 88 Thunder-storms and atmospheric pressuLe--- - see ee eee ee eee ae ee 302 Cold-periods/of Breslau 23-220 cose oo 6 oo cee ee eee ener 317 Pwilieht; normal; in\Spaimesso ess sesiee oie cee ee eee na 381 Twilight, normal, imiurepe sss. ese = sect ee oe ee 382 Henry, Prof. Joseph: Reflection of thunder ss 225.0 2-2 5. ah oe etetioe asics eeiee ee toe ee eee 292 Structure‘of thunder-stormsss- seer oss ee eee eee eee eee eee eee 305 Hertz, Dr. H., thermodynamic problems, graphic solution of ..---...--...--- 266 Hildebrandsson, Prof. H. H.: Popular weather Sayings. 250 eas sc. ce cinccms eee ec eee ce eeeeseces Si Distribution of weather phenomena with reference to a storm-center..-.’ 324 Hill, E., climate as affected by eccentricity of earth’s OLD Sass ee ee eee 438 Hill, 8. A.: Meteorology iat Allahabad 422 se2 ae osc os aoc eeece eee ee eee 10 Meteorolooy ofthe Eimalayasies so. tso-ccieiee nee eeee sea see aa eee 10 Weather and: crime statistics nein dia se assoc ese ee ae eee eee eee eee 431 Himalayas;-meteorology of t= 22-29 mess oe see ca pe eee eee 10 Hirn:-absolute actinometer< os 2s2as.2 ates seea ce eset Ga eee roe 173 Dirschysin-spotmperiod-in: position) Of plenescses= sete pee aaa eee ae 415 HocbomeA. G., auvumn feMmperavure:O1) bULO De meee eee eee eee eee : 191 Hoffmann, Prof. H., permanency of thermal CONSENTS. =. eee ee 427 Hotimeyer, Capt. N-j daily weather charts.2-22-5- coe aceeae ase eee eee 22 Eonoluln, observations) of red( Sunsetsicscn-cren science eee eee eee meee 392 Hoppe, Dr. E.: Ehistoryrot electricitiys ss 225 ces tonuyoa2 ajonuss ae eeuet ic ioe Ceo 331 Dissipation or electricity 2. 3. sosss2ce eee eee eee ose eek 340 Proposestlimes of equalselectric loss = acres see ee aoe ee eee eee 340 Hough, B. F., valuable barograph records Pela slvce iets see ease ae eee 270 Hult, R. aha pnolomical :TeSUlts.. 82 Jos LS ewe. oo epers ssw tke crise as tem eee eee 421 Beare MECHANICA TeXPELIMEN LSM i = arse esleete eee ae ene nee eens 213, 214, 263, 265 Hygrometers : IELOLA Ole fee Soe ease oie eee a ate eS Se Oe en eee 110, 111 New form, by. Professor Chrystal) s22222 SS8 sacw cee ae ce acts einem ieeaie ol Hypsometry : Iniluenceiof aqieous VapOr s.)a--02o5 acceso eee eee eee eee 201 BarOmetrigntci 22 424 see See see ae eee Bene eee Pe eens 418, 420 International : Geodetic: Conoress: <2 5 sso 2 See cn hea ce See eee ae ee Soe eee 14 Meteorolocical (Conpress+. 22 5o- Sacice ce eeeereceeeee coe eee eee aera 15 Meridian and Time Conterence.essecce ss ocicjocne voce mee cee ee eee eae sotecaem = 20 Kalischer, Dr. §., origin of electricity ....-.. Fe Le ee ee mete ae ae © 337 Kapeller self-registering thermometer .......... ..---. ------ socccs --------- 112 meayser. Or, pnovopraph of lightning ....<- .i-2c-se+- 113 424 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 18984. No. of paragraph. Lephay, Lieut. J.: Clhimaterot, CapesHorn sens eceer eee eee ae meee eeelse eats ete tees 36 Electric observations at Cape Horn .............- BOR ae ee 341 Lévy, A., constitution of the atmosphere... - <2.) -.5)-2 22 seeeieee eee ete nese - 162 Ley, Rev. Clement: Twilight due to. ice spicules. 2.22 >t -secaeee =e eee eee eee 391 Studies of cirrusiclondstl42. 2) he. soon: Veeco haee ee eee eee 205 Leyst, E.: Storm statistics for Russia and Siberia.............0..-.-2-.--.-------- 285 Lunar period’ in anemometry e224. -sc scone eee oe se eaee eee cee eee 409 Lightning flash : Originvol Je Jsiiteesee ee cae ee Ae ee ee eee ee eae 295, 310, 333, 334 Distance wfc tet. e. e e cle eitatek ec Le Ee Se eee 294-296 Lightning-rods: Melsen/s:systom = Sorc eewooe sia aoe Soest oot a ee 342 Sinokes;desttaction iby j2-t-s¢ ac shee e wars art oe ee eee 344, 345 Klashyiphotosraphy Of 5 oe o72 soe tse oi eee 346 Links; Dr. origin of electricity sa... 22 2-4-6 o<- -<- =n 149 426 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. i No. of paragraph. Neumayer, Dr. George: Waillyaweather charts: -s2.22--=-cceeee Oe eee eee eee eerie oe 22 Datarrel ative: GOVSUUMSCUS) =~ )e sete alle te ale atleast ce 388 Nordenskidéld, A. E., exploration of Greenland.....-....-....--..--.-. Remicians 42 INO ay INERT Obie eae beccao =6bha55 5050 scSeaSsh sere seoauo coon ode S08 76 Oberbeck, Prof. A., mathematical theory of winds ..-....--.-.---.....-....- 261 Obirs summit of wind force andidirechionee ses. e ee sete eee eee 241 Observatory, meteorological: Halmouth 2 2252, 2222s icine te Se aaeiets sei oleae sare eet erento aero e 50 Macdeburg \s.s258t2cus sete be sea eee Sanne Sica eee eee eee ia = 18 Oceanvcurrents aftectine climateres= cassie s-- aaa eee eee eee eee eens 440 Ocean, physics of, Buchanan, Javcscn. ace oeeeeee cass cree eee eee eens 12 Oppolzer; D-svon, refraction; assets se ae oe ele ie 2 377 Rainbow, by reflection from exterior of drops.-.---.-----.--------------+--- 378 Rainfall: Drstripimionrine Munich: 4... c 20 ncetee sect aee nee Cree cele eerie sete 144 IDISHMIDUbLION IN SARON Y= 22.5. s2socs ae Aas ws Bele eo erent ey ota 216 DIGERUDUION: IN Sw bZerland: 2.5, .sete ce asec cee =e eee eee ele eee ceretaa= 217 MISgriDuUMON MA GermMany sos. ce secs cere eee lomiamic oleate staan ae 218 DIS GMM CLONM Mel' bal yess sare coetca en clei sonwes oral tere alot = Slate = ot ale ota ela teem ee tater 219 ISH MA OMSL MO ULOPC 4--sax1 reticle oot ate tal ets erare one ato vate 220 Disiribuion ims Enolands ssc0 esse so ste ete cone = stn alae oe teeial= leprae 221 DISUMIDUMMOMMIMYELACUG S: soe seo ae a= enn ee ase ane aoe eho temts ote 222 AMGsclOUdsMO VEM GING Kostas ses ae ona eee eee eee ee ne seein seeelanathateae 227-230 ORO PTET CLIO MICILY + 5 sees ae ete a ee Ce oe eee ea 220, 416, 417 Rain-gauge: Warlmerohe Ni pheLisi*@aUNe Oree =<). ss ee cee amine noes Seen ams leone nese 143 Nipher’s, used on the Brocken ..------.-.. -:---. ----..------ =----- ----== 148 Comparativerobservations 22-2. . 252225 ~-22 -2~ = wee oe = me el amis = 144 BYTE CtAO te ULULUUG Oe aay ne Aorta nian ware oartciep aaiarsies tao blo ate crelsio mim cmjereree sien 145 SOURS REINS = Ee GSE Sods Sasade Soa5 GAs8 saDGbe Bae Sea Ss cosscacsdenc 146, 147, 148 tec hrOMOxp OSU's so5 se y= Nae oe oe ie, Scio a cicinais cle soem hualea ei =a=tsia aie 220 Ram=wahen Chemicalvanalysis Ot —sa5e= ss sess sais ose oa aerate etalon tatortnr 215 Redfield, Prof. J. C., study of cloud movement... --- Ae AS cle SLE peg: 8 229 Refraction and atmospheric temperature .............-....-.~----- -------- 3638 ners) Exot, —. sun-spot period in, the Rhine: .. ...\22-2/2.0-5. pee ece eae eee 416 Relative humidity : Camputationof£ averages 5. 2 cross os os eos she eed ane Leents cotereacone= 155, 156 Aanmimse mews Latl Omse oe Saya soe ae co eee ore or Sae ie aie aloes aeaeaetea io erarate 159 Reno waALOMeuries pressure) db balls sacs seam cess se eie ape eee 272 Reynolds, Prof. O.: MIOLION SHIT VE ADO awabObe os = ce cis ere teers ernie iekaiae ere aca neieheme eres 213, 265 EVMEGUVNADNGS =o 5c.- 3o.sc oo ones acme ence oro ae eee cig ale ee eon eee aes 264 Richard, self-registering thermometers. .-.-..-.-...-.------\------------ +--+ 46 Richter, A.: NGOS CIOMGS co sseed spec cespmn pode sass boos Sees S Gsee sw osbedecinsoe 151 Cine niyonreano ne wh MWh AAS ee esa seas eoe Sas SOsons coos boo Seeded Sess 227 Riesenberger, Prof. H., temperature and altitude ....-.--...---------------- 192 Ringwood. A., twilight observed in New Zealand . ....-..------------------- 394 Rogovski, E., constitution of the atmosphere -...-.. Be Ess’ SP eT re 161 PHRCOCraNGsScewalueOual SUDSNING 25 2e—2-).- 2). se ee eects aoe sles aaa 233 Roth, Dr. F.: Approximations assumed by himself and Davis.......-..-.----.-------- 255 Deflection due to earth’s rotation is independent of the surface friction- - 257 Friction affects deviation of eastward motions more than westward. ----. 258 Rykatcheff, M. : TGR RARE AVENE Oe Bocera Be HEE Ee EE 8 ast Ohload Eko Ae eer a eet 391 Tt olize Toy Tepiilog sof NG) 9374: A eee See ey ee = 2S SS 2 ae eee 406 Lunar period in auemomietry -... .----. ------ s-- 2 ones wees eee eee ee eee 408 428 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884, No. of paragraph. Rung, Capt. G.: RO LAGLONPSYGHLOMCLOL | sleet erel= els ele =a a eee ae eer 46 Rain-cauge, seli-recording 3-22.52. 22sec ee: eee eee ee ace 146 Sachs, phenological laws. -.2..520 5.2.22). 555s see ee eee een Salen e 421 Santis, summit of: = Winds: force; and: direetion=: 2-5-2 .5-2 see eee Coe eee Teer en aoe 242, 243 Hourly. barometric observations =-2 esos ee ee ae eee eee eee 278 Salis, P. von, lightning strokes in Switzerland’ ..---.-- 222. 5-2--25es--+es-ce- 344 San Fernando, Spanish storm-warnings:--=- -2--.---+- ---=2-2eeeeeeeeneeeiee se 47 Sawyer, C. J., bibliographer to the Signal Service - .-.- Bi es ys che eee 69 Saxony, Meteorological imehitutcof se -=--- ee eee eee eee eee eee eee 25 Schenzl, Dr. Guido, magnetic charts for Hungary ---...---..--------------- 349 Schering, Prof. K.: Vertical'maonetic: force: 2222 a acnce noes eee eee ee eee eee eee 347 Observation of croundicurrentse- sees -o2 cee eee ee eee eee oeeeeeeaee 353 Schilossing; distribution (of carbonicacid gases =.= see aes ee eet ace eeeere 165 Schinidt Prot. Jets. J-clumateonGreecencasaeace soe eeaooe cere eae eee 80 Schomrock, Av sudden changes of pressureyecs- ce eee ee ees eee ae eee eee 269 Schreiber, Dr. P.: Appointed .directors <4 c= 419 Simony ecole), PlaClers OL AUSLLIS:.2--25-.. ses. seareeeteee a eleoe sl sicd ss s5~ 434 UM EPS CULOMO LORE: 9s -c1t coe ea esis Meets cena eerie 122, 127, 130, 133 NN LOl Owe PpTeOD AUN IN INGA). 52 - sess an sone oe ele ee ae 404 Snowfall in Himalaya and droughtin India .......---.. ...2-. «.---.....-.-- 224 SHOw=lMoO MNO? OL CLIMAULC. = =~ sis.2c 5 saw Samo ae a soe eee en ee eee meee eeeen Ee. 441 Societies, meteorological : ING WAS Ales = to 2 cae clo acres sca eneel) erecta aslo aera ee eee eee 4 DVASITT GRO Tepes ea ain 'o icv cists sinisidicte sia cwinkis, ho ueecis oetteeien ei ee eee See eenee 4 Nolamahoatpabsorpoed «by clouds .-2.2-22s20 vecccmeao eas waoe ee oe eee tee aoe 203 NO LL-MOUORS POIELCSSON yo cociea dos aewae os clnasi sees coehs can seeem eee eeee tenes 176, 177 SHAnersMMouUG OSes TOSULES) 2.5 oeeiciienis os ites sacle nes ease ce meee pe teene eee 492 PninDatWeLCoro lace GerVvice: = ssac nes. saiese sa ono amas sas seas oe soe ee eee 28 Spartsch, Prof. J. J., thunder-storms of Greece...-....----.-....-.... SE 343 Spectrum: BEPAULINO SPN OUIC O2 <2 ne. cose oo eae Sae ate Oe ahs =) ke eee fae Oe See ee 371-377 MGTGONS soes sée6 Sebo enes ecec Sodas cage tess caseceoden sosSse nude ene cose 372-374 Talal CHAU IIO\ 7 USL EAR ose, oe See a doacobcE ns DESSod ee GaneSa eecceH ae 374 AGORA OT Oi S306 Say odaddaonocdsesot Hoo oUs DonUU Bese Om B Se SiocomnSea] 373 TAINO SOONER RIN so cs5 Sogo bsase sobs wosoos Secoebesesdoecs 500 seob esse sees 375 Rain-band .......- AOinstooo sede canO Son soq choose cao sShesds So nnuD cosese oe 376, 377 Sprung, Dr. A.: Guy Gee] OOM AID DETEIE)= Bo sec becc gone cass Sso5do SSbcCoSebd SoSeScoD coe 123 Wind direction, explanation of daily periodicity .-....---.- eae ss ae 252 Geometrical proof/of Herrel’s laws) 25225222 o=- ssc ce se soeeese season 253 SU RET LD IGRS) SiG eg rt) NEE 6 oe cebp Sees Soe a eeeES See See se See aS 134 Siimavaltarsl saeikehienn CynG Pain) Skog osec rs ps boCoans oa So pace CeOBAcone AoEDae 14, 15, 16.17 Stanley, W. B., climate as affected by eccentricity of earth’s obit-........... 439 State weather services : WoaltleiO tne sia tes SSeS ete ss tt cace ce nee Se ee at ococcae Seeeeece es 2 OHNO). secosebeceSonsecose0ce9 odoscesSsScd ssSsos Sondisnesacotosessscenses 5 Stations: Generslidisiribution: Of etn cne aoc sac co teats see oe cee ee eee ee 1 International : IUGR SO INEO BEN) Soe ooaase coeds SadSSs0ss6 dads SHSsSy HES ESeeue 31 Jan Mayen... ~~. ------ 2-220 cece ne cone one n e ene eens oe nee eee nee 29 STO STS) 9802) Oo Cs SOCd Ca aOod BOGS Cae se Eee GabSed do OSeO Cone Ea soee 32 See) OL GES coosco ceeccodedd sooRdSuSso Gnds Saba odes Séoe ates ceSene 33 Ceri) yer Pernt Cath 2 es enc ea oon Se Emo Aan mn doeese | 2 ame 34 Soon (EO codes cdo soe doe Sos Se soo bbe Sag osee co Stes cobs se see se 34 (CO GhI On te cos. cee SegiqusU Eo Hae ot PEGS Spe pecoud Shc ass oecbeo sete neee 35 CHG ENO UN: Soositsomed EECOUS Oe one ce racdUpdcs BES Soden ec ates sae 36, 165 IDO ISOS) Sec 25 Geocoo Re Beau BORE DICSCGCUBSe Heo Cneoby BESS SUctas Sse 37, 39 IBOSSOKOD wee teas ace eo ance ce = Sala ae ence ao eee eee enters ern ore 40 SECS In Co Seng Ree SEBO BOBCUOeoE Cer ber sie nsboes oc Slot Men Sep eeee 41 Stations, mountain: HONENPCISSCUDOLE suena. 6 voc clocanae cue nels casiteee eae teeemene= mare conn 46 DEO GISGOlNesae netistes «= i= cca . -—==--- 2-24-43 ssese eee 322 Temperature of air: ELours) Deshdorio Ser vin Caterers es erase eee eee ae eee eats 157 Aitected by localtoporraphyissccsae = oo -peeiecieeto =e ie cee eeereeeeiae eine 185 Aftected by: total eclipse 2: sa< 6.55 -/ta sa ese oe teenie eteee 236 Atmospheric refraction): jac-.. > mee -aes e eee eee eee = eens 368 Mirage: << so a= ola sso se sass 3a a) see ee ena iat sie sare ae Cae 120 Thermodynamics, graphic solutions of problems..............---.----.----- 266 PUG UCM BUDO Lana ha S5cicc cats don sce Soma ee ranean Meme ede paaeics cers 79 Rhollonw-atmospheric spectrum lines:= 222 o sno ccadocssace eo tenee eeaeee ee 371 HoOMmcOn ETO trd.,/Suudles, on Whirl winds! ccna seal ane ee elena 311 RNG er INeASUTOMENG Oly 255 °2 2 sis -= .2o.-ssee osteo seltes aaa see eee ce 377 Werbéek=sh.wW.~M.. reporton Krakatoa. o5sscp cecal Oe me ieee eee ae ee renee 3 Charts samen ca andibmrapes. si. . vo: FRANELAND, E., and F. R. Jarre. Inorganic chemistry. London, 1884. 536 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884, Frerse, C. Beziehungen zwischen den physikalischen Eigenschaften und der Zu saimensetzung chemischer Verbindungen. Brieg, 1884. Fresenius, R. Chemische Analyse des Oberbrunnens zu Salzbrunn in Schlesien. 3. Aufl. Wiesbaden, 1883. 8vo. —w— Chemische Untersuchung der Stettiner Stahlquelle. Wiesbaden, 1884. 8vo. FRIEDBERG. W. Die Verwerthung der Knochen aufchemischem Wege. Eine Darstei- lung der Verarbeitung von Knochen auf alle aus denselben gewinnbaren Pro- ducte, ete. Wien, 1884. 8vo. FRIEDLAENDER, E. Ueber einige Derivate des alpha- und beta-Naphtols. Ziirich, 1883. 8vo. IF RIEDLAENDER, P. Untersuchungen iiber die innern Anhydride der Orthoamido- zimmtsiiure und der Orthoamidohydrozimmtsiure. Miinchen, 1883. 8vo. Funaro, A. Chimica agraria. Vol. 2. Chimica dei concimi. Milano, 1884. 8yo. GaBBa, L. Trattato elementare di chimica inorganica ed organica. Milano, 1884. GARDNER, J. Bleaching, dyeing, and calico-printing, with formule. London, 1884. Svo. GASLOROWSKI, K. Ueber die Umwanélung von Alkoholen in Amine. Ziirich, 1884. 8vo. GreErts, A.J.C. Les produits de la nature japonaise et chinoise et leurs applications aux arts, 4 ’industrie, 4 la médecine, etc. Partie inorganique et minéralogique. II. Métaux. Yokohama, 1883. 8vo. [Vol. I, Metalloids, was published in 1878. ] GEREKOTH, H. Darstellung der drei isomeren Nitroacetophenone. Erlangen, 1884. 8vo. GERBER, N. Chemical and physical analysis of milk, condensed milk, and infants’ milk-foods, with special regard to hygiene and sanitary milk inspection. CHEMICAL MINERALOGY. Of contributions to the general subject of chemical mineralogy several papers by Rammelsberg deserve to be mentioned first. These are de- voted to the discussion of some points bearing on the isomorphism of minerals (Jahrb. Min., 1884, 11, 67); on the chemical relations of the natural borates (Jb., p. 158). Blomstrand discusses (Geol. For. Forh., Stockholm, vit, 59) the composition of the native compounds of uranium. Animportant paper by Doelterand Hussak (Jahrb. Min., 1884, 1,18) deals with the action of a melted rock upon different minerals, with a view to throwing light upon the contact phenomena observed in nature. Fine pulverized rock, as basalt, andesite, or phonolite, was melted in a por- celain crucible, and then the mineral to be experimented upon was in- serted into the molten mass. The minerals chosen for the experiment were pyroxene, hornblende, biotite, feldspar, olivine, quartz, garnet, iolite, and zircon. The results of the experiments are not without in- terest, though of too special a character to be detailed here; they do not lead to any broad conclusions. Another paper (Ib., p. 158) by the same authors describes the results of trials with different varieties of garnet and vesuvianite, these minerals being fused and the products resulting from the reerystallization of the melted material studied. For example, melanite yielded in this way meionite, anorthite, and a variety of olivine ; grossularite, from Wilui, gave meionite, a little anorthite, a mineral like melilite and perhaps hematite, and soon. The original mineral was not reproduced, and, moreover, the fusing together of ne- phelite and augite, and also of meionité and olivine, failed to yield garnet. Doelter has also made an interesting series of synthetic experiments (1b. 1, p. 51, Zeitsch. Kryst., 1x, 321) on the pyroxenes and nephelite, the results of which deserve to be studied in detail. In the line of chemical studies of individual mineral species, Pen- field’s paper on the composition of beryl (Amer. Jour. Sci., XXVIII, 25) is perhaps the most interesting. The formula of beryl, as previously ac- cepted, was that of a simple bisilicate of aluminum and beryllium, and the only uncertainty surrounding it was supposed to be that connected & ats MINERALOGY. ; 551 with the question as to the true atomic weight of beryllium. Penfield has made a series of careful analyses on pure specimens of beryl from seven different localities, and shows by them that beryl uniformly con- tains both alkalies and basic water, which earlier analysts have over- looked. Thus the Hebron, Me., beryl contains nearly 5 per cent. of cesium oxide, with 1 per cent. lithia and 1.8 soda and 2.3 water. The beryl from Branchville, Conn., contains 1.5 per cent. of soda and 0.7 lithia, with 2.7 water, and that of Aduntschilon, Siberia, contains 0.25 per cent. soda and 1.1 water. The true formula of the species must, therefore, take account of both alkalies and water, but additional chemical work is needed to establish it thoroughly. Another point of interest is the.identity of the rare mineral, scovillite, from Salisbury, Conn., with the even rarer rhabdophane from Cornwall. A paper by Brush and Penfield (Jb., xxvi1, 200) discusses this subject, and shows that the mineral is essentially a hydrous phosphate of yttrium, erbium, lanthanum, and didymium. A new analysis of the haydenite of Baltimore has been made by Morse and Bayley (Amer. Chem. Journ., VI., 24), which proves that the earlier analysis was incorrect, and that it is, as has been assumed, identical with chabazite. A hydrous sulphate of manganese and aluminum from Sevier County, Tennessee, has been investigated by W. G. Brown (Jb., p. 97). It is shown not to correspond exactly to any of the known sul- phates, though related to the afjohnite of South Africa and bosjemanite of several localities. The same chemist has analyzed the cassiterite from Irish Creek, Rockbridge County, Virginia (Zb., p. 185). Messrs. Clarke and Chatard have published (Amer. Jour. Sci., XX V1, 20) analy- ses of a series of minerals from different localities, including allanite from Topsham, Me., some jade-like minerals, the material of Eskimo implements collected at Point Barrow, Alaska, &e. Renard and Kle- ment have a paper in the Bulletin of the Royal Academy of Belgium (November 8, 1884) on the chemical composition of crocidolite and fibrous quartz of South Africa. NEW MINERAL LOCALITIES IN THE UNITED STATES. The most interesting discovery of the past year is that of the rare mineral herderite at Stoneham, Me., a locality which has already fur- nished fine crystals of topaz and a number of other interesting minerals (see the Report for 1883). The original herderite was described by Haidinger in 1828, from a specimen from the tin mines of Ehrenfried- ersdorf, in Saxony. The form was then made out fully, but the compo- sition was left uncertain, there being only some blowpipe trials made, according to which it was decided to be probably a fluo-phosphate of aluminum and calcium. Only three or four specimens have been known to exist, and from 1828 till 1884 nothing was added to our knowledge of the species. Now, however, it has been found, as first described, by 552 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. W. E. Hidden (Amer. Journ. Sct., XXVIII, 73), at Stoneham, and in suffi- cient quantities to allow of its thorough study. The erytalline form has been found to be near that of the original mineral (Zb., p. 229), and also its optical characters (Bull. Soc. Min., France, vit, 230). An analysis was made by J. B. Mackintosh (Amer. Journ. Sei., xxvu1, 135), which resulted in proving that it was a fluo-phosphate of beryllium and eal- cium. Some doubt was thrown upon this determination by analyses by Winkler (Jahrb. Min., 1884, 11, 134), on both the Maine mineral and that from the original Saxon locality. The analyses of Winkler, however, were made upon minute quantities, and have since been proved by Genth to be inaccurate (Amer. Phil. Soc., October 17, 1884), Genth’s results con- firming those of Mackintosh most fully and establishing the identity of the two minerals. Another mineralogical discovery of hardly less interest is that of the beautiful new borate called colemanite, a description of which is given among the new species beyond. The new Colorado minerals, zunyite and guitermanite, are also mentioned in the same place. Dr. Hillebrand has described a number of mineral occurrences which present points of novelty. One paper (Amer. Journ. Sci., XX VU, 349) con- tains an account of an unusual variety of nickeliferous lollingite occurring in complex twin crystals, from Teocalli Mountain, on Brush Creek, Gunni- son County, Colorado; of a variety of cosalite containing 8.4 per cent. of silver and 7.5 per cent. of copper, from the Comstock mine near Parrott City, La Plata County; of a sulphide of bismuth, silver and copper, per- haps new, from the Missouri mine, Hall’s Valley, Park County; of hiib- nerite, from the Uncompahgre district, Ouray County, and also from Phillipsburg, Montana. Another paper by the same author (Proc. Colorado Sei. Soc., 1, 112), contains descriptions of a number of rare minerals, the majority new to America, from the American Eagle mine, Tintic district, Utah. These are olivenite in fine crystals, also in the brown compact fibrous form called wood copper; conichalcite in emerald-green globular forms, with radiated structure; chenevixite, in olive-green to greenish-yellow, com- pact masses imbedded in the ore; also jarosite and a hydrous calcium arsenate in fine, silky,white needles. He also describes bindheimite from Secret Canon, Nevada; zinckenite from the Brobdignag mine, Red Mountain, San Juan County, Colorado; and the rare nickel telluride melonite from Boulder County, Colorado. Mr. Richard Pearce mentions (Ib., p. 111) the occurrence of native bismuth with bismutite from Cum- mins City, North Park, Colorado. The same volume of Proceedings re- ferred to also contains a list of the important minerals of Colorado, with localities, prepared by Mr. Whitman Cross. Prof. W. P..Blake has described the occurrence of gigantic crystals of spodumene at the Etta tin mine in Pennington County, Dakota. One crystal is spoken of penetrating massive quartz and feldspar, which was 36 feet long and from 1 to 3 feet in thickness. At the Ingersoll claim, pte nse scone eb he eL MINERALOGY. 553 in the same region, the same writer mentions the occurrence (Am. J. Sci., XXVIII, 341) of crystallized masses of a mineral which appeared to be col- . umbite. One mass weighed by calculation about a ton. This mineral is probably in fact tantalite, for an analysis of a similar mineral from the same locality by C. A. Schaeffer proved it to contain 79 per cent. tanta- lum pentoxide; moreover, the specific gravity was 7.72; that of typical tantalite ranging from 7 to 8, and of ordinary columbite from 5.4 to 6.5. Fine erystals of vanadinite are described by F. H. Blake (J0., XXVIII, 145), from the Black Prince mine, Pioneer mining district, Pinal County, Arizona. They vary in color from yellow to deep red, the latter being the most common; wulfenite also occurs at the same mine, but not in very perfect crystals. S. B. Newberry (Jb., xxvui1, 122) mentions the discovery of nickel ore in large quantities in Cottonwood Campus, Churchill County, Nevada. The specimens obtained from a depth of 80 feet were pure massive niccolite; these from depths of 60 feet and 45 feet showed more or less oxidation and hydration; and specimens from near the surface consisted of annabergite, the hydrated arsenate of nickel. An interesting occurrence in New Jersey is mentioned by Prof. Geo. H. Cook in his annual report of the Geological Survey, that of grains of metallic iron in the triassic red shales near New Brunswick. They were brought up by a drill used to bore a deep well, and were found also in the surface soil—the correctness of the observations is regarded as being above doubt. Prof. H. Carvill Lewis has given a preliminary ac- count of an interesting mineral occurring in tetragonal crystals in calcite at Wakefield, Canada. It has the form of sarcolite, but a microscopic examination has proved it to be an altered mineral pseudomorph, after some original mineral, which has not yet been found at the locality. In occurrence and relatious it is suggestive of the gehlenite from the Tyrol. The name cacoclasite was suggested for it, in allusion to the absence of cleavage, before its pseudomorphous character was established. The same author describes a yariety of dark-bluish spinel, also from Wake- field; it is remarkable for having an approximately cubic form, the planes, however, being much rounded. Barite crystals from DeKalb, Saint Lawrence County, New York, have been described by Dr. Geo. H. Williams. From Topsham, Me.. Prof. F.C. Robinson has obtained crystals of allanite (Amer. Jour. Sci., XxVU, 412), which he has subjected to chemical analysis. Additional points of interest are the occurrence of kaolinite in microscopic crystals, showing pyramidal planes, at the National Belle mine at Red Mountain, Ouray County, Colorado, as noted by R. C. Hills (Jb., xxvu, 472); also the occurrence of leucite in lava in the vicinity of the volcano, Cerro de las Virgines, in Lower California. NEW MINERALS. Aimajibrite, Aimatolite—See Hemafibrite, Hematolite, below. Allaktite.—This is one of a group of manganese arsenates recently discovered in Nordmark, Sweden. This group includes allaktite, dia- 554 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 14. delphite (or aimatolite=hematolite), hemafibrite (¢imafibrite), synadel- _ phite. From this locality comes, too, manganostibiite, a related mineral containing also antimony, and xanthoarsenite is still another manga- nese arsenate (and antimonate) from a different Swedish locality. As announced by A. Sjégren, allakite occurs in small crystals, rarely 4 -by 2™ in length and breadth, tabular parallel to the orthopinacoid. They occur in cavities and druses, in a manganese calcite, together with fluorite, pyrochroite, chrysolite, &c. The crystals, which are fully de- seribed by H. Sjégren, are monoclinic in form and closely related to pharmacolite and vivianite. They are quite complex, showing some fif- teen different planes, half of them in the prismatic zone; the optic axes lie in the plane of symmetry. The hardness is 4 to 5, the specific gravity 3.83 to 3.85. The erystals are strongly pleochroic, with blood-red, yel- low, and bluish-green as the axial colors. The luster is vitreous, trans- parent to translucent; the fracture is splintery. An analysis leads to the formula Mn;As,0, + 4 H,MnO,. (Geol. For. Férh., Stockholm, vu, 109, 220, 407.) Broggerite—This name has been given by Blomstrand in honor of the Norwegian mineralogist, W. C. Brégger, to a uranium mineral, near cleveite in composition—cleveite, it will be remembered, is lone allied to uraninite or pitch-blende. The specimen examined by Blomstrand was from the neighborhood of Moss, Norway. It formed part of an octahe- dral crystal; the mineral, consequently, like the others named, is to be referred to the isometric system. The hardness was 5 to 6, ue specific — gravity 8.73, and the color iron black. An analysis Teer it to con- sist of about 80 per cent. of the oxide of uranium, with 84 per cent. ot lead oxide, 53 per cent. of thorina, and small quantities of other ele-— ments, including the cerium yttrium metals. The author accompanies his description of this mineral with an extended discussion of the vari- ous minerals containing uranium. (Geol. For. Forhandl., Stockholm, vi, 59.) Colemanite.—This is a new mineral of rare beauty and perfection of form. It was first described by J. T. Evans, and named by him after William T, Coleman, of San Francisco. Later the crystalline form has been exhaustively studied by Jackson, and other contributions have been made by mineralogists abroad. As shown by the analyses of Evans, it is a hydrous borate of calcium, having the formula 2 CaO, 3B,0; + 5 HO, and very closely related to (if not identical with) the priceite from Oregon and pandermite from the Black Sea. It occurs in splendent crystals, sometimes attaining a size of 30™", lining cavities in the massive mineral. They belong to the monoclinic system, and have perfect clinodiagonal cleavage. In habit the crystals are near datolite, and a hasty examination of them might lead to their being referred to that species. The crystals are very highly modified, about forty differ- ent forms having been observed, half of them on a single crystal. The hardness is about 4 and the specific gravity 2.43. The crystals vary Ie MINERALOGY. 555 from white to clear and colorless ; the massive mineral is white. The locality-of this beautiful borate is in Southern California, in the Calico district, San Bernardino County, and Death Valley, Inyo County. (California Acad., Bulletins Nos. 1 and 2.) Diadelphite—This name was given by H. Sjégren to a manganese arsenate ‘from the Moss mines in Nordmark, Sweden, and simultane- ously the same mineral was announced by Igelstrém under the name aimatolite (properly hematolite). In its method of occurrence it is like allaktite described above. The crystals are small, from a fraction of a millimeter to 2™". In form they belong to the rhombohedral division of the hexagonal system, but optically they show anomalies, and Ber- trand calls them pseudo-hexagonal. The color is brownish-red to gar- net-red, the streak light chocolate brown. The crystals become super- ficially oxidized easily, and then turn black and opaque. The hardness is 3.5. The name refers to the close relation the mineral bears to syn- adelphite and the other manganese arsenates from Nordmark. (Geol. For. Forh., Stockholm, vit, 210, 233, 369, 407; Bull. Soc. Min. France, VII, 121, 124.) Goyazite—A new hydrous phosphate of aluminum and cakcium, de- scribed by Damour, from the diamond-bearing gravels of the province of Minas Geraés, Brazil. It occurs in small rounded grains of a yellowish- white color, showing one cleavage, normal to which the black cross of a uniaxial crystal can be observed in the polariscope. The hardness is 5, the specific gravity 3.26. The name refers to the province where the principal diamond deposits occur. (Bull. Soe. Min., vit, 204.) Guitermanite.—A name given by W. EF. Hillebrand, after Mr. Frank- lin Guiterman, to a new metallic sulphide from the Zuni mine, near Silverton, San Juan County, Colorado. It occurs intimately mixed with zunyite (see below). When in the fresh state it has a bluish-gray color and slight metallic luster. The hardness is about 3, the specific gravity 5.94. The formula deduced, after deducting the impurities present in the material analyzed, is 10 PbS, 3 As,S3. Hemajibrite (or Hemafibrite)—Another of the new manganese arse: nates from Nordmark, Sweden, described by Igelstr6m, and named in allusion to its color. It occurs in globular forms, with fibrous struct- ure, mixed with magnetite and serpentine. According to Bertrand the mineral is orthorhombic, with the acute positive bisectrix parallel to the prismatic edge, and an optic axial angle of 70°. The color is blood-red, to which the name given refers. Its composition is near that of allak- tite, but it contains more water. (Geol. For. Forh., Stockholm, 210, 407 ; Bull. Soc. Min. France, Vit, 121, 124.) Hematolite (or Hemalolite).—The proper form of the name aimato- lite, given by Igelstrém to the mineral also ealled diadelphite (which see) by H. Sjogren. References as for hemafibrite above. Hillangsite.—Described by Igelstr6m as a new mineral, but probably only a variety of amphibole. It is said to resemble the anthophyllite 556 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FCR 1884. from Texas, Pa. It is properly colorless and transparent, but some times has a black metallic color from included microscopic crystals ot magnetite. The luster is silky. The hardness is 6. It is difficultly fusible to a black magnetic slag. An analysis makes it a bisilicate of iron and manganese, with a little magnesium and calcium. The locality is the iron mine of Hillang, Ludvika parish, Sweden; it occurs with garnet, magnetite, and igelstromite. (Bull. Soc. Min., v11,282.) Koninckite—Described by Cesaro as a new hydrated phosphate of iron, corresponding to the formula Fe,P,0, + 6 H,O. It occurs in small globular or semi-globular forms, consisting of radiating needles, which are translucent and almost colorless, and are to be referred to the mono- clinic system. It has a vitreous luster, a hardness of 3.5, and a specific gravity of 2.3. it fuses readily to a black bead. Koninckite is found with the fluo-phosphate of iron, richellite, recently described by the same author at Visé, Belgium. It is named after Prof. De Koninck, of Liege. (Ann. Soc. Geol. Belg., x1, 247.) Manganostibiite.—Still another new mineral from Nordmark, Sweden. According to Igelstrém, it occurs in black grains, probably to be re- ferred to the orthorhombic system. These are found in crystalline lime- stone with other manganiferous minerals, as hausmannite, pyrochroite, allaktite. An analysis leads to the formula 5 MnO (Sb, As), O;, with the antimony predominating. The name refers to its composition as containing both manganese and antimony (stibium). (Geol. Fér. Forh., Stockholm, Vil, 210; Bull. Soc. Min. France, Vu, 120.) Polylithionite—A. variety of lithia mica described by Lorenzen as occurring at Kangerdluarsuk, Greenland, with rinkite (see below), arved- sonite, egirite, eudialyte, &c. It is found in pale green to white six- sided tabular crystals. These are divided, after the manner of zinn- waldite, into six sectors, with striations diverging from the center; the optical characters are also very near those of zinnwaldite. In composi- tion it shows a higher percentage of silica and lithia, less alumina, and almost noiron. The name has reference to the large amount of lithium. (Zeitsch. Kryst., 1X, 251.) kinkite—Associated with the lithia mica just described, and with the other minerals named, is a mineral to which Lorenzen has given the name rinkite,after Dr. Rink. It occurs in monoclinic crystals, tabular in habit, parallel to the orthopinacoid. The color of the fresh mineral is yellowish-brown, but the crystals are often slightly altered on the sur- face, and these straw-yellow. The luster is vitreous to greasy. The hard- ness is 5, the specific gravity 3.46. An analysis shows it to be a titano- silicate of the cerium metals and calcium with sodium fluoride. (Lbid.) Salmite.—This is a manganesian variety of chloritoid from Vielsalm, Belgium, described by Eug. Prost. It occurs in irregular masses with coarse saccharoidal structure and grayish color. The hardness is 5 to 6, and the specific gravity 3.38; this determination, however, is a little low, in consequence of admixed quartz. An analysis shows the pres: te We et MINERALOGY. 557 ence of 7 per cent. manganese protoxide, which is the only distinguish- ing feature of the variety. (Geol. Soc. Belg., 1884.) Synade’phite—A new arsenate of manganese from Nordmark, Swe den, described by H. Sjégren. It occurs sometimes with scheelite, some- times in cavities in the porous calcium carbonate. The crystais belong to the monoclinic system, and are very near liroconite in angle; also not far off from lazulite. The color is blackish-brown to black, being considerably darker than that of the other manganese arsenates de- scribed from the same locality; it is translucent to nearly opaque. The luster is vitreous on the fracture, submetallic on erystalline faces. The hardness is 4.5, the specific gravity 3.46 to 3.50. The composition is stated to be that of a hydrated arsenate of manganese, with also alumina and iron, being near that of diadelphite, from which, however, it differs in containing less water. The crystalline forms of the two species are also distinct. The name has reference to the close relation to diadel- phite and the other allied species from the locality. (Geol. For. Forh., Stockholm, V11, 235, 382, 407.) Utahite—A mineral from the Eureka Hill mine, in the Tintic district, Utah, described by Arzruni. It occurs in fine scales forming an aggre- gate with silky luster as a coating on quartz. Under the microscope the scales are found to be hexagonal plates with rhombohedral planes on theedges. Notwithstanding the minuteness of the crystals it was found possible to measure them,and so to determine the length of the vertical axis, namely, c= 1.1389. The mineral has been analyzed by M. Damour and sbown to correspond with the formula 3 Fe,O03, 3 SO;4+4 H,O; itis consequently a basic sulphate of iron sesquioxide. (Zeitsch. Kryst., UX, 598; or Bull. Soc. Min. France, Vii, 126, 128.) : Xanthoarsenite.—Described by Igelstrém as a new arsenate of man- ganese from the Sj6 mines in the parish of Grythyttan, Sweden. It occurs in sulphur-yellow masses, resembling the yellow compact garnet found with rhodonite at the Langban mines. Itis associated with haus- mannite, magnetite, and hematite. No crystals were found, but Ber- trand has shown that it is optically biaxial; whether it belongs to the orthorhombic, monoclinic, or triclinic system could not be decided. An analysis showed it to be a hydrous arsenate of manganese chiefly, with also a little antimony replacing the arsenic, and small quantities of iron, magnesium, and calcium replacing the manganese. It is very near the chondroarsenite of the same author, only differing in containing a little more water, and having a more decidedly yellow-color; it is also related to the manganese arsenates from Nordmark described above. (Bull. Soc. Min., Vu, 237.) : Zunyite.—A remarkable new mineral described by Hillebrand from the Zuni mine on Anvil Mountain, near Silverton, San Juan County, Colorado. It oceurs intimately intermingled with the sulphide of ar- senic and lead, guitermanite (see above), from which it was separated for examination by removing the sulpnide by nitric acid, The crystals 558 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. thus obtained were found to be tetrahedral in habit, with also the planes of the minus tetrahedron, cube, and perhaps the dodecahedron ; there is cleayage parallel to the faces of both tetrahdrons. The crystals are clear and transparent, except as rendered black and opaque by in- clusions of black grains of titanic oxide. The luster is vitreous. The hardness is about 7, and the specific gravity 2.875. Several careful analyses were made which fix in general the composition of the mineral, but without entirely establishing its exact formula. It is shown to be a silicate of aluminum, very low in silica, with nearly 11 per cent. of water assumed to be basic, as it does not go off at 270°C., also 5.6 per cent. fluorine and 3 per cent. chlorine. The mineral is then as remark- able in composition as in erys talline form, and deserves further study. (Proc. Colorado Scientific Soc., vol. 1, 124.) NECROLOGY OF MINERALOGISTS, 1884. FRIEDRICH KLOCKE.—Born May 28, 1847, in Breslau ; died June 17, 1834. He was assistant in mineralogy at Heidelberg in 1868-70; in 1879 he became “ausserordentlicher Professor” at Freiburg, in Breis- gau.; in 1881 he became “ordentlicher Professor” of mineralogy and petrography at Marburg. The list of his scientific papers includes 17 articles, many of them devoted to physical mineralogy; his most im- portant contributions are those upon the cause of ‘optical anomalies” of crystals as due to secondary causes. (See the Reports for 1882, 1883.) JOHANNES LORENZEN.—Born November 23, 1855, in Sénder-Jylland ; died May 5, 1884, when on his way from Copenhagen to Greenland. He was curator of the Mineralogical Museum at Copenhagen, and the author of a number of important mineralogical papers. Among his contribu- tions may be mentioned his memoirs on the metallic iron of Greenland, and the minerals occurring in the sodalite-synite of the Tunngdliarfik and Kangerdluarsuk fiords of Southern Greenland. QUINTINO SELLA.—Born at Mosso, in Piedmont, July 17, 1827; died March 14,1884. He was a mathematician and mineralogist of the high- est rank, and at the same time one of the foremost statesmen of United Italy. In the last capacity he served in several distinguished positions, being for many years minister of finance. His scientific contributions were chiefly in crystallography ; he also took an active part in the ar- rangements with reference to the geological survey of Italy. He was president of the R. Accademia dei Lincei. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF MINERALOGY; 1884. I1.—Nineralogical works. BAUERMAN, Hinary. Text-book of descriptive mineralogy. 399 pp. 12mo. Lon- don, 1884. BAUMHAUER, H. Kuti-es Lehrbuch der Mineralogie. 190 pp. 8vo. Freiburg, Baden. BourGEo!s, L. Reproduction artificielle des minéraux. 288 pp. 8vo, Paris, 1884. (Encyclopédie Chimique. ) ae teh oe: Latsoieihenan: ctor aeely aly ~ ' MINERALOGY. 559 BREZINA, A. Krystallographische Untersuchungen an homologen und isomeren Reihen, Eine von der kais. Akademie der Wissenschaften in Wien mit dem Freiberrn von Baumgartner’schen Preise gekrénte, durch einen methodologischen Theil vermehrte Schrift. 1. Theil. Methoden. 359 pp. 8vo. Vienna, 1884. FLETCHER, L. A guide to the mineral gallery of the British Museum (Natural His- “tory); with an introduction on the study of minerals. 120 pp. 8vo. London, 1884. Hanks, H.G. Third Annual Report of the State Mineralogist of California for the year ending June 1, 1883. 111 pp. 8vo. Sacramento, 1883. Fourth Annual Report. 410 pp. 8vo. Sacramento, 1884. “Hussak, E. Anleitung zum Bestimmen der gesteinbildenden Mineralien. KOBELL, F. VON. Tateln zur Bestimmung der Mineralien, etc. 12. neu bearbeitete und vermehrte Auflage von K. Oebbecke. Munich, 1884. KOKsCHAROW, N. VON. Materialien zur Mineralogie Russlands. Vol. ix, pp. 1-80. St. Petersburg, 1884. LANDERO, CARLOS F. DE. Informe sobre las especies minerales des Estado de Jalisco. 41 pp. 8vo. Guadalajara, 1884. MALLARD, E. Traité de Cristallographie géométrique et physique. Tome second. Cristallographie physique, avec 184 figureset 8 planchestirées en couleur. 599 pp. 8vo. Paris, 1884. (Tome premier, 1879.) MEUNIER, STANISLAS. Météorites. 532 pp. 8vo. Paris, 1884. Encyclopédie chim- ique. Tome. Métalloides. Appendice, 2™¢ cahier. PHILLIPS, J. ARTHUR. A treatise on ore deposits. 652 pp. 8vo. London, 1884. SmiTH, J. LAWRENCE. Original researches in mineralogy and chemistry, edited by J. B. Marvin. 630 pp. 8vo. Louisville, Ky. TSCHERMAK. Die mikroskopische Beschafienheit der Meteoriten erliutert durch photographische Abbildungen. Die Aufnahmen von J. Grimm in Offenburg. Lief. 2. ; WEISBACH, A. Synopsis mineralogica. Systematische Uebersicht des Mineralreiches. 87 pp. 8vo. 1884. Il.— Mineralogical memoirs.* Bakus, CARL. On the thermal effect of the action of aqueous vapor on feldspathic rocks (kaolinization). School of Mines Quaterly, November, 1884. Becke, F. Aetzversuche am Bleiglanz. Min. Petr. Mitth., v1, 237. BLOMSTRAND, C. W. Om ett uranmineral fran trakten af Moss samt om de nativa uranaterna i allminhet. Geol. Fér.. Forh. Stockholm, vu, 59. Cross, W. A list of specially noteworthy minerals in Colorado. Proce. Colorado Sci. Soc., 1, 134-144. Des CLoizEaux. Oligoclases ef andésine. Bull. Soc. Min. France, vu, 249-336. DOELTER, C. Zur Synthese des Pyroxens. Jahrb. Min., 1884, 1, p. 51. Zur Synthese des Nephelins. Zeitsch. Kryst., rx, 321. DOELTER and Hussak. Ueber die Einwirkung geschmolzener Magmen auf verschie- dene Mineralien. Jahrb. Min., 1884, 1, 18. Synthetische Studien. ib., p. 158. Duret, H. Influence de la température sur les indices de réfraction du quartz. Bull. Soc. Min. France, vii, 182. ForstNer, H. Ueber kinethehe phaniealseuhe Veranderungen der Feldspiithe von Pantelleria. Zeitsch. Kryst., rx, 333. GRUnNuvT, L. Beitriige zur krystallographischen Kenntniss des Andalusites und des Topazes. Zeitsch. Kryst., 1x, 113. *In this list are given the full titles of the more important mineralogical memoirs of the past year, especially those of a general and theoretical character. Many others are referred to in the preceding pages. 560 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. Katkowsky, E. Ueber die Polarisationsverhiltnisse von senkrecht gegen einer optische Axe geschnittenen zweiaxigen Krystallplatten. Zeitsch. Kryst., rx, 486. KETTELER, E. Zur Dispersion des Quarz. Wied. Ann., Xx, 438. KLEIN, C. Optische Studien am Leucit. Nachr. k. Ges. Wiss., Gottingen, pp. 421- 472. Beitriige zur Kenntniss des Boracit. Jahrb. Min., 1884, 1, 235. KLEIN, W. Beitriige zur Kenntniss der optischen Aenderungen in Krystallen unter dem Einflusse der Erwirmung. Zeitsch. Kryst., rx, 38. Kxioos, J. H. Beobachtungen an Orthoklas und Mikroklin. Jahrb. Min., 1884, 11, 87. KoLENKO, B. von. Die Pyroelektricitit des Quarzes in Bezug auf sein krystallo- graphisches System. Zeitsch. Kryst., 1X, 1. = KRroustcHoFF, K. DE. Sur l’analyse spectrale appliquée aux études microminéralo- giques. Bull. Soc. Min. France, vu, 243. - LoMMEL, E. Die Fluorescenz des Kalkspaths. Wied. Ann., xx1, 422. LORENZEN, J. Untersuchungen einiger Mineralien aus Kangerdluarsuk. Zeitsch, Kryst., rx, 243. Achemieal examination of Greenland telluric iron. Min. Mag., vi, 14. Mack, K. Ueber das pyroelectrische Verhalten des Boracits. Wied. Ann., xx1, 410. MALLARD, E. Sur Visomorphisme des chlorates et des azotates, et sur la quasi-iden- tité vraisemblable de arrangement moléculaire dans toutes les substances cris- tallisées. Bull. Soc. Min. France, vir, 349-401. MaiarD, E., and LE CHATELIER. Sur la variation avec la pression de la tempéra- ture & laquelle se produit la transformation de Viodure d’argent. Bull. Soc. Min. France, vu, 478. Mann, P. Untersuchungen iiber die chemische Zusammensetzung einiger Augite aus Phonolithen und verwandten Gesteinen. Jahrb. Min., 1884, 1, 172. MerrIAN, A. Studien an gesteinsbildenden Pyroxenen. Uaheh: Min., Beilage-Bd., Til, 252. MicueEeLt-Livy, A. Note sur la biréfringence de quelques minéraux; application & étude des roches en plaques minces. Bull. Soc. Min. France, vit, 43. Miers, H. A. The crystallography of bournonite. Min. Mag., v1, 59; Meneghinite- 405, Viz O20: MINNEGERODE, B. Ueber die Symmetrie-Verhaltnisse und die Elasticitit der Krys- talle: Nachr. k. Ges. Wiss., Gottingen, pp. 374-384; pp. 488-492. Miaer, O. Beitriige zur Kenntniss der Cohisionsverhaltnisse einiger Mineralien. Jahrb. Min., 1884, 1, 50. Ueber Schlagfiguren und kiinstliche Zwillingsbildung am Leadhillit, und die Dimorphie dieser Substanz. Jb., p. 63. Bemerkungen tiber die Zwillingsbildung einiger Mineralien. Jb., p. 216. RAMMELSBERG, C. F. Ueberisomorphe, chemisch nicht analoge Mineralien. Jahrb. Min., 1884, 11, p. 67. Ueber den Boronatrocalcite und die natiirlichen Borate iiberhaupt. Jb., p. 158. RINNE, F. Beitrige zur Kenntniss des Krystallsystems des Zinkoxyds. Jahrb. - Min., 1884, 11, 164. ScuraurF, A. Vergleichend-morphologische Studien iiber die axiale Lagerung der Atome in Krystallen. Zeitsch. Kryst., rx, 265. - Ueber die Trimorphie und die Ausdehnungs-Coefficienten von Titandioxid. Ib., p. 433. ScHuUSTER, MAx. Studien tiber die Flichenbeschaffenheit und Bauweise der Dan- buritkrystalle vom Scopi in Graubiindten. Min. Petr. Mitth., v1, 301. Sy6GREN, A. Mineralogiska Notiser, vu. Geol. Fér. Férh., Stockholm, vu, 109; Vill, ib., p. 177. SyOGREN, HJ. Kristallogratiska Studier, vi. Geol. Fér, Férh., Stockholm, vu, 124; vull, ib., p. 220; IX—XI, ib., p. 369, . MINERALOGY. 561 Ss$GREN, Hy. Om manganarseniaternas frin Nordmarken forekomstsiitt och par- agenesis. Ib., p. 407. Smiru, EvGENE A. List of the Ores and Minerals of Industrial Importance occurring in Alabama. Montgomery, Ala., 1884. STEENSTRUP, K. J. V. On the existence of nickel-iron with Widmannstitten figures in the basalt of North Greenland. Min. Mag., v1, 1. THOULET, J. Mesure du coefficient de dilatation cubique des minéraux. Bull. Soo. Min. France, vu, 151. TRAUBE, H. Ueber den Nephrit von Jordansmiihl in Schlesien. Jahrb. Min., Beil. Bd., 111, 412. Voiat, W. Zur Theorie der Absorption des Lichtes in Krystallen. Nachr. k. Ges. Wiss. Gottingen, pp. 137 and pp. 337-363. Wied. Ann., xxim, 577. Wessky, M. Ueber die Ein- und Mehrdeutigkeit der Fundamental-Bogen-Complexe fiir die Elemente monoklinischer Krystall-Gattungen. Sitzber. k. Preuss. Akad. Wiss., Berlin, April 17, 1884. S. Mis. 33——36 = sia LA risen to Mh Sanit a Stet PW abe oak Rae Wuatiea tml a F) tube iE. 2h Dees eee as a ee a et ¥ sage ES cee MOS AE =, Cant : 4 “ib nee at aertinge ford hap dab ae morte dean tt So. 5 ee acts UE ATV SRE ith be = 4 ao ape aa et LI Eiri Pate eC egy et neontien retele dotulit ah Hen aI es Fi . \. es Cate (IRDA, , keel bhatt og TE Ce ; Bika vet “uy ‘noquianis) cB ogee: < Balan i yo Rt 4 dean br Tob sigAwils oft ipsa ~#10ae iby odard Mi Rac tie t e 4 aharsel iste ie We We idastittstiaeee ad cecalel aphie Beet OE fee ailis® Fe ial Zl ‘ F ae A ; cies é ames ALi aN J _ | 4 7 ~ 1 ie = r ad m $ rs D re eo <= -“ a = ‘ a ~ ~\ reget : ; bene e- eee Q ; 3 are iF ~ -, * ¢ ee he = 7 , “3 7 -: : Seba A REVIEW OF THE PROGRESS OF NORTH AMERIOAN IN- VERTEBRATE PALZ ONTOLOGY FOR 1884. By JoHN BELKNAP MARGCOU. In this work I have endeavored to collect the titles of all of the works on North American invertebrate paleontology published during the past year. An attempt has been made to give a brief idea of the con- tents of each work, the new genera and species described, and the general conclusions of the authors. ‘The alphabetical arrangement by authors seemed, after a good deal of thought, the best method of arrangement and has consequently been adopted. The explanatory notices are placed after each title. The work I hope will prove useful, and I will be glad if those who notice them will call my attention to any omissions. Ami, H. M.—Notes on Triarthus spinosus Billings. (Trans. Ottawa Field Naturalists’ Club, No. 4. Ottawa, 1883.) Interesting notes on this Trilobite with two figures, one a copy of Billings’s, the other original, with some of the furrows and grooves on the occipital segment imperfectly figured. BEECHER, C. E.—Ceratiocaride from the Chemung and Waverly Groups at Warren, Pa. (Rep. of progress, P. P. P., 2d Geol. Surv. Penna., pp. 1-22, pls. i and ii, Harrisburg, 1884.) A very interesting paper on a group of which but little is known. Gives descriptions of two new genera, Elymocaris and Tropidocaris, El. siliqua n. sp. and IT. bicarinata, T. interrupta, T. alternata n. sp., and also a new species of Echinocaris, E. socialisn. sp. He also redescribes and gives good figures of EH. punctata Hall. The figures and descrip- tions are excellent; a short bibliography of the subject is also given. BILLINGS, W. R.—Notes on, and description of, some fossils from the Trenton Limestone. (Trans. Ottawa Field Naturalists’ Club, No. 4. Ottawa, 1883.) Describes a new species, Heterocrinus bellevillensis, with good figures. Gives a good illustration showing the arms of Dendrocrinus jewettir Billings, 1859; he estimates their number at least at forty. Describes 563 564 : SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. a ne. variety of Amygdalocystites florealis as var. levis. The illustra- tions are good. He records the existence in the Trenton limestone at Brigham’s Lake, Hull, of Jocrinus subcrassus, Glyptocrinus decadactylus, and Gl. parvus. CHAPMAN, EH. J.—A Classification of Crinoids. (Trans. Royal Soc. Can- ada, vol. 1, section iv, 1882, pp. 113-116. Montreal, 1883.) [Ap- peared 1884. | This classification is based on the presence or absence of a canalicu- lated structure in the calyx and arm-plates. The author makes three divisions with a subdivision in the first and second divisions. In the first division the plates (apart from the stem segments) are without in- ternal canals; in the second the arm-plates are perforated internally ; and in the third a system of canals radiates from the base of the calyx to the extremities of the arms. The following is asummary of the clas- sification : : I. Emedullata : 1. Amplicincta : . Proclinata (e. g. Cheirocrinus). . Attenuata (e. g. Pisocrinus; Hybocrinus). . Spatiosa (e. g. Platyerinus). . Pinnigera (e. g. Poteriocrinus). 5. Disjuncta (e. g. Marsupites). 2. Multicincta: 1. Squamosa (e. g. Ichthyocrinus). 2. Copulata (e. g. Melocrinus ; Eucalyptocrinus). 3. Ornata (e. g. Actinocrinus ; Glyptocrinus). 4, Opulenta (e. g. Polypeltes). 5. Mutica (e. g. Uintacrinus). Il. Fistulata: . 1. Ramosa (e. g. Cyathocrinus) 2. Foliata (e. g. Crotalocrinus). 3. Fimbriata (e. g. Cupressocrinus). 4, Quadrata (e. g. Gasterocoma). III. Canaliculata: 1. Crassicincta: . Frondosa (e. g. Pentacrinus). . Vagata (e. g. Antedon). . Florifera (e. g. Encrinus). . Coadunata (e. g. Eugeniacrinus). . Conformata (e. g. Apiocrinus; Bourgetticrinus ; Rhizo- crinus). 2. Tenuicincta : 1. Carinata (e. g. Hyocrinus). 2. Truncata (e. g. Holopus). jaa Hm Co bo OF OC be M pha NORTH AMERICAN INVERTEBRATE PALAONTOLOGY. 565 CLAYPOLE, E. W.—On the occurrence of the Genus Dalmanites jn the Lower Carboniferous Rocks of Ohio. (Geol. Magazine, 3d Decade, July, 1884, vol. i, No. vii, pp. 303, 307, London.) The author describes Dalmanites? Cuyahoga, illustrated by a wood- cut, and he discusses the Trilobitic fauna of the carboniferous. DwiGuHt, WILLIAM b.—Recent Explorations in the Wappinger Valley Limestone of Dutchess County, New York, No. 4. Descriptions of Calciferous ? Fossils. (Amer. Journ. of Sci. and Arts, April, 1884, vol. XXVII, article xxix, pp. 249-259, pl. vii, New Haven, 1884.) The figures are clear. The new species described are as follows: Bathyurus taurifrons, B.? crotalifrons, Cyrtoceras vassarina, C.% dac- tyloides, C. microscopicum, Orthoceras spissiseptum, O. Henrietta, and On- coceras vasiforme. FoERSTE, AuG. I°.—The Power of Motion in Crinoid Stems (January. 1884). (Amer. Naturalist, vol. xvi1, No. 1, pp. 57, 58; figure in text, Philadelphia, 1884.) The author, from the fact that he found a crinoid stem disposed in a perfect natural coil, argues that it placed itself in that position, was de- stroyed while in that position, and must have had the power of motion to place itself in that position. FONTAINE, W. M.—Contributions to the Knowledge of the older Meso- zoic Flora of Virginia. Monographs of the United States Geological Survey, vol. v1, pp. 1-144, pls. i-liv. 4to. Washington, 1883. [Ap- peared December, 1884. | This work is divided into three parts. In the first Professor Fontaine gives a brief description of the geology of the Virginia Mesozoic areas. In the second he describes the flora, among it the two new genera, Mer- tensides n. g. and Pseudodancopsis n. g., and twenty-seven new species: Schizoneura virginiensis, Acrostichides rhombifolius, A. microphyllus, A. densifolius. Mertensides distans, Asterocarpus virginiensis, A. platyrachis, A. penticarpa, Pecopteris rarinervis, Cladophlebis subfalcata, C. auriculata, C. ovata, C. microphylla, C. pseudowhitbiensis, C. rotundiloba, Lonchop- teris virginiensis, Pseudodancopsis reticulata, P. nervosa, Petrophyllum in- cequale, Ctenophyllum truncatum, C. grandifolium, C. giganteum, Podo- zamites emmonst, Sphenozamites rogersianus, Cycadites tenuinervis, Zamio- strobus virginiensis, Baiera multifida. A table comparing them with plants from the Triassae, Jurassic, and Rhetice of other regions is given; 9 per cent. show affinities with Tri- assic forms, 19 per cent. with Jurassic forms, and 28 per cent. with Khetic forms. The flora must therefore be considered not older than the Rheetic. In the third part he republishes Emmons’s figures of the Mesozoic flora 566 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. of North Carolina and compares this flora with that of Virginia in a table, showing also the affinities to Jurassic, Rhetic, and Triassic plants of foreign countries. This list contains thirty-nine species. Twenty- three per cent. of these are peculiar to North Carolina, 41 per cent. are found in Virginia, 20 per cent. are allied to or identical with Jurassic forms, and 33 per cent. are allied to or identical with Rheetic forms, and therefore the North Carolina flora may be considered of the same age as that of Virginia. Forp, 8S. W.—Note on the Discovery of Primordial Fossils in the Town of Stuyvesant, Columbia County, New York. (Amer. Jour. Sci. and Arts, July, 1884, art. vi, vol. XXVIII, pp. 35-37.) Mr. Ford considers that the 120 feet of strata he finds in Columbia County are simply a southern prolongation of the Troy primordial series. HALL, JAMES.—Notes on the Family Dictyospongidw. Observations on the Genera Cyathophycus, Dictyophyton, Phragmodictya, Clathrospongia, Physospongia, and their relations to Uphantenia. (35th Report of the New York State Museum Nat. Hist., pls. xvii-xx.) Plates published in advance; one hundred copies have been distrib- uted. HALL, J AMES.— Descriptions of the Species of Fossil Reticulate Sponges. constituting the Family Dictyospongide, pp. 1-19. Albany, 1884. (Abstract of a paper to be issued in the 35th Museum Report.) Contains further description of the forms indicated in the previous title. The new genera Hctenodictya, Lyrodictya, Thamnodictya, Phrag- modictya, Cleodictya, and Physospongia, are characterized, and the follow- ing new species are described: Dictyophyton hamiltonense, D. patulum, D. prismaticum, D. telum, D. irregulare, D. baculum, D. paralellum, D. cine- tum, D. sacculum, LHctenodictya burlingtonensis, Lyrodictya romingert, Phragmodictya patelliformis, Cleodictya gloriosa, C. ? mohri, Physospongia colletti. HALL, JAMES.—Paleontology. Vol. v, part 1. Lamellibranchiata I. ‘Text and plates. Containing descriptions and figures of the Mono- myaria of the Upper Helderberg, Hamilton, and Chemung Groups. (Geological Survey of the State of New York, pp. i-xviii and 1-268. Explanation of plates i-xxxiii and Ixxxi-xcii. Albany, 1884.) Plates i-xxxiii were published last year in advance; plates lxxxi to xcii have not yet appeared, and no plates at all are bound in the volume. Another volume will appear next year containing the descriptions of the remainder of the forms illustrated on plates xxxiv—lxxx, inclusive. In this the author proposes to give a résumé of all the genera described, and, in the same connection, a comparison with genera described in other publications, with some notice of the bibliography of this class of fossils ee ee NORTH AMERICAN INVERTEBRATE PA\LAONTOLOGY. 567 so far as relates to the paleozoic forms. In that notice the reasons for the generic subdivisions used in the present volume will be given in full. The following new genera are proposed in this volume: Crenipecten, Tyriopecten, Pterinopecten, Actinopteria, Ptychopteria, Limoptera, Glyp- todesma, Leiopteria, Leptodesma, Paleopinna, Ectenodesma, Byssopteria, and three subgenera, Plethomytilus as. g. of Mytilarca Hall, Mytilops a s. g. of Modiola, and Vertumnia as. g. of Pterinea. All these are re- published, except Vertumnia, with but few modifications from the few pages of text preceding the volume of plates publisbed the year previous. The following new species are described: Aviculopecten equilateralis, Pterinopecten reflexus, P. nodosus, P. letus, P. intermedius, P. regularis, P. dispandus, Pterinea grandis, Pterinea interstrialis, P. (Vertumnia) reproba, Actinopteria doris, A. pusilla, A. tenuistriata, A. auriculata, A. eta, A. theta, A. iota, A. kappa, Ptychopteria thetis, P. falcata, P. spio, P. eudora, P. trigonalis, P. elongata, P. galene, P. beecheri, P. spatulata, P. lata, P. perlata, P. thalia, P. gibbosa, P. lobata, P. vanuxemi, Leiopteira sayi, L. troosti, L. leai, L: gabbi, L. linguiformis, L. torreyi, Leptodesma shumardi, Leptodesma agassizi, L. billingsi, L. stephani, L. medon, L. ead- mus, L. creon, L. demus, L. loxias, L. mentor, L. hector, L. clitus, L. trun- catum, L. corydon, L. jason, L. pelops, L. orcus, L. nereus, L. alatum, L. orus, L. biton, L. lesleyi, L. aviforme, L. flaccidum, L. patulum, L. arci- forme, L. phaon, L. propinquum, L. quadratum, L. acutirostrum, Ptero- nites inoptatus, Mytilarca (Plethomytilus) knappi, Mytilarca regularis, M. gibbosa. HAMBACH, G.--Notes about the Structure and Classification of the Pen- tremites. (Trans. Acad. Sci. Saint Louis, vol. tv, No. 3, pp. 537-547. Saint Louis, 1584.) A portion of the paper is devoted to answering Mr. Carpenter’s eriti- cisms on the author’s paper on the Anatomy of the Blastoidea. The author considers Pentremites more closely related to Hehinus than to the Crinoidea; he gonsiders it impracticable to divide the genus Pen- tremites into four or five new genera, as has been proposed by Mr. Carpen- ter. Mr. Hambach thinks that all described Pentremites (except those which belong tothe genus Codaster or Codonites) can easily be distributed in one of these three divisions, viz: First division comprises all species in which the horizontal portion of the deltoid piece is very narrow, the sinus to both sides in the deltoid and lancet pieces comparatively large, and so surrounded by the zigzag plicated integument that two of the so formed openings appear externally only as one, e. g., P. florealis Say, and P. reinwardtii Troost. The second division comprises all species in which the deltoid pieces are very broad, the lancet pieces very narrow, and the sinus for the formation of the spiracle openings in both deltoid and lancet pieces very little; the zigzag plicated in- tegument corresponding to the narrow ambulacral field is not wide enough to surround these openings fully, hence they haye to remain 568 . SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. separate, or, in other words, where we have ten distinctly visible openings, e. g., P. mels Owen & Shumard, and P. crenulatus Roemer. The third division comprises all species in which the deltoid pieces are perforated, because the lancet pieces do not reach far enough to the summit to enter into the composition of the spiracle openings, e. g., P. norwoodi Owen & Shumard, and P. ellipticus Sowerby. The article is illustrated by six figures in the text. HAMBACH, G.—Description of new Paleozoic Echinodermata. (Trans. Acad. Sci. Saint Louis, vol. rv, No. 3, pp. 548-554, pls. Cand D. Saint Louis, 1884.) The author describes the following new species from the subcarbon- iferous limestones: Melonites crassus, M. irregularis, Oligoporus parvus, Archeocidaris newberryi, Pentremites sampsoni, P. gemmiformis, Codo- nites campanulatus. HEILPRIN, ANGELO.—North American Tertiary Ostreide. Appendix I. (White, C. A. A Review of the Fossil Ostreide of North America.) N. B.—See Dr. C. A. White’s work. HEILPRIN, ANGELO.—Ona Carboniferous Ammonite from Texas. (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1884, pp. 53-55, figs. 1 and 2, p. 53.) Describes Ammonites Parkeri, considers it closely related to ** Arcestes antiquus” Waagen. It is associated with Zaphrentis, Phillipsia, Bel- lerophon, Conularia, Chonetes, and Productus. Professor Heilprin refers this form to the “old genus Ammonites,” but as nearly as can be judged from the figures and descriptions we would place it in the genus Popanoceras Hyatt, of which Arcestes antiquum Waagen is an extreme form. HEILPRIN, ANGELO.—Contributions to the Tertiary Geology and Pale.- ontology of the United States. Pp. 1-117. 4to. Philadelphia, 1884. This paper contains discussions of the various Tertiary formations of the United States, lists of fossils occurring therein, and a comparison of some American and European forms, most of which have already been published in substance in the Proce. of the Acad. Nat Sci. of Philadel- phia. It is to be regretted that the book is not provided with an index, and: that Mr. Heilprin has not given the names of the authors when cit- ing species and giving lists of them. Hyatt, ALPHEUS.—Evolution of the Cephalopoda. (Science, vol. 01, Nos. 52 and 53, pp. 122-127 and 145-149. Cambridge, 1884.) An illustrated article containing in a condensed form Professor Hyatt’s views on the subject. Hyatt, ALPHEUS.—The Protoconch of Cephalopoda. (Amer. Natural- ist, vol. xvii, No. 9, pp. 919, 920. Philadelphia, 1884.) Mr. Hyatt says that his observations establish the fact that in the Ad Pe Seti ae ee er ae ere re NORTH AMERICAN INVERTEBRATE PALZ ONTOLOGY. 569 Nautiloidea the bulb is covered by a true protoconch continuous with the shell of the apex. Hyarr, ALPHEUS.—Genera of Fossil Cephalopods. (Proc. Boston Soe. Nat. Hist., April 4, 1883, vol. xx11, pp. 253-338. Boston, 1884.) This paper is preliminary to a monograph which will appear in the memoirs of the Museum of Comp. Zoology. The first dozen pages are devoted to a discussion of the Cephalopoda. The rest of the article is a description of genera arranged according to the author’s system of classification and based on his studies of the development of the Cepha- lopoda. The following new genera are established: Vaginoceras, Plecto- ceras, Litoceras, Diadiploceras, Metacoceras, Tainoceras, Mojsvaroceras, Grypoceras, Enclimatoceras, Sactoceras, Geisonoceras, Cycloceras, Kiono- ceras, Spyroceras, Dawsonoceras, Rizosceras, Acleistoceras, Tetramero- ceras, Hexameroceras, Trimeroceras, Pentameroceras, Septameroceras, Bil- lingsites, Melonoceras, Oonoceras, Oranoceras, Nedyceras, Bremoceras, Ptyssoceras, Anomaloceras, Centroceras, Zittelloceras, Halloceras, Ruto- ceras, Triplooceras, Kophinoceras, Strophiceras, Solenoceras, Phloioceras, Tripteroceras, Edaphoceras, Tripleuroceras, Apsidoceras, Titanoceras, Ep- hippioceras, Stroboceras, Discitoceras, Phacoceras, Apheleceras, Tribolo- ceras, Koninckioceras, Aipoceras, Sphyradoceras, Uranoceras, Barrandeo- ceras, Pselioceras, Nephriticeras, Cenoceras, Cymatoceras, Mimoceras, Heminautilinus, Celeceras, Gephuroceras, Manticoceras, Parodiceras, Tor- noceras, Mcneceras, Sporadoceras, Brancoceras, Munsteroceras, Gastrio- ceras, Paralegoceras, Prinoceras, Glyphioceras, Dimeroceras, Homoceras, Nomismoceras, Dimorphoceras, Sandbergeoceras, Beloceras, Pharciceras, Schistoceras, Triainoceras, Popanoceras. Hyatt, ALPHEUS.—F ossil Cephalopoda in the Musuem of Comparative Zoology. (Proc. of the Amer. Ass. for theAdv. of Sci., vol. XxXx1, pp.323-361, Minneapolis meeting, August, 1883.) [Not distributed till 1884. | This is also a partial abstract from the monograph just mentioned, and a very interesting discussion of the classification and evolution of this group. JAMES, J. F'.—Two Species of Tertiary Plants. (Science, vol. 111, No. 62, p. 433. Cambridge, 1884.) Mr. James criticises two of the determinations made by Professor Les- quereux in his Tertiary Flora (U.S. Geol. and Geogr. Surv. Terr., F. V, Hayden in charge.) [Not yet published. ] JAMES, J. F'.—The Fucoids of the CincinnatiGroup. (Jour. Cincinnati Soc. Nat. Hist., October, 1884, vol. vu, pp. 1-9, pls. v and vi.) The author is a little premature in condemning to the rank of mud bubbles some of the Silurian fossils. A little inquiry would have elicited 570 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. the fact that sponge spicules have been found in Cyathophycus subspner- icus Walcott, which he degrades to the rank of a mud bubble. JAMES, U. P.—Description of Three Species of Fossils. (Jour. Cincin- nati Soe. Nat. Hist., April, 1884, vol. vu, pp. 1-4.) Decribes Stromatopora subcylindrica, Fistilupora oweni, Cerampora ? beani, illustrated by cuts in the text. They occur in the Cincinnati Group. JAMES, U. P.—Description of Four New Species of Fossils from the Cincinnati Group. (Jour. Cincinnati Soc. Nat. Hist., October,.1834, vol. VII, pp. 137-140, pl. vii.) Describes Monticulipora ohioensis, M. falesi, Stromatopora tubularis, and S. ludlowensis. JAMES, U. P.—On Conodonts and Fossil Annelid Jaws. (Jour. Cinciu- nati Soc. Nat. Hist., October, 1884, vol. VII, pp. 143-149, pl. vil.) Mr. James concludes that the weight of evidence favors the view that Conodonts are the jaws and lingual teeth of Mollusks. He describes two new species of Conodonts, Prioniodus Dychet and Polygnathus Wil- soni, and also two new species of Annelids, Arrabellites aciculatus and A. hindet. JONES, T. R., and J. W. KiRKByY.—On some Carboniferous Entomostraca from Nova Scotia. (Geol. Magazine, 3d Decade, August, 1884; vol. 1, No. viii, pp. 356-362, pl. xii. London.) Describes and makes notes on about ten species and varieties, of which two are new, Beyrichia nova scotia, and Candona ? elongata. JONES, T. R., and H. WooDWARD.—Notes on Phyllopodiform crusta- ceans, referable to the genus Echinocaris, from the Paleozoic Rocks. (Geol. Mag., Decade iii, vol. I, pp. 1-4, pl. xiii. London, 1884.) Echinocaris wrightiana Dawson sp. The fossils discussed in this paper are from New York State. LESQUEREUX, LEO.—Description of the Coal Flora of the Carboniferous Formation in Pennsylvania and throughout the United States. (Sec- ond Geol. Surv. Pennsylvania, Rep. Progress P, vol. 01, pp. 695-977, pls. 88-111. Harrisburg, Pa., 1884.) This third and last volume contains besides new matter, additions and corrections to the first and second volumes (published in 1880) It contains a table of species referred to localities, a table of species referred to formations, and a revised index of generic and specific names referred both to pages and to plates for all three volumes. This volume contains twenty-six good lithographic plates; the pagination of the three volumes is continuous, making a total of 977 pages and 111 plates. The author has endeavored to find out if, as it has been surmised by Euiopean iuthors, it would be possible to recognize, by the presence \ 5 a anaes at ait tw 6 ee NORTH AMERICAN INVERTEBRATE PALA ONTOLOGY. 571 of certain species of plants, the divers horizons of coal strata in differ- ent localities. But with the exception of a few cases of marked iden- tity, as long as the observations were confined to a field of limited area, he considers it is right to say that generally the data furnished by re- mains of fossil plants are either insufficient or deceptive; insufficient, because the specimens of fossil plants are rarely found representing such a number of species that a satisfactory comparison can be made _ between the plants of different localities; deceptive, because the vege- ee tation of the coal period, like that of the present epoch, has been sub- jected to great variations, according to geographical distribution or local influences. Professor Lesquereux makes four distinct modifica- tions of the essential characters of the pre-Carboniferous and Carbonifer- ous floras. The first, comprising the Lower or pre-Carboniferous, is per- sistent in the Devonian, Chemung, and the Catskill; the second, partly marked in the Pocono, becomes modified and persistent in the sub and intra conglomerate measures; the third pertains to the lower pro- ductive coal measures from above the conglomerate to the base of the barren beds of Pennsylvania; the fourth is that of the upper pro- ductive coal measures, including the Pittsburgh coal and a few hun- dred feet above. Of course some species of each group have a greater degree of persistence, and pass from a lower to an upper stage. The author describes the new genus Dendrophycus and the following new species : Dendrophycus desorii, Calamostachys lanceolata, C. brevifolia, Volk- mannia crassa, V. fertilis, Annularia cuspidata, Equisetites gracilis, Neuropteris carrii, N. oblongifolia, N. blissii, N. Griffithii, Odontopteris patens, O. monstruosa, O. affinis, Teniopteris truncata, Megalopteris recti- nervis, Callipteridium rigidum, Alethopteris crassa, Pseudopecopteris his- pida, Pecopteris carrii, Pecopteris georgiana, Pecopteris ornata, Sphenop- teris communis, S. ineequilateralis, S. harveyi, S. (Diplothmema) tracyana, S. royi, S. solida, Eremopteris cheathami, Archeopteris denticulata, A. sphenophyllifolia, A. macilenta, Lycopodites arborescens, L. flexifolius, D. lacoei, Lepidophloios dilatatus, Lepidophyllum cultriforme, L. fallax, L. campbellianum, L. gracile, L. minutum, L. coriaceum, L. elegans, Teeni- ophyllum brevifolium, Sigillaria Grand’ Euryi, S. leverethii, Cordaianthus flexuosus, C. spicatus, C. rugosus, Cordaicarpus cinctus, Cordaicarpus sta- bilis, C. lineatus, Cardiocarpus dilatatus, Cardiocarpus patens, C. speci- osus, C. Harveyi, C. longicollis, C. ovalis, C. conglobatus, C. divergens, C. latior, C. crassus, C. circularis, C. diplotesta, C. pusillus, Rhabdocarpus late-costatus, R. inflatus, R. sub-globosus, R. pachytesta, R. emarginatus, R. tenux, R. abnormalis, Rk. apiculatus, Trigonocarpus adamsii, T. perpu- sillus, Trigonocarpus grandis, T. starkianus, T. kansaseanus, T. multistri- atus, T. ampulleformis, Carpolithes conicus, C. butlerianus, C. perpusillus, C. iatior, C. transectus, Dictyophytum ramosum, Macrostachya communis, il. minor, Odontopteris dilatata, Lesleya microphylla, Megalopteris dentata, M. serrata, Alethopteris evansii, A. robusta, Stemmatopteris microstigma, IS. anceps ?, Rachiopteris squamosa, Lepidodendron rigidum, Knorria com- 572 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. pacta, Lepidostrobus butleri, L. latus, Lepidophyllum stantoni, Whittleseya microphylla, Cordaianthus scaber, C. ebracteatus. LESQUEREUX, LEO.—Principles of Paleozoic Botany. (Indiana depart- ment of Geology and Natural History, 13th Ann. Rep., Part ii, Paleontology, pp. 7-106, pls. i-xxi, John Collett, State geologist, 1883. Indianapolis, 1884.) In the descriptive part of this work Mr. Lesquereux gives descrip- tions of the coal flora, a part of which are modified or borrowed from his U.S. Coal Flora, Report P, of the 2d Geol. Surv. Penna. The plaies and figures are very good of their kind, and the whole work answers very well its purpose of an elementary treatise on the subject. The Geological Survey of Indiana has done excellent work in this direction. and it is to be hoped that its labors will not be permanently discon- tinued. LESQUEREUX, LEO.—The Carboniferous Flora of Rhode Island. (Amer- Naturalist, No. 9, September, vol. xvm1, pp. 921-923. Philadelphia, 1884.) The author gives a list of eighty-eight species, of which fifty-six are ferns, and describes two new species, Sphenopteris fuciformis and Cal lipteridium sp. n. 2, or variety of Alethopteris urophylla Brgt. MARCOU, J. B.—A Review of the Progress of North American Inver- tebrate Paleontology for 1883. (Amer. Naturalist, April, vol. xv, No. 4, pp. 385-392. Philadelphia, 1884.) MATHEW, G. F.—The Primitive Conocoryphean. (Geol. Mag. 3d De- cade, vol. I, pp. 471, 472, 1884. London, 1884.) Relates to the development of the species Ctenocephalus Mathewi and other Conocorypheans of the Acadian fauna, and is considered under the three heads, development of the Glabella, acquisition of sensory organs, and the decoration of the test. MAt1HEW, G. F.—The Geological Age of the Acadian Fauna. (Geol. Mag. 3d Decade, vol. I, pp. 470,471. London, 1884.) An attempt is made to show more accurately than has yet been done the position of the Saint John Cambrian. It is shown that the genera and species of the Acadian trilobites do not agree with those of the Menevian in its more restricted sense. Mr. C. D. Walcott considers the Saint John fauna as the oldest known Cambrian fauna. Both the above papers are apparently abstracts of papers prepared for the meet- ing of the British Association for the Advancement of Science, at Mon- treal, in 1884. MATHEW, G. }'.—Illustrations of the Fauna of the Saint John Group, No.1. The Paradoxides. (Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, section iv, 1882, pp. 87-108, pl. ix, 1883. Montreal, 1884.) Contains a brief history of the discovery and study of the Saint John group, an account of the conditions under which the fossils are found, NORTH AMERICAN INVERTEBRATE PALAZONTOLOGY. 573 a discussion of the interrelationship of the forms of Paradoxides and descriptions of species and varieties. Thenew species are Paradovides eteminicus, with five varieties, breviatus, suricoides, malicitus, quacoensis, pontificalis ; Paradoxides acadicus, and P. lamellatus Hartt var. loricatus. The figures are very fair. MATHEW, G. F’.—Illustrations of the Fauna of the Saint John Group, No. 1. The Paradoxides. (Supplementary section describing the parts.) (Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, section iv, 1883, pp. 271-279, pl. x. Montreal, 1884.) Describes and illustrates some of the parts of the previously-described species. MICKLEBOROUGH, JOHN.—Locomotory Appendages of ‘Trilobites. (Geol. Magazine, 3d Decade, February, 1884, vol. 1, No. ii, pp. 80-84. London.) A reprint from the Journ. Cincinnati Soc. Nat. Hist., vol. v1, 1883. MILLER, 8S. A.—Description of a Beautiful Star-fish and other Fossils. (Jour. Cincinnati Soc. Nat. Hist., April, 1884, vol. vim, No. 1, pp. 16- 20, pl. iv.) Describes the following new species from the Cincinnati Group: Pale- uster magnificus, Gomphoceras faberi, and G. cincinnatiense. . MYER, OTTO.—Notes on Tertiary Shells. (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci., Phil- adelphia, 1884, pp. 104-112.) The author identifies a few American forms with European ones in addition to those already identified by Mr. Heilprin, and describes the _ following new species from the Eocene sands of Claiborne, Ala.: Zibiella ee ee el —_ marshi, Bulla biumbilicata, Cadulus depressus. Tibiella is proposed as a new genus of Pteropoda, but no synopsis of generic characters is given. The new species are illustrated by cuts in the text. NEUMAYER, M.—(Neu. Jahrb. fiir Min. Geol. und Pal. Stuttgart, 1884.) The author notes the parallel position occupied by the Laramie group in Northwestern America and the intertrappean beds of the Deccan in Hindostan, both being placed between the Cretaceous and Eocene, and the resemblance of the fossil faunas is well brought out by a compar- ative list. RINGUEBERG, E. N. S.—New Fossils from the Four Groups of the Niagara Period of Western New York. (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philadelphia, 1884, pp. 144-150, pls. ii and iii.) Describes the following new species: Sphirophyton archimedes, Tria- crinus pyriformis, T. globosus, Stictopora obliqua, Fungispongia irregu- laris, Stictopora graminifolia, Eucaluptocrinus inconspectus, Cornulites contractus, C. nodosus, Lingula bicarinata. The two genera Triacrinus and Fungispongia are described. 574 SCIENTIFIC RECORD. FOR 1884. ScuppER, S. H.—Triassic Insects from the Rocky Mountains. (Amer. — | Jour. Sci. and Arts., September, vol. xxvii, pp. 199-203. New Haven, 1884.) All but two or three of the specimens obtained belong to the group of cockroaches; and although Mr. Lesquereux thinks the beds of Permian age according to the fossil flora, Mr. Scudder thinks the evidence of the insects is in favor of their Triassic age. Eleven of the seventeen species of cockroaches and five of the nine genera found at Fairplay, Colorado, belong to the Paleoblattariw. The genera are as follows: Hioblattina (1 sp.), Petrablattina (2 sp.), Anthracoblattina (1 sp.?), Spilo- blattina n. g. (4 sp.), and Poroblattina n. g. (3 sp.). As seen above two of the genera are new. SCUDDER,S. H.—Two New and Diverse Types of Carboniferous Myria- pods. (Mem. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., March, 1884, vol. m1, No. ix, pp. 283-297, pls. xxvi and xxvii.) A discussion of Carboniferous Myriapods. The author proposes the new suborder Protozyngnatha for the reception of the genus Palwocampa M. and W., and in the suborder Archipolypoda, in the family of the Huphoberide, he places and describes his new genus Trichiulus, and describes the following species: 7. villosus, T. nodulosus, and T. ammonitt- formis. ScuDDER, S. H.—The Species of Mylacris, a Carboniferous Genus of Cockroaches. (Mem. Boston Soe. Nat. Hist., March, 1884, vol. 11, No. x, pp. 299-309, pl. xxvii.) Besides mentioning the previously described species, the author gives the following new ones: Mylacris antiquum, M. lucifugum, M. carbonum, M. priscovolans, and M. ovale. The illustrations of both of these articles are excellent. ScuDDER, S. H.—A Contribution to our Knowledge of Paleozoic Arach- nida. (Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., June, 1884, pp. 13-22. Bos- ton.) This article contains both American and European forms. The new family Poliocheride@ is established and the new genus Poliochera is placed init. The new family Hoscorpionide is also established and in it the genera Hoscorpius, Cycléphthalmus, and Mazonia are placed. The new genera Geralinura and Geraphrynus are described. The following new species are described: Poliochera punctulata, Geraphrynus carbonarius, Anthracomartus trilobitus, A. pustulatus, Geralinura carbonaria. ScUDDER, S. H.—Dictyonema and the Allied Insects of the Carbonif- erous Epoch. (Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Sci., December, 1884, pp. 167-173. Boston.) This is a brief paper in advance of a fuller memoir with detailed de- scriptions and full illustrations. Mr. Scudder establishes the new gen- - NORTH AMERICAN INVERTEBRATE PALA ONTOLOGY. ata era Litoneura, Polioptenus, Goldenbergia, and describes the following new American species: Titanophasma jucunda, Haplophlebiwm longipennis, Paolia superba, P. lacoana, and P. Gurleyi. The author restricts the genus Dictyoneura to D. Schmitzii Gold., D. humboltiana Gold., D. sinu- osa, Kliv.,and D. affinis. (Termes affinis, Gold.). SPENCER, J. W.—Niagara Fossils. (Bull. Mus. Uni. State of Missouri, pp. 1-61, pls. i-ix. Saint Louis, 1884.) Published also in Saint Louis Acad. Sci., vol. tv, No. 4. This work is divided into three parts: Part i, “ Graptolitide of the Upper Silurian system ;” part ii, ““Stromatoporide of the Upper Silu- rian system ;” part iii, fifteen new species of Niagara fossils. Part one contains the descriptions of twenty-one new species: Phyllograptus ? dubius, Dendrograptus ramosus, D. Simplex, D. Darwsoni, D. frondosus, D. praegracilis, D. spinosus, Callograptus granti, C. multicaulis, C. mi- nutus, Dictyoneura expansum, Calyptograptus micronematodes, C.? radi- atus, Acanthograptus pulcher, Inocaulis walkeri, I. diffusus, [. cervi- cornis, I. phycoides, I. ramulosus, Thamnograptus? multiformis, Cyclo- graptus rotadentatus, and of one new genus Cyclograptus ; besides there are descriptions and illustrations of nine species previously described by the author in the Canadian Naturalist, 1878. In part ii the following new species are described: Cannopora walkert, C. mirabilis, Canostoma ristigonchense, Cenostoma botryoideum, Dictyostoma reticulatum. Part iii contains the following new species: Palwaster granti, Rhinopora venosa, Clathropora? gracilis, Fenestella bicornis, Polypora (Fenestella ?) albion- ensis, Lingula ingens, Discina clara, Crania anna, Pleurotomaria clipet- formis, Conularia rugosa, C. wilkinsi, Orthoceras bartonense, Cyrtoceras reversum, Lituites niagarensis. It is much to be regretted that the illus- trations are so poor that it will be very difficult, if not impossible, for future workers to recognize Mr. Spencer’s types. SPRINGER, FRANK.—On the Occurrence of the Lower Burlington Lime- stone in New Mexico. (Amer. Journ. Sci. and Arts, February, vol. XXVUI, pp. 97-103. New Haven, 1884.) The author endeavors to identify a formation in the Lake Valley mining district in Southern New Mexico with the lower Burlington limestone. For this purpose he gives a list of the fossils found there. Uxricu, BE. O.—American Palezoic Bryozoa. (Jour. Cincinnati Soe. Nat. Hist., December, 1883, No. 4, vol. V1, pp. 241-279, pls. xii—xiv. Continued from Vol. V1, p. 168.) In this portion of the work, Mr. Ulrich restricts the genus Atactopora, and establishes the new genera Atactoporella, Idiotrypa, Anisotrypa, and Heliotrypa. He describes the following new species: Atactoporella typicalis, A. newportensis, A. schucherti, Trematopora halli, T.rchitfieldt, Constellaria fischeri, Idiotrypa parasitica, Anisotrypa symmetrica, Helio- trypa bifolia. The work is to be continued, 576 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR ised. WALcort, C. D.—Paleontology of the Eureka District. (Monographs of the United States Geological Survey, vol. VIM, pp. i-xiii and 1-298, pls. i-xxiv, and seven figures in the text. Washington, 1884.) Gives an account of the very interesting paleozoic fauna of this dis- trict. The first chapter contains a fair summary of the results. A. com- mingling of Upper Devonian and Lower Carboniferous fossils occurs. The discussion of the development of Olenellus Howelli is very interest- ing. The succession in the faunal series from the Olenellus beds, through a well-defined fauna of the character of the Potsdam group of New York and the Mississippi Valley, to one containing a mixture of Cambrian and Silurian types passing upward to a fauna comparable to that of the Chazy and Calciferous groups, is shown. The transi- tion is said to be very gradual, and such as would occur where there had been no marked physical disturbance. Here is another instance of the occurrence of passage beds between faunas before considered per- fectly distinct, and it is very interesting to note this fact in our earliest faunas, which is so common in our later ones. The author gives carefully prepared systematic lists ef the fossils in each formation and a paleozoic section of Nevada showing the vertical range of the genera. Two new genera are described, Schizambon, referred to the Siphonotretid, from the L. Silurian Pogonip group and Zaptychius, an auricula-like shell, from the Carboniferous. The author describes one hundred and seventy-three new species, of which thirty are from the Cambrian: Acrothele? dichotoma, Scenella ? conula, Kutorgina whitfieldi, K. prospectensis, Orthis ewrekensis, Stenotheca elongata, Agnostus richmond- ensis, A. seclusus, Olenellus iddingsi, Dicellocephalus nasutus, D. richmond- ensis, D.? angustifrons, D. ole, D. marica, D.? expansus, Ptychoparia ? prospectensis, P.? linnarssoni, P. (Solenopleura ?) breviceps, P.? (Soleno- pleura ?) pernasutus, P. (EHuloma) dissimilis, P. (Huloma) Occidentalis, P. (Huloma)similis, P. (Euloma) affinis, P. (Euloma) laeviceps, P. (Petro- cephalus) occidena, Anomocare? parvum, Agraulos ? globosus, Arethusina americana, Ogygia ? spinosa, O.? problematica. From the Pogonip group of the Lower Silurian thirty-one species are described : Receptacu- lites mamillaris Newb. n. sp., Rk. elongata, R. ellipticus, Obolella ambi- gua, Schizambon typicalis, Orthis hamburgensis, O. lonensis, Streptorhyn- cus minor, Tellinomya? hamburgensis, Modiolopsis occidens, M. pogoni- pensis, Pleurotomaria lonensis, Maclurea annulata, M. subannulata, M. carinata, Metoptoma phillipsi, M.? analoga, Coleoprion minuta, Hyolithes vanuxemi, Dicellocephalus finalis, D. inexpectans, Ptychoparia ? annectans, Bathyurus ? tuberculatus, B.? congeneris, B.? simillimus, Cyphaspis ? brevimarginatus, Amphion nevadensis, Symphysurus ? goldfussi, Barran- dia? MeCoyt, Illaenurus eurekensis, Asaphus caribounensis. From the De- vonian sixty-one new species are described: Palaeomanon roemeri, Lin- gula alba-pinensis, Lingula lonensis, L. whitei, Pholidops bellula, P. quad- rangularis, Ikercidium devonicum, Chonetes macrostriata, C. filistriata, Productus (Productella) hallanus, Productus hirsutiforme, Cyrtina david- Be ee Es NORTH AMERICAN INVERTEBRATE PALZONTOLOGY. 5TT soni, Trematospira infrequens, Rhynchonella ? occidens, R. (Leiorhynchus) nevadensis, Pentamerus lotis, Cryptonella ? circula, C. pinonensis, Pterinea newarhensis, Leptodesma transversa, Limoptera sarmenticia, Mytilurca dubia, Modiomorpha altiforme, M. oblonga, M. obtusa, Nucula rescuensis, Dystactella. insularis, Megambonia occidualis, Nyassa parva, Grammysia minor, Sanguinolites ? combensis, S.? gracilis, Conocardium nevadensis, Poridonomya laevis, P. dcvonica, Microdon (Cypricardella) macrostriatus, Anodontopsis amygdalaeformis, Schizodus (Cytherodon) orbicularis, Platy- ceras conradi, P. undulatum, P. thetiforme, Euomphalus eurekensis, Lccu- liomphalus devonicus, Straparollus newarkensis, Platyschisma ? McCoyt, P.? ambiguum, Callonema cecidentalis, Loxonema eurekensis, L. nobile, L. approximatum, Bellerophon perplexa, B. combsi, Scoliostoma americana, Metoptoma? devonica, Coleolus laevis, Gomphoceras suboviforme, Cyrtoceras nevadense, Goniatites desideratus, Beyrichia (primitia) occidentalis, Leper- diticrotundata, Dalmanites meekii. From the Carboniferous fifty-one new species are described: Discinna connata, Spirifera annectans, S. desider- _ ata, Rhynchonella eurekensis, R. thera, Aviculopecten haguei, A. eurekensis, A. peroccidens, A. pintoensis, A. affinis, Strebloptera similis, Crenipecten hallanus, Pterinopecten hoosacensis, P. spio, Pterinea pintoeusis, Ptychopte- ria protoforme, Pinna inéxpectans, P. cosimilis, Myalina congeneris, M. ne- mesis, M nessus, Modiola nevadensis, Modiomorpha ambigua, M. ? desiderata, M. ? pintoensis, Nucula insularis, N. levatiforme, Solenomya curta, Macro- don truncatus, Edmondia .medon, E.? circularis, Pleurophorus meeki, Sanguinolites retusus, S. simplex, S. saltert, S.? naenia, S. striatus, Micro- don (cypricardella) connatus, Cardiola ? filicostata, Schizodus deparcus, S. curtiforme, S. pintoensis, Platyceras occidens, P. piso, Platyostoma inorna- tum, Bellerophon majusculus, Loxonema bella, Pleurotomaria nevadensis, _Metoptoma peroccidens, Hyolithes carbonaria, Orthoceras eurekensis. The discovery in the Devonian of the interior of a dorsal valve of a rather large species of Lingula, Lingula whitei, afforded the means of comparison of the same parts of the shell with a Silurian and recent species of this genus, and proves the great structural similarity of the three species so widely separated in geological time. Watcort, C. D.—On the Cambrian Faunas of North America. Pre- liminary studies. (Bull. U.S. Geol. Surv., vol. 11, No. 10, pp. 283-354, pls. i-x. Washington, 1884.) ; This work consists of three parts; the first “a review of the fauna of the Saint John formation, contained in the Hartt collection.” This work is not meant to encroach on Mr. Mathew’s work, and contains merely illustrations and descriptions of specimens in the Hartt collec- tion belonging to Cornell University, and Mr. Mathew proposed speci- fic names for the new species excepting one, Harttia matheiwi, the type of the n. g. Harttia Walcott, a very curious form belonging to the Calyptreide. Thenew speciesare Lingula ? dawsoni Mathew, EHyolithes - danianus, and H. miemac Mathew. Conocoryphe walcotti Mathew is alsomentioned here for the first time. The new subgenus Salteria is pro- S. Mis. 33——37 578 — \ SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. posed in place of the generi¢ use of the name Hrignys anticipated. Mr. G. F. Matthew having proposed the name Bailiella, Conocoryphe (Bai- liella) baileyi, this name will be substituted for Salteria, in referring to the St. John species. Mr. Walcott doés not accept the genus Conoce- phalites, and refers its different species to some of Ptychoparia and one of Conocoryphe. ; The second part is on the “fauna of the Braintree argillites.” Mr: ‘Walcott gives excellent figures of Paradoxides harlani and doubts its specific difference from P. bennetti. He describes two new species from this formation, Hyolithes shaleri and Ptychoparia rogersi, and refers W hit- field’s Arionellus quadrangularis to the genus Agraulos. ~ Part three contains the description of a new genus and species of Phyllopoda from the middle Cambrian slates uf Parker’s farm, Georgia, Vt., Protocaries n. g. type P. marshi. The illustrations are all wood- cuts, and are very good of their kind. Waxtcort, C. D.—Appendages of the Trilobite. (Science, No. 57, March 7, vol. 111, pp. 279-281. Cambridge, 1884.) An interesting paper on the appendages of the Asaphus megistos, de- scribed by Prof. John Mickleborough. Mr. Walcott notes the verifica- tion of the hypothesis that the legs were jointed beneath the pygidium as the only addition to our knowledge furnished by thisspecimen. An excellent figure accompanies the paper; there are also figures of Caly- mene senaria, copied from those in Bull. Mus. Comp. Zool., Vol. vim, p. 204, 1881. WARD, L. F.—On Mesozoic Dicotyledons. (Amer. Journ. Sci. and Arts, April, vol. xxvi1, p. 293. New Haven, 1884.) Mr. Ward reviews briefly the present condition of our knowledge of the subject, and gives a history of -its progress, and some generaliza- tions and attempts at comparisons with European beds. Warp, L. F'.—Cavlinites and Zamiostrobus (Science, No. 65, May 2, vol. Ul, pp. 532,533. Cambridge, 1884.) An answer to J. F. James's “Two species of Tertiary Plants.” Waits, C. A.—A Review of the Fossil Ostreide of North America, and a Comparison of the Fossil with the Living Forms. With appendices by Prof. Angelo Heilprin and Mr. John A. Ryder. (Rep. of the See. of the Interior for 1883, vol. 11. Rep. of the director of the U.S. + Geol. Surv., pp. 273-430, pls. xxxiv to Ixxxii. Washington, 1883.) [Appeared 1884. ] A valuable condensation of the known North American oysters, with copious illustrations. The plan is the same as that followed in the Re- view of the Non-marine Fossil Mollusca published the year previous. Wuirr, C. A.—On a small Collection of Mesozoic Fossils collected in Alaska by Mr. W. H. Dall, of the United States Coast Survey. (On Mesozoic Fossiis. Bull. U. 8, Geol, Surv,, vol. 1, No. 4, pp. 98-103, pl. vi. Washington, 1884.) Serra. Ver we ee OF if eee oe ee ae ‘\ NORTH’ AMERICAN INVERTEBRATE PALAONTOLOGY. 579 The author describes a variety of Aucella concentrica Fisher, a new species Cyprina ? dallii, and a long very Slim cephalopod, Belemnites macritatis. He discusses the age of the strata containing them, and concludes that they occupy a transitional position between the Creta ceous and Jurassic, as indicated by Mr. J. Marcou. Waite, C. A.—Description of certain Aberrant Forms of the Chamide from the Cretaceous Rocks of Texas. (On Mesozoie Fossils. Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv., vol. 1, No. 4, pp. 93-97, pls. i-v. Washington, 1884.) Describes the following new species: Requienia patagiata, Monopleura marcida and M. pinguiscula. Numerous figures accompany the descrip- tions. WuirE, ©. A.—On the Nautiloid Genus Enclimatoceras Hyatt, and a description of the type species. (On Mesozoic Fossils. Bull. U.S. Geol. Surv., vol. 1, No. 4, pp. 104, 105, pls. vii-ix. Washington, 1884.) The generic description is by Mr. A. Hyatt, and the specific deserip- tion of FL. ulrichi is by Mr. C. A. White. Waits, C. A.—On the Macrocheilus of Phillips, Plectosty/us of Conrad, and Soleniscus of Meek & Worthen. (Proc. U.S. National Museum, vol. VI, pp. 184-187, pl. viii. Washington, 1883.) Refers to Soleniscus a number of species previously described as Macrocheilus. WuirtF, C. A.—Enemies and Parasites of the Oyster, past and present. (Science, vol. 111, p. 618. Cambridge, 1884.) The author shows that Cliona or a similar burrowing sponge infested certain brachiopod shells as early as the Devonian, and that similar forms were as common upon the fossil Ostreid as they are upon the living. He also shows that the remains of star-fishes are rarely found with fossil Ostreide, although they are so common an enemy to living oysters. b ] ? . * = e Waits, ©. A.—The Fossils of the Indiana Rocks, No, 3. (Indiana de- _ partment of Geol. and Nat. Hist. (thirteenth annual repo:t), part ii, Palaontology, pp. 107-180, pls. 23-39. Jobn Collett, State geologist. Indianapolis, 1884.) . In this work Mr. White gives excellent descriptions of the character- istic invertebrate animal remains of the Carboniferous period, illustrated by figures drawn by Mr. McConnell. Many of the figures are borrowed from previous works, but their execution is good and gives an excellent idea of the characteristic Carboniferous forms of the central coal basin. WHITEAVES, J. I’.—Mesozoic Fossils. Vol.1, part iii. On the fossils of the coal-bearing deposits of the Queen Charlotte Islands, collected by Mr. G. M. Dawson in 1878. (Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey of Canada, pp. 191-262, pls. 21-32. Montreal, April, 1884.) In this report the fossils occurring in a section 13,000 feet thick are described as Oyetaceons. The three lower beds, aggregating 9,000 feet 580 ’ SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 12884. in thickness, are supposed to represent the lower part of the middle Cre- taceous, notwithstanding the fact that they contain many fossils consid- ered Jurassic by previous American authors. However, the identity of these species is very doubtful. The upper division, containing Znocera- mus problematicus, is 1,500 feet thick and is separated from the three lower divisions by 2,000 feet of unfossiliferous strata, the whole mass resting unconformably upon what is considered the Triassic. The au- thor is driven by his conclusions to assert that the Jurassic of the Black Hills and Rocky Mountains is Cretaceous. In order to make a more com- plete Cretaceous series, he cuts out the entire Jurassic formation. Mr. Whiteaves seems to have overlooked the work of Mr. C. Grewingk, who described the fossils brought back by Ilia Wossnessensky, the work of Kichwald, who described the fossils brought back by Doroschin, and that of Pinart, all three describing asomewhat similar fauna in Russian America. He has also not noticed the fact that traces of a Jurassico- cretaceo fauna occur from the neighborhood of Moscow, through Siberia to Alaska, and that very possibly be has similar passage beds in British Columbia and Queen Charlotte’s Islands, that such passage beds are found between every formation, and that the occurrence of some of our Jurassic fossils in such a connection is a poor reason for calling Creta- ceous the beds where there is no such association. The following new species are described: Belemnites skidegatensis ?, Spiroceras carlottensis, Sphenodiscus mandensis, Haploceras cumshewaense, Stephanoceras oblatum, Stephanoceras cepoides, Hamites? glaber, Nerina mandensis, Cerithium skidegatense, Vanikoro pulchella?, Calliostoma con- strictum, Cinulia pusilla, Corbula concinna, Periploma cuspidatum, Thra- cia semiplanata, Tellina shkidegatensis, Thetis affinis ?, Cyprina occiden- talis, Trigonia mandensis, Yoldia arata, Trigonoerca tumida, Lithodomus mandensis, Melina skidegatensis, Inoceranus moresbyensis, Amusium len- ticulare ? Ostrea skidegatensis ?, Astrocentairregularis, Schloenbachia pro- pinqua, Cardium tumidulum, Pecten carlottensis, Rhynchonella mandensis, Discina semipolita. WHITEAVES, J. F.—On the Lower Cretaceous Rocks of British Colum- bia. (Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, section iv, 1882, pp. 81-86.) Describes three new species, illustrated by three woodcuts in the text: Olcostephanus quatrinoensis, Pholadomya vancouverensis, Inocera- mus quatsinoensis. Mr. Whiteaves holds with Eichwald that the pres- ence of an abundance of Awcelle is a sure proof of the Neocomian age of the rocks in which they occur. WHITEAVES, J. I’.—On some supposed Annelid tracks from the Gaspé Sandstone. (Trans. Roy. Soc. Canada, section iv, 1882, pp. 109-111, pls. xi and xii.) Mr. Whiteaves proposes the name of Gyrichnites gaspensis for certain supposed annelid tracts of the Lower Devonian of Point Gaspé, and ilustrates them on two plates, unfortunately on a reduced scale. NORTH AMERICAN INVERTEBRATE PALAONTOLOGY. 581 WUHITEAVuS, J. F'.—Paleozoic Fossils. (vol. 111, part 1, Geol. and Nat ‘Hist. Surv. Canada. Montreal, March, 1884, pp. 1-43, pls. i-viii.) This part is on some new, imperfectly characterized, or previously unrecorded species of fossils from the Guelph Formation of Ontario. The lists of the fossils of this formation in the “ Geology of Canada” ‘contain the following names, for the species of which no descriptions or figures have ever been published, and which, consequently, it has been impossible to recognize: Columnaria galtensis, Diphyphylium irregulare, Amplexus lascatus, Cyclonema galtensis, C. Thysbe, C. Psyche, C. depressa, Pleurotomaria huronensis, Murchisonia tullia, Cyrtoceras jonesi. The present author describes two new genera, Pycnostylus and Codonocheilus, and the following new species: Pycnostylus guelphensis, P. elegans, Mono- merella ovata, M. ovata var. lata, Goniophora crassa, Anodontopsis con- cinna, Tlionia galtensis, T. ? costulata, Subulites compactus, Codoncheilus striatum, Trochonema inornatum, Straparollus crenulatus, Plewrotomaria cyclostoma, P. durhamensis, Murchisonia hespelerensis, M. constricta, M. soluta, M. tropidophora, Tryblidium canadense, Scenella conica, Eeculiom- phalus circinatus, Ascoceras townsendi, Eurypterus boylei. WHITFIELD, R. P.—Notice of some new Species of Primordial Fossils in the Collections of the Museum, and Corrections of previously de- scribed Species. (Bull. Amer. Mus. Nat. Hist., February, 1884, vol. I, No. 5, pp. 139-154, pls. xiv and xv. New York.) Mr. Whitfield thinks that the typical New York Potsdam is about equivalent to the lower portion of the Wisconsin areas, and that the Acadian beds of Canada and Vermont and perhaps the other Atlantic areas are not appreciably ditferent in age, but that the difference in faune is more the result of conditions upon which life depended than a difference in time. Mr. Whitfield was probably unaware of the fact that 3,000 feet of limestone without a break separate the Georgian from the Potsdam fauna in Central Nevada. He describes the following new species: Lingulepis minima, Orthisina orientalis, Nothozoe vermon- tana, Conocephalites verrucosus, Arionellus quadrangularis, Angelina hitehcochki, Dikellocephalus ? marcoui, Maclurea wadsworthi. WILLIAMs, H. 8S.—On the Fossil Faunas of the Upper Devonian along the Meridian 76° 30’ from Tompkins County, New York, to Bradford County, Pennsylvania. (Bull. U. S. Geol. Surv., vol. 1, No. 3, pp. 53-86. Washington, 1884.) This paper is the first of a series ; it contains an interesting discussion of the relative positions of the Upper Devonian faunas of the meridian of Ithaca, N. Y. Mr. Williams does. not always explain clearly where his stations, designated by numbers, are located. WiILuiAMs, H. 8.—The Spirifers of the Upper Devonian. (Science, vol. 1, pp. 374, 375. Cambridge, 1884.) The author criticises the stratigraphical position assigned to some of the fossil species in Report of Progress G. 7, 2d Geol, Sury. of Pennsyl- vania. 582 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. Woopwarp, H.—On the Structure of Trilobites. (Geol. Magazine, 3d Decade, February, 1884, vol. 1, No. 2, pp. 78, 79. London.) A reproduction of the author’s views on the appendages of trilobites, and Asaphus platycephalus Stokes, in particular, as published in 1871 in the Geol. Magazine, July, pp. 289-294, pl. viii. a WooDWARD, H.—Notes on the Appendages of Trilobites. Note to ac- company three woodcuts of Asaphus megistos, a Trilobite discovered by Mr. James Pugh, near Oxford, Ohio, in the upper portion of the Hudson River group. (Geol. Magazine, 3d Decade, April, 1884, vol. 1, No. 4, pp. 162-165. London.) Reproduces Mr. John Mickleborough’s figures of Asaphus megistos with a fewremarks. Hesuggests, concerning Mr. Walcott’s restoration of Calymene senaria, that the last seven pairs of appendages belonging to the pygidium were more probably lamelliform branchigerous append- ages as in Limulus and in living isopods. (See Mr. Walcott’s article in Science, vol. 111, pp. 279-281.) WorTHEN, A. H.—Descriptions of two new species of Crustacea, fifty- one species of Mollusca, and three of Crinoids, from the Carboniferous formations of Illinois and adjacent States. (Bull. No. 2, Illinois State Mus. Nat. Hist., March, 1884, pp. 1-27. Springfield, II.) No illustrations accompany the descriptions of these species: Colpo- caris chesterensis, Solenocaris St. Ludovici, Nautilus montgomeryensis, Pleurotomaria illinoiensis, P. giffordi, P. adamsi, P. nauvooensis, P. cox- ana, Porcellia peoriensis, Loxonema peoriensis, L. quadricarinatus, Ortho- nema carbonaria, Trachydomia nodulosa, Bellerophon giganteus, Naticop- sis madisonensis, Polyphemopsis ? keokuk, Schizodus magnus, 8. varsovi- ensis, S. nauvooensis, S. depressus, S.? circulus, Allorisma illinoiensis, A. elongata, Solenomya varsoviensis, S. monroensis, S. iowaensis, Aviculopinna illinoiense, Sanguinolites ? multistriatus, S. burlingtonensis, Bakevellia illi- noiensis, Myalina monroensis, Nucula illinoiensis, Modiola illinoiensis, Car- diomorpha? pellaensis, Pleurophorus chesterensis, P. minima, P. monroensis, Edmondia varsoviensis, E. illinoiensis, Aviculopecten orestes, A. niotense, A. elsahensis, A. chesterensis, A. spinuliferus, A. monroensis, A. talboti, A. colletti, A. edwardsi, Lima ? menardi, Discina varsoviensis, Terebratula rowleyi, Athyris squamosus, Rhynchonella illinoiensis, Lingula varsoviensis, Lepetopsis chesterensis, Batocrinus montgomeryensis, B. subconicus, Poterto- crinus spinuliferous. The typical specimens will be placed on exhibition in the cases of the State museum. ae tah |. ZOOLOGY. By Professor THEODORE GILL. INTRODUCTION. Investigations ifto the seerets of the animal world have been con- ducted by most of the investigators prominent for the past few years, and by the usual number of recruits to the ranks of zoologists. The addition to our knowledge of the various types of the animal kingdom has been substantial and important, but as usual chiefly confined to matters of detail and refinement, which can be only appreciated by the skilled biologist. Some noteworthy discoveries that can beset forth in a few words, and whose importance can readily be appreciated by all have likewise been made. Among them are the find of a Silurian scor- pion which takes the class of Arachnids much farther back in time, a like extension backwards of the fishes by the exhumation of remains near the base of the upper Silurian beds of Pennsylvania, by Mr. Clay- pole, and the confirmation of the oviparity of the Monotremes, of the only two known family types (Ornithorhynchids and Tachyglossids), by Messrs. W. D. Caldwell and W. Haacke, as well as some insight into their embryonic stages. There are also two features of special interest as signs of the time, in the accessions to the ranks of true investigators from sources from which in times past none looked for work of an exact or highly original nature; such are the female sex and people formerly called barbarous. A most pleasant feature is the number of recent female contributors, and there is a most laudable absence of ignorant wonder and congratu- lation in all of them. America and England have been especially for- tunate in the number of able female investigators. We may be pardoned for recalling the names of a few. In the United States, Miss Rosa Smith, of San Diego, Cal., has deseribed new species and a genus of fishes; Miss Katherine J. Bush has published a useful catalogue of mollusea and echinodermata of Labrador; Miss Mary H. Hinckley has made known the habits and transformations of a tree-frog (JZyla Picker- ingit) in a special monograph; Miss Sara Gwendolen Foulke las made known the structure and habits of many of the lower forms of animal life; Miss Mary Esther Murtfeldt has given several communications on 583 584 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR is84. insects ; and Miss Genevieve Jones and Miss Eliza Schulze have given to the world a most magnificent illustrated work on the nests and eggs of the birds of Ohio. In England, Miss %. A. Ormerod has published excellent reports on the insects affecting agricultural interests; Miss Catherine ©. Hopley has been active in the study of reptiles, and espec- ially the snakes, and published a very creditable volume on the latter; Miss Agnes Crane has contributed to the history of Brachiopods, Poly- zoans, and other animals; and Miss Alice Johnston has attacked, with a well-equipped mind and training, some of the most profound problems in morphology. Further, we may name two who have done excellent work in presenting in popular form the results of recent researches, Miss Arabella Buckley, and Mrs. Martin, who, in conjunction with her hus- band, Professor Martin, of the Johns Hopkins University, has published a manual of physiology. Distant and formerly isolated Japan has also furnished to the scien- tific corps a notable contingent, who have demonstrated the ability of the Mongolian race to hold their own with the best of the Caucasians. Professor Kakichi Mitsikuri, a graduate of the Johns Hopkins Univer- sity, and now professor of zooiogy in the University of Tokio, and Dr. Isao lijima have been working successfully in fields wherein only the best trained minds, supplemented by extraordinary ski}l in anatomy and manipulation generally, can hope for success. Laborers such as these, of either sex or any country, will always be welcome. A pleasant and in some ways an important event of the year was the meeting, for the first time in its long history, of the British Association for the Advancement of Science on American soil or even outside of the British Isles. The session at Montreal in September was as largely attended as could have been expected under the circumstances, and there was a pleasant interchange of courtesies between the association and: its younger American sister. Many naturalists long known to each other by reputation, and often through correspondence, met face to face for the first time, and doubtless misapprehensions were rectified, better knowledge of each other obtained, mutual respect insured, and personal friendship cemented. As in the previous reports, the language of the original from which the abstract is compiled is generally followed as closely as the case will permit. It has, however, been found necessary to limit the ab- stract to the illustration of the prominent idea underlying the original memoir, and pass by the proofs and collateral argumenis. At the same time it has been often attempted to bring the new discovery into relation with the previous status of information respecting the group under consideration. As to the special discoveries recorded, they have been generally selected (1) on account of the modifications the forms considered force on the system; or (2) for the reason that they are or have been deemed to be of high taxonomic importance; or (3) because the animals per se are of general interest; or, finally, (4) because they * ZOOLOGY. 585 are of special interest to the American naturalist. Of course zoologists cultivating limited fields of research will find in omissions cause for censure, and may urge that discoveries of inferior importance have been noticed to the exclusion Of those better entitled to it. It is freely admitted that this charge may even be justly made; but the limits assigned to the record have been much exceeded, and the recorder has studied the needs of the many rather than of the few, The summary is intended, not for the advanced scientific student, but for those who entertain a general interest in zoology or some of the better-known classes. A very partial bibliography of noteworthy memoirs and works relat- ing to different class of animals is supplied, and will, it is hoped, prove to be of use to some to whom the voluminous bibliographies and ree- ords of progress in science are inaccessible. It has been a difficult matter to_select the titles which might be most advantageously introduced in a limited report like the present. Articles of a general interest or of special importance as contributing to throw light on the affinities of certain groups, or monographs have been given the first place. Necessarily many very important papers have not been referred to, and very few descriptive of species have been admitted, and only when unusual interest attaches to the new species or the groups which they enlarge. The compiler desires to make special acknowledgment for most ma- terial assistance to the Zoologischer Anzeiger of Professor Carus and to the Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society. SYNOPSIS OF ARRANGEMENT. I. GENERAL ZOOLOGY. Il. PROTOZOANS. Sporozoans; Rhizopods; Infusorians. lll. PORIFERS. Sponges. IV. COHLENTERATES. Polyps; Acalephs. V. ECHINODERMS. Crinoids; Asterioids; Echinoids; Holothurians. VI. worms. Rotifers; Piatyhelminths; Nematelminths; Annelids. VII. ARTHROPODS. Merostomes; Crustaceans; Arachnids; Insects. ‘Vill. MOLLUSCOIDS. Polyzoans; Brachiopods. IX. MOLLUSKS. Acephals; Gastropods; Cephalopods. X. PROTOCHORDATES. Tunicates. XI. VERTEB.ATES. Fish-like Vertebrates; Leptocardians; Selachi- ans; Fishes; Amphibians; Reptiles; Birds; Mammals. I. GENERAL ZOOLOGY. The deep-sea researches of the United States Fish Commission in 1884. Professor Verrill has given an account of the work of the steamer Albatross in 1884. The exploration of the Gulf Stream region was con- tinued under nearly the same conditions as in 1883, and four trips 586 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR igs4. were made between July 20 and September 13. Sixty-nine dredgings were made. Of these, five were in depths between 2,000 and 2,600 fathoms and the rest in less deep water. The results were “highly - satisfactory, both in the way of physical observations and zoological discoveries.” Large numbers of additions were “ made to the fauna, in- cluding representatives of nearly all classes of deep-sea animals. Many pelagic species were also secured in surface nets, and especially in the trawl-wings. Among these there are some new forms, and many of them have previously not been observed so far north and near the Gulf Stream.” : The deep-sea deposits were especially noteworthy. ‘ The bottom be- tween 600-and 2,000 fathoms, in other regions, has generally been found to consist mainly of ‘globigerina ooze, or sometimes of a mixture of globigerina and pteropod ooze. Off our northern coast, however, this is by no means always the case. The ooze is always mixed with some sand and frequently with much clay-mud. In a number of instances the bottom, between 500 and 1,200 fathoms, has been found to consist of tough and compact clay, so thoroughly hardened that many large angular masses, sometimes weighing more than fifty pounds, have been brought up in the trawl.” The animals obtained were sometimes of singular interest. ‘ Many additions to the fauna of great depths were made, and a large portion of them are undescribed forms. Some of the fishes were of great inter- est. Huge spiny spider crabs (Lithodes A gassizit) over three feet across were taken in 1,000 to 1,230 fathoms, and another very large crab (Geryon quinguedens) occurred in great abundance in 500 to 1,000 fath- oms.” Numerous species of handsome shrimps, many “of a bright color and some of very large size, occurred as usual in the deeper dredgings. Some of these had not been taken before.” Of the Echinoderms, the star-fishes were numerous, and two species - ofa very singular genus, called Brisinga, were obtained in many loeali- ties, sometimes in large numbers. Ophiurans of many species were also obtained in numerous localities. (Am. Journ. Se. (3), XXVIII, pp. 378-384.) Origin of the deep-sea fauna.—In a menograph of the Pourtalesiide, a family of deep-sea Echinoidea, Professor Sven Loven has expre sed some thoughts respecting the origin of the deep-sea fauna, and suggested how the forms characteristic of the depths may have been evolved, distrib- uted, and modified from species of the littoral zone. “In the adult state most of the marine evertebrates remain in their native station, wandering within its precinets. Their embryonic and larval age is their period of dispersal. Of numerous littoral forms, of different classes, tribes, and orders, currents must occasionally carry away the free swimming larve far into the sea, and during the course of succeeding generations early stages of many a species will have in this | | ZOOLOGY. 587 way reached the wide ocean. There they will have sunk, their de- velopment accomplished all through depths full of danger and more and more uncongenial, and a few of them will have settled on the bot- tom of the abyss, and fewer still will have come to thrive there. Among these some will long have their original character, and but slowly been ‘modified, while others will have exhibited a latitude of variation un- - known or rarely seen where they came from, but upon the whole there will be reasons for assuming the less altered forms to be new comers, the more deviating to be old inhabitants of the deep.” Organisms in ice.— A Philadelphia gentleman gave Prof. Joseph Leidy, for examination, a vial of water obtained from a lump of ice which had been used to cool ordinary drinking water. ‘From time to time, among some sediment taken from the water-cooler, the gentleman had observed what he supposed to be living worms, which he suspected were intro- duced with the water into the cooler and not with the ice.” On exami- nation of the water melted from this ice, Professor Leidy was ‘surprised to find a number of worms among some flocculent sediment, mainly con- sisting of vegetal hairs and other débris. Besides the worms, there were also immature Anguillulas, and a number of Rotifer vulgaris, all living. It would appear that these animals had all been contained in the ice, and had been liberated.on melting. It was an unexpected source of contamination of our drinking water that Professor Leidy had _ previ- ously supposed very improbable. The little worms he was not familiar with.” . A study of the worms showed that “they belong to the family Lwm- bricide, and probably may be an undescribed species of Lumbriculus. They are white or colorless, from 4 to 6 millimeters long by a third of a millimeter in thickness;” there are about thirty segments. ‘Several dead worms swarmed in the interior with large, ovate, beaked, ciliated infusoria, measuring from 0.05 to 0.06 ™™ long by 0.04 to 0.048™™ broad.” (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phila., 1884, p. 260.) Microscopic fauna in water reservoirs.—An accidental breaking of a valve, necessitating the drawing off of the water from the Fairmount reservoir, was taken advantage of by Mr. Edward Potts to study the minute fauna to be found. ‘The commensal habit of many of the lower animals who feed by the creation of ciliary whirlpool currents has been frequently referred to; the weaker current-makers, such as vorticelle, stentors, and the errant and tubicolous rotifers, planting themselves about the heads of the stronger polyzoa to supply their own nets with what may have es- caped from the others. The same instinctive principle which leads all these to locate themselves most plentifully amongst the stones in the rapids of streams, was-_particularly noticeable in promoting their ag- gregation upon and in the neighborhood of the inlet and outlet gates 588 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. ‘ of the reservoirs. The feeble currents produced by each can only bring within its reach the floating provision from a very limited area ; the volume of water poured through these gates brings to them a rich supply, and the numbers and variety of these organisms increase in pro- portion. Of the fixed forms were seen amongst the bryozoa, besides one or more undetermined species of Plumatella, Pectinatella magnifica, and Urnatella gracilis of Leidy, and the newly described Paludicella erecta. Attached to these were vorticella, epistilis, and stentors innumerable ; Pyxicola and Acineta, rotifers of various names, including prominently Limnias and other probably undescribed forms among the melicertidz. Very abundant among these was the interesting chaetobranch annelid, Manayunkia speciosa Leidy, which has of late been frequently noticed in this vicinity, and the wonderfully marine-looking hydroid Cordylo- phora lacustris. This last was particularly abundant around the south- east outlet, its stems forming a complete matting over many yards of surface, commingled with bryozoa and sponges in intricate confusion.” (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phila., 1884, pp. 217-219.) Symbiosis of Hermit Crab and Sea-Anemone.—The subject of Sym- biosis, or the association for mutual benefit of different animals, or, may be, of an animal and a plant even, has of late been attracting much attention. The name was first suggested by the French botanist, De Bary, in connection with certain phenomena of the vegetable world. The associates come together and associate “like two partners in a well regulated business concern, co-operating in the work of life, taking part in all its toils and troubles, and honorably sharing the common profits.” The symbiotic relationship of one of the hermit crabs and a sea-anemone (Adamsia palliata) has been studied in the Naples aquarium by Pro- fessor Hertwig. The sea-anemone, a beautiful species, ‘ attaches itself to the roof of the common abode in such a position that its mouth and prehensile apparatus are always turned toward the bead of its-associ- ate. It is thus enabled to join in all the expeditions of the restless hermit crab and conveniently share in the common plunder. In return. for this service the anemone protects its companion from his many enemies by means of the numerous long threads which it shoots out at the least alarm, and which are provided with millions of capsules charged with a stinging acid like that of the common nettle. So close is the compact entered into by the two partners that both have become indispensable to each other,” and, ‘if the crab be removed from his house, and this be stopped up so as to prevent his re-entering it, he will cast about for another shell, and never stop until his old associate is also transferred to their new abode.” Many similar cases of symbiosis of actinians and decapod crustaceans are now known, and the relation- ship is probably as intimate in almost all cases as the one studied. (Am. Nat., XVIII, pp. 83, 84.) Paes TNS P ZOOLOGY. 589 Il, PROTOZOANS. Sporozoans. A new Sporozoan type.—In 1883 Dr. A. Schneider described a new type of Sporozoans to which he gave the name Ophryocystis butschlii. Later studies have not only confirmed the distinetness of the form, but revealed characteristics so different from those manifested by others of the class, as to have impelled the author to distinguish it as the type of “a new order of Amcebosporidia.” The Amcebiform stage is very ver- satile in its phases and has “a facies altogether different to that of any known Sporozoan ;” there is “a large number of nuclei,” and in this respect it presents an analogy “to certain Ameebina, and distantly to the Myxosporidia.” WORMS. Rotifers. Classification of Rotifers.—A new classification of the Rotifers has been proposed by Dr. C. T. Hudson, who, it is understood, has been for some time engaged in company with Mr. H. P. Gosse on a monograph of the class. Twelve families are recognized and defined, and these are segregated under four groups called “ orders” and distinguished chiefly by the mode of progression. At first sight this might seem to be an unsafe guide, and it remains to be seen whether it will stand the test of critical analysis. The ordinal characters and families are as follows: “ORDER I, RuIzoTa,” including fixed forms, with the foot attached, ieee wrinkled, non-retractile, and truncate. Family 1, Flosculariide. Family 2, Melicertide. “ ORDER II, BDELLOIDA,” including Rotifers “that swim and creep like a leech,” with the ‘foot retractile, jointed, telescopic,” and with its “ termination furcate.” Family 3, Philodinide. “ORDER III, PLoma,” composed of Rotifers “ that only swim.” Tiloricated. Family 4, Hydatinide. Family 5, Synchetide. Family 6, Notommatide. Family 7, Triarthride. Family 8, Asplanchnide. Loricated. Family 9, Brachionide. Family 10, Pterodinide. Family 11, Euchlanide. “ ORDER IV, SCIRTOPODA,” embracing * Retifers that swim with their ciliary wreath,-and skip by means of hollow limbs with internal locomotor muscles. Family 12, Pedalionide.” (Quart. Journ. Mic. Se., XX1V, pp. 335-356; J. It. M. 8. (2), IV, pp. 748-750.) Platyhelminths. Free-living Nematoids.—The free-living fresh-water Nematoids of the Dutch fauna have been investigated by Mr. J. G. de Man, conservator of the zoological museum of Leyden, and the results published in a spe- 598 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. cial monograph. These worms are not easily found; to obtain them, it is necessary to dig with a knife into moist ground, and especially to seek for therm about the roots of trees. The fresh-water species are generally found among the leaves of plants, filaments of alge, or confervee, while others are met with in the muddy bottoms of ponds and brooks. A rare human Tapeworm.— At least eight species of tapeworms or intestinal worms of the family Teniide have been found in the human body in varying numbers. Of course, the most common are the Tenia solium and the Tenia mediocanellata, the former being derived ordinarily from pork, aud the latter from beef. There is one species of the tamily —the Tenia (Hymenolepis) flavopunctata—that has only once been found ‘in the intestines of man. It was in 1858 that Dr. Weinland discovered some specimens discharged by a child in Boston. Dr. Leidy recently, obtained evidences of the same species expelled from a child three years old by a dose of santonin; the specimens, consisting of a dozen fragments, appeared to be portions of three worms, which reached a leneth of from twelve to fifteen inches or more. Unfortunately the head was lost, but enough remained to identify the species. ‘¢ The mature eggs are spherical, measure some 0.072 millimeter in diameter, and contain, fully developed, six hooked embryos.” Although so rarely met with, it was thought by Dr. Leidy to be probable that the worm is more common than would be supposed from the rare instances of its observation, and that it has generally escaped notice only ‘from its small size, and from the general ignorance of the distinction, not only of this, but of the ordinary species of tape- worms.” Nothing is known respecting the life history of the worm or its other hosts. (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phila., 1884, p. 137.) Nematelminths. The origin of the eggs and, sperm of Ascaris. — The direction of the studies of zoologists nowadays is well illustrated by several very elab- orate memoirs on the genesis of the eggs and sperm in the common intestinal thread-worm of the horse (Ascaris megalocephala). One by Dr. E. Van Beneden on the ovum and its fertilization takes up 375 pages; another, by Van Beneden and Julin, on the spermatogenesis, is 30 pages long; and another, also on the spermatogenesis, by Dr. P. Hallez, is 3 pages long. The most important of these memoirs is pub- lished in the Archives de Biologie (Iv, pp. 265-640, with 1 pl.). Annelids. An Aierican fresh-water Worm.—In certain rivers of Eastern Amer- ica, beyond the inflow of salt or brackish water, is found a species of tube-making chtobranch worm which is closely related to certain sea- worms, aud which has no known relation in fresh waters elsewhere. ZOOLOGY. 599 This was first described hy the great American naturalist, Dr. Leidy, and has recently been the subject of renewed examination by two other naturalists of Philadelphia, Miss Sara G, Foulke and Mr. Edward Potts. The tentacular crown, or branchial organ, is considered by Miss Foulke to be the feature of special interest. : “According to Dr. Leidy, the tentacles present in an adult are eighteen in number, besides two larger and longer tentacles situated midway - between the two lophophores. These larger tentacles are conspicuous by their bright green color, and are, in fact, external continuations of the blood- vessels extending lengthwise throughout the body. In shape these tentacles taper from base to apex; are convex on the outside, but concave on the side which faces the center of the tentacular crown, so that a transverse section would present the shape of a crescent. The two edges thus formed are fringed with cilia. When closely watched, the green tentacles are seen to pulsate with a rhythmical motion, con- tracting and expanding longitudinally. The pulsation takes place in each tentacle alternately. “At the moment of contraction the tentacle turns slightly on its axis, outwards and towards the end of the lophophore on that side, at the same time giving a backward jerk, returning to its former position at the moment of expansion. ‘* By force of the contraction, the green blood filling the tentacle 1s forced downward out of the tentacle, and flows along the blood-vessel on that side of the body. On the expanding of the tentacle, the blood. instantly returns and suffuses it, and thus the process goes on.” Mr. Potts’s observations were chiefly devoted to the manner in which the worm takes its food. Although the crown of the tentacles imparts to the worms some re- semblance toa polyzoan, * there is a noticeable difference in the effect pro- duced by the motion of their cilia. In the latter a powerful incurrent bears food particles, &c., towards the mouth as a vortex; in the former case, while the motion draws these particles from without or behind the circle towards the tentacles, the moment they pass between them they are influenced by an excurrent bearing them forcibly away. This out- flowing current is further shown by the fact that excrementitious mat- ters are drawn rapidly forward through the tube, and ejected at its anterior extremity. “ As food, therefore, cannot be sucked into the mouth of the worm, we find thatit is carriedin. Acceptable particles which touch the tentacles are grasped by the cilia, and rapidly passed down among them in near contact with the tentacle into grooves at the base of the above-men- tioned processes, and thence into the digestive tract.” Mr. Potts was also fortunate enough to be able to study the worm in the act of building a tube. In its earliest stages, the tube ‘‘is a transparent, smooth, and homo- geneous slime-like excretion, within which the worm may be very clearly 2 600 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. seen, as it works its way forward or drags itself backward by means of its podal hooks and spines. Later on, the anterior extremity thickens and becomes more and more opaque, and, as Dr. Leidy has observed, ‘feebly annulated,’ presumably from the adherence of effete particles, and their compression by the repeated withdrawal of the ciliated tenta- cles into the mouth of the tube. This methed of prolongation must con- tinue during the residence of the worm, and in consequence, if supported, it may sometimes reach a length which is several times that of its inhab- itant.”. (Proc. Acad. Nat. Se. Phila., 1884, pp. 48, 49, 21, 22.) Earth-worms in New Zealand.—The extensive modifications which the boring and concomitant habits of earth-worms effect upon the land, have become familiar through the work of Darwin on those humble animals. The surprising results effected by worms on ordinary English land might be made, according to the estimate of Darwin, by an army consisting of an average of about 26,886 to the acre. Later, Henson, from observations conducted in Germany, estimated that in favorable lo- calities about twice as many as were calculated for by Darwin (53,767) existed in garden grounds, while in green fields the number would closely approximate that presented by the great English naturalist. The abun- dance of a New Zealand species has recently been brought to light, and Mr. A. T. Urquhart gives, as the result of his investigations, to an acre of pasture land near Auckland, the large number of 348,480 worms as found therein; and on his results being challenged, even this number was greatly increased by subsequent experience. A piece was “laid out into squares of 120 feet, and a square foot of soil was taken out at each corner; worms hanging to the side walls of the holes were not counted, and in one hole, where the return of worms was a blank, the walls were crowded with worms.” As the result, there was an average of 18 worms per square foot, or 784,080 worms per acre. Although this average is in number so striking, when compared with those of Darwin and Henson, the difference between the actual weight of the worms is very much less in proportion. ‘According to Henson, his average of 53,767 worms would weigh 356 pounds, while Mr. Urquhart finds that the average weight of the number found by him came to 612 pounds 9 ounces,” or less than twice the aggregate of the German percentage. The value of the observations on the New Zealand worms would have been much enhanced had their relationship been determined. (Trans. New Zealand Inst., v. 26; Nature, v. 31, p. 23.) Myzostomids. The species of Myzostomids.—More than forty years ago Prof. F.S. Leuckart discovered certain singular organisms parasitic on the-arms of the crinoid known as Antedon rosacea, which were recognized as two species of a previously unknown type, ain which received from him the generic name Myzostoma; one of the species was called UM, glabrum and ZOOLOGY. GOL the other M. cirriferum. The relations of this type to other animals have been involved in doubt, and various discrepant opinions have been entertained respecting its proper systematic position, The Myzostomids are minute disk-like animals, sometimes almost per- fectly round and with markings recalling the marks on the face of a watch. They are parasitic on Crinoids. The question of their relation- ships has recently been discussed by Dr. L. von Graff and Dr. J. Beard. Dr. von Graff thinks that they are related to the Tardigrades, and in- deed proposes to take that group, as well as the Linguatuloids, from the Arachnids and combine them with the Myzostomids in a special class, which he names Stelechopoda. Dr. Beard had the opportunity to study the embryology of the type and has been led to consider them as chatopod worms which have be- come degenerate through parasitism. The collections of the Challenger expedition of Crinoids were examined for these parasites, and a large number of new species were thus ob- tained. Of sixty-eight species detected on the Challenger Crinoids, fifty- two were new, and one of these was the type of a very peculiar family named Stelechopodide. (Rep. Voyage Challenger, Zool., v.10; Nature, v. 31, pp. 165,166; Mitth. Zool. Stat. Neapel, Vv. 5, pp. 544-580, 2 pl.; J. kh. M. 8. (2), V. 5, pp. 66-69.) 5 ARTHROPODS. Crustaceans. The stomach of stalk-eyed Crustaceans.—The stomach of the podoph- thalmous or stalk-eyed Crustaceans and its approaches exhibit some interesting features, and especially in the armature by the stone-like ‘grinding pieces. The entire subject has been made the theme of study by M. F. Mocquard, and his investigations have not been limited to the stomachal armature, but have extended likewise to the muscles as well as the nerves. In every natural family, according to M. Moe- quard, the stomachal apparatus is, as a rule, disposed on some special plan which is typical for each of them. There is, in the first place, a distinction which is quite trenchant between the brachyurous and macrurous Crustaceans. In the former, there is a narrow triangular mesocardiac piece, and elongated horizontal pterocardiac ones, but in the latter, the mesocardiac piece is very wide and the pterocardiac ones short and almost vertical. The anomurans show, in this apparatus, the heterogeneous character of the group, for some are like the macru- rans and others like the brachyurans. Inthe brachyurans, the gastric skeleton, with but few exceptions, is quite uniform, but in the macrurans there is great diversity. The various modifications are of systematic importance, and in many cases may give essential help in determining the relations of the various forms. As an instance, onevof the results reached by M. Moequard may be noticed. Ocypodide are divided into 602 "SCIENTIFIC RECORD. FOR 1884. two groups, one restricted to the “*Ocypodiacea,” and the other com- prising the Gelasimi and related genera as well as the Pinnotherians. Whether such a combination is natural may be questioned, but a re- newed examination of the detailed structure of the several types may be demanded as the result of the investigation. The muscles of the stomach and its armature are described in con- siderable detail, both in respect to their connections and functions. The median tooth is advanced forward and the two lateral pieces are approximated at their anterior extremities. The median tooth is lodged | in an angle between the lateral, and all together are worked for a see- ond to grind the food taken in, then there is relaxation, and then again a’ new contraction, and so on. ~The urocardiae piece serves to maintain the food in the special region. M. Moecquard thinks that these move- ments are not reflex, but voluntary, as Cuvier had already contended. The muscles which work the gastric pieces are innervated by nerves issuing from the stomatogastric. The functions of this are analogous to those of the sympathetic nerve, and are complex; in one place it is subservient to sensation and involuntary movements, and it also regulates voluntary movement as of the labrum and cesophagus ; per- haps even it has filaments of special sensibility. Several questions of this kind are left in doubt, and M. Moequard disclaims having ex- hausted the subject. (Revue Scientifique, t. XXXIV, pp. 204, 205.) : Peculiarities of deep-sea Crustaceans.—In asummary of the ‘‘Crustacea of the Albatross dredgings in 1883,” Prof. Sidney I. Smith has enunci- ated some generalities respecting the characteristics of the deep-sea crustaceans. A striking characteristic is their red or reddish color. “A few species are apparently nearly colorless, but the great majority are some shade of red or orange,” and he had met with ‘‘no evidence of any other bright color.” A few species “from between 100 and 300 fathoms are conspicuously marked with scarlet or vermilion, but such brighter markings were not noticed in any species from below 1,000 fathoms. Below this depth, orange red of varying intensity, is ap- parently the most common color, although in several species the color was an excessively intense dark crimson.” The eyes of the abyssal species are even more remarkable than their colors. In sixteen species especially examined, the eyes were present in the normal position, and distinctly faceted. In six they were well developed, but smaller than in average prawns, and of a black color. In one the eyes were ‘black, but conspicuously smaller than in the allied shallow-water species.” In another they were ‘black, and of moderate size”; and in still another they Were “apparently black, or nearly black, and small.” In one they were “nearly colorless in alco- holic specimens, and rather larger than usual in the genus, but con- siderably smaller” than in related species found at less depth. In three they were “not conspicuously different in size from those of allied shal- atk rs | ZOOLOGY. 603 low-water species, and are dark brown.” Professor Smith, from these data, concludes that, ‘“showever strong may be the arguments of the physicists against the possibility of any light penetrating the depths from which these animals come, the color and strength of their eyes, as compared with blind cave-dwelling species, show conclusively that the depth beneath 2,000 fathoms of sea-water is very different from that of ordinary caverns. While it may be possible that this modification of the darkuess of the ocean abysses is due to phosphorescence of the animals themselves, it does not seem probable that it is wholly dua to this cause.” Another feature characteristic of the deep-sea crustaceans is the large size of the eggs, which becomes a very marked feature in many of the deep-water decapods. The largest crustacean eggs known to Professor Smith are those of “ Parapasiphaésulcati/rons, a slender shrimp, less than three inches long, taken between 1,000 and 3,000 fathoms. Alcoholic specimens of these eggs are fully 4 or 5 inillimeters in shorter and longer - diameter, fully ten times the volume of the eggs of Pasiphaé tarda from 100 to 200 fathoms, more than three hundred and fifty times the volume of those of a larger shallow-water Palemon, and each one more than a hundredth of the volume of the largest individual of the species.” Pro- fessor Smith concludes that “from the peculiar environment of deep- water species, it seems probable that many of them pass through an abbreviated metamorphosis within the egg, like many fresh-water and terrestrial species, and these largecggs are apparently adapted to pro- ducing young of large size, in an advanced stage of development, and specially fitted to live under conditions similar to those environing the adults.” These conclusions of Professor Smith appear to be highly probable, and are consonant with the facts observed in fishes. In those forms of the class which do not take any care of theireggs, the number of eggs is extremely large, while in those which guard the eggs or young, they are very much reduced in number but increased in size. (Am. Jour. S.., (3), Vv. 28, pp. 53-56.) Arachiids. An ancient Scorpion.—The oldest of the scorpions until lately known were inhabitants of the earth in the Carboniferous epoch. Two of the four described types were the results of American investigations; but during the past year several examples of a species were obtained from Upper Silurian rocks in Europe. One specimen was found by Pref. Gus- tav Lindstrém, in the Swedish island of Gothland. It was in a good con- dition of preservation and showed the “chitinous brown or yellowish brown cuticle, very thin, compressed and corrugated by the pressure of the superposed layers.” The different segments, “ the ceplalothorax, the abdomen, with seven dorsal laminuee, and the tail, consisting of six seg- ments or rings, the last narrowing and sloping into the venomous dart,” 604 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. could all be distinguished. The surface of the back was sculptured by tubercles and longitudinal keels corresponding with those developed in recent species. ‘‘One of the stigmata on the right is visible, and clearly demonstrates that it must have belonged to an air-breathing animal, and the whole organization indicates that it lived on dry land.” “In the conformation of this scorpion there is one feature of great impor- tance, namely, four pairs of thoracic feet, large and pointed, resembling the feet of the embryos of several other tracheates and animals like the Campodea. This form of feet no longer exists in the fossil scorpions of the Carboniferous formation, the appendices belonging to which resem- ble those found in the scorpions of our own day.” The form in question was named by Professor Lindstrém Palewophoneus nuncius, and is “ the most ancient” of all known “ land-animals.” Some time before the description by Professor Lindstrém of this new animal was published, Dr. Hunter, of Carluke, obtained a fossil scorpion also from the Upper Silurian, but in Scottish Lanarkshire, in June, 1883. It was not, however, until Professor Lindstrém’s description of the Swedish find appeared that Dr. Hunter recognized the importance of his own discovery. ‘‘ The rocks from which the Scottish example was ob- tained are the well-known Upper Silurian beds of Dunside, Logan Water, Lesmahagow, Lanarkshire, which have yielded such a magnificent suite of Eurypterids, and supplied a great part of the materials for Dr. Woodward’s work on the Merostomata. The animal in this specimen is about an inch and a half long, and lies on its back.on thestone. Its exposed ventral surface shows almost every external organ that can be seen in that position, and in this way seems to supplement the evidence supplied by the Swedish specimen. As inthe northern individual, the first and second pairs of appendages of the cephalothorax in the Scottish example are chelate, but the palpi are not quite so robust. The walk- ing-limbs, though not so dumpy as in P. nuncius, also terminate each in a single claw-like spike. The arrangement of the sternum shows a large pentagonal plate (metasternite) against which the wedge-shaped cox of the fourth pair of walking-limbs abut. The cox of the third pair bound the pentagonal plate along its upper margins, and meet in the mid line of the body, where they are firmly united. The coxe of the first two pairs, as well as the bases of the palpi, are drawn aside from the center line of the body, showing that, as in recent scorpions, these alone were concerned in mandueation, or rather the squeezing out of the juices of the prey. From the circumstance of these being drawn aside, the medial eyes are seen pressed up through the cuticle of the gullet, and a fleshy labrum (camerostome) appears between the bases of the chelicere.” The characteristics exhibited by these very old scorpions are such as to separate them quite widely from any of the recent types, and although evidently belonging to the same order, and thus related to the latter, they indicate a peculiar family, the Paleophoneide. Doubtless renewed ZOOLOGY. 605 searching for fossils in the Silurian rocks, and especially for terrestrial types, will be prosecuted, for such discoveries will serve as very eflicient stimulants. (Nature, v. 31, pp. 295-298.) Curious mimicry by a Spider.—A curious case of mimicry by a spider has been recorded by Mr. H. O. Forbes. The spider in question is found in Sumatra, and has been named Thomisus decipiens. On June 25, 1885, in a forest of Sumatra, Mr. Forbes’ attention was excited by his “ eyes resting on a bird-excreta-marked leaf” On examination it was found that the appearance was deceptive and had been produced by a spider which had so closely copied nature that the imitation would readily deceive the uncritical observer. ‘The spider is in general color white, spotted here and there with black; on the under side its rather irregu- larly shaped and prominent abdomen is almost all white—of a pure chalk white; the angles of the legs are, however, shining jet black. The spider does not make an ordinary web, but only the thinnest film on the surface of the leaf. The appearance of the excreta rather recently left by a bird on a leaf is well known. There is a pure white deposit in the center, thinning out round the margin, while in the central mass are dark portions variously disposed ; as the leaf is rarely horizontal, the more liquid portions run for some distance. Now, this spider, one might almost imagine to have in its rambles marked and inwardly discerned what it had observed, and had set about practicing the wrinkles gained; for it first weaves a small irregular patch of white web on some prominent leaf, then a narrow streak laid down towards its sloping margin, ending in a small knob. It then takes its place on the center of the irregular spot on its back, crosses its black-angled legs over its thorax and waits. Its pure white abdomen represents the central mass of the bird’s excreta, the black legs the dark portions of the slime, while the web above described represents the more watery marginal part (become dry), even to the run-off portion with the thick- ened knob (which was not accidental, as it occurred in both cases), like the residue which semi-fluid substances, ending in a drop, leave on evaporation. It keeps itself in position on its back by thrusting under the web below it the spines with which the anterior upper surface of the legs is furnished.” The most interesting fact of all, in the opinion of Mr. Forbes, is * not so much that of the spider having gained, which it ean, of course, have no consciousness of, by natural selection, the color and form of an ex- cretum, but that it has acquired the habit of supplementing its own color and form by an addition in such absolute harmony with that of which itself is the similitude.” This species, on being re-examined by the Rey. O. P. Cambridge, the distinguished arachnologist, was considered to represent a peculiar genus which was named Ornithoscatoides, from its simulation of a bird’s excreta, Further, Mr. Cambridge recognized in various collectious 606 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1284. ; four species of the genus, all of which inhabit India and the neighbor- ing islands. It seemed to Mr. Cambridge that the whole phenomenon described is ‘easily explained by the operation of natural selection, without supposing consciousness in the spider in any part of the pro- cess. The web on the surface of the leaf is evidently, so far as the ~ spider has any design or consciousness in the matter, spun simply to secure itself in the proper position to await and seize its prey. The silk, which by its fineness, whiteness, and close adhesion to the leaf causes it to resemble the more fluid parts of the exereta, would grad- ually attain those qualities by natural selection, just as the spider itself would gradually, and probably part passu, become under the in- fluence of the same law, more and more like the solid portion.” (Proe. Zool. Soc. London, 1883, pp. 586-588, pl. 51; 1884, p. 196-203, pd. 15.) Insects. The mouth parts of suctorial Insects.—In connection with a memoir on the systematic position of the Pulicide, Dr. Karl Kiiipelin has discassed the structure of the mouth parts not only of the Fleas, but of tbe forms with which they have been associated by other authors, the Diptera and Hemiptera, and the results are of considerable systematic impor- tance. It is found that the suctorial insects segregate themselves into two primary groups. In one, consisting of the Hymenoptera and Lep- idoptera, the suctorial organs are characterized by the lower parts of the mouth, maxille and labium, being employed in the formation of a sucking apparatus, while in another group, represented by the Diptera, Siphonaptera, and Rhynchota, it is almost exclusively the upper parts, labium and mandibles, that are implicated in the formation of the true food canal. The characteristics of the mouth parts of the three orders of the latter section are thus diagnosed by Dr. Kriipelin: (1) Diptera.—* Insects with perfect metamorphosis. ° Head free, with facetted eyes. Sucking-tube formed by a dorsal and a veutral half- channel (labruin and hypopharynx), more or less inclosed throughout its length by the labium, which is bent up like a sheath, and furnished with uniarticulate apical palpi. Mandibles deficient or styletiform, pushing in between the labrum and hypopharynux. Maxille, when pres- ent, with palpi. Salivary efferent duct an unpaired closed canal in the interior of the hypopharynx. A ‘sucking-stomach. Thoracic segments amalgamated, usually with a pair of wings and a pair of halteres.” (2) Siphonaptera.—< Insects with perfect metamorphosis. Head at- tached to the thorax by a wide surface, without facetted eyes. Buccal organs suctorial. Sucking-tube formed by a dorsal and two lateral channels (labrum and mandibles), its anterior section only more or less inclosed laterally by the mulitiarticulate terminal palpi of the labium, and at the base, besides the latter, by the lamelliform palpigerous max- ile. Salivary efferent ducts paired, developed as a channel along the inner surface of the mandibles. No ‘sucking-stomach,” Thoracic seg- Lee Ce re ke aa be ior rey Ne RET Tr Ames rh an” ee EVR ee ATO npT tom, a, ZOOLOGY. GOT meuts free, Without wings and halteres, with pleural processes upon the ‘last two segments.” (5) Rynchota.—* Insect usually with imperfect metamorphosis. Head free or broadly united to the thorax, with or without facetted eyes. Bueeal organs usually suctorial. Sucking-tube (in the higher groups) composed of two lateral balf-channels (the mandibles), only in the anterior portion inclosed by the labium and its apical multiarticulate palpi, which are united nearly to the apex; atthe base by the labrum. Maxille styliform, without palpi, applied laterally to the mandibles in the channel of the labium or the labrum. Salivary efferent duct un- paired, formed by two half-channels of the mandibles closing together from the sides. No ‘sucking-stomach. Thoracic segments free or amalgamated. Four, two, or no wings; no halteres.” Relations of the Embioid Insects.—In a contribution to our knowledge of the Embiide, a family of Orthopterous insects, Mr. J. Wood-Mason has added to our knowledge by describing the various phases of devel- opment of some /'mbiide, and expresses his opinion as to the relations of those curious insects. The Lmbiida, he thinks, ‘undoubtedly belong to the true Orthoptera,” but they are ‘in some respects the lowest term, and in others the lowest term but one, of a series represented by the famities Acridioidea, Locustide, Gryllida, and Phasmatide ;” their “resemblances to the much lower Perlide, which may well be direct de- scendants of a form closely related to Campodea, are due to their low position in the division of Orthopterous insects to which they belong, and do not imply any such close genetic relationship to them as has been suggested.” (Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1883, pp. 628-634, pl. 66.) MOLLUSCOIDS. Polyzoans. Morphology of Flustra.—The investigation of the marine Bryozoans has been undertaken by W. J. Vigelius, who proposes to publish a monograph on the subject. A treatise on the morphology of Flustra membranaceo-truncata is a precursor of and an introduction to the work. The Flustre corroborate the dictum that the mode of growth of the Bryozoan stock is of no value as a means of distinguishing families, for which it has often been used. The nutrient animal and the avicularium are alone distinctly differentiated individuals, for the brood-capsules are simply organs. The nutrient animals may be (1) budding, found on the marginal zone of the colony ; (2) perfect or re- productive forms; (3) resting; and (4) decaying. The last two are only found near the proximal part of the stock, and are much rarer than the others. ‘The cystid and polypid makeup the complete nutrient animal, and in the normal condition consist of integument, nutrient apparatus, and parenchymatous tissue,” No nervous system has been distinctly 608 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. recognized, but it is supposed that “its center is perhaps represented by the small rounded mass of cells which lies on the anal side of the an- terior wall of the pharynx.” Spermatoblasts are * derived from the re- peated sulidivision of the spermatophores, but they do not form rounded or oval masses of regularly arranged cells placed on a nutrient blasto- phore”; when they become converted into spermatozoa they are at first pyriform, and only Jater does the tail arise at the narrow end and become of some length. The histolysis of the digestive tract was investigated, and to the brown body is attributed a nutrient function. The cystid and polypid are parts of a single individual, as is proved by the history of the process of germination as well as by the organization of the complete nutrient animal. The perigastric space is regarded as a true celon, but the polyzoa are claimed to be pseudo-celia. (Biol. Centralblatt, 111, pp. 705-721; dhe MS. (2) pL po oc) Brachiopods. Anatomy of Argiope.—Several species of Argtope have been dissected and studied within the last two years by Dr. A. E. Shipley and Dr. A. Schulgin, the former having worked at Naples on the A. Neapolitana and A. cuneata, and the latter on the A. Kozalevskii. The brachial appendages, to which in typical Terebratulids the gills are attached, are Wanting in Argiope. There is, according to Schulgin, a feebly de- veloped subcesophageal ganglion overlooked by Shipley, who mistook the external sensory for the central nervous system., The relationships of the Brachiopods are considered by both authors. Dr. Shipley accepted essentially the views of Professor Gegenbaur. (See S. I. Report for 1883.) Dr. Schulgin thought it “probable that the Polyzoa and Brachiopoda arose from a side branch or phylum, which also gave rise to Annelids,” and they may be ‘grouped together under the class of Vermoidea.” (Zeitschr. f. Wis. Zool., V. 41, pp. 116-141, 2 pl.; J. &. M.S. (2), Vv. 5, pp. 49, 50.) MOLLUSKS. Acephals. A new Classification of Bivalve Shells —Much dissatisfaction has been expressed with all the current arrangements of the Acephals, or bivalve mollusks, and Dr. M. Neumayr has proposed a new one which he thinks has some advantages compared with the others. The shells are considered from a paleoutological point of view, and the data derived from paleontology being co-ordinated with those obtained from a study of the hinge of the shell, Dr. Neumayr was led to segregate all the known forms into three orders, all differing from those of his predeces- sors, and to which he has given new names. The definitions of the groups, as rendered in English by Dr. von Martens, are as follows: “Ord.1. PALaoconcH &, or Cryptodonta. Shell thin, without teeth, wr i | Pe ee ee Oe CTW eS = ‘ — a? Se A ——s Cow eee ee eM ZOOLOGY. G09 or only with feeble indications of them in the hinge; two equal muscu- lar impressions; pallial line entire. Palaeozoic. “Ord.2. Desmoponara. Teeth of the hinge none or irregular, con- nected with the ligamental processes; two equal muscular impressions ; pallial line sinuated. Pholadomyide, Corbulida, Myide, Anatinida, Mactride, Paphiide, Glycymerida, (?) Solenide, and all Tubicola. “Ord.3. TAXODONTA. Teeth of the hinge numerous, not differen- tiated, in a straight, arcuated or angular row; two equal muscular im- pressions. Arcidc, Nuculide. “Ord.4. Hrreroponra. Teeth of the hinge few, distinctly separated as cardinal and lateral, alternating, exactly filling the pits of the op- posite valve; two equal muscular impressions. Unionide, Cardiniide, Astartida, Crassatellide, Megalodontida, Chamide, Tridacnide, Eryci- nide, Lucinide, Cardiide, Cyrenide, Cyprinide, Veneride, Gnathodon- tide, Tellinide, Donacide. The Trigoniide will form a distinct sub- order. . ‘ “Ord. 5. ANISOMYARIA, or Dysodonta. Teeth of the hinge none or irregular; two very inequal or only one muscular impression; pallial line entire. (a) Heteromyaria: Aviculide, Mytilide, Prasinide, Pinnide. (b) Monomyaria: Pectinide, Spondylide, Anomiide, Ostreide.” (Zoological Record, 1883, pp. 86 and 87, Aoll.) Dr. von Martens, certainly a most competent judge, has expressed the opinion that this classification “has several advantages in com- parison with hitherto accepted classifications: (1) the distinction of a limited number of natural types, instead of an artificial separation into Monomyaria and Dimyaria, or Asiphonida and Siphonida; (2) the union of the Heteromyaria and the Monomyaria into one common chief di- vision;” and (3) ‘the constitution of a special chief division for the Arcidz and Nuculide, as these families offer very peculiar characters as well in the shells as in the gills and foot.” The present recorder is unable to appreciate any superiority of the new arrangement over that based on the muscles, and there are cer- tainly more exceptions of the contents of the so-called *‘ orders” to their diagnoses than in the case of the groups defined by the muscles. As Dr. Paul Fischer has already remarked (Journ. Conch., ¥. 24, p. 121), a single family (the Unionide) has representatives not only deviating from the diagnosis of the including “ order” (Heterodonta), but exhibit- ing characters assigned to two others, Anodonta recalling the Paleo- conch or Cryptodonta, and Pleiodon the Taxodonta. Undoubtedly Dr. Neumayr knew of these exceptions and regarded the forms and questions as derivatives from the normal Heterodonta. But the dif ferences from the type and assumption of characteristics of others nevertheless exist. Tor this, if for no other reason, the value of sueh characters for orders is nullified. There 1s also a want of co-ordination between the hinge structure and modifications of other parts which S. Mis. 33-——39 610 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 18384. casts suspicion on the value of the former. There are likewise many other failures than those mentioned of constituents of groups to embody the requisites of the diagnoses of such groups. On the whole, then, we cannot concede that the new arrangement is superior to those that have preceded. It is, nevertheless, of some value as an incentive to further study of the subject, in order to test the value of various propositions. , The Eyes of Bivalve Mollusks.—If the edges of the mantle of even our common bivalve mollusks, such as the oyster, the hard clam, and the soft clam, are very closely examined, specks may be found which prove to be rudimentary eyes. These organs have been recently examined by Dr. Benjamin Sharp, of Philadelphia, who has studied them in the oyster, the hard clam, the soft clam, the common mussel (Jytiius edulis), the big clam (Mactra solidissima), and two razor-fishes (Solen ensis and Solen vagina). The pigmented cells found in these parts are essentially the same in all. The smallest of the cells were found in the oyster, and the largest in the hard clam. Experiments. on these forms show their sensitiveness to light and shadow, and the cells showing the retinal character described leaves little doubt as to the power of vision, No nerves could be demonstrated passing direct to these cells, and proba- bly those distributed to the general epidermis serve in transmitting the impressions. The visual power is so low that nerves have not yet been specialized for this purpose.” (Proc. Acad. Nat. Se. Phila., 1884, p. 10). The Greening of Oysters and its Cause.—There is always a reason or the appearance of a reason for a given phenomenon engendered by popular opinion, and one was devised to explain the cause of the green color so prevalent in the British oysters especially. The reasoning in this case was very facile. Oysters are green; copper in oxidization becomes green. Therefore the green color of oysters is due to the absorption of copper; conse- qently the bottom of the sea, or the sea itself, is pregnant with copper. The oysters have a “‘coppery taste,” and thus give proof of the exist- ence of copper. Science doubted and suggested explanations, but not until lately has the question been approached in a severe critical and experimental man- ner. An old suggestion was then proved to be practically correct. The most recent and skilled of the inquirers into the cause and origin of the greening of the oysters are Mr. Puységur, an assistant commissioner of the navy department of France, and Mr. John A. Ryder, of the United States Commission of Fish and Fisheries. Mr. Puységur has recalled the history of conjecture and research on the cause of the green color of oysters and given the results of his own investigations. He tested the popular view that the color was the result of suffusion with copper. Even a meritorious chemist, Mr. Gaillard, had found cop- ———— ———_______ ane a a ee er ee 7 ZOOLOGY. | 611 per in oysters. But Mr. Gaillard, from scientific considerations, himself concluded that this was’ because some process was fraudulently em- ployed to color the oysters, and that it consisted merely in immersing them in a solution of a salt of copper, and leaving them in it till they were saturated by it. “Mr. Puységur sought by experiment to ascertain whether copper was absorbable by the mollusk, and found that— 1, “An oyster which is placed in'a bath of sulphate of copper is not colored at all.” 2. “Death quickly follows when they are plunged into such a mix- ture.” He did not deny that chemists may have found copper in oysters, but his own direct experiments did not verify the absorption of the metal by the animals. * Copper, then, being out of the question, he sought to learn what was the cause. . Various observations and experiments were instituted, for a detail of which reference must be made to the original memoir of the author. His conclusions are thus summarized : “There remains no longer any doubt as to the fact that the viridityof oysters is entirely due to the absorption or digestion of the soft parts of the Navicule held in suspension by the surrounding water; this definite experience also completely overturns the hypotheses which attribute it to the influence of the soil, to the mixture of fresh and salt water, to northeast winds; in a word, all the other conjectural causes to which this simple phenomenon has been childishly attributed are shown to be inadequate. “Tt is evident, moreover, that the coloring matter is directly absorbed by the mollusks, and that the process takes place inside of the animals. If, in fact, dissolution of the coloring matter tovk place in sea-water, the water would be tinged as soon as the diatoms were blanched. Now, this is not the case. In fresh water, on the contrary, the coloring mat- ter is immediately dissolved, and as a result the diatoms are blanched. A single drop of Water placed on a slide containing the diatoms causes them to lose their color instantly. | Finally, if a piece of filtering paper is saturated in the fresh water which has been placed on the diatoms, and it is afterwards dried, it will present absolutely the same color as the green oysters. ‘““These laboratory observations are, moreover, perfectly in accord with the phenomena observed by the oyster-culturists. Heavy rains cause the greenness, of the claires to disappear, and the dry and salt- Jaden northeast winds, which augment the saturation of the waters, are, .on the contrary, favorable to the production of the green coating in the claires.” Mr. Ryder supplemented Mr. Puységur’s researches by observations of his own. His investigations convinced him of the correctness of Mr, 612 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. Puységur’s conclusions. He had ascertained that the common Ameri- can oyster (Ostrea virginica) “is affected by an acquired viridity at cer- tain times and in certain places in precisely the same way as the com- mon O. edulis of Europe and the O. angulata of the Tagus,” as he had been able to learn from fresh material from Liverpool, obtained through the efforts of Professor Baird. ‘The cause of this peculiar staining of the soft parts of these animals is, therefore, very probably the same throughout both the European and the American oyster-growing re- gions.” Mr. Ryder further extended his studies to the florula of the water abeut the oyster beds and to the contents of the oyster’s stomach. He found the special oyster diatom (Navicula ostrearum) abundant, and also other diatoms, and has thus summarized his results: ‘Taking a survey of the lower groups of the vegetable world, which contain bluish-green pigments, and which are at the same time free- swimming in their habits, so as to place them within reach of the sta- tionary oyster as food, there is none which actually seems more likely to be the source of the green tinge here discussed than the Diatomacee. And as there is no other class of forms so commonly and constantly met with in the alimentary canals of marine mollusks generally, I think we might take it for granted, for this reason alone, that they are the souree of the coloration. In fact, it is rarely that I have met with any other vegetable organisms in the stomachs of oysters except diatoms, after having examined hundreds, by the excellent method of first re- moving the recently-swallowed contents of the gastric cavity with a pipette thrust into the mouth and through the short gullet. The ‘bill of fare’ of the animal can then be very deliberately studied under the microscope after the contents of the pipette have been pressed out upon and prepared for observation under a compressorium.” Mr. Ryder also endeavored to ascertain the elementary nature of the green thus dissolved out of the diatomaceous food of the oyster. His investigations could not be completed, but were carried far enough to justifyanopiniop. This was that “thecoloring material in green oysters, on account of its solubility in water, its instability and color, is prob- ably allied to phycocyanin, since we know that it is not chlorophyll, because the latter is insoluble in water.” The spectroscope, however, gave him ‘entirely negative evidence upon this point.” Mr. Ryder concludes with the assurance that the belief or fear that green oysters are injurious or hurtfulis without foundation. (Ann. Rep. Com. Fish., &e., 1882, pp. 793-804, 1884.) The assumption of the Spat stage by the Oyster—The ‘ metamorphosis and the post-larval stages of the development of the oyster” have been studied and described by Mr. John A. Ryder. His memoir is a long one and gives details of his methods of investigation and his various observations. The results have been summarized by himself in the following terms: ZOOLOGY. ’ 6da “1, The mouth in the larval oyster is nearly ventral in position, while in the adult it opens more nearly in the direction of the hinge or towards the antero-dorsal region. “2. Theretractor muscles of the velum probably atrophy at the end of the larval period; if they are to be regarded as the musculature of the primitive mantle organ, they are replaced in the spat and adult by the radiating and marginal pallial muscles. “3. The intestine of the larva is a simple tubular organ; inthe spat it has an internal ridge developed on one side, which finally becomes a pronounced induplicature in the intestine of the adult. “4, The anterior adductor muscle of the larva is replaced by a per- manent posterior adductor in the spat and adult. (Huxley.) © 5, The heart and gills are wanting in the larva; they are developed as post-larval organs. The gills are at first represented by only two folds; the outer pair are developed later, and apparently from before, backwards, or dorso-ventrally. ‘“ 6. The connective tissue of the spat and adult, including the organs derived therefrom, seems to be almost entirely developed during post- larval life. “7, The blastocel is mostly obliterated by the development of the connective tissues. “© 8, The liver is represented by a pair of diverticula which grow out jaterally from the walls of the stomach of the larva; its subsequent development and subdivision into a vast number of follicles is accom- plished during post-larval life. ‘9, Sometime after fixation the larval oysterseems to lose thestraight hinge border of its valves, which then acquire umbones; the valves retain their symmetry up to the time when the spat shell begins to be formed, and it is probable that most of the larval characters of the animal have disappeared when the formation of the spat shell begins; in other words, the veliger stage is past and is at once replaced by a structual condition of the soft parts which approximates that observed in the adult.” (Ann. Rep. Com. Fish., for 1883, pp. 719-791, 1884.) A remarkable new Type of Mollusks.—All the acephalous mollusks hitherto known have distinct external valves on each side, although in some, such as in the ship-worms (Teredinids) and the watering pot shells (Aspergillids), the valves are extremely reduced; but in a form recently obtained from California, external valves are not at all ap- parent. When living, the animal is apparently of the “shape of a small globose Cyprea [or cowrie] of inflated ovoid form, and being translucent, jelly-like, dotted above with small rounded papilla, which appear of an opaque white on the general translucent ground.” When fresh, accord- ing to the discoverer of the specimens, Mr. C. R. Orcutt, the animal was “over an inch in length,” but the contraction in alcohol is such that the specimens, when received by Mr. C. H. Dall, were reduced to “less than half an inch in length.” 614, SCIENTIFIC RECORD, FOR 1884. The mantle which covers the dome of the sta is tough ros thiek; dian. line i is a little pies The basal ay of fee: aulabien eit in life is prolonged beyond the general mass. in a wide trough, with the convexity upward, and somewhat expanded ‘at its anterior extremity. About one-third of the way from the anterior end, the mantle is perfo- rated by an orifice, which pierces it.in the vicinity of the mouth. The edges of this orifice project from the general, surface, and it is lined with close-set small papille. At about the same distance from the posterior end is another tubular perforation, holding a similar relation to the anus ; which has, however, plain edges, and. is not internally papillose.” When the wnantle is open, the small valves, become apparent. These are “inclosed in two little saes in the substance of the, mantle. The umbones are near together, apparently connected by a brown gristle, resembling an abortive ligament, and are nearly over the heart. The valves are about ten millimetres long, and one millimetre wide, destitute of epidermis, prismatic or pearly layers. , There are no muscular or pallial impressions, no adductors, hinge, or,teeth.”.. They resemble in form the exterior of the shell called Gervillia, and have a pure white color. ‘‘As they lie in the body, they.diverge at a rather wide angle from the beaks, forward. The embryonic valves are retained like two tiny bubbles on the umbones.” The affinities of this new form are even doubtful. The classification — chiefly in vogue for the bivalve mollusks is based upon the number and relations of the adductor muscles of the shell, and Mr. Dall remarks that, if such classification is retained, the new form should be distin- guished as the representative of a distinct order, which might be called “Amyaria.” He doubts the propriety of such a separation, however, but very properly claims that it,is the type of anew family, which. he calls Chlam ydoconcher, and which would be, generally named, with. the ordinary family termination, Chlamydoconchide. The species is named. after its discoverer, Mr, C. R. Oreutt. It is evident, observes Mr. Dall,. that ‘* the genus does nothing. toward. bridging the gap between the gastropods and pelecypods [or bivalve mollusks], but is simply a remark- ably aberrant form of the latter-group, and probably derived from some form with an external shell. It is able, according to Mr. Orcutt, by sphincter-like contractions of the mantle, to. produce currents of water over the gills, which are, probably finally SiN by the anal tube.” (Science, IV, pp. 50, 51.) Gastropods. Lhe Operculum of Gastropods.—The development of the operculum of the Gastropods has been studied by F. Houssay on examples of Litiorina, Murex, and Purpura. ‘The foot alone is implicated in the formatién of. the operculum, but “only a small, very clearly defined portion of it.” Quite close to the margin of the operctilum which adjoius the columella when the length is restric/ed, a small transverse fissure was found which ZOOLOGY. 615 penetrated about a millimeter into the thickness of the columellar muscle and which oceupies the whole length of the foot. ‘The walls of this pedal fissure are lined with a peculiar epithelium, folded, or rather goffered, so as to somewhat resemble the polypary of a Mzandrina.” Then it has avery delicate and very flexible transparent lamella, which can be taken out with a fine needle, and which afterremaining some time in the airdries and acquires a horny appearance. It is found that “the epithelial cells of the fissure excrete a structureless material of a yellowish color and strongly refractive, which, by agglomeration, constitutes the hyaline lamella, The latter issues from the pedal fissure and adds itself to the old operculum.” ‘The newly-formed parts apply themselves to the epithelium situated between the fissure and the parts of the operculum which are already fixed. At this point the epithelial cells are but feebly adherent to each other, and only by their basal part, a remarkable exception among epi- thelia. From this it results that the still plastic opereular material in- vests these cells, and even diffuses itself somewhat among the elements of the subjacent tissues (muscular fibers and connective cells). It is thus that by suecessive appositions of new parts issuing from the pedal _ fissure the striz are formed, of which only the most salient are visible to the naked eye or the lens.” ‘“‘On the other surface of the operculum we must distinguish two re- gions, the surface of insertion of the columellar muscle, and the free internal surface. It is very easy to see that the free internal surface and the outer surface of the operculum have not the same constitution. The inner surface is covered with a homogeneous layer which forms, as it were, a varnish without any striz perceptible to the eye. This coat- ing may even be so thick that we cannot see through it the striz of the other surface. In other cases it is delicate enough not to hide them. This difference of constitution arises from a difference of origin. In front of the surface of insertion the metapodium forms an interior ex- pansion or lip, which, during the life of the animal, is constantly applied against the inner unattached part of the operculum. The epithelial cells of this anterior lip produce the varnish. “Jt still remains to ascertain why the opercular material is rolled into aspiral. To elucidate this point we must study the muscular impression. As the operculum grows, the surface of insertion of the operculum is dis placed with aslight movement of rotation, since during thesame time the shell grows in a spiral. The muscle attaches itself to the newly formed parts, abandoning the old parts on the side of the parietalmargin. These stages of the columellar muscle are marked: by strie independent of those of the superior surface. We observe them when preparing an operculum after removing all traces of muscle. By studying these lines we can even understand why there are opereula of which the form always remains the same, while there are others of which the form varies with the age of the animal. ‘The latter are said to have a nucleus 616 SCIENTIFIC. RECORD FOR 1884. of formation. The posterior secreting portion of the foot always retains the same form in the first case, whereas in the second we see it from nearly circular become almost straight.” (Comptes Rendus Acad. Sei., 1884, Jan. 28, p. 236; Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), x1, pp. 304-306; Arch. Zool, Hxpér. et Gén. (2), IV, pp, 869, 870; Rev. Sci., XXX1v, pp. 343, 344; J. Kh. M.S. (2), IV, pp. 869, 870.) Cephalopods. Development of the Gills in Cephalopods.—-The development of the gills in Cephalopods has, until recently, been but little, if at all, known. The subject was investigated in 1884 by M. L. Joubin. It seems from his investigations that “the brancbiz of the embryo make their appear- ance at the beginning of the development in the form of two small buds, situated symmetrically with relation to the antero-posterior plane upon the middle of what will eventually become the posterior wall of the pallial cavity. The bud, produced by a pushing force of the epithelial layer by the cells of the subjacent layer, soon elongates and ferms a small, well-differentiated eminence, rounded at the apex and attached by a broad base.” No vibratile cilia, such as line the pallial cavity, were detected. ‘The bud afterwards flattens so as to present two sur- faces: a posterior one, applied against the visceral mass, and an anterior one, which is subsequently covered by the mantle which bounds the re. spiratory cavity superiorly.” Upon this bittle lamina ‘‘a first horizontal fold appears towards the middle, then a second nearer to the point, then a third still nearer the free extremity, and so on. These folds form depressions upon one of the surfaces corresponding with elevations upon the other surface; the branchial bud has, therefore, become an undulated lamina; gradually other folds appear, always toward the point, while the whole organ at the same time increases in dimensions.” Of the vessels which form the branchia, “the one which conveys the blood to it appears early at the commencement of the formation of the laminz; it occupies nearly the center of the organ, and is comprised within the base of the laminz and the gland of the branchia, which is also distinctly marked at this period. The efferent vessel is formed upon the crest of the branchia and on the outer border of the lamina; it is undulated like the parts which bear it, and issues from the branchia at the base, to be continued by the auricle of the heart.” (Comptes Ren- dus Acad. Sci., 1883, Nov. 12, p. 1076; Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), X01, pp. 67-69.) PROTOCLORDATES. Tunicates. Development of Salpa.—Much has been written about the development and morphology of Salpa, but some obscurity still hangs over the sub- ject. The group has been investigated recently by Prof. W. Salensky, Sere ZOOLOGY. 617 who has examined four species—S. punctata, S. fusiformis, S. bicaudata, and S. democratica. The sum of his researches has been thus recorded in the Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society: **The developmental process of Salpa is so peculiar that it is very difficult to compare it with other known types of development; the fact that the follicular cells take a share in the production of the embryo (the process of de- velopment being therefore both sexual and asexual) is not, however, confined to this group. Lankester has described a very similar state of things in Cephalopoda, where the inner capsular membrane, the follicle itself, grows into the ovum and partly forms the nutritive yolk; recent researches also into the Vertebrata tend to show that the yolk is partly from the cells of the follicle. Salpa bicaudata appears to represent the most simple development of all the species, while further complications, such as the formation of a part of the embryo by cells of the oviduct, tend to remove other Salpe further from the normal mode of develop- ment exhibited in the animal kingdom.” (Jittheil. Zool. Stat. Neapel, Iv, pp. 327-102, 6 pl.; J. R. MW. S. (2), Iv, pp. 368, 369.) VERTEBRATES. Fish-like vertebrates British Fishes.—The work of Dr. Francis Day, on ‘The Fishes of Great Britain and Ireland,” has been lately completed, and in it we have an excellent résumé of what is known of the finny inhabitants of the home empire. The system and nomenclature as well as definitions of Dr. Giiuther are essentially adapted for the generic and supergeneric groups, and a full synonymy and description are given of each species; then follows information respecting the “names,” “habits,” * means of cap- ture,” “baits,” “breeding,” “life history,” “diseases,” “uses,” “as food,” and “ habitat” of the species if known or so far as known to the author. It may be of interest to compare the constitution of the British fauna with that of a limited region of Eastern America, and in the following tables the comparative data are given. The data in the work of Day for the British fishes, and Goode and Bean for the American, as given in “A List of the Fishes of Essex County, including those of Massachu- setts Bay,” are accepted for the species. To bring the information toa common denominator, the most recent systematic results of the Ameri- can ichthyologists (who are all in essential accord in this respect) are applied to the superspecific groups. The data are given (under family names adopted by American authors) as to (a) the number of species recorded from (1) Great Britain and (2) Massachusetts Bay, &c., (b) the number of genera represented in (3) Great Britain and (4) Massachu- setts, and (c) the (5) species and (6) genera shared in common by Great Britain and Massachusetts. The Massachusetts region is limited pur- posely in the tables to the waters north of Cape Cod, as the exhibit thus brings out best what are the features common to the two. The Cape | 618) SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. families represented south of the cape are, however, added and distin-. guished by italics (but without detailed information) to, indicate the. peculiarities of the western side of the Atlantic. The Bassalian forms, are omitted unless they have actually been caught near the shore. In; asmuch as very deep water occurs much nearer the British coast than the New England, considerably more deep-sea fishes have been found, on the British Bles than along the American. In the following tables those families whose names are . bracketed in one set in the margin are included in a single family by Dr. Day, under the name indicated by the letter (D); the families here adopted are as a rule more restricted than Dr. Day’s. In one case, however, as will appear by one of the notes, the constituents of one family are scattered among three by Dr. Day, who has followed Dr. Giinther. Species. Genera. Common. Class, order, suborder, and family. G.B.| M. ||G.B.| M. Sp. | Gen. ————_- | ——_—— E 4 CLASS OF LEPTOCARDIANS. Order Amphiozi. Branchiostomidz(CirrostomiD:))- 525.2222 cccsc. we Se » i ~ ZOOLOGY. Class, order, suborder, ‘and family. CLASS OF TELEOSTOMES OR FISHES. Order Chondrostei. BYOIMENSOLLORN( Ly aceceeadisdcccw que sce wehe case ceaccceem atone Order Malacopterygii. HORT 1 SE) ie gee | Mere ae ae a f bh Stasapch ator hon re TERE ees TRG T ATH BES: IER Ss Be Bel Se CE on ESR RES Pe eee ee Ce BESS TREAT AOS eA neh oc a teresa ob cao a8 erator rR SR (OUGHT TL, can GD A RFS Sense) Leah Bs ee oe neem emer te Pew A WIDTORUMILOLE) RP. 6 aS oc air dlic c 2 5 Na ee oe a oo oo BOR OPA Bas. Sk fe Se es od ciac a seen LER meet SAS ON TINIO oe Seems os wig th bc cin Aone = ep raped heen ett hen ae or } “toh rey Di Fe) eee ee | See ee ie ce ee See here See ees Salmonida (D.)........ Ne Ee ee Oe ee ee Sa we ea tie Order Iniomi. POLO MEY GNIGE (Dies den ea coe Sia a ois Re ott rcater eh ke Pare a Rad IMBnrGlooidsai(A)h =. es UES a a cw rednew Paralepididss (Stopelidss! D:) F...sc. bob 8 eo beara awe Order Plectospondyli. CyprEn1dss" (UD: astra Soe oreo eee aie oe be toe ercecicrer eter eens COPE iit Ce Eee: Ra BN ESS ae eae Be eer eee oe Be ca ay CatAstLOmid gaa oee mone abn oe aces aot erentoerce ei rere rerctes Order Nematognathi. Sy Va CES), Ue tar: or eee Mee I gah ke, SR Sie ae ae aes, Senne enemeen rene Order Apodes. (Suborder Enchelycephaili.) Won Dridselea how. seein crises enw we cqacien cates ceive Gemccaaeoasen tes AMI PTT IGH ee eae oe Ware nets be etienedee wees acne coer ; (Suborder Colocephali.) iy Fears 4 9G ETS) Ye ae sak I lg pal Spee ie teed Order Opisthomi. I OTARAT UCSD asc eee aA ae ae te tee acces seancemacs Order Teleocephali. (Suborder Haplomi.) “ ESOCId ss ())) AE a ccs ba pal owes ne crc dcee eas enneccecteeees UAROT UO nat eres oe ae ee Ae eras Pog ea oe oe abet ee ea etek oe OyprinouUntidsawc stesso cee Pel toc kak ewe eubace cceaan (Suborder Syrentognathi.) § Exocotids (Scombresocid#, D.)...--- 222-22. eee SAI G HICSS a tee AG ot a ec ek ee aoc cide Neel Hon or Gao co aoe (Suborder Percesoces.) Splryrienis | (10). <2 bese Waseda -lssnese. Nisei k Cee PAO des (Ts) B= Sco. Bsa aos Job hee taciw tows mweteccces cose Vion cesa OD: ee 2 28a ach es. ete sie bots sacumn don eercucnuee (Suborder Rhegnopteri.) TTR TEE ih Se BO ee een el, PROSE He ABO SE eRA RG CEOS amE se ET OOCENITA Nene = Sone che oso r Ses coke dos. Seaweeaeoansseeees f Pomatomida estas eed (D)? § Bramidxe Coryphenide (D)3 Pianta Tea(00) “ese a Sees ie ee ae ee ee aera see eee reer oh eye ar HCHO LIC cele feee moms centers cee ene cain urcescdccucswee ciao ee ; LO y ap tats eye? DG Tae ee Se ee ee eee Leth HES (00) RS A ae: RE SS ee nee eames es 5 8 619, Genera. j Common. Soo. om Species. i | sare peereret | G.B.| M. ||G.B.| M. || Sp. | Gen. ‘ses ey ell | a 1 2 1 1 1 } 5 6 3 4 1 3 1 1 1 1 0 1 2 1 2 1 0 1 1 ri ee 0 0 0 7 2 3 2 1 2 1 0 1 0 0 0 Lib - 3 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 14 5 10 5:||--- a 1 2 0 2 0 0 0 0 2 0 2 0 0 0 1 0 LH. sig 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 x Ct Ai} s3H19 1 0 | SUE | 80/07 3 1 3 PAP reg 1 1 1 1h 0 1 Dy eeed 0 0 2 1 1 i 0 2 1 1 1 0 1} 0 1 0 1 0 0 3 4 3 3 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 4.) ~~ 2 |le 8 2 1 1 7 6 5 5 5 4 1 O'ifhireond 0 0 0 1 Blox ed 1 1 1 'The genus Maurolicus was included by Day in the family Sternoptychidx. ?TIn the family Carangidw was also included by Day the genus Capros, type of the family Caproida related to the Zenidx. 3In the family Coryphenide were also included by Day the genera Lampris and Luvarus, types of very different families. 4Other species: f the family Stromateide are referred by Dr. Day to two other families, the Leirus pereiformis (Pammieas perciformis Day) being included with Carangidw and the Schedophitus meduso- phagus being placed in the family Coryphenida. 620 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 18984. - Class, order, suborder, and family. CLA88 OF TELEOSTOMES OR FISHES—Continued. Order Teleocephali—C ontinued. (Suborder Acanthopterygii)—Continnued. CLListiqphortid ce 2- om me scne sae Deore neta ela see etepainn eine nears Pe. Oh VPN Em 0) ecernes eee anne ee eee BIS sce eee : Zenid2 (Cyttide D) ©.-..--..-- Seats erent Garrod (Canangideigen. Way)ipe coset ecco enone eee iui-aride(Corypheemid pen Day) ee. boa ee cee ce en noone Lau. prididaw (Coryphsenida gen. Day) ....................----- DUR TATA Sie ee ae ae SEIS Sy See ar pe Ele i gm BY enn | { oO ay OU See nO SETS aaa eB Hae Bad aee Mobo: | POUL Coe coher cic ce ues ee ae od Aa ao Rt eee AACN CD a pitss saa nee cet ee ec eee ee eee oe ; Uranoscopide Batrachidwe. | -ce sed henat eee en ee ke Seizenidaan(Ds)ceoscwe sass ce eee a ae Meee ee OA eane eee Sparidcay(D) yess aaah ce ccacenc so cteee eee aes nae tines Sepa Bristipomid uaz easeinen eccee eee caene eee eee Risleie Same en ereaie TU ONG CB See See sa ened ca cere oN aoe eee ae ee ee (OCH ACAKT Le Aaa phe Seed aed a ee as Be tty oy ec rly UaR ee LR Slee mb tees eee GC Scorsese fr oipany ene aMmnt GR Bal oa oP, Ea DRaCIC Ss cee re eee Baia SiS e wens Se cae sete eee leBercidven (Ds) os eke cess ee eee to eae ee Re Eas lGeriacanthidspeseea-+ eee ees Mnllidsei(Di ees cene sf et a ett eae SL i eed tobi ol POM GCONH IAC. Soa ce ne eee eee nee ee ae Labridz (D.) yee (Ha) sarc esors erate See erence Oi rence eee, Se pen ang Hemitnipterida soto eats ceo ee a eee eee Cottid soy (I) este eae etre ane noe aed Re guns: RAMA Abas | Sermunid Sone ae secemce se aoee comtne FeSO a iceman J Stichaide ..-... Meiafa wale \eigblel orayn ers etsinie = ata Sia ee Riemer xa phidrontidsspess se yeas nse woe ela Spee LOSS eaD See (Suborder Tzeniosomi.) Trachypteridw (D.) .. ... eiiteins Coxe aoe Eat ei eee Regalecida (CQUICECO GE eee eam E CR Slin Sis Tike Te ee Ce (Suborder Discocephali.) Hehenuerdidsx(Scombridsse11). passes -e se ee (Suborder Anacanthini.) AT COD aay soe Mes isk ee Te, eee ; GaGa GT) Mase Aes NS as se ee Ba aco an Species. G. B. yaya y eta CHROME RENO NONE ROH HOoMmHWwo ae LO oll oll Hw © NOCHNWRFRFWONCSCCOCNNHNHOHHEND OrtN eo coo Genera. atta) ae So bo DER ROH HRI HH WHR ONMHWOHO HONHEwo _ eRe Roe Cor WON oo VHS xa oOoe Kb RPSOOCON HEHE WOH COSCON PR HEH RE HE DD eo ecoocercroocooorHNwoSoSoHSorHS cocoeoco Common. rpooocroe coo ¢& oo cous mRoocooro coc ¢& RPSSCRSORP SFP OCOCOSCHHESOCSOOCONOHH coHoCCS coo | el oT 5The Agonids, -as well as the Dactylopteridw and some J riglide (Peristedion), were included by Day in a group called the family Cataphracti. §‘The Cotlidz includes the Trigle; the genus Peristedion is referred by Day tothe Cataphracti. 7 The Zoarecide were divided by Day, the typical species bein® included in tbe family Blenniidae, and the Lycodinw and Gymnelinw cous:itutei the family Lycodidas, ht NaN Aileen ie iad if ee ; NOC ia i ae Ni ea ne oe oe es ae IR EDEN LEWES ERT Se ee mate ao Cpe * NST ZOOLOGY. 621 Species. Genera. Common. Class, order, suborder, and family. po Ss | Sa ae G.B.| M. ||G.3B.| M. || Sp. | Gen. CLASS OF TELEOSTOMES OR FISUES—Continued. | Order Teleocephali—Continued. | (Suborder Heterosomata.) H PONG CUL SST (Li) van cs coninns wn taalenle + oeita omeclelerca Sewer teas 14 9 11 8 || 3 6 SULTUUT sce Ses SRS RS Bante Be iene nee Ans Been Ba tomae Deanne tee 4 1 8 | 40 0 | Order Hemibranchii. | SRBRLONGIVEL ce CL) )o sacscsacccc cs Se ZOOLOGY. 645 A new suborder of extinct Mammals.—In 1882 Professor Cope described, from a fragment of the lower jaw, a new generic type of mammals under the name Pantolambda bathmudon. A considerable part of the skeleton having been since secured, Professor Cope was able to form a more adequate idea of its characters and considered it as the type of not only a distinet family but of a “new” suborder of Amblypoda. The refer- ence is somewhat doubtfal owing to the inability of Professor Cope to examine the carpus, but the co-ordination of characters seems to indi- - eate the place claimed for the genus by him. Assuming, then, that the Pantolambdide form a peculiar family of Amblypoda, Professor Cope proposes to define and limit the suborders as follows: : The Pantolambdid represent the suborder Taligrada distinguished by the ‘‘astragalus, witha head distinct from trochlea, with distal articu- lar facets.” The Pantodonta may be known by the astragalus destitute of a head and the distal facets subinferior. (Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., XX, pp. 557- 559.) The acclimatization of the Japanese Deer.—TVhere is a small deer found in Japan, Cervus sika, related to the Sambur deer, or Rusa, which may become a subject of some economical importance. The Viscount Pow- erscourt imported some of these animals and turned them into his park, and had considerable success in raising them. He commenced with one male and three females, and these, Viscount Powerscourt thinks, “have been the only deer of any newly-introduced kind which have been a real success.” These deer were introduced about the year 1860, and in 1854 Viscount Powerscourt had ‘“ upwards of one hundred of them, besides having shot two or three yearly, and also having given away a great many and sold others.” The viscount sums up his opinion that the Japanese deer are “ a most satisfactory little deer; the venison when dressed is about the size of Welsh mutton and very well flavored. The little stags, with their black coats and thick necks, like miniature Samburs, are very picturesque and ornamental, and I think they are a decided addition to our varieties of hardy park deer.” They have “a most peculiar cry in the rutting season, a sort of whistle, varying some- times into a scream.” The Japanese deer interbred with the red deer in the viscount’s park, and there were three or four deer in the park which were regarded as being certainly hybrids, the red hind in each case being the dam. Harly Lemuroids.—The Lemuroids, which are now so characteristic of Madagascar and represented sparingly in other parts of Africa, instead of being peculiar to a limited continent, were in early times widely dis- tributed, and the forms of Africa are really the relics of a once widely- spread type. The old forms, however, were not very closely related to the modern, and represent even distinct families. They were at home in America as well as in Europe during the Eocene, and in late years 646 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884, much light has been thrown upon their relationship. One was known to Cuvier and indicated under the generic name of Adapis. But the great French naturalist had no idea as to its true affinities, and in fact mistook its remains for those of a hog-like animal. In America, accord: ing to Professor Cope, two families were represented in the Eocene period, one of which, the Mixodectida, had three premolars in the upper jaw, and the other, the Anaptomorphide, had two. The Mixodectide were represented by as many as five generic types, and of the Anapto- morphide, two have been made known. Of the latter, the typical genus is Anaptomorphus, and another one has been called Indrodon. The name Anaptomorphus has reference to the similarity of the era- nium to that of man, while Indrodon refers to some similiarity between the dentition of the form so named and that of the extinct Madagascar genus, Indris. (Am. Nat., xvi, pp. 59-62.) Breeding and disposition of Monkeys and Lemurs.—The extent to which the Primates (monkeys, &c.) may breed in confinement will probably be new to most persons. Mr. Arthur Nichols ascertained that at least twelve out of about eighty species kept in the Zoological Gardens have bred during the past thirty years. Lemurs formed a large proportion. The Rhesus monkey bred more frequently than any other species. According to Mr. Nichols, ‘the disposition and moral character (in the widest sense) of no species of monkey whatever approaches that of the dog,” and he suggests that this may be due to the absence of inheritance of the “ gradually accumulated cultivation of these qualities through association with man” which the dog has enjoyed. The monkey cannot benefit by such experience, ‘owing to the impossibility of rearing a succession of generations in captivity.” (Nature, XXX1, p. 54.) Diseases of Monkeys and Lemurs.—The diseases of the monkeys and lemurs have been investigated by Mr. J. B. Sutton, who had special access, for that purpose, to the Zoological’Gardens of London. He con- tinued his investigations from December 1, 1881, to March 30, 1883, dur- ing which time one hundred and ten of the quadrumana died, and the viscera of ninety-three were specially examined with the following re- sults : (1) tubercle was found in three instances only ; (2) bronchitis was met with in twenty-two cases; (3) pneumonia in its lobar form is not common, only three deaths being traced to that disease, but ‘ the lobu- lar form is frequent, seven deaths having been occasioned by it;” (4) empyema was manifested in two cases; (5) “ abscess of lung burst into a bronchus, filled the trachea and thus suffocated a baboon ;” (6) “ edema of lung killed a squirrel monkey ;” (7) alveolar abscess was a not un- common mode of death in young animals, “ leading to ulceration and sloughing of the gums;” the purulent discharges being swallowed, septic pneumonia is established, “‘sometimes leading to gangrene of the lung;” (8) scrofula was well marked in three cases ; (9) “ intussusception of the ZOOLOGY. 647, jejuaum killed a very fine lemur ;” (10) leucocythemia was met with in a lemur, “the spleen of the animal having become enlarged to fifty times the normal bulk ;” (11) “ typhoid fever proved fatal in four cases, three lemurs and one monkey.” A “very unexpected cause of death manifested itself in bone disease, in the form of typical rickets. Next to bronchitis this is the most fre- quent cause of death among the monkeys.” For a detailed clinical account reference must be made to Mr. Sutton’s original communica- tion. (Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1883, pp. 581-586.) A new fresh-water Manatee.—It has recently been shown that not only is there a difference between the African and American Manatees, but that there are two species of the genus represented along the American coast, one being that of Florida and the other fouud along the South American coast. Still more recently, the mammals collected many years ago by Dr. Natterer, the Austrian naturalist, so well known for his travels in Brazil, have been worked over by Dr. Von Pelzeln, who has now charge of the collections in Vienna of which the old traveller’s gatherings form a part. It seems that among them were found speci- mens of a manatee that lives high up the Amazon as well as the Rio Negro, the Rio Brancho, and Madeira. It is stated that Natterer him- self had perceived the differences between this manatee and the others that are known, and had given it the name Manatus inunguis, referring to its nailless fingers. The specific distinction of the form has been in- sisted upon by Dr. Von Pelzeln, and the animal has been ally described. (Am. Nat., XVIII, p. 941.) The flukes of Whales —What are the flukes of whales? This, it ap- pears, is a question that cannot be satisfactorily answered at the pres- ent time, and at least there is a diversity of opinions in respect to their homologies. Do they simply represent a laterally expanded tail, or are they the remnants of the posterior feet of quadruped ancestors? A difference in interpretation has long prevailed, and the subject has been made prominent recently by some memoirs or addresses of Prof. W. H. Flower. By some old naturalists, and even by Linneus, the flukes were regarded as tantamount to the entire hind limbs. Not long ago, Gill suggested that the flukes represent the hypertrophied integuments of the hind limbs, while the osseous portions partially persist in the rudimentary bones located far in front of them. Lastly, Professor Flower has again taken up the question. ‘‘ One of the methods,” says he,“ by which a land mammal may have been changed into an aquatic one is clearly shown in the stages which still survive among the carnivora. The seals are obviously modifications of the land carnivora, the Otaria, or sea-lions and sea-bears, being curiously intermediate. Many naturalists have been tempted to think that the whales represent a still further stage of the same kind of modifications. But there is to my mind a fatal objeetion to this view. The seal, of course, has much in common with the whale, 648 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. inasmuch as it is a mammal adapted for an aquatic life, but it has been converted to its general fish-like form by the peculiar development of its hind limbs into instruments of propulsion through the water, for, though the thighs and legs are small, the feet are karge and are the special organs of locomotion in the water, the tail being quite rudi- mentary. In the whales the hind limbs are aborted and the tail devel- oped into a powerful swimming organ. Now, it is very difficult to sup- pose that when the hind limbs had once become so well adapted to a function so essential to the welfare of the animal as that of swimming, they could ever have become reduced and their action transferred to the tail. It is far more reasonable to suppose that whales were derived from animals with large tails, which were used in swimming, eventually with such effect that the hind limbs became no longer necessary, and so gradually disappeared. The powerful tail, with lateral cutaneous flanges, of an American species of otter (Pteronura Sandbachit), or the still more familiar tail of the beaver, may give some idea of this member in the primitive cetacea.” Such are the arguments, in brief, of Professor Flower. But it is not necessary to suppose that the whales have evolved from a specialized form like the Pinnipeds, which he indeed denies, for be rather contends that they show ungulate affinities. It appears to be more reasonable to infer that the cetaceans have descended from quadrupeds with rather weak or ordinary hind limbs. Nevertheless, we find, in the feet of the Otariids, or eared seals, some clew to the possible genesis of the flukes . as modifications of the limbs. Let us suppose, then, that a terrestrial mammal with even ordinary (but not ungulate) hind limbs should take to the water,and its descendants, following it in habits, should develop processes analogous to the mem- branous extensions of the hind limbs in the eared seals. These may be em- ployedin swimming, and the osseous parts not assisting, or even being prejudicial to such progress, might become atrophied, and. in the course of atrophy would be overgrown by the integument and muscles, and ap- pear to be pulled forward, while the membranous portions of the feet would becoine hypertrophied; this hypertrophy would extend to the mus- cles as well as to the integuments, and, of course, all would become very much modified. In fine, we wouldin time have a case where the posterior limbs of the ancestral quadruped would be represented in part by the flukes and in part by the included rudimentary bones, the flukes repre- senting the hypertrophied integuments of the primitive members and the bones the atrophied remains of the skeletal portions. The fact that m the specialized aquatic or rather pelagic forms, the tail is always very much reduced or rudimentary, may be considered as entitled to some value as an argument in favor of the view presented, although not much, The transversely expanded tails of the South American otter and beaver. are quite exceptional. In most aquatic forms, the tail is more or less compressed. ZOOLOGY. 649 NECROLOGY OF ZOOLOGISTS, 1884. Bopinus (Dr. Hernricnu), director of the Zoological Garden of Berlin, died November 23, 1884, at Berlin; born at Drewelow in Pomerania, July 29, 1814. BREHM (Dr. ALFRED EDMUND), a well-known German ornithologist, died November 11, 1884, at Renthendorf; born in 1829, FAHRAEUS (O. J.), an entomologist, died May 28, 1884, at Stockholm, in the 88th year of his age. FITZINGER (Dr. LEOPOLD JOSEPH), a zoologist, especially an author in Mammalogy and Herpetology, died September 22, 1824, at Hietzing, near Vienna; born April 13, 1802. F6RESTER (Prof. Dr. ARNOLD), an entomologist, died August 13, 1854, at Aachen (Aix-la-Chapelle). JEFFREYS (JOHN GWYNN), a conchologist, died January 21, 1885, at London; born at Swansea, January 18, 1509. KEFERSTEIN (D. A.), a well known entomologist, died November 28, 1884, at Erfurt. K6stLin (Prof. Dr. OTTO), an anatomist, died September 1, 1884, at Stuttgart. RUPPELL (Dr. WILHELM PETER EDWARD), 2 celebrated traveler and zoologist, died December 11, 1884, at Frankfort; born November 20, 1794. SMITH (SIDNEY), an entomologist and conchologist, died December 28, 1884, at Walmer, in the 80th year of his age. SOWERBY (GEORGE BRETTINGHAM), a well-known conchologist and paleontologist, died July 25, 1884, at London; born March 2, 1812. THOMSON (Prof. Dr. ALLEN), a very able anatomist and physiologist, died March 21, 1884, at London; born at Edinburgh, April 2, 1809. TOMOsVARY (Dr. E.), an entomologist, died August 25, 1884, at Buda- pest. BIBLIOGRAPHY OF ZOOLOGY, 1884. GENERAL ZOOLOGY. Systematic Zoology. Bos (RirzeMaA, and H.). Leerboek der Dierkunde. Groningen, 1884. (8vo, 8, 333 pp.) BreuM (A. E.). Merveilles dela nature. Les Vers, les Mollusques, les Echinodermes, les Zoophytes et les Protozoaires. Edition frangaise par A. T. de Rochebrune. Livr. 1-10. Paris: 1884. (S8vo.) . Merveilles de la nature. Les Insectes. Edition frangaise par J. Kiinckel @Hereculais. T. 2 (pp. 393-802). Paris: 1884. (8vo.) Bronn’s (H. G.). Klassen und Ordnungen des Thierreichs. Lief. Leipzig und Hei- delberg, 1883. (8vo.) 1. Bd. Protozoa. Neu bearbeitet von O. Biitschli. 26, 27 Lief. 2. Bd. Porifera. Neu bearbeitet von G. C. J. Vosmaer. 3-6 Lief. 5. Bd., 2. Abth. GJiederfiissler, von A. Gerstaecker. 11-15 Lief. 6. Bd., 3. Abth. Reptilia. Neu bearbeitet von C. K. Hoffman. 41, 42 Lief,, 6. Bd. 6. Bd., 5. Abth. Mammalia. Forlgesetzt von Dr. W. Leche. 27, 650 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. CLaus(C.). Elementary Text-Book of Zoology. General part and special part. Pro- tozoato Insecta. Translated and edited by Adam Sedgwick and F. C. Heathcote. With 706 woodcuts. London: Sonnenschein, 1884. (S8vo, 608 pp., 21 sh.) DEspLats (V.). Eléments @histoire naturelle. Zoologie, comprenant l’anatomie, la physiologie et la classification. Nouv. édit. Paris: 1884. (8vo, 539 pp.) Emery (CARLO). Corso di Zoologia sistematica. Torino: 1884. (8vo, viii, 396 pp., 8 gr.) FL¥IscHER (H. Emit). Lehrbuch der Zoologie fiir Landwirthschaftsschulen und An- stalten verwandten Characters. Mit 435 in den Text gedruckten Holzschnitte. Braunschweig: 1884. (8vo, xii, 519 pp.) Fou (H.). Zoologie générale. Legons données 4 Université de Genéve pendant le semestre d’hiver 1882-1883. 1. livr. Genéve, 1884. (4to, 72 pp., 6 pl.) GiGLIoLi (E. H.) and G. Cavanna. Zoologia. P. I. Invertebrati da G. Cavanna. Milano, 1884. (avo, 200 pp., with 45 fig.) HcKEL (E.). Histoire de la création des étres organisés d’aprés les lois naturelles. Traduite par Charles Letourneau et revue sur la 7. édit. allem. 3.6d. Paris: 1884. (8vo, xii, 606 pp., 17 pl.) HoupER (C. F.andJ.B.). Elements of Zoology. New York, 1884. (12mo, x, 385 pp.) Kincs ey (J.8.). The Standard Natural History, by the leading American authori- ties. Edited by J.S. Kingsley. Boston. (8vo, parts 8-32.) LEvUCKART (RUDOLF) und H. NitzscHEe. Zoologische Wandtafeln. 8. Lief., Taf, xxi- xxv. Mit deutschen, franzésischen und englischen Text. Cassel: 1884. (4to.) MARTIN (PHILIP LEOPOLD). Illustrirte Naturgeschichte der Thiere. Mit zahlreichen Illustrationen von F. Specht, R. Friese, E. Schmidt, ete. (55.-60. [Schluss —] Lief. ) Leipzig: 1884. (8vo, v.1, 632 pp.; v. 2, 645 pp.) PLATEAU (FELIX). Zoologie élémentaire. 2. 6d. revue et augmentée. Mons: 1884. (8vo, 585 pp.) Histology. Brass (ARNOLD). Die Organisation der thierischen Zelle. (Biologische Studien. 1. Theil.) Halle a. S.: 1884. (Svo, Bog. 6-11, Taf. v—viii, mit Tafelerklirung.) Fou (HERMANN). Lehrbuch der vergleichenden mikroskopischen Anatomie mit Ein- schluss der vergleichenden Histologie und Histogemie. 1. Lief. Die mikrosko- pisch-anatomische Technik. Leipzig: 1884. (8vo, Bog. 1-13, mit Fig. 1-84 in Holzschnitt.) GEDDES (PaTRIcK). A restatement of the cell-theory, with applications to the Morphology, Classification, and Physiology of Protists, Plants, and Animals, together with an hypothesis of cell-structure, and an hypothesis of contractility. Proc. Royal Soc. Edinburgh, v. 12, pp. 266-292. . On some recent contributions to our knowledge of the Morphology and Physiology of the Cell. Proc. R. Phys. Soc. Edinburgh, v. 7, 13 pp., 1 pl. HeErRTWIG (O.and R.). Untersuchungen zur Morphologie und Physiologie der Zelle. Jena: 1884. (8vo, 32 pp., 1 pl., M. 1.50.) Hyatt (ALPHEUS). The larval theory of the Origin of Cellular Tissue. Am. Nat., v. 18, pp. 460-464; Science, v. 3, p. 337. Physiology. B&cLARD (J.). Traité élémentaire de Physiologie, comprenant les principales notions de la physiologie comparée. 7 6d. 1. partie, 2. tirage. Paris: 1884. (8vo, xvi, 774 pp.) Distne (C.). Die Regulirung des Geschlechtsverhiltnisses bei der Vermehrung der Menschen, Thiere und Pflanzen. Zeitschrift f. Naturwiss., v. 17 (n. F., v. 10), pp. 593-940. GRABER (Vitus). Grundlinien zur Erforschung des Helligkeits- und Farbensinnes der Thiere. Prag: Leipzig: 1884. (8vo, viii, 322 pp., 4 Abbild.) la ett ig tlh nal alee ie eae ie Fe Re et ee Powe ZOOLOGY. Ghl Embryology. BAMBEKE (CHARLES VAN). Contributions 4 histoire de la constitution de Veuf. I. Rapport médiat de la vésicule germinative avec la périphérie du viteJlus. Bull. Acad. R. Se. Belg. (3), v. 6, pp. 843-879; Arch. de Biolog., v. 4, pp. 803-832; (Abstr. J. R. M.S. (2), v. 4, pp. 854-355). SEDGWiIcKk (ADAM), On the Origin of Metameric Segmentation and some other Morphological Questions. Quart. Journ. Micr. Se.,ns., v. 24, pp. 43-82. SELENKA (E.). Studien tiber Entwicklungsgeschichte der Thiere. III. Die Blitter- umkehrung im Ei der Nagethiere. Wiesbaden: 1884. (4to, pp. 67-99, 6 pl.) Zoo-geography. BiytTr (A.). Einige Bemerkungen zu Charles Kénig’s Untersuchungen iiber die Theorie der wechselnden continentalen und insularen Klimate in Kosmos, 1883. Kosmos, Jahrg. 1884, v. 1, pp. 254-266. Carus (J. Victor). Prodromus Faunze Mediterranew sive descriptio animalium maris mediterranei incolarum quam comparata silva rerum quatenus innotuit adiectis locis et nominibus vulgaribus eorumque auctoribus in commodum zoolo- gorum congessit. P. I. Celenterata, Echinodermata, Vermes. Stuttgart: 1884. (8vo, vi, 282 pp. ) GILL (THEODORE). The Principles of Zoogeography. Proc. Biolog. Soc. Washing- ton. (40 pp.) ; Huxiey (THomas HENRY). Physiographie. Eine Einleitung in das Studium der Natur. Fiir deutsche Leser frei bearbeitet von Hermann Jordan. Leipzig; 1884. (8vo. xx, 521 pp.) (Internat. wiss. Bibl., v. 63.) Masor (C. J. ForsytH). Zoogeographische Uebergangsregionen. Kosmos, 1884, v. 1, pp. 102-113. SEMPER (CARL). Reisen im Archipel der Philippinen. 2. Th. Wissenschaftliche Re- sultate. 4. Bd., 1. Abth. Die Sipunculiden von J. G. Deman, C. Biilow und Emil Selenka. 2. Halfte. Wiesbaden: 1884. (4to, pp. i-xxxii, 57-131, 7 pl.) VeRRILL (A. E.). Evidences of the existence of light at great depths in the sea. Nature, v. 30, pp. 280-281. . Notice of the remarkable Marine Fauna occupying the outer banks off the southern coast of New England. Am. Journ. Se. (3), v. 28, pp. 213-220. Miscellanea. Brass (ARN.). Die thierischen Parasiten des Menschen. Im Anhang Tabellen, enthal- tend die wichtigsten Merkmale der Parasiten. Cassel: 1884. (8vo, vii, 123 pp., Gipls) LusBgock (Sir JOHN). Teaching Animals to converse. Nature, v. 29, pp. 216; 547, 548. Morris (CHARLES). Colonial Organisms. Am. Nat., v. 18, pp. 140-149, pp. 240-249. RATHBUN (RICHARD). American applianees for deep-sea investigation. Science, v. 4, pp. 400-404, RYDER (J. A.). The Protozoa and Protophytes considered as the primary or indirect source of the food of Fishes. (2ed. revised.) U.S. Fish Comm. Report for 1881, pp. 755-770. Periodicals. . American (The) Naturalist, devoted to Natural Sciences in their widest sense. v. 18. Philadelphia: 1884. (8vo.) Annales des Sciences Naturelles. Zoologie et Paléontologie. Publiées sous la diree- tion de H. et Alphonse Milne-Edwards, 6. série. Tome 16. Paris: 1884, 652 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FO. 1884. Annals (The) and Magazine of Natural History, including Zoology, Botany, and Ge- ology. Conducted by Albert Giinther, W. S. Dallas, W. Carruthers, and W. Francis. 5ser., v. 13, 14. London: 1884. (8vo.) Archiy fiir Anatomie und Physiologie. Anatomische Abtheilung. Herausgegeben von W. His und W. Braune. Jahrg. 1884. Leipzig: 1884. (8vo.) Archiv fiir mikroskopische Anatomie. Herausgegeben von vy. La Valette St. George und W. Waldeyer. v.23. Bonn: 1884. (8vo.) Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte. Herausgegeben von E. yon Martens. 50. Jahrg. Ber- lin: 1884. (8vo.) Archives de Biologie, publiées par Edouard van Beneden et Charles van Bambeke. v. 4, Gand et Leipzig: 1883 (paru 1884). (8vo.) Archives de Zoologie Expérimentale et Générale, publiées sous la direction de H. de Lacaze-Duthiers. 2. sér., t.2. Paris: 1884. (8vo.) Archives Italiennes de Biologie, publiées sous la direction de C. Emery et A. Mosso, 3. année, 1884. v 5. Turin: 1884. (8vo.) Internationale 'Monatsschrift fiir Anatomie und Histologie. Herausgegeben von E. A. Schifer, L. Testut und W. Krause. v.1. Berlin: 1884. (8vo.) Journal de Micrographie. Revue mensuelle des travaux frangais et étrangers, pu- bliée sous la direction du Dr. J. Pelletan. v.8. Paris, 1884. (8vo.) Morphologisches Jahrbuch. Herausgegeben von C. Gegenbaur. 9 Bd. Leipzig: 1884. (8vo.) Naturhistorisk Tidsskrift. Stiftet af Henrik Kroyer. Udg. af J.C. Schiodte. 3.R. Kjbenhaven: 1884. (8vo.) New Zealand (The) Journal of Science. v. 2. Dunedin, N. Z., 1884. (8vo.) Quarterly (The) Journal of Microscopical Science. Edited by E, Ray Lankester, with the co-operation of W. T. Thiselton Dyer, E. Klein, H. N. Mosely, and Adam Sedgwick. N. ser., v. 24.> London: 1884. (8vo.) Recueil Zoologique Suisse. Publié sous la direction de H. Fol. T. 1. Genéve: 1884. (8vo.) Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Mikroskopie und fiir mikroskopische Technik. Her- ausgegeben von W. Julius Behrens. 1 Bd. Braunschweig: 1884. (8vo.) Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. Herausgegeben von C. Th. v. Siebold, v. Kolliker und E. Ehlers. 40 Bd. Leipzig: 1884. (8vo.) Zoological (The) Record for 1883; being vol. 20 of the record of Zoological Litera- ture. Edited by Edward Calas ell Rye. London: 188. (8vo.) Zoologische (Der) Garten. Zeitschrift fiir Beobachtung, Pflege und Zucht der Thiere. Redigirt von F. C. Noll. 25. Jahrg. Frankfurt a. M.: 1884. (8vo.) Zoologischer Anzeiger. Herausgegeben von Prof. J. Victor Carus. 7. Jahrg., 1883. Leipzig: 1884. (8vo.) Zoologischer Jahresbericht fiir 1883. Herausgegeben von der zoologischen Staion zu Neapel. 1. Abth. 2. Abth. Arthropoda. 3. Abth. Mollusca, Brachiopoda. 4. Abth. Tunicata, Vertebrata. Leipzig: 1884. (8vo.) (Periodicals of Societies.) Arbeiten aus dem zoologisch-zootomischen Institut in Wiirzburg. Herausgegeben von ©. Semper. v. 7. Wiesbaden: 1884. Bulletin of the Museum of Comparative Zoology at Harvard College. v.11, nos. 8, 9. Cambridge, Mass., 1883. (8vo.) Bulletin de la Société Zoologique de France pour l’ann ée 1884. v. 9. Paris, 1884. (Bvo.) Journal of the Royal Microscopical Society ; containing its Transactions and Proceed- ings. Edited by F. Crisp. 2 series, v. 4. London: 1884. (8vo.) Mittheilungen aus der zoologischen Station zu Neapel. Zugleich ein Repertorium fiir Mittelmeerkunde. 5. Bd. Leipzig: 1884. (8vo.) eee — se = f Ook Se WO Pe tig ad Oe ZOOLOGY. 653 Notes from the Leyden Museum. Founded by the late H. Schlegel. v. 6. Leyden: 1884. (8vo.) Nouvelles Archives du Muséum d’Histoire Naturelle. 2. sér., v.6. Paris: 1884. (4to.) Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, 1884. Philadel- phia, 1884. (8vo.) : Proceedings of the Scientific Meetings of the Zoological Society of London for the year 1883. London, 1884. (8vo.) Sitzungsbericht der Gesellschaft naturforschender Freunde zu Berlin, 1884. Berlin, 1884. (8vo.) Sitzungsberichte der kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften. Math.-nat. Cl., 88 Bd., 1. Abth. Wien: 1884. (8vo.) Verhandlungen der kais.-kén. zoologisch-botanischen Gesellschaft in Wien. Heraus- gegeben von der Gesellschaft. Jahrg. 1883, v.33. Wien: 1884. (8vo.) PROTOZOANS. Sporozoans. BALBIANI (E. G.). Les organismes unicellulaires. Les Protozoaires. Legons, ete. (Suite). Journ. de Micrographie, v. 8, pp. 9-13; 66-75, 134-142; 249-257. . Lecgons sur les Sporozoaires. Recueillies par le docteur J. Pelletan, revues par Je professeur. Paris: 1884. (8vo, viii, 184 pp., 5 pl.) SCHNEIDER (AIMEE). Ophryocystis Biitschlii, Sporozoaire d’un nouveau type. Arch. Zool. Expér. (2), v. 2, pp. 111-125; Tr. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), v. 14, pp. 301-313, 1 pl.) Myxomycetes. Zorr (W.). Die Pilzthiere oder Schleimpilze. Nach dem neuesten Standpuncte bearbeitet. Breslau: 1884. (8vo, viii, 174 pp.) ‘ Rhizopods. Brapy (H. B.). Report on the Foraminifera dredged by H. M.S. Challenger during the years 1873-1876. Report Scient. Res. Challenger, Zool., v. 9 (814 pp.; atlas, 115 pl.) CARPENTER (WILLIAM). On an abyssal type of the genus Orbitolites; a study in theory of descent. Phil. Trans. Royal Soc. London, 1883, ii, pp. 551-573, 2 pl. Dapay (E. von). Ueber eine Polythalamie [Entzia tetrastomella n. g., n. sp.] der Kochsalztiimpel bei Déva in Siebenbiirgen. Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., v. 41, pp. 465-480 ; Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), v. 4, pp. 349-363. FOULKE (SarRA GWENDOLEN). Some phenomena in the life-history of Clathrulina elegans. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad., 1884, pp. 17-19. GRUBER (AUG.). Studieniiber Amoeben. Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., v. 41, pp. 186-225. HAECKEL (ERNST). The Orders of the Radiolaria. Translated by Miss N. Maclagan. Nature, v. 29, pp. 274-276 ; 296-299. Infusorians. Kies (G.). Ueberdie Verwandtschaft der Flagellata mit Algen und Infusorien. 130 pp-, 2pl. Untersuch. Botan. Instit. Tiibingen,v.1. (Abstr. J. R. M. Soc. (2), v. 4, pp. 68-69.) Mavpas (E.). Contribution & l’6tude morphologique et anatomique des Infusoires ciliés. (Snite.) Arch. Zoo], Expériment. (2), v. 1, pp. 433-664. Strokes (ALFRED C.). Notes on some apparently undescribed Infusoria from putrid ‘waters. Am. Nat., v.18, pp. 133-140. 654 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. PORIFERS. Sponges. Hinpe£ (GEORGE J.). Catalogue of the Fossil Sponges in the Geological Departmen. ./ the British Museum (Natural History), with Descriptions of New and Lite Known Species. London, 1884. (4to, 248 pp., 38 pl.) LENDENFELD (R. VON). Monograph of the Australian Sponges. I. Introduction. Proce. Linn. Soc. N. 8. Wales, v. 9, pp. 121-154. PoOLKJAEFF (N.). Report on the Calecarea dredged by BP. M. 8. Challenger. Report Scient. Res. Voyage Challenger, Zool.,v.8. (76 pp.,9 pl.) Potts (EpwarpD). Fresh-water sponges as improbable causes of the pollution of river water. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Philad., 1884, pp. 28-30; Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), v. 13, pp. 486-487. VosMAER (G. C. J.). Porifera 3-6 Lief. (Bronn’s Klassen und Ordnungen des Thier- reichs). Leipzig u. Heidelberg : 1884. (8vo.) CCQLENTERATES. - General. FEWKES (J. WALTER), and Mark (E. L.), Acalephs. Polyps. Selections from Em- -bryological Memoirs. III. Mem. Mus. Compar. Zool. Harvard College, v. 9. Cambridge, 1884. (8vo, 52 pp., 13 pl.) . Bibliography to accompany selections from Embryological Monographs. Com- piled by Alexander Agassiz, Walter Faxon, and E. L. Mark. III. Acalephs. By J. Walter Fewkes. Bull. Mus. Compar. Zool., v. 11, pp. 209-238. Polyps. ANDRES (AuG.). LeAttinie. Monografia. v. 1, contenente bibliografia, introduzione e specigrafia. Leipzig: 1884. (4to, xi, 459 pp., 13 pl.) [Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel. Y. Monographie. } DuNCAN (P.M.). A revision of the families and genera of the sclerodermic Zoan- tharia Ed. and H-.or Madreporaria (M.rugosa excepted). Journ. Linn. Soc. London, Zool., v. 18, pp. 1-204. Kosy (F.). Monographie des Polypiers jurassiques de la Suisse. 3. partie. (Bale, 1884, pp, 109-149, 12 pl.) Abhandl. Schweizer. Palzontol. Gesellsch., v. 9. RIDLEY (STuART O.). On the classificatory value of growth and budding in the Madreporide, and on a new genus [Anacropora] illustrating this point. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), v. 13, pp. 284-291, 1 pl. Acalephs. BouRNE (ALFRED GIBBS). On a hydriform phase of Limnocodium Sowerbii. Nature, vy. 31, p. 107. HInpDE (G.J.). On the structure and affinities of the family of the Receptaculitida, including therein the genera Ischadites Murch (=Tetragonis Eichw.), Sphxro- spongia Pengelly, Acanthochonia n. g.,and Receptaculites Defr. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. London, v. 40, pp. 795-849, 2 pl. QUELCH (JOHN J.). The Milleporidex. Nature, v. 30, p. 539. WILSON (EDMUND B.). The development of Renilla. Phil. Trans. Royal Soc. Lon- don, 1883, pp. 723-815, 16 pl. ECHINODERMS. General. CARPENTER (P. HERBERT). Notes on Echinoderm Morphology. No. VII. On the Apical System of the Ophiurids. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc., n.s., v. 24, pp. 1-23, 1 pl. No. VIII. On some points in the Anatomy of Larval Comatule. Tbid., pp. 319-327. | ry RR are eee eer Ss 2 lS] eee ZOOLOGY. 655 Crinoids. CHAPMAN (EF. J.). On the Classification of Crinoids. Proc. and Trans. Royal Soe. Canada, v. 1, sect. iv, pp. 113-116. MARSHALL (A. Mitnzs). On the Nervous System of Antedon rosaceus. Quart. Journ. Micr. Se., v. 24, pp. 507-548, 1 pl. ' SLADEN (W. PERCY). On the Homologies of the Bes Larval Plates in the Test of Brachiate Echinoderms. Quart. Journ. Micr. Sc., n.s., v. 24, pp. 24-42. Asterioids. DANIELSSEN (D. C.) og JOHAN KOREN. Den Norske Nordhavs-Expedition 1876-1878 XI. Asteroidea. Christiania, 1884. (4to, 119 pp., 15 pl., 1 map.) Echinoids. AGASsIzZ (ALEXANDER). Reports on the results of dredging, &c., by the Blake XXIV. Report on the Echini. Mem. Mus. Comp. Zool. Cambridge, vy. 10, pp. i-viii, 9-94. DuNcAN (P. M.) and W. P. StapEen. The fossil Echinoidea from the Khirthar series of Nummulitic Strata in Western Sind. Palwontologia Indica, ser. xiv, v. 1 (146 pp., 18 pl.). Lovin (SVEN). On Pourtalesia, a genus of Echinoidea. (Stockholm, 1883, 1884.) K. Svensk. Akad. Handl., v. 19 (4to, 95 pp., 21 pl.). Holothurians: BELL (T. JEFFREY). Studies on the Holothuroidea. III. On Amphicyclus, a new genus of Dendrochirotous Holothurians, and its bearing on the Classification of the Family. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1884, pp. 253-258. . Studies in the Holothuroidea. IV. On the Structural Characters of the Cot- ton-Spinner (Holothuria nigra), and especially of its Cuvierian Organs. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1884, pp. 372-376. . Arare British Holothurian (Holothuria nigra). Nature,v. 30, pp. 146-147. ——. The Cotton-Spinner (Holothuria nigra). Nature, v. 30, p. 335. WORMS. General. GOETTE (ALEXANDER). Abhandlungen zur Entwicklungsgeschichteder Thiere. Un- tersuchungen zur Entwicklungsgescbichte der Wiirmer. Vergleichender Theil. Hamburg u. Leipzig: 1884. (8vo, 214 pp.) LEVINSEN (G. M.R.). Systematisk-geographisk Oversigt over ae nordiske Annulata, Gephyrea, Chetognathi og Balanoglossi. Vid. Meddel. fra Foren. Kj¢benh., 1883, pp. 92-350, 2 pl. ZSCHOKKE (FRITz). Recherches sur Vorganisation et la distribution zoologique des vers parasites des poissons d’eau douce. Arch. de Biolog., v. 5, pp. 153-241, 2 pl. Platyhelminths. BIEHRINGER (JOACHIM). Beitriige zur Anatomie und Entwicklungsgeschichte der Trematoden. Arb. zool.-zoot. Instit. Wiirzburg, v. 7, pp. 1-28, 1 pl. Inyma (Isao). Untersuchungen iiber den Bau und die Entwicklangsgeschichte der Siisswasser Dendrocelen (Tricladen). Zeitschrift f. wiss. Zool., v. 40, pp. 359- 464, 4 pl. LANG (ARNOLD). Die Polycladen. 1. Hiilfte. Leipzig: 1884. (4to, pp. 1-240, 24 pl.) (Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel, II. Monographie.) 656 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR i884. SCHNEIDER (ANT.). Neue Beitraige zur Kenntniss der Plathelminthen. Zool. Beitr. (Schneider), v. 1, pp. 116-126, 2 pl. I. Musculatur der Stammform. II. Ent- wicklung der Cestoden aus der Stammform. III. Die einzelligen Driisen und die Stellung von Peripatus im System. SILLIMAN (W. A.). Beobachtungen iiber die Siisswasserturbellarien Nordamerikas. Zeitschrift f. wiss. Zool.,-v. 41, pp. 48-78, 2 pl. Nematelminths. 2 De MAN (J. G.). Die frei in der reinen Erde und im siissen Wasser lebenden Nema- toden der Niederliindischen Fauna. Leiden: 1864. (4to, vi, 206 pp. 34 pl.) MANSON (PATRICK). The Metamorphosis of Filaria sanguinis hominis in the Mos- quito. Trans. Linn. Soc. London (2), v. 2, pp. 367-388, 1 pl. VAN BENEDEN (EpouarD). Recherches sur la maturation de l’eeuf et la féconda- tion (Ascaris megalocephala). Arch. de Biolog., v. 4, pp. 265-640, 13 pl. SAEFFTIGEN (A.). Zur Organisation der Echinorhynchen. Morphol. Jakrb., v. 10, pp. 120-171, 3 pl. Archannelides. FRAIPONT (JULIEN). Recherches sur le systéme nerveux central et périphérique des Archiannélides (Protodrilus et Polygordius) et du Saccocirrus papillocercus. Arch. de Biolog., v. 5, pp. 243-304, 5 pl. Annelids. (Chetopods. ) ? MARENZELLER (E. von). Zur Kenntniss der Adriatischen Anneliden. 3. Beitr. [Te- rebellen Amphitritea.] Sitzgsber. Akad. Wiss. Wien, Math.-nat. Cl., v. 89, 1. Abth., pp. 151-214, 2 pl. WEBSTER (H. E.) and JAMES E. BENEDICT. The Annelida Chetopoda from Province- town and Wellfleet, Mass. U.S. Fish Comm. Report for 1881, pp. 699-747, 8 pl. ( Hirudinea. ) BOURNE (ALFRED GIBBS). Contributions to the Anatomy of the Hirudinea. Quart, Journ. Micr. Sce., v. 24, pp. 419-506, 11 pl. FOETTINGER (ALEXANDRE). Recherches sur organisation de l’Histriobdella homari P. J. Van Ben, rapportée aux Archiannélides. Arch. de Biolog., v. 5, pp. 435-516. WuirMan (C. O.). The External Morphology of the Leech. Proc. Am. Acad. Arts and Sc., v. 20, pp. 76-87. BEDDARD (F.E.). A gigantie Earthworm [from South Africa]. Nature, v. 30, pp, 570-571. . Myzostomoides. BEARD (J.). On the Life-History and Development of the Genus Myzostoma F. S. Lenck. Mittheil. Zool. Station Neapel, v. 5, pp. 544-580, 2 pl. Rotifers. Hupson (C.T.). An attempt to reclassify the Rotifers. Quart, Journ. Micr. Sc., v. 24, pp. 335-356. Balanoglossi. BATESON (WILLIAM). The Early Stages in the Development of Balanoglossus (sp. inecert.). Quart. Journ. Micr. Sce.,n.s., v. 24, pp. 208-236, 4 pl. SPENGEL (J. W.). Zur Anatomie des Balanoglossus. Mittheil. Zool. Station Neapel, Vv. 5, pp. 494-508, 1 pl, a PP a ~~, : ZOOLOGY. 657 ARTHROPODS. General. BERLESE (A.). Acari, Myriapoda et Scorpiones hucusque in Italia reperta. Fasc. i-xivy. Padova, 1882-1884. (8vo.) Merostomes. BENHAM (W.B.S.). On the Testisof Limulus. Trans. Linn. Soc. London (2), Zool., v. 2, pp. 362-366, 1 pl. LANKESTER (E. Ray). On the Skeleto-trophic Tissues and Coxal Glands of Limulus, Scerpio, and Mygale. Quart. Journ. of Micr. Sc., n. s., v. 24, pp. 129-162, 7 pl. Crustaceans. (Entomostracans. ) Herrick (L. C.). Final Report on the Crustacea of Minnesota, included in the orders Cladocera and Copepoda, together with a synopsis of the described species in North America, and Keys to the more important genera. Minneapolis, 1884. (8vo, 192 pp., 22 pl.) BrapDy (G.S8.). Report on the Copepoda obtained by H. M. S. Challenger during the years 1873-1876. Reports Scientif. Results Voyage Challenger, Zool., v. 8. (142 pp., 55 pl.) ‘ MULLER (WILHELM). Zur niiheren Kenntnis der Cytheriden. Arch. f. Naturgesch., 50. Jahrg., pp. 1-18, 2 pl. ( Cirripeds. ) Hork (P. P. C.). Report on the Cirripedia collected by H. M. §. Challenger during the years 1873-1876. Anatomical Part. Rep. Scientif. Res. Challenger, Zool., v.10. (47 pp., 6 pl.) . Report on the Cirripedia collected by H. M. 8. Challenger during the years 1873-1876. Rep. Scientif. Results Voyage Challenger, Zool., v. 8. (169 pp., 13 pl.) j (Amphipods. ) BLanc (HENRI). Die Amphipoden der Kieler Bucht, nebst einer histologischen Dar- stellung der Calceoli. Halle,1884. Nova Acta Acad. Leop.-Car., v. 47, pp. 39- 96, 5 pl. KOsSSMANN (R.). Neueres iiber Cryptonisciden. Sitzgsber. k. preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1684, pp. 457-473. Transl. by W.S. Dallass. Ann.and Mag. of Nat. Hist. (5.), v. 14, pp. 1-17. SCHIOEDTE (J. C.) and FR. MEINERT. Symbole# ad Monographiam Cymothoarum, Crustaceorum Isopodum familiz. IV. Cymothoide Trib. II. Cymothoina. Naturhist. Tidsskr. (3), v. 14, pp. 221-352, 7 pl. (Decapods.) ANDREWS (E. A.). On the Anatomy of Libinia emarginata Leach, the Spider Crab. Trans. Connecticut Acad., v. 6, pp. 99-121, 3 pl. Brook (GEO.). On the rate of Development of the Common Shore-Crab (Carcinius menas). Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), v. 14, pp. 202-207, 1 pl. Cuiaus (C.). Zur Kenntniss der Kreislaufsorgane der Schizopoden und Decapoden. Arbeit. zool. Instit. Wien, v. 5, pp. 271-318, 9 pl. Mocquarp (F.). Recherches anatomiques sur V’estomac des Crustacés podophthal maires. Ann. Sc. Nat., Zool. (6), v. 16, art. 1, 311 pp., 10 pl. 5, Mis, 33——42 658 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR. 1884. PARKER (T. JEFFERY). On the Structure of the Head in Palinurus, with especial ref- erence to the classification of the genus. Trans. N. Zealand Inst., v. 16, pp. 297-307, 1 pl. PLATEAU (F'.). Recherches sur la force absolue des muscles des Invertébrés. 2. partie. Force absolue des muscles fléchisseurs de la pince chez les Crustacés. Bull. Acad. R. Belg. (3), v. 7, pp. 450-474, 1 pl. Sars (G.O.). On the Metamorphosis of Decapods. Bidrag til Kundskab on Deca- podernes Forvandlingar. Kristiania, 1884. (8vo, 50 pp., 7 pl.) Arachnids. (Mites. ) MICHAEL (ALBERT D.). British Oribatide. London, printed for the Ray Society, 1884. (vol. 1, 8vo, xi, 336 pp., 31 pl.) The Hypopus Question, or the Life History of certain Acarina. Journ. Linn. Soc. London, Zool., v. 17, pp. 371-394, 1 pl. : NALEPA (ALFRED). Die Anatomie der Tyroglyphen. Sitzungsber. Akad. Wiss. Wien, v. 90, 1. Abth., pp. 197-228, 2 pl. (Abstract.) Anzeiger Kais. Akad. Wiss. Wien, 1884, pp. 134-138. (Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), v. 14, pp. 369-371.) Woop-Mason (J.). Report on the Tea-mite (Tetranychus bioculatus) and the Tea- bug (Helopeltis theiovora) of Assam. London, 1884, (8vo, 20 pp., 3 col. pl.) (Linguatuliva. ) Hoye (W.E.). On a new species of Pentastomum (P. protelis), from the mesentery of Proteles cristatus. With an account of its Anatomy. Trans. Royal Soc. Ed- inburgh, v. 32, pp. 165-191, 2 pl. (Scorpions. ) JOYEUX-LAFFUIE (J.). Appareil venimeux et venin duSecorpion. Etude anatomique et physiologique. Arch. Zool. Expériment. (2), v. 1, pp. 733-783, 1 pl. LINDSTORM (G.). Sur un Scorpion du terrain silurien de Suéde (Paleophoneus nun- cius). Compt. rend. Acad. Sc. Paris, v. 99, pp. 984-985. (Solpugide.) PuTNAM (J. D.). The Solpugide of America. Papers of J. D. P., arranged for pub- lication by Herbert Osborn. Proc. Davenport Acad. Nat. Se., v. 3, pp. 249-310, 4 pl. (Araneans. ) UAMBRIDGE (O. P.). On two new Genera of Spiders. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1884, pp. 196-205, 1 pl. DAHL (FRIEDRICH). Das Gehér- und Geruchsorgan der Spinnen. Arch. f. mikro- skop. Anat., v. 24, pp. 1-10, 1 pl.; transl. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), v. 14, pp. 329-337, 1 pl. : EMERTON (J. H.). New England Spiders of the family Therididwe. Trans. Con- necticut Acad., v. 6, pp. 1-86, 24 pl. Forses (H. O.). On the habits of Thomisus decipiens, a spider from Sumatra. Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1883, pp. 586-588, 1 pl. KEYSERLING (Graf E.). Die Spinnen Amerikas.—Theridiidew. 1. Halfte, v. 2. Ntirn- berg: 1884. (4to, 222 pp., 10 pl.) e MacLrop (J.). Recherches sur la structure et la signification de l'appareil respira- toire des Arachnides, Arch. de Biol., v.5, pp. 1-34, 2 pl. = ZOOLOGY. 659 MacLeop (J.) La structure de Vintestin antérieur des Arachnides. Bull. Acad. R. Se. Belg. (3), v. 8, pp. 377-391; 394-396. 4 PAVEsI (P.). Studi sugli Aracnidi Africani. ili. Araenidi del regno di Scioa, ete. Fd Mem, Soe. Geograph. Ital., v.2, pp. 1-108. Roma, 1883. _-PeckuamM (G.W.) and E.G. Prcknam. Descriptions of new or little-known spiders § - of the family Attide, from the various partsof the United States of North Amer : ica. Milwaukee, 1883. (8vo, 35 pp.,3 pl.) ScHIMKEWItTscH (WLADIMIR). Etude sur ’Anatomie de ’Epeire. Ann. Sc. Natur., Zool. (6), v.17, art. 1, 94 pp., 8 pl. SIMON (EUGENE). Description d’une nouvelle famille de Yordre des Aranew (Brady- stichid~). Soc. Entomol. Belg. Compt. rend, (3), No. 50, pp. cexevii-cec1. Les Arachnides de France. yv.5,2.et 3. parties. Paris: Roret, 1884. (8vo, pp. 181-808; a fres. 12.) : . Etudes arachnologiques. 14, Mém. XXI. Matériaux pour la Faune arach- nologique des iles de Vocéan Atlantique. (Fin.) Ann. Soe. Entomol. France (6), v. 3, pp. 273-314. Matacopods. - KENNEL (J.). Entwicklungsgeschichte von Peripatus Edwardsii Blanch. und Peri- = patus torquatus n. sp. Arbeit. zool.-zoot. Inst. Wiirzburg, v. 7, pp. 95-229, 7 pl. Insects. (Myriopods.) BorreE (A. PREUDHOMME DE). ‘Tentamen Catalogi Lysiopetalidarum, Julidarrm, Archijulidarum, Polyzonidarum atque Siphonophoridarum hucusque descripta- rum. Ann. Svc. Entomol. Belg., v. 28, pp. 46-82. HAASE (ERICH). Das Respirationssystem der Symphylen und Chilopoden. Zool. Beitr. (Schneider), v. 1, pp. 65-96, 3 pl. LATZEL (ROBERT). Die Myriopoden der 6sterreichisch-ungarischen Monarchie. Mit Bestimmungstabellen aller bisher aufgesteliten Myriopoden-Gattungen und zahl- reichen, die morphologischen Verhiiltnisse dieser Thiere illustrirenden Abbildun- gen. 2. Hiilfte. Die Symphylen, Pauropoden und Diplopoden. Wien: 1884. (8vo, xii, 413 pp., 16 pl.) _~Packarp (A. S., jr.). On the morphology of the Myriopoda. Proc.’ Am. Phil. Soc., a. v. 21, pp. 194-209. SAZEPIN (BasiL). Ueber den histologischen Bau und die Vertheilung der nervésen Endorgane auf den Fiihlern der Myriopoden. Mém. Acad. Imp. St.-Pétersbourg (7), v. 32, No. 9, 20 pp., 3'pl. - ScupDER (SAMUEL H.). Two new and diverse types of Carboniferous Myriopods. Mem. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., v. 3, pp. 283-297, 1 pl. ; SELIWANOFF (A.). Myriopodes de Russie. Hore Soc. Entomol. Ross., v. 18, pp. 69-121. _ TémMbsvary (EpM.). Eigenthiimliche Sinnesorgane der Myriopoden.. Math. und naturwiss. Ber. Ungarn, v. 1, pp. 324-326. (Chilognaths.) BeRLESE (A.). Studi critici sulla sistematica dei Chilognati. I. Julide. Venezia, 1884. (8vo, 24 pp., 2 tav.) Haase (Ericu). Schlundgeriist und Maxillarorgan von Scutigera Zool. Beitr. (Schneider), v. 1, pp. 97-108, 1 pl. PackarD (A.S., jr.). Arevisior of the Lysiopetalida, a family of Chilognath Myria- poda, with a notice of the genus Cambala, Proc. Am, Phil. Soc,, v. 21, pp. 177-196, . 660 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 18284. ( Hexapods.— General.) CuRIsTY (ROBERT MILLER). Onthe methodic habits of insects when visiting flowers. The Entomologist, v. 17, pp. 81-86. Dau (FR.). Beitriige zur Kenntnis des Baues und der Functionen des Insekten-. beines. Arch. f. Naturgesch., 50. Jahrg., pp. 146-193, 3 pl. Illinois. Thirteenth report of the State Entomologist on the noxious and beneficial insects of the State of Illinois. Second Annual Report of S. A. Forbes, for the year 1383. Springfield, Ill., 1884. (8vo,203, xxi pp.) PLATEAU (FELIX). Recherches expérimentales sur les mouvements respiratoires des insectes. Mém. Acad.-R. de Belg., 1884, 219 pp. 7 pl. SIMMERMACHER (G.). Untersuchungen tiber Haftapparate an Tarsalgliedern von Insecten. Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., v. 40, pp. 481-556, 3 pl. United States Department of Agriculture. Bulletin No. 1.2ded. Reports of experi- ments, chiefly with kerosene, upon the insects injuriously affecting the orange tree and the cotton plant. Washington, 1883. (8vo, 62 pp.) . Bulletin No. 4. Report of observations and experiments in the practical work of the Division, made under the direction of the Entomologist. Washington, 1884. (8vo, 102 pp.) United States Entomological Commission (Third Report of the) relating to the Rocky ~ Mountain Locust, the Western Cricket, the Army Worm, Canker Worms, and the Hessian Fly, &c. With maps and illustrations. Washington, 1883. (8vo, xiv, 347, 12 pp.; Append. [90] pp., 4 maps, 63 pl.) . ZEILLER (R.). Sur des traces d’insectes simulant des empreintes végétales. Bull. Soc. Géolog. France (3), v. 12, pp. 676-680, 1 pl. ( Thysanurans. ) Grassi (B.). Notice préliminaire sur ’anatomie des Thysanoures. Arch. Ital. Biol., v. 5, pp. 381-389. (Neurorthopters.) BRONGNIART (CHARLES). Surun gigantesque Neurorthoptére [ Dictyonneura Golden- bergi], provenant des terrains houillers de Commentry (Allier). Compt. rend. Acad Se. Paris, v. 98, pp. 832-533. ( Trichopters. ) McLAcHLAN (ROBERT). A Monographie Revision and Synopsis of the Trichoptera of the European Fauna. First additional supplement. London: 1884. (8vo, . 7 pl.) PATTEN (WILLIAM). The Development of Phryganids, with a preliminary note on the development of Blatta germanica. Quart. Journ. Microse. Se., v. 24, pp. 549-602, 3 pl. PoLETAJEFF (N.). Ueber die Ocellen und ihr Sehvermégen bei den Phryganiden. Hore Soc. Entomol. Ross., v. 18, 23 pp., 1 pl. ( Orthopters. ) BRUNNER VON WATTENWYL (C.). Ueber das Stimm- und Gehérorgan der Heu- schrecken. Schrift. d. Ver. z. Verbreit. naturwiss.. Kenntn., v. 24, pp. 461-474, 4pl. : PACKARD (A.5S., jr.). The systematic position of the Orthoptera in relation to other orders of insects. Third Rep. U. 8. Entomol. Comm., pp. 286-345, 41 pl. SAUSSURE (HENRI DE). Prodromus dipodiorum Insectorum ex ordine Orthoptero- rum. Mém. Soc. de Phys. et d’Hist. Nat. Genéve, v. 28, No. 9. (4to, 254 pp.) Woop-Mason (J.) A contribution to our knowledge of the Embiide, a family of Orthopterous Insects, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1883, pp. 628-634, 1 pl. Wry AA hn a tt ZOOLOGY. 661 (Neuropters. ) DimmMock (G.). Curious habit of Forficula auricularia. Psyche, v. 4, p. 186. Eaton (A. E.). A revisional Monograph of recent Ephemeride or Mayflies. Lon- don, 1883, 1884. (4to, pp. 1-152, 45 pl.) Trans. Linn Soc. London (2), Zool., v. 3. REDTENBACHER (Joseph). Uebersichtder Myrmeleoniden-Larven. Denkschr. d, kais. Akad. d. Wiss., Wien, Math.-nat. Cl., v. 48, 2. Abth., pp. 335-368, 7 pl. (Hemipterous Rynchotes. ) Locy (Wit11AM A.). Observations on the pulsating organs in the legs of certain Hemiptera. Am. Nat., v. 18, pp. 13-19. Reuter (O.M.). Hemiptera Gymnocerata Europe. Hémiptéres Gymnocérates d’En- rope du bassin de la Méditerranée et de l’Asie Russe. 3. Tome. Acta Soc. Scient. Fenn., v. 14, pp. 317-568, 5 pl. (Homipterous Rynchotes.) BALBIANI (G.). Le Phylloxera du chéne et le Phylloxera de Ja vigne; études @’Ento- mologie agricole. (Observations sur le Phylloxera et sur les parasitaires de la vigne. IV.) (Inst. de France, Acad. d. Se.) Paris, 1884. (4to, 61 pp., 11 pl.) LICHTENSTEIN (J.). La Flore des Aphidiens. Extr. dela Monographie des Aphidiens. Montpellier, 1884. (8vo, 55 pp.) WITLACZIL (EMAN.). Entwicklungsgeschichte der Aphiden. Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., v. 40, pp. 559-696, 7 pl. (Siphonapters.) KRAEPELIN (KARL). Ueber die systematische Stellung der Puliciden. Festschr. zum 50-jahr. Jubilium des Realgymnasiums des Johanneums Hamburg (Nolte). Hamburg, 1884. (4to, 17 pp., 1 pl.) : On the Systematic Position of the Pulicide. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), y. 14, pp. 36-54. ; ( Coleopters. ) DONCKIER DE DONCEEL (H.). Liste des Brenthides décrites postérieurement an catalogue de MM. Gemminger et von Harold. Soc. Entomol. Belg. Compt. rend. (3), pp. cccili—ceex. GANGLBAUER (LUDWIG). Bestimmungs-Tabellen der europiischen Caleopteren. VIII. Cerambicide. (Schluss.) Verhandl. k. k. zool.-bot. Ges., v. 33, pp. 437— 586. Harracu (A.). Der Kifersammler. Praktische Anleitung zum Fangen, Priipariren, Auf bewahren und zur Aufzucht der Kifer. 1884. (12mo, viii, 308 pp.) OLIvieER(E.). Essai d’une révision des espéces européennes et circumméditerrané- ennes de la famille des Lampyrides. Paris, 1884. (8vo, 56 pp., 2 pl.) Perr (H.). Calendrier coléoptérologique, suivi d@’un tableau indiquant les époques des chasses aux coléoptéres. Chaélons-sur-Marne, 1884. (8vo, 51 pp.) REDTENBACHER (L.). Tables dischotomiques pour servir A la détermination des familles et des genres des Coléoptéres de Belgique d’aprég, L. Redtenbacher. Bruxelles: 1884. (8vo, 184 pp.) Reirrer (EDMUND). Bestimmungs-Tabellen der europiischen Coleopteren. X. ‘Nachtrag zu dem 5. Theile, enthaltend Clavigeridz, Pselaphide und Scyd- menide. WVerhandl. k. k. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien, 1884, pp. 59-94. Rey (Cu.). Histoire naturelle des Coléoptéres de France. Brévipennes, Habrocé- réens, Tachyporéens, Trichophyens. Paris: 1884. (8vo, 299 pp., 4 pl.) Smira (HERBERT H.). Antenne of a beetle [Scorpionus] used as a defensive weapon. Am. Nat., v. 18, pp. 727-728. 3 STIerLin (Gustav). Bestimmungstabelle enropiischer Riisselkiifer. II. Brachy- deridx. Mittheil. Schweizer. Entomol. Ges., v. 7, pp. 57-98. WyTsMAN (P.). Catalogue systématique des Passalides. Ann. Mus. Ciy. Stor. Nat, Genova (2), y. 1) pp. 326-348. 662-5 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. (Hymenopters. ) AMANS. Etude de l’organe du vol chez les Hyménoptéres. Revue Sc. Natur. Mont- pellier (3) v. 3, pp. 485-523, 2 pl. ANDRE (ERNEST). Species des Formicides d’Europe et des pays tmierapies. en Asie et en Afrique. Beaune, 1884. (8vo, 438 pp., 27 pl.) - CarLeET (G.). Sur le venin des Hyménoptéres et ses organes sécréteurs. Compt. rend. Acad. Se. Paris, v. 98, pp. 1550-1551. ———. Sur le venin des Hyménoptéres et ses organes sécréteurs. Ann. Soe. Entomol. France (6), v. 4, pp. evili-cix. KLUG (FRIEDRICH). Gesammelte Aufsiitze tiber Blattwespen. Herausgegeben von Jos. Kriechbaumer. Berlin: 1884. (Ato, iii, 300 pp., 1 col, pl.) McCook (HENRY C.). Howa Carpenter Ant. (Camponotus pennsylvyanicus) founds a Formicary. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phila., 1883, pp. 303-307; Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), v. 13, pp. 419-423. ———., The Rufous or Thatching Ant (Formica rufa) of Dakota and Colorado. Proce. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phila., 1884, pp. 57-65. MiLierR (HERMANN). Ein Beitrag zur Lebensgeschichte der Dasypoda hirtipes. Verbandl. Nat. Ver. d. prenss. Rheinland, 41. Jahrg. 52 pp., 2spl. RADOSZKOWSKY (O.). Révision des armures copulatrices des méles du genre Bombus.., Bull. Soc. Imp. Natural. Moscou, 1884, pp. 51-92, 4 pl. SAUNDERS (EDWARD). Further Notes on the terminal segments of Aculeate Hymen- optera. Trans. Entomol. Soc. London, 1884, pp. 251-267, 1 pl. Synopsis of British Hymenoptera. Anthophila. Part II. Apide. Trans. Entomol. Soc. London, 1884, pp. 159-250, 8 pl. SAUNDERS (Sir SIDNEY 8.). Further Noteson the Caprification of Domestic Figs, with reference to Dr. Paul Meyer’s comments thereon. Trans. Entomol. Soc. Lon- don, 1884, pp. 97-106. STEIN (RICHARD R. von.). Tenthredinologische Studien. v, vi. Katter’s Entomol. Nachrichten, 9. Jahrg., pp. 247-258; 10. Jahrg., pp. 95-105. WESTWOOD (JOSIAH OBADIAH). Further notice concerning the fig-insects of Ceylon. Trans. Entomol. Soc. London, 1883, pp. 375-381, 1 pl. (Dipters.) HANSEN (H. J.). Fabrica oris Dipterorum: Dipterernes Mund i anatomisk og sys- tematisk Henseende. I. (Tabanide, Bombyliidx, Asilide, Thereva, Mydas, Apiocera). Naturhist. Tidsskr. (3), v. 14, pp. 1-220, 5 pl. LABOULBENE (ALEXANDRE). Observations de Myiasis due a la Sarcophaga mapatihe Schiner, avec réflexions. Ann. Soc. Entomol. France (6), v. 4, pp. 28-44. LEE (ARTHUR BOLLES). Les organes chordotonaux des Dipteéres et la méthode du Chlorure dor. (Observations critiques). Recueil Zool. eure: v. 1, pp. 685-689, 1 pl. PaCKARD (A. &.,jr.). The Hessian Fly; its ravages, habits, and the means of pre- venting its increase. Third Rep. U. S. Entomol. Comm., pp. 198-248, 2 pl., 1 map. e WILLISTON (S. W.). Dipterous Larve from the Western Alkaline Lakes, and their use as human food. Transact. Connecticut Acad. v. 6, pp. 87-90. (Lepidopters. ) CHOLODKOVSKY (N.). Contributions 4 l’anatomie et la morphologie des Vaisseaux Malpighiens des Lépidoptéres. Compt. rend. Acad. Sc. Paris, v. 99, pp. 816-819. Distant (W. L.). Rhopalocera Malayana: a Description of the Butterflies of the Malay Peninsula, Part 7. London, 1884. (4to, pp. 193-248, 2 pl.). GRUBER (AUGUST). Ueber nordamerikanische Papilioniden- und Nymphaliden-Rau- pen. Jéna. Zeitschrift f. Naturwiss., v.17 (n. F., 10. Bd.), pp. 465-489, 2 pl. he ‘tee pee beh saan oe gla bat la cue ee * > 2 FoR Qh S yh a ty oe = ysl nts ny ¥. aa pe * 2 ashi teint P =a wake Ho 8 gfe Ss SO ZOOLOGY. 663 HorMann (Ernst). -Die Schmetterlinge Europas. 1. Lief. Stuttgart: 1884. (4to, vili, 8 pp., 4 pl.) Kirsy (W.F.). On a copy of Peale’s Lepidoptera Americana in the Library of the Zoological Department of tbe British Museum. Papilio, v. 5, pp. 103-104. LanG (HENRY CuaRLeEs). Rhopalocera Europe descripta et dclineata: the Butter- flies of Europe described and figured. Illustrated with more than eight hundred coloured figures, drawn mostly from nature, under the direction of the Author. London: 1884. (8vo, 2 vols. with 82 pl. £3 183s.) Méscuuer (H.B.). Die Nordamerica und Europa gemeinsam angehdrenden Lepi- dopteren. Verhdlg. k. k. zool.-bot. Ges. Wien, 1884, pp. 273-320. MULLER-BLUMENAU (WILHELM). Ueber einige im Wasser lebende Schmetterlings- raupen Brasiliens. Arch. f. Naturgesch., 50. Jahrg., v. 1, pp. 194-212, 1 pl. NEWMAN (Epwarp). Illustrated Natural History of British Butterflies and Moths. New ed. London: 1884. (8vo, 490 pp. 25s.) “Nicota1 (MICHAILOWITSCH ROMANOFF). Mémoires sur les Lépidoptéres. v. 1. St.- Pétersbourg, 1884. (8vo, 181 pp., 10 pl.) Pagpsr (M.). Die Gross-Schuppenfliigler (Macro-Lepidoptera) der Umgegend von Chemnitz und ihre Entwicklungsgeschichte. 1 Th. Rhopalocera, Heterocera (Sphinges, Bombyces). Chemnitz, 1884. (4to, 50 pp.) POULTON (EDWARD B.). Notes upon, or suggested by, the colours, markings, and protective attitudes of certain Lepidopterous larve and pupe, and of a phytoph- agous hymenopterous larva. Trans. Entomol. Soc. London, 1884, pp. 27-60, 1 pl. RitEy (C.V.). Canker Worms (Paleaerita vernata and Anisopteryx pometazia) ; being an account of the two species injurious to fruit and shade trees. 3 Rep. U. S. Entomol. Comm., pp. 157-197, 1 pl. ROBIN (GHARLES) et AL. LABOULBENE. Sur les dégdts causés au mais et au chancre par les chenilles du Botys nubilalis Hiibn. Ann. Soc. Entomol. France (6), v. 4, pp. 5-16. Rotiast (GEORGE). Catalogue des Cheniiles européennes connues. Lyon: 1884. (8vo, 200 pp.) SAALMULLER (M.). Lepidopteren von Madagascar. Neue und wenig bekannte Arten zumeist aus der Sammlung der Senckenberg’schen Naturforschenden Gesellschaft zu Frankfurt a. M., unter Beriicksichtigung der gesammten Lepidopteren-Fauna Madagascar’s. Abth.1. Rhopalocera, Heterocera, Sphinges et Bombyces. Frank- furta. M: Senckenb. Ges., 1884. (4to, 246 pp.,7 pl.) SmitTH (J. B.).. Synopsis of the genera of the North American Rhopalocera. Brook- lyn, 1883. (8vo, 9 pp.) STAUDINGER (O.). Exotische Schmetterlinge. Abbildungen und Beschreibungen der wichtigsten exotischen Tagfalter in systematischer Reihentolge mit Beriicksich- tigung neuer Arten. Unter technischer Mitwirkung von Dr. H. Langhans. Mit gegen 1,500 colorirten Abbildungen auf 120 Taf. 1. Lief. Text von Seite 3-6 u. Taf. 1-5. Fiirth: 1884. (Fol.) WALTER (ALFRED). Palpus maxillaris Lepidopterorum. Jena. Zeitschr. f. Nat., v. 18, pp. 121-173. MOLLUSCOIDS. Polyzoans. . Busk (GEORGE). Report on the Polyzoa collected by H. M.S. Challenger during the years 1873-76. I. Cyclostomata. Rep. Scientif. Res. Challenger, Zool., v. 10. xxiv, 216 pp., 36 pl. Hincks (THOMAS). Contributions towards a general history of the Marine Polyzoa. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), v. 14, pp. 276-285, 2 pl. LANKESTER (E.RAy). A contribution to the knowledge of Rhabdopheura, Quart. Journ. Microsc. Sc, (n. s.), v. 24, pp. 622-047, 5 pl. 664 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOUR 1884. LreIpDy (JOSEPH). Urnatella gracilis, a fresh-water Polyzoan. Journ. Acad. Nat. Se. Phila., v. 9, 1883, 16 pp., 1 pl. Potrs (EDWARD). On a supposed new species of Cristatella (C. lacustris.) Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phila., 1884, pp. 193-199. SHRUBSOLE (GEORGE W.) and GEORGE R. VINE. The Silurian species of Glauconome, and a suggested classification of the Paleozoic Polyzoa. Quart. Journ. Geol. Soc. London, vy. 40, pp. 329-332. VicELius(W. J.). Morphologische Untersuchungen tiber Flustra membranaceo-trun- cata Smith. Biolog. Centralbl., v. 3, pp. 705-721. (Abstr. J. R. M. S. (2), v. 4, p- 371.) : : VINE (GEORGE ROBERT). Notes on species of Ascodictyon and Rhopalonaria from the Wenlock Shales. Ann. and Mag. of Nat. Hist. (5), v. 14, pp. 77-89. Fourth Report of the Committee, consisting of H. C. Sorby and G. R. Vine, appointed for the purpose of reporting on Fossil Polyzoa. Part I. Cretaceous Polyzoa, British area only. II. Classification of Cyclostomatous Polyzoa. III. Pseudo-Polyzoan forms. IV. Bibliography. Rep. 32 Meet. Brit. Ass. Adv. Sc., pp. 161-209. WarTERS (ARTHUR W.). Closure of the Cyclostomatous Bryozoa. Journ. Linn. Soc. London, Zool., v. 17, pp. 400-404, 1 pl. Brachiopods. ScHULGIN (M. A.). Argiope Kowalevskii. Ein Beitrag zur Kenntnis der Brachio- poden. Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., v. 41, pp. 116-141, 2 pl. MOLLUSKS. General. BRAUN (M.). Beitrige zur Kenntnis der Fauna Baltica. II. Die Land- und Siiss- wassermollusken der Ostseeprovinzen. Arch. f. d. Naturkde. Liv-, Ehst- nnd Kurlands (2), v. 9, pp. 401-504. Dat (W. H.). On the constitution of some appendages of the Mollusca. Am. Nat., v. 18, pp. 776-778. Report on,the Mollusca of the Commander Islands, Bering Sea, collected by Leonhard Stejneger, in 1882 and 1883. Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., v. 7, pp. 340-349. EHRENBAUM (E.). Untersuchungen itber die Struktur und Bildung der Shale der in der Kieler Bucht hiiufig vorkommenden Muscheln. Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., v. 41, pp. 1-47, 2 pl. FISCHER (PAUL). Manuel de Conchyliologie. Fase. V. Paris, 1883. (8vo., pp. 417- 512.) JORDAN (HERMANN). Die Binnenmollusken der nérdlich gemissigten Linder von Europa und Asien und der arktischen Linder. Mit Verbreitungstabellen 1-14. Nova Acta Acad. Caes. Leop.-Carol., v. 45, pp. 181-402, 8 pl., 2 maps. KOLLMANN (J.). Pori aquiferi und Intercellulargiinge im Fusse der Lamellibranchia- ten und Gasteropoden. Verhandl. Naturf. Ges. Basel, 7. Th., pp. 325-351. LANKESTER (E. Ray). The supposed taking in and shedding-out of water in relation to the vascular system of Mollusks. Zool. Anz.,7. Jabrg., pp. 343-346. MarTINI und CHEMNITZ. Systematisches Conchylien-Cabinet. Fortgesetzt von W. Kobelt und H.C. Weinkanff. 328., 329., 330. Lief. Niirnberg: 1884. (4to.) MoLLENDORFF (O. F. von). Materialien zur Fauna von China. Jahrbiich. d.d.Ma- akozool. Ges., 11. Jabrg., pp. 30-390, 3 pl. PECHAUD (JEAN). Excursicns malacologiques dans le Nord de l’Afrique, de la Caliea Alger, d’Alger & Tanger. Fasc.1. Paris: 1884. (8vo, 112 pp.) RossMAssLer’s Iconographie der europiischen Land- und Siisswasser-Mollusken. Fortgesetzt von W. Kobelt. N. F., v. 1,5.-6. Lief. Wiesbaden: 1884. (8vo.) gh sete Dil . _ ] ZOOLOGY. GG5 ScHIEMENZ (P.). Ueber die Wasseraufnahine bei Lamellibranchiaten und Gastro- poden (einsehliesslich der Pteropoden). Mittheil. Zool. Station Neapel, v. 5, pp. 509-543. TRYON (GEORGE W., jr.). Manual of Conchology, structural and systematic. With illustrations of the species. Vol. v1. Philadelphia. (8vo. Col., $20; plain, $12.) Structural and systematic Conchology. An introduction to the study of the Mollusea. Vol. III. Philadelphia. (8vo, 430 pp., pl. 23-91.) VERRILL (A. E.). Second catalogue of Mollusca recently added to the Fauna of the New England coast and the adjacent parts of the Atlantic, consisting mostly of deep sea species, with notes on others previously recorded. Trans. Connecticut Acad., v. 6, pp. 189-294, 5 pl. WHITE (CHARLES A.). A review of the Non-Marine Fossil Mollusca of North America. Washington: Government Printing Office, 1883. (S8vo. 144 pp., 32 pl.) Rep. Geol. Survey U. S. 1881-82. Journals. Journal de Conchyliologie [ete.] publié sous la direction de H. Crosse et P. Fischer. [T. 32, or] 3. sér., t. 24. Paris. (8vo.) Journal (The) of Conchology. Vol. 5, parts5-8. London: D. Bogue. (8vo.) Malakozoologische Bliitter. Fortgesetzt von 8. Clessin. 7. Bd. Kassel: Th. Fischer. Procés-verbaux des séances de la Société Royale Malacologique de Belgique. ‘T. 13. Année 1884. Bruxelles. (8vo.) Acephals. BaRROIS (THEODORE). Sur introduction de ’eau dans le systéme circulatoire des Lamellibranches et sur ’anatomie du pied des Lucinide. Lille, 1884. (8vo, 12 pp., 1 pl.) z Datu (W. H.). New Type of Molluse [Chamydoconcna]. Science, v. 4, pp. 50,51. Huprecar (A. A. W.). Oestercultuur in afgesloten ruimten. L’ostréiculture dans les enclos. Comparaison des résultats obtenus 4 l’étranger et des essais faits dans les Pays-Bas. Tijeschr. d. nederl. Dierk. Veerenig., Suppl., D. 1, Aflever. 2, pp. 319-367. LACAZE-DUTHIERS (H. DE). Morphologie des Acéphales, 1.Mém. Anatomie de VArrosoir (Aspergillum dichotomum L. Reeve). Arch. Zool. Expériment. (2), v. 1 pp. 665-732, 5 pl. PLATEAU (FELIX). Recherches sur la force absolue des muscles des Invertébrés. 1. Partie. Force absolue des muscles adducteurs des Mollusques Lamellibranches. Arch. Zool. Expériment. (2), v. 2, pp. 145-170. SHarpP (B.). On the Visual Organs in Lamellibranchiata. Mittheil. Zool. Station Neapel, v..5, pp. 447-470, 1 pl. Gastropods. ASHFORD (C.). The Darts of British Helicide. Journ. Conchol., v. 4, part iii, pp. 129-133, 1 pl., part IV), pp. 164-170, 1 pl.; (Part v), pp. 195-202; (Part v1), pp. 239-244, BaRROIS (THEODORE). Sur Vintroduction de lean dans le systéme circulatoire des Lamellibranches, et sur ’anatomie du pied des Lucinide. Lille, 1884. (8vo, 12 pp-, 1 pl.) BERGH (RUDOLF). Report on the Nudibranchiata dredged by H. M.S. Challenger during the years 1873-1876. Rep. Scientif. Res. Challenger, Zool., v. 10, 154 pp., 14 pl. . Ueber die Verwandtschaftsbeziehungen der Onchidien. Morpholog. Jahrb., v. 10, pp.172-181 (Tr. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), v. 14, pp. 259-266). 666 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. BINNEY (W. G.). A supplement to the fifth volume of the Terrestrial Air-breathing Mollusks of the United States and adjacent Territories. Bull. Mus. Compar. Zool., v.11, pp. 135-166, 3 pl. ; : BLOCHMANN (F.). Die im Golfe von Neapel vorkommenden Aplysien. Mittheil. Zool. Station Neapel, v.5, pp. 28-49, 1 pl. BourQueELOT (EM.). Recherches sur les phénoménes de la digestion chez les Mol- lusques Céphalopodes. Paris: impr. Hennuyer, 1884. (8vo, 131 pp., 3 pl.) Houssay (FREDERIC). Recherches sur Vopercule et les glandes du pied des Gastéro- podes. Arch. Zool. Expérim. (2), v. 2, pp. 171-288, 8 pl. ‘ . Sur Popercule des Gastéropodes. Compt. rend. Acad. Se. Paris, v. 98, pp. 236-238; Tr. Anu. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), v. 13, pp. 304-306. JOUSSEAUME (F.). Etude sur la famille des Cypreidw. Bull. Soc. Zool. France, v. 9, pp. 51-100. F OSBORN (HENRY L.). Of the gill in some forms of prosobranchiate Mollusca. Stud. Biol. Labor. Johns Hopkins Univ., v. 3, pp. 37-48. 3 pl. ROSSLER (RICHARD). Ueber die Bildung der Radula bei den kopftragenden Mollus- ken. Zool. Anz., 7. Jahrg., pp. 540-543. SEMPER (CARL). Reisen im Archipel der Philippinen. 2. Theil. Wissenschaftliche Resultate. yv.2. Malacologische Untersuchungen yon Dr. Rud. Bergh. XV. Heft. Nachtrage und Ergiinzungen. ‘Tritoniaden. Wiesbaden: Kreidel, 1884. (4to, 8 pl.) ; Tauscu (LEOPOLD). Ueber einige Conchylien aus dem Tanganyika-See und deren fossile Verwandte. Sitzsber. k. Akad. Wiss., Wien, Math.-nat. Cl., v. 90, 1 Abth., pp. 56-70, 2 pl. : WEGMANN (HENRI). Contributions 4 Vhistoire naturelle des Haliotides. Compt. rend. Acad. Sc. Paris, v. 98, pp. 1387-1389. . Contribution & Vhistoire naturelle des Haliotides. Arch. de Zool. Expérim. (2), v. 2, pp. 289-378, 5 pl. Cephalopods. Brock (J.). Das Mannchen der Sepioloidea lineolata d’Orb. (Sepiola lineolata Quoy & Gaim.) nebst Bemerkungen tiber die Familie der Sepioladen im Allgemeinen. Zeitschrift f. wiss. Zool., v. 40, pp. 105-120. Couns (J. W.). A large Squid. Bull. U. 8. Fish Comm., v. 4, 1884, 15 pp. GrroD (PavuL). Recherches sur la peau des Céphalopodes. La Ventouse. Arch. de Zool. Expérim. (2), v. 2, pp. 379-402, 1 pl. GRENACHER (H.). Abhandlungen zur vergleichenden Anatomie des Auges. I. Die Retina der Cephalopoden. Abhandl. Naturforsch. Ges. Halle, v. 16, pp. 207-256, ipl GROBBEN (CARL). Morphologische Studien iiber den Harn- und Geschlechtsapparat ° sowie die Leibeshéhle der Cephalopoden. Arbeit. Zool. Inst. Wien, v. 5, pp. 179-252, 3 pl. : . Hyatt (ALpH.). The Protoconch of Cephalopoda. Am. Nat., v. 18, pp. 919-920. . Genera of Fossil Cephalopods. (Coneluded.) Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., v. 22, pp. 252-338. Ninni (A. P.). Catalogo dei Cefalopodi dibranchiati osservati nell’ Adriatico. Pa- dova, 1884. (8vo, 16 pp., 1 tav.) ROCHEBRUNE (A. T. DE). Etude monographique de la famille des Eledonidew. Bull. Soc. Philom. Paris (7), v. 8, pp. 152-160. . Etude monographique de la famille de Loligopside. Bull. Soe. Philom. Paris (7), v. 8, pp. 7-28, 2 pl. . Etude monographique de la famille des Sepiade. Bull. Soc. Philom. Paris (7), v. 8, pp. 74-122. PANETH (JOSEPH.) Beitriige zur Histologie der Pteropoden und Heteropoden. Areh. f. mikrosk. Anat., v. 24, pp. 230-288, 3 pl. — rr babes —-- ZOOLOGY. 667 PROTOCHORDATES. Tunicates. Brooks (W1Lu1AM K.). Is Salpa an example of Alternation of Generations? Nature, v. 30, pp. 367-370. DoLLey (CHARLEs S.). Some observations opposed to the presence of a parenchym- atous or intra-cellular digestion in Salpa. Zool. Anz., 7. Jahrg., pp. 705-708, GoopMAN (R. N.). Alternation of Generations in Salpa. Nature, v. 30, p. 463. HrrpMaN (W. A.). On the Homology of the Neural Gland in the Tunicata with the Hypophysis cerebri. Proc. Royal Soc, Edinburgh, 1882-83, pp. 145-161. SEELIGER (OSwaLD). Die Entwicklungsgeschichte der socialen Ascidien. Jena. Zeitschrift f. Nat., v. 18, pp. 45-120, 8 pl. ; ULJANIN (BasiL). Die Arten der Gattung Doliolum im Golfe von Neapel und den angrenzenden Meeresabschnitten. Eine Monographie. Herausgegeben von der Zool. Station zu Neapel. Leipzig: 1884. (4to, viii, 140 pp., 121., 12 col. pl., 10 zincogr. ) VaN BENEDEN (EDOUARD) et CHARLES JULIN. La segmentation chez les Ascidiens et ses rapports avee Vorganisation de la larve. Arch. de Biolog., v. 5, pp. 111- 126, 2 pl. VERTEBRATES, General. ALBRECHT (P.). Sur la valeur morphologique de la Trompe d’Eustache et les dérivés de Vare palatin, de Yare mandibulaire et de are hyoidien des vertébrés, suivi de la preuve, que le symplectico-hyomandibulaire est morphologiquement indé- pendant de are hyoidien. Avec 13 grav. Bruxelles: 1884. (8vo, 41 pp.) Soe. @Anat. pathol. Bruxelles. CaRLieR (AUGUSTE AD.). Anatomie philosophique. Les 5 vertébres céphaliques; la 3. paire de membres chez Vhomme et les autres Vertébrés. Paris: 1884. (8vo, xi, 363 pp.) . Corr (EDWARD D.). Note on the Phylogeny of the Vertebrata. Am. Nat., v. 18, pp. 1255-1257. DourNn (ANTON). Studien zur Urgeschichte des Wirbelthierkérpers. Mittheil. Zool. Station Neapel, v.5, pp. 102-195. '. IV. Die Entwicklung und Differenzirung der Kiemenbogen der Selachier. (102 pp., 7 pl.) VY. Zur Entstehung und Differenzirung der Visceralbogen bei Petromyzon Planeri. (152 pp.) VI. Die paarigen and unpaarigen Flossen der Selachier. (161 pp.) LupwiG (FERDINAND), Prince von Bayern. Zur Anatomie der Zunge. Eine ver- gleichende- anatomische Studie. Mit 51 dopp. und 2 einf. Taf. in lith. Farben- druck. Miinchen: lit.-art. Anst., 1884. (4to, x, 108 pp.) MERRIAM (CHARLES Hart). On the Vertebrates of the Adirondack region (conclud- ing the Mammalia). Trans. Linn. Soc. N. York, v. 2. Munk (HERMANN). Ueber die centralen Organe fiir das Sehen und Héren bei den Wirbelthieren. Sitzsber. k. preuss. Akad. Wiss. Berlin, 1884, pp. 549-562. PackarD (ALPHEUS S.). Aspects of the body in Vertebrates and Arthropodes. Am. Nat., v.18, pp. 855-861; Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), v. 14, pp. 245-249. ParKER (T. JEFFERY). A course of instruction in Zootomy (Vertebrata). With 77 illustr. London: 1884. (8vo, xxiii, 397 pp.) PLESKE (TH.). Uebersicht der Siiugethiere und Végel der Kola-Halbinsel. 1. Th. Saiigethiere. St. Petersburg, 1884. Beitr. z. Kenntnis d. Russ. Reichs (2), v. 7, 212 pp. . G68 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. RetTzius (GusTav). Das Gehérorgan der Wirbelthiere. Morphologisch-histologische Studien. II. Das Gehérorgan der Reptilien, der Végel und der Siiugethiere. Stockholm: Samson & Wallin in Comm., 1884. (4to, viii, 368 pp., 37 pl., 37 1.) SACCHI (GIUSEPPE). Nouvelles recherches sur la structure de la névrologie de la rétine des Vertébrés. Arch. Ital. Biolog., v. 6, pp. 76-96. WIEDERSHEIM (R.). Grundriss der vergleichenden Anatomie der Wirbelthiere fiir Studirende bearbeitet. Mit 225 Holzschn. Jena: 1884. (8vo, xii, 272 pp.) Fishes. (General. ) CLAYPOLE (E. W.). Preliminary Note on some Fossil Fishes recently discovered in the Silurian Rocks of North America. Am. Nat., v. 18, pp. 1222-1226. Day (FRANCIS). The Fishes of Great Britain and Ireland. Parts 6-8. London: 1884. (8vo, v. 2, part 4.) FritscH (G.). Die elektrischen Fische im Lichte der Descendenzlehre. Berlin, 1884. (8vo.) KLUNZINGER (C. B.). Die Fische des Rothen Meeres. Eine kritische Revision mit Bestimmungstabellen. 1.Theil. Acanthopteri veri Owen. Mit Unterstiitzung der Kon. Preuss.-Akad. d. Wiss. herausgegeben. Stuttgart: 1684. (4to, ix, 133 pp., 13 pl.) PENNELL (H. CHOLMONDELY). A popvlar history of British Ereshwater Fish, adapted to the use of schools and colleges. Illustr. by 150 wood engr. Londen: 1884. (8yvo,424 pp. 3s. 6d.) SuNDMAN (G6sTA). Finlands Fiskar, malade after natures. The Fishes of Finland drawn and coloured from life, with text (Swedish & English) by O. M. Reuter. J-II. Helsingfors: 1883-1884. (Fol.) United States Commission of Fish and Fisheries. P.IX. Report of the Commissioner for 1884. A. Inquiry into the decrease of Food-Vishes. B. The Propagation of Food-Fishes in the Waters of the United States. Washington, 1884. (8vo, xxi, 1146 pp.) : Myzonts. AHLBORN (F.). Ueber den Ursprung und Austritt der Hirnnerven von Petromyzon. Zeitschrift f. wiss. Zool., v. 40, pp. 286-308, 1 pl. PARKER (W. K.). On the skeleton of the Marsipobranch Fishes. Part I. The My- xinoids (Myxine and Bdellostoma). Part II. Petromyzon. Phil. Trans. Roy. Soc., 1883, pp. 373-457, pl. 8-26. WELDON (W. F. R.). On the Head Kidney of Bdellostoma, with a Suggestion as to the origin of the Suprarenal Bodies. < Quart. Journ. Micr. Se.,n.s., v. 24, pp. 171-182, 1 pl. e Selachians. Corer (E. D.). On the structure of the Skull in the Elasmobranch genus Didymodus. Proc. Amer. Phil. Soce., v. 21, pp. 572-590, 1 pl. GARMAN (SAMUEL). An extraordinary Shark [Chlamydoselachus anguineus]. Bull. Essex Inst., v.16, 9 p. ROSENBERG (EMIL). Untersuchungen iiber die Occipitalregion des Cranium und den proximalen Theil der Wirbelsiule einiger Selachier. Eine Festschrift. [F. H. Bidder’s Doctorjubilium.] Dorpat (Karow), 1884. (4to, 26 pp., 2 pl.) Teleostomes. (General. ) AGASSIZ (ALEXANDER) and C. O. WHITMAN. On the development of some pelagic fish eggs. Proc. Amer. Acad. Arts and Se., v. 20, pp. 23-75, 1 pl. GILL (THEODORE). Three new families of fishes added to the deep-sea Fauna in a° year. Am. Nat., v. 18, p. 433. ve ea eS a Vor res : : s : j ; 4 . ZOOLOGY. 669 Gé.pI (Emit AuGust). Kopfskelett und Schultergiirtel yon Loricaria cataphractae Balistes capriscus und Acipenser ruthenus. Vergleichend anatomische und entwicklungsgeschichtliche Studien zur Deckknochenfrage. Jena. Zeitschrift f. Naturwiss., v. 17, pp. 401-451, 3 pl. f Grassi (B.). Développement dela colonne vertébrale chez les Poissons osseux. (Fin.) Arch. Ital. de Biol., v. 3, pp. 251-268. KLEIN (ADOLPH VON). Beitriige zur Bildung des Schiidels der Knochenfische. Jahreshette d. Ver, f. vaterl. Naturk. Wiirttemberg, 40. Jahrg., pp. 129-257. RaBL-BUCKHARD (H.). Das Gehirn der Knochenfische. Biolog. Centralbl., v. 4, pp. 499-510; and pp. 528-541. Deutsche medic. Wochenschrift, 1884, No. 38, 20 pp. RYDER (JOHN A.). A contribution to the embryography of osseous fishes, with special reference to the development of the Cod (Gadus morrhua). Washington, 1884. (8vo, 149 pp., 12 pl.) Ann. Rep. Commiss. of Fish. for 1882. SAGEMEHL (M.). Beitriige zur vergleichenden Anatomie der Fische. II. Einige Bemerkungen iiber die Gehirnhiute der Knochenfische. Morphol, Jahrb., v. 9, pp. 457-474. Beitrage zur vergleichenden Anatomie der Fische. III. Das Cranium der Characiniden nebst allgemeinen Bemerkungen tiber die mit einem Weber’schen Apparat versehenen Physostomenfamilien. Morphol. Jahrb., v. 10,pp. 1-119, 2 pl. SpE DE Liioux (PAUL DE). Recherches sur la ligne latérale des Poissons osseux. Paris, 1884. (8vo, 115 pp., 4 pl.) WEBER (Max). Ueber Hermaphroditismus bei Fischen. Nederl. Tijdschr. vy. d. Dierk., 5. Jahrg., pp. 21-43, 1 double pl. WeEstwoop (T.) and T. SarcHELL. Bibliotheca Piscatoria. A catalogue of books on angling, the fisheries, and fish culture, with biographical notes and an appendix of citations touching on angling and fishing, from old English authors. London: 1884. (4to.) (Nematognaths. ) WRIGHT (R. RAMSAY), and others. Contributions to the Anatomy of Amiurus. By R. Ramsay Wright, J. P. MeMurrich, A. B. Macallum, T. McKenzie. Toronto, 1884. (8vo, 8 pl.) Proc. Canad. Inst., Toronto, n. s., v. 2, pp. 251-457, 8 pl. WriIGHT (R. RamSAy). The relationship between the air-bladder and auditory or- gan in Amiurus. Zool. Anz.,7. Jahrg., pp. 248-252. (Malacopterygians. ) EMERY (CARLO). Intorno alle macchie splendenti della pelle nei pesci de genere Scopelus. Mittheil. Zool. Station Neapel, v. 5, pp. 471-482, 1 pl. Les taches brillantes de la peau chez les poissons du genre Scopelus. Arch. Ital. Biol., v. 5, pp. 216-325, 3 fig. (Iniomes. ) GILL (THEODORE). Note on the Sternoptychide. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., v. 7, pp. 349-351, ( Acanthopterygians. ) HoLMWoop (FREDERICK). Onthe employment of the Remora by native fishermen on the east coast of Africa. Proc. Zool. Soe. London, 1884, pp. 411-413. LENDENFELD (R. VON). On Lepidopus caudatus Giinth. (Frost-Fish). New Zea- land Journ. Se., v. 2, pp. 108-109. (In German.) Zool. Anz., 1883, pp. 559-560. ParkER (T. JEFFERY). Ona specimen of the Great Ribbon Fish (Regalecus argen- teus n. sp.), lately obtained at Moeraki, Otago. Trans. New Zealand.lnst., v. 16, pp. 284-296, 2 pl. SAGEMEHL (M.). Ueber die Pharyngealtaschen der Scarinen und das Wiederkiuen dieser Fische, Morphol. Jahrb., ¥. 10, pp. 193-203, 670 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884 (Plectognaths.) hist oa palaanenninl Trois (Enrico F.). Ricerche sulla struttura della Ranzania truncata. P.J.° Atti... @ R. Istit. Venet. Sc. Lett. (6), v. 2, 88pp. BP. I. Con 1 tav. ibid., pp. 39-56. : Amphibians. CALMELS (G.). Sur le venin des Batraciens. Compt.rend. Acad. Se. Paris, v. 98, pp. 536-539. Corr (E. D.). The Batrachia of the Permian Period of North America. Am. Nat., v.18, pp. 26-39, 4 pl. Ewart (J. C.). The Dissection of the Frog. Edinburgh:. London: 1884. (8vo. 1s. 6d.) GAUTIER (A.) et ETARD. Observations relatives &4 une Note de Mr. Calmels sur le venin des Batraciens. Compt. rend. Acad. Sc. Paris, v. 98, p. 631. HINCKLEY (Mary H.). Noteson the Peeping Frog (Hyla Pickeringii Le Conte). = Mem. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., v. 3, pp. 311-318, 1 pl. OSBORN (HENRY F.). Preliminary observations upon the brain of Menopoma. Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phila., 1884, pp. 262-274, 1 pl. PAULICKI. Ueber die Haut des Axoloths. Arch. f. mikrosk. Anat., v. 24, pp. 120- , 173, 2 pl. | Reptiles. (General. ) GARMAN (SAMUEL). The Reptiles of Bermuda. Washington, 1884. (8vo.) From Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., pp. 285-303. . The North American Reptiles and Batrachians. A list of the species occurring north of the Isthmus of Tehuantepec, with references. Salem, 1884. (8vo, 46 pp-) Bull. Essex Inst., v. 16. HOFFMANN (C.K.). Reptilia (Bronn’s Klassen und Ordnungen). 41. Lief. Leipzig und Heidelberg: C.F. Winter’sche Verlagshandl., 1884. (8vo.) OWEN (Six RICHARD). History of British Fossil Reptiles. London: 1884, 4 vols. £12 12s. (Dinosaurians. ) DAMES (W.). Metatarsen eines Compsognathus-iihnlichen Reptiles von Solenhofen. Sitzgsber. Ges. Nat. Fr. Berlin, 1884, pp. 179-180. Do.to (L.). Cinquiéme Note sur les Dinosanriens de Bernissart. Bull. Mus. R. Hist. Nat. Belg., v.3, pp. 129-150, 2 pl. MarsH (O.C.). Principal Characters of American Jurassic Dinosaurs. P. VII. On the Diplodocide, a new family of the Sauropoda. Am. Journ. Se. (3), v.27, pp. 162-168,2 pl. P. VIII. The order Theropoda. Jbid., pp. 329-340, 7 pl. United Metatarsal Bones of Ceratosaurus. Am. Journ. Sc. (3), v. 28, pp. 161-162. (Macelognaths. ) MArsH(O. C.). Anew order of extinct Jurassic Reptiles (Macelognatha). Am. Journ. Se. (3), v. 27, p. 341. (Plerodactyles.) MarsH (0.C.). The Principal Characters of American Cretaceous Pterodactyles. P.I. The skuM of Pteranodon. Am. Journ. Se. (3), v. 27, pp. 423-426, 1 pl. : (Crocodilians. ) DoLio (L.). Premiére Note sur les Crocodiliens de Bernissart. Bull. Mus, R. d@’Hist. ; Nat. Belg., v. 2, pp. 309-340, 1 pl. e ZOOLOGY. 671 (Rhynchocephalians.) BAYER (FRANZ). Ueber die Extremitiiten einer junger Hatteria. Sitzgsber. Akad. Wiss. Wien, v. 90, 1. Abth., pp. 237-244, 1 pl. (Saurians.) BEDRIAGA (J. VON). Amphisbzena cinerea Vand. und A. Stranchi v. Bedr. Erster Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Doppelschleichen. Arch. f. Naturgesch.,50. Jahrg., pp. 238-77, 1 pl. BERANECK (E.). Recherches sur le développement des nerfs crAniens chez les Lé- zards. - Recueil Zool. Suisse, v. 1, pp. 519-603, 4 pl. BOULENGER (G. A.). Synopsis of the Families of existing Lacertilia. Ann. & Mag. Nat. Hist. (5), v. 14, pp. 117-122. Chelonians. CHARBONNEL-SALLE (L.). Recherches anatomiques et physiologiques sur le méca- nisme de la respiration chez les Chéloniens. Ann. Sc. Nat. (6), Zool., vy. 15, 20 pp, ple: : Do.Lto (L.). Premiére Note sur les Chéloniens de Bernissart. Bull. Mus. R. d’Hist. Nat. Belg., v. 3, pp. 63-84. Birds. ( General. ) Bairp (S. F.), T. M. BREWER, and R. RipGway. The Water Birds of North America. Issued in continuation of the publications of the Geological Survey of California. J. D. Whitney. Boston: 1884. (2 vols., 4to. I. ix,537 pp.; II. vi, 552 pp., with plain and col. pl.) BoGpANow (M.).. Conspectus Avium Imperii Rossici. Petropoli, 1884. (fol., 122 pp.) Cory (CHARLES B.). The Birds of Haiti and San Domingo. P.I. Boston: 1884. * (4to, 5 pp., 6 pl.) CuovEs (ELLIoTT). Key to North American Birds. Containing a concise account of every species of living and fossil bird at present known on the continent north of the boundary line between Mexico and the United States, including Greenland. Boston: 1884. (8vo, 900 pp., 562 fig.) CovuEs (ELLIOTT) and D. WEBSTER PRENTISS. Avifauna Columbiana. Being a list of birds ascertained to inhabit the District of Columbia, with the times of arri- val and departure of such as are non-residents, and brief notices of habits, &c. 2ed. Washington, 1884. (8vo, 133 pp., with 100 woodcuts and 4 maps.) [Bull. U. S. Nation. Mus., Bulletin No. 26. ] LANGVILLE (J.H.). Our Birds in their Haunts. 1. 606 5 3.20 Jia palOse aes sea eetes see ee ee eee eee eee eee MrstrANTtone 1. 604 5 3.11 PASVIMATAS ek ON eee eee ete een ae eee eee IRONDGS: oo jee eoeeae 1. 601 5 3.00 UE i pF jena coqoano ces se apc ante eas naodooLschocias D’Orbigny.---.-...... 1. 600 5 3.00 Cochin Chinese..... -- BOOB OSE See ate PEt OOSo Finlayson _........ 1. 593 5 2.70 Malaystencreste ncn cecnccrcee eee ce ieee eee Raffles, Crawfard, &c . 1. 583 5 2.34 Voddas of Goylon: iets. 5c sns cc ones ne agen Bailey eee 1. 536 5 0.42 IPA Eis soba se sacsaaae son SsonSe see seaa tose sessedass ROTO eee) anes 1. 500 4° 12 PATIGAMANORG Fe eeaeee oa-o Ssoeecieeeene sosAcdcaqsnoscone Man ieae saat seinen eee 1. 492 4 10.7 A Gtas ioe sedss se Usnweltck aheamn cee ono eeis sae letenies De Quatrefages..-.-... 1. 482 4 10.3 Soman gasses ce sass ese ce aoees mees essen amoueeel De Quatrefages....-... 1, 448 4 9.0 MINCOPOSe a aen wae cisce eerie seein cere wee eaeie sees De Quatrefages.....-. 1. 436 4 8.53 Bosjesman 252.2 Sot ce ee seein ae oe eee eee esos Wari0us:-2--ciccccooe. 1.341 4 4.78 Differences between the tallest and the shortest......|-...-.---.--..---.------ -421 1 4.55 AV ETA Ce SCALLTO 0 MAN tmies cae anata slalom ceion| See sla atse ete steer sentats 1. 658 5 5,25 One of the most important contributions to ethnic anatomy during the year is that of Prof. W. H. Flower, on the size of teeth as a char- acter of race. Asa test of the size of the teeth, the length in a straight line (as measured with a sliding compass) of the crowns of the five upper molar teeth, in situ between the anterior surface of the first pre-molar and posterior surface of the third molar, is called dental Jength (d). The standard of length, as indicating the general size of the cranium, is the cranio-facial axis (B N), the distance between the nasion (naso-frontal suture), and basion (middle of anterior ridge of foramen magnum). In the average male skull the length is very nearly 100™"; in the female, 95. Between the basio-nasal length and the dental length an index can : d x 100 be established on the formula y= the dental index. The average indices range from 40-48; general average, 43. The colton series will be convenient in the study of races: Microdont, below 42. Mesodont, between 42 and 44. Migadont, above 44. Professor Fowler’s table for the apes is as follows: : Average, Animals. BN d Index. Rothiaacees Male gorilla, average of 3... 2.0.2 -sccccece-cueccece- ‘ 124.0 63. 6 50. 8 54.1 Female gorilla, average of 3................... -| 108.7 63.3 Dine } g Male chimpanzee, average of 3.......-.-.- 96.7 46 0 47.6 } 47.9 Female chimpanzee, average of 3 88.3 42.7 48.1 F Male orang, average of 4 .-..-.......-.. 109. 2 58. 0 53.1 | Use 9 Female orang, average of 2....... .... 90. 0 51.5 57. 2 } Male) aiamangy accesses nc. e+ 3.2. ccccs ee leo.i0 33. 0 BY porec cosa sor — ANTHROPOLOGY. 687 2. a 3 4 © | —_ 3 A a = Races. Be Se So So Pr 4 ae ae 3 : 4 a) ra) a a7 il 59 e Ps p b @Q an | & 4 4 - 4 MICRODONT RACES. PI Ra eeee atte se rae tec Satnicacusoce acawe oertlserseceswae fou 20} 100.0 41.0 41.0 ba 3 Osean eevee Notitakiccaiedecidacomacciene tin emeewee se] 13 95. 0 39.5 41.6 z MixediMurope, not British 2-25... 2 os can sccecdascnoss ro 52] 101.3 41.0 40.5 ba 1 Re EES Se ELIS re) 14| 95.1] 39.6] 41.6 ; ANTUV TEA) CUES 2 Se SR ee OS A A SAPS ets roe 7| 101.4 41.4 40. 8 $41 0 Peat cecsce ss SRC AD bee Bes ee Merce Dare 2 8 95.9 39.5 41.2 * Polynesians, chiefly Sandwich Islands* ............---. ea 22] 105.3 42.2 ca) ee Low Caste, Central and Southern India ..............-. J 42 99.5 41.2 Oe a MESODONT RACES. - CIN Gsebe ce erce amc oe a cece tae ce nce bacteceucenesSeace’ fol 12 98. 8 42.1 7 EL fal eres American Indians of all parts ...................-....-- c 31 99. 2 42.5 AZSB ieee es Malays, Java, Sumatra.............. s 70 99.7 43. 2 4373 )teeco oe African negroes of all parts * roe 44 | 103.0 44.5 43. 2 bas 9 PIG ae enee oe cuisisUn ce acco cé caweclsececaceue seieeenee 2 26 97.9 43.6 44.6 MEGADONT RACES. Melanesians of various islands ..............---.------- fol 21} 102.3 45.2 A402 Noo cas Andamanese t fol 9 94.4 41.9 44.4 bas 5 Fe) 8| 888] 41.2] 46.5 = fol 22 102.5 45.9 44.8 } 45.5 Q 14} 95.5] 440] 46.1 : fol 9 100. 0 47.5 47.5 4s 1 2 4 95.5 46.5 48.7 < * This index is reduced by the length of basis cranii. t The relative, not the actual, size of teeth makes them Megadont. Mr. Nathaniel Alcock has advanced a curious theory about the black- ness of the tropical man. The gist of this theory is, that the pigment of the negro skin offers an impediment to the undue excitation of the nervous system by the actinic rays of light. Considerable interest has been excited by a physiological paper of Dr. Clevenger upon the disadvantages of the upright position. Assum- ing that man once progressed on all fours, it is shown that the valves in the veins facilitated the return of blood to the heart. But in the up- right position there are certain veins in which such return is rather im- peded, producing hemorrhoids and other disorders. One of the most practical investigations now going on is that which essays to bring into some relation measurement of the living and of the skeleton. Dr. Paul Topinard, while finding the most satisfactory agreement between these two measures, has discovered that in some respects, notably in the nasal index, the living subject gives better ethnic results. PSYCHOLOGY. Comparative psychology has received an important addition in the ef- forts of Sir John Lubbock to teach a dog to understand card language and to communicate his wishes in the same manner. Dr. P. A. Chad- bourne, of New York, has revived the study of what is called instinct in animals, comparing it with the mental powers of man, The scrutiny of 688 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. animal mind is useful to the comparative psychologist in two ways: It enables him to trace the dividing line between human thinking and ani- mal thinking, and it affords the opportunity of watching the movements of thought in its humblest manifestations. Another very fertile field of anthropological study is child mind. Mr. T. S. Clouston publishes in Edinburgh Health Society’s Journal, a paper on the growth and devel- opment of a child in body and mind. Again, the Italian psychologists excel-in the study of the delinquent classes—examining their brains es- pecially to find out what are the anatomical concomitants of depravity and insanity, and also, if possible, to approach the cradle of our race. But really, psychology is a science of the future. The Society for Psychical Research devotes its time to ghosts, spirit rappings, mind reading, rhabdomancy, &c. This is well enough, and such things as exert an influence on masses of people should be studied. But the so- ciety for psychical research that we would encourage is one in which thousands, or at least hundreds, of individuals should sit down beside the simplest mental phenomena until they understand them. No douht good results will come from the study of telepathy, and Science does well to publish the account of all such researches. The American Nat uralist also continues to publish in a separate department the manifesta- tions of animal intelligence. ETHNOLOGY. E. F. im Thurn contributes to Timehri many interesting articles on the ancient inhabitants of British Guiana. His greatest work is a vol- ume entitled ‘Among the Indians of Guiana,” in which the following tribal names occur: * Branch or stock. SACK awolakeess soos pe cS eeicie sae mrae fn eestor oo shar Sera aot atao ae alot meer Carib. LWP PC oa be scoop cease eced sag spo caeade Sep ccds $acn Seer ase eeaeseoanes Wapiana. IATA Wa KSie wera oe aieee wae Sees ok Se nie oot eee EE Een a Se Dee eee eee Arawak. Arecuna ; . hc ee a OME iC Lie ig me Se Canh Arecuma AR ATOISt =e hoe < CER Ss a OSs eect ce erneee eae Geb ete seit epee etee oo eee eens Wapiauz. Canpisi : Edicite ce bisa lie ten ceed ce RS et ie pe ee eer eee SUS Users Uae Sone Carib. Caribs Carinya Caribs, call themselves people. Cobrungrus, hybrids between Indians and Negroes. Daurais, same as Atarois. Engaricos, hybrids between Macusis and Arecunas. Kapohn Ackawois, call themselves people. Lokono Arawaks, call themselves people. MaCUSiPe emer esanis 220.0 oo 5.02, cela ae ee ee ee ete ae lave ia ee ere Carib. Maiongkongs beyond the British border. Maopityans, unclassed. Nikarikarus, hybrids between Macusis and Brazilians. Paramona sub-tribe OF ACKawo0l. -.\. fone eee EEO ees i koeere Carib. Partamona oat ANTHROPOLOGY. 689 PmuOyHOCLO, AUv-LrIbe Of. Macnsi. >. ..2s-eseasdhina eek arcwle csc sesce vans Carib. Piriana beyond the British border. Pshavaco, hybrids. Taruma, common vocabulary with Moapityans. Taurais, same as Atarois. Waccawai, same as Ackawoi. \IS ROTI ap aa RR eae Ue NE ae ba eis a a gh ge Ca Wapiana. RO IREREE So See era to ei Sore rants At, COU oS A Satake eee Warrau, Woruma, hybrids. Woyowai, only the name is known. PREM AS, SUD-tibe Of MAGEE. 2: 2s o.oo eonccecdds sec de eoeeee ee Carib. Bessels has made an interesting addition to our knowledge of the Es- kimo in his chapter on the northernmost inhabitants of the earth, whom he calls the Itanese. The opinion is gaining ground that the present Eskimo are the sur- vivors of a very ancient stock once spread much farther south on this continent, and, according to some, dwelling in the caves of France. Professor Dawkins is commonly regarded as the apostle of this theory, and has published a paper in Nature upon the subject. Dr. Otto Stoll’s volume on the ethnography of the Republic of Gua- temala is an excellent guidebook to the tribes of that country. Com- parative vocabularies are given, as well as a colored chart showing the tribes, and a dissected chart exhibiting the affiliations of the different branches of the stock. Von Hellwald’s Natural History of Man has added twelve numbers during the year. Prof. A. H. Keane has brought this work to the notice of English readers in his appendices to Sanford’s Compendiums. The same gentleman contributes to Nature, of January 24, 1884, a paper on the Egyptian Sudan and its inhabitants, an abstract of which is given below. Sudan is the Arabic equivalent of Nigritia (Negroland). Its sections are: (1) Western Sudan.—The basins of the Senegal and Quovra-Bénue (Niger). (2) Central Sudan.—The basins of the Komaduga and Shaw, with lands draining into Lake Chad. (3) Eastern Sudan.—Kast of Waidai, the Upper and Middle Nile Basin, now known as Egyptian Sudan. The provinces formed out of this territory in 1882 were: West Sudan.—Darfur, Kordofan, Bahrel-Ghazal, and Dongola, with capital Fasher. Central Sudan.—Khartum, Senaar, Berber, Fashoda, and the Equator (Hat-el-Istwa), with capital Khartum. East Sudan.—Taka, Suakin, and Massowah, with capital Massowah, Harrar.—Zeyla, Berbera, and Harrar, with capital Harrar. S, Mis. 33-44 690 SCLENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. The following is Mr. Keane’s ethnologic chart: Race. Main divisions. Localities. Hamites*...-.. Tibbu;: Baele, Zoghawa, Wanyanga ..-...-.. North and Northwest Darfur. Bishari (Beja) : Hi adendoa, Hallenga, Ab- | Between Red Sea and Nile, 15°-25° north. abdeh, Beni-Amer. Danokil: Adaiel, Dahimela, &o .......-.. Between Abyssinian coast, 10°-15° horth, Salo, Bogoe Habel. cise ks wan ean we cba Massowah district. Somali: Tdur, Isa, Miljarten, &o Gult of Aden coast. Galla (Orma): Yeju, Wollo, Mecha, &o ...| Bast and south of Gojam. Semitest....... Arab: Kababish, Sheygieh, Robabat, &o ..| W. f Nile, between Dongolaand Khartum, Homran, Rekhabin, Alawin .........-...- Senaar, Homran, Hamp, El-Homr, Habanieh, &e...| Korfodan and Darfur. Wisish Bahemiw ve soe. venee ee aenaseas North Darfur. Himyaritie: Tigré, Dembela, Lasta....... North and Bast Abyssinia, PIURPAD cas cetc ann lislcce etiveetceed cocmeinante >| East from Shoa. INUDIaiT. ckucete Barabra (mixed) : Kenns, Mahasi, Dongo- | Nile Valley, Egypt to Old Dongola. lawi. True Nuba: Kargo, Kulfan, Kolaji, Jebel | Kordofan. Nuba, Tumatli. Fur: Fur, Konjara, Fongoro, &o .......... Darfur. RONSON ULL ierac ais a cin aan wear Gillibat. Barea) Basé (Kumama) .... .-.0.. cnc cewecs Taka, Mareb Valley. Hon): AAS Ds a. ae ce ke tees sxe eens ayes Senaar. IN@UTOS ~ G. Haliburton. Eastern archery. Edward S. Morse. Formation of Iroquois words. Erminnie A. Smith. The different races who built mounds in Wisconsin. Stephen D. Peet. Evolution of animal life illustrated by study of emblematic mounds. Stephen D. Peet. Etymology of the Iroquois word Rha-wen-ni-yu. Erminnie A. Smith. American Journal of Philology. Vol. 1v, No. 4; Vol. v1, Nos.1,2,3. Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore. American Naturalist, The. Monthly. Vol.xvu1. Philadelphia. American Philological Association, Trans. Vol. xiv of the meeting in 1883. Pub. Cambridge, 1884. 79-+-xLvil pp. 8vo. Sixteenth An. Session at Hanover, N. H., July &-10. American Philosophical Soc., Proceedings. Philadelphia. Vol. xxi. Apr., 1683, to Jan., 1884. Anales del Museo Nacional de México. Vol.1v. [Many archeological papers of great value by Sanchez, Troncoso, Chavero, &ce. ] ANDERSON, JOHN.—Catalogue and hand-book of the archxological collections in the Indian Museum. Part. Gupta inscriptions and galleries. Calcutta, 1883. ANDREE, R.—Die Metalle bei den Naturvélkern mit Beriicksichtigung priihistorischer Verhaltnisse. Lpzg., xv1+166 pp., 57 illustrations. War das Eisen im Vorcolumbischeu Amerika bekannt? Mittheil. anthrop. Gesellsch. in Wien, xIv [97-99]. 8vo. Annales du Musée Guimet. Tomev. Paris: Leroux. [The Musée Guimet isdevoted exclusively to the history of religions, } Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland. Journal, Vol. x1u, 3 and 4; Vol. xiv, 14-2. London. Anthropologische Gesellschaft, in Wien. Mittheilungen. Vol. xry. Bd. 1-x. Wien 1870-1880. 8vo. Bd. 1-X, zusammen. Bd. XI und xil. Wien 1881, 1882. 4to. Bd. xm und xiv. Wien 1883 und 1884. 4to. [See Mittheil., Heft 1v, for proceedings of the extraordinary meeting in April, and for the best account of the anthropological literature of 1884 in existence at the time of this report. ] Anthropometric Committee of the British Association. [See Am. Naturalist xv, 646. ] Anthropophagy. Boston Med. and Surg. J., cx1, 185-187. Anzeiger des germanischen National-Museums. Bd.1, Nos. 1-5. Archeological Institute of America. Fifth An. Report and Third An. Report of the committee on American school of classical studies at Athens. Boston. Papers of the Am. series, No.2, Report of an archxological tour in Mex.in 1881, by A. F. Bandelier. Archeology of North Africa. Science, Iv, 438. ARCHINARD, L.—La Fabrication du Fer dans le Soudan. Rev. d@’Ethnog., m1, 249. Archiy fiir Anthropologie. Vol.xv. Parts 3 and 4. Archivio per l’ antropologia e la etnologia. Vol.x1v. Florence. Dr. Paolo Mante- gazza. ARDOUIN, L&oN.—Apergu sur Vhistoire de la médecine au Japon. Paris: 49 pp Armengol Font Sanmarti. El Duelo, Barcelona, 31 pp. 8vo. 696 SCIENVIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. ARZRUNI, A.— Ueber das Vorkommen von Zinnstein und die Bronzeindustrie des Kau- kasus. Verhandl. Berl. Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., 58 pp. Association Frangaise pour PAvancement des Sciences. Papers of general interest. (xu. session, Sept. 5—11, Blois. Zabarowski, M., Les chiens domestiques de Vancienne Egypte. Nadaillac, Marquis de, Cinerary and burial mounds of North America. Cartailhac, E., Un crane humain néolithique avec trépanation cica- trisée et perforation posthume. Chantre, Ernest, Les nécropoles hallstattiennes du Caucase. Pruniéres, Dr., Le dolmen de Dévézes, commune du Massegros, Lozére. Conference at Thenay, and the labors of the section of Anthropology Matinau. Compte rendu de la 12¢ session. Rouen, 1883; Paris, 1884. 8vo. Xvill. October.) ASTARLOA, P. P.—Discursos filoséficos sobre la lengua primitiva 6 gramdtica y andlisis razonada de la euskara 6 bascuence. Madrid. vill + 784 pp. 4to. Astrin.—Le Royaume d’Orakan, dans l’Archipel des Bissagos. Bull. Soc. Géog. de Marseilles. VuI, 357-364. AUDIBERTI, G.—Tipi di criminali nati. Arch. di psichiat., ete., Torino, v, 115-119. Ausland, Das. Stuttgart. Vol.Lvi. 52 numbers. AVERY, JOHN.—The Hill tribes of India. Am. Antiquar., v1, 307-316. [Also author of notes in same journal. ] The races of the Pacific Ocean. Am. Antiquar., V1, 361-368. BABBITT, FRANCES E.—Some implements of the Minnesota Ojibwas. Science. Dec. 12, 1884, vol. Iv, pp. 527-529. ——— Vestiges of glacial man in Minnesota. Am. Naturalist, xx1it, 594-604 ; 697- 707. BAJENOFF, N.—Etude anthropologique sur les criminels. Ann. méd.-psych., Paris. 6s. XII, pp. 285-289. ——— Etudes céphalométriques sur des bustes d’assassins suppliciés et de person- nages distingués. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop., Par., viz, pp. 502-514. BaILuibRE, J. B., et fils.—Catalogue général des livres anciens et modernes, frangais et étrangers, etc. Paris. 447 pp. 8vo. Bancrort, H. H.—History of California, Vol. 1, 1542-1800. Vol. xviii of the series. History of the Northwest Coast. Vols. tand 1, 1543-1800. Vols. xxvu and xxvii of the series. BANDELIER, A. F.—Report of an archeological tour in Mexico, in 1881. YV. An. Rep. Archeol. Inst. America. Boston. 326 pp. 8vo. Bapst, G.—Les métaux dans V’antiquité et au moyen-dge. Paris. 320 pp.ill. 8vo. BaRBER, E. A.—The Lenni-Lenape Indians in Pennsylvania. Am. Antiquar., VI, 385- 388. Report on the accessions to the society’s cabinet (Rep. Proc. Numism. Antiq. Soc. Phila., 1883). Philad. 1884, 21-25, fig. 1-4. 8vo. BARDEY, M.—Traditions et divisions du Somal (pays des Somalis). Bull. Soc. d’An- throp., VII, 331-348. (Analytical table of Somalis Ischaqs.) BaRNEY, E. G.—Native races of Colombia. Am. Antiquar., vi, 1-7. BARTELS, MAy.—Ueber den Affenmenschen und den Biirenmenschen. Ztschr. f. Eth- nol., XVI, 106-113. BasTIAN, ADOLF. Allgemeine Grundziige der Ethnologie. Berlin: D. Reimer, 1884, XXxIV, 144 pp., 8 vo. Die Ethnographie in ihren geographischen und historischen Gesichtspunkten. Ztschr. f. Ethnol. Berlin, xv1, 60-68. Berlin, 3 tables. 8vo. BAYE, JOSEPH, BARON DE.—Sujets décoratifs empruntés au régne animal dans Vin- dustrie Gauloise. Mém. Soc. Nat. des Antiquaires de France. XLIv, Paris. 8 pp. BEAL, S.—Budhist records of the western world. Translated from the Chinese of Hiuen Tsiang (A. D. 629). 2vols. London: Triibner. 620 pp. 8vo. Indonesien, oder die Inseln des malayischen Archipel. Lfg. 1. Die Molukken. — nea om ANTHROPOLOGY. 697 BEAU DE SAINT-Pot Lias, X. Let Battaks.—(From De France & Sumatra.) Rev. @Ethnog., Paris, 111, 227-248. BrEAUNIS, H.—Recherches expérimentales sur les conditions de activité cérébrale et sur la physiologie des nerfs. Paris, 166 pp., 19 pl., dvo. BEAUREGARD, OLLIVIER.—L’antiquité du fer en Egypte. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris, vu, 104-127. L’Ethnique Singalais. Leyde, br. 21 pp., 8vo. (v1. Sess. Cong. internat. des Orientalistes 4 Leyde.) Beck, LupwiG.—Die Geschichte des Eisens in technischer und kulturgeschichtlicher Beziehung. Pt. 1." Braunschweig. 315 wood-cuts. 8vo. BENEDIKT, M.--Ueber Kraniometrie und Kephalometrie. Wien. Med. Presse, xxv, 737-739. : Bent, C.—Di alecuni maniere di scrittura usate dagli Aztechi. Arch. per l’Antrop., Firenze, xiv, 53-62. BERTHOUD, E. L.—The Aztecs. Kansas City Rev., vu. April. BERTRAND, ALEX.—Cours @archéologie nationale. La Gaule avant les Gaulois. Paris. 215 pp., ill. 8vo. La Gaule avant les Gaulois. Paris. 204p., 77fig., 8vo. 1884. Histoire de la philosophie chez les médecins. Rev. Scient., Paris, XXXIII, 137-143. BEssELs, Em1L.—The northernmost inhabitants of the earth. Am. Naturalist, xvm1, 861-881. BIANCcHI, S.—Abnorme creste frontale in tm cranio di demente. Boll. d. Soe. trai cult. d. sec. med. in Siena, I, 21. BIQALKE, HERMAN.—Explorations in Guatemala. Science, February 1. Buiocu, G.—Les origines du sénat romain. Paris, vil, 334 pp. 8vo. Bock, C.—Temples and elephants, or the narrative of a journey of exploration through upper Seau and Lao. London, ill., 8vo- BONAPARTE, PRINCE ROLAND. Collections anthropologiques. Portfolios of photo- graphs with anthropometric descriptions. Sf. Cloud, France. BOLLINGER, Dr.—Ueber die Feuerliinder. Corr.-Blatt., xv, 25-27. BONVALOT, G.—En Asie Centrale. De Moscou en Bactriane. Paris: gray., cartes. 12mo. Bonwick, J.—The lost Tasmanian race. London, 216 pp. 8vo. BorpikEr, A.—La colonisation scientifique et les colonies frangaises. Paris. xv1-++506 pp. 8vo. BourKE, JOHN G.—The snake dance of the Moquis of Arizona. New York. 1 vol. 30 pl. 8vo. Bowers, STEPHEN.—Relics of the Santa Barbara Indians. Kansas City Rev., vu, 748. BRABROOK, E. W —Hereditary hypospadias. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. Paris, vu, 358-360. Brain: A journal of Neurology. T.C. Buckuell, ef al. London. Vol. vir. Quarterly. Brauns, Professor.—The Ainos of Yezo. [Mem. Berlin Anthrop. Soc.] Science, January 18. The island of Yesso and its inhabitants. Germ. Assoc., Magdeburg. Nature, October 23. Brass, A.—Die thierischen Parasiten der Menschen. Kassel. vu+143 p., 6 pl. Breslau. Die anthropologische Sammlung des anatomischen Instituts der Univer- sitiit Breslau. By Dr.G. Wiedler. Arch. f. Anthrop., xv. Supplement, 45 pp. BripGEs, M. T.—Mceurs et coutumes des Fuégians. Bull. Soe. d’Anthrop. de Paris, ir sér., Vol. vil, 169--183. BRINTON, D. G.—The Congress of Americanists. Am. Naturalist, xvi, 103, 104. Memoir of Dr. H.C. Berendt. Proc. Am. Antiq. Soc., 1v, 205. — On tie Indians of Guatemala. (American Philosophical Society. October, 1884.) 698 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. BRINTON, D. G.—A grammar of the Cakchiquel language of Guatemala. Phila., 67 p. 8vo. Proc. Am. Phil. Soc. No. 115, pp. 345-413. On the cuspidiform petroglyphs, or so-called bird-track sculptures of Ohio- Proc. Acad. Nat. Se. Phila., October 28, 1884. pp. 275-277. Fired stones and prehistoric implements. TId., 279. Impressions of the figures on a ‘‘ Meday stick.” Id., 278. On the Xinca Indians of Guatemala. Am. Phil. Soc., October 17. 9 pp. British Association for the Advancement of Science, Montreal. Science, rv, p. 316. Broca, P.—Description élémentaire des circonvolutions cérébrales de ’Vhomme @aprés le cerveau schématique. Rev. d’anthrop, Paris. ‘Vu, pp. 1-21. BRoDHEAD, G.C.—Flint chips. Kansas City Rev., vil, February. Bruescu, H.—Thesaurus inscriptionum egyptiarum, ete. ul. Abth. Leipzig. vii+531-618 pp. 4to. Bucuan, J. M.—Complexion, climate, race. Proc. Canadian Inst. Toronto, m1, 158- 181. BUCKLAND, Miss A. W.—On traces of commerce in prehistoric times. J. Anthrop. Inst., x1v, 3-11. Bureau of Ethnology. Annual Report, 188021. Dated 1883. Printed in 1884. Wash- ington: Government Printer. XxxvuiI-500 pp., 77 pl., 714 fig.,2 maps. [Forcon- tents see Cushing, Smith, Henshaw, Matthews, Holmes, Stevenson. ] Burton, R. F.—The book of the sword. London. 320 pp. ill. &vo. BuTLeR, AMOS W.—Local weather-lore. Am. Meteorological J.,Dec. Detroit. CAMPBELL, JOHN.—The Khitau languages; the Aztec and its relations. Proc. Cana- dian Inst. Toronto, 1, pp. 158-181. Canadian Institute in Toronto. The Canadian Journal. Proceedings. Vol.I. 1879- 1882. Proceedings, being a continuation of Canadian Journal. Vol. 1, 1882-1883. Vol. 11, 1884. CANDOLLE, A. DE.—Origin of cultivated plants. London. (Internat.ser.) 468 pp. 8vo. Capus, G.—La musique chez les Khirghizes et les Sartes de l’Asie Centrale. Rev. @Ethnog., 111, 97. Une réception dans le Bochara, Rev. d’Ethnog., 111, 474-483. CARADEC, L.—Origine des peuples de la Bretagne et du Finistére en particulier. J. WVhyg, Paris, 1X, 329-332. Carr, L.—The mounds of the Mississippi Valley historically considered. Cincinnati. 4to. Carr, L., and N.S. SHALER.—On the prehistoric remains of Kentucky. Cincinnati. 311 pp. 8vo. , CARRIERE, G.—Recherches céphalométriques faites dans le département de l’Ardéche. L’Homme. Paris, 1, 365-367. CaRTAILHAC, E.—Anthropologie. (Extr. du Catalogue de ’Exposition de Toulouse.) Toulouse. 18 p. 8vo. Faculté des sciences de Toulouse. Cours libre d’anthropologie. Bull. Se. Dép. du Nord. Paris, v1, 161-178. Georges Cuvier et ’ancienneté de Vhomme. Matériaux, xv1it, 27. CARTER, W.—Observations on the normal, temperature of the human body. Liver- pool, Med. Ch. J., rv, 108-116. CASSEL, PAuULUS.—Aus Literatur und Symbolik. Leipzig, 1884. CasTAING, M.—Dates in the ancient history of South America. Am, Antiquar., V1, 295-299. Cat, E.—Découvertes et explorations du xv¢ au X1X¢ siécle. Paris. 279 pp. 18mo. CHADBOURNE, P. A.—Instinct: Its office in the animal kingdom and its relation to the higher powers of man. N. York. 323 pp. 8vo. CHAMBERLAIN, BAsIL HALL.—Transactions As. Soc. Japan, x. Supp}. Translation of the Kojiki, or Records of Ancient Matters Yokohama. [Rev. in Nature, Mar, 20. ] ANTHROPOLOGY. 699 CHANTRE, ERNEST.—Sur quelques Nécropoles Hallstattiennes de ’Autriche et de VIta- lie. Matériau. xxvu, 1. CHAPER.—Rapport sur une mission scientifique dans le territoire d’Assinie (céte occi- dentale @’Afrique). (Arch. des missions scient. et litt.) Paris. 8vo. CHARENCEY, H. DE.—Recherches sur le calendrier Zotzil. Rey. @Ethnog., m1, 398-401. Des suffixes en langue Quichée. Le Muséon, 1883. De la conjugaison dans les langues Maya-Quiché. Le Muséon, ur. Nos. 1, 2, Be Note sur un passage du manuscrit Troano. Rey. d’Ethnog., U1, pp. 256-258. —— Une légende cosmogonique. Havre. 48 pp. 8vo. CHARNAY, Di&siré.—Les Toltecs et leurs migrations. Bull. Soc. @Anthrop., Paris, VII, pp. 87-89. Voyage aux anciennes villes du Nouveau Monde (Mexique, Yucatan). Paris. 250 figs. and charts. 4to. Cuarpy, A.—De langle xiphoidien. Rey. d’Anthrop., Paris. vu, pp. 268-276. CHAVERO, ALFREDO.—The stone of the sun, pt.II. Anales d. Mus. nac. de México. Vol.ut. (See also the author’s contribution to a gorgeous work entitled, México a través de los siglos. ) CHEMINADE, G.—Médecine sociale; étude sur le célibat au point de vue physiologique et médical. Bordeaux. 8vo. CHERVIN, A.—Procédé rationnel et méthodique pour la mise en série des moyennes proportionnelles. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris. vu1, pp. 134-147. Chinese music, weights, and measures; the connection between them. Nature. Oct. 9. - CHOUQUET, E.—Sur la présence de l’Elephas primigenius dans les alluvions de Chelles. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris. vu, pp. 392-411. CHUDZINSKI, T.—Quelques notes sur l’anatomie de deux négres. Rey. d’Anthrop., Paris. VIII, pp. 603-616. . CLARKE, W. P.—The Indian sign Janguage, &c. Philad. 443 p.,map, 1885. 8vo. ——— Ancient earthworks in Rock Co., Wis. Am. Antiquarian, VI, pp. 317-322. CLAVEL, M.—La dépopulation aux iles Marquises. Bull, Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris, v1, pp. 490-500. Le tatouage aux iles Marquises. Rey. d’Ethnog., m1, pp. 134-149. Mutilationsethniques. Arch. de Méd. Nay., Paris, x11, pp. 211-215. Tatouage. Ib., 198-211. Les Marquisiens. Arch. de Méd. Nav., Paris, xxi, 177; xxi, 103. CLEVENGER, 8. V.—Disadvantages of the upright position. Am. Naturalist, xv, 1-8. CLouston, T.S.—The growth and development of a child in body and mind. Edinb. Health Soce., 21-48. CopRINGTON, R. H.—On the languages of Mefanesia. J. Anthrop. Inst., x1v, pp. 31-42. Cotini, G. A.—Cronaca del R. Museo Preistorico-Etnografico, Iv, Vv, VI, pp. 563-569, 652-657, 883-892. Boll. Soc. Geog. Ital. in Rom., ser. 11, Vol. 1x. CotieTT, O. W.—Death of Blackbird, the Omaha Chief. Kansas City Rev., V1, August and October. (See also note in September number by A. R. Fulton.) COLLENEAU.—Les inférieurs. L’Homme. Paris, I, pp. 432-436. Congres archéologique de France. Held in May, in Arriége. Congrés international d’anthropologie et d’archéologie préhistorique. Compte-rendu de la neuviéme session & Lisbonne, 1880. Lisbonne: Acad. Roy. Se., xirx + 723 pp., 43 pl., 8vo. Cooper, J. G—Recent archxological discoveries in New Mexico. Kansas City Rev., vil, Feb. CorLiEv, A.—Les médecins grecs depuis la mort de Galien jusqu’a la chute de Yempire d’Orient. (210-1453.) Paris méd. Ix, 217; 229; 289; 325; 349; 372; 397 ; 421; 445. 700 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. Correspondenzblatt der deutschen Gesellschaft fiir Anthropologie, Ethnologie und Urgeschichte. Munich: Ed.J.Ranke. Vol. Xv, 12 nos. Cougs, E., and J.S. Kincstry.—The Standard Library of Natural History by the leading American authorities. Boston. Nos. Cresson, H. T.—Construction of ancient terra-cotta pitch-pipes and flageolets. Am, Naturalist, xv, pp. 498-509. Curious funeral ceremonies. Pop. Sc. Month., N. Y., xxv, pp. 631-839. CusHING, F. H.—On the development of industrial and ornamental art among the Zunis of N. Mexico. Brit. Assoc., Montreal. Nature, Oct. 9. Zuni Fetiches. Bur. Ethnol., 2 An. Rep., 9-46. Cust, RoperT NEEDHAM.—A sketch of the modern languages of Africa. London. [Rev. Nature, Feb. 21.] DABRY DE 'l'HIERSANT, P.—De Vorigine des Indiens du Nouveau Monde et de leur civilisation. Paris. 8vo. DaALEAU, F.—Sur les lésions que présentent certains os de la période paléolithique. Paris. 8vo. [Tr. Assoc. Frang., Rouen.] Dat, WM. H.—A Mussulman propaganda. Science, Nov. 14, 457. The geographical distribution of labretifery. Am. Assoc. DaLTon, J.C.—The differences in form of the adult head. N.Y. Med. J., Xxx1x, 279. Dawson, J. W.—Notes on prehistoric man in Egypt and the Lebanon. [Victoria In- stitute, May 4, 1884, and separate. ] Deutsche anthropologische Gesellschaft, xv. Allgemeine Versammlung. LIST OF COMMUNICATIONS: Opening address. By Dr. R. Virchow. New publications upon diluvial man. By Johannes Ranke, general secretary. The end of the Stone Agein Europe. Id. Copying of Antique Jewelry. By Herr Telge. Upon a norma for pelvimetry. By Schaaffhausen. Cranial cubature methods tested by the bronze skull. By J. Ranke. Upon the greater length of the second toe among the Greeks. By Herr Albrecht. The greater bestiality of the human female sex, anatomically considered. Id. Difference between the human pelvis and that of the higher apes. Id. Prehistoric plants in Schlesien. Ferd. Cohn. Primitive and mixed races of the Philippines. By Herr Schadenberg. The explorations in Tiryns. By Henry Schliemann. Anthropology in Hungary. By A. von Torok. Magyar cranial types. Jd. Finds from the Caucasus. By Herr Tischler. First dwellers between the Weichsel and the Elbe. Herr Szule. Upon the Rhine alluvium. Herr Schaaffhausen. Alaric’s grave. By St. Miiller. Report of the hair commission. Ranke, Schaaffhausen, Waldeyer. The site of the national altar of the Suevi in Semnonenwalde. By Herr Bela. Significance of symbols on two lances with runic inscriptions. By H. Szumowski. Ethnic types of further Asia. By von Luschau. Craniological apparatus. By A. von Térék. Anthropometric apparatus for travelers. By R. Virchow. Measurement of the living. J. Ranke. Macrocephalic and other crania. By A. von Térék. Investigation on enamels. By H. Tischler. Epiphyses between the occipital and the sphenoid. By Herr Albrecht. South Sea crania. By R. Krause. ‘Old surgical instruments. By Herr Neugebauer. - Dawkins, W. Boyp.—On the range of the Eskimo in time and space. British Asso- ciation, Montreal. Nature, Oct. 2. Day, SHERMAN.—The Indian census. Am. Naturalist, XvIiI, 215, 216. DEAKIN, C. W.S.—The length of the intestines in the natives of India. Proc. N. W. Proy., &c., Brit. Med. Assoc , Allahabad, 1883. 1. 90. ANTHROPOLOGY. TOL DEBREYNE, P., et A. FERRAND.—La théologie morale et les sciences médicales. Paris, 18mo. DECHAMBRE, A., et L. THOMas.—Divination. Dict. encye. d. sc. méd., Paris. xxx, 24-96. Drnoux, J.-B.—Du sacrifice humain et de l’anthropophagie dans le Vaudou. Bull. Soc. @Anthrop. de Paris, vir, 206-216. DELESLE, FERNAND.—La fabrication du fer dans le Haut Ogowe. Rev. @’Ethnog. 11, 465. DELITSCU, FRIEDR.—Die Sprache der Kossaeer. Leipzig. 1884. The Hebrew language viewed in the light of Assyrian research. London. 8vo. DENIKER, J.—Etude sur les Kalmouks. Rey. d’Anthrop., Paris. v1, 671; Vu, 277; 493; vill, 640. La Corée et les Coréens (Science et Nature, janv. 1885). Paris. 8vo. Deutsche anthropologische Gesellschaft, xvth general meeting in Breslau, 4-7 August, Prof. Dr. J. Ranke, Miinchen, general secretary. Corr. Blatt, xv, No.9, sq. Deutsche Gesellschaft fiir Natur und Volkerkunde Ost-Asiens. Mittheilungen. Vols. 1,,u1. Yokohama, 1873-1884. Dictionnaire des sciences anthropologiques. Paris: tome1., A-G.; also livr. 13 & 14. Paris. Ill. 8vo. [To becompleted in 24 livr., 2 vols. ] DretzscH, Oscar.—Die wichtigsten Nahrungsmittel und Getrinke, deren Verunrei- nigungen und Verfiilschungen. Ziirich. 352 pp. 8vo. DONNER, O.—Ueber den Einfluss des Litanischen auf die tinneschen Sprachen. Inter- nat. Ztschr. f. allg. Spreh., 1, 257-271. DOLBESCHEFF, W.—Archiiologische Forschungen im Bezirk des Terek (Nordkauka- sus). Ztschr. f. Ethnol., xvi, 134-141; 145-163. Dorsey, J. OWEN.—Letter in reply to Dr. Riggs respecting click-sounds in Ponca and Omaha. Am. Antiquarian, p. 203. The myths of the raccoon and the crawfish among Dakota tribes. Am. Anti- quarian, VI, pp. 237-240. An account of the war customs of the Osages. Am. Naturalist, Xvi, 113-133. Siouan folklore and mythologic notes. Am. Antiquarian, VI, pp. 174-176; 237- 240. DRUMMOND, HENRY.—Natural law in the spiritual world. N. York. DuBoR, G. DE.—Les langues et l’espéce humaine. Le Muséon, 11, pp. 100-116. Duncan, W. S.—A new method of comparing the forms of skulls. Rep. Brit. Assoc., Lit, 570. Dun, WALTER A.—Ancient earthworks in the State of Ohio. J. Cin. Soc. Nat. Hist., vil, 1884. pp. 83-87. Swiss lake-dwellers. Jbid., 87-91. DuREAU, A.—Documents pour servir & l’histoire de la médecine. Gaz. Méd. de Paris, I, pp. 157-160. DuvaL, MaTruias.—Cours d’anthropologie zoologique ; le transformisme. Rev.d’An- throp., VI; continued vil, 22; VI, 577. Essai de représentation planisphérique des circonvolutions cérébrales. Bull. Soc. @Anthrop. de Paris, v1, 902-908. L’embryologie et Vanthropologie. Pop. Se. Month., xxv, 129-136. EDKINS, JOSEPH.—Stone hatchets in China. [Found in a mound 40 feet high, near Kalgan, 110 miles west of Pekin. ] Effect of marriage on life. Indian Med. J., Allahabad, m1, 79-82. [From Knowl- edge. ] Ext, M.—Dokibati, or the god of the Puget Sound Indians. Am. Antiquar., V1, 389- 392. ELLACOMBE, H.N.—The plant-lore and garden craft of Shakespeare. London, 430 pp. 8vo, 702 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. ELy, RicHarp T.—The past and the present of political economy. Johns Hopkins Univ. Studies, m1, 2 ser. ENGELMANN, G. J.—Die Geburt bei den Urvélkern. Wien. 212 pp.,4 pl. 8vo. English catalogue of books for 1883, &c. Also the principal books published in the United States of America. London, 128 pp. 8vo. Ernst, A.—Archiiologische Gegenstiinde aus Venezuela Verhandl. Berl. anthrop. Gesellsch., 453-458. ERNST, FERDINAND VON.—Niederlandisch-Indien. vi. Jahresb. d. geog. Gesellsch, v. Bern, pp. 7-28. Etrange (Une) société. Un diner pour la vulgarisation de la dissection mutuelle. [ Morning News, Feb.7.] Pop. Se. Month., xxv, 113-115. Exposition Internationale Géographique 4 Toulouse. 1 June—15 August. FALLot, ErNsT.—Histoire de la colonie frangaise du Sénégal. Bull. Soc. de Géogr. de Marseille. v1, pp. 113-133, 221-238, 337-359 ; vir, pp. 196-278. FIELD, B. BusH.—Medical thoughts of Shakespeare. Easton: Pa., 16 pp. 8vo. Finscu, O.—Anthropologische Ergebnisse einer Reise in der Siidsee und dem Malayi- schen Archipel in den Jahren 1879-1882. Berlin. XI-78pp.,6pl. 8vo. [Rev. in Matériaux, XVII, 356. ] FISHER, F. H., J. E. Grit, D. T. RoBERTS.—Statistical, descriptive and historical ac- count of the northwest provinces of India. Vol. x1. London. FiscnerR, H.—Ueber die Asiatischen Pilgér-Amulete. Corr.-Bl. deutsch. Ges. f. An- throp., Miinchen, xv, 12. Ueber den Alaska-Jadeit. Id., 53. The stone implements of Asia. Proc. Am. Antiq. Soc. Iv, 178. FiskE, JoHN.—The destiny of man viewed in the light of his origin. Boston. Fison, LORIMER.—The Nauega or sacred stone inclosure of Wainimala, Fiji. London. pp. svo. [From J. Anthrop. Inst. xtv, 14-30. ] IFLEAY, F. G.—Lectures on polytheism. III. German mythology. Am. Antiquar., VI, 225-231. Hindoo mythology, pages 289-294. FLower, W. H.—Additional observations on the osteology of the natives of the Anda- man Islands. J.Anthrop. Inst., London, xiv, 15-120. On the size of the teeth as a character of race. Ibid., 153-185. Address delivered at the anniversary meeting of the Anthrop. Inst. of Gr, Brit. and Ireland, Jan. 22. br.14 p. 8vo. On the aims and prospects of the study of anthropology. J. Anthrop. Inst. London, xu, 488-501. Aims of the study of anthropology. Pop. Sc. Month. N. Y. xxv, 605-609. Nature, Jan. 31. Fockr, W. 0.—The origin of species from mongrels between races and other species, J.Se. London. v1, 409-412. Folklore society. ForBEs, H.O.—On some of the tribes of the island of Timor. J. Anthrop. Inst., X11, 402-429, FOUREREAU, L.—La féte des Polygoudoux. Rev. d@’Ethnog., m1, pp. 120-133. FRIEND, HILDERIC.—F lowers and flower-lore. London: Sonnenschein. 2 vols. Xvi- 352, 353-704 pp. 8vo. [1884.] f The mythology of flowers and plants. London. 8vo. Fortscu, A.—A human skull from the Loess of Podbaba, near Prague. Science, 11, 785. . GABELENTZ, GEORG VON DER.—Zur grammatischen Beurtheilung des Chinesischen. Internat. Ztschr., 1, 272-280. GALTON, FRANCIS.—Record of family faculties, ete. London. iv-+68 pp., 4to. [Rev. Am. Naturalist, Xv1iI, 515.] Life-history album. viii+ 172 pp., 8 pl. 4to. ——— The identiscope. Nature, October 30. pal ANTHROPOLOGY. 703 GALTON, FRANCIS.—The weight of British noblemen during the last three genera- tions. Anthropometric laboratory ; arranged for the determinavion of height, weight, span, breathing power, strength of pull and squeeze, quickness of blow, hearing, seeing, color sense, and other personal data. London. 12 pp., tab. 8vo. GARSON, J. G.—On the cranial characters of the nations of Timor-laut. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond., x1, pp. 356-402, 2 pl. —— Pera pameiy: Rep. Brit. Assoc., Lond., Li, 569. On the Frankfort craniometric “iaseanee with critical remarks thereon. J. Anthrop. Inst., xtv, pp. 64-82. Gatscuet, A. S.—Editor of linguistic notes in American Antiquarian. Contribu- tions in each number. ——— A migration legend of the Creek Indians. Vol. 1. Brinton’s library of abo- riginal literature, No.1v,251 p. 8vo. —— On the substantive verb in some North American languages. Proc. Am. Philolog. Assoc., sixteenth annual session. GEIGER, WILHELM.—La civilisation des Aryas. Le Muséon, 111, pp. 430-438 ; 627-622. GipB, JouN.—-The original home of the Aryans. Brit. Quarterly, LXXxX, pp. 377-339. [Review of ‘“Sprachvergleichung und Urgeschichte: Linguistisch-historische Beitrige zur Erforschung des indogermanischen Alterthums.” Jena, 1883; and “Origines ariace. Linguistisch-ethnologische Untersuchungen zur altesten Geschichte der arischen Vélker und Sprachen.” Wein und Teschen. 1883. ] GiBpBons, H.—On some of the relations of body to mind. Pacific Med. & S. J. San Francisco, XXVI, pp. 337-362. Globus. Illustrirte Zeitschrift fiir Linder- und Voélkerkunde. Braunschweig. XLV, XLVI. GOBINEAU, A. DE.—Essai sur PEGI: des races humaines, 2. éd. Paris. 2v. 592,566 pp. 12mo. GOLDSTEIN, E.—Des circonférences du thorax et de leur rapport dla taille. Rey. d’An- throp., Paris, v11, 460-485. ——— Du plan horizontal du crane. Rey. d’Anthrop. Paris. vill, pp. 680-720. GoLiMER, C. A.—On African symbolic messages. J. Anthrop. Inst., xtv, pp. 169-180. GONZALEZ SERRANO, W.—La sociologia cientifica. Madrid. 153 p. 8vo. GRASSMAN, R.—Die Menschenlehre, oder die Anthropologie. Stettin. 8vo. GraTacaP, L. P.—Antiquities of Mexico. Am. Antiquar., v1, 241-247. Central America at the time of the Conquest. Am. Antiquarian, V1, 369-376. GRAVIER, G.—Note sur l’Inde frangaise. Bull. Soc. Normande de Géogr., 241-253. ‘Gros, JULES.—Voyages, aventures et captivité de J. Bonnat chez les Achantis. Paris. 8vo. Grotius, HuGo.—On the origin of the native races of America. ‘To which is added a treatise on foreign languages and unknown islands, by Peter Albinus. Trans- lated by E. Goldschmid. Edinburgh: Priv. Print. (Bibl. curiosa.) 63 p. 16mo. HABERLANDT, MICHAEL.—Sind die Indogermanen in Europa eingewandert? Mit- theil. anthrop. Gesellsch. in Wien. Vol. xv, [86-90. ] HAECKEL, E.—Indische Reisebriefe. 2. Aufl. Berlin. 392 p., chart. 8vo. HALDANE, J.S.—Life and mechanism. Mind. London. 1x, pp. 27-47. HALE, HoratTio.—On the origin of wampum. Brit. Assoc., Montreal. Nature, Oct. 9. —-— The Tutelo tribe and language. Am. Philosoph. Soc. Philad. xx1, 1-45. Hamitton, D.J.—On the structure and significance of the human corpus callosum, Proc. Roy. Soc., Xx Xvi (1884), 349. Hamy, I. T.—Mission scientifique an Mexique et dans Amérique Centrale. 1 pt. Anthropologie du Mexique. Paris, 1884. 40 pp.,8pl. 4to. Note sur les recherches ethnographiques de M, Guesde dans les petites Antilles. Bull. Soc. @Anthrop, de Paris, yu, 293, 704 SCIENTIFIC RECORD. FOR 1884. Hamy, E. T.—Rapport sur le Concours du Prix Logerat, présenté a la Société de Géographie. [Conferred on D. Chavnary.] Paris: Soc. de Géog., 12 pp., 8vo. Les Hovas ou Merinas. J.Sc.et Nature, 12 Jan., 1884, —— Decades Americanz; mémoires d’archéologie et d’ethnographie américaines. Rev. d’Ethnog.; Paris, 11, 51-67, 150-160, 508-520. —— Sur des peintures ethniques Vun Tombeau Théban. Jd., 273-294. Presidential address. Bull. Soc. ’Anthrop., Paris, pp. 1-5. —— L’ethnogénie de l’Europe occidentale. [Extr.] Matériaux, xvi, 35,14 pp. HANAUSEK, T. F’.— Die Nahrungs- und Genuss-Mittel aus dem Pflanzenreiche. Kassel. XIV-+ 485 pp. ill. &vo. HANDELMANN.— Ueber eingegrabene undeingemauerte Miihlsteine. Verhandl. Berlin. Anthrop. Gesellsch., 1884, 138-140. Handworterbuch der Zoologie, Anthropologie und Ethnologie. Breslau. 8vo. HARMAND, J.—Birmanie. Résumé ethnographique et linguistique. Paris: Maison- neuve. br. in-8vo. HARTMANN, R.—La scimmie antropomorfe e la loro organizzazione in confronto con quella dell’ uomo. Tr. G. Cattaneo. Milano: 8vo. Harvey, A.—Choosing one’s father. Med. Times and Gaz., London, 1, 42. HAVARD, V.—The Mezquit. Am. Naturalist, xx, 451-459. HAYNES, HENRY W.—Some new evidences of cannibalism among New England Indians from Mount Desert, Me. Proc. Boston Soc. Nat. Hist., xx11, p. 60. Agricultural implements, New England Indians. Id., 437. Ancient soap-stone quarries. Am. Antiquar. Soc., 1, p. 364. Copper implements of America. Jd., m1, p. 335. Alnwick Castle antiquities. Science, 1, 136. Archeology in Portugal. Jd., 764. The bone caves of Poland. Jd., 11, 489. HELLWALD, F. V.—Naturgeschichte des Menschen. ill. Lf. 40-52. Stuttgart. HENNIG, C.—Ueber die Beckenneigung bei verschiedenen Volksstiimmen. Corresp. Blatt deutsch. Ges. f. Anthrop., Miinchen, xv, 3. HENROT, H.—De Vinfluence de la presse sur la criminalité. Paris: Chaix. 8vo. HENSHAW, H. W.—Animal carvings from the mounds of the Mississippi Valley. 2. An. Rep. Bur. Ethnol., 117-166. HERSCHEL, J.—The yard, the meter, and the old French foot. Nature, July 31. HERVE, G.—L’anthropologie anatomique. Pop. Sc. Month., xxv, 225-230. HimMuy, K.—Ueber die einsilbigen Sprachen des sudéstlichen Asiens. Internat.- Ztschr., 1, 281-294. HIRSCHFELDER, C. A.—Prehistoric remains in Canada. Brit. Assoc., Montreal. Nature, Oct. 9. HirtH, G.—Kulturgeschichtliches Bilderbuch aus drei Jahrhunderten. 17-24 Lfg. Miinchen. Fol. xx, 515-768 p. His, W.—Die Anfiinge unseres kérperlichen Daseins. Cor.-Bl. f. schwerz. Aerzte, Basel, x1v, 337-348. Historical Museum of Moscow, Alneis S. Orwarof, director. HOFFMANN, W. J.—Selish myths. Bull. Essex Inst., xv, 3-20. Der Indianische Medizinmann. Das Ausland, No. 9, 173-176. Ein Beitrag zu dem Stadium der Bilderschtift. Id., No. 33, 646-651, 1 pl; No. 34, 666-669, 1 pl. La féte annuelle des Indiens Aukaris. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris, vil, 526-534. HouMEs, W. H. —Art in shell of the ancient Americans. 2 An. Rep. Bur. Ethnology, 179-306. Burial masks of the ancient Peruvians. Science, July 4. - Kecentric figures from Southern mounds. Science, April 11, HT || i 1D A EP en) eee eee hai eT . Be hale ae le ' . sin a: ANTHROPOLOGY. T05 *-” Homes, T. V.—Ihe geological position of the human skeleton found at Tilbury. Nature, March 6. [Thereis no proof of the palxolithic age of the Tilbury relic. ] HORSLEY, VICTOR, and Epwarp A. SCHAFER.—Experimental researches in cerebral physiology. Proc. Roy. Soc., XXxvi, (1884), 437-441. HOVELACQUE, A.—L’homme et la faculté du langage. Pop. Sc. Month, xxv, 33-42. Howitt, A. W., anp L. Fison.—On the deme and the horde. J. Anthrop. Inst., London, xiv, 142-169. , On some Australian ceremonies of initation. IJd., xm, 432-458. _ Re Oe HYADES, Dr.—Ethnographie fuégienne. Bull. Soc. d@’Anthrop. Paris, vu, 147-183. Notes hygiéniques et médicales sur les Fuégians de l’archipel du Cap Horn. Rev. @Hyg., Paris, v1, 550-590. et GALIPPE. (Observations sur le systéme dentaire des Fuégians. Paris. 8vo. (Repr. J.d. conn. méd. prat.) IBBETSON, DENZIL CHARLES JELF.—Ouitlines of Punjab ethnography ; being extracts from the Punjab census of 1881, treating of religion, language and caste. Cal- cutta: Gov’t Print., 1883. 4to. Ixow, M. C.—The color of the eyes and hair. Bulletin of the Paris Society of Anthro- pology, vol. Xvi, pp. 440-457. Im THURN, EVERARD.—Review. See Athenzum March 29. Index. Index-Catalogue of the Library of the Surgeon-General’s Office, United States Army. Authors and subjects. Vol. v. Flaccus to Hearth. Washington: Government Printer. 4to. Jndex-Medicus.—A monthly classified record of the current medical literature of the world. Compiled under the supervision of Dr. John §. Billings, surgeon, U. S. A., and Dr. Robert Fletcher, M. R. C.S. Eng. Vol. vi. Jan.—Dec., 1884. New York: Leypoldt. 8vo. Indian Affairs. Annual Report of the Commissioner. Washington, Gov’t Printer. Indian Commissioners. Fifteenth annual Rep. Washington, Gov’t Printer. Indian languages of South America. Science, Iv, 138. Internationale Zeitschrift fiir allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft. F.Techmer. Band 1, Heft 1 and 1 Lpzg., XvI + 256 p. 257-518, 4 pl. 8vo. JACOBSEN, CAPTAIN.—Ethnologische Gegenstiinde aus seiner im Alaska-Territorium zusammengebrachten sammlung. Verhandl. Berl. Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., Mar. 15, 221. Reise an der Nordwestkiiste Amerikas, 1881-83. Lpzg.: Spohr. ill. JACOBSTHAL, Professor.—On the evolution of forms of ornament. Nature, July 10, 17. JACOLLIOT, L.—Histoire naturelle et sociale de Vhumanité. Le mondé primitif, les lois naturelles, et les lois sociales. Paris: Marpon et Flammarion. 591 pp. 8vo. JAEGER, G.—Entdeckung der Seele. 3. Aufl., 7 Lief. Lpzg. 8vo. JEAN, Le P.—Etude comparative des langues Malgache et Malaise. Bull. Soc. - Géog. Paris. 135-144. JAMES, D. H.—Heredity. Obst. Gaz., Cincin., vi, 225-230. JisIMaA, J., and C. Sasaki.—Okadaira shell-mounds at Hitachi, being an appendix to memoir, vol. I, pt. I, of the science department. Tokio Daigabu (university), 1883. 7 pp., 11 tables. Johus Hopkins University studies in historical and political science, H. B. Adams, editor. JouNSTON, H. H.—On the races of the Congo and the Portuguese colonies in Western Africa. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond., x11, 461-479, 2 pl. The river Congo, from its mouth to B6l6b6, with a general description of ancl natural history and anthropology of its western basin. London, xvu-470 pl., maps and ill, Svo. 1884. (Rev. in Nature, by A. H. Keane, Ap. 17.) t JOHNSTON, Kr1tH.—Africa, 3ed. London. 8vo. S. Mis. 33——45 706 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. JUBAINVILLE, H. @’ARBOIS DE.—Le cycle mythologique irlandais et la mythologie celtique. Paris. 1 vol. xtI-411p. 8vo. Kanpa, T.—Notes on ancient stone implements, &c., of Japan. By T. Kanda, ex- governor of Hiogo, member of Genvoin (senate), member of Gakushikwaiin. Trans- lated by N. Kanda. With 24 lith. pl. and imap. Tokio. 8pp. sm. 4to. Kansas City Review of Science and Industry. Kansas City,Mo. Vol. vir. Monthly. [Publishes anthropological papers in each number. ] Katalog der anthropologischen Sammlung des anatomischen Museums zu Breslau. Braunschweig. 40 pp. 4to. Katalog der prihistorischen Ausstellung bei dem Kongress zu Breslau. Breslau. Keane, A, H.—Ethnology of Egyptian Sudan. J.Anthrop. Inst., Lond., x1v, 91-112. The tribes of Egyptian Sudan. Am. Naturalist, xvi, 553. [Nature, Jan. 24.] Pathological anthropology. Nature, March 27. [Author of many ethnologi- cal reviews in Nature. | Native American literature and ethnology. Nature, Aug. 7. KIRCKHOFFS.—Le crane néanderthbaloidede Podbaba. L’Homme, Paris, I, 528-531. KLEIN, HuGo.—Der Totencultus in Ungarn. Ausland, No. 19. KoBYLINSKI, O.—Ueber eine flughautihnliche Ausbreitung am Halse. Archiv f. Anthrop., Xv, 343-348. KoLiMann, A.—Der Tastapparat der Hand der menschlichen Rassen und der Affen in seiner Entwickelung und Gliederung. Hamb. & Lpz’g: L. Voss, 1883. 77 pp., 2 pl. 8vo. KOLLMANN, J.—Craniologische Griiberfunde in der Schweiz. Verhandl. d. naturf. Gesellsch. in Basel, vir, 352-386. : Hohes Alter der Menschenrassen. Ztschr. f. Ethnol., xv1, 181-212. Deux espéces de variations corrélatives dans le crane facial de /homme. Paris. 8vo. [Assoc. Fr. Avance. Se., 4 Rouen, 1883. ] KOoniG, J.—Chemische Zusammensetzung der menschlichen Nahrungs- und Genussmit- tel. 2.ed. 8vo. Berlin, 1,351 p., 0, 820 p. . Kongelige Nordiske Oldskrift-Selskab i Kjgbenhavn. Aarbgrger for Nordisk Old- kyndighed og Historie. Kj@benhavn. KosERITZ, SAN CARLOS.—Bosquejos ethnologicos. In Gazeta de Porto Alegre, and separate. [Study based upon over 2,000 objects collected in Rio Grande do Sul, Brazil. ] Kosmos.—Zeitschrift fiir die gesammte Entwickelungslehre. Stuttgart. vu, 12 numbers. , KoreLMAnn, L.—Die Augen von 22Kalmucken. Ztschr. f. Ethnol., Berlin, Xv1, 77-84. —— Die Augen von 23 Singhalesen und 3 Hindus. Jb. 164-171. Krauss, H. AUREL.—Fischfang, Jagd, und Handel bei den Thlinkit-Indianen. Ver- handl. Berl. Gesellsch., Anthrop. April, 232-235. Ztschr. f. Ethnol., Xv1. Krauss, Frrep. S.—Sagen und Mirchen der Siidslaven. 1, Lpzg. See also Mittheil. Anthrop. Gesellsch. in Wien, XIv, 13-48. KRUSZEWSKI, N.—Prinzipen der Sprachentwickelung. Internat. Ztschr., 1, 281-807. KucuuHorr, Dr.—Darwinism and racial evolution. Germ. Assoc., Magdeburg. Na- ture, October 23. Kunstgewerbe-Museum zu Berlin. Siebente Sonder-Ausstellung, 27. Nov.—1. Feb. 1884. Berlin. 1883. 18mo. Kunz, G. F.—Korean curios. Science, iv, 172. LABOULBENE.—Histoire des médecins arabes et de ’Ecole de Salerne. Gaz. d’ hép., Paris, Lv1, 1161; Lyi, 25, 73. Also, Union méd., Paris, xxxvu, 145, 185, 321, 357, 381, 393. LaILuet, E.—La France orientale. L’ile de Madagascar, etc. Paris. 18vo. Le Bon, Gustav.—La civilisation des Arabes. Paris: xv + 709 pp. 10 lith., 4 maps, 366 figs. 4to. ae oe ‘ _—— ANTHROPOLOGY. 707 Lr Bon, Gusrav.—Sur la détermination de la circonférence du crane en fonction de ses diamétres. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris, VI, 240-243. L’Homme. Journal illustré des sciences anthropologiques. Director, Gabriel de Mortillet. [The first number appeared on the 10th January, 1884, containing 32 pp. The succeeding numbers have appeared fortnightly (10th and 25th of each month) and contain the same number of pages. ] LELAND, C. G.—The Algonkin legends of New England. Boston. xvi+ 379 pp. ill. 12mo. Lemire, Cu.—Cochinchine frangaise, royaume de Cambodge, rovazme d’Annam et Tonkin. Paris: Challemel. {L v., charts, plans, illustr. 6vo. LENZ, Oskar.—Timbuktu. Reise durch Marokko, die Sahara und den Sudan. Leip- zig: Brockhaus. I: x-+ 430 pp.,20 ill., 1 chart; Il: x+408 pp., 20 ill., 8 charts. LEsson, A.—Les Polynésiens. ‘Vol. Iv. Paris. 431 p. 8vo. (LETOURNEAU, C.—Conférence annuelle transformiste de la Société d’anthropologie. Tribune méd., Paris, XVI, 313, 325, 385, 397. Du droit d’héritage. Pop. Sc. Month., xxv, 417, 420. La sociologie ; ce qu’elle est, ce quelle doit étre. Jd., 4-7. —— L’évolution de la morale. Rev. Se. Paris, XXxIII, 673-684. La sociologie @apres ’ethnographie. 2.éd. Paris. Xvi, 608 pp. 12mo. —— Sur lanthropophagie (a poem). Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris, vu, 517. LizBLEIN, J.—Le Mythe d’Osiris. (Translated from the Norwegian by M. Larsen.) Rev. d. ’Hist. d. Relig., rx, 307. Linn, G.D.—Man. Embracing his origin, antiquity, primitive condition, races, lan- guages, religion, superstitions, customs, physical structure, &c. Chicago. 8vo. LINDENSCHMIDT, L.—Die Alterthiimer unserer heidnischen Vorzeit. 111 and Iv vols. Mainz. LinGarp, A.—The hereditary transmission of hypospadias, and its transmission by indirect atavism. Lancet, London, 1,703. LipPERT, J.—Allgemeine Geschichte des Priesterthums. 2d vol. Berlin. 1884. —— — Die Geschichte der Familie. Stuttgart: Ferd. Enke. 1884. 260 p. Livi, R.—Sulla statura degli Italiani. Arch. per ? Antrop., Firenze. X11, 317-377. Map. Lo6uER, FRED. v.—Gab es bei den Germanen Menschenopfer? Archiv f. Anthrop. 23-36. —— Beitriige zur Geschichte und Vélkerkunde. Vol. I. Frankfurt. 1885. LomMBROSE.—L’anthropologie et la criminalité. Rev. Scient., Paris. xxx111, 303-308. Lovisato, D.—Sulla collezione etnografica della Terra del Fuoco. Boll. Soc. Geog. Ital.Rom. 719-724. Lucio, B.—Gli Indiani dell’ alto Amazoni. Boll. Soc. Geog. Ital. Rom. 1x, 528-555, 708-717. LuBBOCK, SIR JOHN.—Teaching animals to converse. Nature, Jan.3,10,17; Ap. 10. LuUNDEL, J. A.—Sur l’étude des patois. Internat. Ztsechr., 1, 308-325. Luys, J.—Nouvelles recherches sur la structure du cerveau et ’agencement des fibres blanches cérébrales. Encéphale, Paris, 1v,513-528. 1 pl. MacCauLey, HE. Y.—Inscription on a mummy case of the XIXth Dynasty, in Memo- rial Hall, in Philadelphia. Proc. Am. Phil. Soc., xx1, 488-491. MaLeErR, TEOBERT.—Mémoire sur état de Chiapa (Mexique). Rev. d’Ethnog., m1, 295-342. MANovUvRIER, L.—Aper¢u du voyage du Dr. Ten Kate chez les Indiens de l’ Amérique du Nord. Pop. Se. Month., xxv, 102-105. L’ethnologie et ’ethnographie dans Vanthropologie. Pop. Sc. Month., 161-171. Sur quelques erreurs dynamométriques. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris, vi, 271-284. f and others.—Discussion sur des contes analogues répandus en diverses con- trées. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop., vil, 265. awe y 708 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. MANTEGAZZA, PaoLo.—Studii sull’ etnologia dell’ India. Archiv. per l’Antrop., XIV, fase. 2. La physionomie et expression des sentiments. Paris. 272 pp. 8 pl. 8vo. Mason, F.—Burma: its people and productions. I. Geology, mineralogy, and zool- ogy. II. Botany. 2vols. XxXvI—560; XVI, 788, XXXVI pp. 8vo. Matériaux pour lV’histoire de ’Vhomme. Vol. xvii. Vol. 1, 3d series. Paris: E Cartailhac and E. Chantre. 12 numbers. MaTTHEWS, WASHINGTON.—Navajo silversmiths. 2d. An. Rep. Bureau Ethnology 167-178. MatTTuRI, RAFFAELLE.—Introduzione alla storia della medicina. Medicina preisto- rica. Napoli. 154 pp. 8vo. MauDSLEY, HENRY.—Body and will, &c. New York. 341 pp. MAUREL, Dr.—De V’influence des climats et de la race sur la température normale de Vhomme. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris, vu, 371-392. . De la couvade. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris, vit, 542-551. MayYErR, ALEX.—Des rapports conjugaux considérés sous le triple point de vue de la population, de la santé et de la morale publique. Paris. 385 pp. 12mo. Mepina, J. T.—The aborigines of Chili. Santiago, 1882. 427 pp. 232 fig. Mervov, V. I.—Recueil du Turkestan, comprenant des livres et des articles sur l’Asie Centrale en général, et la Province du Turkestan en particulier. L’ indicateur systématique et alphabetique. St.-Pétersbourg. vi. 167 pp. 4to. MERRIAM, A. C.—Notes and papers on classical archeology. Am. Antiquar., vol. vi, Nos. 1-6. Mestorr, JuL1A.—Aus der skandinavischen Literatur. Arch. f. Anthrop., Xv, pp. 127-151. MEsTRE, Jost MANUEL.—Una raza prehistorica de Norte America. Los Terraple- neros (Mound-Builders). Habana. [Sociedad Antropolégica de la isla pe Cuba. ] 30 pp. 8vo. México a través los siglos. Printed in Barcelona, Spain, by Espasa & Co., and pub- lished in Mexico by Ballesca & Co. [A beautifully illustrated work on ancient Mexico. | Meyer, A. B.—Ueber Nephrit, und ahnliches Material aus Alaska. xxi. Jahr. des Vereins fiir Erdk. zu Dresden. Dresden. Alterthiimer aus dem. ostindischen Archipel und angrenzenden Gebieten. Iv. Kénigl. Ethnog. Msueum zu Dresden. 19 tables, 4 chromolith., 1 chat. Leipzig. 24pp. Folio. Leipzig. On artificial deformation of the head in Sumatra, Celebes, and ike Philip- pine Islands. London. 3 pp. Publicationen des kéniglichen ethnographischen Museums zu Dresden. Leip- zig. Br. in 4to. Meyer, E.—Geschichte des Alterthums. Erster Band. Geschichte des Orients bis zur Begriindung des Kaiserreichs. Stuttgart. 8vo. MICAULT, V., et DU DRENEUC DE LISLE.—Inventaire des épées et poignards de bronze trouvés dans les cing départements de Bretagne. Saint-Brieuc. 8vo. Mission Archéologique Frangaise au Caire. M. Maspen, directeur. 132 pp. Colored plates. 4to. Paris: E. Leroux. Mittheilungen der Riebek’schen Niger-Expedition. Leipzig. 2 vols. 108 and 82 pp: MonrTano, Dr.—Sur les races des Philippines. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris, v1. 51-58. [Classified table of races given. } MONTANO, J.—Voyage aux Philippines, 1879-1881. Tour du Monde, Jul, Aug. MONTET, EDWARD.—Les origines de la croyance & la vie future chez les Juifs. Rey. d. Hist. d. Religions, rx, 307. MontTl, L.—Studio antropologico sui cranii dei delinquenti. Bologna. 22pp. 8vo. MorGan, C. Luoyp.—Instinct. Nature. Feb. 14, 21, 28; Mar. 6, 13, 20. Morskg, E. S.—Man in the Tertiaries. Am. Naturalist, xvu1, 1001-1030, ANTHROPOLOGY. 709 Morse, E. §8.—Man in the Tertiaries. [Vice-President’s Address before the Section of Authropology, A. A. A.S.] Morrittet G. Neégres et civilisation égyptienne, ete. Lyon, 8vo. [Fr. Matériaux pour l’Hist. prim. de ’Homme, XvI1t, 113-120. ] Le précurseur de Vhomme, a l’Association Frangaise. L’Homme: Paris. 1, 545-554. Crane de la race de Neanderthal. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris, v1, 10-12. Muir, J. S.—Note of a curious instance of abnormal development of adventitious fingers and toes in five consecutive generations. Glasgow Med. J., Xx1, 420-423, ipl MULLER, J. H.—Catalogne of anthropological literature, archeology and uncivilized. Archiv. f. Anthrop, Xv, supp. 1-35. MULLER, SopHus[Copenhag]. Ueber die barbarischen Gemmen. Ztschr. f. Ethnol., XVI, 89-92. Mindre Bidrag til] den forhistoriske archeologis Methode. Aarbgrger Nord. Oldkyndeghedre, p. 161-182. Ursprung und erste Entwickelung der europaischen Bronzecultur, ete. Arch. f. Anthrop., Xv, 323-355. Murray, ALEX.S.—Manual of Mythology, etc. New York. 367 pp. 12mo. Muséon, Le. Revue Internationale, Société des Sciences et Lettres. Athénée Orien- tale, 11, Nos. 1,2,3,4. Paris. Museo Nazionale preistorico ed etnografico di Roma. [Review of the Director’s Re- port. Matériaux, XVII, 363. ] NaDAILLAC, Marquis de.—Les découvertes récentes en Amérique, 6 figures. Maté- riaux, Sept. 1884. Die Ersten Menschen und die Praehistorischen Zeiten, mit besonderer Beriick- sichtigung der Urbewohner Amerikas; trans. by Schlosser & Siler. Stuttgart, pp. 524. ——w— Les descendants des Mound Builders. Rev. d’Anthrop. de Paris, 20, viz, 110- 122. —— De la période glaciaire et de l’existence de Vhomme durant cette période en Amérique. Matériaux, xvii, 140-155. Silex taillés de Tunisie. Bull. Soc.d’Anthrop. de Paris, vii, 316. Nature. A weekly illustrated journal of science. Vols.29 and 30. London. NEILL, EpwarD D. Life among the Mandans. Am. Antiquar., VI, 245-253; 377- NEwcome., Simon. Can ghosts be investigated? Science, Iv, 525. New Zealand Institute. Transactions and proceedings. J. Rector: Wellington. Vol. xvI, pp. 650, 44 pl. NORDENSKIOLD, N. A. E. DE. Un chapitre de l’ethnographie des Tschonktschis Rev. @Ethnog. m1, 402-423. OLoriIz AGUILERA, F.—Coleccion de craneos, etc. Diario méd.-farm., Madrid, 1, nos. 118, 119. OppPERT, G.—Die Verschiedenheiten des Sprachcharacters und deren natiirliche Ur- sache. Ztschr. f. Ethnol., Berlin. Xxv1, 1-17. OvVERLOOP, E. vaN.—Sur une méthode & snivre dans les études préhistoriques. Brn- xelles. 114 p.,3 pl. 8vo. OweEN.—Description of parts of a human skeleton from a Pleistocene (palwolithic) bed, Tilbury, Essex. Proc. Roy. Soc. London, xxxv1, 136. OweEN, RicHarD.—Antiquity of man as deduced from the discovery of a human skel- eton during the excavations of the East and West India Dock extension at Til- bury. London: J. Van Voorst. 32pp.,5 pl. &vo. Pamdtky archaeologické a mistopisné. Bdxu. Prag, 1882. [Contents reviewed in Mittheil. anthrop. Gesellsch. in Wien, xIv, 224—227.] 710 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. PauscH, Ap.—Catalogue of anthropological literature. Anatomy. Archiv. f An- throp., xv, suppl., 35-45. PASSAVANT, C.—Craniologische Untersuchung der Neger und der Negervélker. Ba- sel. 94 pp., 1 table. 8vo. Peabody Museum of American Archeology and Ethnology. Cambridge, Mass. : F. W. Putnam, 16 and 17 Annual Reports. ill. 8vo. PEAL, S. E.—Pile-dwellings on hill-tops. Nature, June 19. PEALE, TITIAN R.—Men ignorant of fire. Am. Naturalist, xvim1, 229-231. Peculiarities of conformation in the skulls of criminals. Phila. Med. Times, xv, 50. PEET, STEPHEN D. (Editor of the American Antiquarian, Chicago).—Emblematic mounds. Am. Antiquarian, v1, Nos. 4 and 5. PENCK, A.—Mensch und Eiszeit. Arch. f. Anthrop., Xv, 211-228, 2 maps. Braun- schweig. Ato. Verzeichniss der anthropologischen Literatur. 1. V6lkerkunde und Reisen. Arch. f. Anthrop., xv. Appendix, 48-128. PENEY, A.—Ethnographie du Sudan Egyptien. Iv. Fazoglou. Rey. @ Ethnog., 111. PENGELLY, W.—Kent’s cavern and glacial or preglacial man. Tr. Devonshire Assoc. Adv. Se., ete., Xvi, 480-488. PERALTA, M. M. DE.—Costa Rica, Nicaragua, y Panama en el siglo xvi, etc. Madrid, XXIV, 816 p. Ato. Petermann’s Mittheilungen, and J. Perthes geogr. Anstalt. Gotha, 12 Hefte. PETITOT, EMILE F.S.—‘‘ La Femme au Serpent,” a Chepewayan legend in the Indian (Tinné) dialect and in French. La Mélusine, Paris, 1, No. 1 (published April 5, 1884). Review directed by Gaidoz & Rolland. Col. 19-21. De la prétendue origine orientale des Algonquins. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop., Paris, VII, 248-256. Sur habitat et les fluctuations de la population peau rouge, en Canada. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris. PHILLIPS, HENRY.—A brief account of the more important public collections in the United States. Proc. Am. Philosoph. Soc., xx1, 111-120. On a supposed rare inscription at Yarmouth. Proc. Am. Philosoph. Soc., xx1, 491-492. Puitiies, W. A.—Arrow-points at Evanston, Ill. Science, March 7. PIGTREMENT, C. A.—Note sur les chars de guerre gaulois. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop., vi, 518. Sur les origines'du fer. Bull. Soc. @Anthrop. de Paris, v11, 238. Sur Vancienneté du cheval en Egypte. Ann. Fac. des Lettres de Lyon, 1884, 1 fase. ; also Rev. d’Ethnog., 111, 369. PiGovini, L.—I1 Museo nazionale preistorico et etnografico di Roma. Secunda re- lazione. Roma. 8vo. [Rev. in Matériaux, XVIII, 356. ] Prnart, ALPH. L.—Catalogue de livres rares et précieux. [Rare and valuable works on America. ] Pitt-RIivers.—On the development and distribution of primitive locks and keys. London. 31 pp.,10pl. 4to. PLATNER, CARL.—Dass die ‘‘Sueven,” Slaven gewesen seien. Ztschr. f. Ethnol., XVI, 93-100. Pioss, H.—Das Weib in der Natur- und Vélkerkunde. Anthropologische Studien. Leipzig: Grieben. Lief. 1, 134 p. 8vo. PoLsakow, J.S.—Reise nach der Insel Sachalin in den Jahren 1881~82. From the Russian of A. Arzuni. Berlin, Asher., 134 p. Poo.e, 8. L.—Social life in Egypt. A description of the country and its people. London. 136 pp. Ill. 4to. PoTANIN, G. N.—Ethnographical materials for the northwest Mongols. rv. St. Pe- tersburg. 1025 pp., 26 tables. [In Russian. ] Sine eer ANTHROPOLOGY. 711 Porrt, A. F.—Einleitung in die allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft. Internat. Ztschr., +329. POWELL, J. W.—Certain principles of primitive law. Science, Iv, 436. Marriage law insavagery. Science, rv, 471. —— The marriage laws of the North American tribes. Brit. Assoc. Montreal. Nature, Oct. 9. Science, rv, 471. The classification of North American languages. Brit. Assoc. Montreal. Na- ture, Oct. 9. II Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the Secretary of the Smith- sonian Institution, 1880-81. 1883. Washington, Gov’t Print. 514 pp., 175 pl., 2 maps. 4to. Introd. by Major Powell. PowELL, W.—Wanderings in the wild country; or three years amongst the cannibals of New Britain. London: Low. 282 pp. ill. 8vo. PREYER, W.—Die Seele des Kindes. Beobachtungen iiber die geistige Entwickelung des Menschen in den ersten Lebensjahren. 2. Aufl. Lpzg. 8vo. Price, E.C.—Spiromtery. N. Y. Med. Times, x11, 39-41. Price, I. G. Hitron.—Notes upon some ancient Egyptian implements. J. Anthrop. Tnst., xrv, 56-63. Projet dun questionnaire d’anthropologie physiologique. [See discussion Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop., Paris, vi, 351.] PRZEVALSKY, N. M.—Reisen in Tibet und am oberen Laut des Gelben Flusses in den Jahren 1879 bis 1880. "[Trans. from Russian into German by Stein—Nordheim, Jena. | Third journey in Central Asia. From Zaizan through Khami to Thibet and the sources of the Yellow River. St. Petersburg. [Rev. in Nature, Apr. 24.] Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society and Monthly Record of Geography. London. VI. PULSKY, FRANY v.—Die Kupferzeit in Ungarn. Budapest. 103 pp., 107 ill. 8vo. Psychicalresearch in America. Science, 1V, 359, 369, 372, ete. Psychology. The American Naturalist contains each month notes on comparative psychology. QUATREFAGES, A. DE.—Hommes fossiles et hommes sauvages. Paris. 644 pp., 209 fic., 1 chart. 8vo. Quin, C.—Origine des populations normandes; étude ethnologique du nordouest de la France, Le Havre. 8vo. Rak, JOHN.—Contemporary socialism. New York. 8vo. RAM CHANDRA Bose.—Brahmaism; or the history of reformed Hinduism. New York. 222 pp. RANKE, H.—Ueber einen Fall von abnormer Behaarung bei einem Kinde. Archiv f. Ant., Xv, 339-342. RaNKE, J., und N. RipinGEeR.—Beitriige zur Anthropologie und Urgeschichte Bayerns. Vol. v. Munich. RaANKE, Dr. J.—Wissenschaftlicher Jahresbericht (Analyse des voyages de M. E. de Ujfalvy (Correspondenz-Blatt der deutsch. Gesellsch. f. Anthropologie, Ethnolo- gie und Urgeschichte, Miinchen, September, 1884). 4to. Rav, CHARLES.—Archeological circular. Proc. U. S. Nat. Museum. Prehistoric fishing in Europe and North America. Smithsonian contributions to Knowledge (509). Washington: Government Printer. 342 pp., 405 ill. RavuBer, A.—Urgeschichte des Menschen. Bd.1. Die Realien. Bd. 1. Territorialer Ueberblick. Leipzig. 4 to 436 p. 2tables. 8vo. Recivs, E.—Etudes sur les populations primitives; les Cafres et plus spécialement les Zoulous. Rey. d’Anthrop. de Paris. vu, 210-267. Retss, W., and A. Striprrt.—The Necropolis of Ancon in Peru. Parts 1-12 have al- ready appeared. [This is a superbly illustrated work in folio, reprinted by Dodd & Mead, New York, from a London edition by Asher & Co.] ‘ (byte SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. RENAN, Ernest.—Nouvelles études d’histoire religiense. Paris: C. Lévy, 1884. Xxi-+538 pp. 8vo. REVILLE, ALBERT.—Lectures on the origin and growth of religion. The Hibbert Lectures for 1884. The native religions of Mexico and Peru. The Hibbert Lectures for 1884. New York. 1 vol., 12mo. ——-— Study on the Greek mythology, according to Carl Obfried Miiller. [Prolego- mena zu einer wissenschaftlichen Mythologie. Goettingen, 1825.]~ Rev. de l’Hist. d. Religions, rx, 133, 273. Revue d’Anthropologie. Ed., Paul Topinard, Paris. 2d ser., Vol. vi. Quarterly. Revue @’Ethographie. Ed., E. T. Hamy, Paris. Vol. m1. 6 numbers. Revue Scientifique. Paris. Rey, PHiviere.—Notes sur les Botocudos et sur les Purys. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop., vu, 89-101; also in L’Homme, 1, 231-235. REYER, E.—Die Kupferlegerungen, ihre Darstellung und Verwendung bei den Volkern des Alterthums. Arch. f. Anthrop., xv, 357-372. RHEPSTOREIF, I’. A. DE.—A dictionary of the Nancowry dialect of the Nicobarese lan- guage, Nicobar-English and English-Nicobar. xxv-+279 pp. Calcutta. 8vo. RicuHeT, C.—L’homme et intelligence. Paris. vii—570 pp. 8vo. RIMMER, WILLIAM.—Art anatomy. ROBERTS, C., and R. W. Rawson.—Final report of the anthropometric committee. Rep. Brit. Assoc., L111, 283-306, 2 diag., 3 maps. ROCHEBRUNE, A. I. DE.—De l’emploi des mollusques chez les peuples anciens et mod- ernes. Angers. 8vo. ROcHET, Cu.—Explication des trois planches murales donnant Ja loi naturelle des proportions humaines. Paris, br., 3 pl., 8vo. Le prototype humain; donnant les lois naturelles de proportions dans les deux sexes. Paris: Plon. br. 12mo. The prototype of man; giving the natural laws of human proportion in both sexes, etc. Trans. by C. Carter Blake, London. Paris: Bailliére. 8vo. RoMAngEs, G. J.—Mental evolution in animals. Reviewed in Nature, Feb.7. Dis- cussions, Feb.’7, 14, 21,28; Mar.6; July 17. Mental evolution in animals. With a posthumous essay by Charles Darwin. N.Y.: Appleton. 411 pp. [Nature, Feb. 7, 14, 21,28; Mar.6; July 17.] Romanes, H.—L’imagination des animaux. [Inpress.| Rev. Scient., Paris, XxxxIv, 397-403. R6meER, Dr. FERD.—The bone caves of Ojeowin Poland. [Translat. by John KE. Lee.] London. [Rev. in Nature, Mar. 13. ] Rosny, LEONDE.—La grande Déesse Solaire, Ama-Terason Oho-Kami, et les origines du sentauisme. Rey. d. l’Hist. d. Religions, rx, 202. R6OTHLISBERGER, K.—Zur Indianer-Sprache in den Vereinigten Staaten der Repub- lic Columbia. [5 p. of vocabulary. ] ROuSSELET, L.—Le Kafiristan et les Kafirs. Rev. d’Ethnog., Paris, 11, 218-226. Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland. Journal, new series, vol. XVI. SABATIER, C.—Essai sur l’ethnologie de Afrique du nord. Rev. d’Anthrop., Paris, vu, 404-459, SaFFRE.—Archipel des Tonga, des Samoa, des Wallis, ile Futuma, les Fidji. Arch. de Méd. Nav., Paris, xx1, 433-452. [Rep. Méd. sur la campagne du croiseur le Segond, 1876~79. } Sammlungen d. anthropologischen Gesellschaften Deutschlands. Ein Verzeichniss des in Deutschlands vorhandenen anthropologischen Materials. Zusammen- gesetzt von H. Schaafthausen, Braunschweig, 4to. SANCHEZ, SrENor.—Archeological papers in Anales d. Mus. Nac. de México, vol. 111. Sanson, ANDRE.—Sur les Equides quaternaires. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. de Paris, vir 37-51. © ee a ee = ANTHROPOLOGY. 713 SCARAMUCCI, FRANCESCO, and Enrico H GIGLIOTI.—Notizie sui akil, e pit special. mente su Quelli di Assab. [On the Red Sea Arch. per l’Antrop., Firenze, x1v, 17-44. SCHAAFFHAUSEN, H.—Ueber die gréssere Bestialitiit des weiblichen Menschenge- schlechtes in‘anatomischer Hinsicht. Corr. Blatt., xv, 99. SCHLIEMANN, H.—Troja. 434 pp., 150 wood-euts, 4 charts and plans. London. Leip- zig: Brockhaus. 1884. Das sogenannte Grab der 192 Athener in Marathon. Ztschr. f. Ethnol., xv, 85-88. SCHLOSSER, Max.—Catalogue of anthropological literature. Zoology. Arch. f. Anthrop., xv. Supplement, 125-154. ScumiptT, }.—Die Moundbuilders und ihr Verhiiltniss zu den historischen Indianern. “Kosmos,” 1. Band, Leipzig. ScumiptT, K.—Der Streit tiber das Jus prime noctis. Ztschr. f. Ethnol., Berlin, xv1, 18-59. ScHRADER, O.—Thier- und Pflanzgeographie im Licht der Sprachforschung. Berlin. 8vo. ScHr6TER, PauL.—Anthropologische Untersuchungen am Becken jJebender Menschen- Dorpat. 82pp.,itab., 1 pl. 8vo. ScHWATKA, F'.—The implements of the igloo. Science, rv, 81. The Netschilluk Innuit. Science, rv, 543. The Netschilluk Eskimo (of Adelaide Peninsula and King William Land). Science, Dec. 19. SCRIBNER, G. H.—Where did life begin? vi, 464 pp. New York. 12mo. SEBILLOT, PauL.—L’eau de mer dans les superstitions et les croyances populaires. Paris. 7 pp. 8vo. SocquET, JULES.—Contribution 4 étude statistique de la criminalité en France. Paris. 91 pp., 9 tab., 8vo. SEGGEL, Dr.—Ueber die Augen der Feuerlander und das Sehen der Naturvélker in Verhaltniss zu dem der Kulturvolker. Arch. f. Anthrop., xv, 349-356. SEMERIE, E.—Des sources biologiques de la nation d@’humanité. Vichy. 8vo. SHRUBSOLE, O. A.—Paleolithic flint implements from the gravel of Reading. SIGISMUND, REINHOLD.—Die Aromata in ihrer Bedeutung fiir Religion, Sitten, Gebraiiche, Handel und Geographie des Alterthums bis zu dea ersten Jahrhunder- ten unserer Zeitrechnung. Leipzig. 1884. Sikorsky.—Du développement du langage chez les enfants. Arch. de Neurol., Paris VI, 319-336. Simmonps, P. L.—A dictionary of useful animals and their products, with a glossary. 1883. London. SmiTH, ERMINNIE A.—Mpyths of the Iroquois. 2 An. Rep. Bureau Ethnology, 47-116. Smithsonian Annual Report for 1882. Washington: Government Printer. Société Américaine de France. (Founded in Paris, 1853, reorganized 1863.) Sociedad Antropolégica de la Isla de Cuba. Societa di Geografia ed Etnografia, founded at Turin, under the auspices of Prof, Guido Cora, whose Cosmos became the official organ. Société d’Anthropologie de Bordeaux et du Sud-ouest. Founded in 1884. Dr. Azam, president. Société d’ Anthropologie de Bruxelles. Bulletin. Tome 1 published 1882-1883. Tome II, 1883-1884. Société d’ Anthropologie de Paris. Bulletins, Vol. x1v. Société d’Anthropologie de Lyon. Vol. m1. Societ& Geografica Italiana in Roma. Bolletino, Ser. 1, Vol. rx. Society for Psychical Research. [Proceedings published in parts. Sixth in July, 1884. ] Soip1, Emiie.—Sur le fer en Egypte. Bull. Soe. @’Anthrop., Paris, vit. 63-69. 714 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. SPEGAZZINI, CARLOS.—Costumbres de los Patagones. Anales Soc. Cient. Argentina, XVII (1884). pp. 221-240. Starr, U. P.—The physical and hereditary nature of vice. J. Am. Med. Assoc. Chi- cago, I, 477-479. SToLL, Orro.—Zur Ethnographie der Republik Guatemala. Ziirich. 176 p., chart, map. [An excellent monograph. ] Sterren, M.—Die Landwirtschaft bei den altamerikanischen Kulturvélkern. Leip- zie. 1883.1. Volz. 8vo, STEVENSON, JAMES.—Catalogue of collections. 2 An. Rep. Bureau of Ethnology, 307- 466. STODDARD, J. H.—The seven sagas of prehistoric man. London. 8vo. STREBEL, HERMANN.—Die Ruinen von Cempoallan im Staate Vera-Cruz (Mexico). Separat. Abhandl]. d. Naturw. Vereins. Hamburg, vim. No. 1- Strauss, Apr.—Bosnien: Landund Lente. Historisch-ethnographisch-geographische Schilderung. 1. Band. Wien: vil. 328 pp. 8vo. STUDER, TH.—Das Kreuz von Teotihuacan. vi Jahresb. d. Geog. Gesellsch. v. Bern. pp. 1-6. Tarry, H.—Les villes Berbéres de la vallée de l’ouest Mya. Rev. d’Ethnog., Paris, Wi. 1-44. TASHIRO, ITTOKU.—The limit of human life. Jji Shinbun. Tokio, 1884, No. 109, Jan. 16. TAUTAIN, Dr.—Les croyances et pratiques religieuses des Banmanas. (Revue d’ethno- graphie.) Paris. 8vo. Notes sur les castes chez les Mandigues et en particulier chez les Banmanas. Revue d’ethnographie, Paris. 8vo. TEMPLE, RICHARD.—Oriental experiences, a selection of essays and addresses deliv- ered on various occasions. London. 1884. 8vo. TEN KaTE, H.—Matériaux pour servir 4 l’anthropologie de la presqwile californierne. Bull. Soc. @Anthrop. de Paris., vi, 551, 569. Notes sur ’ethnographie des Zufis. Rev. d’Ethnog., Paris, 111, 161-163. Quelques observations surles Indiens Iroquois. 8vo, 5 pages. (Visited the L. in December, 1883.) Hen bezoek bij de Irokeezen. (The same in Dutch language), 4to. Sur la synonymie ethnique et la toponymie chez les Indiens de Amérique du Nord. Amsterdam: Miiller, br. in 8vo. Tenth Census of the United States. Volumes IV, V, VI, VII, VIII,1xX,xX. Published in 1884. Containing the following monographs, of use to the anthropologist: Vol. vu. Valuation, taxation, and public indebtedness. Vol. vit. Alaska, by Ivan Petroff; Fur seal islands, by Henry W. Elliott. Vol. 1x. Forest trees of North America, by C. 8. Sargent. TEsTuT, L.—Dissection d’une jeune négresse d’origine sénégalienne; myologie. Gaz. Méd. de Algérie, Alger, xx1x, 12-14. Contribution & Vanatomie comparée des races humaines; dissection d’un Boschisman. Compt. rend., Acad. d. Sce., Paris, XcIx, 47-51. —— Les anomalies musculaires chez ’Vhomme expliquées par Vanatomie comparée; leur importance en anthropologie. Paris: G. Masson. 859 pp. 8vo. THIEL, BERNARDO AUGUSTO.—Apuntes lexicograficos de las lenguas y dialectos de los Indios de Costa Rica. San José: Imprenta Nacional. 1882. S8vo. THEILE, FRIEDR. WILH.—Gewichtsbestimmungen zur Entwickelung des Muskel- systems und des Skelettes beim Menschen. Nov. Act. Acad. Cas., &c., Halle. 339 pp. 4to. THOMAS, CyRUS.—Grave mounds in North Carolina and East Tennessee. Am. Nat- uralist, XVIII, 232-239. ——— Letter relating to ‘‘The Destruction of Mounds.” Am. Antiquarian. p. 14. ——— ‘Cherokees probably Mound-Builders.” Mag. Am. Hist., 396-407. - <.. a 4S. «cre " : ANTHROPOLOGY. 715 THOMAS, Cyrus.—‘“‘A Mound of the Kanawha Valley.” Science, May 23. p. 619. **Spool-shaped Ornaments from Mounds.” Seience, April1l. p. 434. “The Codex Cortesianns” (notice of). Science, April1l. pp. 458-460. —— ‘Tron from North Carolina Mounds.” Science, March 14. pp. 308-310. —— ‘The Etowah Mounds.” Science, June 27. pp. 779-785. —— ‘Directions for Mound Explorations.” Proc. U. S. National Museum. Ap- pendix, 3 pp. “Letter relating to the ‘Archeological Collections made by the Bureau of Ethnology.” Revue d’Ethnographie, 359-361. “Who were the Mound-Builders?” Am. Antiquarian, pp. 90-99. —— “Manner of Preserving Mound Relics.” Am. Antiquarian, pp. 103-106. “The Houses of the Mound-Builders.” Mag. Am. Hist., 110-116. THOMPSON, DANIEL GREENLEAF.—A system of psychology. London. 2 v., 627,597 pp. 8vo. Timehri: Being the journal of the Royal Agricultural and Commercial Society of British Guiana. [The first part appeared June 1, 1882.] Vol. m1. Trey, F. C.—Hereditary congenital malformation of hands and feet. Lancet, London, 0, 733. TISCHLER, OTTo.—Die Ausgraben von Urnen und deren weitere Behandlung. Cor. Blatt, Miinchen, xv, 57-60. Toimig, W. F., and G. M. Dawson.—Comparative vocabularies of the Indian tribes of British Columbia. Montreal. 131 pp.,map. 8vo. TOPINARD, P.—Les mesures craniométriques allemandes en 1883. Rev. d’Anthrop., Paris. Vu1, 367-374. L’anthropologie de Linné. Matériaux xvut, 177-186. TouNTAIN, DR.—Castes chez les Mandingues, et en particulier chez les Banmanas. - Rev. d@Ethnog., 11, 343-352. TROLTSCH, E., FREIHERR VON, Fund-Statistik der vor-rémischen Metallzeit im Rhein- gebiete. Stuttgart. ill. 119 pp. 4to. . On the Kubus of Sumatra. Jd., x1v, 121-132. TRONCOSO, SENOR.—The medicine una Dosay” of the ancient Mexicans. Anales d. Mus. nac. de Mexico. Vol. 11. TscuuDI, J. J. VoN.—Organismus der eieinh-cumasie Lpzg.: Brockhaus. xvi-+- 534 pp. 8vo. Tuks, D. H.—Illustrations of the influence of the mind upon the body in health and disease, &c. Philadelphia. 8vo. Tupper, A. M.—Anthropophagy. Boston Med. and 8. J., cxi. 236. TURNER, GEORGE.—Samoa a hundred years ago, and long before, together with notes on the cults and customs of twenty-three other islands in the Pacific; with a preface by E. B. Tylor, F.R.S. London. Xvi-395 pp. 12mo. [Rev. in Nature, Ap. 17.] TURNER, WILLIAM.—Report on the scientific results of the voyage of H. M.S. Chal- lenger during the years 1873-76. Vol. x, pt. xx1x. Report on the human skele- tons. 130 pp. 7 tables. London. Tytor, E. B.—Old Seandinavian civilization among the modern Eskimo. J. Anthrop. Inst., x1, 348-357. Menérioan aspects of anthropology. Pop.Se-Month., xxv1, 152-168. How the problems of American anthropology present themselves to the Eng- lish mind. Science, December 19. Opening address, section of anthropology, British Association, Montreal. Usacus, C.—L’Age et Vhomme préhistorique, et ses utensiles de la station lacustre, prés Maestricht. 94 p., 4 plates, Svo. Ueber die Steinalterthiimer auf dem Zobtenberge. Als Festgabe fiir die Mitglieder des in Breslau 1884 tagenden Kongresses. Breslau. Usratvy, Cu. E.—Cachmiris et Paudites. Bull. Soe. d’Anthrop. de Paris, v11, 243-248. 716 SCIENTIFIC RECORD FOR 1884. UsFALVY, Cu. E.—Aus dem westlichen Himalaya. Leipzig. L’art des cuivres anciens dans Himalaya occidental. Rev.d. Arts décora- tifs, mars 1884. Paris. 43 figs. 4to. ——— Les opinions récemment émises en Allemagne sur le berceau des Aryas. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop. Paris, vi, 411-443. [An extended review of the European origin of the Aryans, with numerous bibliographic references. | V., G. D.—Alcune cenzoni degli Indiani abitanti sull’ alto Ucayali e nel dipartimento di Loreto. Bull. Soc. Geog. Ital. Rom. 1x, pp. 717-719. VAN DE WARKER, ELY.—A gynecological study of the Oneida Community. New York. 28pp. 8vo. [Repr. Am. J. Obstet. ] VaANNI, I.—Lo studio comparativo delle razze inferiori nella sociologia contemporanea. Perugia. 8vo. [Tr. Ann.d. lib. Univ. di Perugia. ] Vaux, Baron L. DE.---Les iles Loyalty, les Nouvelles Hébrides et les Viti. Rev. d’Ethnog., 11, 484. VERNEAU.—Les pintaderas de la Grande Canarie. Rev. d’Ethnog., Paris, m1, 193- 217. (Ann. de hist. nat. de Madrid. ] VERRIER, E.—Cours d’obstétrique comparée suivant les différentes races humaines. Rev. méd.-chir. d. mal. d. femmes, Paris, v1, 241, 301, 361, 421. [See also L’Homme, I, 513-522. ] —— Nouvelle classification du bassin suivant les races au point de vue de l’obsté- trique. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop., Paris, v1, 317-324. Verzeichniss der anthropologischen Literatur. Archiv fiir Anthropologie. Bd. xtv and xv. Supplements. [These are by far the most extended catalogues of anthropological literature published in the world. Very many of the titles are accompanied with a short digest of the works. The very thoroughness of these catalogues compels their late appearing. Very few of their titles are for 1884.] Vircuow, H.—Zur Frage der Schlangenmenschen. Sitzber. phys.-med. Gesellsch. Wiirzburg, 1-12. : VircHow, R.—Schidel mit zerschlagenem Hinterhaupt und Unterkiefer. Ztschr. f. Ethnol., Berlin, xvi, 53-56. ——— Prihistorischen Beziehungen zwischen Deutschland und Italien. Verhandl. Berl. Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., Mar. 15, 208-218. Ueber alte Schiidel von Assos und Cypern. Berlin. 4to. [Abdr. Abhandl. k. preuss. Akad., &c. ] WALDEYER, W.—Atlas der menschlichen und thierischen Haare sowie der dhnlichen Fasergebilde. Lahr. v-+195pp., ill. 4to. WALHOUSE, M. J.—A Hindu prophetess. J. Anthrop. Inst., x1v, 187-191. WALSHE, W. H.—Physiology versus Metaphysics in relation to mind. London, Lan- cet, I, 51-55. Warp, L. F.—-Mind as a social factor. Mind, No. Xxxvi. WEBSTER, WENTWORTH, WEBSTER, CASTAING.—The ancient dates in the history of South America. Am. Antiquarian, v1, 295-299. WHEELER, C. G.—The course of empire. Outlines of the chief political changes in the history of the world. Boston, xvi, 459 pp. 8vo. WitcKEns, M.—Uebersicht iiber die Forschungen auf dem Gebiete der Paliiontologie der Haustiere. Biol. Centralbl., Erlangen, Iv, 137-183, 294-327. Wikis, F. B.—The great inventions; their history from the earliest period to the present; their influence on civilization. Chicago. 687 pp., 59 figs. 8vo. WILiiAMS, J.—Life in the Soudan: Adventures among the tribes and travels in Egypt. London. ill. 8vo. WiiiaMs, Monter.—Religious thought and life in India. 1, Vedism, Brahmanism, and Hinduism. London. WituiaMs, 8. WELLS.—Map of the Chinese empire. N. York: C. Scribner’s Sons. From Williams’ ‘‘ Middle Kingdom.” to» BRE ANTHROPOLOGY 17 Witson, DanreL.—The Huron Iroquois, a typical race of American aborigines. Brit. Assoc. Montreal. Nature, Oct. 9. WiTHINGTON, C. F.—The perils of rapid civilization. Pop.Se.Month., N. Y., xxv1, 224-239. Wov.pricH, JouaNN N.—Beitriige zur Urgeschichte Béhmens. Pt. 2, 1 table, 22 ill. Mittheil. Anthrop. Soc., Wien, xiv, 200-219. Woopwarp.—The Nez Perces on the Indiau reservation being destroyed by malaria. Gaillard’s Med. J., N. Y., XXXVH, 225. Wricut, W.—The empire of the Hittites. N. York. 8vo. WRZESNIOWSKI, AUGUST.—Catalogue of Polish anthropological literature. Arch. f. Anthrop., Xv, Sup., 152-162. Wynter, H. B.—Modes of death in the execution of English criminals. Lancet, London, 1, 1066, YounG, JoHN T.—Palolithic implements from Stoke-Newington and Clapton grav- els. J. Anthrop. Inst., x1v, 83-84. Year Book of the scientific and learned societies of Great Britain and Ireland, &c., with appendix comprising a list of leading scientific societies throughout the world. London. 8vo. ZABAROWSKI.—Un cerveau de microcéphale. Bull. Soc. d’Anthrop., Paris, vir, 101-104. Les chiens domestiques de l’Ancienne Egypte. Matériaux, XVvIm, 529-553. Zeitschrift fiir Ethnologie: Organ der Berliner Gesellschaft fiir Anthropologie, ete. A. Bashan et al., editors. Vol.xvi in 1884. Berlin. ZUCKERKANDL, E.—Craniologische Untersuchungen in Tirol. Mittheil, Wien, xiv, 117-128. ZULINSKI, T.—Influence of tobacco smoke on different nations and animals. Przegl. lek., Krakow, xxii, 3, 72, 88, 111, 127, 138, 154. “ADDENDA. Macy, JESSIE.—Institutional beginnings in a Western State. No. Vu, 2d ser., Jobns Hopkins University studies, Baltimore. 38 pp. 8vo. Ety, Ricuarp T.—Institutional beginnings in a Western State. No. vu, 2d ser., Johns Hopkins University studies, Baltimore. 74 pp. 8vo. WEEDEN, WILLIAM B.—Indian money as a factor in New England civilization. No. Vill-1x, 2d ser., Johns Hopkins University studies, Baltimore. 51 pp. Svo. JOHNSON, JOHN.—Rudimentary society among boys. No. x1, 2d ser., Johus Hopkins University studies, Baltimore. 56 pp. 8vo. Folk-Lore Journal. Vol. u. London. a : ar Ae ese re i ‘ iF yp RR esi . vie PRT th | PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. ANTIQUITIES AT PANTALEON, GUATEMALA. By Lieut. CHARLES E. VREELAND, U. S. N., and J. F. BRANSFORD, Passed Assistant Surgeon, U. S. N. Some 28 miles from the Pacific, on the railroad from San José to the city of Guatemala, the town of Escuintla is situated in a piedmont belt of extremely fertile land. In the same belt, about 30 miles from Es- cuintla in a northwesterly direction, is the magnificent estate of Panta- leon, within one league of Santa Lucia. This neighborhood was brought to the attention of archeologists a few years ago by the discovery of the very interesting antiquities at Santa Lucia which were studied and drawn by Dr. Habel, who wrote a paper for publication by the Smithsonian Institution. Several of the finest of these specimens were removed to Berlin, where an account of them was published by Professor Bastian. The result of the interest thus awakened was the further discovery of great numbers of relics of the old inhabitants in that vicinity. In 1882 Dr. Bransford visited this locality in the interest of the Smith- sonian Institution, and saw some most interesting figures at Pantaleon, a slight account of which he furnished for the Smithsonian Report of 1882. At the request of Professor Baird, the United States steamer Hart- ford stopped at San José, July 31, 1884, and we were allowed to visit Pantaleon for the purpose of photographing the antiquities. The super- intendent of the estate, Dou Miguel Garcia Salas, informed us that - the objects had never been photographed, but drawings had been made and photographs taken from them at Guatemala. The objects were all of black basalt or hard lava. Nos. LI, 1, IV, and V, the small heads in Fig. 1, were mounted on a low wall around the fountain in the court-yard. Just to the rear and center of these 719 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. 720 antaleon, Guatemala. Fic. 1.—Group of sculptures at P ——_ ANTIQUITIES AT PANTALEON, GUATEMALA, Fig. 2,—Sculpture from San Juan, near Pantaleon, Guatemala, S. Mis. 33——46 7 — 1 t22 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. | Pig. 3.—Quarter view of Fig. 2, San Juan, near Pantaleon. ae ae ee ANTIQUITIES AT PANTALEON, GUATEMALA, 723 Fic. 4.—Side view of Fig. 2, San Juan, near Pantaleon. 724 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. was the grand figure, No. I (Fig. 2), on a pedestal, while No. VI was fixed in the wall of the court, behind No. I. Originally there projected from the lower back part of each head a sort of tenon, which was proba- bly inserted into a wall supporting the figure. This projection is par- tially shown in Figs. 7 and 9. Far the finest of these objects in size and workmanship was No. I, shown in Figs. 2, 3, and 4. This was found in a low mound on a hill in the hacienda San Juan, about 7 miles northwest of Pantaleon. Senor Salas informed us that a sculpture similar in size and design, but not in such good condition, was left at the mound. The figure was in high relief, fronting a tablet 50 inches high, 43 wide, and 9 in thickness. A crest rose 17 inches from the upper edge of the tablet, making the total height of the object 67 inches. It was in a state of excellent preserva- tion, the only serious defect being the loss of the greater portion of the nose. The quiet strength and simplicity of the face is something new in the art of the ancient Americans. It was well formed, the lines simple and clear cut, and without a shadow of the conventional. Maj- esty was so plainly stamped on the countenance that it was known by the Indians as El Rey—The King. The brow, the eyes, and the nose, as far as could be judged, were in good shape and proportion. The mouth was hard and the chin firm and full of character. On the head was a turban with a banded edge, coming well down on the brow. On the front of the turban an elaborate arrangement of plumes was secured by a double band, knotted in front. Lying on its left side, supported by the band, was a mask of a human face nearly half the size of that of El Rey. This mask, the ear-rings, and the gor- get suspended by the necklace were probably chalchihuitls, as we may well imagine that a man of his consequence would naturally choose the favorite green stone wherewith to adorn his person. Asa background for the mask was apparently a broad leaf—it was too broad to have been a feather—supported in turn by two others of similar design. These may have been beaten gold, worked into the form of broad leaves or plumes. Behind these and mounting well above, on each side, were long plumes. If the last were furnished by that royal bird the quetzal, our cazique surely rejoiced in a head-dress which in gorgeous brilliancy left nothing to be desired. From the lower edge of the turban, behind the ears, depended braided folds, as of cloth, which mingled with the banded ornamentation on the chest. From the lobe of each ear was suspended a medallion-shaped object, and a larger gorget was supported by the necklace. Around the neck and upper chest other circular ornaments were apparently fast- ened to the dress. The tablet had ornamented bands and lines near the sides, but there was no appearance of hieroglyphs. From the upper margin arose a sort of crest, which curved over to'the front and ended in a tasseled arrangement pendent above the head. The appearance of the tablet ANTIQUITIES AT PANTALEON, GUATEMALA. 725 and crest suggested the back of a chair of state. On the rear surface a fresh cut nearly 3 feet square showed where the tenon had been re- moved. The head No. II, Fig. 5, was that of an old person, whose venerable appearance was heightened by the deeplines on browand cheek. Nearly the whole of the ear was taken up by the cylindrical ornaments. The head-dress ended below in a fluted band, above which, in front, was the body of a bird. The tail and most of the body of the bird had been broken away, but the outstretched wings remained to give evidence of the nature of the cap. Fic. 5.—Sculpture from Pantaleon, Guatemala. The extreme height of No. II was 21 inches. No. III, Figs. 6 and 7, was another head of an old person, but instead of the calmness of the preceding face there was depicted the inexpressible sadness of age with blindness. Both eyes were represented as hanging from the sock- ets, the balls resting on the cheeks. The chin and lower lip protruded, the upper lip fallen in as from loss of teeth. To the long ears were appended large, pear-shaped ornaments. The head-dress was arranged in braided folds, turban-like, with a little Tam O’Shanter cap on top. 726. f PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. yee This specimen was 184 inches high. Fic. 7.—Side view of Fig. 6, Pantaleon. “epemrEyeny ‘mooeyarg wlosy ornzdjnog—'g ‘oly ‘g “Shy JO MOLA opis ‘Moapeyueg Wosz o1Nzd[NIG—"g “DIT ANTIQUITIE OF PANTALEON, GUATEMALA, 127 728 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. Fic. 10.—Sculpture from Guatemala, quarter view of Fig. 8. Figs. 8, 9, and 10, full, three-quarter, and side views of the head No. IV, show what was probably the most strongly characteristic face of the lot. The prominent brow and cheek-bones, aquiline nose, and well-formed chin were here given their full effect, as in this one figure the nose was complete. Theright eye was hanging from its orbit; around the mouth and eyes were few but deep wrinkles; and between the eyes the skin was drawn into two heavy perpendicular folds, giving an expression of agonizing pain. The few simple lines by which this effect was produced showed in the artist real strength, far removed from the elaborate but fantastic style of conventional Copan. The long ears were probably exaggerated in size by the heavy orna- ments in the lower lobes. The head-dress was arranged in folds, and secured by a band, marked with longitudinal and transverse lines, which passed behind the ears and under the chin, well back against the throat. On the upper left side was an elaborate bow, on which was a circular ornament with graven outlines of eyes, nose, and mouth. On top and a little to the left side of the head a small cap was jauntily placed. The cap was one feature in the tout ensemble which gave this more the look of a woman’s head. The height was 23 inches. ANTIQUITIES AT PANTALEON, GUATEMALA. wlly iy) The object of the sculptor in portraying these eyes as hanging from their sockets is rather puzzling. It has been suggested that tearing out the eyes was a mode of punishment among the ancients. But it re- quired long time and much labor to carve one of these heads in hard stone, with the tools at their command, and it does not seem likely that such honor would have been shown to criminals. Don Manuel Herrera thought tbat the fact that eye complaints were prevalent in that sec- tion should be considered in the study of this subject. It seems as likely as not that these were representations of individuals whose mis- fortune was depicted in the sculptures, the artist adopting this mode of indicating blindness. Fic. 11.—Seculpture from Pantaleon, Guatemala. In No. V, Fig. 11, we again had the head of an old man. There were wrinkles on the venerable face around the mouth and eyes and particularly strong on the brow. The supraorbital region and cheek-bones were prominent, the mouth firm, and the large nose was aquiline in form. The tip of the nose was broken. In front and on top of the turban-like arrangement on the head a broad sash or band was tied in a double bow-knot, the ends widening and falling behind and to the lower edge of the ear on each side. The “a0 ™ PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. little cap on the vertex was pretty well demolished. The beard-like ar- rangement on the chin may have been intended to represent a chin-strap as it passed up behind the ear-rings, and was apparently continuous with the head-dress. This is one of the most striking of the faces, and in a general collec- tion would suggest the patriarch of Western Asia. Its height was 21 inches. Fic. 12.—Sculpture from Pantaleon, Guatemala. Fixed into the wall of the court, behind El Rey, was No. VI, shown in Fig. 12. It was the roughest of the specimens, and without peculiar features. The ear-rings were large, and on the cap a broken surface showed where was probably a knot, as on No. IV. Lying in the court-yard was arough representation of the head of a wild-cat, and a skull somewhat similar to those in Habel’s drawings from Sante Lucia and others at Copan. These figures in simplicity and strength differ from all specimens of ancient American sculpture we have seen pictured or described. They stand as far apart from the grim statues of Nicaragua as from the fan- tastic and hieroglyph-covered monoliths of Copan, and surely deserve the careful consideration of American archeologists. ~~ THE GUESDE COLLECTION OF ANTIQUITIES IN POINTE.A- PITRE, GUADELOUPE, WEST INDIES. By Oris T. MASON. INTRODUCTION. The stone implements and other objects described in these pages be- long almost exclusively to the celebrated collection of M. Louis Guesde, of Pointe-a-Pitre, Guadeloupe. M. Guesde is the son of M. Mathieu Guesde, whose series of Carib stone implements attracted so much at- tention in the Paris Exposition of 1867, and Louise Loyseau, a creole, of Guadeloupe. He was born at Hamacas, Porto Rico, in 1844, but at two years of age was brought by his parents to live at Pointe-a-Pitre. From 1856 to 1867 M. Guesde pursued his studies in Paris and returned to Pointe-a-Pitre as register to the minister of finance, in whose oftice he is at present director of the third bureau. He has inherited from his father his love for collecting the relics of the ancient Caribs, and for nearly twenty years has been assiduous in his efforts. His duties call- ing him to reside successively in various quarters of the island, he profited by these opportunities to carry on his researches. ‘To his zeal as collector M. Guesde fortunately adds the skill of the artist, and he has prepared two albums of aquarelles, in natural size and color, of all the types in his museum. One of these albums is in the Trocadero Museum at Paris, the other has been kindly presented to the Smith- sonian Institution at Washington. So life-like are these portraits that one has no difficulty in imagining the objects before him. In a former publication (Smithsonian Annual Report for 1876, pp. 372-393) a very large collection of somewhat similar objects, gathered by Mr. George Latimer in Porto Rico, was described and some reflec- tions indulged in respecting those who made them. Since that paper appeared, Mr. E. F.im Thurn, of Georgetown, British Guiana, has given great attention to this subject, and is the author of several illustrated articles respecting the stone implements of the ancient Caribs. Without entering into a discussion upon this subject, and taking for granted that the Indians of the “ discovery” were sufficiently advanced in culture to produce such works of art, we may better improve the present oppor- tunity by instituting comparisons with well-known peoples. It we would look for the evidence of the reappearance of similar forms and customs in regions wide apart, we must search out those portions of the earth that present the same general features, the same natural materials, and the same external suggestions or motives. While the similarities in art products which point to consanguinity of their makers often thrive in quite contrary circumstances, so outlandish frequently 731 tae PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. as to seem like the distorted memory of a story, or little snatches ora melody sung in a distant land, those similarities which indicate the passing of a certain milestone of human progress are so nearly identical that the older anthropologists were wont to believe that like effects sprung from the same rather than from like causes. Fortunately, there are two regions where the ground has not been so denuded as to prevent our knowing a great deal about the primitive inhabitants; where, also, the natural environment is so similar to that of the West Indies as to lead us to anticipate even the discoverers of their relics. These two areas are Oceanica and the Northwest coast of America from Sitka to Vancouver Island. In the first-named area we must include the Papuan, the Malay, and the Polynesian; in the sec- ond, the Thlinkit, Haida, Chimsian, Kwakiui, Nutka, and Selish stocks. We might also include the tribes of British Guiana and Venezuela, which have been so exhaustively described by Schomburgh and im Thurn.* In all these regions we have: (1) Proximity to the sea, abounding in edible marine animals; (2) abundance of the finest timber in the world for savages to work upon; (3) lack of flint and plenty of volcanic and metamorphic rocks susceptible of the highest polish; (4) almost entire absence of clay or of some of the other natural resources for the man- ufacture of fire-proof vessels. In the descriptions which follow, frequent allusions will be made to similar shapes in order to guess at the functions of M, Guesde’s speci- mens. - The editor of this monograph sincerely regrets that he has not the specimens before him; but it was impossible to transport with safety so many valuable objects to Washington, and equally impossible for the editor to make the journey to Guadeloupe. Fortunately, M. Guesde has painted in water-colors, with scrupulous care, all of the examples figured, preserving both the color and the size. The omission of the thickness would somewhat mar the description in many cases, were we not familiar with the two typical forms of blades so frequently figured here. A few objects not belonging to M. Guesde’s cabinet will be introduced to throw light upon his figures and to supply omissions in West Indian archeology. The classification adopted here is for convenience of comparison, and it may be that things with different function will be found side by side. The nomenclature of the parts of stone implements is taken from John Evans’ classic work, “Ancient Stone Implements of Great Britain.” An ax when completed consists of haft and blade. The parts of the blade are the head or butt; the neck, or groove; the body, having sides, faces, and edge. When the hafting excavation is not encircling we may have either lateral notches or facial grooves. * Among the Indians of Guiana, being sketches chiefly anthropologic, from the in- terior of British Guiana. By Everard F. im Thurn, M. A. Oxon. With 53 illus- trations. London: Kegan, Paul & Co., 1883. 445, pp., 8vo. GUESDE COLLECTION OF ANTIQUITIES IN WEST INDIES. 733 The editor cannot conclude this introduction without paying the highest tribute of praise to M. Guesde, who has, at great cost, brought together so many wonderful specimens of ancient Carib art. As a guide to the understanding of the true size of the specimens by the drawings, a line is piaced by the side of each picture, and upon these lines true inches on the specimens are indicated by dots. This plan is resorted to because by photographic reductions exact propor- tions are not always observed. Whatever reduction the camera makes upon the drawing it will also make on the accompanying line, and the inch spaces will be reduced accordingly. M. Guesde gives the following bit of personal history concerning these antiquities (pp. 53-60) : From my youth I have always been deeply impressed with what I have read about the Caribs. The sight of the stone objects which once belonged to these primitive inhabitants of the Antilles produced an indescribable impression on me.’ As years went by the stronger became my desire to collect together all that the soil of Gaudeloupe might contain relating to the Caribs. I accordingly went to work in the year 1866, and after eighteen years of constant research, never allowing myself to be discouraged by any difficulty, I have the satisfaction of being able to exhibit to ethnolo- gists this collection, which I believe to be more complete than all others now existing, in Paris as well as in America. My collection includes roughly-worked stones indicating an industry in its infancy ; and others, on the contrary, which are brought to such a degree of perfection that it would be difficult to improve on them, either in design or workmanship. It is necessary to state the fact which permitted John Lubbock to class the aboriginal inhabitants of the American islands among the neolithic peoples; it is because the stone is always polished. There is not a single relic formed solely by being chipped, for those rare pieces (axes or chisels) which present such an appearance also have the surface very well polished. Besides, these voleanic stones cannot be worked by chipping, like flint, quartz, or obsidian. We come across axes so small that we ask ourselves if they were not used by pygmies, and these alongside of others so large and heavy that we dream of Titans, and no longer of men like ourselves. In addition to all these relics, which I have gathered from the ground in all parts of the colony, both on the sea-shore and in the interior, and at altitudes of from 200 to 900 meters, enormous stones covered with strange designs are found, especially in a single quarter of Guadeloupe proper. The dimensions of these stones vary considerably. In some the drawings are so high up that it is diffieult to reach them; in others they are near the ground or buried under the surface. ‘They are scat- tered without order about the country and in the beds of the rivers. At St. Vincent, also, the last refuge of the Caribs, stones with inserip- tions on them are found in the beds of rivers. 134 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. It is now very difficult to find wrought stones in the ground. Here and there the plow or the hoe turns up some occasional fragments. These stones lie in fact in the arable layer or stratum, and this has been so well worked that everything it contained has been brought to light. New clearings alone would favor the collector. In the deep strata would other things belonging to an earlier race be found? In the case of Grande-Terre it would be impossible, for as soon as we have passed the vegetable mold we reach calcareous rocks, Madreporic formations containing numerous fossil shells and dog-fish, which preclude all idea of the presence of man. It appears to me more probable in the case of Guadeloupe, which is of more ancient formation, and which must at all times have offered more resources to man. However large may be the number and variety of the types which I possess, I still consider my work incomplete. It constitutes only the prolegomena of what I would wish to accom- plish. In the presence of this collection, one is led to ask if these wrought stones are the work of the Yguiris or of the Caribs, or if they would not belong to these two races. Weare in almost complete darkness on this point. It is necessary to throw some light on the subject. This could be done only by visiting all the Lesser Antilles, which were al- ready occupied by the Caribs on the arrival of Columbus; the Greater Antilles, from Porto Rico to Cuba; and Trinidad, which is but a frag- ment recently detached from the continent; by gathering carefully in each island all the wrought stones which would certainly be found there; by studying with the utmost care the inscribed stones; by classifying separately the inscriptions and relics according to locality, and finally by comparing the whole together in order to determine the points of relationship. Having completed this first labor in the Greater and Lesser Antilles, it would be necessary to collect together the relics from the soil of Guiana, and, taking them as types, to compare them with those of each Antille separately. Then only could we come to some conclusion. We would have laid open to us, in fact, the now silent history of these aboriginal inhabitants. I have been able to obtain some pieces from Porto Rico, as follows: Ist. Celts of all sizes, in general well polished, but some with a fine brilliant glazing. 2d. A mortar representing a bat—a very curious piece which must have required long months of labor. 3d. An idol representing a man lying on his belly, and supporting a mountain on his back. A very remarkable peculiarity is that the legs are bent as if in the act of swimming. I think that this idol is the personification of some marine deity, protector of an island. 4th. An enormous necklace, covered with inscriptions on one of its lower surfaces. This necklace was evidently slung over the shoulder like a hunting-horn. 5th. The lower part of another necklace, but without any inscription. 6th. A small netting-needle. 7th. Some remains of pottery (heads of w GUESDE COLLECTION OF ANTIQUITIES IN WEST INDIES. 735 men and monkeys modeled with great boldness, evidently forming cup- handles) and the upper rim of a cup which must have been of great diameter. Some of these fragments of pottery still bear traces of a fine red glazing. I must acknowledge that during two sojourns at Porto Rico—one of six and the other of two months—I never came across an ax. More- over there is not a single ax in the superb collection presented to the museum at Washington by Mr. G. Latimer, and which is entirely from Porto Rico. The abundance of axes in the Lesser Antilles and their complete absence in Porto Rico would seem to indicate a difference of race in the inhabitants of these different islands. I have been able to obtain five perfect celts and four fragments from Martinique, one single celt—but very remarkable for form and polish— from Dominica, two celts and three axes from St. Lucia, and one celt from Santo Domingo (the Hispaniola of Columbus). No typical difference can be established between the celts, whether they come from Porto Rico or from Martinique, Guadeloupe, Dominica, and St. Lucia. Now, since the strata of the Lesser Antilles do not contain the mate- rial used in some of these celts, it is certain that they were not made where they were found. Should we not, therefore, infer from this that they all have the same origin, that they all come from the continent or from the Greater Antilles? I have in my possession a club (baton) from the Galibis of Dutch Guiana. This club has a certain age. The wood, of a red color when freshly cut, has assumed a very deep black hue; the cotton thread around the handle is very dirty. The weapon has seen service. This club is exactly like those used by the Caribs of the islands, and which Father Dutertre has described, but the peculiar part of it, the thing that gives it an enormous interest, is the green celt fixed in its lower extremity. Now, this celt resembles all those which I have found in Guadeloupe and the other islands. Is it of modern manufacture? Is it not rather the work of the first inhabitants of the continent? Has it not been found in the soil and used by its discoverer? I would decide without hesitation in favor of the latter hypothesis, for it is covered with a patina which only a long continuance in the soil could give it. Here is another fact which seems to prove that the Caribs of Colum- bus and of Father Dutertre are the same as those of Guiana. The exterior distinguishing color is not always that of the stone of which they are made. The color, which is black, red, yellow, brown, or bluish, partakes essentially of that of the soil trom which they were taken. Those from Grande-Terre, whose calcareous soil is covered with a thin layer of black and compact vegetable earth, all have the colors more or less dark—brown, red, black—while those from Guadeloupe proper, whose soil is covered with a thick layer of more or less ferru- ginous red earth, have the tints lighter. Yellow specimens are numer- ous there. Many of them have preserved their normal tint. These 736 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. are the ones found near rivers. Continually washed by their waters, they have not acquired the coating of rust with ek those buried in the ground are covered. So true is the above that every fresh break shows the interior of the stone to be of a different color from the exterior. All these rocks are voleanic, and are naturally either black, blue, or green. This peculiarity does not generally exist in polished celts. The glaz- ing has unalterably fixed the color of the stone. They have, in conse- quence, remained free from all oxidation, and appear as if just from the hands of the workman. Aves.—Axes are more numerous than all the other pieces. That may be easily understood, the ax being of prime utility to man. Some are long and narrow, others short and wide. Some are very flat, others very thick. Some are very small, while others are of enormous size and weight.. I have two weighing, respectively, 4 kilograms, 750 grams, and 4 kilograms, 775 grams. Some are of very simple construction, merely the natural stone of appropriate form, which a little working transformed into an instrument; while others, on the contrary, are true masterpieces, which will bear comparison with those found in Denmark only. The latter are very rare. They were evidently used for purposes of parade, for it cannot be allowed that the author of such a work would have exposed it to be broken at the first shock, thus losing the product of the labor of several months, I might even say of several years. The ax admits of four distinct parts—the head, the neck, the blade, the cutting edge. The head is sometimes round, sometimes flat, sometimes very small, sometimes as large as the blade. Some axes have one or several trans- verse grooves, some have none at all, others a single longitudinal groove. The last are very rare. Pierced axes are very rare. The holes served, if they offer any assistance, to fasten the stone to the handle; if not, to suspend ornaments. The head played an important part in attaching the ax to the handle, for there can be no doubt that all these axes had handles. The small as well as the large ones were fixed on a wooden handle by means of cords made of cotton or mohot. The neck is more or less lengthened. Sometimes it is formed by lat- eral notches only, but generally by a circular depression. The blade varies considerably in form, length, and thickness. There is no proportion between it and the other two parts. The edge is more or less distinct. In some axes it is so perfect that one would think they had been sharpened the day before. I have three double-edged axes—two of moderate size, the other very small. I have four axes of which the head is prolonged into a long tail, and which resemble (one of them especially) that which has been — termed Montezuma’s ax. I have also a certain number, both small and very large, with a slight but decided protuberance on the lower part of GUESDE COLLECTION OF ANTIQUITIES IN WEST INDIES. 737 one side of the cutting edge, which suggests the idea of a tool appro- priated to some special purpose. Finally, I have some axes with the blade curved like that of a cimeter. These are rare. Celts —Celts vary much in form, size, and color. Some are slender with a sharp point, others are massive with a blunt point; some are broad and flat, others narrow and deep; some reach enormous propor- tions, while others are very much reduced in size. Celts are scarcer than axes in Guadeloupe. Most of them are made of a handsomer, harder material than that used for axes, such as ser- pentine, jade, or jadite. The fine glazing of the stone, also, is found only in celts. I have some, large and small, made of the volcanic stone used ordinarily for axes. These are very well polished, but not glazed. This handsome glazing gives an exalted idea of the industry of these savages, for it could not be done better in our days. The Caribs made use of the living forces of nature to fix the celts on the wood. But to introduce a celt into a young tree and let the tree grow till the resistance was sufficient, required many years. I believe, therefore, that they rarely had recourse to this process. They evi- dently followed the same method employed by the Canaques and other savages of the present century ignorant of the use of metals, whose celts do not differ from those found in our islands. This method con- sisted in fixing the stone by the aid of very fine cords in a socket pre- pared in the wooden handle. I must not forget to mention the shell celts. These are not made of living shell, which would not have been hard enough for the purpose, but of fossil shell. They are very rare. They were extracted from the outer edge of the Strombus gigas, very common in the Caribbean Sea. It is to be supposed that the glazed celts were rather warlike weapons than instruments of labor, for they offer more resistance in proportion to their size, and we know besides that the savages used in war what- ever had most value in theireyes. The very large-sized celts must have served as wedges in splitting trunks of trees. Casse-tétes.—The casse-téte type is furnished by a stone, either round or with bilateral facets, in the center of which is a more or less deep groove for the wooden handle. One can easily conceive the power of such a weapon wielded by a muscular arm in hand-to-hand combat. Some are more perfect in form than others. Every one was free to fashion so important a weapon as best suited him. But what astonishes the observer is the small size of one of these relics. Evidently it could have been only an amulet, worn with the idea of preserving its owner from the blows of the weapon it represented. Other casse-tétes were used without handles. Only two types figure in my collection. This weapon had not the value of the preceding. Pestles, grinders.—Pestles and grinders are of various forms and sizes. My collection includes a certain number of them. I possess a single specimen, which was used with both hands. S. Mis. 33 ——47 738 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. Mortars.—Mortars are not very numerous. This is explained by the fact that any hard stone which was flat and smooth would take their place. The complete mortar could have been only an article of luxury belonging to a cacique. Shall I designate as mortar that rounded concave stone with regular grooves descending from the central point to therim? Although quite hollow on its lower surface, [ do not think it could have been anything but the lid of a large vase, grooved or fluted in like manner. In fact this mortar would have had no fixed position. It could not remain stationary in the position necessary to make use of it. Or should we not rather think that the maker of this piece wished to represent a mili- form cactus so common in the Antilles? And in this case should we not rather class it among the idols? (Fig. 172.) Dishes.—There are but two dishes in my collection: 1st. A large one of rude workmanship. The concavity only is polished; the exterior rough and very irregular. 2d. A small one of very remarkable finish. It is in fact very well polished on all its inner and outer surfaces. Harpoon.—One single harpoon, slightly broken at the three extremi- ties. The absent parts can, however, easily be restored in following the lines traced on the body of the piece. This instrument is very remarkable. Hooks.—I have two hooks very different in form. Both are a little broken, but easy to reconstruct by following the method indicated . above. Awls.—Awls are rare. My collection includes only two of them, but I must state that the material employed is harder than that of the ordinary tools and instruments. Chisels.—Chisels are numerous and of various forms and sizes. The basil of the cutting-edge is perfect. Some of them are made of the saine material used in the fine celts, and, like the latter, have the handsome glazing mentioned above. Vases.—I have only two vases. One is of guaiacum. The handle is perfectly isolated from the body of the vase. This piece is of very great interest. As the guaiacum is incorruptible, we need not be surprised that it has come down to us. It was found at Bertram Creek, the last quarter of Guadeloupe inhabited by the Caribs. Its edges are worn and hacked, and bear evidence of having been a long time in the earth. I have seen a small tortoise of the same wood found in a cave at St. Vincent. The other in my possession is of stone. It is an astonishing piece from its general regularity and its contour. Shall I class among the vases that small cup with a rather long spout? It rather resembles a spoon, and I think that it might be des- ignated as such, taking into consideration the break, which leads us to suppose that a prolongation forming a handle formerly existed. GUESDE COLLECTION OF ANTIQUITIES IN WEST INDIES. 739 Netting-needles.—There is one small netting-needle, very well made and very regular, which evidently served to net cotton, and two other larger, more massive ones, which served to prepare cords. Idols.—The idols are six in number. Ist. One representing a man extended on his back, the legs bent under him, the arms applied to the chest, the head covered with a cap, the sexual organs very conspicuous. It is well finished and must have cost years of diligent labor. (Fig. 200). 2d. One representing a man on one face and a monkey on the other, is very interesting (Fig. 210). It was found at Matouba. The work on this statuette is rude. The hand that made it was wanting in skill. But what shall we say of the genius which inspired this combination of man and monkey? Should we not consider Darwin only a plagiarist ? 3d. Another found in Guadeloupe, of the same type as that from Porto Rico, but much larger and so rough that it cannot be determined what it represents. The under surface is slightly concave. 4th. A small granite pyramid, with three grooves or furrows on its lower part. It was found on the island of Désirade. 5th. A head with two faces surmounted by a Phrygian cap. This head was to be fixed on another stone or a piece of wood forming the body of the idol, for it is much too heavy to admit of the supposition that it was carried in the hand. I have vainly searched for this com- plemental lower portion at the place where I found the head. With this last idol we must place an ax and one other piece, both having lines identical with those of the idol head. I think they repre- sent faces. Amulets.—The principal amulet is of carbonate of lime in bladed crystallization. It represents a maboya (evil spirit) with bended arms and legs, and the virile organ in a state of action. The shoulders are pierced posteriorly to allow of the suspension of the amulet. The other amulets are medallions of different sizes, more or less round, all pierced with a small hole to admit of suspension. I have a single small crescent of stone, an evident representation of the caracoli of metal. This crescent must have been set in wood, unless it was pro- vided with a cotton string terminating at each extremity in a small cord for suspension. Disks or quoits.—I have six disks, large and small. One especially is a very remarkable piece of work. There is no doubt about the determination of these relics. The Caribs played quoits. Edicule-—A small monument having handles on each side, on top of the handles a platform disappearing under a vault. There is a hole in the middle, presumably the place for an idol. This relic is very curious, and reminds one of the Mexican teocalli. (Fig. 194). Chisels of shell—Besides. the various stone tools, my collection in- cludes a series of very fine chisels extracted from the outer edge of the 740 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. Strombus gigas. This part of the shell is very thick and harder than stone. It is certain that the Caribs did not use the living Strombus, but were careful to take the fossil Strombi, which had in time acquired the hardness of ivory. Stone for making axes.—I have in my possession a very interesting stone, which has inscribed on it the use for which it was intended. It has concavities on three of its surfaces. It is evidently a kind of grind-stone, on which stones were rubbed in order to shape them. Since writing the above, I have had the good fortune to discover in Grande-terre, in a piece of ground which had not been plowed for 60 or 80 years, two tools of flaked flint—a knife and hacking-knife. This discovery somewhat modifies the theory held to this day by writers on America that flaked flint does not exist in the Antilles. It is very evident however that these two flints were not dug from the soil of the island and then flaked by their possessor, for this stone does not exist in Grande-terre or Guadeloupe in a state of nature. These two flaked flints establish, in an irrefutable manner, the fact of a migration of men from the valleys of the Orinoco towards the islands. I. UNPOLISHED IMPLEMENTS. These do not form a class apart, but they are exceedingly useful as showing the method of blocking out the more elaborate implements, when nature has not supplied a polished pebble sufficiently near to the desired pattern. The three methods of chipping, picking, and grinding are all outlined in this group (Figs. 1-8). ATER pis dele RES Fic. 1. Fig. 1. An unsymmetrical, rude blade, of mottled brown and gray eolor. The surfaces are nearly as they were left by the removal of great spalls; but the edge is ground, and has that peculiar slope belonging to old axes battered on the corner away from the workman. There is as yet no indication of groove or haft notches, and, therefore, if the {) ‘aie GUESDE COLLECTION OF ANTIQUITIES IN WEST INDIES. 741 specimen was used with a handle, the blade must have been inserted or lashed (see Fig. 14). Length, 4,8; inches; greatest width, 3 inches. Fig. 2. A rudely-chipped blade of black color. The outline is bell- shaped, and with sufficient grinding and polishing would resemble some of the more beautiful objects in the collection (see Fig. 65 and others). Fic, 2. The implement has already a pleasing outline, and the form re-appears in Costa Rica and Chiriqui, where great numbers of celts of this shape, but smaller, were recovered. Length, 545 inches ; width, 375 inches. Fie. 3. Fig. 3. A chipped blade of very light brown surface, subtriangular in outline. Much of the surface is untouched, and there is just enough of lateral notching, &c., to show that the great variety of form in such implements after they are finished is partly due to nature and partly — to the workman’s desire to produce a certain kind of implement. It is 742 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. very much like our handwriting; we try to imitate certain copies, but we only preserve the type while we stamp our own individualities upon them. All sorts of pebbles lie at the hand of the savage mechanie, none of them just what he wants. He selects the best and founds a new type for the learned archeologists. A collection of pebbles from the West Indies would be very instructive in showing just how far nature had been the draughtsman and the teacher of the aboriginal artisan. This implement, though rude, shows much use, and rather hints that fine polish is evidence of age and much use in many cases. Length, 5,4; inches; greatest width, 3;°; inches. Fig. 4. A coarsely-chipped blade of purplish-brown surface. The spalls have been taken off with great boldness from the faces and the groove. The specimen is so broken at the edge as to make it uncertain whether it has been used at all. Length, 7;%; inches ; width, 4 inches. Fig. 5. A chipped blade of beautiful orange-brown surface, which has been much modified by grinding. In type it belongs to a low order of axes, having only lateral notches. On the faces are very slight haft GUESDE COLLECTION OF ANTIQUITIES IN WEST INDIES. 743 cavities, showing plainly the pecking. Flint implements with smooth edges and partially ground sides are quite numerous in European col- lections, leading to the conviction that polished celts are of two kinds, those polished at once and those polished by years of grinding. Length, 74 inches; width, 4,4; inches. FiG. 6. Fig. 6. A chipped blade of slate-brown color. The shape is that of the typical hoe, the sides being rather incurved than decidedly notched. The surfaces are much worn and the edge ground away unevenly, fur- nishing another exampie similar to those of England and the Continent, above noticed, made of flint. It isin many cases difficult to decide how much the change of surface is due to use and how much is due to weathering. Length, 7, inches ; width, 4,°; inches. Fi. 7. Fig. 7. A chipped blade of light-brown color. The form decidedly resembles that of the chipped hoe occurring in many parts of the United 744 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. States. By this it is not meant that the maker of the implement was an agriculturist. There are slight indentations at the sides for hafting, and the edge is slightly worn off on what we may be allowed to call the out- side. Length, 6-2; inches; width, 4,8; inches. Fig. 8. A chipped blade of brown color on the weathered portions. There can be no question, from the general outline of this rude speci- men that we have here blocked out, what was designed to be a finished Fie. 8. blade with small butt (Figs. 193,194). Theedge chippings exhibiting the natural black color of the stone, seem to be much more recent than the rest, and may have resulted from accidental breakage. Length, 6 inches; greatest width, 34. II. POLISHED BLADES WITHOUT HAFT-GROOVES. The typical ‘‘ celt” of the West Indies is the almond-shaped variety, called “ petaloid” by Mr. im Thurn, so distinctly recognizable that John Evans receives an alleged Scottish specimen of the same shape with suspicion. But this petaloid or almond variety runs into other forms, notably what we might call the Papuan type. The petaloid type was doubtless inserted or ‘“ perserted”; but’ the flatter Papuan form was always inserted, and served with sennit or other twine. The hafts also were of different shapes; that of the former was straight, that of the latter lambdoidal. In certain portions of the Antilles the greatest abundance of shell chisels are found, and it would not be mar- velous to discover in stone implements a close resemblance to some of these. When we remember that we are speaking of a maritime people who had the greatest abundance of ship timber at hand and leisure to work it, and that they had the very best voleanic rocks to convert into imple- ments, we have only to turn either to New Guinea or Queen Charlotte os GUESDE COLLECTION OF ANTIQUITIES IN WEST INDIES 745 Islands to reconstruct in part the lost social fabric of those who used M. Guesde’s stone adze blades. The Caribs had two kinds of boats—a very large canonia and a small couliala, both dug out of a single trunk. The former attained a length of 40 feet and were 7 or 8 feet wide. They could carry fifty persons with arms and baggage, and were worked with oars and sails. The coulialas were not more than 20 feet long and 3 or 4 wide; they were propelled with paddles. The Indians of the Northwest Coast have the same distinction of dug-outs. In the National Museum at Washington may be seen both the immense family boat, over 60 feet long, and the smaller, more shapely whaleboat, about 12 feet long, from the same people, carved from the Thuja gigantea. mney penne eT EE EE RT SELON Noo oe NER RS ee Fig. 9. Fig. 9. A celt or blade of the simplest form, and dark brown in color. In this specimen we have an example of economy in working. Just as the ancient flint-workers of France began their celts by grind- Fic. 10. ing down the edge of a chipped core; so the ancient West Indian levied upon Nature for all the work he could extort from her, and was more fortunate than his brethren of France, for Nature did his polishing for TAG. ia PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. him. There would seem to be two edges to this specimen, but the smaller one is a little modified from the natural shape. Length, 74 inches; width, 2 inches. Figs. 10 and 11. Two blades or celts of brown surface and highly polished. These objects should certainly be called chisels if any are to receive that name. Figure 10 has sloping sides, while in Fig. 11 they are almost parallel. The outline of each is perfectly symmetrical and the edges so neatly bevelled as almost to create a suspicion of their sav- age origin. These specimens would be considered unique in any area of lithic culture, and certainly the West Indies have produced no others similar. (See Timehri 1, p. 265, 1-7.) Length of 10, 6,8; inches; of 11, 5;‘5 inches. Fig. 12. Polished blade from New Caledonia. The material is of a clear green color resembling jade. Professor Baird has given the name jadoid to this whole class of minerals so well known to archeologists. This shape is well known throughout the Papuan area, most of the blades being mounted in curiously-wrought lambdoidal handles, very thin and wide above and at the blade. The wonder is how such tools could have been used with any effect (see Fig. 14). Length, 5%; inches; width, 3 inches. Fic. 13. Fig. 13. Polished blade from New Caledonia, of light-mottled green color. It resembles Fig. 12 in general appearance, but the edge has been much used, indicated clearly by the battering on the outer side. Length, 7,5; inches; width, 3,8; inches. GUESDE COLLECTION OF ANTIQUITIES IN WEST INDIES. 747 Fig. 14. Hafted blade from New Guinea, of dark-green colored material, probably serpentine. The lambdoidal haft and the serving are Fic. 14. shown, but M. Guesde’s figure conveys too much the idea of an adze. The plane of the blade splits the haft, is not perpendicular to the plane of the hait. ' Length of shank and blade, 124 inches; width of blade, 3 inches. Fie 15. Fig. 15. A beautifully polished blade of hard, black-colored material. This specimen is remarkable for its curved butt, straight sides, flattened 748 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. faces, and fine edge. The elongated hexagon in section is not uncom- mon in the West Indies, and occurs very frequently in Costa Rica. The bent butt of the blade is a very common feature in shell blades. Per- haps the only truth about the shape is that the savage found it so and let it stay. Length, 4;% inches; greatest width, 1,5 inches. III. FACES CONTINUOUS, SIDES INCURVED OR NOTCHED. The next type which is to be considered is that in which the faces are continuous from the edge to the opposite extremity, but the sides, near the butt, have been modified in various ways, apparently to aid in haft- ing. The butt, or head, also passes through a variety of modifications, almost as numerous as the proximal end of leaves. Such implements or forms have a certain number of possibilities. They may have been fell- ing axes, hoes, adzes, battle-axes, ceremonial axes, or simply works of art. That is to say, similar objects have been found performing these functions in different parts of the world. Reverting to our typical areas we are at a loss to proceed. The Haida do not use implements of these shapes; the Mound Builders did, however, and many of this class can be duplicated in our collections. Fia. 16: Fig. 16. A long, slender blade, of blackish-brown color. The butt is irregularly curved, and rimmed or hollowed at the notches. The haft- ing space is hardly to be called a notch, passing imperceptibly into the sides below. The latter are not alike and the edge has been recently broken. A natural seam mars the surface from top to bottom. Length, 114 inches; greatest width, 4,%; inches. Fig. 17. A rude blade, of very dark-colored material that has weath- ered to a creamy yellow on the exposed surfaces. The butt is rough and truncated. The hafting spaces have different curves and widens sharply to the sides of the specimen ; the latter pass insensibly into the edge. In Mr. E. F.im Thurn’s Timehri Plate vu, Fig. 6, is a similar lingulate form, where the sides continue to the truncated butt, and the + ma* GUESDE COLLECTION OF ANTIQUITIES IN WEST INDIES. 749 little notches for hafting are only about one-fourth of an inch wide and deep, and are squarely cut in. | Length, 7 inches; greatest width, 4,4; inches; notch, 3 inches wide. Fic. 19. Fig. 18. A rude, massive blade of bright brown color. The butt is | triangular in outline. The attachment of the handle was secured by 750 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. concavities at the sides and a very slight pecking on the faces. The edge is much broken, and large fractures on the sides, as well as the weathering, give to the implement the appearance of great age. This form is very common throughout the United States, especially in those areas where the aborigines were agriculturists. Length, 102 inches; width, 63 inches. Fig. 19. A massive blade of orange-brown patina. In general appear- ance the specimen resembles Fig. 18, but the polish is finer and the butt more acute, the unlikeness of the two lateral hafting spaces being very notable. The edge has been broken and ground again. Length, 114 inches; greatest width, 54 inches; the edge could not have been more than 4 inches. Fig.20. Anelongated ellipsoi- dal blade of light-brown color. The butt is gracefully rounded and rimmed or bent down over the notches like the rim of a pot. The latter notches pass insensi- bly into the unsymmetrical sides. Length, 5 inches ; width, 2-8; Fic. 20. inches. Fig. 21. An enormous blade of café au lait color, not only the largest in M. Guesde’s collection, but no other has been reported from this area that approaches it in size. The attractiveness of the specimen is equal to its size. The butt, concavities, sides, and edge form one unbroken curve. A slight bulging on the lower side and the worn appearance a a GUESDE COLLECTION OF ANTIQUITIES IN WEST INDIES. 751. of the edge on the same side lead to the suspicion that blades of this type were made with inner and outer sides. Length, 12} inches; greatest width, 7? inches. Sige TORR, oe Fic. 22. Fic. 23. Fig. 22. A méri shaped blade of slate-brown color. The interesting feature about the specimen is that the sides and butt are squared even more than is shown by the drawing. Length, 4,5 inches ; width of blade, 34 inches. Fig. 23. A thin, flat blade of mottled-blue and cream-colored marble. In type it is similar to several in Sir Thomas Graham Briggs’ collection from St. Vincent and Antigua (Timehri, 11, 263; 111, 111). M. Guesde says that identical forms have been found in Dutch Guiana. Mr. im Thurn believes this form to have been used like a hoe or adze rather than as an ax. The side notches relegate the specimen to the hoe class. Especial attention is here called to the slight offset on the left of the butt and the beaked form of the right. Both of, these features will Fig. 24. appear again in many forms much more elaborated. This specimen was found in St. Anne. Length, 7°; inches; greatest width, 6,55 inches. 152 Fig. 26. = , Fi &. , : ae : : rs " mi “a a j -, ) “7 ore GUESDE COLLECTION OF ANTIQUITIES IN WEST INDIES. 753 Fig. 24. A bell-shaped blade of brown patina and elongated body. It is difficult to conjecture how such a blade could be fastened in a haft. There are found in the Antilles frequently implements for smoothing, shaped like this specimen inverted. This form with the edge at the small end is unique. Length, 5,4; inches; width of blade, 2.8; inches. Fig. 25. A very plain blade, of light-brown color. It is rude and irregular in outline, and shows considerable age. This type, however, is well preserved, one continuous line bounding the specimen from one extremity of the butt to the other. Length, 5%; inches; width, 4;°, inches. Fig. 26. A blade of very- light color, but of better finish than the preceding. The butt is well curved, and the rest of the outline forms a continuous curve. It is very interesting to observe the multitude of forms in which a cantinuous curve bounds the implement below the butt. Length, 54 inches; width, 55 inches. Fig. 27. Asquare-edged blade of very dark patina. If one were allowed to usethe term ax for West Indian stone implements, thisexample should be called a broad-ax. The characteristic features are the convex butt, the deep antero-posterior notches, the very slight swelling over the notch on the faces, not always shown in the drawing, the dissimilar sides — the one convex, the other straight—and the squared and beveled edge. ‘The difference of sides again points to the conclusion that these savages had begun to have a front and rear to their axes. Length, 5,°; inches; width, 4; inches. S. Mis. 33——48 754 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. Fig. 28. A large, broad blade, of blackish-brown color, and in contour resembling a wide-mouthed jar. At the butt the upper line is a long curve and the beaks quite slender. The lateral notches are tolerably Fie. 29. Fic. 30. 2 symmetrical, their lines passing gracefully into the sides. The edge is squared, but broken on the right corner and reground. Length, 85; inches; width of body, 6,4 inches; of neck, 3 inches; of butt, 5 inches. a diceh anc i pan oll GUESDE COLLECTION OF ANTIQUITIES IN WEST INDIES. 755 Fig. 29. A pear-shaped blade of very dark material and exquisite polish. Especial attention is called to the longitudinal groove at the butt, the length of the beaks, the unequal notches, the asymmetry of the sides, and the obliquity of the edge. From Marie-Golante. Length, 84 inches; greatest width, 5,4; inches; width of neck, 2.5; inches. Fig. 30. A broadly-spatulate blade, nearly black. It is tolerably symmetrical until the sides merge into the edge. On the upper margin are seven scallops, the same feature occurring in another type. M. Guesde thinks the scallops were useful in lashing. Length, 7,7; inches; greatest width, 5,%> inches. Fic. 31. Fic. 32. Fig. 31. A hoe-shaped blade, of the double-beaked variety and light, marble color. The beaks are reduced to the simplest form and divided by an emarginate curve. The lateral notches are not separated from the other parts, their lines being continuous from beak to beak. The highly polished and finished condition of this specimen separate it from the agricultural class, although its shape is that of the plantation hoe. A similar, but clumsier, butt is seen in im Thurn’s volume (Timelhri 10, Plate vii, Fig. 2). His blade, also, is nearly rectangular. Width, 35%; inches; width of neck, 1,4 inches. Fig. 32. A massive blade of mottled yellow and brown color. The butt is very gracefully rounded and rendered beak-like by a notch or chamfer on each side. This feature of the beak and crest should be especially noticed, because it will have a higher evolution further on. The original curves of the hafting-space are unequal and terminate abruptly at the 756 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. sides, which are tolerably straight. They are also of unequal Jength, and the edge has the customary appearance of one sidedness. Length, 8,3; inches ; greatest width, 634; inches; shank, 3,4, inches. oA oh Fic. 33. : Fic. 34. Fig. 33. A massive blade of yellowish-brown color, belonging to the two-beaked variety. The buttis narrow and deeply scalloped; possibly it was formerly mucronate at the apex and had a double countersunk perforation. The beaks are mere bosses or projections. The concavi- ties of the haft-space are very unequal, preparing us for the type further on characterized as the bill-hook (Figs. 77-83). The edge is correspond ingly modified. Length 10; inches ; width 54 inches. Fig. 34, A finely-polished, massive blade of dark, slate-brown color. It is of the two-beaked type, but severely plain and symmetrical. The butt is squarely truncated, and the beaks are without flutings of any kind, There is a double countersunk perforation midway between the beaks. No depressions are made for hafting, the lower part being shaped like a tunic. Mr. im Thurn (Timehri, 1, 263, Fig. 1), an interme- diate form between this and the next example. The crests are made distinct by a median square notch, and there is just the least attempt to produce the long, trapezoidal neck of our next figure. The most re- markable feature about im Thurn’s specimen is the engraving on the face of a lozenge, having lunate figures above and on either side.~ Sim- Sate GUESDE COLLECTION OF ANTIQUITIES IN WEST INDIES. 757 ilar implements are reported to be in the Blackmore Museum, one from Guiana. Length, 10-4; inches; width, 5,4; inches. Fic. 35. Fig. 35. A very symmetrical blade, of purplish-black patina. The butt, though very plain, belongs to the double-beaked variety, and has a long, shallow chamfer on the top. SS. MOSS AMI yyy My as = Za Wy Lz, 7m Mays , SS Whe WY 2S £y Ger Zz FFYe ty, Gi aS (S95 ! 4 = ~ sy = = ee Fsz85 S| 3 SSS FSShH NI = =e GS >! 3 uz ESTAS = SSs FISA & 2223 SSS ESSE | = 3 22 $2325 SEet3 SSS EUZE =EES ~ = =z=S=eSeclhC == a= 5 25-= | ZE53 === WWW ZEEE == J 2 = 3 Bie -=--,--7T- Z = Wie Wi 8% 14d FE OS CNG s==.E1S= =e. | (ae ae ee { wy aN SSS £35: 3 === £322 | z2FF i £342 ; 2 Si ¥ 7 —— es Zp = iS = 3 a St BAN Saran oceeicn KAN | = 2 SS or ea | SEs — as eZ Ye Sls =, = 4g Uj Py S = ———s % % Z, WL S eS C4 Urn.» | WSs ¥ SSS nace wr ores 23 | ny my Mg sitll att wy ~ 4 ¥ i SsSs roms Fit as SSS Widayy, V2 wee Ww S =< AS wb! pe = SZ Ss Ys! \ H) A Fort No. 1, Ogemaw County, Michigan. of section 4, township 22 north, of range 3 east, on the east bank of the ‘river, on a bluff elevated 25 feet above the water. Its form is irregu- larly oval, the long diameter, from north to south, measured from center to center of the parapet, being 17 feet, and the short, from east to west, 141.- The southern portion is a trifle wider than the northern. The work consists simply of a wall of earth, with a ditch on the outside. The ditch at the present time is from 2 to 3 feet deep and from 6 to 10 wide; the wall from 2 to 3 feet high and from 6 to 10 wide at the base. ‘There are eight openings in the wall, distributed at irregu- S. Mis. 383 ——54 850 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. lar intervals, but looking towards the eight principal points of com- pass. The one at the northwestern curve, just on the brow of the bluff, is the widest, and may have been.the principal entrance. From it the hill-side seems to have been graded down, forming a gradual and easy descent to the river. Springs of excellent water come out of the face of the bluff near the bottom all along the front of the fort. There has been a heavy growth of pine in and around the fort. A pine stump standing on the wall measures 3 feet in diameter, and the lumbermen have cut several of equal size within the area. The lumbermen have made a road, with a causeway of logs, along the springy hill-side, be- tween the fort and the margin of the river, so that it is impossible to tell now exactly the form of the face of the bluff, but have not destroyed any portion of the earth-works. The river is about 50 feet wide, with low, wooded land on the opposite side. No. 2, the larger fort, is about half a mile distant from the smaller, pIntTAPTAAVETTVETEVEPFrrppyy, ate uaguaunauassigays 7 go a Lg " i) 7 (mnt | N g Ny My “) “nt PPr ry "Wepy, WY Si cs 5 ~ ay y ne yen wil! ay n a7} \ i] = = = = = = = = = = => ave verTVFFe’rrere ry ry 799 dadis UM U4 {4 ) Vp, Mldddaagy yy, garrett? U4, Wi \ > Why, ‘) \ \u Re \ arnt Mt wi ywaunll Fort No. 2, Ogemaw County, Michigan. in a southeasterly direction. In form it is quite regularly egg-shaped, the larger end being towards the west. Its long diameter, from east to west, is 310 feet; its short, from north to south, 270. It is a heavier work than No 1, the ditch being broader and deeper and the wall of cor- SKETCH OF FLINT RIDGE, LICKING COUNTY, OHIO. 851 respondingly greater dimensions. In some places the height from the bottom of the ditch to the top of the wall is fully 8 feet. Unlike No. 1, this has only four gateways or entrances. These look northeast, north- west, southeast, and southwest, and being located with great regular ity with reference to the peculiar shape of the fort, the two at the east- ern or smaller end are much nearer together than the other two. The one looking southwest is much wider than the others, and was probably the main entrance. The ground within the inclosed area is quite un- even, rising in the southern part considerably higher than the parapet. As faras I know, but my search was not very extended, there is no water in the immediate vicinity. Pine trees equal in size to those men- tioned in. connection with the other fort have been cut on the walls of this, the stumps of which are still to be seen. No mounds, graves or other remains, have been found in connection with these forts. Doubtless, when the country comes to be cultivated, flint arrow-heads and stone hatchets will make their appearance. The measurements given above may not be minutely accurate, as I worked alone and without instruments, except such as I could improvise for the occasion in addition to a pocket compass. The general features of the works, however, as given, are substantially correct. Residents of the vicinity asserted that there were mounds near the river, several miles below. A SKETCH OF FLINT RIDGE, LICKING COUNTY, OHIO. By CHARLES M. SmitH, of New Madison, Ohio. The great numbers of flint implements, such as arrow, lance, and spear heads, drills, knives, scrapers, &c., which are found scattered through all parts of the country, frequently lead to inquiry as to the sources whence so great an amount of material may have been pro- cured. Under the general name of “flint,” in this connection, are included various forms of siliceous stone, such as chalcedony, jasper, hornstone, chert, basanite, and even some forms of quartz that have no resemblance to flint. The sources of supply are widespread ; but before touching upon this part of the subject it will, perhaps, be well to give a short résumé of the different theories in regard to the manner in which is accumulated the material forming the beds, though geologists have not yet suc- ceeded in settling this vexed question. Quartz or silica, in its various forms, is one of the most abundant of the minerals forming the earth’s crust. Hard (easily scratching glass), infusible, not affected by acids, it survives, unchanged, agencies that 852 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. will destroy nearly all other rocks. But there is one way in which it can easily be reduced: the alkaline minerals, such as sodium, potassium, and a few others, form compounds which are highly soluble; when water, especially if thermal, thus charged, comes in contact with quartz, the rock is easily decomposed and held in solution until, by cooling or evaporation, the water will not retain so much foreign matter, and the silica is deposited. In this manner is the quartz supplied which forms our agates, geodes, crystals, the concretions around hot springs, &e. Should the dissolved silica be carried onward, however, to a consid- erable body of water, it tends to produce flint or its allied forms in large masses; and there are different ways in which this can be brought about. In sea-water there exist microscopic animals whose shells are formed from silica in the same manner that the shells and skeletons of mollusks and corals are formed from carbonate of lime; and upon the death of these animals their remains find a resting place upon the bot- tom of the ocean, and hold a limited place in the rocks formed by the limestone-makers—limited because, although numerous, these animal- cule are so small that thousands or even millions of them will not equal in bulk a single clam-shell. Generally the flint thus formed is scattered through the limestone in such a way as to be scarcely, if at all, noticeable; in the Niagara di- vision of the Upper Silurian age it seems first to collect itself in nodules or masses by that mysterious proceeding called ‘concretionary ac- tion,” a something which has never been explained. Even when the flint lies in a regular stratum, as it sometimes does, the layer is not con- tinuous, but is broken up into these concretions. Similar masses are found in the succeeding geological formations, especially in the Chalk- measures; in fact, some geologists claim that the only true flint is that found in the Cretaceous rocks of Europe, and that flint proper is not found in America at all. Be that as it may, the term is now too firmly attached to our siliceous rocks of this nature ever to be changed. Flint formed thus, however, is found only distributed in other rocks and does not occur in masses to itself. The principal flint-beds are found in the Carboniferous age, and the manner in which they are found associated with the other rocks of the series shows another of the methods of flint-making. In the lagoons of the present’ day exist immense numbers of minute plants called Diatoms, which have the power of abstracting silica from the water and using it in their plant structure. On the decay of the plant the silica is not restored to the water, but is precipitated ; and if this work is allowed to continue undisturbed, in time a thick deposit is the result. As a general thing, the slower the process the more com- pact the stone will be; and if no tides or freshets interfere, beds of pure siliceous rock inches or even feet in thickness may be formed. Geolog- ical conditions at the beginning of the Carboniferous age seem to have been favorable for the existence of these Diatoms in vast numbers, for SKETCH OF FLINT RIDGE, LICKING COUNTY, OHIO. 853 in no other formation is the flint so abundant. Land-locked basins seem to have existed along the border of the ocean in that period, wherein our little plants flourished, while farther out the limestone was being formed by such animals as find their most suitable surroundings in open salt water; so that one has only to lay before him a section of a coal-shaft, suppose this shaft to have been made through rock of which some limestone layer was formed near the shore in quiet water, substi- tute “flint” for “limestone,” and the explanation of flint-beds is at hand—such, at least, as are due to this vegetable agency. It is not to be inferred, however, that all flint should for this reason present the same appearance; there are to be taken into consideration the chances of oc- casional slight changes of level; tides and storms bringing in a supply of salter water, with, it may be, many lime-producers ; the swelling of a tributary stream, where-by various organic and inorganic impurities are carried in to a greater extent, coming sometimes from one kind of soil, sometimes from another—all these points, and others, are to be remem- bered in accounting for the different grades and colors found even in a limited space. These are the most common explanations. Recent investigations go to show that chemical changes at the bottom of the ocean have much todo with flint formation; and the process of substitution, whereby silica replaces other material in decaying substances, as is seen in the petrifaction of woody fiber, adds its mite to the limited knowledge of the subject; but the question is far from being definitely settled. Throughout Eastern Ohio there are numerous deposits of flint of vari- ous descriptions; and in several counties places are to be found in which the “ancient arrow-maker” practiced his calling with the material so abundantly supplied. Pre-eminent among them, on account both of its great extent and the vast amount of aboriginal labor evident throughout nearly its whole ex- tent, is the deposit Jying in the southeastern part of Licking and west- ern part of Muskingum Counties, Ohio. This has been known for many years as “ Flint Ridge,” and, numerous as are similar deposits in other places, it is by all odds entitled to be called the “ Flint Ridge” not only of Ohio but of the whole country. Its most western point is on the road leading from Newark to Zanes- ville, about 8 miles from the former place and half a mile from the east- ern line of Franklin Township. From here it extends eastward across Hopewell Township and about 2 miles into Muskingum County, making its entire length very nearly 8 miles, counting by section lines, and fully 10 miles following the turns of the road. At about 2 miles from its western end, north of the village of Brownsville, it reaches its great. est breadth, 24 miles. Owing to the extensive erosion that has taken place since its final emergence from the ocean (the summits of the hills being more than 300 feet above the streams), its outline is exceedingly 854 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. irregular. The surface is undulating, but on the ridge proper is level enough to admit of a good road along its whole extent, while long spurs on either hand extend to north and south. Judging from the extent d ayanaid Ay Ay Bake vee Browrsvifle Flint Ridge, Licking and Muskingum Counties, Ohio. and direction of these spurs and the outlying ridges, the whole deposit was of an irregular crescent shape, with the convex side to the south and southeast. The road from Newark to Zanesville, called the “ridge” SKETCH OF FLINT RIDGE, LICKING COUNTY, OHIO. 855 road, winds along close to the northern edge for about 6 miles, when it _ passes across the curve of the crescent, leaving it to the north. Wp Yi *'Z\ Is DUNS => nv A AULA AVANINT\SS is < a WG, FO aS anager’ | MAR Ghoy eS Flint Ridge, Licking and Muskingum Counties, Ohio. The dip of the strata in this region, as in nearly all the eastern part of Ohio, being to the southeast, the flint at the western end of the ridge is very near the surface, while at the eastern end it is about 80 feet below the highest points, the country holding about the same ele- vation above the sea-level. 856 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. The flint, from its great resistance to weathering agencies, forms the cap-rock of the whole ridge, the superincumbent material being for the most part either clay or soil resulting from the disintegration of the Shales and sandstones which formerly existed at this horizon. The natural place of the Kittanning coal of the Pennsylvania series is 15 to 20 feet above the level of the flint, but it runs out before reaching this far west—at least there is no trace of it here. Thiv beds of bituminous coal lie at different levels in the hills; 104 feet below the flint is a work- able seam of cannel-coal. A section of the formations in the eastern part of Licking County shows the same alternation of sandstone, shale, clay, coal, limestone, and iron ore that is found in all coal regions, so that a detailed statement of its geological structure is unnecessary in this connection. Did the topography of the country depend upon surface drainage alone, the flint would act as a protection to the rocks below, and the whole ridge presenta more symmetrical outline than it does ; but, owing to the numerous crevices existing in it, and to the porous nature of the greater part of the underlying strata, water easily passes downward until it reaches the stratified beds of clay, along which it makes its way to the openair. The springs thus created have worn their way back, by the destruction of the adjacent rock and the consequent displacement of that farther away, until the whole region is a succession of steep hills separated by narrow ravines. It is difficult to determine the thickness of the flint at any point with- out cutting through it, as the outcrop is so weathered and broken as to offer no safe basis for estimate. A few wells have been dug through it, and the thickness is given at different points at from 4 to 7 feet. It probably varies, owing to slight irregularities of the bottom on which it was deposited, and the more favorable conditions in some places than in others for the multiplication of the flint-making agents. It is thick- est at the eastern end, according to persons living there. In the fourth range of sections in Hopewell Township, counting from the western line, between the farms of Samuel McCracken and Lennox Fisher, is a break of three-fourths of a mile in which no flint is found, erosive agencies having removed all the rock for 20 to 40 feet below the level of the flint stratum. Beyond this it reappears, and continues un- broken to its eastern limit in Muskingum County. In the geological scale this flint is continuous with the ferriferous lime- stone of Southeastern Ohio, and is highly fossiliferous in some places. In. the museum of the State University is a very fine nautilus imbedded in a piece of buhr-stone from this place. Other smaller fossils occur abundantly both in this and the more solid flint, particularly Fusulina cylindrica, a small foraminifer found in great numbers in Europe at a corresponding horizon. Very frequently, however, the fossil, being calcareous in its nature, has disappeared, and only the matrix remains. Underneath the flint lies the “« Putnam Hill limestone” of the Ohio sur- ae eae ea SKETCH OF FLINT RIDGE, LICKING COUNTY, oHI0. 857 vey, so named from a high hill opposite Zanesville where it is well Shown. The upper part of this limestone is shelly, sometimes closely approaching a thin sandstone in its appearance, and of a yellow cast; farther down it becomes more solid and takes on a blue color. The flint varies in its nature in different parts of the ridge. It is im- possible to gain an accurate knowledge of its appearance in many places without excavation; but, so far as can be judged from the outcrop and the reports of the well-diggers, the following will be found not far out of the way: j At the extreme western end the stone is of a gray or whitish color, cellular or porous in its structure, and of the sort commonly known as ‘“‘ buhr-stone.” By the oxidation of the included iron, it shows various shades of yellow or brown along the lines of fracture. Half a mile east of this appears a translucent, bluish variety, frag- ments of which are seen scattered in the fields or along the outcrop. Still, the buhr-stone seems to predominate. Two miles east, in the neighborhood of the cross-roads, the flint changes considerably. There is to be found every color and shade ever seen in such stone. White, red, black, brown, yellow, green, and blue, in various shades, occur plentifully in the pieces around the fields and where the flint shows in the hill-sides. This coloring is all due to the oxidation of the iron and organic impurities contained in the flint, as may be shown by digging to the bottom of one of the bowlders which shows different colors on its top; on reaching a part that is unweathered it is generally found to be of the same bluish tinge as the greater part of the bed-rock. Near the intersection of the ridge road with the one leading from Brownsville to Clay Lick Station (on the Baltimore and Ohio Railroad), which, for distinction, is calied the cross-road, the well-diggers report that the flintis light blue and translucent. A few hundred yards north itis nearly white, while at the same distance south a layer of a very dark shade is reported at the same level by parties who sunk a shaft here many years ago ‘“‘to see what was down there.” To determine what was meant by “dark flint” it was decided to clear out the trash that had blown into the shaft and examine the flint in its place; and this is the result: Commencing at the edge of the shaft, the flint was found at 3 feet under the original surface, but as this was near the outcrop itis not to be taken as the full thickness of the overlying dirt, for there is a rise of several feet from this point to the top of the hill. Under this soil was a layer of flint of a grayish color, which must be very limited in extent, as no pieces of it are found in the ‘ work-shops.” Next was the “ dark flint,” which is further mentioned on a following page. This flint contained a large amount of iron sulphide, which has oxidized along the seams, the iron giving a rusty-looking coat to the 858 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. stone, which is not solid, as in some other places, but is in thin layers, between which a thin parting of clay is occasionally found. The total thickness of the flint here was 29 inches. Next is a layer of bluish clay ; on the top of this the sulphur set free by the decompo- sition of the sulphide had collected in a thin veneer. Theclay continues pure only for2 or 3 inches; then sand appears mixed in with it; a little lower some lime also enters; next it isin thin plates; and. finally, at 16 inches, it runs into the solid limestone. The clay is quite soft, but as the sand and lime become mixed with it the whole grows harder and more compact. This same blaek flint is found east of here, beginning near the next section line and extending eastward for half a mile, and also at the ex- treme southeastern spur of the ridge. A grayish, banded flint, presenting very narrow stripes of white or light gray, alternating with darker shades of the same color, is founda few hundred yards southeast of the cross-roads in rather limited quan- tity. On the farm of Joseph Duncan the same flint occurs in great abun- dance, the whole outcrop being of this nature on a point north of his house. At the eastern end, along the Muskingum line, theflint has much the same appearance as at the western end—a buhr-stone that has been quarried to a considerable extent by the whites for making mill-stones. At the eastern termination of this stratum a white flint is found, having occasionally places in which iron has given it a reddish tinge. It would seem, so far as can be judged from the limited opportunities for examination, that at the edges of the deposit, on every side, it is more in the nature of the buhr-stone, while through the central part, proba- bly owing to clearer or less disturbed waters, the formation of a denser, purer siliceous rock was possible. Scattered around the pits, to be spoken of later, south of the blacksmith shop, at the cross-roads, near where the “shaft” mentioned above was sunk, can be found all the colors and shades mentioned, while farther away, in all directions, it seems to be of one general character. Much of it answers to the description of chalcedony, nearly all at the central points being translucent or even transparent. Theso-called “ black flint” is not the opaque variety, basa- nite, found in other parts of the Coal measures, but a clear, vitreous kind, containing a large amount of iron and carbonaceous matter, to which its color is due. This is proven by finding pieces almost: perfectly transpar- ent from the absence of impurities, and ranging from that to a deep black that is translucent only in the thinnest flakes. Some of it has the coloring matter so distributed as to resemble moss agate very closely; a variety occurs which has a beautifully mottled or clouded appearance, due probably to the entanglement of some gas in the silica at the time jt was deposited, the cloudy part being sometimes in spots, again in narrow stripes, and occasionally in bands, which make it resemble smal] ee SKETCH OF FLINT RIDGE, LICKING COUNTY, OHIO. 859 concretions. Agates cannot exceed in brilliancy or delicacy the beau- tiful markings found in many of the fragments. In nearly all the crevices in the flint, so far as digging by searchers goes to show, are found quartz crystals. These are of more recent ori- gin, being formed by the evaporation of waters of infiltration carrying silica in solution. They vary in size from those which are microscopic to those_as large as a hen’s egg. Some are limpid as pure water; others are charged with carbonaceous matter, and sometimes in such quantity as to make them almost black. They are all short, the ter- minating pyramidal point frequently being all there is to them Gener- ally they are found adhering to the face of the rock, though some- times they may be found in the soil filling the crevices. In the latter case it is probable that the flint holding them has weathered down and they have fallen off, as crystals formed free or unattached to a base generally terminate in a pyramid at each end, a shape not found here. Baryte and calcite are found occasionally, filling cavities in the flint. A few dollars’ worth of gold was washed out of the sand in the bank of a little stream on the south side of the ridge a few years ago, and stories of various Indians and Californians who know the location in these hills of nearly all the metals of the globe can be heard from every man who lives within miles. No doubt minute quantities of various minerals can be found such as occur in all geological formations; but coal and clay will be about the only sources of wealth that can ever be made availa- ble beyond the agricultural productions of the country. The land is admirably suited to the growth of grass, and this, with the abundance of pure water in every ravine, must make stock-raising the most profita- ble occupation in which the people can engage. Now, as to the evidences of prehistoric industry. The blacksmith shop of John Loughman, at the cross-roads, 3 miles north of Brownsville, is a central point from which distance and direc- tion can be estimated, and has the advantage of being well known to every one for miles, so that a person can easily take it for a starting place. It is not until within half a mile of here, coming from the direction of Newark, that pits opened for the purpose of obtaining flint begin to ap- pear. The western end of the ridge was for some reason left untouched ; probably it can be explained when we come to speak of the evidences of settlements; at any rate, the rock could have been easily quarried, and seems as well adapted to purposes of manufacture as at other places. The pits first appear on the north side of the ridge road, and extend in a northwest direction, along a spur of about one-fourth of a mile in length, nearly to its termination, A ravine heads, near the road, east of this spur, and the next pits are found.on the eastern side of this ravine, on the farm of Alexander Miller, whose land extends to the cross-roads. The flint lies nearer the surface here than on the south side of the road, which at this place is about 500 yards south of the northern limit 860 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. of the flint; and this space, occupied by the farms of Loughman, Miller, and Feegan, has pits over nearly its whole extent. Southwest of the blacksmith shop, on the farms of Loughman and Vermillion, the pits extend nearly half a mile, mostly in uncleared ground, as the succession of ‘holes and ridges where they have been dug makes it impossible to cultivate what little soil may be found among the rocks. The holes grow larger and deeper as the spur extends south, until at the end some occur which measure 60 feet across. Just how deep they may be can- not be told except by cleaning them out, as they are partly, or in some cases wholly, filled with dirt and decayed vegetation. They nearly al- ways contain more or less water, the present summer being the first one in many years that they have been dry. Jumping or throwing a heavy stone in them causes the whole surface to tremble, showing that the muck filling them is still soft and spongy below, and the length of time this trembling continues indicates a considerable depth. South ot Miller’s house, and east of these just mentioned, are a few, but they are small, and the amount of débris around them shows their depth to be inconsiderable as compared with the larger ones. Ten or twelve acres have been dug over on the western side of the cross-road; that is, if the actual area excavated be measured it will amount to that much, though the pits themselves are scattered over several farms. The spurs are narrow, and in many places there is a considerable interval between the points in which the work has been carried on; those lying on the southern spur, however, are close together, and very great labor has plainly been expended on them. On the east side of the cross-road the holes increase in size and num- ber. North of the blacksmith shop are about 6 acres every rod of which has been dug over. Many of the pits here hold water the entire year. They are mostly shallow, as the soil is thinner here than at other points in the excavated district; some are filled with muck, while others con- tain very little trash. This field has been cleared and cultivation at- tempted in such parts as can be plowed, but without much success, as the amount of loose flint heats the ground to such an extent in summer that everything dries up. East of these, in a piece of timber, are 2 acres of larger and deeper pits. Then, scattered at irregular intervals, are a few, single or in small groups, extending for about half a mile east of the shop, when there is a break in the work and no more are found on the north side of the road for nearly a mile. South of the road, on the east side of the cross-road, continuous with those described as north of the shop, and extending for about 500 yards in a direction east of south, are the most extensive excavations, both as to size and number, to be found in an equal area anywhere in the State. The part dug over sometimes narrows to 5 or 6 rods, sometimes widens out to 300 yards. Some of the pits are small, from 15 to 20 feet Se a SKETCH OF FLINT RIDGE, LICKING COUNTY, OHIO. 861 across; others have a diameter of not less than 80 feet. As with them all, the depth is difficult todetermine. A pole 18 feet in length has been thrust out of sight perpendicularly in one without encountering any- thing more solid than the muck and trash which shows at the surface ; but this is scarcely a fair test of the depth, for should there be a crevice in the limestone beneath, as there well may be, for the stone has fre- quent joints, the slow drainage would gradually enlarge it, and the trash could thus sink to a greater depth. Besides, the ground is undu- lating from here to the cross-roads, and a rise of 10 or 12 feet would scarcely be noticed by any one in walking that distance along a winding path. There can be no doubt that a greater thickness of soil lies over this particular place than over others. That the holes on this spur (which lies mostly on the land of J. G. Loughman) were much deeper originally than at any other point excavated is plain from the higher banks of dirt and broken rock piled around them. The spur is directly east of the one running south from Miller’s, and the fragments lying scattered around on the two points show that the stone is of the same general character in both; in fact, the ravine between them, up which extends the cross-road, has been eroded from the middle of a local deposit that is of richer color, more compact texture, and better adapted to the needs of those using flint implements than is any other part of the whole ridge. It is at these places that the most beautifully colored pieces are found, and there is no doubt that if some of these deepest pits were cleaned out a more comprehensive idea could be gained of the original method of excavating, and a better assortment be secured than at any or all other places on the ridge, both as to color and variety. Going still south and east from here, and crossing a deep depression drained both to the east and the west, we come to an isolated area, from which spurs extend to the north, east, and west. The first spur reached, that trending north, is on the farm of W. Iden. In a cleared field, about 1 mile from the cross-roads, are five or. six large pits; a short distance east of these between 1 and 2 acres of small, shallow ones are found. In spite of their number, it does not appear that much flint has been taken from them. No others are found until the Bowman farm is reached, nearly a mile southeast from Iden’s. Here is a spur extending east, on which are 2 acres of pits of a size to compare with those north of the blacksmith shop, that is, from 15 to 30 feet across. There are two spurs reaching from here—one toward the southwest, on which no pits exist; the other southeast, extending about a mile, and terminating on the farm of J.Kreager. Here is about an acre that has been dug over, and from the fragments scattered around it would seem that both black and white flint exist on this point, Before reaching Kreager’s a spur goes off in a southern direction on Drumm’s farm, but it was never worked, 862 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. No more flint exists in this direction. Directly north of the spur on Bowman’s farm, and separated from it by a deep, narrow ravine, is a spur on the farm of E. H. Duncan, containing pits of the same character and about the same extent. Immediately east of these, in timber belonging to Joseph Duncan, are five or six large, deep excavations. Continuing north, we come to the depression spoken of as separating this area from the main ridge. Lying partly in this is the farm of Capt. John Lough- man. North of his house about an acre has been pretty thoroughly dug over East of this in a bleared field, is about half an acre the flint from which is a dark variety, approaching more nearly to that at the “shaft” than at any other place on the ridge. This field is nearly a mile from the blacksmith shop and close to the town house, located at the point where the ridge road is crossed by the one leading from Black Hand Sta- tion to Brownsville. East of the town house is the farm of Samuel McCracken, on the northern and eastern parts of which are two small groups of pits, both comprising about an acre, on a spur extending northward. Just beyond here commences the before-mentioned break in the stra- tum of about three-fourths of a mile, the flint next appearing on the farm of Lennox Fisher, about a mile west of the Muskingum County line. Some 300 yards east of his house are three large pits, which the owner calls *“‘ ponds,” as they generally furnish water for his stock through the summer. The bottom of these ‘“ponds” is 5 or 6 feet below the surrounding surface; the original depth was at least twice or three times as great, if they preserve the same slope the exposed sides show. The dip of the stratum is more apparent here than at the western end, as knolls 25 to 30 feet high are in the immediate neighborhood of the pits. About one-fourth of a mile south of this, on the adjoining farm of William Fisher, a piece of woodland contains 2 acres of pits, some of which are 50 to 60 feet across, but seem to be of less depth than holes of a corresponding size near the cross-roads. This is the last sight of aboriginal work on Flint Ridge within the lim- its of Licking county. The pits being so scattered, and nearly all in dense timber, it is diffi- cult to form an accurate estimate of their extent. Certainly they can- not occupy a smaller area than 60 acres, counting only the space act- ually excavated. Half a mile east of the line of Licking and Muskingum Counties, on the farm of Mathias Drumm, are a few pits, one about 60 feet in diameter, the others much smaller; there are not more than a dozen of them. No others occur until the farm of Jacob Burrier is reached, about 3 miles from Fisher’s place. A few small pits exist in the woods southeast of his house. These are on the southern point of the eastern end of Flint Ridge. PS SKETCH OF FLINT RIDGE, LICKING COUNTY, OHIO. 863 About three-fourths of a mile east of Burrier’s house, on the Brookover farm, are 2 acres of pits, on the most eastern point of the ridge. About the same extent of ground is dug over on the Varner farm, half a mite north of Burrier’s house. Beyond Varner’s the spur extends half a mile north, and here is the termination of the ridge in this direction. To sum up, then, we find these pits reaching from half a mile west to a mile and a half east and from a fourth of a mile nortb to a little more than 2 miles south of the blacksmith shop at the cross-roads. These vary from 12 to 80 feet in diameter, and some of them, at least, cannot be less than 20 feet in cep: Then, a small number, some 2 acres, 3 miles east of the shop and near the Muskingum County line. * Finally, a number scattered along in Muskingum County, from half a mile to nearly 2 miles from the line, those farther east being, as a general thing, smaller than the ones in the vicinity of the cross-roads. They are found on the most northern, southern, and eastern spurs of the ridge, but not within 2 miles of the most western spur. These distances are only approximate, the winding roads and per- plexing sign-boards making it impossible for even those long resident in the locality to form any very correct idea of the distance between two places. It is easy to count up section lines, but when one attempts to follow the roads it will be found that a “ mile” is an exceedingly in- definite unit of measure. The flint around the edges of: the whole deposit is not so diversified in color or quality as that in the more central parts, nor does it seem to have been so well adapted to the manufacture of the finer grades of implements. The amount of work done in excavating is such as would require hundreds of men for many years, even with our superior advantages in the way of better tools, there being from 4 to 8 feet, and in a few places even more, of soil and loose rock to remove, and the flint being so hard that the best drill, according to the well-diggers, cannot penetrate it more than 6 inches alii being repointed and retempered. When we take these facts into consideration, and remember that the aboriginal workers had nothing but stone tools, the magnitude of their labor be- comes apparent. The time that has elapsed since this work was Abie must remain un- known. Efforts have been made to estimate the length of time neces- sary for trash to accumulate to any particular thickness; but when we know that sometimes an inch and sometimes a foot of leaves may pile upina single storm, this formsavery unsatisfactory basis of calculation, especially when it is not possible to know the amount of compression that takes place in any given time. ‘ Results” thus obtained areno bet- ter than the merest guesses. On the dirt thrown out from some of the pits are oak trees over 3 feet in diameter, that it is plain have sprung up since the pits were aban- 864 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. doned ; stumps and trunks decaying on every hand point to trees still older. Timber will not increase in size nearly so fast on this stony ground asit will under more favorable conditions, so that centuries, pos- sibly, have passed away since any work of this sort has been done here. How these ancients knew where to find the best flint for their pur- poses, unless indeed these sites were chosen at random, cannot be told. It also remains a question as to how the flint was quarried after its lo- cation was determined. No doubt a thorough examination of some of these pits will throw much light upon the methods in use among them for obtaining the raw material. In Coshocton County, near Warsaw, are some similar pits which have been opened by residents of the locality. In them were found two lay-, ers of flint, the upper a dark variety, the lower a clear, translucent kind, which answers to the description of chalcedony. This lower flint seems to have been the kind sought. Traces of fire were plainly visi- ble in the pits, from which the inference is natural that fires were built upon the rock, and that, while heated, water was thrown on it. The stone could thus be broken into pieces. In the bottom of the pits were found bowlders of granite, syenite, and other glacial rock, which plainly showed that they had been used as hammers. No doubt a similar plan was followed at the ridge, and such a supposition is supported by the fact that these hammers, weighing sometimes 40 pounds, are found in the fields around the pits. Although the glacier did not cover any part of the ridge, the western line of Franklin Township coincides very closely with its limit; besides which the Licking River, which is not more than 3 miles distant in some parts, carries down glacial material in the ice every winter, so there would have been nothing difficult in finding abun- dant material for tools; in fact, the pebbles of which the smaller ham- mers could have been made are found several miles soutli and east of the glacier limits, even on high ground, having been carried there by floods or floating ice at the end of that period. The hammers are found in greatest abundance wherever other signs exist of an ancient “‘work-shop,” or place where the flint was dressed. Of these work-shops there are two sorts, which are generally distinct, though sometimes the two sorts of work were carried on in one place. One may be designated as the * blocking-out” shops, the other as the “finishing” shops. At the first kind, which are always near the pits, it seems the flint blocks were brought to a size and shape convenient for dressing into such implements as were desired. In them are always found the larg- est hammers, though smaller ones are sometimes picked up as well. Seattered thickly over the ground are angular fragments of flint, such as would result from knocking off corners and projections from tbe large pieces taken out of the pits, and also from breaking them up into smaller pieces, it being unlikely that a block of such brittle material could be broken up without much waste resulting. i SKETCH OF FLINT RIDGE, LICKING COUNTY, oHI0. 865 The pieces thus fitted for working were then mostly carried to the fin- ishing shops, though, as above stated, the whole work seems to have been sometimes completed in one place. These finishing shops are characterized by the smaller fragments, thin flakes, and broken or unfinished implements, very seldom found in the blocking-out shops. The hammers found in them are generally of small size, seldom exceeding 8 ounces in weight, and are of harder or smoother stone than those found in the other class of shops. The blocking-out in some cases was done at the pits whence the raw material was obtained; but generally a convenient spot was chosen to which all the larger pieces from pits close around were carried, rough worked, and then taken to one of the finishing shops, which are less numerous than the others. Although these shops are to be found at many places on the ridge, only the more important, those where the greatest amount of work was done, will be mentioned here, as a study of the places named will give a visitor as good an understanding of the method of work as would an inspection of scores of similar places. The relation of the work-shops to each other and to the pits will be readily perceived from an inspec- tion of the map. The blocking-out shops show material scattered over from 5 to 10 acres inextent; the others, though covering less ground, show a greater amount of work on an equal area. Of the first sort, then, the principal are located as follows: On the farm of John G. Loughman, lying along the south side of the ridge road and just south of the western limit of excavation. Northeast of the blacksmith shop at the cross-roads. The work seems to have been done here as soon as the flint was quarried out, and the fragments are scattered among the pits. Along the side of the road and within a few feet of the shop is a large pile, many wagon-loads, of an- gular fragments. Northwest of the pits on Bowman’s farm, and again between this shop and Iden’s farm, at which place the two kinds of work seem to have been carried on at the same time, or perhaps, better to say, where a portion of the material, after being blocked out, was finished up, while the greater part was carried elsewhere for the finishing touches. On McCracken’s farm, within the limits of the pits mentioned as be- ing north and east of his house. On the farm of Lennox Fisher, between the pits on his place and those on William Fisher’s land, is another work-shop combining the two kinds of work. At Drumw’s, east of Fisher’s. Here the flint was blocked out at the pits. Finally, the last blocking-out place of importance is on Burrier’s farm. The stone from the pits north, and those on the Brookover farm east, was carried to what now forms part of several fields, and worked up S. Mis. 33——55 866 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. A great amount of work is indicated here by the large territory covered by the chips and the number of hammers of all RIZER from 2 or 3 ounces to 15 pounds, scattered on every hand. In regard to the finishing shops, there is ae a farm, or even a field, in all this region where evidences cannot be found of the fact that weapons were finished up, or at least dressed to some extent. Partially finished or broken specimens, spalls, and flakes may be gathered almost anywhere; unfortunately, such are, now, about all that can be picked up. Collectors from various places have been here so often and in such numbers, and have paid boys such faney prices for “ flints,” that the ground is kept pretty well searched over. Indeed, when the ground is plowed in the spring, boys hunting “ flints” are almost as numerous as the blackbirds following the plow. The locations of the more important ones will be given: On the Burrier farm is a knoll of about 10 acres, south of his house, on which the flakes are scattered thickly. The finishing up of nearly all the flint quarried in Muskingum County (except that from the few pits on Drumm’s place) seems to have been done here. Some 30 rods east of the pits on the Drumm farm is a strip of high ground containing some flakes and spalls—not many, but stil! in as great quantity as the limited number of excavations would lead one to ex- pect. In addition tu the shop named on Fisher’s place as combining the two kinds of work, is one of small extent, on a knoll north of the three pits, and another west of this, in what is now an orchard, where con- siderable work has been done. Just east of the town house is a small area where the flint from the pits in that vicinity seems to have been finished. Southwest of this a limited space on Capt. John Loughman’s farm has flakes quite thickly spread. On Iden’s farm is a field of 10 acres where abundant chips and flakes show that on this spot the finishing touches were given to all the flint from his, Duncan’s, and Bowman’s farms. At John G. Loughman’s house is about 1 acre thickly covered with pieces of all the colors to be found in this region, while on the same farm ,some 40 rods west, on the point containing the large, deep pits, is the most interesting spot of all. Hundreds of implements, in all stages of finish, have been found here, and each fresh plowing seems to expose them in undiminished numbers. As deep asa plow can go these speci- mens are found, and in such numbers that the jingling noise made by them sounds as though one were plowing through a lot of castings. At the side of the field nearest the edge of the hill the spalls are said to have been piled up in a mound before cultivation scattered them, as though the “ancient arrow-maker” had either thrown the fragments on every side of him, and thus gradually elevated himself, or else had heaped all the flakes and unfinished or broken specimens into a single pile. Over an acre ete a SKETCH OF FLINT RIDGE, LICKING COUNTY, OHIO. 867 of this point has been plowed this year, and the remains of “ primitive industry” cover aljl this area. How much more may be hidden under the soil formed by vegetable growth since the shop was abandoned is uncertain, but it seems reasonable to suppose that all the part in which no pits are found, some 4 acres, may have been left by the aborigines as a place in which the work might be completed. On the part that has been plowed there is about half an acre in which the flint amounts to four-fifths of the whole; that is, if all the soil could be put in one pile and the flint chips in another, this would be the proportion of each. Nearly all this is in small flakes and spalls, chipped off in finishing. Very few angular blocks or fragments are found, and such as do occur are those which were carried from elsewhere, but on which, for some reason, the finishing process had not begun. This is the only work- shop on the ridge where may be found the flint ‘ coves” from which were flaked off long, thin splinters to be used as knives, perforators, lancets, and the like.* On J. Kreager’s farm is a shop just north of the pits and on the side of the hill. Both angular fragments and thin flakes may be found here, showing that the rough blocks were fully dressed out before being car- ried away. Smaller shops may be found on J. 8S. Loughman’s land, just at the western edge of the break in the stratum, and on Cook’s land, a short distance southwest of Capt. John Loughman’s. The work of making these implements, then, seems to have been thus: The aborigines (meaning thereby Indians, Mound Builders, or what- ever other name may be assigned to the people who did this work) knew that by digging into the unweathered bed-rock a quality of flint could be obtained better suited to their purposes than that which could be pro- cured along the outcrop. The dirt was cleared away, by being carried out in baskets or skins, until the flint was exposed. Cleaning out a space sufficient for working purposes, a fire was built on top of the rock, and when it was heated water was thrown onit. This would cause the rock to crumble, and on clearing out the fragments a fresh surface of flint would be exposed around the hole thus made in it, from which pieces could be broken off with the large bowlders found in the vicinity, A question presents itself here, ‘‘If this method was used, why did they not follow the flint stratum, once they had found it, throwing the dirt behind them, instead of opening so many fresh holes?” The only answer to be given is that they did not, except in a few instances, and that is all we know about it. The pieces thus obtained, if not already small enough, could be again * On digging in this shop, after the above was written, it was discovered that the layer of chips was not so thick as it was supposed to be; at any point in the field soil free from flint could be found at not more than 16 inches below the surface. Still, an immense amount of work has been done here, 868 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. broken into smaller ones of a convenient size for handling, and taken to one of the blocking-out shops. Here they were broken into pieces of such size as would be best adapted for the form of weapon desired, the faulty pieces rejected, aud perhaps the largest blocks chipped into a rough outline of its final form. Next, it was taken to the finishing shops, where the smaller hammers were brought into play to chip off as much as was possible by such means, after which the weapon, if in- tended to be completed here, was flaked off, by means of pressure ex- erted with a piece of bone or horn, until it reached an outline as regular and a finish as smooth as its maker desired or was able to give. The well-diggers say that the flint can be got out in solid pieces meas- uring 12 to 18inches each way ; that it has a smooth, oily look not found in those pieces exposed on the surface; and that it is much tougher and harder to break. This “toughness” is probably due to the moist- ure in the stone, as the statement has been made that flint when first got out of the ground can be flaked off with but little difficulty, while after even a short exposure it becomes brittle and is liable to break in any direction. Whether, when thus dry and brittle, it could be re- stored to its former state by immersion or burial is a question for ex- periment. One of the old-timers who has been living here for nearly fifty years says that when he first came to the country the old-fashioned flint-lock muskets were in general use, and that the hunters were in the habit of collecting pieces of flint and soaking them in oil for some weeks before using them. This caused them to last much longer; a flint that would, by shattering, become useless in one day, could by this means be made to last for weeks. Is it not possible that the aboriginal workers had some such process by which they could render their work easier and more certain ? Careful investigation of these finishing shops gives rise to another belief, namely, that very few weapons, as compared with the great amount of flint used, were ever fully completed here. The great number of roughly finished specimens found here, when there seems to have been no reason for having discontinued work on them, and the great quan- tities of similarly shaped pieces from this locality occurring at places quite distant, show that the majority of the pieces worked here were brought nearly to the required shape and that it was left with the final owner to give each one such degree of fine finish and symmetry as suited him. There are many places remote from any flint deposit where flakes and spalls are found in abundance, showing that flint im- plements of some description had been dressed on the spot. The immense amount of work done at Flint Ridge, and the widely separated points at which material from here has been found, may be explained in two ways: First, that some particular tribe or race owned this region, and car- ried on for generations, or perhaps centuries, a regular traffic in such ee Pere ; | | SKETCH OF FLINT RIDGE, LICKING COUNTY, OHIO. 869 unfinished weapons. It is stated in many works upon our modern In- dians that each tribe has a particular form of arrow-head or other weapon, so that one found at a distance from a settlement shows to an experienced observer just what tribe has been represented in the vicin- ity. As it is highly improbable that any one tribe could have utilized the great quanity of flint that has been taken even from this one locality, there can be little doubt that a regular trade was carried on with neighboring tribes, or even with those at a distance; and in this view it is likely that the separate blocks were brought to the smallest com- pass compatible with their ultimate use, in order that as little useless material as possible would have to be carried away. And the same holds good with the so-called ‘leaf-shaped arrow-heads,” even those dressed as smoothly as we sometimes find them; in support of which the following is offered : An examination of flint weapons shows that there are two general forms of the upper part or point—the straight sides, as in Fig. 1, or the curved sides asin Fig. 2. The angle of divergence of the sides may vary considerably, but this does not affect the subject. Now, in the many specimens which have been found in various facto- ries, particularly the one under consideration, it may be noticed that nearly all which have been dressed as smooth and thin as they can be have two general forms of the base—the square, as in Fig. 3, or the curved or circular, as in Fig. 4. Very few, comparatively, are found in which the barbs or tangs are finished out. Take almost any arrow-head, restore its outline by filling the chipped out places with wax (the experimenter will probably be surprised to see what a small quantity will be required), and the weapon will be restored to one of the forms made possible by a combination of the straight or curved sides with the straight or curved base. A few such restorations are here given: ee Le A Fic. 5. Fia. 6. Fic. 7. Fig. 8. Fia. 9. Similarly for those with curved sides. 870 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. These facts, which may be noticed at other places as well as at Flint Ridge, give much support to the theory of a general traffic in weapons by one tribe with other tribes, and goes far toward explaining the oc- currence of the great numbers of unfinished weapons, flakes, and spalls - of any particular flint scores or hundreds of miles from the place where it could have been quarried. Before giving the second way in which the facts may be accounted for, a little digression is necessary. As is well known to all who have perused the various works on arch- ology, Licking County is not surpassed by any equal area in the coun- try in the size, number, and complicated arrangement of prehistoric earthworks. More stone mounds, too, are found in its limits than in any other one county, in Ohio at least. From the immense works at Newark a system of mounds and other structures stretches towards the Muskingum Valley on the east and the Scioto on the west, so that by means of semaphori¢ communications the whole region could be appraised in a short time of any unusual event. Notwithstanding this, the whole of Flint Ridge, despite its evidence of long occupancy, shows few remains of this nature. The line dividing Franklin and Hopewell Townships crosses a stone fort. The hill-top is level and gradually widens out as it extends east- ward from the fort, which incloses about 10 acres and is built upon the point of the hill in such a way as to reach the brow on the northern, western, and southern sides, and is admirably situated for defensive op- erations, and also for commanding the valleys leading from the ridge westward. Within it are two mounds, one of earth, the other of stone, not more than 20 yards apart. Both have been opened, but without re- sults. The stone mound and the fort are constructed of flint blocks gathered up from the outcrop just below the top of the hill. In the field containing the blocking-out shop, southwest of the black- smith shop, is a circle of about 35 yards diameter; a few rods west of the blacksmith shop is, or rather was, another of about 50 yards; and on Bowman’s farm, west of the pits, was another, whose size could not be learnéd. Both the latter have been plowed down level with the sur- rounding surface. They all seem to be village sites or permanent en- campments, being on the highest ground in the vicinity. On Captain Loughman’s farm, in the finishing shop east of the house, a mound formerly stood which has been plowed down. From no point on the ridge can a more extended view be obtained than from the site of this mound. Hills in the three adjoining counties of Perry, Muskin- gum, and Coshocton are plainly visible, and the country nearer at hand is spread out like a map before the observer. These are all the places, so far as known, that indicate any perma- nent settlements. Diligent search failed to reveal any traces of pottery or other domestic implements, nor does it appear that any relics have SKETCH OF FLINT RIDGE, LICKING COUNTY, OHIO. 871 ever been discovered except such as may have been lost or abandoned by wandering, hunting, or exploring parties. While on this part of the subject it may be stated that the “trail” from Grave Creek, West Virginia, to the lakes led past the captain’s and close to the cross-roads. Old settlers speak of seeing the Indians follow it many years ago. A so-called “furnace,” which many of the inhabitants believe to have been used by the Indians to melt gold out of the flint (every man who comes to the country will be assured that this is ‘a solemn fact”), lo- cated half a mile south of the captain’s, proves to be an old camp site. Being close to three large springs, it would naturally be selected by hunters and movers, and was much used, a large amount of burned sandstone being scattered around, of which fire-places were constructed. A “mound” on the Muskingum line proved to be a spot where an excavation had been begun but soon abandoned ; a crescent-shaped hole has the dirt from it thrown on the surface between the horns. Most probably made at an early: day by whites seeking material for millstones. To return to the argument: This scarcity of the evidences of perma- nent settlement on a scale commensurate with the amount of work done offers another solution of the unfinished state of so many implements, which is this: It is well known that the celebrated ‘‘red pipe-stone quarries” were held as sacred and neutral ground by all the tribes which were accus- tomed to gather there for the purpose of procuring this rare and, to them, valuable stone. No matter what feuds may have existed between tribes, or what deadly enmities may have been held by individuals, when workers met in these quarries it was always in a state of peace, even if their differences would not allow friendly intercourse. Some such feeling as this may have influenced the natives of this sec- tion of the country. With that disposition characteristic of the super- stitious, nations as well as individuals, to attribute everything by which they are benefited to the direct and friendly interposition of a beneficent Superior Being, it is easy to believe that these people may have held this Flint Ridge as a sacred gift from their Great Spirit. All the different tribes may have resorted to this place to obtain material from which to fabricate weapons, and also, it may be, to secure the more brilliant stone for making totems or insignia, or for some tribal or religious ceremonies. The stupendous works at Newark, and the connected system of mounds, &c., could have been built only by a nation that possessed the territory for a great length of time and were in large numbers. They would claim dominion over all the country round for many leagues, ex- cept perhaps this sacred ground, if so it was held, and would jealously guard their territory against the hunting parties from other regions ; and although they would not, from religious motives, molest outside parties engaged in procuring flint, yet when these same parties went 872 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. beyond their allotted boundaries, they would, like more modern peuple, find that a decided limit can be given to conscientious scruples by per- sonal interests; hence it would behoove them to secure their flint as quickly as possible and get back to their own hunting grounds, unless, indeed, they had the means to supply themselves with provisions from the owners of the surrounding country, for supporting themselves, in case a longer sojourn was desirable. So that they would chip their flint to a portable size and shape, and carry it thus with them to such points as they chose, and there take all the time necessary for dressing and finishing it up. The caches of so-called “ disks,” “‘scrapers,” ‘ leaf-shaped implements,” ‘“‘ turtle-backs,” or ‘ hatchets,” as they are variously named in so many localities where they are found, which may be regarded as nothing more or less than such unfinished pieces, render this theory plausible; and it certainly loses no strength if we accept the statement quoted some pages back that “fresh” flintis much more readily worked than ‘ dry.” Burying it in the ground would allow it to remain in working order much longer than if it were exposed to the atmosphere. The finely dressed arrows or knives sometimes found, and the few “circles” in the vicinity, do not militate against the theory; in fact, they rather strengthen it; for such of the natives as lived within a short distance coald well spare the time necessary to complete their work while they were about it, and the defensive position indicated by the fort and “circles” is only such a precaution as would naturally be taken by a settled people who were compelled to allow strangers or even enemies to remain so near them unmolested. Three hours’ time, or even less, would have allowed a treacherous, hostile party to reach the Newark works from the Ridge, and it was only a matter of ordinary prudence to keep a look-out for such a contingency. The position of the fort, too, supports this view, being located, as itis, so far west of the nearest point to their settlements where any work was done, although a limit had been set past which none were allowed to go. If it be objected to all this that it makes the Indian and the Mound Builder the same person, let it be remembered that no one has yet proven that the Indian was not a Mound Builder, or that the Mound Builder did not do this work on Flint Ridge. Whether there is anything in these two “ explanations” which possi- bly *‘ do not explain,” or whether a combination of both may better suit the case, or whether, finally, the facts must be explained by a new hypothesis, archeologists may determine. The writer, not professing to be posted in the science, simply submits such thoughts as will suggest themselves to any one who may go over the ground carefully; and ic these observations will throw any light upon this interesting subject, or afford any information, let it be taken for what it is worth. Strict accuracy is not claimed for the accompanying map. Ll cel) I it¥ N NS A) Uf cits Ml ANA Te meng WW | WE ones nye I 4 aesay® 1g WS \S r gti ants Ni PAYG yy qwshallllie™ SS 1 aL UTy as sara yay Mm Yip ah ten gue oll Me Mle Wall vl We ) WW yt +, Way. aS 16 x + 9 “WW : , j = S, My, Seni ee 45|Z Bax apy Mt Remains near Piqua, Miami County, Ohio, x —— ee. EARTHWORKS AND MOUNDS IN MIAMI COUNTY, OBIC 875 that it required a pike to break through it. After the removal of the ashes, 19 inches of clay burnt red were met with. The excavation was about 6 feet square. There is a large stump of a tree standing a little to the north of the center of the mound. On the west side of the fort are three gateways 8 feet wide, which are covered on the outside by a stone wall 10 to 12 feet long, and 6 feet thick. There are also three small ravines running down to the valley below in front of these gateways, which no dgubt were excavated by human hands. On the west wall are standing at present some very large trees. No. 2 is a small circular fort situated 200 yards southeast of No. 1. The height of the wall is at present about 18 inches, but formerly, no doubt, it was much higher. This inclosure has a ditch on the inside, and gateways facing fort No. 1, and is about 150 feet in circumference. No. 3 is a similar structare, and is located about 200 yards east of No. 2. This embankment has t.vo gateways, one on the east and the other on the west, 8 feet wide. The wall is about 4 feet high and slopes towards the gateways. This also has a ditch on the inside. This work has never been disturbed. It is. about 200 feet in circum- ference and is fenced and covered with sod. No. 4 is located 1 mile south of No.1 and situated on the second bot- tom. It is 300 feet in circumference, with an entrance on the south- east side, 10 feet wide. Its embankment is at present about 2 feet high and 8 feet wide, which the plow lowers every season, and its wall will soon be erased from the surface. This also has a ditch inside. No. 5 is a mound situated 300 yards to the northeast of No. 4. This mound was 240 feet in circumference, and was formerly about 9 feet high, but at present is almost obliterated. An exploration was made by running a ditch from south to north to the center of the mound, and it was found to contain an altar composed of burnt clay. This was covered with ashes, charcoal, and burnt bones, 3 inches thick. On this was a layer of clay, then alternate layers of clay and charcoal 5 feet thick, each charcoal stratum being about 1 inch in thickness, the whole covered with clay and gravel mixed, 2 feet thick. West of the altar were found human remains, viz, a skeleton lying with the head towards the southeast imbedded in clay; the skull bore the ap- pearance of having been crushed with a blunt instrument. Fragments of the skull were within the cavity near the surface. Broken pottery similar to that found in Kentucky occurred. Nos. 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 are altogether obliterated and were located within the present limits of the city of Piqua, Miami County, Ohio, all within an eighth of a mile of the river. These works were described by Maj. S. H. Long. No. 11 is situated 1 mile southwest of the center of Piqua, on the upland. It is an ellipse 60 feet wide and 100 feet long, with ditch on inside and one gateway on the north. This work has been almost ob- 876 PAPERS RELATING TO ANTHROPOLOGY. literated by the plow. There is a spring at the foot of the hill in front of the gateway. Nos. 12 and 13 are stone mounds about 2 feet in height and 100 feet in circumference. From No.12 were taken a great many human remains, and from No. 13 a skeleton, a stone ax, and a slate-stone plate per- forated with one hole. No. 14 was another mound, which is now entirely obliterated. No. 15 is a circular earthwork, with a ditch on the inside. The em- bankment, which is about 3 feet in height and 5 feet wide, is situated on a high bluff off the Miami River, and can be distinctly traced. No. 16 was another circular earthwork, and there are at present no traces of it, for the Dayton and Michigan Railroad runs over the spot where it was. It was about 300 feet in circumference, with a ditch on the inside. There is a spring on the west of the work, about half way down the bluff, which never fails. No. 17 is another stone mound 150 feet in circumference and is now 2 feet high, but formerly was much higher. The former owner has removed a great deal of the material of this mound for the purpose of burning lime. There are a great many human remains beneath this mound. No. 18 is a large mound, covering nearly an acre of ground, and at present is 21 feet, high. There is a house built on this mound, the owner of which informed the writer. that in digging the cellar he en- countered ashes, charcoal, and remains of burnt bones. This mound cannot be thoroughly examined, on account of the house, which stands in the center of the mound. The map is marked with crosses where human remains are found; also the village sites. There are remains of works in other townships. In Concord there is a mound 155 feet in circumference and 5 feet high, truncated. In Newton Township there is a one half circular work, 700 feet in circumference, 240 feet in length, and 6 feet high. There is a ditch on the inside and outside, sloping towards the ravines, where the embankment ends. The wall of earth faces the west. Also one circular work 300 feet in circumference. These two works are located on the west bank of the Stillwater River, on Sec- tion 19, Newton Township, Miami County, Ohio, and are covered with timber. They are situated on a bluff 60 feet above the river. There is a ravine running from the southwest and another from the northwest, and in the fork between these ravines the largest of the works is located. EIN Dex. A. J Page. Abbe, Cleveland: report, on) meteorology == -<-:--- <2. an ssacin ceec wesc acous 257 ADCLt ee loCOMechonepresencedsDygeeseee se eee en eee eee ene seca sean 62 Academy of Sciences, National, meeting of... ..-----.---2 .2<2-- 2.2. concen 11, 66 Weeessions 10: National Museum os sc. cess + seis osteo eid asta soso ue 57-62 Acclimatization Society of Budapest, correspondence with-.-.....-.......--- 51 Ackerman eAurAc collect onspmad en yo sec oee = oe a eieieeaeeet eereed Seen 15 ACOMA NOXPlOLAhlONS OLasss-s2 J. seoss See oan le ceee sss se See cei cee cess si once COO AO Acting Secretary of Institution, appointment of......-.......-.. Sorceress ee 6,7 Congressional resolutionsrespectin geass sa aoa ee ee a eine XII, 6, 149 ACS aNGsTesOlUhi ONS Of CONPTESS 4-2 se os = =e afonite sre: ciethe Sans 149 Atrica, bransmission Of exchanges: t0e-ssccac ose <2 as ae oe ete ost se soe 104 AUTICA OX PLOPALLONS MM so. smo ser eisis hele eens cel oe oe Pe aichaiep ele eiepeisiseramee ee 28 INGweGUING DS fy Veco ols ccuicee es ocaten acconoe spa lemereasics sits = sie ois 28, 57 Alabama. ceopraphical workin. sess once ne - bee ns eee 719 SPO iON ema wags 5 5 one «we oma nee inne o5 coon =n sae eee ne ee 677 878 INDEX. Page Antiquities at Pantaleon, Guatemala | ----- 52.2 -2-. 122. sos shen owen cee 719 Department of, National Museum......\.... ---- ------ 222+ «++ -2- 2-22-22 55, 57 The Guesde collection of, in Point-a-Pitre, Guadeloupe, West Indies .-..-.. 731 Appendix to the Secretary/s 1reponttess..-s2er == aera ag alese eee 99 Appendix, General oc = = ese tee eels ee lal ola ee ee 155 Appropriations. (See Congressional appropriations. ) Archeologic researches among Pueblo Indians ....-.....-..----.---..------ 69 FO O10 2) 01) a) (OIE E er Bo Geo Soe Sen mms ige abn yo 86 Sale eats se So Se 57,719 Arctic:coast; explorations Of. 2m ce eyese sien aia) oe ieee ee ate ee eee ete 17 Arizona, ethnological explorations ine oo2.)ces-2= ee eee eee ee eee 69 Geographical work of the United States Geological Survey in ...--. ee aoe 80, 90 Avizona and New Mexico./exploratiousin..--)2- see e-oeiee a eeee ene eases 20 By Nelsons EB. Wee cceccs ine temcctne: sciviniselesciss ete eeee e e ee 20 By, Stevenson, James= 222 3 sob eise- cise ones ae Seino l= alos oan eee 20 By Bureau of Ethnolocy- ccc ssocnsss sees asian ee ee aerate 20 By Shufelat Drks Woo-5 2223 oot iow. ceuats se oa ae eee mete eon ee 20 Arkansas, mound explorationean 3. .- 125 < <2. ec=. poet eas ee eee aete bane 68 Armory building, Congressional appropriation for .-..........--..--------- Xvu, 151 « Used by Bish Commission a=: 2 55snc csc esac cseeoeese peice ee eres =e eee 10 Arranging collections in Smithsonian building viet Keim at aise eich re el sua eeeas 9 Art and Industry department, National Museum ........-.---.---..-------- 55, 65 Artesian wells, paper on! <22222 5. Svetonss eoaceis pieia)= See eee oes Seer 82 Asia; explorations sm, ): 3-2/2 03s tea. ate sel ese ocise sain oe occ eeere Se os ee 27 ‘By Blackiston, Thomasé 222 022 sors ase sila ne Se aan tao een at se iow 27 By Dall, Revi CcHic Ar oon sa se one oye cee ne oe oeeta eee ee 27 yOu ye eben Wane sme cise ee SOA ily Soe een tt Ba Ee Ra MAR TN 2 27 ByeRajahiol Pagore2c2 = s.5 sees eco ee tee eee renee eee See eee 27 ASia, Lransmission OL exchanges) t0jss-c\se eimai ar ieee eases seiner aaa 105 Assistant Director of the National Museum -..-...-....----....--..----+-..- 55 Assistants.of the National Museum-2---- 4-4-2 sak eee eee ee eee eee 55, 56 Astronomical announcements, telegraphic.--- .:.----..-.----2--------+ ---- 48 Astronomy, bibliography 0f=: o-oo. -cn nee a eeee e aeeee eee eeee 205 Report OM: 2 6 ss- Som co se cco Weeiswnione Se ee eG eee ee = a eee ae eee 159 Atchison, Topeka and Santa F6 Railroad, co-operation of .....-.--..---..--- 41 Atlantic and Pacific Railroad Company, co-operation of .......----.-------- 41 Atlas Steamship Company, co-operation of....--....--2..--2-..---1-+-.----¢ 34, 41, 106 Atwater, W. O., acting curator, National Musenm......-.-...---...-------- 55 Australasia, transmission of exchanges to........-....-.--...--------.----- 105 Austria, exchange with Government of....-.- .- psc ta Roe Gels Sore ae een 35, 100 Autotypes, collection, Of 5.2 0.5284 ssoe ee scene Sete e eee ee ee eee Eee eee 65 Aymé6, Louis H., collections received from .-.--:--.------ qee2--- ste ce means 25, 57 B. Bailey, cele b.,.ew, Co.,.cO-Operation Ofsa cus =e ae eee ee eee = eee eee 34, 106 Baird, Spencer F., appointed member of committee on re-publication of Pro- fessor Henry’s scientific writings...-...---.....-....--. oe SE ee as 2 Introduction to record of scientific progress ..--.....-.....-...----...---- 158 Letter to Congress transmitting Smithsonian report for 1884..____......-. 1 Member of ‘;commititeeion Walker prizemtseaeeer ees] nee ee eens sete eeoe 48 Member of Committee on Ventilation of the House of Representatives... 37 Report; to: Board-oftiRegents 222 oii aesoe ae oee sae aan 1 Report.on\Burean oft thnolory..... 22h es seems eee eee eee eee 67 Reporijon’ NationaleMuseum'::. << 3... 2 cersee a eee ee eee 52 Report on United States Geological Survey ...-...---..- ER ee 77 Report on United States Fish Commission..---.-....-.---.--...-..------ 95 INDEX. 879 Page. Baker, Dr. Frank, lecture by...-....-.--.----- th Ec Re ee 67 Baldwin, L. H., assistant, National Museum.......-+.........--.-....-.---. 56 Ball, Prof. V., of Dublin, commendation of exchanges by..... .-.....-....-. 36 Baltimore and Ohio Railroad Company, co-operation of ........._..-....... 34 Barker, Dr: iGeorge, t.) report on physiesassiaes Messe ecee ost woe ee 433 Bartow County, Georgia, mound explorations in..--...............-....--. 68 BarUs Dre Canis WADer Dynastic. oct cs Se een Cee ket amee ee alan. sun ee 92 Batchen, John J. F., collection received from .....--. 2.22. .c 222. cece cece. 61 Batrachians, department of, National Museum. ......-.........-..--...----- 55, 58 Bean; B- A.; assistant, National “Museum... 22.5... 2-222 2.2 kes DAS 56 Bean, Dr. Tarleton H., curator, National Museum’ ssc. sss50-5 saesen see eee. 56, 57 Pxplorahion Dyieoce..2- se ans see sacs Bo Sees nee ers oon ee een ee 24 Hebian ie de; co-operabion.Of-5 25. ose 2 een et oleh dee ae 34, 106 Becker Gere! Pi. se0lOp lal WOrk Of =. cco. 25 ec neee oe ae ee Cee eee 85, 86, 90 BBCAOLA eh. LOX DLOTAIONS DYso-<26 2a Sse oo eee Se ee 69 Being ei collections made by4 326005. = SSL ss eee ee 20 Bendire, Capt. Charles, honorary curator, National Museum.........-..---- 55, 57 Collectionstmad ehbyeene >see aes eae ie a Meine ae 20 Collegiion ofeges presented Dy 20: a-=. 4-2 case Ss aca ese fees se eee 50 Bequest proposed to the Institution: - ==. 2.2.2.2... 2535. 222 XIII Bereen Norway, Museum, collections trom): 222 .2nsesee ee eee 28 Sees 27 BSOLINUC A SCION ENG DANOIS\OM.- sss 835 so ioc fo nc ann ee st ee nte ee tee aoe ee 31, 32 BON Wpr have SCE V ICON Ole soho). asec oo) Se tee re: te teh eit Perea Meena 99 Beyer, Dr. H. G., honorary curator of the National Museum.......-...---- 55 jE Y ETD ts ot Ree PP I aU LON RE aE eat RS es MEMO Meine Uageas a fe TL a 38 SO TVAC CSU Le rere reels ietei ciel ay dn em eycieeinals = Soe se icc ES Ae 52 Bibliography of, LUDA UCR A oe ae Aeigeibore cea e ene ae Ase ema = eames eSdcooeesoog esssue 694 ANSUTR TVET M YS ea eS a ane E a neem Sud aio eee nN eye 8 ae 205 Chemistry -.---.- (obese wa Snes eaSkeD Gaac bade cece seas Seocoasteccceccdoeseoce 533 MiG BOLOLO My mare ere seal. . 2225/5 wclic cane bn aeeen tee ere eee SooocEcocstce 396 INET CE RLOD Vie nee ne see oo a a ns Seco sae ace SER ee Se ae Eee 598 North American Invertebrate Paleontology ........-....-....-.------.--- 563 hiySl Capes sete er eee eon stra S sare apa be aes eee ee ae eee eee 487 Vileanoloeyrand Seismology... 2 222s Ss soa e sees eae eee ce ee aee sees 228 KRDO) no nacte c6SSba GaERCe RE OSO GaeHaS Haoceoebenaa Gbceas eemoEroMeaoBedase 649 Biddle, E. R., co-operation of. soneea cngéesedsogsdseces cadson Soa souesesee sees 34, 106 Biological AM Anthropological Societies’ lectures.......--.--.....--.----<- 11, 66 Biological Society of Washington, meetings of..-....---.-......-..-...---- 66 Birds Department of, National Museum: 22222252 ccs cee seeee ee oe sien 55, 58 Mesinme tlomOleessema no heceaose. 2 of smewee econ eee ee eee een eines acer 51 GET OH G5 SS 2 ge Sennen sors oe one SeeBcse Soke © es ood arenes ee ee 40 Birds’ eggs, Department of, National Museum...............--...---..----. 55, 58 Bixby lhomaswC 0: CO-Operatlonm Of = s)\-22 oer ase see) ee ee eee ee 34, 106 Blackistons thomas. collections received. fromes 2. sees-eiaeee eee cece ete cose 27 BlandeEbomaseco-operabion! Ofce=s-s,s- sce eset ee eter ian sinc cc se sssieitia oer 34, 106 Beard ot Re sOniseres cc. asecOe foe == cee ne teeta s « SAS Seoee 6 (See, also, Regents.) Boehmer, George H., report on Smithsonian exchanges.......----.---------- 99 Services in isons S8nd cee BC dpeeso conosco douse cebebooatoceee cc sspoo7eo"- 33 Bolles, Lieut. T. Dix, collections DY soe teeta views ~ 5 2p eeehosnretelaaets 19, 38, 57 Bolton, Prof. H. Carrington, investigation of sonorous sand .....-..--...--- 47 INGCOHNOM: GUGINO AY Gonapoce oc Combs cane Sd cS Scae sane CoE Inecoos se sSee 491 Boriandsh. it CO-Operavion: Of. -cc0 ssen sees ec sc~ 6oos wenan banwes leas awe 34, 106 880 INDEX. Page. Bors, Consul: Christian; co-operation of!.-.--.. 4222. s2suisessenee ces tee 107, 112 Boston exhibition, donations obtained from...-..-.-.........--...--2+.----- 50 Botany of North America, by Prof. Asa.Gray 12.2.2... -.:22. A222 cet cee 31 Botaasi,;Consul D."W., co-operation of 22. 3522 2a. ean ee eee eee 107.112 Braun, Adolph, & Co., autotypes obtained from.................. .....----- 65 Bransford, Dr. J. F., and Lieut. Charles E. Vreeland, on antiquities at Pan- taleon, Guatemala ..---.. re bla Seg ayavetohe wt eis tate vepene Sera oe a eee eat 719 British Columbia, explorationspines 22 ess eq ee eee ee eee eee ee 19 Pthnological explorations in... 70 ...2-42200 oie ecole eae ese eee 72 Queen Charlotte’s Islands, report on explorations and collections in.-_.-..- 137 British provinces, exchange withhie. sem eee e sac e eee ene ee eee eee 35 Brown, VermonvH.,.d&) Co: Co-Operationnol se sare aaa ee ee ee 34, 106 Brush Electric Light Company, experiments by ....-.-...-..-.....- ------ 9,11 Buildings 3522, 55cS 22s oc ees s saa ancien ae ee ee ee ee eee a Additional museum building asked -for---- -----.2- 22. ssces- cease se eee 10 Armory-building:2- 222. 2cnsccs5 02-258 peceaoeeesasice cee ose eee ee 10 Brick:work: s so. -sosceea ss see eee a = ieee eee oe ae eee 26 By uamsony ce BlOSeae ee eae Specs 8S Gee Sao R AG ee Se 26 Cotheal, Consul loxander i co- agente ioe 3 peste Sh SEE Biorha eeaeere eee 107 Cotton exhibition, i oranouel atNE WaOrleanste soar eee ce See eee 44, 63, 64 Cox, Hon. §.S., address by.---.-..---- PASSE SE Sok Sethe oe eons pee eee TH Cox, W. V., financial clerk, of New Orleans Exposition ....-..----.-------- 56 Crawford, Dr. William N., collections made by.-.-.-.-.-.----------------- ---- 27 @ubas fishes shrontss sss eee se es aera aster ee ect eee ee ee e 25 Cunard Royal Mail Steamship Line, co-operation of..--..-.---.----.-------- 34, 106 Curacgoa, collections made in :-.---- Se oe Se chee See aie ei ae oe el eee ioe aeemeereene 25 Curators‘o@ the National Museums ss ease ee ines seers ate aaa ae er 55, 56 . Curtin, Jeremiah, linguistic studies of ...... ..--.....--- 2 2.2------26--5-5- 73 COtinink) deista s Oa AsO) Peecmesaos Uaena Gada soUee cesses Saco sesac pes Aan oSo¢ 86, 89 Cushing, Frank K., explorations by .-----.----------------+--------+------- 70 Papers prepared by: .- -. --'-- <2 ani no oe oe eens eee ee 75 D. Dakota, geological work in... . .... 2222. <5. $<2c(este)-Sesem eo sss ses ~ =e aes 87 Dakota Nation, Calendar of the .........-....---. ---------------+ ----=+---- 75 Dall, W: H:, curator, National Museum: --2--- .< 2-22 22-- ace seein 56, 59 SS pCO M0) ae aac Ses aoe ONES Sern Sema nrescc Joocoien sab gasnc gomSoe 89, 90 Dall, Rev. C. H. A., collections received from..-....--------------------=-- 27 Dallas, Vice-President George M., portrait of......-..-..------------------- a, Dallett, Boulton & Blissmco-operation Offs .ee == eee e ee eee 34, 106 Dana, Edward S., report on mineralogy. ..---.---------------+-+--+-++-+-:- 543 Dennison, Thomas, co-operation of ........-.---. -en-- eeeeee eee n ee eee e ne ee 34, 106 INDEX. 883 Dental Association, American, meetings of --..---------- +---++-----+------- ier Departments of the National Museum... -.------------ +--+ -+++s+e500r-007- 55-65 Dewey, Fred. P., curator, National Museum ..---.------ ----+--------+---- 56, 62 Work by, at the New Orleans exhibition. ..---..-.--- -----------+----+---- 62 Dictionaries in preparation ..---..-------------------+---- 3 Sb 6e SCO SED QSOS SSE 76,77 Diebitsch, Miss J. C., services of.... ..----------- ---- ---- 22222-2020 cette 99 Diller, Mr. services of ..---.----.-----+----- SaGASn choood GaBeaoeeObor besaiasad 86, 87 District of Columbia, geology of the-.-.----------------- +--+ +--+ serrre cree 88 Domestic exchanges: Comparison with former years. .-..---------------+-+---+ 2-2-0 r errr ttre 110 Receipts for----------------------------- BBE OoSaeoiesbae pocumcon She ee a4, 102 Received for Smithsonian library. .---..-.----------------+----------+------ 111 TAT RSIMISSIOUS ee eee eae eis e ee cee re elem ww in wai inl amine wlelmsminin masini 34, 102, 110 Dominica, collections from .....----------- -----------2 trees rrr rtr 25 Donations, special, to the Institution. ..---.-----.-----------+----++ errr r07+ 48 Dorsey, Rev. J. Owen, linguistic studies of..---.-----------------+--+++--- 72, 76 Drugs, sampleg of. ...------- ------ ------ -----+ e2erre veneer eres corre ree 40 Dugés, Prof. Alfred, collections Madeuby sesso sees aa ae oe ee eeecele 25 Dutton, Capt. C. E., lecture by .----------------------- peice eaomoee 67 erviCen Of sano ee cor eee cience ene otear enna: Scere cep esas — mo" erase 86 Duty on Sevres vase ...--------- -----+ -----2 o-oo ne renee eect errr cee 152 E. Early County, Georgia, mound explorations in. .....----------- -----+-+----- 68, 69 Earll, R. Edward, curator, National Museum .-----.----.------------++-->-- 55 Executive officer, New Orleans Exposition --..-..-------------------------- 56 Earthworks and mounds in Miami County, Ohio.-.---..----.--------------- 873 Economic Geology, department of, National Museum .--...----------------- 56, 62 Edinburgh ter-centenary ------.------------+--2+ s-c2sr rrr ren creer 46 Edmunds, Hon. George F., regent -----. ---------------+--22-022020r ttt r XoeNGT Wetieriton seen ac. a2 ene eee erate neers omer recs a9 Ill Motion by .--- -------- -----+ ---------°- Pe Be coneenaoue ceeaee cube ben odgs XIV Renvlahlemaby sere ces! aoe a a mere mr erlang ooo eos 6 Eggs, collections of, presented to TnistitublOn ssc. se heee ose ae eens 50 Eggs of fish, distribution of ...-.----- Sea Baan cuScenoae see eEad oooede saa Sec 96 Election by Congress of regents -------------+ ----+----- 22 sre ete ttre ese 153 Electric light in Museum building... --------- ---------+2- 2-77 torcetcrrt tte 11, 66 On Smithsonian building..----.-.-.--------- --<2------22<2 --oecs 2220-02 9° Electrical exhibition at Philadelphia ..----.---------------------+ 5-77-7077" 43 Electrical service in Smithsonian building ---.------------------+++---5 07777 8 Emmons, S$. F., geological work of ...----------------++++-rrccccrt certs 85 Endlich, Dr. F. M., services of Ie 8 ee ee ene se ahs cope SSR Rane ose 52 England, exchange of official documents ..----.---- Bee aoe sonal cre eho 100 Ensigns appointed to duty in National Museum .... -----------------------:- 38 Entomological Society of Washington, meetings Of......------------------- 66 Pry; J ohn Betetber of 25. << - = 2-2-2 sno ennai ne Sores 3,4 ekimoan pictopraphs.---.----+-==--+------5= 7-7 santo oon weno nro 72 Espriella, Justo R. de la, consul, co-operation of ..----.------------------*- 107, 112 BIRTH OT LOCO es oon - a 5 oe vole me pete aya 7 SS BOSS Se XvI Estrézulas, Consul Enrique, co-operation OLE on. Saas so see meer eee 107 Ethnological researches among North American Indians. --- ---------------- 67 Ethnology, Department of, National Museum .....----.--------------- +77" 55, 57, 65 Department of, at New Orleans exhibition .... .------------------+s--87-7" 65 North American, Congressional appropriation for -.--------------+---+- XVIII, 152 884 INDEX. Page. Etowah mound explorations << —...-1 eeeeee eee eee ee seen eee 27 Transmission of exchan ees :t0).2- 5.0. 22 s-aen)- saa e eee eee nee eer 106 Byans, Go W., assistance of .- 2.225. -. SSL eee bees aa ee eee 41 Exchange office, removal of. (222522 1 2ecr. -Sanewe sa -e Ste eee eer eee eee 99 Hxchanges; international: =. == \32¢-2- jasiose es nah adiee ieee cele eee eee 33 Centers’ of distribution: - sti 222 oe se soonest oen eae Eo eee 109, 112 Consuls, co-operation Of - =. ~: 2. ses aon ee ee eee 34, 106, 107, 112 Domestic exchange division .2 22 ee .s.sp2a 5 ce caees eee ee 100 Horeignvexchange'divisionya- o> ccc senna eee ee eee eee eens 99 Governmentiexchange division: s.-4-2 4622 eee eee eee eee eee 100 dbistiof official publications: *=22-- 4s s-0e ses ese eee ee ee eee 113 IPG Sodan Saesog Gade bobs Gros Boadss S6as SS6se0 OSs c86 Oba sea Sco sooueb cee: 34, 101 For foreign transmission -2 22-2 << 22 -ces- ose scee nace eae ae eee 34, 101 For domestic: transmissions s-\9\.02 5-62 scc/seen eaeisin ee een ee Eee eee 34, 102 Hor Government exchanges ©2-- <2. st. cteee ee ae eee eee eee 34, 103 For Smithsonian library. 5.2 -5252 2-6. soe soo eae senior ae gorerete 111 Recipients of Government exchanges ..---...---.-.- tae eS 34,113 Uae 0) ee oeem enor emecaoe men cease eee Seen see oe 425854 Gn 55+ 99 BHippin y Ag eOU bs pe at oem a ale el aaa a ee eee ee 107, 112 TTETAUSMISSIONS | 62's oe Soscn one Gace Sani sae cl seek Seton eee ore eee 35, 104 Foreign ©xchan ves. <2 a. anon meee seeps ae ee ee eee eee 104 Domestic exchanges 5:2 2..2:5 22. .<-Ge5 soos ene eae eee ee oe aoe 110 Government; éxchanges's- Seca 2 ee see nae ac eee eae 112 Transportation companies granting free freight.....-.. --....---.------ 34, 106 Exchange work, increas6 0f.0 2. os Socks een a oa ee, ee 34, 103 Executive committee of Board of Regents, members of --...---....--..----- 6 TRO POEL OL o epste ois mele are oe ele a are Na ee XV Executive Departments at New Orleans Exposition ..........-..-.--.------ 150 Exhibition; electrical, at Philadel phiag<22--os= eee sss ee ee eee 43 Exhibitions; preparations tot ca. o-j1- sates eae eae ee eae eee eee eee 9, 57-65 State and international.__--. ..---......------- << Te Sp wtb MSE Les ea 43, 63 Expenditures for the year 1684-2027 2222 (2h 2 eee scetne ss) eee XVI Deen Oe ne eae Ayes ease see co ecb ss cncecs Soon shoe ase S2 22 s2 522 13 APTICR eae notes es ee ecewesais see oe CoS eete geek onan Sanat ae eee 28 TEC OWA e SI SBSSSRED CSOs BOSS oa a Oee SAB OASIGEO SPOS ACnuS qeEedscs Sap6 sacn 19 Arctic coasts: << s22 565 25 .Shsn ec 2s ooo. ee tec aa aee eee eee eee eee 17 ATI ZONA 222Gb ese ssiec sho San sais secs eee Mesa OS oes eine Hace eye ee ee 20 ASIA 5: fos 0 cent Saint aes seis, oe oo weer eens ce cicnice aes ee ese eee eee eee eae 27 British Columbia 2:4 <- 2). S2..25 eas se wsiiose ronson es 2 paseo aoe eee ee ets 19 California 2252 4.¢cissc sce cs ise soe Soe Ss Sets Seco eeniecee ole nlee ee eae teas 20 CentraltAmeric¢a 22. .....Js3 8 eel nea cee Soni Senn eee =e ee eee eeeene 25 (OHO) Ce SOO Oe ene ee ro SABC neem A meee a OS oe eM SloG SCOR Aoac 26 Bastern- portion ofthe United iStatess--- 1-2-4 sos-eeeees esse e ee eee 24 DUO De) Scoo ceases sogess yyos S65 ses shoeaoosed soca sdcccd Bcbocosest oedebcsse 27 Greenland ies 2a ecto 2. oo... Fas tusmenisiaceeecnee se eeeeeee = oa eee eee 14 Greely relief expedition. 2.52 .$2..52 5-58 22 ada sate eeeate aes See eee 14 JOR ENG? eon edo cose cuen eee node o500 soeSeS conSee seee sens beba se secoseseo- 16 Madacgaseak escemee case =<. cisiace le eae ie aioe eee eee eee 28 1 E> qh OSS SAAS 5o)S Go cin SSO eee BeBe On nao eSUO OOS CLES DEES Ones Sonos 25 New. Mexico)... /s2essaeees w 2 sae + os See bios cele Soames see sae os sae ee 20 Nicaragua ....... Sa )3 SOO ROE URES REE DES Bono naaeau acs Sogacuas GaSSe Geass 26 North: Pacifie: cs... se ayo a5. 225s cece oo eniajsssateaerices mee aerate 18 OMG Shee eee oes oo Sos Se RRee nse eda Sao Sesh sc sssecche sec cce 20 meetin INDEX. 885 Page. Explorations—Continued. Manthwi@h Wslands) <-i2< 2 .\a eee eee piss aievictecamiscee pace kaae oconseS ounces’ 28 RU MPUPAINELICA s = 5) sian septa teiaclaiminiteioe atari ae Seeaec cele coe sacs ce 26 WVAsnin stony CercibOlyege me: cece cee ne ae ciate ome renee eevee alee Seles bisale, vis els 19 AWieSGeln dies 2242 apie ete is nenls coe ote i seone ome use Satie e cents oad ooeie 24 Explorations and collections in the Queen Charlotte’s Islands, British Colum- Wy Ike) NON OL soos coo See nsae es 260s do Soon Goad eas ose choudy Jaeacaen ose 137 Exploration of mounds by Bureau of Ethnology .-.---.-.--..----..----.-.-.- 67 Hi xpositionawOrle eae ce teases ee ea scecls see cae ase ese reisce Seated a anefoess 57-65 F. Farallone Islands; collections’ made in. --.--.-------_ cc cco ecceemececce oss 20 Bibersy samples of, from) JaMAaiCa) 2 --/-2-oocsee scoliotic Sele oeeeetese sn eee 25 Hieldiworkof Bureauot bP thnoloty=.-- sass = ceseeee cece soe ca ace sesicesieee 67 Hallmorey bresid@ent, portraitiOl scscce csc ce deiais scmiesse nies c oe maven seieieee 7 MinanceslOfmthneVvUnstibatlOny.cs2 qeceten coins = sieteimcie ei esoacieeys =< Sa sinl ele cee eee XV,7 Fire-proofing of, Smithsonian building, Congressional appropriation for-.. .x VII, 8, 152 IBN =CATS eer sae ecio coe ne ie Ses eeisioereies cis oalee See Sab we bine ene clea mveawetn ssi 96 Fish Commission, United States, report on...........-..----..-.-.--------- 95 / nine NNN GN soscsaces cooSon esseoeaoue 66 HGbads bandoEs DUOsCEOEEABaDDEe 96 CaliformigstEOUtasoe cose sesee cose law sis Sais win Na sees ee eiwinicieicis sees seve 96 Carson transporting tishtan GOP ieee ans tese ae) ce t= ee = eel a alalaratelieiee 96 Wo-OperabiOM Ole eases seo k sens cee pa aaa so Seas Caio aes Aone s asaiases 14, 60 IDR OHO @ CGS 346 sdoone eosose San onbee Jado SSO nae bon cUsEbeESsocouS 96 TOMO NY ecb sibs sSb0esboonon ceodoo sesdou ceoeesus4 sooeopesodae doce 24 CHISTIIN CHIGD soscleg 655046 Sons pRGob aeRO O Cho Rue Gaoese Soobon cobood seus Goones 96 TENG RII OL WAD244 cd sad doe Seoisods caso pando 866 Go5d bogoHoESeoodedoucec 97 TNS aee tina) (a7 WS SobeBe paeeecaseo Gace coeeS0 Saoseredemed consee Heccer 97 Salt-water fisheries... ... OS BES HRN SoG a See AB SHE dGdd os Eco omieras Coc 96 STONE) INAYICNNE.. Co ao oS oebe ono a dadocd coonge SHod SaaS SaUas boccns a6 o5ces 95 WWihibetish eee seca aml AU SSUODOBEOO BEES Ob CHE bas oS Saee Sanoen aousuacsacguec 96 WOO CEST ELONNS tp nIOMA se eee eo nia eee cere er come era sme ncnsiela cecicnnisetisiels=ee 96, 97 Fish Cultural Association, American, meetings of ........---.---..--------- 11, 66 BS Haake x CUPSIOM a isaato ate ei lnlaciatae 2 aiaia sate wise = wie’ crore cleo esis rteleisieterrics 11 Fischer, W. J., collections made by ..----.---:- +--+. .2---- (--- 2-27 -- --0e 19, 57 Fisheries section, National Museum..-.-.....-....---.-----..----..----.---- 55 ING NGM? Chiang Gm Dp Mcsaosasacaco cone Hoodus 6o5ca0Ge90 Sosa sheose 66bc 65 Fishes, department of, National Museum. -....----------------------+------ 56, 58 Flag made of American silk presented to Museum....-...---.-------------- 51 Flint, Dr: JnM., detail of. 5... one. oo 25 w= cre ewww ee se sees wos ene cocoa ns 38 SirrmiGGS Oo ss5 Goes os Godsoadecn DODO GonD Gotece daaceo suasosscouscodccad 52 Flint Ridge Quarry, Ohio, exploration of........------.----.-------------- 68 Flint Ridge, Licking County, Ohio, a sketch of...--...-..-----.-----+------ 851 Florida, explorations in .---.. ..---. ..--- --2--- ee ens oe eens eee cone sone = 24 Fontaine, Prof. W. M., investigations by .------------.----- ee eseeciescose 91 Food section, National Museum .-.----..-------- RA ne Ne Se Sisersc tees st 55 Foreign exchange division, work performed im -.-........-.--£.----.-------- 99 Foreign exchanges: Centers of distribution .... .----. 2-0-2202 2205 nn wenn coe enn oes oo oes 109 Receipts for. .... .-.. ---- ---- 2+ ---- cee eee pees cone cone cece ee ceeececeee 34, 101, 102 Shipping agents: .--::.---- +202 .--ceseescow cans een n ee coeene scenes = SO Ae OA 107 Transportation companies..-.---- -----++---++----++ +--+ eee eee eeeeeeee ee 34, 106 SP raTInINIMMIOUS Hae ac ca'e Se sate se. sass 2 Seaseoeeacees csiecee swueas Saan bh ath 34, 101, 104 886 INDEX. Page. Foreign ministers and Gonsuls, co-operation of........ 2... 22-2. 02e2eeeeeee 34 Foreion transmissions...2- 2.5. 3224 sec sel-oe pee ee eee aE eee 34, 101, 104 Foreman, Dr. Edward, assistant, National Museum..-....--....---......--- 55 Morest.itrees,-work On... 6:22 45.hes cee eee eee ee eee woe Meters 30 Forts, ancient, in Ogemaw County, Michigan ...........--..----..-----..--. 849 Fossils, invertebrate, department of, National Museum..................... 56, 60, 61 Franklin Institute, publications presented to ..............-...--%.-------- 43 Ereettreight on exchanges yea. san tee ae eee ere ee ee 34, 106 Free postage on Smithsonian mail matter ...............--...---- er 150 Fresh-water fish fauna of the Mississippi Valley ....-..----.....-.---...---- 24 Hanch, Edye:é&‘Co:, co-operation of 2.2." S221 ees oon ere eee eee 34, 106 G. Galapagos Islands, ‘collection from(s.- 2522053 sa3 2422s oases eee 26 Gannett, Henry, work done Dy eehs cedic. fe tose noe ee eet en eee eee 79 Garlick, Mr:;explorations! by =. c2 2-02 ce tees ee eee eee 69 Garrett, "Ensign; detailof 2 i022 22.3 soe tan enee sone see ee eee eee 38 Gass; Henry,death 0f2*= =. 522. o36.s- qos asec cee see oe ee ee 46 Gatschet, Albert S., linguistic studies of. ......-. fees SASS To tae a eee 71, 77 Gaumer, Mr., collections received from ..---.......--- BE Boome a ana er oe ooo. 25 General appendix to report for 1864-5522 ae ee ase ee ee 155 Geographical work of the United States Geological Survey .........-..----- 78 Division of the Great ‘Basin i 2.5.) Ye oe ak ee a ee 80 Division of the North Atlantic. 0.228002: \ Sosa. ees eee 78 Appalachian istrict: 3e ics 2 cc 5 te ha ele ae ieee Mee ones Net ke 79 New England districts .2.25- 05 b sso. en aseenees Same eaeen cee eee 78 Nowy. Jersey istrict :.<5 5. <35 22 ncosest oem ete nee eee eee eee 79 Division of the Pacifie’assacch hoes ac aeoues tee cee tee ee ee ae 80 Division of the South Mississippi......-.-.-.-...-.-..---.---- dale eeeiseis 79 Azvizona and: Nevada: 22 tie oe ee eee See eee Se eee 80 Missouri-and. Kansas :_2 22) 2522 a. c20 sade 6 Se ets ser oe ae eee 79 Texassee ce ia ees on eens banners aol Sao Oe eee ee ae 80 Yellowstone:National: Parks 220 cones waa ee eeee nee nee eae 80 Geography; reportion. so ccict soos cake cuss ee Sate eee ice ae ee ene arene 237 Geologicalimap of the United: States2=>-- = ae aen ee eee e eee 87 Geological Survey office of Canada, co-operation of.......-..----..--------- 35 Geological Survey, United States, report on.:.-.. -.-2-.-...-.-..---<- «----- 77 ANNUAL TEPOTUSE oss ackcu= acca ook lee oeuiniocoeeee ee see See ae aes 93 Balloting wy ose b las Ss os Sew ciate aia ata os She Se ST eT e oS ea ee 94 Chemistry 5 2-25 s5222 3 cack oo sats eon oc ae Se nee ae ee eee ee eee ee ee 91 Collections 5552 co 32) .ca) Ste stemeeete enon Sa eee ee Oe eee eee eee 95 Co-operation Of: 5520 Se yao oo AOS Ses SSA Re eae eee See ane ee eer tee 14 Mineral resources of the United States ---+-...----. 22... --+-----s5-22-2- 92 Monographat st oi k ool aes oi ee cian aperentee rs face ge Yap aect ome en a teeta 93 SEAUSUICS Sanwee (aiiacars se 2+ Se sees pa ee elec eee eee See eee eee 92 Statisticalipanersine=- ss 21.5 soca eee See ee ee eee 95 Transfer of, from National Museum building ....-........ -....-.------00- 9,10 Geolog Ye 12 -cce eames ees wins w2's + occa See Sen ene epee eee See ee oat eee 81 North: Atlanticidivisioniss <2. 2. sane k ere cers a eee Renee eee 81 New England district ......---...---.---.-.----- Sseeitee acs gees aoe emee 81 Division of ithe; NorbhyMississip pies... eareels eee nee eee eee re eee 82 Glacial district ica ss so ie oo 5522 ye eee ee anid eee eine ee erie eee eles 82 diake Superior districtaersts<=. «2-52 -\eseneaceeenosuee sacs coon eee aaens 83 INDEX. 887 Page. Geology—Continued. IRGCkyeMOUNbAIN GLVISLION 42 seers Soe ase eee ane eee eos toi csen ane cre 84 Coal-fields of the Great Sioux Reservation ..............---..-/.-.-.-.- 87 Colorad odistrict sect seen eee et oe eae se eee eneninme aie 2 sails sien sine 85 Mistrict of hepa ciilGres= soso n eae aa eee ioise cet atapeio rete afay— = alain wee 85 Montana districts a ss-)-co- iol stag PAT eer ba eee cnet yen sens SS Ooh ate 84 hWoleaniG rocks sees sae, oe oe sani sa QoS ea sree mister Nore als epeyeictsie mi 86 Yollowstonerearkvaistrict eessseac-eiecmciicer cia soieisee eee): steiner 84 SoutheMilanticndivisionsees-:- se. sees oe oaks selene) seia seine einisie mictetalainte ore = 82 App aie Ot ath CISUEIC blee nn pele eee am creel ie elaine sits Barbee so) 82 Geology.of the District of Columbia ~:~. 22--.-.---222--4-.----5 -a-5-~ c= 88 JEN Gr ae SA Se Se debebeiS seo se suds sopaiesouen Sebo sees Screnes cere: 89 Genozolchnyerteblatessa-eea eee ee ee eee ee aa eee en ee eee eerieeeiae 90 NIGTOZOIO THAI OMNIOLO Ay. code NoSSboSsee Sscoeess eHeSes Hoss coeg occ soca sede 90 TENE NOUR IRY ca66 cso ocaSaseSo0 cone code gcue ces ess aoee sasiccdicises seaciecac - 90 IEAIGHY ACG MTSE) ONT Aa 5 C666 ckaooo CaSuOd Rob oSt debounio coud Ena od cdor 89 \WGHPUETI oa 5obeccd 466546 Geaas one HeuO ceoSe SHED eEESwohoesoa0e o55r 89 Geology, departments of, National Museum .---. SEE Rare eae Senos 56, 61, 62 Others istrct oC olumbiaeessss eee sees oe setae erie ee ae 88 Georgia, geographical work in........---------------------------+-----++-- 79 Mound’explorations in 2-22 -------.-----------=---- SHEE So Ta Haas AnooE cufmbauac 68-70 (GRIST CHI Na555 ese cocks oceonon seeese ado Sens 2600 55e5 S556 ha5066 sSub dasses 96 Giddy, Davies, Smithson’s letter to -...-.---.-.---------------------+-+------- 6 Gilbert, Davies, notes relating to Smithson .-......-----.------------------ 4 Gilbert, Prof. G. K., exploration by -..----..----. ------------++---+--+--+-- 24 Thecture by------ =. 2. -cccen oan e nme en ens sone enn cee ens one cenaes 66 GEIPKCES Ol wobec conasosoodon bSadbésocccqnbe obscedcecnos vecieso asco DobeeCas 82 Gill, Prof. Theodore, report on zoology. .-..--.--------------+) -----++--++---- 583 Godding, Dr. W. W., lecture by -.--.----------------------+-+ -+---+ 2+ ---+- 67 Gooch, Dr., services of ........---------- ------ 1-- 22+ 2-22 eee eee eee renee Zee Goode, Mr. G. Brown, appointed to attend the New Orleans exhibition ...... 44,64 Assistant Director of the National Museum ...-...----. .-----.----------- 55 Goodwin, A.P., collections made by ..-..--.----.--- -------- +--+ +--+ +----+- 28, 57 Gould, Rev. J. Loomis, collections made by ---. -------------------++------- 19 Government document exchange..-.-.. ..---.--------------+---------------- 35 Governments in exchange... ..------------------ ------ -----+ --2-08 ------ 113 List of official documents.-<.-.----:.---2-- - -- Bie Ne esate ee ammo easeis 113 Receipts fOr 2225 -.-- =<. sen cae oon n-ne oe wn a as wen noes woe een ne 34, 113 Shipping agents .....-..------------ ----- +--+ 122-22 eee eee reece cece eres 112 Government exchange division, work performed in -...-.--.---------------- 100 Government transmissions .....--..-..--------- ---- --+-------++ --=-<+ --=- 34, 103, 112 Governments in exchange with the United States ....-..----..------------- 113 Grammar and dictionary of Chahta language ..-..--.----------------. ------ 76 Gray, Prof. Asa, appointed member of committee on republication of Pro- fessor Henry’s scientific writings --..-.-----------------------+------- 2 Botany of North America.......--------- --------+----+ +--+ ++---- Ses 31 Duplicates received from. ..---.---------------++ --+-----2 2 tree cere e rete 50 Member of committee on Walker prize....-..----..---------------------- 48 IEDR tooo Gots SHO BOS OS OBOBCUE SOs Son ca0 050 coo SO OES OISE A RNOC oO OIDOoSaI 7 Re POMt feces ce ean ate se ses sie Sma alee minain(esiaimin -in- noma simi xX; XE Great Basin, division of the geographical work of U. S, Geographical Survey PVH) oseSSoes mone Booeecced Codd One Sb acor Uiesou Bee Seeeeen pe Sere COlre 80 Great Britain, exchange with Government of ......-----. -----------+-+---- 36 24 Great South Bay, explorations of .... ~....----- ---20- --- 2 eee e ee teen te ences 888 : INDEX. Page. Greely relief expedition /: 2. 552.2 ssc ss eee tect eee ee eee eee 14 Green, Commander F. M., report on geography. ......-.....----...---...---. 237 Greenland} explorabions I )-2 222) oe een eee se eee eee ae 14 Guadeloupe, West Indies, the Guesde collection of antiquities in Pointe-a- TEMS) S455. a5e5 conbnd Gos S50b sim set aiginisia ctacecas cceeices see ae cece tee 731 Giianes, Consul Miguel Suares, co-operation of....-...-.-.----.------------ 107 Guatemala; collections from). 2<. ac screen ce eee eee ee 25, 26 Pantaleon, antiquities: atvscc sens. ancmes on dace tees te eee eee eee 719 Guesde collection of antiquities in Pointe-a-Pitre, Guadeloupe, West Indies. 731 Gulf iofMexico, explorationsiofis2s5--.-4e ae acre ce then tees eee eee 24 Guyot, Dr: Arnold Henry, deathvof 32.2. 223 Jame Ne eae eee eee 44 H. Hague, Arnold, geological work of ...2 22 2.2222 32.22 et-cenec ae eenaaee ee eee 84 Haidah Indian implements, collection of ----c25--).sas-- oo seen eee ee ee 19 Monograph illustrabing 225 ses oes oe ae se eee ss ae ee eee peer 20 Haidah totem posts: 072.622 st ere oe ol aoa are SIS lc mere tate tens a eed 72 Hall Prof, James.co-operationy Of. seca. eece eas eee eee ener 81 Walker-prize awarded to.22--2.-22-'-- +=0--- sage Le ait ata Meer Aa 48 Hallock) #Dr;,'servicesiO£ 32 235) sos a ce einee sae) Se eee ence ee eee eee 92 Hamburg-American Packet Company, co-operation of........ -..-..------- 34, 106 Harlow, C;:A., collections made:byso2¢ 2. 302e2 peek eos cee eee ae aoe 15 Harvard College observatory, astronomical announcements..-......-----..-- 48 Hatching forsshads sss 2s sassy-ces oo cee seiat ee ec ae ie te oa eee 95 Hawaiian Government exhibit at Boston secured for National Museum...... 28 Haydensinsion wdetatltotss-cscct sa osee see ste oon een ee eee eee eee 38 Hayden; Prot. FV, geolorical work 0f 22225 --55 cnc. a2 eee eee eee ee 84 Hazen; |General, co-operation Obese. --c-\e sone aes ee So oa Oe eee aeeeeee 9 Healy, Captain; explorations by -.---<220- 32 --2c22 see 5* sae at see eee ee 18 Heape; Charles; collections received frome. == --.- 24 a eee eee eee eee 57 Heating and lighting of Museum, Congressional appropriation for..---...-.- XVU, 151 Hemphill) Henry, exploration byjese 2 4-sce ees ae eae ee eee rue, we ed 40 Collections received frome. 32 225 S58 ss ed ose oases ens ce eee see 60 Henderson dé) Bro-,, CO-operation:0f-- -sean=- sscnee eae creer ene ee eee eee 34, 106 Henry, Protessor, Portrait Of <2. 2-< so -ctac sete eee a eee 43 Scientific writings Of 5555. 2.54 en sa eciae ee ca cee eet 2 Henry statue 25.3505 2) Ba Boe ean eek woe cele ieee Re eetee ae See eee ee Eeee 2 Expenses connected with, Congressional appropriation oe Suess _xvn, XVIII, 152 Henshaw eb We lincnisticsbudies Of aes aasnee eee ae eee eee eee eae eae 71,75 Herring & Co., eae Presented. Dyers cose eee ee eee eee ee eee 49, 50 Hilgard, Professor, donation of weights and measures..-.......---.--..----- 49 Hill; Hon. Nathaniel P.; regent: 222 3).5 5. oss 2 cose aciiae's eee eioeneees X, XI Hitchcock, Romyn, acting curator of the National Museum .....---...----- 55 Holden; Prof, Hdward'S8:, report on astronomy. .--.2ser 2s eem aa eee ere 159 Hoar Hons .George:E., repent: |. 6 sesoae sees tee eo cies sis seem eae eee x HofimangDr awed). iSOrViCes Of oJ ocho eae sees co ee eee aa eee 75 Explorations ypececcc =< -:0- 5.56. Sosa ees e eee et eles ees emo eeer 72 Holmes) Wi. H., archsolocic explorations)=-saseeseeesee eee eee eee eee 72 Honorary curator National Museum <25225,<-2ce. 3 o-ieascleeee se - eee eee 55 Sines Of jeeaseeeteeee one s sc woe Seana cee cee eeereao seein 76 Honduras; explorationsan=.< <--- - <2 s ccs cin a= neem eran sins caaccs ceeicws aewe 26 alunos re OOnical WORK IN) os maces sare a. sees aohers sess aaaiceed occas oo 83 tndexine of chemical literatareee ccc. ccs- ots Pols se-d moss, ose e wees cbacrciecuas 147 _ Of the literature of the chemical elements..........---..--------..-.----- 42 indian Lerritory, 2eolopical wOrk i. 322522 yo.) 286 oe eee ce ke iee ese 83 In SUIS explOraTON Motes) a= a2 No elas seas ace ceia. euees sane ns 71 Indiangvocabulariesscollected a2 ce- toate ten oe ee teas cose cece ewee cae | atl? Indians, North American, ethnological researches among ..--.--.-.---..----- 67 MGENI ANY CHSLOMBSION tHE. sot ioaaccraiccnec ccc bo ica eoe eae e Seeeme cue 77 Inman Steamship Company, co-operation of....-...-...-----.----.----- +--+ 34, 106 Insects, department of, National Museum ..-......-....--...---.------.----- 56, 60 Interior Department, co-operation of...... .--.-. .-----s-2e0. -22- woe = eee nee 40, 41 International cotton exhibition at New Orleans ........-.-..-..------------ 44, 63, 64 lstermationalWexe han ges cans: soe ms tee Pehle scan owe cca Spat eae cece nee 33 Congressional‘appropriation fOr: <: << S225 22 2s Sat. 5 52 .)st ese occ eae a2 Od) XVAL, Loe Government document exchange. ........-..---.--------- RSdoceueche (secu: 35 hiberality, of transportation companies: -2------ sa-<2- 2245-22. 2-4 -22eee ee 34 Eublicutility of Smithsoniantexchangess---ss--4---55--s2> eee -- 2) eee 35 RECALLS ee eee ee we ee ee Se Oa ee Se me Mio e ee eis eee es 34 PTANSMISSIONS 2 Sanne eo a1s = ee asec sa ence. clas Soe He ose eke aisacniseee cess 35 Intermationalvand'Staterexhibibionsreceee meee oe eee ene eee oe ereeaees 43, 63 Invertebrate fossils, department of, National Museum.......--.------------56, 60, 61 Paleontology, North American, report on..-.-...---....--.---...---..-...-. 563 Owe, Bealomtenll WO MN Ss s565s0 5006 csSs nooo ceGE. dons ce5ac0 Go50 O86 becok 83 MraquelmuUrGlouOualy, ses 2 2 ahisc. Soest. sae sane a ae Aa ac wen mel! esos 77 ikvin eo werol Ras ainvestigatlons Dyess ce-creeemsse eee ose science cele 83 J. jamaica colloctionastrom 4.8025 "aM choe Ae ee cst cease eee 25 DEATION Nt wi yaie-COMleChiONTTOM. aoe ens - ae 2-—siacie este se ece secon eee 27 JosdeHerbarium duplicates) trom sseae soos ee = csieee asec ees ioeisee eee ae 50 UO TEOMS Uo: Wivod Collegio smNG) [hy enosso canéed eens Sobaos odacke aséogs cnbe 19, 39, 57 Jones pDrsawWilliamsEH..collections: Dy -.2-4-4--2-eio as eee seers eee ee eee 26, 57, 60 Jordan werote Os S=> SCLVICES) Of 5-151 ae elon io celae= Senses toes 58 WE GHOEHOMS [\7isgasees cases dabeebeaeuse Lhuco seouog uses cous cebeup gooesr 24 Journal of proceedings of Board of Regents.--.-...-....-------------------- xI JORy pen i eXpPlOravlOns DY0 2-508 2 = ~~ om see ese tee semieimnlacie cee eetae= <== 27 K. Kamtchatka, explorations in ...-.. ...- 2. - 6.5200 cnen soe nnr enw ene = ee eo enne 18, 27 Kanawha Valley, mound explorations in ...........--------------.-------- 68 Kane, Mr., aid rendered by ...... ...0-- -2-b ~~ 2-23 nea e ~~ on oo = 35 Kansas-Nnglish dietionary —..-2-.c2-6= =<2-1=45)-2e4 eae eee «a= ee e==n- === 76 Kansas, geographical work of the United States Geological Survey in-.- ---. 79 Keifer, George W., collections received from ....-.....--------------------- 57 Kew (England) Botanical Gardens, collections from .....-..--.- acon aeae eee 27 Key West, explorations in.... -... ..---- --- 205 -- 2-9 en ee ween eee ones ene 24 Kidder, Dr. J. H., analyses by .... ..---- ----e-ceen 22 22 -- + 2-2 eee ne onan 37 Chemist of the United States Fish Commission --...--.-.--.---------- ee 8 WOEK GONG DY... cSee: cc -im ane an as an celemieaee meneame es <2 assem = aan nen 8 Kiefer, Mr., collections made by .... --- (eet ee ee cece ee noes cee cannes cee eee 26 Klamath dictionary .... ....2. 2000 e--eee ceen een e ees ceee ce eeee ceenes ers TT) 77 890 INDEX. Page Knox County, Ohio, mound explorations in --.....-...--.....--------.----. 6 Kodiak, Coast: Survey stations --.5.-0 s-.0-fese- eee eee ee ee eee eee 19 Kunhardt'& (Co;,co-operation Ofesce eas see ae ee nn eee eee eee 34, 106 L. habrador; explorations in 22; i s-2ssereee ees) > ce see eee Aenea ee eee 16, 39, 42 Languages of North American Indians, work on....... ...--.---.-------- .--- 75 Leach, M.L., ancient forts in Ogemaw County, Michigan.....:-....-..----- 849 Ancient mounds in Clinton County, Michigan .........-..:-----+--------- 839 ‘Lecture by James G.Swan st. 2 220 Use cee ee wee eee See enter 19 Lectares:in Museum: building 20 =- 2-5. fase aes) See a ee 11, 66 Toner lectures oes fos ise oe es Sa ee sie eS ee ee eae 11 Under the auspices of the Biographical and Anthropological Societies - ..-. 11 Letter transmitting Smithsonian report for 1884 to Congress...-...-...----- III Letters: relating to Smithson 722-22 726. is see a Sees soe ee se ee ee 3, 4,5 Liberality of transportation companies .......--.. MM Ac, WOR Nes eel ate eae 34 ihibrary) of thes Institution: 22222... 552 ee ee eee ees e eee eae eerie 37 Packages received fonies: cet ase ee oe i ee ee ee Seon eee 111 Licking County, Ohio, Flint Ridge, sketch of.-...-....--...----: .--.+.--:- 851 Liferok Smithson: 22 asks see eee sec oe eee aes aie arctan 2 Life-Saying ‘Service; co-operation Of 22 22 < 2s. em 2 ae i mee ee eee 40 Ihight-Honse Board, co-operation of 2222 2. tas a lecture, by ...-. 2202 Seine sea eee 67 SET VICOS Ee see eee Screw cyoieni a 5 hagel Ie eae pen Oe cg 39,57 Marray, Berrs.do,C0-,.co-operation. Of: 22506 +440. 2 seen ce aoe 34, 106 Museum building) need’of additional=2.2:. 2-2... 2 ee ee eee see eee 10 N. Nation, Professor, collections: made by: -2-22 250 ---e cee eee eee 27 National Academy of Sciences, meeting of.......................s---------- 11,66 National Museum, acconmtsiotess occ cuss. 2 ce aa eee XVIII Administration; ‘CivasloMGbessss- 2.5 . 2 5.3 ee eee eee 56 Assistant curators Of HO aer cei... <. 55 os does eee ee ee ee an ee en BUUGIN Gs. o. Sab seasboemaboucceta bos: 54 EerOeeed ines OleOle s=5 oon cin ssnce scence serine eleaae Saas naan wad wee cee 30, 32 Naturalists of the Eastern United States, Society of, meetings of.----..----- 66 Naval architecture section, National Museum ...--...-...----.------------- 55 Naval Observatory, appropriation for freight on exchanges..---...-----.---- 151 Co-operation of ......--.- .----5 -sne vee ne enna ooo ee eee na een ee ees nee- 39 Electric communication with-...-....-..------.----.------ -------------- 8 Navarro, Consul Juan N., co-operation of ........--------------------+----- 107, 112 Navy Department, co-operation of......--------------++-+ +++ -+-5-+---57> 38 894 INDEX. Page. Noecrologyicseces ceo s + oo Soe hata Se eta eae Seen aa Ae ae eee eee 44 Gass Honrye ac scscee soo sc eas cate oem at Soa eee sa eee eta n aee peeoans 46 Guyot; Dro Arnold Henry . 02/2225 .2 sce

= -eceee come aei- ae os eee 67 New bronswick, exchanpes with iso: 1 sence ot eee eee eee eee eee 35 New England district, geological work of the U. 8. Geological Survey in.. .. 78 Geological: work: in the. 22. t5-0 62202 sot eee cae eee eee 81 Newfoundland, exchanges witlis. 223-5225 4oc0- no yee aes eee eae 35 New Guinea, collections from 222 505 ie ewelcw as Sac ee ae ne cee eee 28, 57 New Jersey district, geographical work of the U. S. Geological Survey in. -. 78 New Mexico, ethnological explorations in........-..-...---..----.---- ----- 69, 7 Geologicaléwork:ince82 soe ssacccte ce faeces Dore see an eee eee ae eee 86 New Orleans, International Cotton Exhibition at ---.--....--.---------..--- 44, 63, 64 Executive Departmente at Sc. 32 Geo e eee ae es eee eee Jukts 150 Preparations forces.) cas sees See ace Sec eben ise eee nee ae ee eee 9, 37, 58-65 New, York; ceological worksinws =a. -iaem erie eee eee eee ee ee ee eee 89 New York and Brazil Steamship Company, co-operation of........---..----- 34, 106 New York and Mexico Steamship Company, co-operation of......--.-.--.---- 34, 106 Nicaragua explorations jim: s22-cso. scence omen eeeeeiecieeae meee One eee one 26 By Nutting; CiCr ssi ses tee ace se sae eens eee ore eee Oe eeee nieces 26 By Van Fleet; Dr. Walter. c.22.2s2 5.2 chs cea eeei te oat oe oe pee eae 26 Nichols, Dr> donations of. birds) from=---e eee eee oo eeee eee eee eee 25 Nordenskiold, Baron, collections received from ..-.....-.-..----..--------- 57 INOTRISyE. Wes ©XPLOTavlOng) Dyce eee cee ae ee eee ee eee eee eee 67-69 Death sol oo retical, Ses ee so ceee e cee scene eee eee ee eenee 68 North: América; botany, of, workion: 22-- 22 -- os asses eae see eee 31 North American ethnology, Congressional appropriation for .-....---.-.-.---- XVIII North American Indians, ethnological researches among...-. ..---.---------- 67 Mortuary customsof a5 25..- 2 i cce eee bees ete eect nae See ee aaa ae 77 North American invertebrate paleontology, bibliography of .-..--..--..-.----- 563 North American linguistics, bibliography of........---.-..--.-----------+-- rar (a North Atlantic, division of, geographical work of the U. 8S. Geological Survey 1 OR Scene Aer reheat ne Wee Reem Som oa Rone obos 78 Geological work in the. 2. 52 son tase we ere tenn sofort s eee eee ele aiee 81 North Carolina, geographical work in..-.-.-. -..- aihiciars alates Se ae ene eae renee 79 North!German Wloyd; co-operation 0f 2-55 2 = mn. see pa noise el ee eles ea 34, 106 North Mississippi, division of the, geological eas IMnythe: ss. 2 52055-s0 see es 82 North! PacificwexploraniOns in the esses iae ete atte eal elate = elena ate rate 18 Nova Scotia, exchanges with ..........-...-- SoS aS sak ewtee ep eects hae eee 30 Nushagak, ‘signal @mation: at... --.. 02222. sone efoeae mo beeen eae ne eee 19 Natting;:@:-C. colectionsimade bys. 2 222 soc seat nese atic ee eee 26 O. Obarrio, Consul Melchor, co-operation of... -..- .--. .2..sscece> ea- ene cowene 107 Qelrichs & Co., co-operation Of ... ... . 52. sc222 cs-ceeceeeewes -r=7 Saeeeeen 34, 106 INDEX. 895 Page. Office of United States Geological Survey, transfer of, from National Museum i "TEES A oe SAR Soe tpt oe ce ess on ty (oA ae a A a 9,10 Office work of the Bureau of Ethnology .........-2.---.-..2.. 0222-22. econ. 73 Officesin Smithsonian building 32207.!2.2 .odece ace esa fan2.3 dad cine eco eee se 8 Official publications of the United States, list of .............22. 222.222... 113 Ogemaw County, Michigan, ancient forts in ............-.2.2.22.--22-ee0e- 849 Ohio, Butler County, mound explorations in .5-.2. 5.222522... ce oo cece ce 68 Licking County, Flint Ridge, sketch of ...............--. Betsey ih oem ors 851 Miami County, earthworks and mounds in ............---.----.----- veer 873 Old Colony Railroad Company, liberality of ..._-. eae erasers ater aie leoe = 96 OldtProvadencecollectrons:maceamies tno. seen eee eee cee eae Q5 Orervon, ceolomecaliw ork: ANG 25 cx 5055 na yeceea Seige Sows ga nen bacehaedess 86 LAN aIBLICIOS PLONALOUS MNS Whe ris, otsis ob sk sec obs week eas» eee eee eek 72 Oregon and California, explorations in............---..-- SEUSS ie, Gh tere oN 20 LBS7 STEN GEC 2S CS SRS Np eR ea gee es eee ERA eal aden EN Ne ORE OPT TAR OER EE 3 20 EVR One Oats ONATIOS cere c1A4 tek atime Sec oe RPGS et Neen ie ae 20 Bye Orectitin@ tvs asee sts Nn Duo te ee bee ele eta go. cel beams 20 Ye beaGNs pe lupe en Oe ooo se ee tens st sess soticuas Mateise Plsecethe snigene sce 20 By; kowmsend Charles. sae os fs 22) os clan cts cave cronytin Semin Seleic ae cemioton, gece 20 Ormnitholozists;;Union; Ameyican . =< 2cia< sessee'-'io Seats ce Sees cece ee eee asses 51 Osseo nmlight GiChONATY >= 55520836 soe 2c ss orneie cece Se See Gace eee Se eeLe 76 |e Pacific, division of the, geographical work of the U S. Geological Survey II. Goedicace Seco alse SesGlocse Hose Ghee Header oad Se ppGassoepoL aie SE aese 80 Raciiicrdistrichot, ceolosicaliworksimithe)aeese esse ass eciaeiet eee seine 85 Pacific Mail Steamship Company, co-operation of -................--.-....- 34, 106 eackandgh-olss ASSISbANCE Ofs o> aac n Ma aes actecein noise tae icicree Seis sees 37 Painted feeoede SSB DAa EAS HO aya eI ReSeo en Seen Reo sue soda es SERe Gabba onoaed& 72 Paleo-botany investigations by the United States Geological Survey ......... 90 Paleontological work of the United States Geological Survey..-....--..-.-- 89 Goenozolcsnyertvebrabese naa s= 2 sees cose sone rre see toe one eerste eee 90 IMeSOZ01C ep aleOntol Opes mace smears nee siros Seana selteseeeeepiee oer 90 IP aleo=DOtanyeere stares ste ars ae ences seer ees ee ee ease ei eeme ee 90 iPaleoz olen Veruevrabesace accuses a2 -ec hace om bisa = Cow maison ane tieeien ae 89 WER IS RS) osdbee Sad dads saon dosage daadSonsestanacode Sdoase Gceaoneeces 89 Paleontology, North American invertebrate, report on. ----..------.--------- 563 Paleozoic invertebrates, investigations by the U. S. Geological Survey on... 89 Palmer, Dr. Edward, collections made by .....--------.-------------------- 60 Dee nln) hy Sa eaee oo coset mo Reeeed Ocoee aoe saoo soecetne Seorose ger Ur) Preparing of collections ae fF otace adardeticenivne Rew oe sees oe tae oS Se eae 10 Palmer; Joseph, work-room facilities for ..--..........-.-.--...------------ 10 Panama Railroad Company, co-operation of..........---..-----------.----- 34, 106 Pantaleon, Guatemala, antiquities at.......--....----..--- Aiese ee ce sees 719 Parker, Peter, assistant, National Museum...........--.....-.------------- 56 Paka, Die, IR, MEeSCMR eS Coos ka esos cqodos Cao SSs cou boasesenee Osedes seek x ReseNaMOM Of as TELCNt. -—- Jom - sem eee oriee = enw om en onl = miner eee XI, 6 Patton, Vickers & Co., co-operation of ..-... .<---- «-----.+.----2----+----- == 34, 106 Paving sidewalk, Congressional appropriation for ...--.-----.--------.----- XVH, 151 Peale, Dr. A. C., work on mineral springs of the United States.....--.....- 84 Pendulum experiments in the Smithsonian building ..-..-..------------.---- 9 Pennsylvania, geological work in.........--.---- --+- +--+ -----+ +222 220+ -+-- 89 Pennsylvania Railroad Company, co-operation of ...-..-.------------------- 34 896 INDEX. Page. Peru, collections from.....-..---- -----. ------ cece es eee eee ee ene eee eee eee: 26, 27 Phelps, William W., regent... .--. 22. < 4 s.-c5- cee cocenne eens co aene fecnans X, xI Philadelphia, electrical exhibition at .........-.-----------------+---------- 43 Philosophical Society of Washington, bulletins of...--...-----.------------- 30 Physical geology, department of, National Museum.....-.-..---.-----------. 56, 61 Physics, bibliography of......---. ---- .--- ------ e-- 208 eo eens een one = eee 487 15) 0d CONRAN Ren oee bees Sabo cose co CaSsomcccemSOcee com bess opscues dagcc56c 433 Pickering, Prof. Edward C., on telegraphic astronomical announcements...-. 48 Pictographs, collection of.....-.--------- wu lePaces aartentdig Seu Meek Sep a pau 72 SUNG B2ICt) hese ReS SSR RIESE ae Sees Bao Sear sess boooos sHUaSooA eon eAeoaodicc 74 Pilling, James C., bibliography of North American linguistics ...----...---- 75 Pim; Forwood & Co.,co-operation.0f -< 22-05 <22eeje=e nal e eae ee . 34, 41, 106 Plants, department of, National Museum. ......-....----------- ------------ 56, 61 Received from Prof. Asa Gray -.---.-------- sith sid cw Sede Die ia thls SG teetettets 50 Poey, Professor, collections made by..-.--. .----------+--+-----+ -------+---+- 25 Pointe-a-Pitre, Guadeloupe, West Indies, the Guesde collection of antiquities Th eS eM ls Sen it Ue Bee OS bg Ga nticd SOOO Se SU oe Bene ue aoSosoac 731 Polaris expedition, expenditures .........--.------ ------ --2+ -- 2-0 eee eee XVIII Polynesia, transmission of exchanges to0.......--.-----------------+-+---++-- 105 Pombo, Consul Lino de, co-operation of. -.. 2... 22s gee. conn cope -3- alone 107, 112 Porter, Rev. Dr. Noah, regent...---..---.------ ---- --++ eo 2222 coos ee ee ee ee 113 Record division of exchange office ..-..------.-----------+-----+-+---25---- 99 Record of scientific progress for 1884...-.------------------+ +2225 22-0777 157 INTERLREIO TUL Toa se te Se Se ca eT Se a COS ae A 677 INSOMGMY OS o eeh ee eee 2 oe Snie oie alain feria ne Vee tec aeinae eater 159 @hemisgry ee ys. ee reese) were sone a nes tien oie ian cel op ener des 491 Geography .....------ Blunt Ries Sy ae Wine ae ee oer ene Onaoe acest 237 Meteorolorytssc cas + “SSS a reo ss oases 38 NavallObservatory: 2. 0--<~--ce6 -ose = ar =" = 42> 9 > 2a oer aoe 39 S. Mis. 83 ——57 898 INDEX. Page. Relations of the Smithsonian to other bodies—Continued. ina Railroad and steamboat lines and other corporations -.-.............-..-- 41 State and international exhibitions: ~~~. 2-2. .o-n6 seoacnar ceaaaeeae ne 43 Treasury, Department): 2. .cacs eae nea ser eeee ee aoe eee ee eee 39 WarDepartment: 6 o.2 <5 6 Soc cee cae miscicesice ss oicee a ateee mine ec SEE Ee eee 39 Renshawe, John H., topographical work of.....-.-.-:. -2 22-2221 cece ec neee 80 Re-payment on account of Henry statue........-...----.-.-- bE Sctn a ibs temas 2 Of -dutyon: the: Sevres vase-s2- fos te tan Soe cle eee mee See eee eee eee 152 Reportiof Board of Rerentsicc ats ccc asses scenes ee ae een eee eee I Of committee of the American Association for the Advancement of Science onjindexing (chemical viterature! <5. =e oe eee ee ee 147 Ofiexeentive: committee. s-ee ss. ie 6 nee ee eee eae Se eisaes arava tet XIII, XV Of Professor Baird (to Board-of Repentse ot co- mores eel ae ee 1 On -National!Museams se. 2a. osc cee ecco ces anos DeSean eet eee 52 On ‘the. Bureanutof Ethnology, 2 cas sons oe eee close seine eee eee eee 67 On United States Fish Commission...-..--- save sistsiet een cpe eee aye eee 95 Reportonanthropology: 222 2.)- sisee ee os aa eas eae Soe a eee ee ean ee 677 Onrastronomy. meta etree Tent eT 19 Silliman, Prof. Benjamin, donation by.-------------++-+-7---t rrr 49 Silliman, Prof. Benjamin, sr., statue of .----. -------------e0rr0 tt 48, 49 Singleton, Hon. Otho R., regent....--- ---------2---2 0c oro n rr X, XI Sioux Reservation, geological survey of the ..-----------------rtss rrr 87 Smith, Charles, explorations by ---- ...----5=-------25 277277275 68 Smith, Charles M., sketch of Flint Ridge, Licking County, Obio..---------- 851 Smith, Consul Isaac 'T., co-operation of -------------+----s7rrtterrtee 107 Swith, Mrs. Erminnie A., linguistic work of..-.-------------27r e707 07 n07 7 900 INDEX. Page. Smith, Mr.;/servicesjof:< +22 >*sonss ete sae oe eee eae eee aa Os'sGnceee chs 39 Smith, William R., plants deposited in Museum...-...---.-...--...2-2- <<. 61 Smithsony Jamesse cs = 222 - o- yon oe eee ee ee ee oe ee eT oe 2 Letter to Dayies, Gilbert .-.22.( sceecl te teen Sees Sos ee ee 5 etherssrelating. tO 2. = 5 /-<- 2 piece sh eee age eee ree ee ee ees 3, 4,5 TST, OF sre Pe oie ate eho mete la sk aera cate Sd © lee iste etre lane Se teal ere) pt I See 2 Smithson, fund, condition Offic. 2.625 - Sas 2 eee ie cede = one seem eet eet XV SILC SOmTa ny fowl Clin y= seeps e eee er tara eo el ele eee ei etenet eee eee ee 8 Chemicallaboratory - 25-2). o-c.e.se sc SESS 7s corel a St Re Sie a See ee enero 9 Conpressional appropriations - 2-2 -(s— nee see eee ee ee 8 ‘Electrical connections. <.. 3.22. 32st << cies user cates eae a anaes 8,9 PIPe=proonin he: ces pis ieee as eee ioe ee tee ae ee Cee ees 8 Hithing Up iol TOOMS .- 2. sa a-seeee eee ee eee ee eet ee ee 8 IOC AM Ii ina Geo emo Boao e Poed dca too ea sauo Oden seat soce ie aeaoe a awe 8 Rooms occupied by the Coast and Geodetic Survey..-.-.-......-.--.. ot ee 9 ARIMOBSOL VAC Cee el ele oer t= aasictsielale non oe sis sine te eae ae ee Ree ReeSIee eee 8 WABI ES Entei em ABR BAE aes OPS coe a ARO Ae Seme 5 Oba See So anarta ee Mode 9 Smithsonian contributions to knowledget. 2. 222. = 2-222 esse c eee | eae ee eee 28, 29 Pre-historic fishing, by Dr. Charles "Rateeesce== 20 6ase ene ae eee 29 Smithsonian exchanges, TepOrt Ones eee en eee easenee senate aie erage 99 Smithsonian institution, Teporbion =) senses ee ae ele eee eee ees 1 Smithsonian library, packages received for.) 22-2 -- 4222s cos eees eens 111 Smithsonian mail matter free of postage.............--2-.---- 222-2 -2- eee eee 150 Society of American Taxidermists, meeting of ......-.........-.-..-- eaeee 66 Society of Naturalists of the Eastern United States, meetings of ..-.-...-.--- 66 Sonorous sands... - ai sce se hk ck cs cicie seid sale Seas Sots pincite se Beeyee= 47 Soundings made by steamer Albatross-<-....=-...-.-----2---- /--2----ses- : 25 Seath America, explorations Io2--is5.4 4. ace ate one ea Cee eee ee 26 0) 1G AS ae On San aerar eG Ree an coerce ced Me Sole es io 26 By Crawdord,, Or. Wallan Ne sooo eta Se sae caeie are ee eee eee 27 Galapagos Islands) -2 22 So ce sion eee se aeee oe eer ete hos ee eee 26 By Jones, Dr Williamcl < tee d(sce cee ese Sct eae eke Be ei ee eee 26, 57 By) Wieter, Mr... soles ec. deco eee eo ee aac eee ee ieee 26 Bye Nation, Professor srs fan cacti Sac toe sta areca ee tel See ee Ee 27 POTUR Se. 2 tied atinisrsc shoe nie aoa aso Santen aele ass eae eae EEE es eer 26, 27 By steamer: Shenandoah. 2215. J -mce cess feb eee ae ee hae ee 27 Straitsiof Magellan 2. cit ssccse esos eee See ane eee Eee oe ee Dy / POrTA els UeLOn. omen aaa winnie sees ee ee Seimicaaae sama. 27 South Atlantic division, geological work in the .-.....--...........2...-... 82 South Kensington Museum, London, collections received from ..........-.-- 27 South Mississippi, division of the, geographical work of the United States Geological Survey;in thes. .23 ccs aoa ey eC eee ee ee 79 Souther xpositionyab 0 wisville; 22 aceon soo aoe ee eee ae 63 Specialidonations;tothelinstitution, — 5.22 seessse se eee ae eee eee 48 Spies,-Consul (Hrancis co-operation Ola. :--2/- seh sineae se eee oeeeee ae eee 107 Spinney, Joseph S.,.ee-oneration Of. 5.22% eee see oeee eee ee eee 34, 106 Standard set of weights and measures presented to Institution ..-......._._. 49 State-and internationalexhibitions .=-— + = ssy shos nga 4 Eee eee 43, 63 Statistical papers of the United States Geological Sure eyes Soke sese ase 95 Work of the United States Geological Survey ....................:...-..- 92 Steamboat lines, eo-operation Of<- 2. . 2.22 2 252-5 oa oe oe eee Sees 41 Steamer Adams; explorationssbyiesen-=s.- =~ scseas cones eee eee 19, 38 Albatross. collectionsimadel bytecea..- == =- = see eee eee eee een a eee 60 Explorations) bys. 4-20 8-0 Sasser eens oc)s s ieee) eee eee ores ae eee ee 24 Nomndings made Wye vesos ten once ae «henna ee te ee ee ee 25 INDEX. 901 ; Page. Buemmer Alert,,explorations DY = 20. 2os5 .-0.-s veccas cece Jo a\cees ob ocee eon lek 14 cue eexplotautOng DYict. (oan t whe sone cees ate dee cen. ose Ty, 14 Cormanyex plorahiOns: DY sn. <5 sco cee ok tue ees to nnwecene ooo elle ecdek 18 Onalaska, vex plOrahiOA Dy =- 20.00 sous oscee ose ten ban as scab ue sok. cu ceeeck 18 LP SEND, Cbg NOES OVaTs POD ee a aeten hs AS Pc te ee a nee 19, 38 BuoHnAndoah exploraulOnnpy sas ooo Se ee | cies Aa oo Fetes Oh ood ne omen 27 Mets rex PLOTALIOUND yl see mee enero GSE ee lee) TERY oe 14 Steamship line for Brazil, Texas, Florida, and Nassau, New Providence, co- CHE NUTIN, Cit eA CaaS aa SNES SS eels pee is Pegs rare raked ean) Sem 34, 106 Stearns, Dr. R. E. C., adjunct curator, National Museum...............----. 56, 59 enllec ious Made iDy. > -ec as). c cot Ss tie cet ecole Sece Le pooLe see tae 20 Stejneger, Dr. Leonard, assistant, National Museum..-.-....--....--...----. 55 BES ELT OTS ea A ree sna a ee Re ee Ee Ne Ba PEL ov ge 18, 27, 39 SLevyensous ames explorations yn ass neeas eee een eee ee oe eee eee 20, 69 Stowaris COnsul: Johns co-operavion Of. 42222-2526. suo ee Jee a eee 107 Sronomllages, collectionitrem <2 <326 525. jac u- so Ses wate Pence oss enpeenee 69 Stoupy. ieht. Georre mM... explorations Dy ss. <0 jcc. <2. Ses 225% oe eae oe 18 piraics oteMearellan, collections from: ..3,.222 .s8S2e<: ease e- scenes eae 2nee 2 SLU CEO hep ICLO CRAP US saree setae ens aces cae ee eee Se yer og ee en 74 STs Fim ERA OO a ee etetare rane SoS bare Sloe ame aod sais eee eee uel wee eee 73 SurpicalyAssociation, American, meetings Of.--.25 2.22252. 22-2--- 2-25. se = 2 66 SUEVOVOlES Ueles meme perks ech ere tee tee ented Se OL Oh ee eg rere 78,79 Swan poames) Gracollectionssbyrc- a cease fans cine wee see Sonia aieen es eee 19, 57 NEC CUUTOND Yarns teary sore ae Sic iar sien x IRE, weenie Se eclee Se aes cement eer 19 Monorraphe prepared: Dyn a4 tee ce ise ten Sam =a eae ince eee ae See ere cweeioe 20 Report on explorations and collections in the Queen Charlotte’s Islands, BribisheColumipia ys 225255 osec ass aoe cc eeese eee clans ee seine ratio Snae 137 Jb agorehajahlor collections received from. 5- oo a0 eee een ee ae 27 Takaka C onsale Samco, co-operabiony Of se asey- 2) sane eee ee eee ee 107 Taxidermists, American, Society, of, meetings Of.-222.-2-.....5--+-----4-se- 66 ‘Meyyleye. JD ye 185 Weg ROAVIOBO bane oamaaeoeaseeor bar boT aaeD Umass ae soso Asad 52 Telegraphic astronomical announcements ..---...-...-----...-----------.--- 48 Telegraph instrument lent to the Philadelphia electrical exhibition......... 48, 48 Deposited with the Institution by Mr. S. Vail ...-......-...-----.--...--- 48 Telephone connection with the fish pond ..-~- -- 5... 52-. 2222 ---42- .-<4-- 22 39 Mermessce sro eooTa phiealan OTK Maser ees == ait ainsiac = aoe ee ee ena ee 79 Rerraydelunues oscollectionsitrom)-o. s-m2 5. cs sascnsinss coon 22-8 sss eel 27 Texas, geographical work of the United Gites Geological Survey in -...-.--- 80 GealoctCrlemOn ies n ec c) Se acideel tse ea se eee se eae ee 90 DEAE Goo ORO NS eae bh eo so osee ac soc eidcos cooSeO osasoc caer see shoe 71 Textile industry section, National Museum. .-..--...-..----..:-------------- 55 Thing, L. H., assisted in mound explorations ...---..--. SAR CS eee ase 68, 69 Thomas, Prof. Cyrus, in charge of exploration work .........-------------- 67 Thompson, Prof. A. H., topographical work of ....-.-.--..--..----- --------- 79 Thompson, Gilbert, work done by ...--..------------ ---------+-----++-+--- 79, 80 Thame IGOR <5 soseeso cone aM eseoaedoek esos boSees SoeE aw se eet cas Bon oe 11 Toorn, W. H. van den, consul, co-operation of.-....-.---------------------- 112 Topographical work of the United States Geological Survey ---------------- 78 MOteHisPOStB=- 2 56 -\ < soc. c oo n= Same oo ew ene anar == enon nse nea a ee ners 72 Townsend, Charles H., collections ade Oh Aone DEBS M BAe. seo ssec OMe Aas 20 Transactions of the ntiere pologioal Society of Washington...--.----------- 30 902 INDEX. Page. Transter of collections':. - so-so. cs5 eke scene seca ee Cae eee eee 40 Congressional appropriation for: ses. 22 2s26 neo e ee ee ee XVH, 151 Of offices of United States Geological Survey from Museum building .-.---. 9,10 Of system of telegraphic astronomical announcements ...-.....-..-....... 48 ‘Eransmissions Of exchanges): 22 5.2 seo-2 5s feo eee 2 ae a eines ae ee OA nO pant metal Domesticiexchanges’.2. 22 2.ss0 5.5 Mk eee chee et ee 110 Moreigmexchan ges). <2 Joel ve sae e mae cin ses meee ne ee ee 104 Government exchanges ...--..-. Bis din shore aoe Ee Eee eae Reese Soe eee 112 Transportation companies granting free freight. ----. ite Pat ee nee eee ee 34, 106 ‘Eransportation ofifish <=. Sots seas osetia aoe cee ee eee 96 Treasury Department, co-operation of. .5--2 22... .5- =i. 8-cce = a2 tae eee 39 Trill, C. By, drawings made*by).5.-.3:-3 25-26-12 e on ie ee eee 29 Trout-ergs; distribution ofv 3. stses soc Aes ee 96 True, Frederick W., curator, National Museum..........---...---. -2-..---- 55, 56, 57 Turner, Lucien M., collections received from-- 2 = 2225-5 .s-2--- -o = Sees eee 57, 60 Explorations Dy)./-2205 oi22.4 ta cenisscdseacacts ee see ee eee eee eee 16, 39, 42 U. Wike; Henry, crayonof Professor Henry, by- = 2-2-3422 se eee 43 Portraits of regents drawn Dy <5 ose. co cee en lee oe